Manual de Theos Corona

THEOS Corona
System Commands
Reference
First Edition: September, 2002

Copyright 1995, 1996, 1998, 2002 by THEOS Software Corporation.
All rights reserved.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The soft-
ware may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Information in this document is subject to
change. No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or translated into any language in any
form by any means without the written permission of THEOS Software Corporation. Printed in the United States of
America.
THEOS Software Corporation
1801 Oakland Boulevard, Suite 315
Walnut Creek, CA 94596-7000
Telephone: 925-935-1118
Fax: 925-935-1177
E-mail: sales@theos-software.com
WWW: http://www.theos-software.com
THEOS
and the THEOS logo are registered trademarks of THEOS Software Corporation. Microsoft
, Windows
,
Windows 95
and Windows NT
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Table of Contents
3
Introducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Documentati on Conventi ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
At t ach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Calculat or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Cat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CDPlayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ChDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ClassGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Compar e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Compr ess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CopyFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Creat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CRLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Dat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Decr ypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
DialNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
EmailChk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EmailDel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
EmailGet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
EmailPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Encr ypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
FileList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
FileManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
FileType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
For ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
FTP Scr ipt File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Get File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Img. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Inst all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
IXDiag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Keyboar d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Keywor d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Killfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
LineEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
LogName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Lowcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
MakeBoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
MkDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Mor e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Net Int er act ive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Net ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Net Br owse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Net Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Net Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Net Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Net Shar e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Net Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5
Net Ser ver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Net St ar t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Net St op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Net IPCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Net ser vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Net Ter m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Not es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
NsLookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Passwor d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pat ch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Peek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
POP3Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Pr int er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Put File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
PWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Quot e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Remot e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Rename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Rest or e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
RMCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
RmDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Rout e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Scr ipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
SendMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Spooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
St art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
6
St op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
SUMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
SysEd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Sysgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
TAr chive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
TBackup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
TBr owse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Ter minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
THEO+COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
TheoMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
TIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Using TIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Tr aceRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Tr ee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
TWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
ALIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
BARCODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
CHANGE_AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
CHECK_PRINTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
DEFAULT_UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
FILE_RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
FONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
LIST_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
NEW_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
PICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
PRINT_NEXT_PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
PRINT_RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
PRINT_TXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
PRINT_WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
REC_PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
SELECT_AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
SETPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
7
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
TEXT_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
UnEr ase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
UnInst all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Unload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Unnumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
UnZip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Upcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
VNC Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Wher eIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Which . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Who. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
WhoAmI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
WhoIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
wBypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
wClear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
wClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
wClose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
wColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
wFinish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
wFr ame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
wInvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
wMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
wMove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
wMsgBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
wOpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
wRefr esh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
wRemove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
wRest or e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
wSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
wSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
wSt at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
wSwit ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
wTit le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
WinWr it e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Wor dCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Zip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Appendices
A Contacti ng THEOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
8
List of Tables
9
1 RAM Disk Names and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2 Color Codes & Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3 Disk Densit y For mat Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4 Floppy Disk For mat s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5 FTP Command-Line Edit Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
6 LINEEDIT Command Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7 LINEEDIT Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8 ANSI For ms Cont r ol Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
9 Regular Expression Cont r ol Char act er Specificat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
10 Regular Expression Met achar act er s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
11 More Command Browse Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
12 Patch Video Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13 Patch Expr ession Oper at or s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
14 Unit of Measur ement Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
10
Introduction 11
Introduction
This manual descr ibes each of t he commands pr ovided wit h t he THEOS 32
oper at ing syst em. They are ar r anged in alphabet ical or der by t hier com-
mand names.
Commands ar e execut ed by ent er ing a command line when t he CSI
pr ompt s you. Refer t o Chapt er 3 Entering Commands of t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Operat ing Syst em Refer ence, for a descr ipt ion of t his
pr ocess and t he feat ur es of t he oper at ing syst em available when ent er ing
commands.
Commands may also be execut ed by using a command line in an EXEC
language pr ogr am. Refer t o Chapt er 11 EXEC Job Control Language of t he
THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence, for a descr ipt ion of
t he EXEC language and it s capabilit ies.
Refer t o Documentation Conventions for infor mat ion about t ypogr aphic con-
vent ions used her e and t hr oughout t his manual.
12 Documentat ion Convent ions
Documentation Conventions
Thr oughout t his manual, synt ax is used t hat looks like:
MAILBOX user
MAILBOX user t ext
MAILBOX user file
MAILBOX ( option
LIST file ( FILES opt ion
These symbols ar e used t o show t he cor r ect synt ax for t yping t he com-
mand.
BOLD Wor ds and char act er s shown capit alized and in boldface must
be ent er ed exact ly as shown.
italics It alicized wor ds show par amet er s supplied by you.
FILELIST Underlined por t ions of a wor d indicat e t he minimum spelling
allowed for abbr eviat ions of t he wor d.
An ellipsis indicat es t hat t he preceding t erm or t er ms may be
r epeat ed several t imes.
(Enter) Specific keys on t he keyboar d ar e shown wit h a Key Caps
font .
These st andar ds ar e used in t he for mal definit ions of t he synt ax of a com-
mand or feat ur e and in t he descr ipt ive t ext of t he feat ur e. The descr ipt ive
t ext also uses t he following t ypogr aphic convent ions t o ident ify t he var ious
it ems descr ibed.
File names File names t hat appear in t ext ar e always shown in small caps.
For inst ance, t he SYSTEM.THEOS32.DEVNAMES file.
Definitions A significant wor d or t er m t hat is being defined in t he t ext is
shown in boldface it alics. For inst ance: The comma nd na me
is t he name of t he pr ogr am you want t o execut e.
Literal text Text appear ing in an example t hat is also refer r ed t o in t he
t ext descr ipt ion of t he example is shown wit h a differ ent t ype-
face. For inst ance: When a r eport is abor t ed, t he spooler pr int s
t he message **** A B O R T **** and per for ms a for m-feed.
Commands 13
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
1 Commands
Account Command
The Account command maint ains or displays user account s.
Operation For all modes t he drive par amet er is opt ional. It t ells t he Account command
which dr ive t o find t he /THEOS/CONFIG/ACCOUNT.BIN file. By default , Account
uses t he S dr ive. Specify anot her dr ive when you want t o maint ain t he
account s on anot her disk, such as your emer gency boot disket t e.
Mode 1Invokes t he int er act ive mode of t he Account command. This
mode is ident ical t o t he Setup Account command which is described in t he
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Inst allat ion and S etup Guide.
Mode 2This is a command-line mode t hat allows you t o delet e an exist -
ing account definit ion, t o list all of t he exist ing account s on t he console or
pr int er or t o mer ge t he account definit ions fr om anot her syst ems account
configurat ion file. For a complet e descript ion of t his mode, r efer t o Deleting
Accounts on page 17, Listing Accounts on page 18 and Importing Accounts
on page 19.
Mode 3This is a command-line mode t hat allows you t o add a new
account definit ion. Only t he basic component s of an account can be defined
wit h t his mode by using one or mor e of t he add-opt ions descr ibed on page
15. To specify or change all of t he envir onment swit ches or envir onment
var iables, you must use t he int er act ive mode of t he command.
1 ACCOUNT drive
2 ACCOUNT drive ( option
3 ACCOUNT drive ( ADD name add-opt ions
drive opt ional disk dr ive code
name account name
opt ion DELETE name PRTnn
IDENT SORT
IMPORT filename TYPE
add-opt ions COPY name PROMPT prompt-text
FULLNAME name SUBDIR directory
HOME directory SYNONYM name
PASSWORD password USER name
PRIVLEV nn
14 Account
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options DELETE account Delet es an exist ing account definit ion. Specify t he
account name immediat ely following t he DELETE keywor d.
>account ( delete accnts
Caut ion: If an account owns any files do not delet e it unless it
has a synonym account name defined. If you delet e t he account
you might or phan t he files owned by t hat account . See
Delet ing Account s on page 17.
IDENT Use wit h t he PRTnn or TYPE opt ion t o r equest t hat t he account
list ing be in account number sequence. This is t he default
sequence for account list ings. For a descr ipt ion of t he account
list ing display, r efer t o Listing Accounts on page 18.
>account ( type ident
IMPORT filename Mer ges t he account definit ions in filename wit h t he cur -
r ent ly defined definit ions on t his syst em. Any duplicat e
account s names ar e r eplaced wit h t he account definit ions in
filename.
Typically, filename is an account definit ion file from anot her
THEOS syst em, possibly an older ver sion. For pr e-Cor ona sys-
t ems, t he account definit ion file is /SYSTEM.THEOS32.ACCOUNT:S;
for Corona syst ems, t he account definit ion file is in /THEOS/CON-
FIG/ACCOUNT.BIN:S.
PRTnn List s all of t he exist ing account s on t he pr int er. nn specifies
which at t ached pr int er t o use and is in t he r ange 164. The
opt ions IDENT or SORT may be used in combinat ion wit h t his
opt ion. When neit her is used, t he account s ar e list ed in
account number sequence.
The alt er nat e keywords PRINT and PRINTER may be used
inst ead of PRT.
SORT Used wit h t he PRTnn or TYPE opt ion t o r equest t hat t he
account list ing is in account name sequence. For a descr ipt ion
of t he account list ing display, r efer t o Listing Accounts on page
18.
>account ( printer24 sort
TYPE List s all of t he exist ing account s on t he console. The opt ions
IDENT or SORT may be used in combinat ion wit h t his opt ion.
When neit her is used, t he account s ar e list ed in account num-
ber sequence. Refer t o Listing Accounts on page 18.
Account 15
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Add Options COPY acct-name Specifies t hat t he new account definit ion will default t o
t he swit ches and environment var iables defined for t he
account acct-name specified. When t he acct -name exist s t he
set t ings for t he PROMPT prompt-string, CSI case mode, SUBDIR
directory, PRIVLEV value, Decimal is comma, Language, and
Wor k dr ive ar e copied fr om t he acct-name definit ion t o t his
new account definit ion. Also, any user -defined var iables speci-
fied in t he cur r ent definit ion of acct-name ar e copied t o t his
new account definit ion.
When t his opt ion is not used, t he swit ches and envir onment
variables defined for t he SYSTEM account ar e used as t he
default values for t his new account definit ion.
FULLNAME name The name is a fr ee for mat name t hat will be assigned t o
t he FullName envir onment var iable when a user logs ont o t his
account .
HOME directory Ent er t he dir ect or y name t hat you want any user t o use
as t heir home dir ect or y. This is not necessar ily t he st ar t ing
or init ial cur r ent wor king dir ect or y, which is set by t he SUBDIR
directory opt ion. The HOME dir ect or y is t he quick access dir ec-
t ory t hat can be quickly set as t he cur r ent working dir ect or y by
mer ely ent er ing t he CD command. It is also set as t he Home
envir onment var iable which can be used by applicat ions for
t heir own pur poses.
PASSWORD password Specifies t he passwor d for t he account . The pass-
wor d is specified immediat ely following t he PASSWORD key-
wor d. When t his opt ion is not used t he new account will have
no passwor d.
>acc ( add jeff password "giraffe"
For a descript ion of t he passwor d field, it s limit at ions and it s
usage, refer t o Account Name and Number on page 97 in t he
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference.
PRIVLEV value Specifies t he pr ivilege level for t he new account . Pr ivilege
levels ar e in t he r ange 09. When t his opt ion is not used a pr iv-
ilege level of 1 is assigned t o t he account .
>acc ( add jeff privlev 3
For a descript ion of t he pr ivlev field, it s limit at ions and it s
usage, refer t o Privilege Level on page 99.
16 Account
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PROMPT prompt-st ring Specifies t he CSI command pr ompt for t he new
account . When t his opt ion is not used t he cur r ent ly defined
prompt is used for t he new account .
To specify a pr ompt st r ing t hat cont ains lower case charact ers
or special punct uat ion char act er s, sur r ound t he pr ompt st r ing
wit h a pair of double quot at ion mar ks. To use t he pr ompt
st r ing var iables descr ibed in on page 107 of t he THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Reference, pr ecede each
backslant char act er wit h an ext r a backslant char act er .
>account ( add rachel prompt "\\a\\g"
For mor e infor mat ion about pr ompt st r ings, r efer t o t he
prompt envir onment var iables descr ibed on page 107 of t he
THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence.
SUBDIR direct ory Specifies t he st ar t ing or curr ent wor king dir ect or y for
t he account . When t his opt ion is not used t he account uses t he
HOME directory as it s cur r ent wor king dir ect or y.
The dir ect ory specified her e does not have t o exist at t his t ime.
However , it should exist when t he account is next used by
Logon. If t he dir ect or y does not exist when you log ont o t his
account t he HOME directory is set t o t he r oot .
>acc ( add susan password "lion" subdir /private:s
SYNONYM name Specifies t he synonym account name for t he new
account . The synonym account name is specified immediat ely
following t he SYNONYM keywor d. The synonym account must
be an exist ing account name. The new account is assigned t he
same account number as t he synonym account .
When t his opt ion is not used t he new account is assigned t he
next account number available.
>acc ( add master synonym system privlev 5
For a descr ipt ion of t he synonym field and it s usage, r efer t o
Account Name and Number on page 97.
USER name This opt ion set s t he UserName envir onment var iable t o name,
which is used by some ut ilit ies and applicat ions t o find any
user -specific configurat ions t hat may be defined. For a descr ip-
t ion of USER names, r efer t o t he UserName descr ipt ion in t he
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference.
Account 17
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Refer t o Appendix D: System Files in t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Oper-
ating S ystem Reference for a descr ipt ion of t he file Account.bin.
The Account command can also be invoked via t he Setup command.
Adding
Accounts
You can add new account s using eit her t he command-line mode (Mode 3) or
t he int er act ive mode. (You can also add new account s by impor t ing t hem
fr om anot her syst ems account file. See Impor t ing Account s on page 19.)
Which met hod you choose depends upon your needs. The command-line
met hod only allows you t o define some of t he pr oper t ies of t he new
account . However , because t hey ar e t he most impor t ant pr oper t ies, it may
be sufficient for most uses.
The int er act ive met hod allows you t o define all of t he at t r ibut es of t he new
account including passwor d policies specific t o t he account , an account
descr ipt ion field, t he var ious syst em swit ches, sear ch sequence, command
pat h, default file-t ype, and any user -defined var iables. For a descr ipt ion of
t his met hod r efer t o t he Setup Account command descr ibed in t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Operat ing Syst em Inst allat ion and Set up Guide.
Deleting
Accounts
Account definit ions can be delet ed wit h t he command-line opt ion DELETE
account or by using t he int er act ive mode of t he Account command and using
t he Remove but t on. Befor e delet ing an account name fir st check t o see if
t her e ar e any synonym account s defined for it (list t he account s sor t ed by
account number ). If t he account does not have a synonym account name
defined check t o see if t her e ar e any files owned by t he account . Remember
t o check any r emovable disks. DO NOT DELETE an account name t hat
does not have any synonyms and owns files.
When delet ing an account name t hat owns files, eit her cr eat e a synonym
account name or use t he Change command t o change t he owner ship of t he
files t o anot her account t hat will not be delet ed. Access t o files owned by a
delet ed account can be difficult .
18 Account
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Listing
Accounts
All of t he account s defined can be list ed on t he console or on any of t he
at t ached pr int er s.
>account (type
>account (prt32 sort
By default , t he account list ing is sort ed in account number sequence
(IDENT). This gr oups all synonym account s t oget her wit h t he pr imar y
account for t he id. You can use t he SORT opt ion t o sor t t he account list ing
by account name sequence.
>account (type
>account (type sort
Account User Synonym Prv Password
SYSTEM 0 9
BACKUPS 0 SYSTEM 5
BASIC 0 SYSTEM 5
INCLUDES 0 SYSTEM 5
MAIL 0 SYSTEM 5
PRIVATE 1 5 Yes
JOHN 1 PRIVATE 5 Yes
TEST 2 2
TESTIT 2 TEST 2
Account User Synonym Prv Password
BACKUPS 0 SYSTEM 5
BASIC 0 SYSTEM 5
INCLUDES 0 SYSTEM 5
JOHN 1 PRIVATE 5 Yes
MAIL 0 SYSTEM 5
PRIVATE 1 5 Yes
SYSTEM 0 9
TEST 2 2
TESTIT 2 TEST 2
Account 19
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Importing
Accounts
The impor t opt ion can be used t o impor t t he account ing st r uct ure fr om
anot her THEOS syst em, eit her a Cor ona syst em or an older THEOS 32,
Ver sion 4.x syst em. For inst ance, if you have just inst alled a new Cor ona
syst em at a sit e t hat had an exist ing THEOS 32 syst em, you can copy t he
account ing st r uct ure fr om t hat exist ing syst em by fir st copying it t o a
floppy:
>copy system.theos32.account f
Then, put t hat floppy in t he new syst em and:
>account (import /system.theos32.account:f
To impor t t he account ing st r uct ur e fr om an exist ing Cor ona syst em, copy
t hat file t o a floppy:
>copyfile /theos/config/account.bin /account.bin:f
>account (import /account.bin:f
When import ing an account ing st r uct ur e, r emember t hat t he import ed
account ing file will be mer ged wit h t he exist ing account s. If t her e ar e any
duplicat e account names in t he t wo files only t he impor t ed definit ion will
exist aft er impor t ing t he file.
Cautions Do not delet e an account name if t hat account has any files and t he
account does not have a synonym account name alr eady defined.
Restrictions The Account command may be used by only one user at a t ime.
The Account command may only be execut ed when you ar e logged ont o t he
SYSTEM account (user number 0).
The Account command requir es a privilege level of five.
Do not edit or change t he /THEOS/CONFIG/ACCOUNT.BIN file wit h any pr ogr am
ot her t han t his Account command.
See also Logon, Password, Set, Show, Start, Sysgen
20 Account
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Att ach 21
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attach Command
This command associat es logical device names such as PRINTER wit h physical device dr iv-
ers and specifies t he at t achment opt ions for a device.
Syst em commands and applicat ion pr ogr ams per for m input and out put t o devices by speci-
fying a logical device name. A l ogi ca l d evi ce na me is mer ely a st andar d name t hat any
pr ogr am can use t o communicat e wit h a device such as a disk dr ive, t ape dr ive, pr int er , con-
sole or gener al communicat ions device. The oper at ing syst em t akes t his r equest fr om t he
pr ogr am and passes it on t o t he physical device dr iver t hat is cur r ent ly associat ed wit h t he
part icular logical device name.
For inst ance, a pr int er might be connect ed t o t he fir st ser ial por t on t he comput er . When a
pr ogr am want s t o print somet hing on t hat pr int er , it out put s dat a t o t he logical device name
PRT. The oper at ing syst em passes t he dat a t o t he SIO1 physical device dr iver which, in t ur n,
passes it on t o t he pr int er connect ed t o t he fir st ser ial por t .
The Attach command is t he pr imar y met hod of changing t he associat ion of logical device
names wit h physical device dr iver s. Ot her met hods include Start and Sysgen.
1 ATTACH logical physical ( options
2 ATTACH logical ( options
3 ATTACH logical
4 ATTACH
logical logical device name
CON console
PRTnn pr int er
COMnn com
TAPEn t ape
AZ disk
physical device dr ive name as defined in /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT:S
opt ions ALF DTR NOHOLD PZ XPC
Bnnnnnn En NP PUBLIC
BIDIR ETX Onnn QUEUE=a
Cnnn FFnnn Pnnn STPnnn
COPIES=nn HOLD PE Vnnn
COPY=nn Lnnn PN Wn
CTS LFnnn PO XON
22 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1At t aches t he logical device name logical t o t he physical device
dr iver physical, wit h opt ions. The following examples show t he at t achment
of t he second har d disk dr ive t o logical drive let t er A, t he at t achment of t he
COM1 logical device t o t he t hir d ser ial por t , wit h opt ions and t he at t ach-
ment of logical TAPE2 t o a 250MB st reaming t ape drive.
>attach a disk2
>attach com sio3 (b19200 w8 e2
>attach tape2 tape1
Mode 2Changes t he oper at ing par amet er s or opt ions of t he logical
device name logical wit hout changing it s assignment t o it s physical device
dr iver .
The following examples show t he r eat t achment of COM1 wit h a change in
t he specified baud r at e and t he r eat t achment of t he console wit h a change
t o t he line lengt h.
>attach com (b38400
>attach con (l132
Mode 3Det aches or disassociat es t he logical device dr iver logical fr om
it s cur r ent physical device dr iver . The following examples show t he
det achment of t he pr int er 4 device and disk dr ive G.
>attach prt4
>attach g
You cannot det ach t he console or disk dr ive S.
The physical device driver is unloaded fr om memor y if no ot her logical
device is associat ed wit h it by t his user or any ot her user on t he syst em.
Mode 4Displays t he cur r ent ly at t ached devices for t his user .
This display is always out put t o t he st andar d out put device and t hus can
be r edir ect ed t o a file or anot her device:
>attach > attach.output:f
When t he st andar r d out put device is a gr aphics console, a windowed for m
is used t o display t he at t ached devices. If it is a t ext -only console t hen t he
t it le is displayed in r ever se video and line gr aphics ar e used t o box t he col-
umns. The line graphics charact ers can be suppr essed if t he LINEGRAPH
envir onment var iable is set t o N (see Environment Variables on page 111).
Att ach 23
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When t he st andar d out put device is not t he console, t he t it le, column head-
ings and line graphics are not out put .
The Device displayed is t he fir st name or synonym name found in t he
/THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT:S file t hat mat ches t he Physical par amet er s.
For a descr ipt ion of t his file, r efer t o Appendix D: System Files in t he
Options ALF Applies t o pr int er at t achment s only. Specifies t hat t he pr int er
will per for m an aut omat ic line-feed upon r eceipt of a car r iage
r et ur n charact er. Nor mally THEOS appends a line-feed t o a
car r iage r et ur n when sent t o a pr int er. This opt ion t ells
THEOS t o not append t he line-feed because t he print er will do
t hat aut omat ically.
Bnnnnnn Specifies t he baud r at e (ser ial devices only). Valid baud r at es
ar e dependent upon t he physical device dr iver and ar e limit ed
t o t he following values: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600,
4800, 7200, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800 and 115200.
BIDIR Indicat es t hat bidir ect ional flow cont r ol is desir ed. May only be
used on ser ial devices and not all device dr iver s suppor t t his
feat ur e.
Nor mally flow cont r ol r efers t o t he t r ansmission of charact ers
fr om t he comput er t o t he per ipher al device. When t he BIDIR
opt ion is specified, t he flow cont r ol also applies t o t he r eceipt of
dat a fr om t he per ipher al. For inst ance, a BIDIR wit h XON
handshaking means t hat t he device dr iver will send an XOFF
t o t he per ipher al when it is not able t o accept mor e char act er s
and an XON when it is r eady again.
This opt ion is used in conjunct ion wit h t he CTS, DTR, ETX or
XON opt ions.
24 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cnnn Applies t o console and pr int er at t achment s only. Specifies t he
class code for input and out put t r anslat ion for t he console or
print er . For an explanat ion of class codes, r efer t o Console
Class Codes on page 69.
CTS Specifies CTS har dwar e handshaking (ser ial devices only). The
driver will use t he DTR (Dat a Ter minal Ready) signal t o know
when t he per ipher al device is r eady t o accept anot her char ac-
t er .
DTR Specifies DTR hardwar e handshaking (serial devices only). It s
similar t o CTS handshaking except t hat t he dr iver monit or s
t he DTR (Dat a Ter minal Ready) signal.
En Specifies t he handshaking pr ot ocol for flow cont r ol (ser ial
devices only).
ETX Specifies ETX/ACK soft war e handshaking (ser ial devices
only). The device dr iver sends blocks of char act er s. Aft er a pr e-
defined number of char act er s ar e t r ansmit t ed, an ETX (End of
Tr ansmission) code is sent and t he dr iver wait s for t he per iph-
er al t o r espond wit h an ACK (Acknowledge) code.
FFnnn Applies t o console and nonslave pr int er at t achment s only.
Specifies t he t ime in milliseconds t o delay t ransmission aft er a
FF (for m-feed), IL (inser t line), DL (delet e line), EOS (er ase t o
end of screen) or EOL (er ase t o end of line) code is sent t o t he
console or pr int er .
In gener al, t his opt ion is used only when E0 is specified and
when t he device is connect ed via a non-int elligent ser ial por t .
Lnnn Applies t o console and pr int er at t achment s only. Specifies t he
displayable line lengt h for t he per ipher al device. The default
line lengt h value is 80.
Enable Meaning
E0 Disables flow cont r ol.
E1 Synonym t o DTR opt ion.
E2 Synonym t o XON opt ion.
E3 Synonym t o ETX opt ion.
E4 Synonym t o CTS opt ion.
E5 Synonym t o XPC opt ion. PC Ter m soft war e hand-
shaking. Similar t o XON/XOFF handshaking
except t hat scan codes 103 and 101 ar e used t o
enable/disable t r ansmission.
Att ach 25
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The line-lengt h value for pr int er s may be any value in t he
r ange 1254.
When at t aching a console t he line lengt h specified is used in
conjunct ion wit h t he page size t o det er mine t he char act er size
used. See Console Scr een Sizes on page 72 of t he THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Reference.
To change t he line lengt h of a session on t he main console, use
t he Session command.
LFnnn Applies t o console and nonsalve pr int er at t achment s only.
Specifies t he t ime in milliseconds t o delay t r ansmission aft er a
LF (line-feed) is sent t o t he console or pr int er .
In gener al, t his opt ion is used only when E0 is specified and
when t he device is connect ed via a non-int elligent ser ial por t .
NP Specifies t hat no par it y gener at ion or checking is per for med on
dat a t r ansmit t ed (ser ial devices only). Synonymous wit h t he
PN opt ion. This is t he default par it y for ser ial devices.
Onnn Applies t o pr int er at t achment s only. Specifies t he number of
overflow lines for t he device. Over flow lines ar e t he lines
bet ween t he last pr int able line on a page and t he fir st pr int -
able line on t he next page. This value is used in combinat ion
wit h t he page lengt h specified t o det er mine t he number of
lines fr om one page t o t he next .
The device driver count s each line of t ext t r ansmit t ed. When a
FF code is t o be sent , t he device dr iver sends line-feed charac-
t ers inst ead. Line-feeds ar e t r ansmit t ed unt il t he page lengt h
plus over flow count is r eached.
For inst ance, a pr int er at t ached wit h P5 O1 means t hat t here
ar e six lines on each page. This at t achment would be appr o-
pr iat e for pr int ing one-inch labels. If t hr ee lines are pr int ed
followed by a FF, t he device dr iver will send t hr ee line-feed
char act er s inst ead of t he FF code.
This opt ion is normally only used when t he per ipher al device
does not support for m-feed cont r ols.
Pnnn Applies t o console and pr int er at t achment s only. Specifies t he
displayable page lengt h for t he per ipheral device. The default
page lengt h value for pr int er s is 58; for consoles it is 24.
26 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The page lengt h value for print er s may be any value in t he
r ange 1254.
When at t aching a console t he page lengt h specified is used in
conjunct ion wit h t he line lengt h t o det er mine t he char act er
size used. See Console Scr een Sizes on page 72 of t he THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Reference.
To change t he page lengt h of a session on t he main console, use
t he Session command.
PE Specifies t hat even parit y is used (ser ial devices only).
PN Specifies t hat no par it y is used (ser ial devices only). This is t he
default par it y for ser ial devices.
PO Specifies t hat odd par it y is used (ser ial devices only).
PUBLIC Specifies t hat t he at t achment of t his device is t o be public and
available t o ot her users. Devices at t ached as PUBLIC ar e only
available t o ot her users when t hey log ont o t he syst em fr om
t he Logon please pr ompt . See Logoff on page 335. That is, a
user t hat is alr eady logged ont o an account will not have access
t o a newly at t ached public device. They must logoff and logon
t o get access t o t he new device.
A publicly at t ached device cannot be r eat t ached. To r eat t ach a
public device you must fir st det ach it and all ot her user s must
be logged off or st opped.
PZ Specifies t hat zer o parit y is used (ser ial devices only).
STPnnn Applies t o floppy disk devices only. Specifies t he t r ack-t o-t r ack
st ep delay t ime in milliseconds.
Vnnn Applies t o VDI devices only and specifies t he VDI device dr iver
t o use. See At t aching VDI Gr aphics on page 38.
Wn Specifies t he dat a wor d lengt h (ser ial devices only). Wor d
lengt hs may be eit her W7 or W8. W7 is t he default word lengt h
for ser ial devices.
XON Specifies XON/XOFF soft war e handshaking (ser ial devices
only). The device dr iver monit or s incoming char act er s fr om t he
per ipher al. Receipt of an XOFF char act er (0x13) means t hat
t he per ipher al is busy and cannot r eceive any char act er s.
Receipt of an XON char act er (0x11) means t hat t he per ipher al
is r eady t o r eceive anot her char act er .
Att ach 27
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If t he device is a console wit h a PC Ter m class code specified,
t hen an XON r equest is int er pr et ed as an XPC r equest .
XPC Ident ical t o t he XON opt ion except t hat it applies t o PC Ter m
consoles. Specifying XPC when t he device is not a PC Ter m
console is aut omat ically t ranslat ed t o an XON r equest . The
XPCON char act er has a value of 0x65 and t he XPCOFF char-
act er is 0x67.
Spooler
Options
The following opt ions may be used when at t aching a pr int er t o t he Spooler.
These opt ions specify how subsequent repor t s sent t o t his pr int er will be
handled by t he pr int er spooler . They do not affect r epor t s alr eady sent t o
t he pr int er spooler .
COPIES=nn Specifies t he number of copies t o pr int for each r epor t .
COPY=nn Synonymous wit h t he COPIES=nn opt ion.
nn Synonymous wit h t he COPIES=nn opt ion.
HOLD Repor t s pr int ed ar e held and not er ased.
NOHOLD Aft er a r epor t is pr int ed it is er ased.
QUEUE=a Specifies t he queue let t er t hat is assigned t o subsequent
r epor t s. The queue let t er a is always int er pr et ed as an upper -
case queue ident ifier.
QUEUE=$a Specifies t he queue let t er t hat is assigned t o subsequent
r epor t s. The queue let t er a is always int er pr et ed as an lower -
case queue ident ifier or as one of t he 12 special char act er
queues.
a Synonymous wit h t he QUEUE=a opt ion. To designat e a lower -
case queue let t er you must enclose it in quot at ion mar ks.
Ther e ar e 64 possible single-char act ers queues:
Pr evious ver sions of t he spooler suppor t ed only t he fir st 26 queues. To pr o-
vide compat ibilit y wit h pr ogr ams and procedur es designed for pr evious
versions of t he oper at ing syst em, queue specificat ions default t o t he upper -
case queue let t ers.
A Z 26 for ms/queues
a z 26 for ms/queues
# $ % & * + - < = > ^ ~ 12 for ms/queues
28 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To specify one of t he lowercase queue let t er s you must enclose t he queue
wit hin quot at ion mar ks. The 12 special char act er queues may be specified
wit hout quot at ion mar ks. For inst ance:
>attach prt2 spooler (a ; Refers to queue A
>attach prt2 (queue=x ; Refers to queue X
>attach prt2 (% ; Refers to queue %
To specify one of t he lowercase queue let t er s you must eit her enclose t he
let t er in quot at ion mar ks or use t he special synt ax QUEUE=$queue.
>attach prt2 ("a" ; Refers to queue a
>attach prt2 (queue=$x ; Refers to queue x
>attach prt2 (queue=$$ ; Refers to queue $
When in doubt about how a queue specificat ion will be int er pr et ed always
use quot es and t hen specify t he desir ed charact er wit h t he desir ed case.
For addit ional infor mat ion about cont r olling t he pr int er spooler, r efer t o
Spooler and t o t he sect ion Print Spooler in t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S yst em Reference.
Attaching
Consoles
Your console is init ially at t ached via t he Sysgen configur at ion or fr om a
Start command issued fr om anot her console or user . You cannot det ach
your own console.
The Attach command can be used t o change t he at t achment of your console,
eit her t o anot her device or mer ely changing one or mor e of t he at t achment
opt ions. For inst ance:
>attach con (c94
Be car eful when changing cer t ain console at t achment par amet er s such as
baud r at e, wor d lengt h and par it y because you might change t o a set t ing
t hat does not allow you t o communicat e wit h t he comput er. If t hat hap-
pens, you will have t o go t o anot her t er minal and st op and r est ar t your
user , or you may have t o r eboot t he comput er .
The class code is ver y impor t ant when at t aching a console. It cont r ols bot h
how informat ion is displayed on t he screen and how keyboard char act er s
ar e int er pr et ed.
To change t he page or line lengt h of a session on t he main console, use t he
Session command.
Att ach 29
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching
Printers
THEOS allows each user t o have as many as 64 pr int er s at t ached (PRT1
t hr ough PRT64). Pr int er s may be at t ached as privat e devices, public
devices, spooled pr int er s and slave pr int er s.
When at t aching a pr int er you should specify a class code. A pr int er class
code t ells THEOS how t o t r anslat e t he var ious font at t r ibut e r equest s such
as bold and it alic. It also defines t he t r anslat ions for gr aphic and int er na-
t ional char act er set s.
A pr int er class code can define a pr int er set up st r ing. This is a sequence of
char act er s t hat init ializes t he pr int er . This st r ing is sent t o t he pr int er by
Attach when it is fir st at t ached. If t he pr int er is not r eady (powered off,
unplugged or off-line), Attach will display a message for appr oximat ely 10
seconds as it wait s for t he pr int er t o become ready. If it is not r eady at t he
end of t his t ime, t he set up st r ing is not sent but t he pr int er will be
at t ached.
Attaching Printers to the Spooler
To at t ach a public or privat e print er , use commands such as:
>attach prt3 hslp2 (hplaser p60 l80
or
>attach prt48 hslp3 (epson public
To at t ach a spooled pr int er t he pr int er spooler must be st ar t ed (see Sys-
gen on page 591 or Spooler on page 571). If t he spooler is st ar t ed, a
pr int er may be at t ached t o it by using a command like:
>attach prt8 spooler
or
>attach prt50 spooler (l132 hold copies=2 b
Remember , at t aching a print er t o t he spooler associat es a logical name
wit h t he pr int er spooler . The physical pr int er at t achment t o t he spooler is
cont r olled by which pr int er s wer e publicly at t ached at t he t ime t hat t he
pr int er spooler was st ar t ed.
Attaching Slave Printers
A slave print er is a pr int er t hat is physically connect ed t o your console. It
is usable only as a pr ivat e pr int er because your console is always a pr ivat e
device. To at t ach a slave pr int er, use a command like:
>attach prt6 con (epson
30 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching Remote Network Printers
If your syst em is connect ed t o a local area net work (LAN) and one or more
of t he ot her comput er s on t he LAN have a pr int er connect ed and at t ached,
your syst em may be able t o use t hat r emot e pr int er . What det er mines t his
usabilit y is whet her or not t he ot her comput er has it s print er ser ver
st ar t ed and whet her or not your syst em has configur ed names for t he con-
nect ion t o t he r emot e pr int er .
If t he ot her syst em is a THEOS syst em, it s pr int er ser ver is Print Net . If
t he ot her syst em is a Windows syst em, it s pr int er ser ver is eit her Pr int Net
or Gut enber g. On t his comput er you must use t he Setup Net command and
t hen configur e eit her t he PrtNet Client or t he Gutenberg Client. For infor ma-
t ion about t hese set ups, r efer t o THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating
S yst em Inst allation and S etup Guide.
To make an at t achment t o a net wor k pr int er , t he physical name t hat you
use is a name like PRTNET1, PRTNET2, etc. or GUTENB1, GUTENB2, et c.
Which names you use depends upon which client was configur ed in t he
set up for t his syst em.
>attach prt40 gutenb1
When at t aching a net wor k pr int er , do not specify t he class code. Let t he
definit ion of t he physical name define t he class code.
Att ach 31
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching
Disks
Physical disk dr ives may only be at t ached t o logical disk dr ive let t ers AZ.
Logical dr ive S is always at t ached as t he syst em disk and cannot be
changed wit h t his command. Use t he System command descr ibed on page
593 t o r eat t ach t he syst em disk.
By convent ion, t he dr iver let t er assignment s ar e:
DosDiskA floppy: A and B
DosDiskC har d dr ive: C, D, etc.
THEOS floppy: F and G
Ram disk: M
CD Rom: R
Boot ed dr ive: S
Ot her THEOS har d drives: ot her let t er s
However , you may use any dr ive assignment s you want .
Most disk dr ives are at t ached when t he syst em is boot ed, depending upon
t he configur at ion defined wit h Setup Sysgen. Dr ives at t ached at boot t ime
ar e PUBLIC dr ives and ever y user t hat logs on t o t he syst em will have
t hose dr ives at t ached and available for usage.
Attaching Hard Disk Drives
The only opt ion available when at t aching a har d disk dr ive is t he PUBLIC
opt ion. Har d disk dr ive at t achment s ar e nor mally perfor med dur ing
syst em boot up due t o specificat ions in t he Sysgen (see page 591).
Befor e a hard disk can be used for t he first t ime it must be for mat t ed.
Refer t o t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Installat ion and
S et up Guide for infor mat ion about disk for mat t ing and par t it ioning.
Attaching Floppy Disk Drives
The only opt ions available when at t aching a floppy disk dr ive ar e PUBLIC
and STPnnn. Floppy disk dr ive at t achment s ar e also nor mally per formed
dur ing syst em boot up due t o specificat ions in t he Sysgen command.
To pr event access at t empt s t o a publicly at t ached floppy disk dr ive t hat
has no disk mount ed in it , be sur e t o omit t he floppy disk dr ive let t er fr om
t he default sear ch sequence. See t he SEARCH environment variable
descr ipt ion in t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference.
32 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching DOSDiskA Floppy Disk Drives
A DOSDiskA drive is one of t he Inst allable File Syst ems (IFS) available
wit h Cor ona. It is a disket t e dr ive t hat cont ains a disket t e format t ed wit h
a DOS or Windows file syst em. A single disket t e drive may be at t ached as
bot h a dr ive cont aining a THEOS file syst em (4GB) and a DOS file syst em.
>attach f floppy1
>attach a dosdiska
In t he above example, bot h dr ive at t achment s r efer t o t he same physical
disket t e drive. When dr ive code F is r efer enced, t he disket t e in t he dr ive
must have a THEOS file syst em. Similar ly, when dr ive code A is r efer-
enced t he disket t e in t he dr ive must have a DOS or Windows file syst em.
Attaching DOSDiskC Disk Drives
Similar t o DOSDiskA dr ives, t he DOSDiskC dr ive is an IFS. It is a har d
dr ive or dr ive par t it ion t hat was format t ed wit h a DOS or Windows file
syst em. On a syst em t hat can boot eit her THEOS or Windows, t he boot
dr ive has t wo disk par t it ions. One is for mat t ed wit h a THEOS file syst em
and t he ot her par t it ion is for mat t ed wit h a Windows file syst em.
The DOSDiskC physical device name refer s t o t he boot disks DOS or Win-
dows par t it ion. In a dual-boot syst em, you could access t he Windows par t i-
t ion by at t aching t he drive:
>attach c dosdiskc
Once it is at t ached, you can access t he dr ive in t he same manner t hat you
would access it if it cont ained a THEOS file syst em. If your syst em has
addit ional dr ives t hat ar e for mat t ed wit h DOS or Windows file syst em you
can at t ach t hem using ot her DOSDiskC dr ive names. The /THEOS/CON-
FIG/DEVNAMES.TXT file defines t wo addit ional DOSDiskC dr ive names:
DOSDISKD and DOSDISKE.
Aft er an DOSDiskC dr ive is at t ached (or DOSDiskD or DOSDiskE), it can
be used like any ot her disk dr ive. Wit h DOSDiskA or DOSDiskC at t ach-
ment s you can copy files fr om or t wo a DOS-for mat t ed disket t e or har d
disk par t it ion. You can per for m dir ect or y list ings of t hose dr ives, etc.
Att ach 33
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching RAM Disk Drives
A RAM disk is a pseudo-disk t hat is act ually an ar ea of memory t hat is
t reat ed as a ver y fast access disk dr ive. A RAM disk is at t ached and used
like any ot her disk dr ive.
To at t ach a RAM disk, use one of t he physical device names in t he
/THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT file t hat indicat e it is a RAM disk. The specific
name used det er mines t he physical size or capacit y of t he RAM disk.
You cannot at t ach a RAM disk t hat is lar ger t han available memor y, and
you should not at t ach a RAM disk t hat uses so much memor y t hat it pr e-
vent s user s fr om execut ing t heir pr ogr ams.
RAM disks, when at t ached, ar e aut omat ically for mat t ed and init ialized
as an empt y disk dr ive. Once at t ached t hey can be r efor mat t ed, labeled,
clear ed, or have t heir main dir ect or y r esized wit h t he Disk command
descr ibed on page 173.
Since a RAM disk is only a pseudo-disk, do not use it for long-t er m st or age
because it s cont ent s ar e lost whenever t he syst em is reboot ed.
RAM Disk Name Size RAM Disk Name Size
RAM64K 64KB RAM8MB 8MB
RAM1MB 1MB RAM128MB 128MB
RAM1536K 1.5MB RAM160MB 160MB
RAM4MB 4MB
Table 1: RAM Disk Names and Sizes
34 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching Image Disk Drives
An image disk, as descr ibed on page 124 of t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5
Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence, is a pseudo-disk t hat is act ually a file on one
of t he cur r ent ly at t ached disk dr ives. THEOS suppor t s as many as eight
image dr ives (IMAGE1, IMAGE2, ..., IMAGE8). To at t ach an image dr ive, use
a command like:
>attach i image2
Any dr ive let t er (ot her t han S) can be used as t he logical dr ive name and it
may be at t ached wit h t he PUBLIC opt ion.
When an image dr ive is at t ached, t he Attach command fir st looks t o see if it
can find a file named DISK.IMAGEn wher e t he IMAGEn mat ches t he device
name used. If it can find t hat file, it uses it as t he image dr ive. When it
does not find t he file it asks you for t he image file name:
File Name. You must ent er a file name. This name is used t o find or cr eat e
a file on an exist ing at t ached dr ive t hat cont ains t he image dr ive cont ent s.
Be car eful t o use a name t hat is not an exist ing file name unless it is t he
name of an exist ing image dr ive file. If you expect t o be using t his image
dr ive many t imes use t he name DISK.IMAGEn wher e n is t he number of t his
image dr ive at t achment . If t he file exist s, Attach uses it as t he image dr ive
and does not change it s cont ent s.
If t he file is not found you must specify t he file size using one of t he t hr ee
following met hods.
Att ach 35
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Size MB. Ent er a value here t o cr eat e an image dr ive wit h a capacit y mea-
sur ed in megabyt es.
Size GB. Ent er a value her e t o cr eat e an image dr ive wit h a capacit y mea-
sur ed in gigabyt es.
Size cylinders. Use t hese t hr ee field if you want t o cr eat e an image dr ive
t hat has t he same capacit y as some r eal disk dr ive. For inst ance, if t he
image dr ive will be used t o hold a copy of a floppy disket t e you would spec-
ify t hat it has 80 cylinder s, 2 heads and 36 sect or s. This image dr ive could
t hen be used t o backup fr om or t o a r eal disket t e.
File System. Choose t he file syst em for t he image dr ive. A 4GB syst em
must be used if t he image dr ive will be used as a copy of a disket t e. In gen-
er al, except for disket t e images, you should only use a 4GB file syst em on
an image dr ive if t he image dr ive file will be shar ed wit h a THEOS 32 Ver -
sion 4.x syst em. An LFS file syst em pr ovides more t han just lar ge files and
dr ives. It also has dynamic main dir ect or y size and dynamic libr ar y sizes.
You may also specify t he image dr ive file name on t he Attach command
line:
>attach i example.img:a
If t he file does not exist , Attach r esponds wit h t he same for m as above but
t he file name is alr eady filled in wit h t he name t hat you specified on t he
command line.
Aft er an image dr ive is at t ached, it can be used like any ot her disk dr ive.
Attaching Remote Network Drives
If your syst em is connect ed t o a local ar ea net wor k (LAN) your syst em may
be able t o use dir ect or ies and files on t hat r emot e syst em. What det er -
mines t his usabilit y is whet her or not t he ot her comput er has given per -
mission t o access it s file syst em and defined a shar e name for a dir ect or y
on t hat file syst em.
When t her e is a shar e name t o a dir ect or y on a remot e file syst em you can
at t ach a dr ive let t er t o it by using UNC synt ax:
>attach x //REMOTE-COMPUTER-NAME/SHARE-NAME
If you do not know t he name of t he r emot e comput er t hen use t he Net
Browse command t o find all of t he comput ers t hat you can cur r ent ly access
on t he net wor k.
36 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching CD-ROM Drives
CD-ROM dr ives ar e accessed using t he CDROM Inst allable File Syst em
and t hey ar e at t ached similar t o har d disk dr ives.
>attach r cdrom1 (public
Attaching
Tapes
THEOS allows each user t o have as many as four t ape dr ives at t ached at
one t ime (TAPE1, TAPE2, TAPE3 and TAPE4). The only opt ion available
when at t aching a t ape dr ive is t he PUBLIC opt ion. For inst ance:
>attach tape tape1 (public
Befor e a t ape can be used for t he fir st t ime it should be init ialized. Refer t o
Tape on page 597 for infor mat ion about t ape init ializat ion. (TArchive
r equires manual t ape init ializat ion; TBackup per forms aut omat ic init ial-
izat ion pr ior t o cr eat ing a new backup.)
Attaching COM
Ports
A COM device is a gener al pur pose, bidirect ional communicat ions por t . It
is nor mally a ser ial por t on t he comput er but it may be a par allel por t .
THEOS allows each user t o have as many as 16 communicat ions devices
(COM1 t hr ough COM16).
To at t ach a communicat ions device use a command like:
>attach com multi2 (b38400 w8 cts pe
Com and Console the Same Device
In some sit uat ions it is desir able t o at t ach a logical COM device t o t he
same physical por t used by your console. This occur s when you are using
THEO+COM or ScanTer m t o be a user on a remot e THEOS syst em, and
you need t o t ransfer files bet ween t he t wo syst ems. To per for m t his t ype of
at t achment use t he command:
>attach com con
This at t aches t he logical device name COM1 t o t he same por t used by your
console and it does not change any of t he exist ing set t ings used by t he con-
sole. For inst ance, t he baud r at e, wor d lengt h, par it y, etc. r emain
unchanged.
When using t his t ype of at t achment , t he oper at ion of t he com por t will
depend upon t he COM=CON Default Bypass set t ing in t he syst em configur a-
t ion file. Refer t o t he Sysgen command for a descr ipt ion of t his set t ing.
Att ach 37
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Self Testing Communications
In many cases a communicat ions device is used t o communicat e wit h
anot her r emot e comput er syst em. To facilit at e t est ing of pr ogr ams using
t his t ype of r emot e access, THEOS pr ovides a special device dr iver for per -
for ming self-t est ing. That is, t est ing of t he communicat ions by communi-
cat ing wit h anot her user on t he syst em. This device has four names of
SELF1 t hr ough SELF4 and t hey operat e in pair s.
For inst ance, a pair of progr ams t hat ar e int ended t o communicat e
bet ween t wo THEOS syst ems via a COM por t can be t est ed on a single
comput er syst em by using t wo user s on t he syst em. The first user would
use an at t achment like:
>attach com1 self1
The second user on t he same syst em would use an at t achment like:
>attach com1 self2
Differ ent logical names could be used on each at t achment and differ ent
opt ions could be specified. The impor t ant feat ur e of t hese at t achment s is
t hat one user is at t ached t o SELF1 and t he ot her is at t ached t o SELF2.
These t wo physical devices communicat e wit h each ot her on t he same
syst em. The physical devices SELF3 and SELF4 for m anot her pair of
devices t hat communicat e wit h each ot her on t he syst em. Any dat a t rans-
mit t ed by t he fir st user t o SELF1 will be r eceived by t he ot her user on
SELF2, and vice versa.
38 Attach
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attaching VDI
Graphics
A VDI or Vir t ual Device Int er face device is a peripher al capable of display-
ing gr aphics. The main console can be used as a VDI device and also some
pr int er s. Some PC Ter m t er minals can also be used as VDI devices. Each
user may have as many as four VDI devices at t ached at one t ime (VDI1,
VDI2, VDI3 and VDI4).
To at t ach your console as a VDI device, use a command like
>attach vdi con
or
>attach vdi3 con (v200
To at t ach a pr int er as a VDI device, use a command like
>attach vdi2 prt (v216
or
>attach vdi4 sio3 (b38400 w8 cts EPSON2
Notes Except for t he console and t he opt ional slave pr int er , all ot her pr ivat e
devices ar e det ached when you log off and all publicly at t ached devices ar e
r eat t ached when you log on. See Logoff on page 335.
The logical devices PRT1, COM1, TAPE1 and VDI1 can all be specified as
PRT, COM, TAPE and VDI r espect ively.
Defaults Ther e ar e no built -in default opt ions for an at t achment . Any default s used
by t he Attach command ar e defined in t he DEVNAMES.TXT file for t he physical
device being at t ached. For a descr ipt ion of t his file see Appendix D: Sys-
tem Files, /Theos/Config Directory, Devnames.txt on page 211 of t he
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference.
Cautions Be car eful when r eat t aching t he console. Because t he console is t he device
used t o display t he r esult of t he at t achment and t o make fur t her changes,
r eat t aching t he console incor r ect ly might r esult in loss of cont r ol for your
pr ocess.
Restrictions The CON and S logical devices cannot be det ached. (It is possible t o define
a user t hat has no console. See St ar t on page 583.)
See also ClassGen, Logoff, Net, Spooler, Start, Sysgen, System
Backup 39
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Backup Command
The Backup command makes an exact copy of one disk ont o anot her disk or t ape, or it
r est or es a backup copy from a t ape t o a disk.
Operation Mode 1This synt ax causes BACKUP t o copy t he ent ir e cont ent s of from-
drive t o t he t o-drive. The t wo drives may be any combinat ion of har d disks,
floppy disks, RAM disks, image dr ives or net wor k dr ives, but t hey must
bot h be t he same capacit y and for mat .
Mode 2Cr eat es a backup copy of t he from-drive cont ent s ont o t he to-
t ape. The backup copy on t he t ape can only be used wit h a Mode 3 for m of
t he BACKUP command.
Mode 3Rest ores a backup copy on t he from-tape ont o t he t o-drive. The
backup copy on t he t ape must have been cr eat ed by a Mode 2 for m of t he
BACKUP command, and it must be a backup copy of a disk volume t hat has
t he same capacit y and for mat as t he t o-drive.
Mode 4Cr eat es a backup copy of t he cont ent s of drive by using one disk
dr ive only. drive must be a r emovable disk dr ive.
The backup is done by copying as much of t he sour ce disk as possible t o
memor y, asking you t o change t he disket t e in drive t o t he dest inat ion dis-
1 BACKUP from-drive to-drive ( options
2 BACKUP from-drive to-t ape ( options
3 BACKUP from-t ape to-drive ( options
4 BACKUP drive ( options
drive dr ive let t er of source and dest inat ion disk dr ive
from-drive dr ive let t er of source dr ive t o backup
to-drive dr ive let t er of dest inat ion dr ive t o backup t o
from-tape logical t ape name of sour ce t ape t o r est or e backup fr om
to-tape logical t ape name of dest inat ion of backup
opt ions ASK NOASK
BUFFER NOVERIFY
FROM file TO file
MULTIUSER VERIFY
40 Backup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ket t e, copying t he memor y image t o t he dest inat ion disket t e, and t hen
asking you t o swit ch back t o t he source disket t e. This pr ocess is r epeat ed
unt il t he ent ir e sour ce disket t e is copied t o t he dest inat ion disket t e.
This mode of t he Backup command is most efficient when t he BUFFER, TO
or FROM opt ions ar e used.
Options ASK A default opt ion t hat inst r uct s Backup t o ask t he oper at or t o
mount t he sour ce and dest inat ion volumes, and wait s for con-
fir mat ion t hat t he pr oper volumes ar e mount ed. For inst ance:
>backup f i
Source is Disk F
Destination is Disk I
Mount volumes now:
Source is labeled "Programs".
Destination is labeled "Image".
OK to start backup (Y/N)
Respond wit h a (Enter) only for t he Mount volumes now:
r equest , and a (Y) or (N) for t he OK t o st ar t backup quest ion.
Use t he NOASK opt ion t o overr ide t his default .
BUFFER Valid only wit h Mode 4 of t he command. When used wit hout
t he FROM or TO opt ions, t his opt ion causes Backup t o use a
t empor ar y file on t he S dr ive as an image buffer of t he single
drive backup.
In ot her wor ds, t he cont ent s of t he source disket t e ar e wr it t en
t o a t empor ar y file, t he dest inat ion disket t e is placed in t he
drive, and t he cont ent s of t he t empor ar y file ar e wr it t en t o t he
dest inat ion disket t e. The t empor ar y file is t hen er ased.
FROM This opt ion is used in combinat ion wit h t he BUFFER opt ion t o
specify t hat a file cr eat ed from a pr evious backup using t he
BUFFER TO opt ion is t o be used as t he sour ce for t his backup.
The file name is specified following t his opt ion:
>backup f (buffer from distrib.master:s
The file must be a file creat ed fr om a pr evious backup using
t he BUFFER TO opt ion. The for mat of t his backup disk (number
of cylinder s, heads and sect or s) must be ident ical t o t he format
of t he or iginal backup disk when t he file was cr eat ed. See TO
opt ion below.
Backup 41
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MULTIUSER Allows Backup t o copy a public dr ive even t hough ot her user s
may be logged on and act ive. When Backup is inst r uct ed t o per -
for m a backup of a public disk, it r equir es single user mode. If
ot her user s ar e logged ont o t he syst em, it displays t he mes-
sage: Must be single user or pr ivat e volume.
Using t his opt ion t ells Backup t o not r est r ict t he backup t o sin-
gle-user oper at ion (t he message is st ill displayed). THIS CAN
BE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS! If anot her user changes
some files while t he backup is being cr eat ed, t he int egr it y of
t he backup is lost .
Use t his opt ion only if you ar e sur e t hat all ot her users ar e
inact ive.
NOASK Disables t he sour ce and dest inat ion volume oper at or confir ma-
t ion at t he beginning of t he backup and when subsequent disks
or t apes ar e needed.
NOVERIFY Disables t he verify aft er wr it e operat ion. See VERIFY opt ion
below.
TO This opt ion is used in combinat ion wit h t he BUFFER opt ion t o
specify t hat t he dest inat ion of t he backup is not anot her disk
but a file.
The file name is specified following t his opt ion:
>backup f (buffer to distrib.master:s
Alt hough t he file cr eat ed wit h t his opt ion can be copied t o
anot her dr ive, t r ansmit t ed t o anot her comput er , etc., just like
any ot her st r eam file, it is int ended t o be used as t he sour ce for
anot her backup using t he BUFFER FROM opt ion or as an image
dr ive.
VERIFY Applies only when t he to-drive is a disk not a t ape. This opt ion
causes Backup t o r ead each t r ack of dat a immediat ely aft er
wr it ing it t o t he to-drive. The informat ion is t hen compar ed
wit h t he or iginal informat ion fr om t he from-drive. Only when
t he dat a is t he same does t he backup cont inue t o t he next
t r ack.
42 Backup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes When a backup is per for med, bot h t he from-drive and t he t o-drive ar e mod-
ified t o r eflect t hat t he disk was t he sour ce or dest inat ion of a backup. For
inst ance, aft er a backup of t he F dr ive:
>disk f
Disk F label "Programs".
Backup to disk "ProgCopy" on 10/26/01, at 13:20.
File system = THEOS/4GB.
Capacity = 1,474,560 (80 cylinders, 2 heads, 36 sectors).
Main directory size = 4 files.
Allocated bytes = 165,632.
Available bytes = 1,308,928.
While t he backup copy is being cr eat ed t he curr ent cylinder and head
number ar e displayed on t he console. This infor mat ion is pr ovided so t he
oper at or can see how t he backup is pr ogr essing.
Defaults ASK, NOVERIFY
Cautions The MULTIUSER opt ion t ells t he Backup command t o not check whet her or
not ot her user s ar e logged on or act ive. It does not pr event t hose ot her
user s fr om per for ming oper at ions t hat change t he dat abase t hat s being
backed up. If anot her user does change t he dat abase dur ing t he backup
oper at ion, t he int egr it y of t he backup is compr omised.
Backup always dest r oys t he pr ior cont ent s of t he dest inat ion dr ive, befor e
any new dat a is wr it t en t o t he dr ive.
Restrictions The from-drive and t he t o-drive must have t he same for mat . That is, t hey
must bot h have t he same number of cylinder s, heads and sect ors.
The Backup command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four .
See also TArchive, CopyFile, Disk, Restore, Tape, TBackup
Cache 43
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cache Command
The Cache command enables, disables, cont r ols or r epor t s on t he disk cache. For a gener al
descript ion of t he THEOS disk caching capabilit ies, r efer t o Disk Caching on page 126.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he int er act ive mode of t he Cache command as descr ibed
on page 44.
Mode 2Per for ms one of t he funct ions descr ibed below.
Functions DELAY OFF Disable disk wr it e delay. Not e t hat t his also will disable direc-
t ory wr it e caching.
DELAY ON Enable disk wr it e delay.
OFF Disable disk caching. When disk caching is disabled, t he mem-
or y used by t he disk cache is fr eed.
ON Enable disk read/wr it e caching.
NOWBDIR Synonymous wit h WBDIR OFF.
STATUS Display disk cache st at ist ics as descr ibed on page 44.
SYNC For ce disk synchr onizat ion wit h memor y cache.
WBDIR OFF Disable dir ect or y wr it e caching.
WBDIR ON Enable dir ect or y wr it e caching. The keywor d ON may be
omit t ed.
1 CACHE
2 CACHE function
function DELAY OFF STATUS
DELAY ON SYNC
OFF WBDIR OFF
ON WBDIR ON
44 Cache
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cache Status
and Statistics
Display
When t he STATUS command line opt ion is used, or when Mode 1 of t he
Cache command is used, t he following scr een appear s.
This display r emains on t he scr een and has t wo sect ions: a t op sect ion t hat
displays t he Cache Status Display and a lower sect ion showing t he Cache
Statistics Display t hat is updat ed approximat ely once per second.
This display is only available if disk caching is enabled.
Cache 45
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cache Status Display
The t op por t ion of t he display shows t he cur r ent disk cache set t ings. These
set t ings ar e cont r olled by t he Cache command it self or fr om infor mat ion
r ecor ded in t he Sysgen configur at ion.
Setting Meaning and Source
Cache size (kilo-
byt es)
The value shown her e indicat es t he amount of mem-
or y used by t he disk cache syst em for caching dat a
fr om physical disks. It is shown in kilobyt es so t he
value illust r at ed in t he pr evious figur e r eflect s a six
megabyt e disk cache.
The disk cache size is nor mally set in t he Sysgen
configur at ion but it may also be set by t he Cache
command it self if no size is specified in t he configu-
r at ion and t he Cache command enables disk cach-
ing. A default size of 4MB or of t he available
memor y is used in t his sit uat ion.
Block size (byt es) The block size is det er mined by t he cache size. It
indicat es t he smallest amount of dat a t hat is r ead or
wr it t en t o disk.
Number of
blocks
This is a comput ed value t hat r eflect s t he number of
blocks of dat a t hat can be held in t he disk cache
memor y. It is comput ed by dividing t he cache size
by t he block size.
Wr it e delay Shows t he st at us of t he cache wr it e delay as set by
t he Cache DELAY funct ion or t he Sysgen configura-
t ion.
Dir ect or y wr it e
back
Shows t he st at us of t he cache dir ect ory wr it e back
feat ur e as set by t he Cache WBDIR funct ion or t he
SYSGEN configur at ion.
Cache St at us Display
46 Cache
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cache Statistics Display
The lower por t ion of t he display shows t he cur r ent cache st at ist ics. This
infor mat ion is updat ed appr oximat ely once per second, t hus showing t he
disk act ivit y of ot her user s and t asks.
Display Item Meaning
Inst ant aneous hit r at e: Shows t he r at e of success for t he most
r ecent disk access r equest s over t he last
t hr ee seconds, or so.
Aver age hit r at e: Shows t he over all r at e of success r eflect -
ing t he per cent age of t he t imes a disk
access r equest was sat isfied since disk
caching was enabled
Number of modified blocks: Shows t he number of blocks of dat a cur-
r ent ly in t he disk cache t hat have not
been wr it t en t o t he physical disk yet .
Number of pr obes: Shows t he t ot al number of t imes t hat a
r ead or wr it e r equest was made.
Number of hit s: Shows t he number of t imes t hat a r equest
for infor mat ion fr om t he disk was able t o
be sat isfied by infor mat ion alr eady in t he
disk cache memor y.
Number of syncs: Indicat es t he number of t imes t hat t he
disk cache syst em has been for ced t o syn-
chr onize it self wit h t he physical disk.
(See SYNC funct ion.)
Number of r eads: Shows t he number of t imes t he disk
cache syst em has pr ovided infor mat ion
fr om a disk r ead r equest . This includes
t he t imes when t he infor mat ion is
alr eady in t he disk cache memor y and t he
t imes t hat it had t o read fr om t he physi-
cal disk.
Number of wr it es: Shows t he number of t imes t he disk
cache syst em was asked t o wr it e infor ma-
t ion t o t he disk. This includes t he number
of blocks st ill in t he cache memor y wait -
ing t o be wr it t en t o t he physical disk
(dir t y blocks).
Number of bypasses Indicat es t he number of t imes t hat t he
disk cache syst em was bypassed, pr oba-
bly due t o a r equest fr om a lar ge r ead or
wr it e oper at ion for one t ime only dat a.
Cache St at ist ics Display
Cache 47
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cache Control When using Mode 1 of t he Cache command, when you select t he Cont r ol
but t on, a for m is displayed allowing you t o change t he var ious disk caching
par amet er s.
Notes A Cache SYNC operat ion is per for med when you r eboot t he syst em using
Reboot or (Ctrl)+(Alt)+(Del).
Cautions The per for mance impr ovement s when using disk caching wit h wr it e delay
enabled are consider able. However , t her e is a slight risk t o dat a int egr it y.
If a power failur e occur s or if t he syst em is r eset bet ween t he t ime t hat a
pr ogr am r equest s a disk wr it e oper at ion and when t he disk caching soft -
war e act ually per for ms t he writ e t o t he physical disk, t he dat a cannot be
wr it t en.
If t his r isk is unaccept able, you can st ill t ake advant age of disk caching
wit h writ e delay enabled and gr eat ly r educe t his r isk by ut ilizing an on-
line unint err upt able power supply (UPS) for your comput er syst em.
Restrictions The Cache command r equires a pr ivilege level of five.
If disk caching is disabled, t he Cache STATUS cannot be displayed.
See also Sysgen
48 Cache
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Calculat or 49
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Calculator Command
Calculator displays a calculat or t hat can be used t o per form basic ar it hmet ic.
Operation The displayed calculat or is:
Notes Wit h t he calculat or displayed you may per for m t he following act ions:
CALCULATOR
Mouse Keyboard Action

(0) (9) Append t his digit t o t he end of t he cur r ent
number .
(.) Append a decimal point .
(+) Add t he next number ent er ed t o t he t ot al.
(-) Subt r act t he next number ent er ed fr om
t he t ot al.
(*) Mult iple t he t ot al by t he next number
ent er ed.
(/) Divide t he t ot al by t he next number
ent er ed.
(=) or (Enter) Per for m t he arit hmet ic and display t he
new t ot al.
50 Calculator
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Return Code Upon exit fr om Calculator, t he ret ur n code is set t o t he int eger value of t he
last displayed value.
Restrictions The values t hat may be ent er ed or displayed ar e limit ed t o 13 digit s of pr e-
cision and must be in a range of 9.99999999999910
126
.
(%) Mult iply t he t ot al by t he curr ent ent r y
int er pr et ed as a per cent age.
(R) Change t he cur r ent ent r y t o t he r ecipr ical
of t hat value.
(G) Change t he sign of t he cur r ent ent r y.
(@) Change t he cur r ent ent r y t o t he squar e
r oot of t he value.
(C) Clear t he t ot al and t he cur r ent ent r y.
(E) Clear t he cur rent ent r y.
(Ctrl)+(L) Clear memor y.
(Ctrl)+(R) Recall memor y (change cur r ent ent ry t o
t he value in memor y).
(Ctrl)+(S) Save t he cur r ent ent r y in memor y.
(Ctrl)+(P) Add t he cur r ent ent r y t o t he value in
memor y.
(Esc) Exit Calculator.
. The equal sign action causes the last operation entered to be applied to the
current entry and the total, with the current entry changed to that new total.
For instance, entering (C)(1)(+)(2) causes the total to be 1, the current entry
to be 2 and the last operation specified to be addition. Entering (=) at this
time causes the 2 to be added to the 1 making the new total and the dis-
played current entry to be 3. Entering (=) again causes the current entry of
3 to be added to the total of 3 making the new total and the displayed cur-
rent entry to be 6.
Mouse Keyboard Action
Calendar 51
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Calendar Command
Calendar displays a calendar for a single mont h or for an ent ir e year .
Operation Mode 1Displays t he cur r ent mont h calendar in an int er act ive window
t hat can be used t o br owse and display ot her mont h calendar s.
Init ially, t he cur r ent dat e is highlight ed wit h a cir cle ar ound t he dat e. You
can highlight differ ent days or change t he calendar view by using t he (),
(), (), (), (PageUp), (PageDown), (Home) and (End) keys. You can also use t he
mouse t o select differ ent days, mont hs or year s.
If t he select ed dat e is a r ecognized holiday, t he holiday name is displayed
at t he bot t om of t he for m. The holidays r ecognized by t he Calendar com-
mand ar e defined in t he CALENDAR.CFG file. For a descript ion of t his file
r efer t o Appendix D: System Files, /Theos/Config Directory, Calendar.cfg
on page 210 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference.
1 CALENDAR
2 CALENDAR mont h
3 CALENDAR mont h year
4 CALENDAR year
month calendar mont h number , mont h name or abbr eviat ion
year calendar year number , wit h or wit hout cent ur y number
52 Calendar
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Displays t he calendar for month in t he cur r ent year in mont h
display for mat (see Month Display on page 53). The month may be speci-
fied as a mont h number of t he year (112), a mont h name (J anuar y, Feb-
r uar y, et c.) or wit h a mont h name abbr eviat ion (J an, Feb, Mar , et c.). For
example:
>calendar 3
>calendar March
>calendar mar
The above t hr ee commands will display t he calendar for Mar ch of t he cur -
r ent year .
Mode 3Displays t he calendar for month in year in mont h display for mat
(see Month Display on page 53). The month may be specified as it is for
Mode 2. The year may be specified as a year number in t he cur r ent cent ur y
(099) or as a complet e year number (1776, 1812, 1997, 2004, etc.). See
Dat e Limit at ions on page 52. For inst ance:
>cal 7 1776 ; Display July, 1776
>cal July 1776 ; Display July, 1776
>cal Jan 3 ; Display January, 2003
Mode 4Displays t he calendar for year in year display for mat (see Year
Display on page 53). The year may be specified as in Mode 3, wit h t he
except ion of cur r ent cent ur y year s less t han 13. To avoid confusion wit h a
Mode 2 r equest , year s bet ween 112 must be specified wit h t heir cent ur y
number (1901, 1902, etc.). For example:
>calendar 0 ; Display 2000
>calendar 3 ; Display March, current year
Date
Limitations
Only Gregor ian calendar dat es ar e displayed cor rect ly by t his pr ogr am.
Because t he Gr egor ian calendar was inaugur at ed Oct ober 15, 1582, only
calendar s for year s gr eat er t han or equal t o 1583 ar e displayed by t his
command.
Calendar 53
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Month Display When a single mont h is displayed by Calendar (Mode 2 and Mode 3), a simu-
lat ed calendar page is dr awn on t he scr een. For inst ance:
Year Display When a full year is displayed by Calendar (Mode 4), t wo scr een displays
may be used if t he at t ached scr een size is insufficient t o display t he ent ir e
calendar . For inst ance, if a CALENDAR 2002 is r equest ed wit h a display
at t ached at 80 by 24:
A similar screen is displayed for t he mont hs J uly t hr ough December .
April 2002
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30
54 Calendar
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes The mont h names ar e defined in t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/MES-
SAGE.BIN file, number s 260261. For a descr ipt ion of t his file, refer t o
Appendix D: System Files, st ar t ing on page 209.
If t he calendar display is r edir ect ed t o a device or file ot her t han t he con-
sole, mont h displays are out put in a for mat similar t o t he year display, but
for one mont h only.
Restrictions See Dat e Limit at ions on page 52.
Cat 55
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cat Command Filter
The Cat command is a filt er t hat concat enat es one or mor e files and out put s t he r esult t o t he
st andar d out put device. For a descr ipt ion of command filt er s, r efer t o Standard Input, Stan-
dard Output and I/O Redirection on page 53 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em
Reference.
Operation Mode 1Copies t ext from t he st andar d input device t o t he st andard
out put device.
Mode 2Each file is copied t o t he st andard out put device, one aft er t he
ot her .
>cat one.file two.file
This command copies ONE.FILE t o t he st andar d out put device and t hen
appends TWO.FILE t o t he end.
>cat text.file1 text.file2 text.file3 > new.text
This second example uses i/o r edir ect ion t o change t he st andar d out put
device for t his command. It is equivalent t o:
>copy text.file1 new.text
>copy text.file2 new.text (append
>copy text.file3 new.text (append
The st andar d input device file can be included in t he list of files t o be
copied by using t he - specificat ion as a file name:
>cat - one.file two.file
This command copies t he cont ent s of t he st andar d input device file t o t he
st andard out put device and t hen appends ONE.FILE and TWO.FILE ont o t he
st andard out put device file.
1 CAT ( opt ions
2 CAT file ( options
file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NOTYPE
TYPE
56 Cat
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When one or mor e of file cont ains a wild car d specificat ion, t he files mat ch-
ing t he specificat ion ar e sor t ed in alphabet ical sequence and t hen pro-
cessed as if t hey wer e specified individually. For inst ance, assume t hat
t her e are files named LETTER.DOCUMENT, MEMO.DOCUMENT and SPECIAL.DOCU-
MENT:
>cat *.document
This command is equivalent t o:
>cat letter.document memo.document special.document
Options NOTYPE Suppr esses all er r or message display.
-s Synonymous wit h t he NOTYPE opt ion descr ibed above. To use
t his opt ion, do not use t he left par ent hesis. Inst ead, mer ely
specify it somewher e in t he command line.
>cat -s one.file two.file
>cat one.file two.file -s
TYPE A default opt ion t hat allows er r or messages t o be displayed.
The most common er r or message is File not found. which is
out put when one or mor e of t he input files does not exist .
Er r or messages ar e displayed on t he st andar d er r or device
which is nor mally t he same as t he st andar d out put device.
Notes A file specificat ion can omit t he file t ype if t he envir onment var iable FILE-
TYPE is defined.
For more informat ion about t he FILETYPE var iable, see Environment Vari-
ables on page 111 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Ref-
erence.
When t he st andar d input device is t he console, t he end-of-file is indicat ed
by pr essing (Ctrl)+(D).
When t he st andar d out put device is a disk file, it is er ased pr ior t o out put -
ing t he fir st file. Subsequent files ar e t hen appended t o t his new file. To
append a file t o an exist ing file, use t he append i/o r edir ect ion symbol:
>cat new.file >> old.file
As a command filt er , Cat can be used in a pipe command:
>filelist *.basic | cat heading.file - > result.file
Cat 57
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This command line cr eat es a dir ect or y list ing and pipes t his out put t o t he
Cat command, which fir st out put s HEADING.FILE t o RESULT.FILE and t hen
appends t he dir ect ory list ing which is now in t he st andar d input device.
See also CopyFile
58 Cat
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CDPlayer 59
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CDPlayer Command
The CDPlayer command plays an audio CD in t he CD-ROM dr ive.
Operation Mode 1This is t he int er act ive play mode of t he CDPlayer command. In
t his mode, t he audio CD is played, st ar t ing at t r ack one.
>cdplayer
If t he ar t ist , t it le and t r ack t it les have been ent er ed int o t he CD-ROM cat -
alog for t he disc in drive, t hat infor mat ion is displayed as each t r ack plays
1 CDPLAYER drive
2 CDPLAYER drive PLAY
3 CDPLAYER drive PAUSE
4 CDPLAYER drive RESUME
5 CDPLAYER drive STOP
6 CDPLAYER drive RANDOM
7 CDPLAYER drive LIST
8 CDPLAYER drive TRACK track
9 CDPLAYER drive LOOP
10 CDPLAYER drive RANDOM LOOP
drive dr ive code let t er of an at t ached CD-ROM dr ive
t rack t r ack number of audio CD in drive
60 CDPlayer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
(see CDDB on page 62). If t he infor mat ion is not available, only t he t ime
r emaining and t he t rack number ar e displayed. See Gr aphics Display on
page 62 for addit ional infor mat ion.
On non-gr aphic consoles, t he CDPlayer command displays t he t r ack num-
ber , t ime r emaining in t he t rack and t he t it le if known.
>cdplayer d
1: [01:52]
While t his mode is oper at ing, you may use t he (PageDown) or () key t o jump
t o t he next t r ack, and t he (PageUp) or () key t o jump t o t he pr evious t r ack.
The (Enter) key r eplays t he cur rent t r ack and t he (Esc) key exit s t he pr o-
gram and t erminat es playing t he album.
Mode 2St ar t s playing t he audio CD in drive. If t he ar t ist and album
t it le have been ent er ed int o t he CD-ROM cat alog for t he disc in t he dr ive,
t hat infor mat ion is displayed (see CDDB on page 62). The command exit s
but t he disc cont inues playing unt il it r eaches t he end of t he album.
>cdplayer c play
Don Ho: Tiny Bubbles
>
While t he disc plays, t her e ar e ver y few, if any, r esour ces used and t her e is
minimal impact on t he oper at ion of t he syst em.
Mode 3Pauses but does not st op t he playing of an audio disc in drive. If
no disc is playing (see Mode 2), no er r or is det ect ed or repor t ed.
Mode 4Resumes playing of an audio disc in drive t hat was paused wit h
a Mode 3 command. If no disc is playing (see Mode 2) or it is not paused, no
er ror is det ect ed or r epor t ed.
Mode 5St ops playing t he audio disc in drive. If no disc is playing (see
Mode 2), no err or is det ect ed or r epor t ed.
Mode 6This is an int er act ive play mode of t he CDPlayer command, simi-
lar t o Mode 1. However , in t his mode, t he audio CD is played in r andom
or der.
>cdplayer d random
Lawrence Welk: His Greatest Hits
10: [-03:21] Beer Barrel Polka
If t he ar t ist , t it le and t rack t it les have been ent ered int o t he CD-ROM cat -
alog for t he disc in drive, t hat infor mat ion is displayed as it plays each
t r ack (see CDDB on page 62). If t he infor mat ion is not available, only t he
t ime r emaining and t he t r ack number ar e displayed.
CDPlayer 61
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
While t his mode is oper at ing, you may use t he (PageDown) or () key t o jump
t o t he next t r ack in t he random or der . The (Enter) key r eplays t he cur r ent
t rack and t he (Esc) key exit s t he pr ogr am and t er minat es playing t he
album.
When each t r ack has been played once, t he pr ogr am exit s.
Mode 7Displays t he descr ipt ive infor mat ion about t he CD in drive.
>cdplayer d list
Shania Twain / Come On Over
1: [03:54] Man! I Feel Like A Woman!
2: [03:26] Im Holdin On To Love (To Save My Life)
3: [03:33] Love Gets Me Every Time
4: [03:34] Dont Be Stupid (You Know I Love You)
5: [04:41] From This Moment On
6: [02:54] Come On Over
7: [03:39] When
8: [03:48] Whatever You Do! Dont!
9: [04:03] If You Wanna Touch Her, Ask!
10: [03:32] Youre Still The One
11: [03:35] Honey, Im Home
12: [03:38] That Dont Impress Me Much
13: [03:39] Black Eyes, Blue Tears
14: [04:12] I Wont Leave You Lonely
15: [04:22] Rock This Country!
16: [03:29] Youve Got A WayDon McLean: Classics
The t imes list ed for each t rack ar e t he t imes specified in t he index on t he
audio CD. The disc and t rack t it les ar e fr om t he CD-ROM cat alog of t he
disc (see CDDB on page 62).
Mode 8Plays t he single track of t he audio CD in drive. If t he ar t ist and
album t it le have been ent er ed int o t he CD-ROM cat alog for t he disc in t he
dr ive, t hat infor mat ion is displayed along wit h t he t rack t it le (see CDDB
on page 62). The command exit s but t he disc cont inues playing unt il it
r eaches t he end of t he r equest ed track.
Mode 9Ident ical t o Mode 2 except , aft er all of t he t racks on t he disc have
played once, t he disc is played again. This cont inues unt il CDPlayer is
exit ed by ent r y of t he (Esc) key.
Mode 10Ident ical t o Mode 6 except t he t r acks ar e played randomly unt il
CDPlayer is exit ed by ent r y of t he (Esc) key.
Notes A dr ive mount oper at ion is per for med when CDPlayer fir st st ar t s. This
oper at ion closes t he dr ive t r ay if it is not alr eady closed. You can open t he
dr ive t r ay wit h t he Eject command or by using t he eject but t on of t he
gr aphic CD Player (see Graphics Display on page 62).
62 CDPlayer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Defaults The drive specificat ion may be omit t ed. When not specified, t he fir st
at t ached CD-ROM drive is used.
CDDB When CDPlayer st ar t s playing a disc it det er mines a unique code for t he
disc and checks t o see if t he syst em has disc and t r ack t it le infor mat ion
saved for t he disc. This infor mat ion is saved in t he /THEOS/CON-
FIG/CDDB.BIN:S file. When t her e is no infor mat ion in t his file and you have
an act ive int er net connect ion, t he FREEDB.ORG dat abase is queried for infor -
mat ion about t his disc. That infor mat ion, if available, is saved in t he
CDDB.BIN file for subsequent playing of t his disc.
The FREEDB.ORG is a fr ee, public dat abase of CD t it les and t r ack infor ma-
t ion. The ser ver and dat abase is implement ed wit h GNU soft war e copy-
r ight ed by t he Fr ee Soft war e Foundat ion.
Not all discs ar e cat aloged wit h FREEDB.ORG, alt hough it is updat ed con-
st ant ly. Some discs will display no disc or t r ack t it les.
Graphics
Display
When CDPlayer is invoked fr om a gr aphics console, a gr aphic repr esent a-
t ion of a CD player is displayed wit h cont r ols. These cont r ols may be
manipulat ed wit h t he mouse point er.
A mouse (eit her act ual or virt ual) can be used t o cont r ol t he act ions of t he
CDPlayer command. When t he mouse point er hover s over one of t he con-
t r ols it s descr ipt ion is displayed just below t he cont r ol but t ons.
The t wo list boxes near t he bot t om of t he gr aphic player show t he t r acks
on t he disc and t he at t ached disc dr ives t hat ar e available.
Help
Mixer
Int r o
Repeat
Random
Eject
Disc select Tr ack infor mat ion
Play
Pause
Pr evious t r ack
Next t r ack
St op
Disc t it le
CDPlayer 63
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions The syst em must have at least one CDROM dr ive at t ached; t her e must be
a suppor t ed sound car d inst alled and configured.
The CD-ROM disc in drive must be an audio CD.
See also Attach, Eject, Mount, Play
64 CDPlayer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Change 65
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Change Command
The Change command changes a files at t ribut es.
Operation Mode 1Changes file accor ding t o options.
>change *.data (touch
Ok to change "FILE1.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
"FILE1.DATA:S" changed.
Ok to change "FILE2.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) N
Ok to change "FILE3.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) A
Mode 2The files list ed in file ar e changed according t o options. file must
be an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per line. The
SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC files creat ed by FileList and t he
FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by Look can be used for t his specificat ion file (see The
EXEC and FILES Options on page 239). You may also cr eat e t he file wit h an
edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be changed:
>FILELIST *.DATA:A (EXEC
>FILELIST A NOT *.DATA:A (10/1/01 EXEC APPEND
A file now exist s t hat list s all of t he dat a files and all files t hat have been
changed since 10/01/2001. The following command will change t he owner -
ship of t hese files t o anot her account :
1 CHANGE file ( opt ions
2 CHANGE file ( FILES options
3 CHANGE ( opt ions
opt ions ACCOUNT name PRIVATE codes
FILES PRIVLEV nn
GROW n.m QUERY
NOQUERY SHARED codes
NOTYPE TOUCH
OWNER name TYPE
PATCH nnnnnnn
66 Change
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>change selected.exec (file account develop
Mode 3Ent er s t he int er act ive mode for select ing files t o be changed.
>change (touch
Enter file name list, terminate with empty line.
?
You may ent er any file name desir ed, wit h opt ional pat h and possibly wild
car d specificat ions. For inst ance:
>change (touch noquery
?*.data
?*.text
"FILE1.TEXT:S" changed.
?
>
Options ACCOUNT Changes t he account owner ship of t he files. The new owning
account is specified immediat ely following t his keywor d:
>change data.file (account develop
You must be logged ont o t he account t hat cur r ent ly owns t he
file. This opt ion must be used by it self. That is, you may not
change t he owner ship of a file and it s pr ot ect ion codes, gr owt h
fact or , etc.
You may only change t he owner ship of a file in t he r oot dir ec-
t or y. You may not change member s of a libr ary (however , t he
libr ar y it self may be changed).
FILES Indicat es t hat Mode 2 of t he Change command is t o be used.
The file specifies an ASCII st r eam file, wit h each r ecor d in t he
file specifying a single file name. The file name specificat ions
in t his file may include t he pat h t o t he file.
For inst ance, a line in t he specificat ion file might cont ain:
custom/programs/program.source.sample:s
If t his file is used in a Change command, t he display will be:
Change 67
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>change selected.exec (file
"/CUSTOM/PROGRAMS/PROGRAM.SOURCE.SAMPLE:S" changed.
GROW Specifies t he gr owt h fact or for t he file.
>change data.file (grow 0.5
Gr owt h fact or s ar e specified as eit her a whole number , such as
1, 2, 3, etc., or as a fr act ion, such as 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, etc. Do not
specify a combinat ion like 1.3. If you do, only t he int eger por -
t ion is used. Pr ogr am and st r eam files do not have gr owt h fac-
t ors.
For an explanat ion of file growt h fact or s see Growth Factor on
page 146.
NOQUERY Tells Change t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e applying t he
r equest ed change t o a file. This is a default opt ion for explicit
file specificat ions.
NOTYPE Suppr esses t he display of t he file changed messages.
OWNER Synonymous wit h t he ACCOUNT opt ion.
PATCH Changes t he pat ch level for a pr ogr am file. The new pat ch level
is specified immediat ely following t his keywor d:
>change special.command (patch 10001
Pat ch levels may only be added or changed in pr ogr ams, device
dr iver s or t he syst em nucleus.
PL Synonymous wit h t he PATCH opt ion.
PRIVATE Changes t he owning account pr ot ect ion codes. The new pr ot ec-
t ion codes ar e specified immediat ely following t his keywor d:
>change my.file (private nmexwr
See Changing Pr ot ect ion Codes on page 69.
PRIVLEV Changes a commands pr ivilege level. The new pr ivilege level
is specified immediat ely following t he keywor d:
>change my.command (privlev 3
68 Change
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUERY Tells Change t hat you want t o be queried or asked if each file
mat ching t he select ion cr it er ia is t o be changed. This is a
default opt ion when t he file specificat ion used wild car ds.
>change *.data (touch
Ok to change "FILE1.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to change "FILE2.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) N
Ok to change "FILE3.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) A
When asked, you may r espond wit h a (Y) t o change t he file, an
(N) t o not change t his file, or an (A) t o change t his file and all
subsequent files. Pr essing (Esc) exit s t he CHANGE command
but , all changes made pr ior t o t he (Esc) ent r y ar e r et ained.
To disable t his opt ion use t he NOQUERY opt ion.
SHARED Changes t he shar ed access pr ot ect ion codes. The new pr ot ec-
t ion codes ar e specified immediat ely following t his keywor d:
>change my.file (shared wr
See Changing Pr ot ect ion Codes on page 69.
TOUCH Changes t he files dat e and t ime t o t he cur r ent syst em dat e
and t ime.
This is a default opt ion when no ot her opt ions are specified.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells Change t o display each file t hat is
successfully changed.
To disable t his opt ion use t he NOTYPE opt ion.
Notes Mult iple opt ions may be specified on a single command. For inst ance, you
may r equest a change in a files gr owt h fact or , pr ivat e and shar ed pr ot ec-
t ion codes and it s file dat e. However , you may not use t he ACCOUNT or
OWNER opt ion wit h any ot her opt ion.
Change 69
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Changing
Protection
Codes
A file has t wo t ypes of prot ect ion codes associat ed wit h it : pr ivat e and
shar ed access. The pr ivat e pr ot ect ion codes r est r ict what a user on t he
owning account may do wit h t he file. The shar ed access pr ot ect ion codes
r est r ict what a user on a non-owning account may do wit h t he file.
Pr ivat e pr ot ect ion codes include:
Ther e ar e t wo ot her codes t hat may be specified her e alt hough t hey are not
r eally pr ot ect ion codes:
Shar ed access pr ot ect ion codes include:
Shar ed access er ase pr ot ect ion exist s when a file has any of t he following
pr ot ect ion codes enabled: er ase, shared r ead or shared wr it e. Shared r ead
and wr it e pr ot ect ion is always enabled if t he pr ivat e pr ot ect ion is set t o
r ead or wr it e pr ot ect ed. That is, set t ing pr ivat e wr it e pr ot ect ion enables
shar ed writ e pr ot ect ion.
Wit h t he except ion of privat e r ead pr ot ect ion, each of t hese at t r ibut es may
be t ur ned off by pr eceding t he pr ot ect ion code wit h t he let t er n. Mult iple
at t r ibut es may be set at one t ime by specifying t he mult iple codes one aft er
t he ot her wit hout any separ at ing spaces. The pr ot ect ion codes may be
specified in any sequence.
For example:
>change my.file (private nmenw shared rw
Code Meaning
w Writ e pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be wr it t en t o.
r Read pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be r ead.
e Er ase pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be delet ed.
x Execut e pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be execut ed.
Code Meaning
m Set t he modified at t r ibut e.
h Set t he hidden at t r ibut e.
Code Meaning
w Writ e pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be wr it t en t o.
r Read pr ot ect ion. The file cannot be r ead.
70 Change
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The above command set s t he following at t r ibut es for t he file: not modified,
er ase pr ot ect ed, not writ e prot ect ed, not r ead pr ot ect ed, shar ed access read
and wr it e pr ot ect ed.
Pr ivat e r ead pr ot ect ion, once set , cannot be r emoved. Shar ed read and
shar ed wr it e pr ot ect ion cannot be disabled if t he file st ill has pr ivat e read
or privat e wr it e pr ot ect ion enabled. For inst ance, t o disable shar ed wr it e
pr ot ect ion you must also disable pr ivat e wr it e pr ot ect ion.
Defaults Touch is a default opt ion when no ot her opt ions ar e specified. QUERY is a
default opt ion for file specificat ions using wild cards. TYPE is a default
opt ion.
Cautions Aft er changing a file t o hidden, it will not appear in a dir ect or y list ing (see
FileList on page 229). However , most commands, including Change, allow
access t o a hidden file.
Pr ivat e r ead pr ot ect ion cannot be r eset .
Restrictions The ACCOUNT opt ion must be used by it self.
To apply any changes t o a file wit h t his command, you must be logged ont o
t he owning account .
See also Touch
ChDir 71
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ChDir Command
The ChDir command changes t he cur rent wor king dir ect or y.
Operation Mode 1Changes t he curr ent wor king dir ect or y t o t he specified dir ect ory.
>chdir programs
The directory may be a simple subdir ect or y name as shown in t he above
command line, or it may be a par t ial or complet e pat h specificat ion t o t he
desir ed dir ect or y.
When directory does not st ar t wit h t he r oot dir ect or y specifier ( / ), it is
assumed t o be a subdirect or y of t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y or a r efer -
ence t o a dir ect or y r elat ive t o t he cur r ent working dir ect or y. For inst ance:
>pwd
/DEVELOP:S
>chdir programs
>pwd
/DEVELOP/PROGRAMS:S
>chdir ../doc/files
>pwd
/DEVELOP/DOC/FILES:S
The second example of t he ChDir command shows a usage of t he special
double per iod dir ect or y name ( .. ) pr onounced dot, dot . This synt ax is a r ef-
er ence t o t he par ent dir ect or y of t he cur rent wor king dir ect or y. In t he
example, t he cur r ent working dir ect ory was /DEVELOP/PROGRAMS:S so t he
par ent of t his direct or y is /DEVELOP.
Mult iple dot , dot specificat ions can be used t o indicat e t hat t he r efer ence is
t o t he par ent of t he par ent of t he par ent , et c. For inst ance:
../../../../some.file
1 CHDIR directory
2 CHDIR
directory pat h t o new dir ect or y
Command synonym: CD
72 ChDir
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y wer e AAA/BBB/CCC/DDD/EEE:S, t his r eference
is t o t he file /AAA/SOME.FILE:S. Alt er nat ely, you could use t he dot , dot specifi-
cat ion and add addit ional dot s t o it , one for each addit ional par ent . The
above r efer ence could be specified wit h:
...../some.file
A dir ect or y name may be specified wit h less t han t he complet e name. For
example:
The ChDir command above specified a dir ect or y name t hat does not exist
(t her e is no direct or y named D under DEVELOP, t he cur rent wor king dir ec-
t or y). In t his sit uat ion, ChDir will t r y t o find a dir ect or y name t hat st ar t s
wit h t he specified name. In t his example, it will find t he subdir ect or y DOC
and it will change t o it .
When sear ching for a dir ect or y name t hat st ar t s wit h t he specified name,
ChDir does not sear ch t he t r ee alphabet ically (alt hough t he Tree command
displays t he subdir ect or ies sor t ed alphabet ically). Inst ead it per for ms a
sequent ial search and uses t he fir st one t hat it finds. If t her e is mor e t han
one dir ect or y name t hat mat ches, it might not use t he one t hat you
t hought it would. For inst ance, if t her e are t wo dir ect or ies named TEST1
and TEST2, changing t o t he T dir ect or y might change t o TEST2.
Mode 2When no dir ect ory name is specified in t his command, t he ChDir
pr ogr am will check t o see if t he Home envir onment var iable has a value
(see Home on page 100 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em
Reference). When Home has a value, t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y is set t o
t hat home dir ect ory.
If Home is undefined or has no value, t he cur r ent working dir ect ory is set
t o t he r oot .
>tree
/develop
doc
files
screens
programs
doc
>cd d
ChDir 73
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>show home
HOME=/DEVELOP:S
>pwd
/DEVELOP/PROGRAMS/DOC:S
>cd
>pwd
/DEVELOP:S
Notes The command name CD is a synonym t o t he ChDir command. It is not a
separat e pr ogr am but only an ent r y in t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGES/language/
SYNONYM.TXT file and, if st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on
page 13 of t his manual and STDSYN on page 110 of t he THEOS Corona
Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference), t his synonym name may not be
allowed.
When you change t he cur r ent working dir ect or y using eit her Mode 1 or
Mode 2 of t his command a sear ch is made for a file named _ChDir.msg in
t hat new direct or y. If t his file is found t hen it is displayed on t he console.
This file may cont ain t he special char act er s and macr os t hat may be used
in logon message files.
Addit ional infor mat ion about dir ect ory names, pat hs and t he cur r ent
wor king dir ect or y may be found in THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing
S ystem Reference, Chapt er 9 Directories and Files, st ar t ing on page 131 and
Appendix D: System Files, st ar t ing on page 209.
Restrictions The directory specified must be owned by t he cur r ent account .
See also FileManager, MkDir, PWD, RmDir, Set, Tree
74 ChDir
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ClassGen 75
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ClassGen Command
The ClassGen command cr eat es or changes a console or pr int er class code specificat ion file.
Operation The SYSTEM.THEOS32 libr ar y is sear ched for an exist ing class code definit ion
file for class code number. If one is found, it is examined t o det er mine if it
is a console class code or a pr int er class code definit ion.
To det er mine t he pr oper number t o use for a new class code, r efer t o
Appendix D: System Files in t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing
Syst em Refer ence.
If no exist ing class code definit ion can be found for number, you ar e
pr ompt ed wit h:
Is this a CONSOLE class file?
Any response ot her t han (Y) is int er pr et ed as a no response and t he class
code definit ion will be for a print er .
If t he PRT opt ion is specified, t he class code definit ion is out put t o t he
pr int er . (A new class code number will pr int a r epor t wit h all fields blank.)
When t he PRT opt ion is not used, t he appr opr iat e set of maint enance
scr eens ar e used t o allow you t o define or change t he definit ions of t he
class code.
Options PRTnn Indicat es t hat ClassGen is t o pr int t he cur r ent class code defi-
nit ion on t he at t ached print er number nn. nn may be a value
bet ween 1 and 64.
The opt ion keywor d PRT may be specified as PRT, PRINT or
PRINTER. As a convenience, PRINTER1 may be specified as P.
CLASSGEN number ( option
number console or print er class code number (1255)
opt ion PRTnn
76 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Console Class
Codes
ClassGen uses sever al scr eens t o define a class code for consoles. These
scr eens gr oup t he definit ion fields int o several cat egor ies:
1. Ter minal name and cur sor cont r ol codes.
2. Video display at t r ibut es and cur sor shape.
3. Scr een edit ing commands.
4. Keyboar d input funct ion codes. (Two scr eens.)
5. Line-dr awing gr aphics. (Two scr eens.)
6. Int ernat ional symbols. (Thr ee scr eens.)
7. Keyboar d int er nat ional symbols. (Thr ee scr eens.)
Refer t o t he Not es sect ion for infor mat ion about navigat ing bet ween
t hese scr eens, moving fr om field-t o-field and ent er ing special char act er
codes.
Console Class Code Maintenance Screens
The following shows t he fields in each of t he maint enance scr eens used for
console class codes.
The fir st screen shows t he fields for set up and cur sor movement .
The Set up field is out put t o t he console when it is fir st at t ached.
Figur e 1: ClassGen, Consoles, Scr een 1
THEOS Classgen - version 5.0
CONSOLE Output attributes for class: 90 PcTerm U.S.A.
Terminal name........... 90 PcTerm U.S.A.
Setup................... ESC . '1'
Direct Cursor Address... ESC - 0x82 0x83
Home.................... RS
Up...................... VT
Down.................... SYN
Left.................... BS
Right................... FF
ClassGen 77
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Dir ect Cur sor Addr ess field is coded t o t ell THEOS how t o posit ion
t he cur sor on consoles using t his class code. Specify t he st r ing of char act er
t hat , when out put t o t he console, posit ions t he cur sor t o a specific locat ion.
Where t he line or column number would be specified, use one of t he follow-
ing codes:
The meanings of t hese t hr ee t ypes of coding ar e:
Absolute The value subst it ut ed is t he r ow or column number . That is,
posit ioning t o r ow five is accomplished by out put t ing a char ac-
t er whose value is five.
Standard The value subst it ut ed is t he r ow or column number plus 32. To
posit ion t o r ow five, a char act er is out put whose value is 37.
ASCII The ASCII digit char act er s ar e out put for t he r ow and column.
To posit ion t o r ow 12, t he charact ers 1 and 2 ar e out put .
Cur sor addr essing, as used by THEOS class codes, is always number base
0 wit h t he or igin in t he upper left cor ner .
Row Number Column Number
128 (0x80) Absolut e 129 (0x81) Absolut e
130 (0x82) St andard 131 (0x83) St andar d
132 (0x84) ASCII 133 (0x85) ASCII
78 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The second scr een shows display at t r ibut e fields.
Most t er minals use one of t wo met hods for enabling var ious video display
at t r ibut es: bit -mapped and ANSI X3.64.
If a par t icular at t r ibut e uses one of t hese met hods, t he fir st char act er of
t he definit ion for t he field must be a special code t hat t he class code can
r ecognize as a t ype code. It is a single charact er whose value r eflect s t he
binar y code r esult ing fr om t he following definit ion:
Figure 2: ClassGen, Consoles, Screen 2
Bit Meaning
7 Must be on.
6 Requir es backspace for mult iple at t r ibut es.
5 On means at t r ibut es ar e bit -mapped.
Off means at t r ibut es use ANSI X3.64 coding.
4 Coding applies t o UNDERLINE at t r ibut e.
3 Coding applies t o BLINK at t r ibut e.
2 Coding applies t o REVERSE VIDEO at t r ibut e.
1 Coding applies t o FORMAT at t r ibut e.
0 Coding applies t o HALF INTENSITY at t r ibut e.
Reverse video on........ 0xBD ESC G 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Reverse video off....... 0xBD ESC G 0x80 '0' 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Underline on............ 0xBD ESC G 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Underline off........... 0xBD ESC G 0x80 '0' 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Blink on................ 0xBD ESC G 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Blink off............... 0xBD ESC G 0x80 '0' 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Half intensity on....... 0xBD ESC G 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Half intensity off...... 0xBD ESC G 0x80 '0' 0x81 @ 0x84 '4' 0x88 '2' 0x90 '8'
Format mode on.......... ESC &
Format mode off......... ESC 0x27
Cursor off.............. ESC . '0'
Cursor on............... ESC . '1'
ClassGen 79
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For inst ance, a t er minal using bit -maps t hat suppor t s all of t he at t r ibut es
and doesnt r equir e a backspace for mult iple at t ribut e encoding would use
a code of 191 (0xBF).
Bit-mapped Attribute Coding
A t erminal using bit -mapped coding should have t he lead-in char act er
descr ibed above (wit h bit posit ion 5 on) followed by t he char act er st r ing
t hat must be out put t o t he t er minal t o enable t he at t r ibut e. In t his char ac-
t er st r ing, wher e t he specific at t ribut e is specified, pr ecede t he at t r ibut e
code wit h a special code der ived fr om t he following t able:
For example, a t erminal using bit -mapped coding for r ever se video, blink
and under line at t r ibut es might be coded as:
252 ESC G 132 '4' 136 '2' 144 '8'
where:
252 Specifies t hat t his at t ribut e r equires special pr ocessing,
uses a display posit ion, is bit -mapped, and applies t o
underline, blink and r ever se video.
ESC G This is t he lead-in used by t he t er minal for at t ribut e cod-
ing.
132 '4' Out put s t he char act er 4 when r ever se video is being
select ed.
136 '2' Out put s t he char act er 2 when blink is being select ed.
144 '8' Out put s t he char act er 8 when under line is being
select ed.
Each at t r ibut e on field must be defined such t hat all of t he at t ribut e
enable codes ar e specified, and t hat each at t r ibut e off field be defined
such t hat all at t r ibut es ar e t ur ned off, followed by t he codes t hat r e-enable
t he at t r ibut es t hat might be st ill on. The example shown in Figur e 2:
Bit Meaning
7 Must be on.
6 Not used.
5 Not used.
4 Char act er following applies t o UNDERLINE at t r ibut e.
3 Char act er following applies t o BLINK at t r ibut e.
2 Char act er following applies t o REVERSE VIDEO at t r ibut e.
1 Char act er following applies t o FORMAT at t r ibut e.
0 Char act er following applies t o HALF INTENSITY at t ribut e.
80 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ClassGen, Consoles, Scr een 2 on page 78 shows an example of t his t ech-
nique.
ANSI X3.64 Attribute Coding
A t er minal using ANSI X3.64 at t r ibut e coding r equir es a st r ing looking
like:
ESC [ '7' m
This specific st r ing would enable t he r ever se video at t r ibut e. To t ur n off
t his at t r ibut e a st r ing looking like t he following is used:
ESC [ '2' '7' m
Because ANSI encoding is common, THEOS class codes have built -in capa-
bilit y t o out put t he pr oper char act er st r ings for t he various video
at t r ibut es suppor t ed by THEOS.
A t er minal using ANSI X3.64 coding has t he lead-in char act er descr ibed
above followed by a 255 (0xFF). Make sur e t hat bit posit ion 5 is off in t he
lead-in char act er . For inst ance:
0xBD 0xFF
This t ells t he class code t hat t he t er minal uses ANSI coding for under lin-
ing, blink, r ever se video and half- int ensit y.
ClassGen 81
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The t hird scr een shows t he fields used for scr een edit ing commands.
These fields ar e fairly obvious in t heir nat ur e and t he manual for your t er -
minal should specify exact ly what char act ers t o use for each of t hese fields.
Ther e ar e t hr ee fields at t he bot t om of t his scr een t hat ar e not so obvious.
The Enable Slave Pr int er and Disable Slave Pr int er fields, r efer t o t he
commands t hat will t ell t he t erminal t o act ivat e it s auxiliar y or secondar y
por t t hat should be connect ed t o a local pr int er. If t he t er minal support s
t his concept , find t he commands in t he t er minal manual t hat inst r uct t he
t er minal t o pass subsequent dat a t o t he auxiliar y por t and t o not display
t hem on t he t er minal scr een. This will pr obably be ident ified as t r anspar -
ent mode.
The last field, Set alpha color , is used on color display t erminals. If t he
t er minal does not suppor t color s, leave t his field blank.
The definit ion in t his field t ells t he class code how t o change color s on t he
t er minal. Specify t he command st r ing r equir ed by t he t er minal for chang-
ing color s. In t his command st r ing subst it ut e t he following codes in t he
appr opr iat e char act er posit ions:
Insert character........ ESC Q
Delete character........ ESC W
Insert line............. ESC E
Delete line............. ESC R
Clear screen............ ESC *
Erase unprotected....... ESC & ESC ; ESC 0x27
Erase to end of line.... ESC T
Erase to end of screen.. ESC Y
Monitor mode on......... ESC U
Monitor mode off........ ESC u
Send to status on....... ESC g ESC f
Send to status off...... CR
Enable Slave Printer.... ESC `
Disable Slave Printer... ESC a
Set alpha color......... ESC ETX 0x88 0x90 0xA0 0xC0
82 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When a color change is r equest ed, THEOS changes t hese codes t o t he cor -
r esponding color code. The color codes used by THEOS ar e:
If your t er minal does not use t hese same number s or char act er s for it s
color s t her e is a mechanism for set t ing t he color palet t e. If t he fir st char-
act er of t he Set Alpha Color field is a 255 (0xFF), t hen t he next eight
char act er s ar e int er pr et ed as t he color palet t e definit ion. This color palet t e
must be specified in t he same sequence t hat THEOS uses color s.
For inst ance, if your t erminal uses let t er s for it s color codes: R for r ed, Y
for yellow, G for gr een, W for whit e, C for cyan, B for blue, M for
magent a and N for black, t he color palet t e is defined wit h:
255 N B G C R M Y W
The following definit ion is t aken from class code 180. This class code is
used on color PC Ter minals. It has a color palet t e t hat mat ches t he one
used by THEOS but uses ASCII digit s inst ead of t he default numer ic
values for t he color s codes.
0xFF '0' '1' '2' '3' '4' '5' '6' '7' ESC / 0x88 0x90 0xA0 0xC0
Code Meaning
136 or 0x88 For egr ound color
144 or 0x90 Backgr ound color
160 or 0xA0 Rever se Video for egr ound color
192 or 0xC0 Rever se Video backgr ound color
Code Color Code Color
0 Black 4 Red
1 Blue 5 Magent a
2 Gr een 6 Yellow
3 Cyan 7 Whit e
ClassGen 83
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Scr eens four and five show t he fields defining t he keyboar d input key
t ranslat ion values.
For each of t he fields, specify t he char act er s or codes t r ansmit t ed by t he
t er minal when t he key is pr essed t hat cor r esponds t o t he funct ion.
For inst ance, if t he t er minal manual indicat es t hat t he (Home) key sends
ESC, [, H t hen define t he Home field as ESC [ 'H'.
If t he t er minals keyboar d t r ansmit s scan codes, define t he field st ar t ing
wit h t he value 255 followed by t he scan code value of t he key or key combi-
nat ion. (See above figur e.)
CONSOLE Input function keys for class: 90 PcTerm U.S.A.
Up...................... 0xFF H
Down.................... 0xFF P
Left.................... 0xFF K
Right................... 0xFF M
Escape.................. ESC
Top..................... 0xFF G
Bottom.................. 0xFF O
Delete character........ 0xFF S
Delete left character... DEL
Page forward............ 0xFF Q
Page backward........... 0xFF I
Word right.............. 0xFF 0xD2
Word left............... 0xFF 0xD3
Search forward.......... 0xFF 0xC1
Search backward......... 0xFF 0xD1
84 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Scr eens six and seven show t he line gr aphics char act er definit ions for t he
t er minal.
You should define a code for each of t hese fields even if t he t er minal does
not suppor t a specific line-dr awing char act er or even if it doesnt support
any line-dr awing char act er s.
Many programs assume t hat t he console can display line-dr awing char ac-
t er s and do not make any allowances for consoles t hat do not . For fields not
suppor t ed by t he t er minal, use eit her some ot her line-dr awing charact er
t hat appear s similar t o t he one desir ed or use a r egular t ext char act er .
In t he above example not ice t hat t he r ounded cor ner char act er s (at t he
bot t om of t he display) ar e t he same codes as t he squar e cor ner charact ers
(at t he t op of t he display). Most t er minals do not suppor t r ounded cor ner s
so t he square cor ner s should be subst it ut ed.
If t he t er minal does not have line-dr awing gr aphics, leave t he var ious
fields blank. THEOS will use r egular t ext char act er s for any fields t hat ar e
undefined. For inst ance, a + char act er for all cor ner s and t he four -way
int er sect ion, a | for ver t ical and left and right int er sect ions, and a - for
hor izont al and up and down int er sect ions.
Figure 5: ClassGen, Consoles, Screen 6
CONSOLE Line Drawing Graphics for class: 90 PcTerm U.S.A.
Upper left corner....... 0xDA
Upper right corner...... 0xBF
Lower right corner...... 0xD9
Lower left corner....... 0xC0
Four way intersection... 0xC5
Left intersection....... 0xC3
Right intersection...... 0xB4
Up intersection......... 0xC2
Down intersection....... 0xC1
Horizontal.............. 0xC4
Vertical................ 0xB3
Round upper left........ 0xDA
Round upper right....... 0xBF
Round lower right....... 0xD9
Round lower left........ 0xC0
ClassGen 85
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Scr eens eight , nine and t en show t he fields defining t he codes used t o dis-
play int er nat ional char act er s.
Symbol char act er t er minology:
Dieresis Anot her word for umlaut ( ) which is t wo dot s on t op of t he
char act er . Example: , , , , , , , , .
Circumflex A diacr it ical mar k t hat looks like an upside-down v ( ) over
t he char act er . Example: , , , , .
Grave accent A diacr it ical mar k t hat looks like a backwar d quot e ( ` ) over
t he char act er . Example: , , , , .
Acute accent A diacr it ical mar k t hat looks like an apost r ophe ( ) over t he
char act er . Example: , , , , , .
Cedilla A diacr it ical mar k t hat looks like a t ail ( ) under t he char ac-
t er. Example: , .
Tilde A diacr it ical mar k t hat looks like a squiggle ( ~ ) over t he
char act er . Example: , .
CONSOLE Output International Symbols for class: 90 PcTerm U.S.A.
Uppercase A dieresis.... 0x8E
Lowercase a dieresis.... 0x84
Lowercase a circumflex.. 0x83
Lowercase a grave accent 0x85
Lowercase a acute accent 0xA0
Uppercase E acute accent 0x90
Lowercase e dieresis.... 0x89
Lowercase e circumflex.. 0x88
Lowercase e grave accent 0x8A
Lowercase e acute accent 0x82
Lowercase i dieresis.... 0x8B
Lowercase i circumflex.. 0x8C
Lowercase i grave accent 0x8D
Lowercase i acute accent 0xA1
Uppercase O dieresis.... 0x99
Lowercase o dieresis.... 0x94
Lowercase o circumflex.. 0x93
Lowercase o grave accent 0x95
Lowercase o acute accent 0xA2
86 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Diphthong A ligat ur e or let t er combinat ion. Example: , .
Bolle A diacr it ical mark t hat looks like a small cir cle ( ) over t he
char act er . Example: , .
Eszet The Ger man ss let t er combinat ion. Example: .
The last t hr ee scr eens show t he definit ions of t he codes r eceived fr om t he
t er minal when t he keyboar d gener at es t he same int er nat ional char act er s
and symbols.
Printer
Class Codes
ClassGen also uses sever al screens t o define class codes for pr int er s. These
scr eens gr oup t he definit ion fields int o several cat egor ies:
1. Pr int er name, init ializat ion and display at t ribut es.
2. Line-dr awing gr aphics. (Two scr eens)
3. Int ernat ional symbols. (Four scr eens)
A pr int er class code uses fewer scr eens t han a console class code mainly
because t here is no keyboar d t o define.
Refer t o t he Not es sect ion for infor mat ion about navigat ing bet ween
t hese scr eens, moving fr om field-t o-field and input t ing special char act er
codes.
ClassGen 87
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Printer Class Code Maintenance Screens
The following shows t he fields used in each of t he maint enance scr eens
used for pr int er class codes.
Of int er est in t his fir st screen is t he Set up field. The cont ent of t his field
is sent t o t he pr int er when it is first at t ached. For spooled pr int er s, t his
st r ing is also sent at t he beginning of each r eport print ed by t he pr int er
spooler .
The r emaining fields on t his scr een and t he ot her scr eens t hat follow ar e
similar t o t hose descr ibed in Figure 2 on page 78 and Figure 5 on page 84.
Notes To move ar ound a scr een use t he () or () keys, or merely ent er (Enter) t o
advance t o t he next field.
The (PageDown) and (PageUp) keys move fr om screen t o scr een while t he (Home)
and (End) keys move t o t he fir st or last scr eens.
To save any changes made and t hen exit , use t he (F10) key. The (F9) or (Esc)
keys exit wit hout saving your changes.
Figur e 7: ClassGen, Pr int er s, Screen 1
PRINTER Attributes for class: 135 HP LaserJet II & III
Printer name............ HP LaserJet II & III
Setup................... ESC E ESC ( '1' '0' U
Boldface on............. ESC ( s '1' B
Boldface off............ ESC ( s '0' B
Underline on............ ESC & d '0' D
Underline off........... ESC & d @
Italics on.............. ESC ( s '1' S
Italics off............. ESC ( s '0' S
Secondary color on......
Secondary color off.....
Compress on............. ESC ( s '1' '6' . '6' '6' H
Compress off............ ESC ( s '1' '0' H
Double wide on..........
Double wide off.........
Double high on..........
Double high off.........
88 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Entering Characters
Each char act er in a field is separat ed by a space fr om t he next char act er in
t he field.
All displayable char act er s except for digit charact ers ar e ent er ed as plain
t ext . Digit char act er s ar e enclosed in a pair of single quot at ion mar ks.
Entering Control Characters
Most fields in a class code definit ion will r equir e t hat you indicat e t hat a
cont r ol char act er is par t of t he definit ion. Since ent r y of a cont r ol char act er
will be t r eat ed by THEOS as a command rat her t han dat a, you will have t o
specify t he cont r ol char act er value in anot her way.
Cont rol char act er s ar e specified wit h eit her t he numer ical value or by
t heir ASCII char act er name. The numer ical value may be specified in dec-
imal or hexadecimal.
Char ASCII Dec Hex Char ASCII Dec Hex
^@ NUL 0 0x0 ^P DLE 16 0x10
Â SOH 1 0x1 ^Q DC1 17 0x11
^B STX 2 0x2 ^R DC2 18 0x12
^C ETX 3 0x3 ^S DC3 19 0x13
^D EOT 4 0x4 ^T DC4 20 0x14
Ê ENQ 5 0x5 Û NAK 21 0x15
^F ACK 6 0x6 ^V SYN 22 0x16
^G BEL 7 0x7 ^W ETB 23 0x17
^H BS 8 0x8 ^X CAN 24 0x18
Î HT 9 0x9 ^Y EM 25 0x19
^J LF 10 0xA ^Z SUB 26 0x1A
^K VT 11 0xB ^[ ESC 27 0x1B
^L FF 12 0xC ^\ FS 28 0x1C
^M CR 13 0xD ^] GS 29 0x1D
^N SO 14 0xE ^^ RS 30 0x1E
Ô SI 15 0xF ^_ US 31 0x1F
DEL 127 0X7F
ClassGen 89
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cont r ol char act er s ar e always displayed wit h t he ASCII name.
Example:
ESC &
27 &
ESC g ESC f
0xFC ESC G 132 '4' 136 '2' 144 '8'
Restrictions The ClassGen command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five and may only be
execut ed when you ar e logged ont o t he SYSTEM account (user number 0).
See also Attach, CRT, Printer, Start, Sysgen
90 ClassGen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cleanup 91
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cleanup Command
The Cleanup command er ases backup, wor k and ot her t empor ar y files.
Operation Mode 1A menu is displayed allowing t he oper at or t o select t he t ype of
cleanup desir ed.
The specific opt ions checked init ially depend upon t he cur rent ly saved con-
figur at ion for t his UserName (see Environment Variables on page 111).
Cleanup is not st ar t ed unt il t he St ar t but t on is pr essed.
1 CLEANUP
2 CLEANUP ( options
opt ions ACCOUNTS QUERY
ALL SUBDIR
NOQUERY TYPE
NOTYPE
92 Cleanup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat t he init ial default s may be set by
t he various opt ions available. Cleanup is not st ar t ed unt il t he St ar t
but t on is pr essed.
Options ACCOUNTS All account s and all dir ect or ies of t hose account s are cleaned
up. Requir es a high pr ivilege level and you must be logged on
t o t he syst em account (account id = 0).
ALL Enable all cleanup masks.
NOQUERY Do not ask for confir mat ion befor e er asing each file.
NOTYPE Do not display t he names of t he files er ased.
QUERY For each file t hat mat ches t he cleanup specificat ion, ask t he
oper at or if it is okay t o er ase it .
SUBDIR Files in subdir ect or ies of t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y ar e
included in t he cleanup operat ion.
TYPE Display t he name of each file delet ed.
Defaults This command uses t he /THEOS/USERS dir ect or y t o save and get it s configu-
r at ion. The default act ions will depend upon t he saved set t ings for t he cur -
r ent user as defined in t he account envir onment var iable UserName.
Cleanup 93
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cautions Because Cleanup er ases gr oups of files and because it uses default s fr om a
possibly shar ed user -defined configur at ion, you can easily er ase files t hat
you did not int end. Always r eview t he menu set t ings before st ar t ing t he
cleanup oper at ion.
Also, enable t he logging opt ion so t hat t her e will be a log of t he files t hat
wer e er ased.
Restrictions The ACCOUNTS opt ion requir es a high pr ivilege level and t hat you be
logged ont o t he syst em account .
See also FileManager
94 Cleanup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Clear 95
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Clear Command
The Clear command clear s t he console and posit ions t he cur sor t o t he upper left cor ner .
Operation The console scr een is clear ed.
Notes The console st at us line is also clear ed.
The console scr een may also be clear ed by pr essing () at t he CSI pr ompt .
The act ion of t his key differs fr om t he Clear command in t wo ways: The
CSI pr ompt is displayed on line 1 and t he st at us line is not cleared.
CLEAR
96 Clear
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Clock 97
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Clock Command
The Clock command displays a clock on t he scr een.
Operation Mode 1Displays a clock using t he last mode r equest ed (analog or digi-
t al).
Mode 2When execut ed, t he Clock command displays a window wit h an
analog clock t hat is updat ed once per second.
Mode 3Display a digit al clock on t he scr een using t he default clock font
or t he font defined in t his user s CLOCK.CFG file.
Notes To t er minat e t his clock display click on t he [X] in t he upper r ight cor ner of
t he window or press (Break),(Q).
The posit ion and size of t he clock displayed can be changed by t he user
wit h t he mouse. The init ial posit ion and size is det er mined by t he last
1 CLOCK
2 CLOCK Analog
3 CLOCK Digital
98 Clock
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
posit ion and size used by t his user and it is saved in t he /THEOS/USERS/user-
name/CLOCK.CFG:S file.
See also Date, Show CLOCK, Show TIME
Color 99
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Color Command
The Color command set s t he default color s used on t he console.
Operation Mode 1Display t he cur r ent color s in effect for t his console.
>color
Normal: WHITE on BLUE
Reverse: WHITE on RED
This mode also r epr ogr ams t he console t o use t hese colors and per for ms an
Er ase t o end-of-scr een oper at ion. This oper at ion can be useful if t he dis-
played colors on your console ar e changed wit hout THEOS knowledge (for
inst ance, by ScanTer m).
Mode 2The default color s for t his console ar e changed. The t ext color is
set t o fg, t he t ext backgr ound color is set t o bg, r ever se video t ext color is
set t o rvfg and rever se video t ext backgr ound color is set t o rvbg.
Befor e exit ing, a clear t o end-of-scr een is per for med.
>color 7 3 7 1
>color
Normal: WHITE on CYAN
Reverse: WHITE on BLUE
>color white red
>color
Normal: WHITE on RED
Reverse: RED on WHITE
1 COLOR
2 COLOR fg bg rvfg rvbg
fg for egr ound color number or name
bg backgr ound color number or name
rvfg r ever se video for egr ound color number or name
rvbg r ever se video backgr ound color number or name
100 Color
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If fewer t han four color s are specified t he color s are set accor dingly:
Omit rvbg: The r ever se video backgr ound is set t o BLACK.
>color white blue cyan
Omit rvfg, rvbg: The r ever se video color s ar e set t o t he r ever se of t he nor -
mal video color s specified.
>color green black
>color
Normal: GREEN on BLACK
Reverse: BLACK on GREEN
Omit all but fg: The backgr ound color is set t o BLACK (unless fg is BLACK,
in which case t he background color is set t o WHITE). The
r ever se video color s ar e set t o t he r ever se of t he nor mal
video color s.
>color 1
>color
Normal: BLUE on BLACK
Reverse: BLACK on BLUE
Colors The color s for fg, bg, rvfg and rvbg may be specified wit h t he color number ,
t he color name or t he single let t er abbr eviat ion of t he color name. When a
color name is used, it must be complet ely spelled out .
Notes The color s changed by t his command only affect t he display of t ext out put
aft er t his command. Text alr eady on t he scr een is not changed. Alt hough a
pr ogr am might change t he color r epr esent at ion of t he t ext or gr aphics t hat
t he pr ogr am displays, t he syst em will r est or e t he colors t o t hose assigned
by t he last usage of t his command aft er each pr ogr am exit s.
Defaults When a console is fir st st ar t ed, t he default color s used ar e defined by t he
/THEOS/CONFIG/COLOR.CFG:S file. This file is maint ained by t he Setup COLOR
command.
Restrictions The console must be color -capable and it s class code must have a pr oper ly
defined Set alpha color field.
See also ClassGen, Setup Color, Sysgen
Code Name Abbrev Code Name Abbrev
0 Black N 4 Red R
1 Blue B 5 Magent a M
2 Gr een G 6 Yellow Y
3 Cyan C 7 Whit e W
Table 2: Color Codes & Names
Compare 101
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Compare Command
This command compares t wo files and repor t s any differences.
Operation Mode 1Compar es file1 wit h file2 and r epor t s on t he differ ences bet ween
t he t wo files. The minimum r epor t is a message: Files ar e equivalent . or
Files ar e not equivalent . Specific infor mat ion about t he differ ences is dis-
played if t he PRTnn or TYPE opt ion is used.
Mode 2The ASCII st r eam file specified by file is used as a source for a
list of file name pair s t o be compar ed. Each line in file specifies t he t wo file
names t hat ar e compar ed. Using t his mode of t he command is ident ical t o
using t he Mode 1 for m for each pair of files specified in file.
>list compare.files
program.source.program1:s programs.original.program1:s
program.source.program4:s programs.original.program4:s
program.source.programx:s programs.original.programx:s
>compare compare.files (file
PROGRAM.SOURCE.PROGRAM1:S PROGRAMS.ORIGINAL.PROGRAM1:S
Files are not equivalent.
PROGRAM.SOURCE.PROGRAM4:S PROGRAMS.ORIGINAL.PROGRAM4:S
Files are equivalent.
PROGRAM.SOURCE.PROGRAMX:S PROGRAMS.ORIGINAL.PROGRAMX:S
1 COMPARE file1 file2 ( options
2 COMPARE file ( FILE options
3 COMPARE file drive ( FILE opt ions
drive dr ive code
file file name wit h opt ional pat h
file1 file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
file2 file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions BINARY NOTYPE
NOCASE PRTnn
NOSPACE TYPE
102 Compare
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 2 except only t he fir st file name in each line of
file is used. The second file name is cr eat ed by using t he fir st file name and
r eplacing t he dr ive-code for t hat file wit h t he drive specified on t he com-
mand line.
>filelist sample.*:s (exec
>compare selected.exec a (file
File: /SAMPLE.FILE1:S, A
Options BINARY Compar es t he t wo files byt e-by-byt e r at her t han line-by-line.
This is a default opt ion when eit her of t he files is not a st r eam
file.
NOCASE The case mode of t he char act er s in t he t wo files is not signifi-
cant in t he comparison.
NOSPACE Ext ra whit e space in t he t wo files is not significant in t he com-
par ison.
NOTTYPE A default opt ion t hat suppr esses t he display of t he differences
bet ween t he t wo files. Only a r esult message is displayed:
Files ar e equivalent . or Files are not equivalent .
Use PRTnn or TYPE t o over r ide t his opt ion.
PRTnn Displays t he differ ences bet ween t he t wo files on t he pr int er .
nn specifies which at t ached pr int er t o use and is in t he r ange
of 164. If nn is omit t ed, PRT1 is assumed.
The for mat of t he display depends upon t he BINARY opt ion. See
Binary File Display on page 104 and ASCII File Display: on page
103.
The alt er nat e keywords PRINT and PRINTER may be used
inst ead of PRT. As a convenience, PRINTER1 may be specified
as P.
TYPE Displays t he differ ences bet ween t he t wo files on t he st andar d
out put device (normally t he console). The for mat of t he display
depends upon t he BINARY opt ion.
Compare 103
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ASCII File
Display:
When t wo st r eam files cont ain ASCII dat a and t he BINARY opt ion is not
specified, t he files ar e compar ed on a line-by-line basis. When opt ion
PRTnn or TYPE is used, t he specific differ ences bet ween t he t wo files ar e
shown wit h a plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) symbol t o indicat e t he line t hat must
be added or delet ed fr om file2 t o make it equivalent t o file1.
For inst ance, a Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am has been edit ed wit h
new comment s added at t he beginning of t he pr ogr am (line number s 16).
Addit ionally, t he capit alizat ion of one wor d was changed at line 110.
>compare julian.basic julian.backup (type
1+000001 ! Program: JULIAN Compute Julian date
2+000002
3+000003 ! Programmer: John Doe
4+000004
5+000005 OPTION VERSION 1.0,"(C) 1995 by ABC Inc."
6+000006
17-000110 PRINT "Today's julian date is: ";
17+000110 PRINT "Today's Julian date is: ";
This display indicat es t hat t he files ar e not t he same and t hat t he second
file (J ULIAN.BACKUP) must have t he following changes made t o it t o make it
t he same as t he fir st file (J ULIAN.BASIC):
1. Six lines must be added at t he beginning of t he file.
2. The 17t h line (aft er t he six lines ar e added) must be delet ed.
3. A new 17t h line must be added.
When a differ ence is found, t he Compare command uses a buffer t o scan
ahead in t he file t o see if t he difference is an addit ion t o t he file (a mat ch-
ing line is found lat er in t he file1), a delet ion was made (a mat ching line is
found lat er in file2) or if a change was made. This buffer holds appr oxi-
mat ely 40 lines of t ext .
104 Compare
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Binary File
Display
When t wo non-st r eam files are compar ed or when t he BINARY opt ion is
specified, t he files ar e compar ed on a byt e-by-byt e basis. When opt ion
PRTnn or TYPE is used, t he specific differ ences bet ween t he t wo files ar e
shown.
For inst ance, a programs ver sion number is changed, a st r ing lit er al is
changed and t he pr ogr am is r ecompiled. A comparison of t he new program
command wit h t he pr ior ver sion of t he command (r enamed t o have a file
t ype of OLDCMD befor e t he r ecompilat ion) might show:
>compare julian.command julian.oldcmd (type
00000105 52 53
00000107 20 21
00000109 8D 8C
00000115 31 30
00005A1D 4A 6A
00005A5D 6E 61
00005A5E 6E 61
00005A5F 6D 6E
etc.
Each line of t he display shows a locat ion in t he files, t he value of t hat loca-
t ion in file1, followed by t he value of t hat locat ion in file2.
Defaults NOTTYPE is a default opt ion. BINARY is a default opt ion when eit her of t he
files is not a st r eam file.
Return Codes Unless an er ror is det ect ed, when t he t wo files ar e equivalent t he r et urn
code is zero ( 0 ); ot her wise t he r et ur n code is one ( 1 ).
Cautions Compar ing t wo st ream files t hat cont ain coded or binary infor mat ion wit h-
out using t he BINARY opt ion might produce er r oneous r esult s. When in
doubt , always use t he BINARY opt ion.
Compress 105
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Compress Command
The Compress command compresses a file and saves t he compr essed form in a compr ession
libr ar y file.
Operation Mode 1Each file specified on t he command line is compr essed and
added t o t he compr ession libr ar y file compress-file.
If compress-file does not exist , it is cr eat ed. When compress-file exist s and
file alr eady exist s in t hat compress-file, it is r emoved befor e being added t o
t he end of t he compress-file.
>compress old.programs original.source.*
47% original.source.addrsort
48% original.source.dflt
46% original.source.entity
46% original.source.eod1
38% original.source.eom1
...
Unless t he PRESERVED opt ion is used, each file t hat is compr essed has it s
modified at t r ibut e r eset . (The modified at t ribut e is set on t he compress-file
so it may be included on t he next incr ement al or differ ent ial archive.)
1 COMPRESS compress-file file... ( options
2 COMPRESS compress-file file ( FILES opt ions
3 COMPRESS compress-file - file
4 COMPRESS compress-file
compress-file file name of r esult ing compression file, wit h opt ional pat h
file file name of source file, wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild
car ds
opt ions DELETE PRESERVE
FILES SELFEXPAND
MODIFIED SUBDIR
NOTYPE TYPE
PASSWORD
106 Compress
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2The files list ed in file are compr essed and copied int o compress-
file. file must be an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per
line. The SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC files cr eat ed by FileList and t he
FOUND.EXEC creat ed by Look can be used for t his specificat ion file (see The
EXEC and FILES Options on page 239). You may also cr eat e t he specifica-
t ion file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be compr essed:
>filelist a not *.basic:a not *.command:a (10/1/01 exec
A file now exist s t hat list s all of t he files t hat have been changed since
10/01/2001. The following command will compr ess t hese files:
>compress old.files selected.exec (file preserve
91% dat.acc
14% dat.def
82% dat.inccod
85% dat.ass
92% dat.def
74% frn.anldat
...
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat each file pr eceded by a minus sign
is delet ed fr om t he compress-file inst ead of being added t o it .
>compress old.files -retail.tickets
retail.tickets removed.
Mode 4No files ar e compr essed wit h t his mode. Inst ead, t he list of files
alr eady cont ained in compress-file ar e displayed on t he st andar d out put
device.
>compress old.files
File name Date Time Size Rate
dat.acc 12May88 11:41 1,024 91%
dat.def 31Dec89 16:00 1,024 14%
dat.inccod 31Jul00 19:31 1,804 82%
dat.ass 13Apr98 19:07 1,668 85%
dat.def 15Sep96 18:49 1,024 92%
frn.anldat 28Mar01 08:39 23,650 74%
...
The Dat e, Time and Size columns refer t o t he t ime-st amp and size of
t he or iginal, uncompr essed for m of t he file. Rat e r efer s t o t he compr es-
sion r at io of t he file.
Compress 107
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options DELETE Tells Compress t o delet e file aft er adding it t o compress-file. (If
file is pr eceded by a minus sign, as in Mode 3, it is removed
fr om t he compress-file but it is not delet ed.)
FILES Invokes Mode 2 of t he Compress command.
MODIFIED Specifies t hat only files t hat have t heir modified at t r ibut e set
ar e t o be compr essed.
NOTYPE Tells Compress t o not display t he r esult s of each file com-
pr essed and also t o suppr ess t he pr ogr ess bar . Only er r or mes-
sages ar e displayed on t he stderr device. The gener al r esult
message (t he nn files compr essed. message prior t o exit ing
Compress) is also suppressed wit h t his opt ion.
>compress old.files myprog.basic (notype
>
PASSWORD A passwor d is specified following t he PASSWORD opt ion key-
wor d. All of t he files added t o t he compress-file ar e encoded
wit h t his passwor d and t hey cannot be expanded wit hout spec-
ifying t he same passwor d.
>compress private.files *.text (notype password aard-
vark
PRESERVED Tells Compress t o not clear t he modified at t r ibut e fr om a file
t hat is compr essed. Wit hout t his opt ion, ever y file t hat is com-
pr essed has it s modified at t ribut e clear ed.
SELFEXPAND The result ing compress-file is a self-expanding execut able
pr ogr am file. The file-t ype of compress-file should be CMD, COM-
MAND or EXC.
SUBDIR Tells Compress t hat t he full pat h of t he file is t o be used when
saving t he image of file. When t his opt ion is not used, only t he
file name is saved, not it s pat h infor mat ion.
By using t his opt ion, t he Expand command has sufficient infor -
mat ion t o ext r act and r est ore t he file t o it s original locat ion.
108 Compress
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE In combinat ion wit h t he NOTYPE opt ion, t his is a t r i-st at e
opt ion t hat t ells Compress whet her t o display t he r esult s of
each file compr ession or not . When TYPE and NOTYPE ar e not
specified, Compress displays a pr ogr ess bar and any er r or mes-
sages but does not display t he names of t he files being com-
pressed. Specifying TYPE displays t he names of t he files being
compr essed. NOTYPE displays only err or messages. This dis-
play can be redir ect ed.
>compress old.files selected.exec (file
91% dat.acc
14% dat.def
82% dat.inccod
...
Notes compress-file is r efer r ed t o as a compression libr ar y file because it is a
single file cont aining t he compr essed ver sions of one or mor e files. It is not
a librar y in t he nor mal usage of t he t er m libr ar y.
When compress-file is specified as a t ypeless file specificat ion (no per iod
and no file-t ype specified), t he default file-t ype of CMP is used for t he com-
press-file.
When Mode 1 or Mode 2 is used t o add files t o an exist ing compress-file, any
pr evious ver sions of t he files wit h t he same name are r emoved and t hen
t he cur rent ver sion is added t o t he end of t he compress-file.
Typically, ASCII t ext files are compr essed t o 40% t o 60% of t heir or iginal
size; binary files (pr ogr ams and for mat t ed dat a files) are compr essed t o
50% t o 70% of t heir or iginal size.
Defaults TYPE is a default opt ion.
See also Backup, CopyFile, Expand, FileManager, FileType, TArchive, TBackup
Config 109
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Config EXEC
This command is used t o save t he var ious syst em configur at ion files in a for mat t hat is suit -
able for sending t o THEOS cust omer suppor t .
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he pr ogr am.
Mode 2Invokes t he Config exec one or bot h of t he opt ions.
Options NAME filename Defines t he out put name. This name is used for bot h t he
t ext file t hat is gener at ed and for t he compr essed ver sion of t he
t ext file. The compr essed ver sion has a file-t ype of CMP. When
t his mode is not used, t he t ext file t hat is cr eat ed is named
wit h t he serial number of t he syst em and a file-t ype of CFG. The
out put files ar e always wr it t en t o t he S dr ive.
NOBRIEF Init ializes t he menu so t hat t he less-impor t ant files ar e
included in t he r esult .
Notes When Config is invoked it offer s t he user a menu:
Select one of t he menu it ems and pr ess (Enter).
All System-related config. Causes t he file gener at ed t o include t he infor -
mat ion fr om t he var ious configurat ion files relat ing t o t he syst em.
All Network-related config. Causes t he file gener at ed t o include t he infor-
mat ion fr om t he var ious net wor k configur at ion files.
1 CONFIG
2 CONFIG options
opt ions NAME filename
NOBRIEF
110 Config
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
All System and Network configs. Causes t he file gener at ed t o include t he
infor mat ion fr om all of t he syst em and net wor k relat ed configur at ion files.
Customize. This displays a menu of t he configur at ion files and allow you
t o specify which ones t o include when gener at ing t he t ext file. Some of t he
most common it ems will be enabled by default .
At t he end of t he list of configur at ions available t her e is an addit ional
select ion t hat allows you t o change t he file name used t o save t he infor ma-
t ion.
Defaults The st andard set of configur at ion infor mat ion saved by t his command
includes:
+ Cur r ent at t achment s (Attach)
+ Cur r ent soft war e ver sions (Show Version)
Config 111
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
+ Syst em configur at ion file (Setup Sysgen)
+ Show command infor mat ion for var ious devices
+ SIO device configur at ion file (Setup SIO)
+ CRT configur at ion file (Setup CRT)
+ St art up configur at ion file (par t of Setup Sysgen)
+ Gener al net wor k configur at ion (Setup Net Ident)
+ THEOMail configurat ion file (THEOMail)
+ FTP client configur at ion file (Setup Net FTP Client)
+ FTP ser ver configur at ion file (Setup Net FTP Server)
+ HTTP ser ver configur at ion file (Setup Net HTTP Server)
+ Gut enber g client configur at ion file (Setup Net Gutenberg Client)
+ Web Maint enance ser ver configur at ion file (Setup Net WebMaint)
+ Post Office server configur at ion file (Setup Net PostOffice)
+ DHCP ser ver configur at ion file (Setup Net DHCP)
+ DNS ser ver configur at ion file (Setup Net DNS)
+ TNFS ser ver and client configur at ion file (Setup Net TNFS)
+ TFTP server configur at ion file (Setup Net TFTP)
When NOB is specified, t he following addit ional infor mat ion is saved by
t his command:
+ Cur rent st ar t ed user s (Show User)
+ Memory usage (Show Memory)
+ Device names (/THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT)
+ Console session and object color s (Setup Color)
+ DigiBoar d CX configur at ion (Setup CX)
+ Modem configur at ion (/THEOS/CONFIG/MODEM.CFG)
+ Syst em disk par amet er s (Disk S Show)
Restrictions This command may be used only while logged ont o t he SYSTEM account .
112 Config
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CopyFile 113
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CopyFile Command
The CopyFile command copies a file fr om one locat ion t o anot her.
1 COPYFILE from-file t o-file ( options
2 COPYFILE from-file t o-device ( options
3 COPYFILE from-drive to-drive ( options
4 COPYFILE file ( FILES options
5 COPYFILE file from-drive to-device ( FILES opt ions
6 COPYFILE ( opt ions
file file name of specificat ions file, wit h opt ional pat h
from-file file name of sour ce file, wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild
car ds
to-file file name of dest inat ion file, wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain
wild car ds
from-drive disk dr ive let t er for sour ce files
to-device to-drive
COMnn
CON
PRTnn
TAPn
to-drive disk dr ive let t er for dest inat ion files
opt ions APPEND LOWCASE OLDFILE TRANS
BYREC MODIFIED PRESERVE TRUNCATE nnn
EOFSENT NEWDATE PUBLIC TYPE
EXPORT NEWFILE QUERY UPCASE
FILES NOQUERY REPLACE VERIFY
FOR nnn NOSORT SORT date1
FRKEY kkk NOTYPE SPECS date2
FRLABEL lll NOVERIFY SUBDIR
FROM nnn OLDDATE TOKEY kkk
IMPORT OLDER TOLABEL lll
114 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Copies from-file t o t he to-file.
>copyfile one.file another.file
>copyfile *.data =.datacopy
Refer t o Restrictions on page 129 for a descr ipt ion of gener al r est r ict ions
on file owner ship, public files and copying files fr om or t o subdirect or ies.
The from-file and to-file may cont ain wild-car d specificat ions. See Wild
Car d Specificat ions on page 138.
Mode 2Copies from-file t o t o-device. When to-device is a disk-dr ive label,
t he dest inat ion file will have t he same file name as t he sour ce file.
>copyfile *.data:s f
>copyfile *.data:s =.=:f
The above t wo commands pr oduce ident ical r esult s.
This mode is also used when you want t o copy a file t o a communicat ions
por t , console, pr int er or t o a t ape volume.
>copyfile master.index =.=:tape (norewind
>copyfile text.file com2
Only st r eam files may be copied t o devices ot her t han a disk.
Mode 3This is a shor t hand met hod for specifying t hat you want all files
copied fr om one dr ive t o anot her .
>copyfile s f
>copyfile *.*.*:s =.=.=:f
The above t wo commands ar e equivalent .
Remember, unless you use t he PUBLIC opt ion, only files owned by t he cur -
r ent account may be copied. Unless t he SUBDIR opt ion is used, only files in
a single dir ect or y ar e copied.
This mode can also be used t o copy st r eam dat a fr om one communicat ions
por t t o anot her , or fr om or t o a t ape drive.
>copyfile :com4 :com8
>copyfile :com3 sample.file:tape2
CopyFile 115
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4file is an ASCII st r eam file cont aining t wo file descr ipt ions per
line. The fir st file descr ipt ion in t he line is t r eat ed as a from-file and t he
second file descr ipt ion is t he to-file. For each line in file, a Mode 1 or Mode 2
CopyFile is per for med, as appr opriat e.
This mode of t he CopyFile command is convenient when one or mor e set s of
files ar e r epet it ively copied. Mer ely edit a file cont aining file descript ion
pair s, such as:
>edit daily.files
customer.master:s /backup/customer.master:s
customer.history:s /backup/customer.history:s
customer.invoices:s /backup/customer.invoices:s
general.legder.*:s /backup/=.=.=:s
check.*:s /backup/=.=
/programs/program.source.*:s a
>copyfile daily.files (file replace noquery notype
By using some of t he file select ion opt ions in addit ion t o t his file specifica-
t ions file, t he copy oper at ion can be even mor e power ful. For inst ance:
>copyfile daily.files (file replace noquery notype older
Her e, t he OLDER opt ion r est rict s t he copy oper at ion so t hat only files t hat
have been changed since t he last copy ar e copied t his t ime. Similar ly:
>copyfile daily.files (file replace noquery notype modified
This command copies only t hose files t hat have t heir modified st at us set .
Mode 5Similar t o Mode 4, file is an ASCII st r eam file but it cont ains one
file descr ipt ion per line. This file descr ipt ion is t he sour ce file specificat ion.
If it cont ains a dr ive code, t hat dr ive code is ignor ed and t he from-drive
specified on t he command line is used inst ead.
For each line in file, a Mode 2 CopyFile is per for med. For inst ance:
>edit daily.files
customer.master
customer.history
customer.invoices
general.ledger.*
check.*
/programs/program.source.*
>copyfile daily.files a b (file replace noquery notype noq
is equivalent t o:
>copyfile customer.master:a b (replace notype noq
116 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>copyfile customer.history:a b (replace notype noq
>copyfile customer.invoices:a b (replace notype noq
>copyfile general.ledger.*:a b (replace notype noq
>copyfile check.*:a b (replace notype noq
>copyfile /programs/program.source.*:a b (replace notype noq
Mode 6This is t he int eract ive mode of t he CopyFile command. Because
no files are specified on t he command line, you ar e pr ompt ed t o ent er t he
file names t o copy:
>copyfile (noquery
?sample.file* j
"SAMPLE.FILE1:S" copied to "SAMPLE.FILE1:J".
"SAMPLE.FILE2:S" copied to "SAMPLE.FILE2:J".
?sample.file* /copies/samples/=.=:j
"SAMPLE.FILE1:S" copied to "/COPIES/SAMPLES/SAMPLE.FILE1:J".
"SAMPLE.FILE2:S" copied to "/COPIES/SAMPLES/SAMPLE.FILE2:J".
?
Options APPEND Applies only t o st ream files. This opt ion t ells CopyFile t hat , if
t he dest inat ion file alr eady exist s and it is a st r eam file, t he
sour ce file is appended t o t he end of t he exist ing dest inat ion
file.
BYREC Applies only t o indexed, keyed and dir ect files. Indicat es t hat ,
if t he dest inat ion file alr eady exist s, t he r ecor ds in t he sour ce
file are added t o t he dest inat ion file.
If t he dest inat ion file does not exist , a new, empt y file is cr e-
at ed and t he r ecor ds in t he sour ce file ar e copied t o t he new
dest inat ion file one r ecor d at a t ime. Alt hough t his copy pr o-
cess is slower t han a file copy, t he dest inat ion is a clean ver -
sion of t he sour ce file because no delet ed r ecor ds ar e copied
and t he t ree st r uct ure of an indexed or keyed file is built fr om
scr at ch.
EOFSENT Indicat es t hat t he default end-of-file sent inel char act er is not
t he default EOT char act er (^ D). You will be pr ompt ed t o ent er
t he end-of-file sent inel char act er befor e copying begins. A max-
imum of four char act er s may be ent er ed as t his sent inel.
Use t his opt ion only when t he from-file is not a disk or t ape
file. That is, when t he sour ce file is coming fr om t he console or
a communicat ions por t .
CopyFile 117
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EXPORT from-file is expor t ed t o t o-file. This opt ion is ignor ed when
t he from-files or ganizat ion is not dir ect , indexed or keyed. The
pur pose of t he EXPORT opt ion is t o conver t a file so t hat it can
be used in an envir onment t hat does not suppor t THEOS for -
mat t ed r ecor ds, or dir ect , indexed or keyed or ganizat ion files.
A file is expor t ed by copying t he r ecor ds in t he from-file t o t he
st r eam file to-file, changing t he for mat t ed fields in t he r ecor d
t o quot ed st r ing fields. The key field of each r ecor d in from-file
is out put as t he fir st field in t o-file.
For inst ance, from-file is an indexed file wit h r ecor ds cr eat ed
by t he BASIC language st at ement :
WRITE #1,KEY$:STRING$,PHRASE$,INTEGER%,FLOAT
Each input r ecor d looks like:
Key: String,"Phrase needing quotes",1,2.345
The r esult ing r ecor d in t o-file looks like:
"Key",String,"Phrase needing quotes",1,2.345
and can be r ead wit h t he BASIC language st at ement :
INPUT #1:KEY$,STRING$,PHRASE$,INTEGER%,FLOAT
Each field is comma-separat ed fr om ot her fields. It is enclosed
in quot es if t he field is a st r ing cont aining embedded spaces or
quot es.
The EXPORT opt ion implies t he BYREC opt ion and can be used
wit h ot her r ecor d select ion opt ions such as FOR, FRKEY, FROM
and TOKEY. The SPECS and TRANS opt ions are ignored when
specified wit h EXPORT.
FILES Indicat es t hat Mode 4 or Mode 5 of t he CopyFile command is
used. The file specifies an ASCII st ream file wit h each r ecor d
in t he file specifying a file t o be copied. The file name specifica-
t ions in t his file may include t he pat h t o t he file.
For a Mode 4 request , t he r ecor ds in file specify bot h t he sour ce
file name and t he dest inat ion file name. In a Mode 5 r equest ,
t he r ecor ds need only specify t he sour ce file name.
FOR Indicat es t hat only nnn r ecor ds of t he sour ce file ar e copied t o
t he dest inat ion file. The FRKEY, FRLABEL or FROM opt ion
118 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
must be used or t he FOR opt ion will be ignor ed (t he ent ir e file
is copied).
>copyfile last.letter customer.= (from 1 for 8
This command copies t he fir st eight lines of one file t o anot her
file.
FRKEY Used wit h indexed and keyed files t o specify t he fir st r ecor d t o
copy.
kkk r epr esent s t he key of t he fir st r ecor d t o copy. Only r ecor ds
whose keys ar e great er t han or equal t o t his key are copied.
Can be used wit h t he FOR and TOKEY opt ions t o limit t he num-
ber of r ecor ds copied aft er t his fir st r ecor d is locat ed.
>copy customer.master new.master (frkey "THEOS"
This command copies all of t he records in t he CUSTOMER.MASTER
file whose keys st art wit h t ext t hat is gr eat er t han or equal t o
THEOS.
FRLABEL Used wit h ASCII st r eam files t o specify t he fir st record t o copy.
lll r epr esent s t he st ar t ing t ext of t he fir st r ecor d t o copy. No
r ecor ds ar e copied unt il a r ecor d st ar t ing wit h t his t ext is
found. When found, t hat r ecor d is copied t o t he dest inat ion file
along wit h t he r ecor ds t hat follow it in t he source file. Can be
used wit h t he FOR and TOLABEL opt ions t o limit t he number of
r ecor ds copied aft er t his fir st r ecor d is locat ed.
>copy memo.model new.memo (frlabel "cc:" append
This command copies t he last lines of MEMO.MODEL, beginning
wit h t he line st ar t ing wit h cc:.
FROM Used wit h ASCII st r eam files t o specify t he fir st record t o copy.
nnn r epr esent s t he record number of t he fir st r ecor d t o copy.
No r ecor ds ar e copied unt il t he nnn
t h
r ecor d is found. When
found, t hat r ecor d is copied t o t he dest inat ion file along wit h
t he r ecor ds t hat follow it in t he sour ce file. Can be used wit h
t he FOR and TOLABEL opt ions t o limit t he number of r ecor ds
copied aft er t his fir st r ecor d is locat ed.
IMPORT This is t he complement ar y opt ion t o t he EXPORT opt ion. When
used, t he from-file is impor t ed int o t he t o-file. from-file must be
a st r eam file cont aining r ecor ds wit h comma-separ at ed fields.
CopyFile 119
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This opt ion is ignor ed if t o-file is not a dir ect , indexed or keyed
file.
The from-file is impor t ed by copying t he r ecor ds in t he from-
file t o t he to-file. Each field in t he import ed r ecor d is conver t ed
t o a for mat t ed field before wr it ing it t o t o-file. The for mat of
t he r ecor ds in t he fr om-file is assumed t o be like t he for mat of
t he r ecor ds t hat ar e out put wit h t he EXPORT opt ion.
You can cont r ol t he conver sion of t he fields by using t he SPECS
opt ion.
LOWCASE Used wit h ASCII st r eam files t o t r anslat e all upper case char -
act er s t o t heir lower case equivalent s. All non-alphabet ic char -
act er s are copied wit hout any t r anslat ion.
Most of t he mult inat ional char act er s (, , , etc. ) ar e t r ans-
lat ed wit h t his opt ion. See Lowcase on page 347 for mor e
infor mat ion.
MODIFIED Copies t he source file only if it s modified at t r ibut e is set . Aft er
t he file is copied, t he modified at t r ibut e of t he sour ce file is
r eset (unless t he PRESERVE opt ion is also used). This opt ion
pr ovides a met hod of cr eat ing a set of incr ement al copies of
files. For inst ance, if t he following command is execut ed ever y-
day:
>copy *.data:s f (modified
Then each day a copy is made of all files t hat have been
updat ed or changed since t he last t ime t he copy was per for med
or t he modified at t r ibut es wer e clear ed. See Change on page
65.
See also TArchive on page 601.
NEWDATE The dest inat ion files direct or y ent r y is updat ed wit h t he cur -
r ent dat e and t ime. This is a default opt ion when any ot her
opt ion is used t hat causes t he dest inat ion file t o differ fr om t he
sour ce file, such as: APPEND, BYREC, EXPORT, FOR, FRKEY,
FRLABEL, FROM, LOWCASE, SPECS, TOKEY, TOLABEL, TRANS,
TRUNCATE and UPCASE.
To disable t his opt ion use t he OLDDATE opt ion.
NEWFILE Indicat es t hat CopyFile should only at t empt t o copy files if t he
dest inat ion file name does not alr eady exist . Not e t hat , if
120 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUERY is used, you are not queried about files if t he dest ina-
t ion file name alr eady exist s.
This is a default opt ion. To disable t his opt ion use t he OLDFILE
or t he REPLACE opt ions.
NOQUERY Tells CopyFile t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e copying each
file. This is a default opt ion when wild car ds ar e not used.
>copyfile gl.* f (noq
"GL.MASTER:S" copied to "GL.MASTER:F".
"GL.JOURNAL:S" copied to "GL.JOURNAL:F".
"GL.HISTORY:S" copied to "GL.HISTORY:F".
To disable t his opt ion use t he QUERY opt ion.
NOSORT A default opt ion t hat t ells CopyFile t o copy t he files mat ching
t he source file specificat ions in t he or der t hat t he file names
ar e found on disk.
To disable t his opt ion use t he SORT opt ion.
NOTYPE Tells CopyFile t o not display t he r esult s of each file copy on t he
st andard out put device. The general r esult message (t he nn
files copied. message pr ior t o exit ing CopyFile) is also sup-
pressed wit h t his opt ion.
>copyfile gl.* f (not
Ok to copy "GL.MASTER:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "GL.JOURNAL:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "GL.HISTORY:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
To disable t his opt ion use t he TYPE opt ion.
NOVERIFY A default opt ion t hat t ells CopyFile t o not ver ify t hat t he copy
was done successfully. Nor mally, t he har dwar e verificat ion
t hat is always done is mor e t han sufficient t o assur e t hat t he
copy is cor r ect .
To disable t his opt ion use t he VERIFY opt ion.
OLDDATE Each dest inat ion files direct or y ent r y is set t o t he sour ce files
last change dat e. This is a default opt ion when t he dest inat ion
is an exact copy of t he sour ce file.
To disable t his opt ion use t he NEWDATE opt ion.
OLDER Copies t he sour ce file t o t he dest inat ion file only if t he dest ina-
t ion files last change dat e is older t han t he sour ce files or if
CopyFile 121
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t he dest inat ion file does not exist . The REPLACE opt ion is
implied by t his opt ion. Not e t hat , if QUERY is used, you ar e not
quer ied about files if t he dest inat ion file is newer .
OLDFILE Indicat es t hat CopyFile should at t empt t o copy a file only if t he
dest inat ion file name alr eady exist s. This opt ion implies a
REPLACE opt ion. Not e t hat , if QUERY is used, you ar e not que-
r ied about files if t he dest inat ion file name does not exist .
Not e t hat only t he dest inat ion file name is checked. It could be
a t ot ally differ ent file. For inst ance, an exist ing command pr o-
gr am could be r eplaced by a st r eam file or indexed file.
To disable t his opt ion use t he NEWFILE opt ion.
PRESERVE Used wit h t he MODIFIED opt ion t o specify t hat sour ce files
modified at t r ibut e is not t o be reset . This opt ion provides a
met hod of cr eat ing a set of differ ent ial copies of files. For
inst ance, if t he following command is execut ed ever y day:
>copy *.data:s f (modified preserve
Then each day a copy is made of all files t hat have been
updat ed or changed since t he last t ime t he modified at t r ibut es
wer e clear ed. See Change on page 65.
See also TArchive on page 601.
PUBLIC Allows publicly owned files t o be copied. Nor mally, when you
ar e logged ont o a pr ivat e account , only files owned by t he cur -
r ent account ar e searched. Wit h t his opt ion, files owned by t he
SYSTEM account may be copied as long as t heir shar ed access
pr ot ect ions allow it . See File Access Pr ot ect ion on page 145.
QUERY Tells CopyFile t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he
sour ce file specificat ions is t o be copied. This is a default opt ion
when wild car ds ar e used.
>copy *.data i
Ok to copy "CUSTOMER.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o copy quest ion is asked you may r espond wit h
a (Y) for yes, (N) for no or (A) for all. Responding wit h (A) means
yes t o t his file and all remaining files ar e included wit hout
being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he copy oper at ion.
122 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REPLACE Allows a file t o be copied even if it alr eady exist s on t he dest i-
nat ion dr ive. Nor mally, when t he dest inat ion file name
alr eady exist s, CopyFile will not per for m t he copy. This opt ion
t ells CopyFile t hat if it alr eady exist s it should er ase t he exist -
ing file and r eplace it wit h a copy of t he sour ce file.
If t he dest inat ion file does not exist , t his opt ion has no effect .
>copy *.data:s f (replace noquery
"HISTORY.DATA:S" replaces "HISTORY.DATA:F".
"CUSTOMER.DATA:S" replaces "CUSTOMER.DATA:F".
"NEW.DATA:S" copied to "NEW.DATA:F".
3 files copied.
The REPLACE opt ion is implied by bot h t he OLDER and OLD-
FILE opt ions. However , t he OLDFILE opt ion will not copy a file
unless t he dest inat ion file name alr eady exist s.
SORT Tells CopyFile t o find all of t he files t hat mat ch t he sour ce file
specificat ions and t o sor t t he file names in ascending alphabet -
ical order . When CopyFile has creat ed t his sor t ed list of possible
file names t o copy, it begins t he nor mal copy oper at ion, using
t he QUERY opt ion if it is in effect .
>copy *.data:s f (replace noquery sort
"NEW.DATA:S" copied to "NEW.DATA:F".
3 files copied.
Compar e t his example display wit h t he example used in t he
REPLACE opt ion descr ipt ion.
SPECS This opt ion allows t he manipulat ion of each r ecor d in a st r eam
file. Wit h t his opt ion you can omit por t ions of each r ecor d, add
t ext t o each r ecor d and r ear r ange t he cont ent s of t he r ecor ds.
For a descr ipt ion of t his opt ions usage, see Copying with Field
Specifications on page 126.
SUBDIR Indicat es t hat all subdir ect or ies in t he sour ce file dir ect or y ar e
t o be copied t o t he dest inat ion drive. If a subdir ect or y does not
exist on t he dest inat ion dr ive, it is aut omat ically cr eat ed.
>copy /art/*.*.*:s j (subdir noq
"/ART/ARTICLE.EXE:S" copied to "ARTICLE.EXEC:J".
"/ART/GENERAL/PROGRAM.NOTES.CONVERSN:S" copied
to "/GENERAL/PROGRAM.NOTES.CONVERSN:J".
...
CopyFile 123
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
In t his example all of t he files in /ART dir ect or y of t he S dr ive
ar e copied t o t he J dr ive. When a subdir ect or y of /ART is encoun-
t ered, it is copied along wit h all files in t hat subdirect or y. If a
subdir ect or y cont ains a subdir ect or y, it s files will also be cop-
ied, and so on.
If t he sour ce pat h cont ains subdir ect ories and t he SUBDIR
opt ion is not used, t hen t he subdir ect or ies and t he files in
t hose subdir ect or ies ar e not copied.
The SORT opt ion is a default when SUBDIR is specified.
TOKEY Used wit h indexed and keyed files t o specify t he last r ecor d t o
copy. Can be used wit h t he FRKEY opt ion t o limit t he number
of r ecor ds copied befor e t his last r ecor d is locat ed.
kkk repr esent s t he key of t he last r ecor d t o copy. Only r ecor ds
whose keys ar e less t han or equal t o t his key ar e copied.
>copy customer.master new.master (tokey "THEOS"
This command copies all of t he r ecor ds in t he CUSTOMER.MASTER
file whose keys st ar t wit h t ext t hat is less t han or equal t o
THEOS.
TOLABEL Used wit h ASCII st r eam files t o specify t he last recor d t o copy.
Can be used wit h t he FRLABEL opt ion t o limit t he number of
r ecor ds copied befor e t his last r ecor d is locat ed.
lll r epr esent s t he st ar t ing t ext of t he last r ecor d t o copy.
Recor ds are copied unt il a r ecor d st ar t ing wit h t his t ext is
found and, when found, t hat r ecor d is copied t o t he dest inat ion
file.
>copy memo.model new.memo (tolabel "Re:"
TRANS This opt ion allows t he manipulat ion of each r ecor d in a st r eam
file. Wit h t his opt ion you can t r anslat e one or mor e char act er s
in each input r ecor d t o a differ ent char act er in t he out put
r ecor d.
For a descript ion of t his opt ions usage see Copying with Charac-
ter Translation on page 128.
TRUNCATE Used wit h st r eam files t o t r uncat e each record in t he dest ina-
t ion file t o nnn charact ers.
124 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells CopyFile t o display t he result s of
each file copy on t he st andar d out put device. This display can
be r edir ect ed.
>copyfile *.*:s j (noquery
"/DEVELOPE.EXEC:S" copied to "DEVELOPE.EXEC:J".
"/GRAPH.SAVE1:S" copied to "GRAPH.SAVE1:J".
"/GRAPH.DATA:S" copied to "GRAPH.DATA:J".
"/GRAPH.START:S" copied to "GRAPH.START:J".
4 files copied.
UPCASE Used wit h ASCII st r eam files t o t r anslat e all lower case char ac-
t er s t o t heir upper case equivalent s. All non-alphabet ic char ac-
t er s ar e copied wit hout any t r anslat ion.
Most of t he mult inat ional char act er s (, , , et c. ) ar e t r ans-
lat ed wit h t his opt ion. See Upcase on page 727 for mor e infor -
mat ion.
VERIFY Tells CopyFile t o verify t hat t he copy was made cor r ect ly by
per for ming a r ead aft er each block of t he file is writ t en. The
dat a r ead from t he dest inat ion file is compar ed wit h t he dat a
t hat was writ t en t o t he file at t hat locat ion. A mismat ch causes
CopyFile t o r et r y t he wr it e operat ion.
dat e1 Copies a file only if t he sour ce files last change dat e is gr eat er
t han or equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he sour ce file was
changed on or aft er t his dat e.
This opt ion may be used wit h t he dat e2 opt ion.
>copy *.*:s f (10/15/01
The above command will copy only t hose files t hat have been
cr eat ed or changed since Oct ober 14, 2001.
dat e2 Copies a file only if t he sour ce files last change dat e is less
t han or equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he sour ce file was
changed or or befor e t his dat e. May only be specified by fir st
specifying t he dat e1 opt ion.
>copy *.*:s f (10/15/01 10/30/01
This command copies only t hose files t hat have been cr eat ed or
changed since Oct ober 14, 2001, but not any files t hat were cr e-
at ed or changed aft er Oct ober 30, 2001.
CopyFile 125
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To specify a date2 when you dont care about date1, use a dat e
of 1/1/86 for t he dat e1 opt ion. This is t he ear liest dat e main-
t ained by t he THEOS file syst em.
>copy *.*:s f (1/1/86 11/20/01
Her e, since t he date1 specificat ion is 1/1/86, only files cr eat ed
or changed pr ior t o November 21, 2001, ar e copied.
126 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Copying
Stream Files
Many of t he CopyFile opt ions apply only t o t he copying of st ream or sequen-
t ial or ganizat ion files. Wit h st r eam files you can add infor mat ion t o t he
end of an exist ing file by using t he APPEND opt ion, change t he case made
of t ext in each r ecor d wit h t he LOWCASE and UPCASE opt ions, r ear r ange
t he cont ent s in each r ecor d wit h t he SPECS opt ion or t r anslat e char act er s
in each r ecor d wit h t he TRANS opt ion.
St r eam files may also be copied t o devices ot her t han disks. For inst ance:
>copy system.theos32.devnames prt1
>copy private.exec con
If t he file is not a st r eam file and you at t empt t o copy it t o a device ot her
t han a disk, t he message Invalid access met hod is displayed.
Copying with Field Specifications
The SPECS opt ion provides a means of manipulat ing t he cont ent s of t he
r ecor ds in a st r eam file. Wit h t his opt ion you can delet e por t ions of each
r ecor d, add const ant dat a t o each r ecor d or r ear r ange t he exist ing cont ent s
of each record. When t he SPECS opt ion is used, CopyFile pr ompt s you t o
ent er t he specificat ions:
>copyfile sample.data new.data (specs
Enter specification list:
?
Ther e ar e t hr ee t ypes of specificat ions t hat you may ent er :
+ A let t er , char act er or char act er code t o be added t o each r ecor d.
Any t ypeable char act er or it s numer ic value in decimal or hexadec-
imal can be specified. Mer ely t ype t he char act er you want added t o
each r ecor d. To specify t he char act er value in hexadecimal, t er mi-
nat e t he number wit h t he let t er h.
?A 1
?65 1
?41h 1
The above t hr ee specificat ion ar e ident ical: They each specify t hat
t he let t er A is t o be placed in column one of each out put r ecor d.
+ Const ant t ext t o be added t o each record. Mer ely t ype t he st r ing of
char act er s desired sur r ounded by a pair of quot at ion mar ks. (Any
delimit er ot her t han a quot at ion mar k may be used. The fir st char -
act er t yped is always t r eat ed as t he delimit er and must be
mat ched wit h an ident ical delimit er at t he end of t he st r ing of
char act er s.)
CopyFile 127
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
?"New record: " 1
?\Some text\ 20
?+abbreviated+ 30
+ The posit ion of exist ing t ext in t he source r ecor d. Exist ing t ext t o
be copied is indicat ed by t wo decimal number s separ at ed by a
dash:
?1-10 10
?11-12 48
?13-13 47
?14-99 50
The above specificat ions indicat e t hat t he char act ers in each
source recor d ar e t o be r ear r anged: The fir st t en char act er s ar e
moved t o columns 10 t hr ough 19; t he char act er s in columns 11 and
12 ar e moved t o columns 48 and 49; t he char act er in column 13 is
moved t o column 47; and t he r emainder of t he sour ce r ecor d fr om
columns 14 t hr ough 99 is moved t o columns 50 t hr ough 135.
As indicat ed in t he example, t o specify a single char act er of t he
source recor d, specify a column r ange t hat st ar t s and st ops on t he
same posit ion (13-13).
Each specificat ion is t er minat ed by t he column number t o place t he let t er ,
const ant t ext or sour ce t ext in t he dest inat ion r ecor d. The specificat ion list
is a list of one or mor e of t hese specificat ions t er minat ed by an empt y line.
Invalid specificat ions ar e ignor ed wit h no message.
?* 1
?"New " 3
?1-99 10
?
In t his example each out put r ecor d will have a bullet symbol in column
one, t he lit er al t ext New in columns t hr ee t hrough six, and t he or iginal
sour ce r ecor d t ext is out put st art ing at column 10 of each r ecor d. Columns
seven t hr ough nine ar e out put as spaces because not hing was specified for
t hat ar ea of t he out put record.
Not e t hat t he r ecor ds out put cont ain only t he t ext and dat a specified in t he
specificat ion list . For inst ance, if t he pr evious example was changed t o:
?* 1
?"New " 3
?10-99 10
?
128 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The dat a in t he input r ecor ds, columns 1 t hrough 9, is not copied t o t he
out put r ecor d because it is not par t of t he specificat ion list .
The SPECS opt ion may be used in combinat ion wit h t he TRANS opt ion.
When ot her t ext modificat ion opt ions ar e specified in combinat ion wit h t he
SPECS opt ion (i.e., UPCASE, LOWCASE), t hey will manipulat e t he sour ce
t ext befor e t he specificat ions ar e applied and t her efor e do not apply t o t he
specificat ions t ext . For inst ance, if SPECS and UPCASE wer e used wit h t he
pr evious specificat ions list , t he lit er al t ext New would st ill be out put in
columns t hr ee t hr ough six. It would not be conver t ed t o NEW .
You can abandon t he copy operat ion dur ing ent r y of t he specificat ions list
by using t he (Esc) or (F9) keys.
Copying with Character Translation
The TRANS opt ion allows you t o t r anslat e t he char act er s in each sour ce
r ecor d as it is copied t o t he dest inat ion record. When t he TRANS opt ion is
used, CopyFile pr ompt s you t o ent er t he t r anslat ions:
>copyfile sample.data new.data (trans
Enter translation list:
?
Tr anslat ions ar e ent er ed by specifying a pair of char act er s separ at ed by a
space. The fir st char act er is t he char act er in t he sour ce file t hat is t o be
changed; t he second char act er is t he char act er t hat it will be changed t o.
The char act er s are specified wit h any t ypeable charact er or it s numer ic
value in decimal or hexadecimal. Mer ely t ype t he char act er you want
t r anslat ed, followed by a space and t hen t he char act er t o t r anslat e t o. To
specify t he char act er value in hexadecimal, t er minat e t he number wit h t he
let t er h.
>copyfile sample.data new.data (trans
Enter translation list:
? A
? E
? O
? U
? N
? A
?
This t r anslat ion list t r anslat es all occurr ences of t he accent ed, upper case
let t er s t o t heir unaccent ed for ms.
The TRANS opt ion may be used in combinat ion wit h t he SPECS opt ion.
When ot her t ext modificat ion opt ions ar e specified in combinat ion wit h t he
TRANS opt ion (i.e., UPCASE, LOWCASE), t hey will manipulat e t he source
t ext aft er t he specificat ions ar e applied and t her efor e t he t r anslat e t o
CopyFile 129
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
char act er might be changed. For inst ance, if TRANS and LOWCASE wer e
used wit h t he pr evious specificat ions list , t he accent ed, upper case let t er s
would be t r anslat ed t o unaccent ed lower case char act er s.
You can abandon t he copy oper at ion dur ing ent ry of t he t r anslat ion list by
using t he (Esc) or (F9) keys.
Copying
Indexed and
Keyed Files
Of most int er est when copying an indexed or keyed file is t he BYREC
opt ion. This opt ion cr eat es an opt imized copy of t he sour ce file wit h a com-
plet ely r ebuilt index t o t he r ecords in t he file. The BYREC opt ion is implied
by all of t he opt ions t hat might copy less t han t he ent ire file (FOR, FRKEY,
and TOKEY).
When t he BYREC opt ion is used t o opt imize file access, it is best t o fir st
cr eat e an empt y dest inat ion file wit h t he CREATE command descr ibed on
page 131. By creat ing t he empt y file fir st , you can specify a cont iguous file
and change t he key lengt h, r ecor d lengt h and file size. The BYREC opt ion
will use t his empt y file and copy t he sour ce file t o it , one r ecor d at a t ime.
The BYREC opt ion can also be used t o copy t he r ecor ds fr om one t ype of file
or ganizat ion t o anot her . For inst ance, fr om a keyed file t o an indexed file.
Copying Direct
Files
Similar t o indexed and keyed files, t he BYREC opt ion can r eor ganize a
dir ect file.
Notes The FOR opt ion requir es t hat t he FRKEY opt ion be used. When FOR is used
wit hout t he FRKEY opt ion, t he ent ir e file will be copied.
If t he sour ce and dest inat ion files are member s of a libr ar y and t hat
libr ar y does not exist on t he dest inat ion dr ive, CopyFile asks if you want t o
cr eat e it :
>copyfile customer.data.june j
Ok to create library "/CUSTOMER.DATA:J" (Yes,No)
If you r espond wit h (Y), t he libr ary is cr eat ed on t he dest inat ion dr ive wit h
a size equal t o t he sour ce files librar y size.
Defaults NEWDATE (when a modified copy of t he source file is cr eat ed), NEWFILE,
NOQUERY (when wild cards ar e not used), NOSORT (unless t he SUBDIR
opt ion is used), NOVERIFY, OLDDATE (when an exact copy of t he sour ce file
is cr eat ed), QUERY (when wild car ds ar e used), SORT (when SUBDIR opt ion
is used), TYPE.
Restrictions By default , only files owned by t he cur r ent account ar e copied. You can
copy a public file (owned by t he SYSTEM account ) when logged ont o a pr ivat e
account by specifying t he PUBLIC opt ion.
130 CopyFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To copy a file owned by anot her account , you must specify t he owning
account name as par t of t he pat h and t he file must pr ovide shar ed r ead
access:
>copyfile private\his.file my.file
This command copies t he file HIS.FILE owned by t he account named PRIVATE,
t o your account , cur r ent wor king dir ect or y, file name MY.FILE.
You may only copy a file t o your account . By default , t he dest inat ion file is
in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y, but you may specify a pat h t o t he dir ec-
t or y t hat you want t o copy it t o.
>copyfile my.file textfile/samples/new.file
"/MY.FILE:S" copied to "/TEXTFILE/SAMPLES/NEW.FILE:S".
When t he dest inat ion file specificat ion includes a pat h, t hen t hat pat h
must exist . CopyFile does not cr eat e subdirect or ies (except wit h t he SUBDIR
opt ion).
See also Backup, FileManager, FileType, IXDiag, Move, Receive, Rename, Net, Restore,
Send, TArchive, TBackup, THEO+COM
Creat e 131
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Create Command
The Create command creat es direct , indexed and keyed files, libr ar ies of files and subdir ec-
t or ies.
1 CREATE file ( LIBRARY library-options
2 CREATE file ( SUBDIR
3 CREATE file ( DIRECT direct-options
4 CREATE file ( INDEXED indexed-options
5 CREATE file ( KEYED indexed-options
6 CREATE file ( LISAM lisam-opt ions
7 CREATE file ( recreat e-options
library-options REPLACE NOTYPE
SIZE nnnn TYPE
direct-opt ions CONTIG NOTYPE
FILESIZE nnnnnn TYPE
GROW n.m
RECLEN nnnnn
indexed-options CONTIG NOTYPE
FILESIZE nnnnnn TYPE
GROW n.m
KEYLEN nnn
RECLEN nnnnn
lisam-options BINARY KEYLEN nnn
CONTIG NOCASE
DICTIONARY NOTYPE
FILESIZE nnnnnn RECLEN nnnnn
GROW n.m TYPE
recreat e-options CLEAN
CLEAR
132 Creat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Cr eat es a new libr ar y or r esizes an exist ing libr ar y. file must be
a file descr ipt ion cont aining bot h a file-name and a file-t ype. Librar ies may
not be a member of anot her libr ary.
>create source.programs (library size 44
>create source.programs (library size 100 replace
>create my.programs (library
Libr ar ies, like all files on Cor ona, ar e dynamically ext endable. Alt hough
you must specify t he init ial size of a libr ar y when cr eat ing it , t he size spec-
ified is not t r eat ed as t he maximum size of t he libr ar y, only t he init ial size.
When mor e members ar e added t o a libr ar y t hat is alr eady full of member
names, t he libr ary is made lar ger .
Mode 2Cr eat es a new subdir ect or y. file must be a file descr ipt ion con-
t aining a file-name. It may have a file-t ype but it cannot have a member -
name because subdir ect or ies may not be a member of a libr ary.
>create source (subdir
Alt hough t he Create command can cr eat e subdir ect or ies, t he MkDir com-
mand is t he pr efer r ed met hod. Wit h MkDir you can specify t he init ial size of
t he subdir ect or y.
Mode 3Cr eat es a new dir ect -access file. Dir ect files may be member s of
an exist ing libr ar y.
>create accounts.payable.control (direct file 22 recl 128
When cr eat ing a dir ect -access file, you must specify t he FILESIZE and t he
r ecor d lengt h (RECLEN).
Mode 4Cr eat es a new indexed-access file. Indexed files may be mem-
ber s of an exist ing libr ary.
>create parts.inventry.sku (indexed file 20000 recl 32 keyl 10
When cr eat ing an indexed-access file, you must specify t he FILESIZE, t he
r ecor d lengt h (RECLEN) and t he key lengt h (KEYLEN).
Mode 5Cr eat es a new keyed-access file. Keyed files may be members of
an exist ing libr ar y.
>create parts.inventry.list (keyed file 60000 recl 280 key 42
When cr eat ing a keyed-access file, you must specify t he FILESIZE, t he
r ecor d lengt h (RECLEN) and t he key lengt h (KEYLEN).
Creat e 133
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 6Cr eat es a new LISAM-access file. LISAM files may be member s
of an exist ing libr ary.
>create parts.inventry.sku (lisam file 20000 recl 32 keyl 10
When cr eat ing an lar ge indexed-access file, you must specify t he FILESIZE,
t he r ecor d lengt h (RECLEN) and t he key lengt h (KEYLEN). You may specify
t he sort or ganizat ion for t he file (BINARY, DICTIONARY or NOCASE).
Mode 7Clear s t he cont ent s of an exist ing dir ect , indexed, keyed or
LISAM file. The cont ent s of all r ecor ds in a dir ect file ar e init ialized t o
zer os. Alt hough indexed and keyed files ar e not zer oed wit h t his command
all of t he r ecor ds ar e r emoved and t he space is r et ur ned t o t he files fr ee
space list . Effect ively, t his is t he same as er asing t he file and t hen r ecr eat -
ing it wit h it s cur rent file size. However , t he clear ing pr ocess is fast er
because t he disk space does not have t o be r eallocat ed.
>create customer.master (clear
Library
Options
REPLACE Indicat es t hat t he exist ing libr ary is t o be r eplaced wit h a
libr ar y of t he same name but a differ ent size.
This opt ion pr eser ves all member s of t he exist ing libr ar y. It
does t his by r enaming t he exist ing libr ar y wit h a t empor ar y
name, cr eat ing t he new, empt y libr ar y wit h t he size r equest ed,
and t hen r enaming t he member s in t he t empor ar y libr ar y
name t o t his new libr ar y. The t empor ary libr ar y name is t hen
er ased.
If t he r equest ed size of t he new libr ar y is less t han t he number
of member s alr eady in t he exist ing libr ar y, t he size is adjust ed
upwar d so t hat t he new libr ary can cont ain all of t he exist ing
member files.
See Caut ions on page 136.
SIZE This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he size of t he libr ar y.
This size r epr esent s t he minimum size t o cr eat e. Because a
libr ar y uses t he same sear ch algor it hm as t he r oot direct or y,
it s size is det er mined by t he r equir ement s of t he algor it hm.
For inst ance, r equest ing a size of 100 will cr eat e a libr ar y wit h
a size of 116.
Libr ar ies on a disk using t he LFS file syst em ar e dynamic in
size. That is, aft er t heir init ial cr eat ion t heir size will increase
as needed when new libr ar y member s ar e added t o t he libar y.
134 Creat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Direct File
Options
CONTIG For ces t he new file t o use cont iguous disk space. If sufficient
cont iguous disk space is not available, t he file is not cr eat ed
and a Disk full message is r epor t ed. See Not es on page 135.
FILESIZE This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he init ial number of
r ecor ds t hat t he file can cont ain. The physical size of t he file is
comput ed by mult iplying t he FILESIZE by t he RECLEN. The
size of a dir ect file is dynamic and t he file may gr ow when
r equir ed.
GROW Specifies t he gr owt h fact or for t he file.
Gr owt h fact or s ar e specified as eit her a whole number , such as
1, 2, 3, etc., or as a fract ion, such as 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, etc. Do not
specify a combinat ion like 1.3. If you do, only t he int eger por -
t ion is used. The default gr owt h fact or is 0.3.
For an explanat ion of file growt h fact or s see Growth Factor in
t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference..
RECLEN This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he lengt h of each r ecor d.
The maximum r ecor d lengt h is 65,535. However , if t he file is t o
be used by a BASIC16 language pr ogr am, limit t he r ecor d
lengt h t o 2,048.
Indexed and
Keyed File
Options
CONTIG For ces t he new file t o use cont iguous disk space. If sufficient
cont iguous disk space is not available t he file is not cr eat ed
and a Disk full message is r epor t ed. See Not es on page 135.
FILESIZE This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he number of r ecor ds
t hat t he file can cont ain. The physical size of t he file is com-
put ed by mult iplying t he FILESIZE by t he sum of RECLEN plus
KEYLEN plus t he over head r equir ed by t he file access met hod
(indexed or keyed). The size of an indexed or keyed file is
dynamic and t he file may gr ow when r equir ed.
GROW Specifies t he gr owt h fact or for t he file. This is t he same as t he
GROW opt ion descr ibed above.
KEYLEN This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he allocat ed lengt h of t he
keys for each record.
RECLEN This opt ion is r equir ed and specifies t he lengt h of each r ecor d.
This r ecor d lengt h is separ at e fr om t he KEYLEN value.
The maximum r ecor d lengt h is 65,535. However , if t he file is t o
be used by a BASIC16 language pr ogr am, limit t he r ecor d
lengt h t o 2,048.
Creat e 135
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LISAM File
Options
When cr eat ing LISAM files you may use t he Indexed and Keyed File Options
and also t he following LISAM-specific opt ions.
BINARY Specifies t hat t he file will be maint ained in st andar d, binar y
or der . In t his or der , keys st ar t ing wit h B follow keys st ar t ing
wit h A, keys st ar t ing wit h a come aft er upper case keys.
This is t he default or der for LISAM files.
DICTIONARY The file is maint ained in dict ionar y or der . Wit h t his
sequence, alt hough t he case mode is significant , t he upper case
alphabet ic keys ar e not sor t ed separ at ely fr om t he lower case
alphabet ic keys of t he same let t er . Specifically, t he sor t or der
for each charact er is: space, !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;,
<, =, >, ?, @, [, \ , ], ^ , _, `, {, | , }, ~, , , , , , eur o, , , , ,
, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, a, , , , , , , , , , B, b, C,
c, D, d, E, e, , , , , , F, f, G, g, H, h, I, i, , , , J , j, K, k, L, l,
M, m, N, n, , , O, o, , , , , , P, p, Q, q, R, r , S, s, , T, t , U,
u, , , , , , V, v, W, w, X, x, Y, y, Z, z, ot her char act er s in
binar y or der .
NOCASE Specifies t hat t he case mode of t he key is ignor ed. The file is
maint ained in DICTIONARY or der . Duplicat e keys ar e not
allows and a key is consider ed a dupicat e if it is ident ical t o an
exist ing key except for case mode.
For inst ance, if t he key THEOS Soft war e exist ed in a file,
any at t empt t o find it wit h t he key t heos soft war e, THEOS
SOFTWARE, et c. will find it and, an at t empt t o wr it e a r ecor d
wit h one of t hose keys will r eplace t he r ecor d. Because key val-
ues ar e not changed on updat es, t he init ial cr eat ion of a r ecor d
det er mines t he value of t he key.
Recreate
Options
CLEAN May only be used wit h t he CLEAR opt ion. It causes t he con-
t ent s of t he file t o be clear ed by writ ing binar y zer os.
CLEAR An exist ing dir ect , indexed, keyed or LISAM file is clear ed. If
opt ion CLEAN is not specified at t he same t ime, only t he point -
er s t o t he exist ing keys are clear ed, effect ively erasing all of
t he r ecor ds.
Notes If t he CONTIG opt ion is not used for dir ect , indexed and keyed files, t he file
is cr eat ed using any available disk space, cont iguous or not . If t her e is
insufficient disk space available, t he r equest ed FILESIZE of t he file is
r educed so t hat t he file can fit in t he lar gest cont iguous disk space t hat is
available.
It is possible t o cr eat e a libr ar y, subdir ect ory or dat a file in anot her
account . Mer ely specify t he complet e pat h for t he file descr ipt ion:
136 Creat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>create private\program.source (library size 44
In t he above example PRIVATE\ is t he name of anot her account . Access t o
t his file is r est r ict ed unless t he CREATE envir onment var iable has been
defined and it includes t he at t ribut es allowing shar ed file access. See
CREATE on page 102 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em
Reference for a descr ipt ion of t his envir onment var iable.
The gr owt h fact or of an exist ing file can be changed wit h t he Change com-
mand descr ibed on page 65.
Defaults When t he CREATE envir onment var iable is not defined, a dat a file cr eat ed
wit h t his command has t he following at t r ibut es: modified, shar ed r ead
pr ot ect ed, shar ed wr it e pr ot ect ed, execut e pr ot ect ed, not er ase pr ot ect ed,
not r ead pr ot ect ed, not wr it e pr ot ect ed and not hidden. If t he CREATE var i-
able is defined, it specifies t he at t r ibut es for t he new file.
The modified at t r ibut e and t he files last change dat e is always set for
newly cr eat ed dat a files (dir ect , indexed, keyed and LISAM).
Subdir ect or ies and libr ar ies cr eat ed wit h t his command have no pr ot ect ion
codes set .
The default gr owt h fact or for dir ect , indexed, keyed and LISAM files is 0.3
or 30%.
Cautions The REPLACE opt ion should not be used if any ot her user might be using
one of t he member s of t he libr ar y. The REPLACE opt ion is act ually a
macr o command in t hat sever al separ at e oper at ions ar e performed:
r enaming an exist ing libr ar y, cr eat ing a new libr ar y, and r enaming exist -
ing member s and er asing t he old libr ar y. It is best if all user s ar e inact ive
so t hat all of t he st eps can be complet ed wit hout int er r upt ion.
Creat e 137
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions Libr aries and subdir ect or ies cannot be members of libr ar ies.
Libr ary file descr ipt ions must cont ain bot h a file-name and a file-t ype.
The various limit at ions on key lengt h, r ecor d lengt h and file size depends
upon t he t ype of file syst em in use on t he r esident dr ive:
See also Change, MkDir
Item 4GB LFS
Libr ary size 262,100 Limit ed by disk space only
Indexed, key lengt h 128 128
Indexed, r ecor d lengt h 65,535
Indexed, file size 1.7GB 4GB
Dir ect , r ecor d lengt h 65,535
Dir ect , file size 1.7GB 4GB
LISAM, key lengt h 256
LISAM, r ecor d lengt h 65,535, or
> 16MB if using LISAM-specific i/o st at ement s
LISAM, file size 1.7GB Limit ed by disk space only
138 Creat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CRLF 139
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CRLF Command
The CRLF command oper at es on st r eam files and conver t s t he end-of-recor d mar k and
nat ional char act er s.
Operation CRLF only oper at es on st r eam files.
Mode 1Per for ms an aut o conversion bet ween THEOS and DOS or
UNIX or bet ween DOS or UNIX and THEOS. The file is analyzed and, if
t he fir st record is t er minat ed wit h a CR only (THEOS for mat ), t he file is
conver t ed t o t he DOS for mat using CR,LF. If t he fir st r ecor d is t er minat ed
wit h an LF only (UNIX format ) or a CR,LF (DOS format ), t he file is con-
vert ed t o t he THEOS for mat using CR only.
Mode 2The r ecor d t er minat or s in t he file ar e conver t ed t o t he t er mina-
t or s used by t he oper at ing syst em specified. The nor mal end-of-r ecor d t er -
minat ion char act er for t he common oper at ing syst ems is:
OS DOS Indicat es t hat t he r ecord t er minat or should be changed t o a
CR,LF.
THEOS Indicat es t hat t he r ecord t er minat or should be changed t o a
CR only.
UNIX Indicat es t hat t he r ecord t er minat or should be changed t o an
LF only.
1 CRLF file... ( opt ions
2 CRLF file... ( os opt ions
file file name wit h opt ional pat h, may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NOTYPE TYPE XLATE OEM
NOXLATE XLATE DOS
os DOS
THEOS
UNIX
Operating System Terminator
THEOS CR
DOS CR,LF
UNIX LF
140 CRLF
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOTYPE Do not display t he conver sion messages.
NOXLATE Do not perfor m any t r anslat ions except for r ecor d t er minat or s.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat displays t he conver sion message for each
file conver t ed. The messages ar e of t he for m Changing CR
int o CRLF on file SAMPLE.FILE:S.
XLATE DOS In addit ion t o t he t ranslat ion of record t er minat or s, all
embedded nat ional char act er s and ot her char act er s whose
value is gr eat er t han 128 ar e t r anslat ed. This opt ion is effec-
t ive only when file uses CR or CR,LF r ecor d t er minat or s.
When effect ive, t he eight -bit charact ers ar e t r anslat ed t o or
fr om t he DOS char act er set fr om or t o t he THEOS char act er
set .
This is a default opt ion.
XLATE OEM In addit ion t o t he t ranslat ion of record t er minat or s, all
embedded nat ional char act er s and ot her char act er s whose
value is gr eat er t han 128 ar e t r anslat ed. This opt ion is effec-
t ive only when file uses CR or CR,LF r ecor d t er minat or s.
When effect ive, t he eight -bit charact ers ar e t r anslat ed t o or
fr om t he Windows charact er set fr om or t o t he THEOS char ac-
t er set .
Notes The file is conver t ed in place. That is, t he out put of t his command is a file
wit h t he same name as t he input . The act ual pr ocess used is t o out put t he
file wit h a t empor ar y file name, er ase t he input file, and t hen r ename t he
t emporar y file t o be t he input file name.
Defaults TYPE and XLATE DOS ar e default opt ions.
Restrictions Only ASCII st r eam files can be conver t ed wit h t his command. Ot her file
or ganizat ions are incompat ible bet ween operat ing syst ems or do not have
end-of-r ecor d mar ks.
See also FileType
CRT 141
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CRT Command
The CRT command demonst r at es and t est s t he consoles display capabilit ies and keyboar d
definit ions.
Operation When CRT is invoked t he CRT Test Menu is displayed.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed t est s.
CRT
THEOS 32 CRT Test
Display all attribute combinations.
Video Attributes
Direct Cursor Addressing
Relative Cursor Addressing
Scroll Up and Down
Insert/Delete Line/Char
Character Sets...
Screen Sizes...
Throughput Performance
Window Manager...
Mouse and ON-Key...
Keyboard
Exit to THEOS
Video Attributes
142 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Video Attributes
This t est shows t he video at t r ibut es suppor t ed by THEOS and how t hey
ar e displayed on t his console wit h t he cur r ent class code.
The specific infor mat ion shown on your scr een may differ depending upon
your t er minals or monit ors capabilit ies and upon t he definit ions in t he
class code (see ClassGen on page 75).
The Monit or mode line shows t he char act er s t hat your console will dis-
play when t he monit or mode is enabled. This line is only shown if t he class
code defines a code for monit or mode on and off. The char act er s shown
her e ar e displayed when t he console is a VGA monit or and class code 90 is
used.
The line showing t he color names is displayed only if t he class code has a
set alpha color definit ion.
When (Enter) is pr essed an Er ase unpr ot ect ed is per for med. This should
clear all of t he at t r ibut e displays off of t he scr een except for t hose shown in
half int ensit y on t he right .
Test Video Attributes
Press ENTER for next screen.
normal half
reverse reverse, half
blink blink, half
underline underline, half
blink, underline blink, underline, half
reverse, blink reverse, blink, half
reverse, underline reverse, underline, half
reverse, blink, underline reverse, blink, underline, half
Monitor mode: v u b T ` U J K M N < 1 P d e Q 1 1 ~ S ~ A Y
Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Yellow White
Normal = Black on White; Reverse = White on Black.
CRT 143
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Direct Cursor Addressing
The direct cur sor addr essing display t est s t he consoles and class codes
abilit y t o accur at ely posit ion t he cur sor . The scr een should fill wit h ast er -
isk ( * ) char act er s in a t op-left t o bot t om-r ight manner . Each ast er isk is
displayed by posit ioning t he cur sor t o t he desir ed locat ion, displaying t he
ast er isk and t hen posit ioning t o t he next desir ed locat ion.
If t he scr een does not complet ely fill wit h ast erisks (except for t he bot t om,
r ight -hand posit ion), t her e is eit her somet hing wr ong wit h t he class code
definit ion for direct cur sor addr essing or t her e is a pr oblem wit h t he com-
municat ions line (baud r at e, par it y, etc.).
Relative Cursor Addressing
This scr een display t est s t he consoles and class codes abilit y t o move t he
cur sor r elat ive t o it s cur r ent locat ion (left , right , up and down).
The spir aling lines shown her e ar e dr awn by moving t he cur sor wit h t he
left , right , up and down codes, and t hen out put t ing a single line-drawing
char act er .
144 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Scroll Up and Down
This display t est s t he consoles abilit y t o scr oll t ext up and down on t he
scr een. Fir st , lines of t ext ar e displayed t er minat ed by a car r iage-r et ur n,
line-feed. When t he bot t om of t he scr een is r eached, lines cont inue t o dis-
play which should cause t he lines above t his t o scroll up.
Aft er appr oximat ely 100 lines ar e displayed in t his manner , t he scr een is
clear ed and new lines of t ext ar e displayed. These ar e displayed at t he t op
of t he scr een pr oceeded by an inser t line command. This causes t he dis-
play t o scr oll down.
Obser ve t hese pat t er ns as t hey display. Because scr olling t akes a r ela-
t ively long t ime for a t er minal t o perform, if t here ar e any handshake pr ob-
lems wit h your communicat ions line, t hey will show up her e wit h a
pat t er n t hat does not appear unifor m.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbc
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcd
"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcde
#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdef
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefg
%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefgh
&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghi
'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghij
()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijk
)*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijkl
*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklm
+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmn
,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmno
-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnop
./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopq
/0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqr
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrs
123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrst
23456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrstu
3456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
56789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwx
CRT 145
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Insert/Delete Line/Char
This display t est s t he consoles and class codes inser t and delet e capabili-
t ies. Fir st , t he scr een is filled wit h r ows of number s. Then t he six inser t
and delet e commands ar e perfor med on t his displayed t ext :
If your console suppor t s all of t hese inser t and delet e capabilit ies, t he
scr een should look like t he one displayed her e (except your s should have
your at t ached line lengt h used).
The t ext in t he middle of t he scr een indicat es which commands wer e
issued and at which locat ions. When st udying t hese locat ions, not e t hat
t his pr ogr am addr esses t he cur sor wit h a number base of zer o. Ther efor e,
t he upper left cor ner is locat ion 0,0.
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
1123567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
21234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
312345 6789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123
41234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
51234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
71234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
81234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
912345678901
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
11234567890123
4,1 = DC 6,3 = IC
8,5 = IL 10,7 = DL
12,9 = EOL 14,11 = EOS
Press ENTER for menu.
146 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Character Sets
Ther e ar e mult iple char act er set s suppor t ed by THEOS. When t his opt ion
is select ed fr om t he main CRT menu, a Char act er Set s menu appear s:
Not e: Not all consoles suppor t all of t he char act er set s.
THEOS 32 CRT Test
Display all line graphics characters.
National Characters
THEOS Characters
IBM PC Characters
Exit to Main Menu
Line Drawing Graphics
Character Sets
CRT 147
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Line Drawing Graphics
The t wo scr eens displayed by t his menu it em show t he char act er s dis-
played when line-dr awing gr aphics ar e used and a sample of t he gr aphics
display.
= ULC = URC = LRC = LLC
= LI = UI = RI = DI
= FWI = HORIZ = VERT
= RULC = RURC = RLRC = RLLC
= DULC = DURC = DLRC = DLLC
= DLI = DUI = DRI = DDI
= DFWI = DHORIZ = DVERT
148 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
National Characters
The Nat ional Char act er s display shows all of t he mult inat ional char act er s
suppor t ed by THEOS along wit h t heir names, such as Lower case e gr ave
accent .
A special help t ext file is supplied t hat shows how t o compose t hese char ac-
t er s fr om t he keyboar d.
>help compose
THEOS Characters
This display shows t he THEOS char act er set . It includes t he ASCII char -
act er s, t he line-dr awing gr aphics char act er s and t he mult inat ional char ac-
t er s.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2: ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4: @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5: P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6: ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7: p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ .
8: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A:
B: . . . . . .
C:
D:
E: l a . .
F: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C =
THEOS Character Set
CRT 149
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
IBM PC Characters
The IBM PC char act er set is available on most consoles t hat ar e PC Ter m
compat ible. This char act er set is Code Page 437 and is accessed by a pr o-
gr am by enabling monit or mode.
This scr een does not display pr operly if t he console does not suppor t t he
Code Page 437 char act er set . It will not display at all if t he class code
number is not one of t he known class codes for PC Ter m compat ible t er mi-
nals (see CLASSnnn (Class Codes) on page 213).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0: v u b T ` U J K M N
1: < 1 P d e Q 1 1 ~ S ~ A Y
2: ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4: @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5: P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6: ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7: p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ O
8:
9:
A:
B:
C:
D: '
E:
F:
C =
IBM-PC Character Set
150 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Screen Sizes
Some t erminals suppor t mult iple scr een sizes. For inst ance, most VGA dis-
play monit or s suppor t t he sizes shown in t he following menu. When t he
console suppor t s mult iple scr een sizes, a menu like t he following appear s.
This scr een allows you t o demonst rat e t he var ious sizes t hat THEOS
t hinks ar e available on your console.
This menu allows you t o select var ious scr een sizes and see how t hey
appear on your console. The CRT command will not change t he scr een size
of your console except dur ing t his demonst r at ion. Once a desir able scr een
size is found, use t he Attach or Sysgen command t o set t he at t ached scr een
size.
Not e: A VGA console can only suppor t mult iple scr een sizes if t he console
is not using gr aphics. That is, SETUP VGA is configur ed t o use THEOS
Sysgen.
THEOS 32 CRT Test
Use SYSGEN/ATTACH to set screen sizes.
40 columns X 24 rows
Exit to main menu
Screen Size Selections - Super VGA color: Video7
CRT 151
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Throughput Performance
This t est uses t wo scr eens t o t est t he act ual t hr oughput per for mance of t he
console as it is cur rent ly at t ached. Fir st it t est s t he t r ansmission r at e
when one full page of t ext is sent t o t he console, and t hen it t est s t he scr oll
r at e. The accur acy of t his t est may be effect ed by buffer ing if t he console is
at t ached via an int elligent mult ipor t .
Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll Noscroll
Full page: 81 msec; 28,000 cps (280,000) throughput bps)
Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Scroll: 1,066 msec; 54 lines/sec
152 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Window Manager
This funct ion of t he CRT command t est s and demonst r at es t he capabilit ies
of window management on t he console.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed demonst r at ions.
THEOS 32 CRT Test
Open and display some windows, reorder them, then remove and close.
Window Frames
Window Titles
Text Clipping
Window Text Copy/Transfer
Window Menu Functions
Exit to Main Menu
Open, Close and Reorder Windows
Window Management Function Selections
CRT 153
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mouse and ON-Key
This funct ion pr esent s a menu t hat allows you t o t est t he mouse and t he
ON-KEY capabilit ies of t he console.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed demonst r at ions.
THEOS 32 CRT Test
Mouse reports are standard mouse packets.
Window Manager Mouse API
ON-Key Events
Exit to Main Menu
Supported Mouse APIs
154 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This scr een t est s t he Window Manager Mouse capabilit y.
The four windows in t his display scr een are used t o r epor t var ious infor -
mat ion about mouse act ivit y.
Window 1: This is a lar ge t ar get ar ea.
Window 2: A display window t hat shows t he last mouse event , such as:
Left -down, Left -click, Right -dclick, et c.
Window 3: A display window showing t he last mouse event relat ive t o t he
scr een or igin (upper left cor ner of screen).
Window 4: A display window showing t he last mouse event relat ive t o t he
window or igin.
To exit fr om t his t est click on t he Exit display but t on or pr ess (Esc).
Window 1 Window 2
Window 3
Window 4
E
X
I
T
Left-click
Left-down
Left-dclick
Left-drag
Row: 12 Col: 28
Button 0804
Win: 1 Button 0804
Row: 12 Col: 28
CRT 155
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ON-Key Events
This display allows you t o t est t he keyboar d for all keys t hat can be
det ect ed by t he ON-KEY capabilit y of THEOS Window Manager soft -
war e. Mer ely pr ess t he keys you ar e int er est ed in t o det er mine if t he ON-
KEY mechanism can det ect it . If not hing displays on t he scr een, t hen ON-
KEY could not det ect t he key or key combinat ion.
To exit from t his t est pr ess (Esc) t wice.
Keyboard
This t est allows you t o t est t he consoles class code definit ions for t he input
funct ion keys. A simulat ed keyboar d is displayed on t he scr een. As each
key on t he keyboar d is pr essed, t he cursor is posit ioned t o t he key r eceived
and decoded by t he class code.
Notes The oper at ion and specific displays seen when t he CRT command is used
will great ly depend upon your specific console and t he class code associ-
at ed wit h t hat console.
See also Attach, ClassGen, Printer, Setup, Sysgen
156 CRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Dat e 157
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Date Command
The Date command displays t he curr ent syst em dat e and t ime on t he st andar d out put device
(nor mally t he console).
Operation Mode 1Out put s t he cur r ent dat e and t ime.
>date
Thursday, July 4, 2002 2:49 PM PST
The year is always displayed as a four -digit number including t he cent ur y,
and t he t ime is always displayed in 12-hour for mat using am and pm
designat ions.
The day of t he week name and t he mont h name ar e specific t o t he cur r ent
language in use..
Mode 2Out put s t he cur r ent dat e and t ime for mat t ed accor ding t o t he
format specificat ions. The for mat must st ar t wit h a plus sign ( + ) and, if
t her e ar e any lower case char act er s, it must be enclosed wit hin a pair of
quot at ion marks.
>date "+DATE: %m:%d:%y%nTIME: %H:%M:%S"
DATE: 07:04:02
TIME: 10:02:15
>date "+DATE: %D%nTIME: %r"
DATE: 2002.07.04
TIME: 10:02:15AM
>date "+Event occurred on %B %d, %Y at %H:%M"
Event occurred on July 04, 2002 at 15:42
1 DATE
2 DATE +format
format codes specifying t he format of t he dat e and t ime
158 Dat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Format Codes The for mat specificat ion is a st r ing of char act er s specifying t he lit eral
char act er s and symbols t hat ar e out put , along wit h codes specifying t he
dat e or t ime element t o out put . The for mat t ing codes use t he percent char -
act er ( % ) followed by a single let t er . The let t er indicat es t he specific dat e
or t ime element t o use.
%n St ar t s a new display line.
%f St ar t s a new display page (for m-feed out put ).
%t Tabs t o t he next t ab st op. Tab st ops ar e posit ioned ever y eight
columns.
%% Out put s a single per cent charact er.
%A Day of week name (Monday, Tuesday, et c.) Uses t ext in syst em
messages #264 and 265.
%B Mont h name (J anuar y, Febr uar y, et c.). Uses t ext in syst em
messages #261, 262 and 263.
%D Complet e dat e format t ed using t he cur r ent DATEFORM:
07/04/2002 DATEFORM = 1
04-07-2002 DATEFORM = 2
2002.07.04 DATEFORM = 3
Not e t hat t he dat e is always displayed wit h a four -digit year .
%H 24-hour number (0023).
%J Day number of mont h, wit hout leading zer o (131).
%M Minut e number (0059).
%S Second number (0059).
%T Complet e t ime in hh:mm:ss for mat (i.e., 15:24:32).
%Y Year number including cent ur y (i.e., 2002).
%a Day of t he week name, abbreviat ed t o t hr ee let t er s (Mon, Tue,
Wed, Thu, Fr i, Sat and Sun). Uses t ext in syst em message
#423.
%b Mont h name, abbreviat ed t o t hr ee let t er s (J an, Feb, Mar , Apr ,
May, J un, J ul, Aug, Sep, Oct , Nov and Dec). Uses t ext in sys-
t em message #423.
Dat e 159
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
%d Day number of mont h (0131).
%h Mont h name, abbr eviat ed t o t hr ee let t er s (J an, Feb, Mar , Apr ,
May, J un, J ul, Aug, Sep, Oct , Nov and Dec). Uses t ext in sys-
t em message #423. This for mat is ident ical t o t he %b for mat
specificat ion.
%j The J ulian day number (001366).
%m The cur r ent mont h number (0112).
%r The cur r ent t ime in 12-hour not at ion (i.e., 03:15:20PM).
%w Weekday number wit h Sunday = 0.
%y Year number in cent ur y (0099).
Notes Remember t hat t he for mat specificat ion must st ar t wit h a plus sign. If
format cont ains any spaces or lower case let t er s you must enclose it wit hin
quot at ion marks.
This is a command t hat out put s t o t he st andar d out put device so t he
out put can be r edir ect ed t o a disk file, pr int er , et c. See St andar d Input ,
St andar d Out put and I/O Redir ect ion on page 53 of t he THEOS Corona
Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence.
See also Set, Setup SysGen, Setup Time, Show
160 Dat e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Decrypt 161
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Decrypt Command
The Decrypt command decr ypt s a sequent ial file using public key/pr ivat e key Dat a Encr yp-
t ion St andar d (DES) 56-bit or 128-bit encr ypt ion algor it hms.
Operation Using t he public key built int o t he Decrypt command (which is t he same
public key t hat Encrypt uses) and t he pr ivat e key password specified, t he
source file is decr ypt ed and t he result is out put t o t he destination file.
Options DES Use t he 56-bit DES encr ypt ion algor it hm
DES56 Use t he 56-bit DES encr ypt ion algor it hm
TDES Use t he 128-bit DES encr ypt ion algor it hm
Notes Refer t o t he enckjsdf command for a descr ipt ion of t he DES encrypt ion
st andard.
Because t he password is case-sensit ive and t he CSI nor mally folds t he
ar gument s t o upper case, it is best t o always enclose t he password in quot a-
t ion mar ks t o ensure t hat it is passed t o t he Decrypt command pr oper ly.
Filters The Decrypt command can oper at e as a filt er or pipe.
When not specified, t he destination file for bot h Decrypt command is stdout.
This can be r edirect ed t o a file or anot her pr ogr am.
DECRYPT source ( password
1 DECRYPT source dest inat ion ( password
2 DECRYPT source ( password > destination
3 DECRYPT ( password < source > destination
source name of file t o decrypt or encr ypt
dest ination name t o use for r esult ing decr ypt ed or encr ypt ed file
password pr ivat e key passwor d, case-sensit ive
opt ion algor it hm t o use for encr ypt ion:
DES DES128
DES56 TDES
162 Decrypt
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The above command will decr ypt t he source file and out put it t o t he scr een.
DECRYPT source ( password | LIST ( print
This second command will decr ypt t he source file and pipe t he r esult t o t he
LIST command which will pr int it t o t he pr imar y pr int er .
ENCRYPT source ( TDES password1 | ENCRYPT ( TDES password2 > dest
...
DECRYPT source ( password2 | DECRYPT ( password1 > dest
This last command might be used t o decr ypt t he file generat ed in t he pr e-
vious Encrypt example. Not e t hat t he sequence of t he passwor ds is t he
r ever se. It decr ypt s t he source file using password2 and pipes t he r esult t o
t he Decrypt command t o decr ypt it again wit h password1. The r esult is
saved in dest.
Defaults When decr ypt ing a file, if t he algor it hm is not specified t hen DES 56-bit
encr ypt ion is used.
Cautions The pr ivat e-key password is not embedded in t he encr ypt ed file. If a differ -
ent key is used t o decr ypt t he file t han was used t o encr ypt it , t he Decrypt
command cannot r epor t t he er r or and will mer ely gener at e a dest inat ion
file t hat is not a pr oper ly decr ypt ed for m of t he or iginal file. Remember
your passwor ds but do not wr it e t hem down for secur it y r easons.
Restrictions Only st r eam or sequent ial files can be encr ypt ed.
See also Encrypt, FileManager, WinWrite
Dial 163
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Dial Command EXEC
The Dial command is an EXEC language pr ogr am t hat pr ovides convenient access t o t he
THEO+COM commands modem and t elephone number dialing capabilit ies.
Operation Mode 1Invokes THEO+COM in DIAL mode. The fir st at t ached communi-
cat ions port is used and t he Dialing Dir ect or y is t hen invoked, allowing
you t o choose one of t he ent r ies t o dial. Dialing dir ect ory maint enance is
allowed along wit h manual dialing.
Refer t o t he THEO+COM Inst allation and Users Guide manual for a
descr ipt ion of t he dialing direct or y and it s use.
Dial aut omat ically exit s aft er a number is dialed or if you abort t he selec-
t ion of a number. Any modem or t elephone connect ion r emains connect ed.
Mode 2Invokes THEO+COM in DIAL mode. The fir st at t ached communi-
cat ions port is used and number is dialed via t he device connect ed t o t hat
por t .
>dial 1 800 123-4567
Dialing 1 800 123-4567
The number may cont ain any of t he following char act er s.
1 DIAL
2 DIAL number
number t elephone number t o dial
Character Meaning or Effect
( ) - space Ignor ed: Used for r eadabilit y pur poses only.
digit s 09 Gener at es t he t ones or pulses for t he digit .
, Wait for t wo seconds. Mult iple commas may be used for
addit ional per iods of delay.
/ Wait for 125 milliseconds. (Not all modems suppor t t his
code.)
W Wait for a secondar y dial t one.
@ Wait for five seconds of silence.
! Go on-hook for second and t hen r et ur n t o off-hook. Also
called flash hook.
164 Dial
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Dial exit s aft er a number is dialed. Any modem or t elephone connect ion
r emains connect ed.
Notes To use a communicat ions por t ot her t han t he fir st at t ached COMn device,
or t o use any of t he THEO+COM command line opt ions, you must use t he
THEO+COM command (synonym name is COM).
Defaults Dial uses t he communicat ion pr ot ocol and configurat ion defined by
THEO+COMs configur at ion menu.
Restrictions A modem or comput er -cont r olled t elephone dialer must be connect ed t o t he
fir st communicat ions port . Dial will wait for ever t o get a valid r esponse
fr om t he device. You may have t o abor t t he command ( (Break),(Q) ).
The THEO+COM configur at ion and modem set up must be defined pr oper ly
befor e using t he Dial command.
See also THEO+COM
let t ers AZ Gener at es t he t ones or pulses cor responding t o t he t ele-
phone dial let t er s. For inst ance, t he number 93THEOS
would dial 9384367. The let t er s A, B and C mat ch t he
digit 1, t he let t er s D, E and F mat ch t he digit 2, etc.
The let t er s AD may not be specified wit h spaces sur -
r ounding each let t er or t hey will be int er pret ed as t he
DTMF codes descr ibed next .
* # A B C D Gener at es t he corr esponding t elephone t ones if t one dial-
ing mode is enabled. The let t er codes must be specified
wit h spaces sur r ounding t hem t o avoid confusing t hem
wit h t he t elephone dialing pad let t er s descr ibed above.
P Swit ch t o pulse dialing mode. This code must be sur -
r ounded by space char act er s.
T Swit ch t o t one dialing mode. This code must be sur -
r ounded by space char act er s.
R Swit ch t o answer mode aft er dialing. This code can only
be used at t he end of t he dialing st r ing. It is used when
init iat ing a call t o an or iginat e-only modem. Aft er t he
number is dialed, your modem swit ches t o answer mode.
; Ret urns t o modem command mode aft er t he number is
dialed. This code can only be used at t he end of t he dial-
ing st r ing and it must be par t of a st r ing enclosed in quo-
t at ion mar ks (ot herwise t he CSI will t r eat it as a
comment ).
Character Meaning or Effect
DialNet 165
D
I
A
L
N
E
T
DialNet Command
The DialNet command is used t o cont r ol and monit or Dial-Up Net wor king connect ions
(DUN).
The DialNet command can oper at e wit h a command-line int er face or as a
windowed int er face. This is r eflect ed in t he t wo modes of oper at ion. Bot h
modes can per for m t he same oper at ions, but t he infor mat ion shown and
how it is displayed differ s bet ween t he t wo.
Operation Mode 1This is t he command-line int er face t o DialNet and is suit able for
usage by EXECs and applicat ion pr ogr ams. To use t his mode when t her e
ar e mult iple pr ofiles defined, you must know t he name of t he pr ofile defini-
t ion t hat you want t o use. If t her e is only one profile defined, t hat pr ofile is
used aut omat ically and you do not have t o specify t he pr ofile name.
DialNet can per for m t hr ee funct ions:
To connect t o a r emot e PPP ser ver , use t he command:
>dialnet start pr ofi l e-na me
To display t he st at us of a cur r ent connect ion t o a PPP ser ver , use t he com-
mand:
>dialnet status pr ofi l e-na me
To disconnect fr om a r emot e PPP ser ver , use t he command:
>dialnet stop p r ofi l e-na me
Refer t o t he Command-Line Interface on page 169 for a descr ipt ion of t he
infor mat ion displayed by t hese funct ions.
1 DIALNET function profile
2 DIALNET
function START
STOP
STATUS
profile name of pr ofile defined in SETUP NET
166 DialNet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2This is t he windowed int er face t o t he DialNet command.
Windowed
Interface
When Mode 2 is used, it displays t he following scr een and menu:
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed it em.
The window on t he r ight displays a brief summar y about each pr ofile t hat
is cur r ent ly connect ed.
When Connect, Disconnect or Status is select ed, and you have mult iple pr o-
files defined, you ar e offered a list of t he profiles available for t hat func-
t ion. Pr ofiles ar e defined wit h t he Setup Net Dial-Up Networking menu. (See
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Inst allation and S et up
Guide.) When only one pr ofile is defined, t he oper at ion is per for med aut o-
mat ically on t hat single profile.
You may exit t his menu be select ing t he Exit it em, by pr essing (Esc) or by
pr essing (F9).
Connect. Select ing t his it em connect s t o t he single profile defined in your
configur at ion or , if t her e ar e mult iple profiles defined it displays a list of
t hose pr ofiles t hat are not cur r ent ly connect ed. Select t he pr ofile t hat you
want connect ed. An at t empt is made t o dial and connect t o t he PPP ser ver
specified in t he pr ofile definit ion. Press (Esc) if you do not want t o connect
t o any of t hose pr ofiles at t his t ime.
DialNet 167
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When successfully connect ed, t he Connect ed Pr ofiles window on t he
r ight is updat ed wit h t he new connect ion summar y infor mat ion. Not e t hat
t he Connect Time infor mat ion display is only updat ed ever y t en seconds.
For possible pr oblems t hat might be encount er ed dur ing t he connect ion
at t empt , r efer t o t he DialNet Start descr ipt ion on page 169.
Disconnect. When only one pr ofile is connect ed, t his funct ion disconnect s
t hat profile. When mult iple pr ofiles ar e connect ed a list of t hose connect ed
pr ofiles is displayed and you can select t he one t hat you want discon-
nect ed. Pr ess (Esc) if you do not want t o disconnect any of t hose pr ofiles at
t his t ime. If t her e ar e no pr ofiles connect ed, an er ror message displays.
DUN connect ions ar e available t o all user s on your syst em, so be sur e t hat
t he connect ion is not being used at t his t ime. It is possible t hat anot her
session on t his t er minal or anot her user on t he syst em is using t he connec-
t ion.
Status. When only one pr ofile is connect ed t he st at us of t hat connect ion is
displayed. When mult iple profiles ar e connect ed a list of t hose connect ed
pr ofiles displays and you can select t he one t hat you want t he st at us dis-
played. Pr ess (Esc) if you do not want t o see t he st at us of any of t hose pr o-
files at t his t ime. If t her e ar e no pr ofiles connect ed, an err or message
displays.
The st at us display for a connect ed pr ofile appear s as:
Most of t he meanings of t he fields in t his display are appar ent . To clar ify
t hose t hat might not be apparent :
Profile: PACIFIER
Host IP: 206.163.58.6
Remote IP: 204.245.231.131
Connected on: 03/12/2001 08:02:45 for: 00:06:12
Bytes sent: 1,591 received: 2,611
Packets sent: 34 received: 27
Packets rejected: 2
Largest packet sent: 133 received: 576
Handshake: CTS/RTS Baud rate: 38,400
Inactivity time-out: 00:10:00 remaining: 00:07:39
Modem phone speed: 28,800
Connection Status
168 DialNet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Host IP The IP addr ess for your comput er . This was assigned by t he
r emot e PPP server and may be differ ent each t ime t hat you
connect . (Dynamic IP addr ess assignment .)
Remote IP The IP addr ess of t he remot e PPP ser ver . This may be differ ent
each t ime t hat you connect if t he r emot e sit e has mult iple PPP
ser ver s.
Packets rejected The number of packet s sent t o or r eceived fr om t he PPP
ser ver t hat wer e r eject ed for one r eason or anot her . Each t ime
t hat a packet is r eject ed, a log ent r y is added t o t he DUN log
file defined in Setup Net Dial-Up Networking. (See THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Inst allation and S et up
Guide.)
Baud rate The t r ansmission speed bet ween your comput er and t he
modem. This is specified in t he pr ofile definit ion.
remaining This is t he amount of t ime remaining unt il t he connect ion is
aut omat ically t er minat ed. This t ime is r eset t o t he Inact ivit y
Time-out value ever y t ime t hat a packet is sent or received
over t he connect ion.
Not e: This field and t he Inact ivit y Time-out field ar e only dis-
played if t her e is a t imeout value specified for t he pr ofile.
Modem phone speed This is t he t r ansmission speed bet ween t he t wo
modems: your modem and t he r emot e modem. This speed may
be lower t han t he Baud rate speed because it is t he result of
negot iat ions bet ween t he t wo modems and is t he best speed
t hat t hey suppor t wit h t he cur r ent t elephone connect ion.
DialNet 169
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Command-
Line Interface
The DialNet command-line int er face pr ovides all of t he capabilit ies of t he
menued int er face and can be used fr om an EXEC or applicat ion pr ogr am.
Unlike t he menued int er face, which displays a list of pr ofile names t hat
you can choose fr om, t he command-line int er face r equir es t hat you know
t he name of t he pr ofile definit ion t hat you want t o use.
When DialNet is used fr om an applicat ion, r emember t hat i/o r edir ect ion
can be used t o r edir ect t he out put of DialNet t o a disk file. For inst ance:
>dialnet start myisp > connect.message
This disk file can t hen be r ead and used by t he applicat ion pr ogr am.
DialNet Start
The DialNet Start funct ion connect s t his syst em t o t he r emot e PPP ser ver
defined in t he pr ofile definit ion. For inst ance:
>dialnet start myisp
Profile "MYISP" connected successfully,
Host IP address: 206.163.58.53
Remote IP address: 204.245.231.131.
If t he profile is alr eady connect ed, t he same messages ar e displayed.
Ther e ar e sever al sit uat ions t hat may pr event a successful connect ion.
+ The PPP ser ver is not st ar t ed. (See t he Setup Net Dial-Up Networking
command.)
+ The profile name specified is not defined.
+ The profile is alr eady in use by anot her user.
+ The ser ial por t r efer enced in t he pr ofile definit ion is in use by
anot her t ask.
+ The t elephone number is invalid or cannot be r eached at t his t ime
(busy or your phone line is alr eady in use).
+ The Login Name and/or Passwor d specified in t he pr ofile defini-
t ion is invalid. Remember t hat some PPP ser ver s use case-sensi-
t ive account names and almost all use case-sensit ive passwor ds.
170 DialNet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
DialNet Stop
The DialNet Stop funct ion disconnect s t his syst em fr om a curr ent ly con-
nect ed r emot e PPP ser ver . For inst ance:
>dialnet stop myisp
Profile "MYISP" is now disconnected.
Ther e ar e sever al sit uat ions t hat may pr event a successful disconnect ion.
+ The PPP ser ver is not st ar t ed.
+ The pr ofile name specified is not defined.
+ The pr ofile is not cur r ent ly connect ed.
DialNet Status
The DialNet Status funct ion displays t he st at us of a pr ofile.
>dialnet status myisp2
Dial-Up Network Profile "MYISP2" is not started.
>dialnet status myisp
Dial-Up Network Profile "MYISP" is connected.
Connection task: 13
Host IP address: 206.163.58.17
Remote IP address: 204.245.231.131
Bytes sent: 0
Bytes received: 0
Packets sent: 0
Packets received: 0
Packets rejected: 2
Largest packet sent: 0 bytes.
Largest packet received: 0 bytes.
Inactivity time-out value: 600 seconds.
Time remaining in inactivity timer: 67 seconds.
Registered users for this profile: 1
Connect time: 00:08:53
Serial port speed: 19200 bps
This connection is the default gateway.
The fields displayed in t his st at us r eport have t he following meanings:
DialNet 171
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Connection task The user pr ocess number assigned for t his connect ion.
Host IP address The dot t ed IP addr ess assigned by t he r emot e PPP server
for your syst em on it s net wor k.
Remote IP address The dot t ed IP addr ess of t he remot e PPP ser ver .
Bytes sent The number of byt es t r ansmit t ed over t his connect ion.
Bytes received The number of byt es r eceived over t his connect ion.
Packets sent The number of TCP/IP packet s t r ansmit t ed over t his connec-
t ion.
Packets received The number of TCP/IP packet s r eceived over t his connec-
t ion.
Packets rejected The number of TCP/IP packet s reject ed. A log ent r y is
added t o your Dial-Up Net wor king log file, if one was defined
in t he Setup Net Dial-Up Networking.
Largest packet sent Size of lar gest packet sent t o PPP ser ver .
Largest packet received Size of largest packet r eceived from PPP ser ver .
Inactivity time-out value This value is defined in t he pr ofile definit ion.
Time remaining in inactivity timer The amount of t ime r emaining unt il an
aut omat ic disconnect occur s. This t imer is r eset ever y t ime
t hat a packet is sent or r eceived over t his connect ion.
Registered users for this profile Indicat es t he number of users t hat ar e
act ively using t his connect ed pr ofile at t his t ime.
Connect time The lengt h of t ime t hat t his pr ofile has been connect ed.
Serial port speed The t ransmission speed bet ween your comput er and t he
modem. This value is specified in t he pr ofile definit ion.
This connection is the default gateway. Indicat es t hat , while t his profile is
connect ed, it is t he default gat eway. When t he pr ofile is discon-
nect ed, t he default gat eway r ever t s t o t he gat eway specified in
t he Setup Net Identification menu. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Installat ion and S etup Guide.)
172 DialNet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Dynamic IP
Addresses
Because dial-up connect ions t o ISPs cause your IP addr ess t o be dynami-
cally assigned, each t ime t hat you connect you may have a differ ent IP
addr ess assigned t o your comput er on t heir net wor k. Besides displaying
t he IP addr ess assigned t o you, DialNet also wr it es t he infor mat ion t o a disk
file.
Each t ime t hat you successfully connect t o a pr ofile, DialNet wr it es t he
Host IP addr ess t o t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/DUN_IP:S. When you disconnect
fr om a pr ofile, t hat file is er ased, indicat ing t hat t he IP addr ess is no
longer valid. This file is a st ream file t hat can be used by applicat ion pr o-
grams. If ot her, r emot e user s need t o access your comput er via t his dial-up
connect ion, you must let t hem know t he IP addr ess cur r ent ly assigned t o
your comput er .
Restrictions To successfully use t he DialNet command, sever al condit ions must be met :
+ The PPP ser ver must be st ar t ed.
+ One or mor e profiles must be defined in t he Setup Net Dial-up Net-
working menu. (See THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem
Installat ion and S etup Guide.)
+ The specific profile r equest ed must be defined.
+ The ser ial por t specified in t he profile definit ion must be at t ached
as a public device or not at t ached by any user.
+ If t he ser ial por t is a public device, it must be unused at t he
pr esent t ime by any ot her pr ocess.
To connect t wo profiles, t he definit ions for t he pr ofiles must use differ ent
serial por t s and each must have it s own t elephone line.
Disk 173
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Disk Command
The Disk command for mat s and par t it ions disk volumes, r epor t s on t he st at us of t he disk
and disk allocat ion, and performs diagnost ic t est s of a disk volume.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he Disk command menu descr ibed on page 184.
Mode 2Display t he main, r oot direct or y size and locat ion for dr ive
at t ached as drive.
>disk /:s
"/:S" directory is at sector 4; offset 20
232 256
116 4,511,768
The above example shows a r oot dir ect or y wit h t wo ext ent s (indicat ing
t hat it has gr own since it was or iginally allocat ed). It has a t ot al size of 348
sect ors.
1 DISK
2 DISK /:drive
3 DISK drive ( opt ions
4 DISK drive ( FORMAT format -options
5 DISK file ( opt ions
drive disk dr ive at t achment let t er
opt ions ACCOUNT FAST LABEL PRTnn
BADMAP FIX MAP SEEK
BOOT FREE MULTIUSER SIZE nn
CLEAN FRAGMENT NOASK SHOW
CLEAR HEX OPTIMIZE VERIFY
format-opt ions BOOT NOASK
CYLINDERS nnnn SECTORS nnn
DENSITY n SIZE nn
HEADS nn TRACKS nnnn
INCREMENT nn
174 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3Per for ms one of t he st at us r epor t s or diagnost ic t est s indicat ed
by t he specific opt ions specified. When no opt ion is specified t he default
opt ion of FAST is per for med.
>disk i
Disk I label "Image".
File system = THEOS.
When t he opt ion is FAST or SHOW t he drive specificat ion may be t he wild
car d ast er isk ( * ). This displays t he disk st at us for each of t he curr ent ly
at t ached drives, in dr ive search sequence. Dr ives not included in t he drive
sear ch sequence ar e omit t ed fr om t his r epor t . (The dr ive sear ch sequence
is descr ibed on page 110.)
>set search sim
>date "+Disk status as of %B %d, %Y at %H:%M" > disk.status:s
>disk * >> disk.status:s
The above commands define a dr ive sear ch sequence t hat includes t he
syst em dr ive and t wo ot her at t ached drives. Using i/o redir ect ion, a dat e
st amp is out put t o a log file and t hen t he disk st at us r eport is appended t o
t hat log file. This log file cont ains:
Disk status as of August 03, 2001 at 08:50
Disk S label "THEOS".
Archived to disk "TUESDAY" on 3 August 2001, at 18:35.
File system = THEOS/4G.
Main directory size = 1,004 files.
Allocated bytes = 124,427,008.
Disk M label "Ram_Disk".
Disk 175
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4For mat s a disk volume. For mat t ing involves t he physical for -
mat t ing of ever y sect or on t he disk volume and t he building of a THEOS
disk volume, including t he disk label infor mat ion and an empt y r oot dir ec-
t or y. See For mat t ing Disks on page 186.
Mode 5Displays t he allocat ion infor mat ion about file. This infor mat ion
includes t he physical locat ion of t he direct or y ent r y for file and a list of all
of t he ext ent s of file showing t heir locat ions and sizes in sect or s.
>disk master.control:s
"MASTER.CONTROL:S" directory is at sector 92; offset 0
64 137
>disk julian.*
"JULIAN.COMMAND:S" directory is at sector 97; offset 128
174 376,638
"JULIAN.BASIC:S" directory is at sector 164; offset 128
1 12,516
4 19,898
"JULIAN.ORIGINAL:S" directory is at sector 203; offset 0
5 9,157
"JULIAN.OLDCMD:S" directory is at sector 245; offset 128
174 376,464
The fir st number displayed on t he second line is t he count of t he number of
sect ors used by t he file st ar t ing at t he sect or number shown on t he r ight .
Thus, in t he above example, t he MASTER.CONTROL:S file has a single ext ent
t hat uses 64 sect or s st art ing at sect or number 137.
Options ACCOUNT This opt ion has meaning only when used wit h t he MAP opt ion.
It r est r ict s t he map display t o t hose files owned by t he cur r ent
account . Compar e t he following example wit h t he example
shown wit h t he MAP opt ion.
>logon acct9
>disk i (map account
Sectaddr Count Ext File-name
486 4 ACCT9\SAMPLE.DIRECT
490 37 ACCT9\SAMPLE.INDEXED
527 198 ACCT9\SAMPLE.KEYED
BADMAP Displays a list of t he unusable sect or s.
BOOT Copies t he file SYSTEM.THEOS32.BOOTER1 t o sect or s 03.
CLEAN Cleans all of t he unallocat ed sect ors on t he disk by wr it ing
zer os t o t hem. This opt ion would be appr opr iat e if you want t o
insur e t hat all er ased files are t r uly er ased.
176 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Nor mally when a file is er ased, it s dir ect or y ent r y is mar ked as
delet ed and t he disk space is r et ur ned t o t he fr ee space map.
The dat a in t he file st ill resides on t he disk and could be
accessed by someone using t he pat ch command. The dat a is not
dest r oyed unt il t he space is over wr it t en by anot her file.
This opt ion dest r oys t he cont ent s of all er ased files.
CLEAR Clear s t he disk of all files and dir ect or y ent r ies. The r oot dir ec-
t or y is r ebuilt as an empt y direct or y using it s cur r ent allocat ed
size. Use t he SIZE opt ion t o clear t he dir ect or y t o a differ ent
size.
Since t his is a ver y dest r uct ive oper at ion, you ar e asked t o con-
fir m t his r equest befor e t he disk is clear ed.
>disk f (clear
Ok to erase all files on disk F (Y/N)
FAST Displays a quick disk st at us. Unlike t he SHOW opt ion, files ar e
not count ed and misallocat ions ar e not checked. This is t he
default opt ion when no opt ions ar e indicat ed
>disk j
File system = THEOS/IMG.
Available bytes = 107,008.
Compar e t his display wit h t he display fr om t he SHOW opt ion.
The drive may be specified wit h t he wild car d *.
FIX At t empt s t o cor rect disk misallocat ions.
FRAGMENT Displays a list of all of t he files t hat ar e fragment ed or use
mor e t han one ext ent .
>disk s (fragment multiuse
Areas File name
2 SYSTEM\ATTACH.OUTPUT
3 SYSTEM\B20UPD.IMG
2 SYSTEM\DIALDIR/COMPUSRV.BACKUP
...
Total fragmented files: 165 out of 9,939.
2 percent of files on disk are fragmented.
Disk 177
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
A file may be fr agment ed for one of t hr ee r easons: When it was
or iginally cr eat ed t her e was insufficient cont iguous disk space
for t he ent ir e file; t he file gr ew in size and, at t hat t ime, t he
next fr ee space available was not cont iguous wit h t he exist ing
file; t he file is larger t han t he maximum size for one ext ent .
Ther e is a slight per for mance degr adat ion wit h fr agment ed
files but it is insignificant in most sit uat ions.
FREE Displays t he list of available sect or s for t he disk.
>disk j (free
Sector Count
867 79
2,189 308
2,891 27
4,092 4
HEX This opt ion can be used wit h t he MAP and FREE opt ions t o
cause t he number s t o display in hexadecimal.
>disk k (map hex
0 4 ** boot
4 1 ** label
5 0x35 ** main directory
0x3A 1 ** free space map
0x3B 0x1FC5 ** available sectors
LABEL Changes t he disk volume label. The new label can eit her be
specified on t he command line by following t he LABEL keywor d
wit h an equal sign and t he new label or , when t his is not done,
you ar e asked for t he new label.
>disk f (label
Enter disk label: Sample
>disk f (label=Example
Disk labels may use upper and lowercase let t er s, digit s. t he
under scor e, space or per iod char act er s. Labels ar e limit ed t o a
maximum of eight char act er s.
Aft er t he label is changed a disk mount oper at ion is per for med.
See Mount on page 367.
178 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MAP Displays a usage map of all sect or s on t he dr ive volume. This
map display is in disk sect or number sequence.
>disk i (map
0 4 ** boot
4 1 ** label
5 241 ** main directory
246 1 ** free space map
247 4 SYSTEM\TEST.DIRECT
251 37 SYSTEM\TEST.INDEXED
288 198 SYSTEM\TEST.KEYED
486 4 ACCT9\SAMPLE.DIRECT
490 37 ACCT9\SAMPLE.INDEXED
527 198 ACCT9\SAMPLE.KEYED
725 7,467 ** available sectors
The Ext column has number s in it only for t hose files t hat ar e
fr agment ed. See t he FRAGMENT opt ion descr ipt ion on page
176.
Ther e ar e sever al ident ifier s used in t he File-name column t o
ident ify disk space used by non-files. These ident ifier s are
descr ibed in t he following t able.
Message Meaning
** boot The fir st four sect or s of ever y disk ar e
r eser ved for a boot st rap loader pr o-
gr am.
** label The fift h sect or of ever y disk cont ains
disk label infor mat ion.
** main directory The r oot dir ect ory of t he dr ive.
** free space map One or mor e consecut ive sect or s iden-
t ifying locat ions on t he dr ive t hat ar e
not in use by any file. Mult iple fr ee
space map sect ions will be used on a
dr ive t hat has had files delet ed or
ext ended, causing addit ional ar eas of
t he disk t o become available.
** available sectors One or mor e cont iguous sect or s t hat
ar e not assigned t o any file or ot her
funct ion.
Disk 179
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If disk er ror s ar e r epor t ed, t hey should be corr ect ed as soon as
possible!
MULTIUSER Tells Disk not t o check for mult iuser oper at ion befor e per form-
ing t he r equest ed funct ion. When Disk is inst r uct ed t o FORMAT
or FIX a public disk, it requir es single user mode. If ot her user s
ar e logged ont o t he syst em, it displays t he message: Must be
single user or pr ivat e volume.
Using t his opt ion t ells Disk t o not r est r ict t he funct ion t o sin-
gle-user oper at ion (t he message is st ill displayed). See Cau-
t ions on page 187.
NOASK When used wit h t he CLEAR opt ion, suppr esses t he r equest Ok
t o er ase all files.... Use t his opt ion only if you ar e cer t ain t hat
you have specified t he proper disk.
OPTIMIZE Cleans up and opt imizes t he disks dir ect or ies and libr ar ies by
r emoving delet ed ent r ies (er ased files), sor t ing subdir ect or ies
and r eor der ing t he files in subdir ect ories. A slight perfor mance
incr ease can r esult fr om t his opt imizat ion.
PRTnn Indicat es t hat Disk is t o pr int t he infor mat ion on t he at t ached
pr int er number nn inst ead of t he st andar d out put device or
console.
SEEK Test s t he disks access and r eliabilit y by per for ming cont inu-
ous r andom seeks and r eading t he dat a found t her e.
Not e t hat disk caching is not bypassed. For small disk volumes
wit h disk caching enabled, t his means t hat most if not all of
t he disk t est ing will be sat isfied by t he disk cache memor y and
is not a t r ue t est of t he disk access. In t his sit uat ion, disk cach-
ing should be disabled. See Cache on page 43.
** missing sectors THIS IS AN ERROR MESSAGE! It iden-
t ifies an area of t he disk t hat is not
account ed for by any file or fr ee space
map.
** overlaps THIS IS AN ERROR MESSAGE! It iden-
t ifies an area of t he disk t hat is
owned by t wo or mor e files.
Message Meaning
180 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SHOW Analyzes t he disk and displays t he disk st at us. All files ar e
count ed and t he allocat ions for each file ar e checked. Under or
over -allocat ed amount s ar e r epor t ed.
>disk s (show
Disk S label "THEOS5".
Archived to disk "Thursday" on 8 January, 2002, at 16:25.
File system = THEOS/LFS.
Capacity = 13,752,668,160 (1,672 cylinders, 255 heads, 126 sec).
Main directory uses 125 out of 855 files.
Total files = 27,072.
510 directories.
63 libraries.
23,650 stream files.
2,730 program files.
54 indexed files.
9 keyed files
56 relative files.
Allocated bytes = 1,445,377,024.
Available bytes = 12,307,291,136.
Not e t hat , if a misallocat ion is r epor t ed and ot her user s ar e
act ive on t he syst em, t he misallocat ion may be okay if it is due
t o anot her user allocat ing or deallocat ing disk space at t he
t ime t his st at us r epor t is gener at ed. Check t he st at us again
aft er all user s ar e logged off or at command prompt s.
The File syst em displays as
The drive may be specified wit h t he wild car d *.
File System Meaning
CD-ROM Disk is a CD-ROM disc
DOS/FAT32 Disk is a DOS or Windows disk
at t ached as DOSDiskA or DOSDiskC
THEOS/4GB Disk is a THEOS floppy or a THEOS
har d disk for mat t ed wit h t he 4GB file
syst em
THEOS/IMG Disk is an image dr ive at t achment
THEOS/LFS Disk is a har d disk for mat t ed wit h
Cor ona as a Lar ge File Syst em
THEOS/RAMDISK Disk is a RAMDISK at t achment
TNFS Disk is a r emot e net wor k dr ive
Disk 181
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SIZE This opt ion can be used wit h t he CLEAR or SHOW opt ion.
When used wit h t he CLEAR opt ion, you must specify t he
desir ed dir ect or y size immediat ely following t his keywor d.
>disk a (clear size 200
Ok to erase all files on disk A (Y/N) Y
>disk a
Disk A label "Image".
File system = THEOS/IMG.
VERIFY Test s a disks r eadabilit y by r eading ever y sect or on t he disk.
As each sect or is r ead, it s locat ion is displayed and a progress
bar is updat ed t o reflect t he amount of t he disk t hat has been
ver ified so far .
>disk s (verify
Disk caching is bypassed dur ing t his t est . Any er r or s det ect ed
ar e displayed on bot h st andar d out put and st andar d er r or
devices.
Not e: The VERIFY opt ion causes t he Disk command t o fir st ver -
ify t hat t he disk cont ains a THEOS file syst em (4GB, LFS,
IMG, RAMDISK). If it cont ains anot her file syst em (DOS,
FAT32, CDROM, etc.) it r epor t s IFS disks cannot be opened
and exit s wit hout ver ifing t he sect or s on t he disk.
182 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Format
Options
BOOT Copies t he file /THEOS/OS/LOADER1.SYS t o sect or s 03. Refer t o in
Appendix D: System Files in t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing Syst em Refer ence for a descr ipt ion.
CYLINDERS Specifies t he number of cylinder s or t r acks per sur face on t he
disk. The number is specified following t he CYLINDERS key-
wor d. Refer t o Formatting Disks on page 186 for recommenda-
t ions on t he number cylinder s.
DENSITY Specifies t he densit y of each sect or on t he disk and whet her or
not t he disk is r emovable or fixed. The code is specified imme-
diat ely following t he DENSITY keywor d.
Not e: Only code 7 and 15 ar e used by st andar d THEOS disks.
HEADS Number of heads or r ecor dable sur faces on t he disk. Refer t o
Formatting Disks on page 186 for recommendat ions on t he
number of heads t o use.
INCREMENT Specifies t he relat ionship bet ween physical and logical sec-
t or s in each cylinder . An incr ement value of 1 indicat es t hat
sect or s ar e accessed consecut ively (1,2,3,4, etc.); a value of 2
means every ot her sect or is read (1,3,5,7, ... 2,4,6,8, etc.); and
so on.
The incr ement value need only be specified on some older t ech-
nology dr ives. Most newer dr ives use on-boar d logic t hat
aut omat ically set s t he incr ement or int er leave values.
Removable Fixed Meaning
1 128 byt es per sect or , all sur faces.
2 10 256 byt es per sect or , all sur faces.
3 Cylinder 0: 128 byt es per sect or ;
r emainder is 256 byt es per sect or .
4 Cylinder 0, head 0: 128 byt es per
sect or ; r emainder is 256, 512 or
1024 byt es per sect or .
7 15 512 byt es per sect or , all sur faces.
(IBM PC for mat )
Table 3: Disk Densit y For mat Codes
Disk 183
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LABEL Specifies t he disk volume label for t he newly for mat t ed or built
disk. The new label can eit her be specified on t he command
line by following t he LABEL keyword wit h an equal sign and
t he new label or , when t his is not done, you are asked for t he
new label aft er t he disk is for mat t ed or built .
Disk labels may use upper and lower case let t er s, digit s and t he
under scor e char act er .
This is a default opt ion whenever a disk is for mat t ed or built .
SECTORS Specifies t he number of sect or s on each t r ack. Refer t o Format-
ting Disks on page 186 for r ecommendat ions on t he number of
sect or s t o use.
SIZE Specifies t he size of t he main dir ect or y. This size cannot be
changed again wit hout r efor mat t ing, building or clear ing t he
disk.
For best per for mance, t he size of t he main dir ect or y should be
at least t wice as lar ge as t he expect ed needs of t he disk. It is
not necessar y t o specify a size when for mat t ing a disk for
usage by t he TArchive or t he Backup because t hey can r ecr eat e
t he dir ect or y.
TRACKS Synonym t o t he CYLINDERS opt ion.
184 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Disk Menu When no dr ive code or opt ions are specified, t he Disk command menu is
displayed:
Select Drive... Select s t he dr ive t hat will be used in t his next menu selec-
t ion. Unless t his it em is used t o select a different dr ive, t he default dr ive of
S is used. You cannot clear or for mat t he syst em disk.
Test Disk Misallocation. Per for ms a Disk (SHOW on t he select ed drive and
t hen exit s. Refer t o t he SHOW opt ion descr ipt ion on page 180.
Fast Show. Performs a Disk (FAST on t he select ed drive and t hen exit s.
Refer t o t he FAST opt ion descript ion on page 176.
File Map. Per for ms a Disk (MAP on t he select ed drive. Refer t o t he MAP
opt ion descr ipt ion on page 178.
Account File Map. Per for ms a Disk (MAP ACCOUNT on t he select ed dr ive
and t hen exit s. Refer t o t he ACCOUNT opt ion descr ipt ion on page 175.
Free Map. Per for ms a Disk (FREE on t he select ed dr ive and t hen exit s.
Refer t o t he FREE opt ion descr ipt ion on page 177.
Fix Misallocations. Per for ms a Disk (FIX on t he select ed drive and t hen
exit s. Refer t o t he FIX opt ion descr ipt ion on page 176.
Seek to Random Sectors. Perfor ms a Disk (SEEK on t he select ed dr ive and
t hen exit s. Refer t o t he SEEK opt ion descr ipt ion on page 179.
Surface Analysis. Per for ms a Disk (VERIFY on t he select ed drive and t hen
exit s. Refer t o t he VERIFY opt ion descr ipt ion on page 181.
Write Boot Strap Program. Per for ms a Disk (BOOT on t he select ed dr ive
and t hen exit s. Refer t o t he BOOT opt ion descr ipt ion on page 182.
Disk 185
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Change Drive Label. Per for ms a Disk (LABEL on t he select ed dr ive and
t hen exit s. Refer t o t he LABEL opt ion descr ipt ion on page 177.
Clear Main Directory. Per for ms a Disk (CLEAR on t he select ed drive and
t hen exit s. Refer t o t he CLEAR opt ion descr ipt ion on page 176. You cannot
clear t he syst em disk.
Clean Unused Disk Space. Per for ms a Disk (CLEAN on t he select ed dr ive
and t hen exit s. Refer t o t he CLEAN opt ion descr ipt ion on page 175.
Display Fragmentation. Per for ms a Disk (FRAGMENT on t he select ed dr ive
and t hen exit s. Refer t o t he FRAGMENT opt ion descr ipt ion on page 176.
Optimize Directories. Performs a Disk (OPTIMIZE on t he select ed dr ive and
t hen exit s. Refer t o t he OPTIMIZE opt ion descr ipt ion on page 179.
186 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Formatting
Disks
Floppy disket t es and r emovable har d disks can be for mat t ed by using t he
Disk menu descr ibed on page 184 or Mode 4 of t he Disk command. Use t he
Setup Disk t o per for m init ial par t it ioning and set up of har d disks and Setup
Floppy t o for mat floppy disket t es or Setup Disk t o for mat r emovable har d
disks in bulk.
Floppy Disk Drives
Befor e a floppy disket t e can be used for t he fir st t ime by THEOS, it must
be for mat t ed or built . A quick for mat or BUILD can be done on an unused,
pr efor mat t ed disket t e or a pr eviously format t ed disket t e. This wr it es t he
THEOS/4GB file syst em informat ion on t he disk wit h an empt y dir ect ory.
Floppy disk dr ives generally suppor t mult iple densit ies and capacit ies of
disket t es. To for mat a floppy disket t e using command-line opt ions only,
you must use t he CYLINDERS, INCREMENT and SECTORS opt ions,. Use one
of t he following set s of values:
For inst ance:
>disk f (format cylinders 80 head 2 sector 36
If all of t hese par amet er s ar e not specified on t he command line, you ar e
asked t o select one of t he known for mat s support ed by t he dr ive:
>disk f (format
Code Cyls Hds Sects Capacity
1 80 2 36 1.44 MB 3"
2 80 2 30 1.2 MB 3"
3 80 2 18 720 MB 3"
Enter format code: 1
Cylinders Heads Sectors Capacity
80 2 72 2.88MB 3"
80 2 36 1.44MB 3"
80 2 30 1.2MB 3"
80 2 18 720KB 3"
Table 4: Floppy Disk For mat s
Disk 187
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
In eit her sit uat ion, you ar e next asked t o put t he disket t e in t he dr ive.
Pr essing any key ot her t han (Esc) st ar t s t he for mat t ing pr ocess:
Insert diskette to be formatted:(Enter)
Cylinder: 5 Head: 1
Aft er t he disket t e is for mat t ed, Disk needs a label. This label can be speci-
fied on t he command line wit h a LABEL= opt ion. When it is not supplied on
t he command line, you ar e asked for t he label. Aft er t he label is known, t he
disket t e is built by wr it ing t he label sect or , empt y dir ect or y and fr ee space
map. The size of t he dir ect or y can be specified on t he command line wit h
t he SIZE opt ion or , if t hat is not done, a default size is used.
Alt hough space is r eser ved on t he disk for a boot st r ap loader (sect or s 03),
it is not wr it t en t o t he disk unless t he BOOT opt ion is used.
Aft er a disket t e is for mat t ed and t he THEOS infor mat ion is wr it t en t o it ,
you ar e asked if you want t o for mat anot her disket t e in t he same dr ive.
You must ent er a (Y) t o for mat anot her disk. To t er minat e for mat t ing,
r espond wit h (Enter) or an (N).
Quick Formatting Floppy Diskettes
To quick for mat a disket t e or bat ch of disket t es, use t he Setup Floppy
command. A quick for mat does not for mat or ver ify t he readabilit y of t he
disk but mer ely wr it es t he THEOS-specific infor mat ion needed t o use t he
disk. This infor mat ion includes t he THEOS disk label sect or , r oot dir ect or y
and free space map. You can quick for mat a disket t e if it is alr eady for mat -
t ed.
Defaults The FAST opt ion is t he default opt ion when only a dr ive code is specified.
Cautions The MULTIUSER opt ion t ells t he Disk command t o not check whet her or not
ot her user s ar e logged on or act ive. It does not pr event t hose ot her user s
fr om per for ming oper at ions t hat change t he dat abase t hat t his Disk com-
mand might be using.
Do not use t he MULTIUSER opt ion unless you ar e sur e t hat any ot her user s
logged ont o t he syst em ar e not going t o be using t he dr ive t hat you are
modifying.
7%
188 Disk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions The Disk command r equires a pr ivilege level of four .
To CLEAR, FIX, FORMAT or OPTIMIZE a disk, it must be eit her a pr ivat ely
at t ached dr ive or a publicly at t ached dr ive wit h t he syst em in single-user
mode or wit h t he MULTIUSER opt ion specified.
The cur r ent syst em disk (at t ached as dr ive S) cannot be for mat t ed. To
for mat t hat dr ive you will have t o System over t o anot her dr ive or r eboot
fr om anot her dr ive.
The Disk command cannot show t he st at us of a a file on a CD-ROM disc,
nor can it be used on a DOS-for mat t ed disk except t o r efor mat it as a
THEOS-for mat t ed disk.
See also Attach, MakeBoot, Setup, System, Tape
Echo 189
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Echo Command
The Echo command defines a file or device t hat will be used for subsequent echoing of con-
sole displays. Alt er nat ely, it echoes t he r emainder of t he command line t o t he st andar d out -
put device.
Operation Mode 1Indicat es t hat file is t o be opened t o r eceive console display ech-
oes. To specify a file t hat has no file t ype, be sur e t o use t he per iod t er mi-
nat or aft er t he file name.
>echo console.output
>echo example.
Console echoing is not enabled wit h t his command. That is done by ent r y
of (Break),(P).
Mode 2Indicat es t hat t he out put device is t o be opened as t he file t o
r eceive console display echoes. Out put devices t hat may be used include
COM1COM16, PRT1PRT64 and TAPE1TAPE4. The specified device must
be cur r ent ly at t ached. If t he device is a public, non-spooled device and it is
in use by anot her user , t he Echo command will wait unt il it is closed by
t hat ot her user befor e pr oceeding.
>echo prt12
Console echoing is not enabled wit h t his command. That is done by ent r y
of (Break),(P).
Mode 3Closes any file or device pr eviously specified wit h Mode 1 or 2 of
t he Echo command. Any echoing enabled wit h (Break),(P) is disabled.
1 ECHO file
2 ECHO device
3 ECHO
4 ECHO text
device name of at t ached out put device such as COM1 or PRT3
text any t ext t hat does not look like a file name
190 Echo
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4Displays text on t he console. If console echoing was enabled wit h
Mode 1 or 2 of t he Echo command and (Break),(P) has been ent ered, t his t ext
is also echoed t o t he echo file.
>echo The following is for demonstration purposes only
The following is for demonstration purposes only
>echo example
example
Make sur e t hat t ext does not look like a file or device name. Any t ext t hat
cont ains t wo or mor e wor ds or t okens will not be misint er pr et ed. If neces-
sar y, add a dummy t oken.
>echo "" prt1
prt1
Notes Except for Mode 4, t he Echo command does not act ually echo anyt hing t o a
file. Aft er a file or device is defined wit h t he Echo command, you must
ent er a (Break),(P) t o st art and st op t he echoing pr ocess.
The Echo command is nor mally used wit h I/O r edir ect ion or in EXEC pro-
grams t o add t ext t o a log file.
>echo "Begin daily archive" >> activity.log
See also I/O r edir ect ion, descr ibed on page 53 in t he Fundament als sect ion of t he
Edit 191
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Edit Command
The Edit command is a full-scr een t ext file edit or .
Operation This command edit s an exist ing t ext file or cr eat es a new t ext file.
>edit sample.text
Top of file "/SAMPLE.TEXT:S".
End of file "/SAMPLE.TEXT:S".
>edit _chdir.msg
Top of file "/THEOS/COMMAND/_ChDir.msg:S".
Standard THEOS Command directory
Contains almost all of the standard, distributed commands.
Some commands are in other directories with a .LNK file
pointing to it.
End of file "/THEOS/COMMAND/_ChDir.msg:S".
Options NOBACKUP Does not make a backup file when changes t o t his file ar e
saved.
Notes WinWrite is a mor e moder n full-scr een t ext file edit or and should be used
inst ead of t his command.
Edit
Full-Screen
Commands
While in full-scr een mode, you can t ype t ext and use t he following keys for
edit ing t he t ext in t he file:
1 EDIT filename
2 EDIT filename ( opt ion
filename file name wit h opt ional pat h
opt ion NOBACKUP
Command Meaning
(F1) Sear ch for war d
(Shift)+(F1) Sear ch backwar d
(F2) Move t o st ar t of next word
(Shift)+(F2) Move t o st ar t of pr evious word
(F3) Repeat last find or sear ch
(F4) Find line st ar t ing wit h specified t ext
192 Edit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Edit
Commands
Most of t he act ions t hat you can per for m in full-scr een mode can also be
per for med in command mode. To swit ch bet ween t he t wo modes use t he
(Esc) key. When in command mode you can use t he following commands:
BOTTOM
Posit ion cur sor aft er t he end of t he file.
(F5) Er ase fr om cur sor t o end of line
(F6) Inser t line above cur r ent line
(Shift)+(F6) Delet e cur r ent line
(F7) Change case of char act er under cursor
(Shift)+(F7) Transpose
(F8) Move t o st art of cur r ent line
(Shift)+(F8) Move t o end of cur rent line
(F9) Quit
(F10) Save and quit
(Shift)+(F10) Save
(Insert) Toggle bet ween inser t and r eplace char act er mode
(Delete) Delet e t he char act er under t he cur sor
(Home) Move t o t op of file (Top)
(End) Move t o end of file (Bot t om)
(PageUp) Move t o and display pr evious page
(PageDown) Move t o and display next page
() Move cur sor one char act er t o r ight
() Move cur sor one char act er t o left
() Move cur sor one line up
() Move cur sor one line down
(Esc) Change t o Command mode
Command Meaning
BOTTOM
Edit 193
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CHANGE
Change t ext in t he file. The synt ax is:
Mode 1Repeat t he last CHANGE command on t he t ext in t he cur r ent
line.
Mode 2Change t he fir st occur r ence of from t o to in t he cur r ent line.
Mode 3Change t he fir st occur r ence of from t o to for each of t he next
lines number of lines, st ar t ing wit h t he cur r ent line.
Mode 4Change t he fir st occurrences number of occur r ences of from t o to
for each of t he next lines number of lines, st ar t ing wit h t he cur r ent line.
Mode 5Change t he fir st occurrences number of occur rences of from t o t o,
st ar t ing wit h t he start number of occurr ence in t he line, for each of t he
next lines number of lines st ar t ing wit h t he cur r ent line.
CSI
Execut e a syst em or applicat ion pr ogr am and t hen r et ur n t o edit ing t he
cur r ent file.
1 CHANGE
2 CHANGE /from/to
3 CHANGE /from/to/lines
4 CHANGE /from/to/lines occurrences
5 CHANGE /from/to/lines occurrences start
from Cur rent t ext
to Desir ed t ext t o change t o
lines Number of lines t o oper at e on
occurrences Number of occur r ences in each line
st art Number of fir st occurr ence t o change
194 Edit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
DELETE
Delet e lines fr om t he t ext file.
Mode 1Delet es t he cur r ent line.
Mode 2Delet e lines number of lines st art ing wit h t he cur r ent line.
Mode 3Delet e each line in t he file, st ar t ing wit h t he cur r ent line, and
cont inuing unt il a line cont aining string is found. Does not delet e t he line
cont aining string.
DUP
Add duplicat e lines of t he cur r ent line.
Mode 1Duplicat e t he curr ent line one t ime.
Mode 2Duplicat e t he curr ent line lines number of t imes.
FORMAT
Refor mat or just ify t he r emainder of t he cur r ent par agr aph.
CSI command
command Command-line t ext t o execut e
1 DELETE
2 DELETE lines
3 DELETE /string/
lines Number of lines t o delet e
st ring Text t o delet e down t o
1 DUP
2 DUP lines
lines Number of t imes t o duplicat e cur r ent line
Edit 195
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
GET
Get t ext fr om anot her file and add it t o t his file.
Mode 1Get and inser t t he t ext in t he clipboar d int o t his file at t he cur -
r ent line. Text is placed in t he clipboar d by t he PUT command and by copy
and past e operat ions suppor t ed by ot her applicat ions.
Mode 2Get lines of t ext fr om t he file specified as filename. Get zer o or
mor e lines of t hat file unt il, but not including, t he line specified by from.
from specifies a line eit her by a line number or by ident ifying t he line wit h
a t ext st r ing t hat occur s in t he line.
Mode 3Get lines of t ext fr om t he file specified as filename. Get zer o or
mor e lines of t hat file, st ar t ing wit h t he line specified by from up t o but not
including t he line specified by to.
1 GET
2 GET filename from
3 GET filename from to
filename Name of file t o get t ext fr om
from /string/
line
to /string/
line
st ring Text t o get down t o
line Number of lines t o get
196 Edit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
GOTO
Change t he cur rent line t o a differ ent line in t he t ext file.
The cur sor and t he cur r ent line is set t o line number line of t he t ext file. If
t hat line is beyond t he end of t he file t he cur r ent line is set t o t he line aft er
t he cur rent end of t he file.
LENGTH
Repor t s on t he lengt h of t he file. For inst ance:
Length = 75 bytes, 8117 free, 3 lines, at line 1:
NAME
Display or change t he name of t he t ext file.
Mode 1Displays t he cur r ent name of t he t ext file.
Mode 2Changes t he name of t he t ext file t o filename.
PRINT
Pr int t he t ext file on at t ached PRINTER1 and exit .
PRT
Synonym t o t he PRINT command.
PUT
Copy t ext lines t o t he clipboar d or t o a file.
GOTO line
line Number of line t o move t o
1 NAME
2 NAME filename
filename
Edit 197
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 1Copy t he cur r ent line t o t he clipboar d.
Mode 2Copy t ext t o t he clipboar d st ar t ing wit h t he cur rent line and con-
t inuing unt il, but not including, t he line specified by t o. This r eplaces any
t ext curr ent ly in t he clipboard.
t o specifies a line eit her by a line number or by ident ifying t he line wit h a
t ext st ring t hat occur s in t he line.
PUT 3
The above command put s t hr ee lines of t ext t o t he clipboar d.
PUT /the/
The above command put s zer o or mor e lines of t ext t o t he clipboar d, st ar t -
ing wit h t he cur rent line and cont inuing unt il t he line cont aining t ext is
found.t hr ee lines of t ext t o t he clipboar d.
Mode 3Copy t ext t o t he specified filename, st ar t ing wit h t he cur rent
line and cont inuing unt il t he line specified by t o is found. These lines
r eplace any t ext t hat may be in t he file cur rent ly.
PUTD
Similar t o t he PUT command except t hat t he t ext lines ar e r emoved from
t his file aft er t hey ar e copied t o t he clipboar d or t he specified filename.
1 PUT
2 PUT to
3 PUT filename to
filename Name of file t o put t ext t o
to /string/
line
198 Edit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUIT
Exit wit hout saving any changes.
Pr essing (F9) is a shor t cut t o t his act ion.
If t her e have been any changes made t o t he file you will be asked:
TOP
Posit ion cur sor at t he beginning of t he file.
VIEW
Invokes t he Script command t o display t he t ext file.
Restrictions Only ASCII, st r eam files can be edit ed wit h t his command.
See also LineEdit, Script, WinWrite, Viewer
1 PUTD
2 PUTD to
3 PUTD filename t o
filename Name of file t o put t ext t o
to /string/
line
QUIT
TOP
Eject 199
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Eject Command
The Eject command eject s t he media in a r emovable disk, disc drive or t ape dr ive, or it eject s
a page in a pr int er.
Operation When device is an at t ached CD-ROM drive, t he dr ives disc t r ay is opened.
When device is an at t ached t ape dr ive, t he t ape car t r idge is eject ed.
When device is a r emovable disk dr ive, t he disk is eject ed.
When device is an at t ached pr int er , a page eject or for m-feed is out put t o
t hat device.
When device is not a r emovable dr ive but is inst ead a non-r emovable dr ive,
t he drive is logically unmount ed. This means t hat t he infor mat ion t hat t he
oper at ing syst em has saved about t he dr ives for mat and label is cleared
fr om memor y and t he cur r ent posit ion of t he r ead/wr it e head is for got -
t en.
Cautions If t he device is publicly at t ached, you may be int er fer ing wit h t he oper a-
t ion of anot her users pr ogr am.
Notes The unmount oper at ion t hat is performed on a non-r emovable dr ive can be
useful because some operat ions per for med by t he syst em ar e only per-
for med on t he cur r ent ly mount ed dr ives. This feat ur e of unmount ing a
dr ive r emoves a dr ive from t his select ion pr ocess.
Restrictions The r emovable disk dr ive, t ape or CD-ROM must suppor t soft war e-con-
t rolled eject ing.
See also Mount
1 EJECT device
device name of t ape or CD-ROM device or out put device such as PRT3
200 Eject
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailChk 201
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailChk Command
The EmailChk command checks a folder in a mailbox for unr ead mail.
Operation Mode 1The default Inbox folder in mailbox is t est ed for unr ead mes-
sages. The number of unr ead messages found in mailbox is ret ur ned as t he
r et ur n code of t he command.
Mode 2The specified folder in mailbox is t est ed for unr ead messages.
The number of unr ead messages found in folder of mailbox is r et ur ned as
t he r et ur n code of t he command.
Notes This command does not check for mail on your POP ser ver . The mail mes-
sages must have been pr eviously downloaded fr om t he ser ver t o t his
syst em wit h t he TheoMail command.
Defaults When a folder is not specified (Mode 1), t he st andar d Inbox folder is used.
Return Codes Because t his command is int ended t o be used wit hin an applicat ion or an
EXEC, t he CSI r et ur n code is t he pr imar y means of r et ur ning informat ion.
A zer o or posit ive r et ur n code value indicat es t hat t he command was suc-
cessful and t he r et ur n code specifies t he number of unr ead messages in t he
folder for t hat mailbox. A negat ive r et ur n code value indicat es an er ror
was encount er ed.
Restrictions As indicat ed by t he er r or r et ur n codes, EmailChk can only access mailboxes
t hat exist and ar e configured pr oper ly.
1 EMAILCHK mailbox ( PASSWORD password
2 EMAILCHK mailbox folder ( PASSWORD password
mailbox name of t he mailbox t o check
password passwor d for mailbox
folder name of folder in mailbox t o check
RC Meaning
-1 mailbox name is invalid, doesnt exist or is cor r upt ed.
-2 folder in mailbox does not exist .
-3 THEO+Mail is not inst alled cor r ect ly or not configur ed.
-4 mailbox name is missing.
-5 mailbox is passwor d-pr ot ect ed.
202 EmailChk
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If mailbox is passwor d-pr ot ect ed, you can only access it if t he PASSWORD
opt ion is specified on t he command line.
See also EmailDel, EmailGet, EmailPut, SendMail, TheoMail
Examples The following Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am segment checks a spe-
cific folder in a mailbox for incoming, unr ead messages.
1000 WHILE 1 ! Repeat forever
1010 SYSTEM "EMAILCHK SALES ORDERS"
1020
1030 IF CSI.RETURN.CODE<0! Errors?
1040 PRINT "Error encountered when checking for mail."
1050 PRINT "Return code =";CSI.RETURN.CODE
1060 QUIT 1
1070 IFEND
1080
1090 IF CSI.RETURN.CODE=0! No messages?
1100 SLEEP 10*60! Wait for ten minutes
1110 CONTINUE ! Check again
1120 IFEND
1130
1140 ! At least one message is available. Get and process.
1150
1160 SYSTEM "EMAILGET SALES ORDERS"
1170
1180 IF CSI.RETURN.CODE<0! Error?
1190 PRINT "Error encountered when getting mail."
1210 QUIT 1
1220 IFEND
1230
1240 ! Process message file
...
1990 WEND
EmailDel 203
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailDel Command
The EmailDel command delet es messages fr om t he Inbox folder of a mailbox.
Operation All of t he messages mar ked as r ead in t he Inbox of mailbox ar e r emoved.
These messages ar e r emoved wit hout being moved t o t he mailboxs Deleted
folder .
Options The only opt ion for t his command is t he PASSWORD opt ion. It is used
when t he mailbox is password-pr ot ect ed. Specify t he passwor d aft er t he
keywor d PASSWORD.
>EmailDel mymail ( password "Aardwolf22"
The passwor d should be enclosed wit hin quot at ion mar ks t o pr eser ve t he
casemode specified.
Restrictions mailbox must r efer t o an exist ing THEO+Mail mailbox and t hat mailbox
must not be cur r ent ly in use by TheoMail.
Example >EmailDel Sales
>EmailDel Orders (Password "PriVatE"
>EmailDel General
See also EmailChk, EmailGet, EmailPut, SendMail, TheoMail
1 EMAILDEL mailbox ( opt ions
mailbox name of mailbox t o be checked
opt ions PASSWORD
204 EmailDel
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailGet 205
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailGet Command
The EmailGet command get s t he next unr ead message fr om a folder in a mailbox.
Operation Mode 1The default Inbox folder in mailbox is t est ed for unr ead messages
and, if t her e is at least one unr ead message, t hat message is conver t ed t o a
plain t ext file named mailbox.TEXT.
If t he message has at t achment files associat ed wit h it , t hey ar e ext r act ed
and saved in files named mailbox.ATTACH1 t hr ough mailbox.ATTACHn. Addi-
t ionally, a file is cr eat ed named mailbox.ATTACH t hat list s t he messages
headers and includes a line for each at t achment ext r act ed t hat shows t he
or iginal file name of t he at t achment . The r et ur n code is set t o t he number
of at t achment files saved.
Mode 2Ident ical in oper at ion t o Mode 1 except t hat folder is checked
inst ead of t he default Inbox.
Options ALL Ext r act s and saves t he message wit h all of t he MIME header s
for t he message. The message saved is t he same as if TheoMail
was used and it s File Menu, Save As E-mail menu it em was
used.
When t his opt ion is not used, t he message is saved wit h only
t he st andard header s From, To, Cc, Date and Subject.
1 EMAILGET mailbox ( opt ions
2 EMAILGET mailbox folder ( options
folder name of folder in mailbox t o check
opt ions ALL FN PASSWORD
206 EmailGet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FN This opt ion specifies t he saved messages file-name. The file-
t ype of a saved message is always TEXT. At t ached files also use
t his file-name.
>EmailGet sales (fn george
The above command saves t he message as GEORGE.TEXT.
At t achment s ar e saved as GEORGE.ATTACH1, etc.
When t his opt ion is not used t he message is saved wit h a file-
name t hat is t he same as t he mailbox name.
PASSWORD When mailbox is passwor d-pr ot ect ed, t his opt ion specifies
t he passwor d needed t o access t he mailbox.
>EmailGet private (password "Gray49aardWolf"
Because passwor ds are case-sensit ive and may cont ain spaces,
it is always best t o enclose it wit hin quot at ion marks t o ensur e
t hat it is passed t o t he EmailGet command as specified.
Notes The message r et r ieved wit h t his command is marked as r ead in t he mail-
box folder . A subsequent EmailGet on t he mailbox will get t he next unr ead
message in t he folder .
This command does not get mail fr om your POP ser ver . The mail messages
must have been pr eviously downloaded fr om t he ser ver t o t his syst em wit h
t he TheoMail pr ogr am.
You can get mail fr om t he POP server wit hout oper at or at t endance by
invoking t he TheoMail wit h t he command-line ar gument CHECK:
>TheoMail (CHECK
When TheoMail is st ar t ed wit h t he CHECK opt ion TheoMail ignor es t he
Check for New Mail and Send on Check set t ings in t he mailboxs configur a-
t ion and checks for incoming mail one t ime and t hen exit s. Message filt er -
ing may occur on t hose messages accor ding t o t he filt er rules defined in t he
mailbox.
EmailGet 207
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Attachments When t he unr ead message cont ains one or more at t ached files, t hose
at t achment s ar e ext r act ed fr om t he message and saved as separ at e files
wit h file-t ypes of ATTACHnn wher e nn indicat es t he at t achment number of
t he at t achment wit hin t he message.
Also, when t her e ar e at t achment s for t he message, an addit ional file is cr e-
at ed named mailbox.ATTACH (or filename.ATTACH if t he FN opt ion was used.
This file cont ains t he message headers and one line for each at t achment
file specifying t he or iginal at t ached file name and t he saved-as file name.
For inst ance, t he or iginal message was:
From: Fred Flintstone <fflintstone@yabadabado.com>
To: Priscilla <pris@bedrock.com>
Date: Thursday, 18 March 2002, 2:08 PM
Subject: Example message with attachments
----------------------------------------------------------
Attached are two files for your enjoyment.
Fred Flintstone
<<Attachment: archive.test>>
<<Attachment: cleanup.exe>>
Assuming t hat t his is t he fir st unr ead in t he Friends folder :
>EmailGet private friends
get s and saves t he message in four files: PRIVATE.TEXT, PRIVATE.ATTACH,
PRIVATE.ATTACH1 and PRIVATE.ATTACH2.
PRIVATE.TEXT This file cont ains t he t ext of t he message. For inst ance:
To: Priscilla <pris@bedrock.com>
Date: Thursday, 18 March 2002, 2:08 PM
---------------------------------------------------
Attached are two files for your enjoyment.
Fred Flintstone
PRIVATE.ATTACH This file cont ains t he message header s and t he at t ach-
ment summar y. For inst ance:
Date: Thu, 18 Mar 2002 14:08:11 -0800
Attachment: "archive.test" saved as "PRIVATE.ATTACH1"
Attachment: "cleanup.exe" saved as "PRIVATE.ATTACH2"
208 EmailGet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PRIVATE.ATTACH1 Cont ains t he fir st at t ached file fr om t he message.
PRIVATE.ATTACH2 Cont ains t he second at t ached file fr om t he message.
Defaults In Mode 1 t he default folder name t hat is checked for unr ead mail is Inbox.
When t he FN opt ion is not used t he file-name por t ion of t he saved message
and at t achment s is mailbox.
Return Codes Because t his command is int ended t o be used wit hin an applicat ion or an
EXEC, t he CSI r et ur n code is t he pr imar y means of r et urning infor mat ion.
A zer o or posit ive r et ur n code value indicat es t hat t he command was suc-
cessful and t he r et ur n code specifies t he number of at t achment files con-
ver t ed. A negat ive r et ur n code value indicat es an er r or was encount er ed.
Restrictions As indicat ed by t he err or r et ur n codes, EmailGet can only get a message
when t her e is at least one unr ead message in t he indicat ed folder ; can only
access mailboxes t hat exist and ar e configur ed pr oper ly; and can only
access folder s in t he mailbox t hat exist and ar e configur ed pr oper ly.
If mailbox is passwor d-pr ot ect ed, you can only access it if t he PASSWORD
opt ion is specified on t he command-line.
Cautions The message and at t achment files saved by t his ut ilit y may over wr it e pr e-
vious message and at t achment files. If t he infor mat ion needs t o be saved
for any per iod of t ime, it should be r enamed t o an unused file name.
See also EmailChk, EmailDel, EmailPut, SendMail, TheoMail
RC Meaning
-1 No unr ead messages in folder of mailbox.
-2 mailbox name is invalid, doesnt exist or is cor r upt ed.
-3 THEO+Mail is not inst alled cor r ect ly or not configur ed.
-4 mailbox name is missing.
-5 folder in mailbox does not exist .
-6 Cannot creat e mailbox.TEXT or one of mailbox.ATTACH1
t hr ough mailbox.ATTACHn files (mailbox may be
filename if FN opt ion is used).
-7 mailbox is passwor d-prot ect ed.
EmailGet 209
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Example The following Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am segment is t he cont inu-
at ion of t he example segment used for t he EmailChk on page 201.
1000 WHILE 1 ! Repeat forever
1010 SYSTEM "EMAILCHK SALES ORDERS"
...
1140 ! At least one message is available. Get and process.
1150
1160 SYSTEM "EMAILGET SALES ORDERS"
1170
1180 IF CSI.RETURN.CODE<0 ! Error?
1190 PRINT "Error encountered when getting mail."
1210 QUIT 1
1220 IFEND
1230
1240 ! Process message file
1250
1260 ATTACH.COUNT% = CSI.RETURN.CODE! Number of attachments
1270
1280 OPEN #16: "PRINTER" OUTPUT SEQUENTIAL
1290 OPEN #1: "SALES.TEXT" INPUT SEQUENTIAL
1300 LINPUT #1: TEXT.LINE$
1310 WHILE NOT EOF(1)
1320 PRINT #16: TEXT.LINE$
1330 LINPUT #1: TEXT.LINE$
1340 WEND
1350 PRINT #16:
1360 CLOSE #1
1370
1380 FOR ATTACH% = 1 TO ATTACH.COUNT%
1390 PRINT #16: "Attached file: ";CRT$("EOL");
1400 PRINT #16: "SALES.ATTACH"&STR$(ATTACH%);CRT$("EOS")
1410 NEXT
1420 CLOSE #16
1430
1440 WEND
...
210 EmailGet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailPut 211
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmailPut Command
The EmailPut command is a ut ilit y pr ogram t hat operat es similar t o t he SendMail but ,
inst ead of sending t he message t o t he SMTP ser ver , mer ely places it in a mailboxs Outbox
folder . The message is r eady t o be sent t he next t ime t hat t hat mailbox is used for sending
messages. This pr ogr am is designed wit h a simple, command-line int erface suit able for
usage as a t ool in applicat ion pr ogr ams. For a mail client wit h a mor e user -fr iendly int er -
face, use t he TheoMail command descr ibed on page 143.
Operation filename is added t o t he Outbox folder in mailbox.
Options ATTACH file Add t he file as an at t achment t o t he message.
BCC addr Add t he addr as a Blind Car bon Copy r ecipient of t he mes-
sage.
CC addr Add t he addr as a Car bon Copy r ecipient of t he message.
FROM addr Use addr as t he sender addr ess of t his message.
PASSWORDpw When accessing a mailbox t hat is passwor d-pr ot ect ed, pw
is used as t he passwor d. pw should be enclosed in quot at ion
mar ks t o ensur e t hat it pr eser ves t he case mode of t he pass-
wor d.
REPLYTO addr Use addr as t he Reply To addr ess of t his message. The
default r eply-t o is t he FROM addr.
SUBJECT text Use t ext as t he subject line of t his message.
TO addr Add t he addr as t he pr imar y r ecipient of t his message.
The command-line opt ions for t his command oper at e ident ically t o t he
same opt ions available wit h t he SendMail command descr ibed on page 529.
1 EMAILPUT mailbox filename ( opt ions
filename name of file on local syst em
opt ions ATTACH CC PASSWORD SUBJECT
BCC FROM REPLYTO TO
212 EmailPut
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Embedded
Mail Headers
The filename may cont ain embedded mail header s.
Refer t o t he SendMail command descr ipt ion of Embedded Mail Headers on
page 533.
Including Text
Files
The filename may also cont ain boiler plat e t ext file inclusions.
Refer t o t he SendMail command descr ipt ion of Including Text Files on page
535.
Notes Enclose t he opt ion ar gument s wit hin quot at ion mar ks. Alt hough not
r equired, wit hout quot at ion mar ks t he ar gument s will be folded t o upper -
case and embedded commas or spaces will t er minat e t he ar gument .
When t her e are mor e t han 50 addr esses in t he To, Cc and Bcc fields (com-
mand-line opt ions or in t he embedded addressing fields), mult iple copies of
t he message ar e sent , 50 addr esses per message.
SendMail
Command
Restrictions
mailbox must r efer t o an exist ing THEO+Mail mailbox and t hat mailbox
must not be cur r ent ly in use by TheoMail.
The file name specified for t he message t ext file, and any %include files,
must r efer t o ASCII t ext files. These files, and t he opt ional at t achment
files, must be accessible fr om t he cur r ent account . The file name specifica-
t ions may include t he pat h specificat ion.
Ever y message must have a To field and a From field specified wit h com-
mand-line opt ions or embedded header s.
See also EmailChk, EmailDel, EmailGet, SendMail, TheoMail
Example >EmailPut mymail message.one
>EmailPut mymail message.two
...
>TheoMail mymail (send
Encrypt 213
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Encrypt Command
The Encrypt command encrypt s a sequent ial file using public key/pr ivat e key Dat a Encr yp-
t ion St andar d (DES) 56-bit or 128-bit encr ypt ion algor it hms.
Operation Using t he public key built int o t he Encrypt command and t he pr ivat e key
password specified, t he source file is encr ypt ed using t he r equest ed algo-
r it hm and t he r esult is out put t o t he destination file. The source file must
be a st r eam or sequent ial organizat ion file.
Options DES Use t he 56-bit DES encr ypt ion algor it hm
TDES Use t he 128-bit DES encr ypt ion algor it hm
Notes Dat a Encr ypt ion St andar d (DES) or iginat ed at IBM in 1977 and was
adopt ed by t he U.S. Depar t ment of Defense. It is specified in t he Amer ican
Nat ional St andar ds Inst it ut e X3.92 and X3.106 st andar ds and in t he Fed-
er al FIPS 46 and 81 st andar ds. DES is a widely-used met hod of dat a
encr ypt ion t hat uses a public key and a pr ivat e or secr et key.
Wit h 56-bit DES encrypt ion, t her e are 7210
15
(72 quadr illion) or mor e
possible encr ypt ion keys t hat can be used. Like ot her pr ivat e-key encr yp-
t ion met hods, bot h t he sender and t he r eceiver must know and use t he
same pr ivat e key. DES was once judged so difficult t o br eak by t he U.S.
gover nment t hat it was r est r ict ed for export at ion t o ot her count r ies. Most
1 ENCRYPT source dest inat ion ( option password
2 ENCRYPT source ( option password > destination
3 ENCRYPT ( opt ion password < source > destination
source name of file t o decrypt or encr ypt
dest ination name t o use for r esult ing decr ypt ed or encr ypt ed file
password pr ivat e key passwor d, case-sensit ive
opt ion algor it hm t o use for encr ypt ion:
DES DES128
DES56 TDES
214 Encrypt
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
of t hese r est r ict ions have been lift ed, par t ly because it has been pr oven
t hat t he encr ypt ion can be br oken using br ut e for ce t echniques. St ill, t he
securit y it pr ovides is mor e t han sufficient for all but t he most sensit ive
dat a pr ivacy needs. 128-bit encr ypt ion pr ovides much bet t er secur it y but it
can also be br oken given sufficient t ime.
Because t he password is case-sensit ive and t he CSI nor mally folds t he
ar gument s t o upper case, it is best t o always enclose t he password in quot a-
t ion mar ks t o ensur e t hat it is passed t o t he Encrypt or Decrypt command
pr oper ly.
Filters The Encrypt command can oper at e as a filt ers or pipes.
When not specified, t he dest ination file is stdout. This can be r edirect ed t o a
file or anot her pr ogr am.
ENCRYPT source ( password
The above command will encrypt t he source file and out put it t o t he scr een.
ENCRYPT source ( TDES password1 | ENCRYPT ( TDES password2 > dest
This command encr ypt s t he source file using password1 wit h 128-bit
encr ypt ion, pipes t he r esult t o t he Encrypt command again t o r e-encr ypt t he
encr ypt ed file using password2 and 128-bit encr ypt ion. The r esult is saved
in dest.
Defaults When encrypt ing a file, if t he algor it hm is not specified t hen DES 56-bit
encr ypt ion is used.
Cautions The pr ivat e-key password is not embedded in t he encr ypt ed file. If a differ -
ent key is used t o decr ypt t he file t he Decrypt command cannot r epor t t he
er ror and will mer ely gener at e a dest inat ion file t hat is not a pr oper ly
decr ypt ed for m of t he or iginal file. Remember your passwords but do not
wr it e t hem down for secur it y r easons.
Restrictions Only st r eam or sequent ial files can be encr ypt ed.
See also Decrypt, FileManager, WinWrite
Erase 215
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Erase Command
This command er ases one or mor e files fr om disk.
Operation Not e: This command does not normally r emove files fr om disk. Inst ead, it
moves t he r equest ed files t o t he r ecycle bin. You must use t he NOSAVE
opt ion t o r emove t he file fr om t he disk wit h t his command. Refer t o Recycle
Bin in t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference manual.
Mode 1At t empt s t o er ase file and displays t he r esult of t he at t empt .
>erase sample.data
"SAMPLE.DATA:S" erased.
One file erased, 3,840 bytes recovered.
Unless t he NOTYPE opt ion is used, a result message is displayed aft er all
files ar e er ased. This shows t he number of files er ased and t he number of
byt es r ecover ed due t o er asing t hose files.
When file is a subdir ect or y name, t he Erase command will only er ase t he
dir ect or y if it cont ains no files. Use t he RmDir command t o er ase dir ect or ies
t hat cont ain files or er ase t he files first and t hen er ase t he dir ect or y.
Mode 2Invokes t he int er act ive mode of t he Erase command. Because no
files ar e specified on t he command line, you are pr ompt ed t o ent er t he file
descr ipt ions t o er ase.
>erase
?OUTPUT.LOG
"OUTPUT.LOG:S" erased.
?SAMPLE.OUTPUT
"SAMPLE.OUTPUT:S" erased.
?*.BACKUP
1 ERASE file ( opt ions
2 ERASE ( options
3 ERASE file ( FILES options
opt ions CLEAN NOTYPE
NOQUERY QUERY
NOSAVE TYPE
216 Erase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
As illust r at ed, t his int er act ive mode allows any file specificat ion t o be
ent ered, including wild car ds.
To t er minat e t his mode, ent er a blank line.
Mode 3file is an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per
line. Each file descr ipt ion in file is er ased. As each file is er ased it s file
descr ipt ion is displayed (unless t he NOTYPE opt ion is specified). When t he
file descr ipt ion in file cont ains wild car ds, you ar e queried for per mission
t o er ase each file t hat mat ches t he specificat ions (unless t he NOQUERY
opt ion is specified).
This mode of t he Erase command is convenient when one or mor e set s of
files ar e r epet it ively being er ased. Mer ely edit a file cont aining t he file
descr ipt ion, such as:
>edit daily.erase
work.master:s
work.history:s
work.invoices:s
work.ledger.*:s
temp*.*:s
sort*.*:s
/programs/program.backlib.*:s
>erase daily.erase (file noquery notype
Options CLEAN Specifies t hat t he cont ent s of file ar e cleaned by wr it ing zer os
t o every byt e of t he file. The file is er ased aft er it is cleaned.
NOQUERY Tells Erase t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e er asing each file.
This is a default opt ion when wild car ds ar e not used.
>erase gl.* (noq
"GL.MASTER:S" erased.
"GL.JOURNAL:S" erased.
"GL.HISTORY:S" erased.
Erase 217
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NOSAVE Causes t he files t o be er ase fr om t he disk at t his t ime. When
t his opt ion is not specified and t he dr ive is an image dr ive or
har d disk dr ive, t he file is moved t o t he r ecycle bin.
NOTYPE Tells Erase t o not display t he r esult s of each file er ased on t he
st andar d out put device. The gener al r esult message (t he nn
files er ased, nnn byt es recover ed. message displayed befor e
exit ing Erase) is also suppr essed wit h t his opt ion.
>erase gl.* (not
Ok to erase "GL.MASTER:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to erase "GL.JOURNAL:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to erase "GL.HISTORY:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
QUERY Tells Erase t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file speci-
ficat ions is t o be er ased. This is a default opt ion when wild
car ds ar e used. To disable t his opt ion use t he NOQUERY
opt ion.
>erase *.backup
When t he Ok t o er ase quest ion is asked, you may r espond
wit h a (Y) for yes, (N) for no or (A) for all. Responding wit h (A)
means yes t o t his file and all remaining files are er ased wit hout
being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc)or (C) t o cancel t he er ase oper -
at ion.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells Erase t o display t he r esult s of each
file er ased on t he st andar d out put device. This display can be
r edir ect ed.
>erase *.*:s (noquery
"/DEVELOPE.EXEC:S" erased.
"/GRAPH.SAVE1:S" protected.
"/GRAPH.DATA:S" erased.
2 files erased, 15,872 bytes recovered.
218 Erase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes If file is a t ypeless file descr ipt ion, t her e is no default libr ary defined and
t he envir onment var iable FILETYPE is defined, t he value of FILETYPE is
appended t o file t o for m a complet e file descr ipt ion wit h file-name and file-
t ype. To er ase a t ypeless file you should specify t he file descr ipt ion wit h a
per iod t er minat or . See FILETYPE on page 103 of t he THEOS Corona
Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for mor e infor mat ion about t his
envir onment var iable.
Recycle Bin When t he NOSAVE opt ion is not used, all of t he files er ased by t his com-
mand ar e not act ually er ased. Inst ead, t he file is moved t o t he r ecycle bin
which is a special, r eser ved dir ect or y on t he SYSTEM account . Should t he
need ar ise, an er ased file can be r ecover ed fr om t his r ecycle bin by using
t he UnErase command. However , due t o space limit at ions, files in t he r ecy-
cle bin ar e not r et ained for ever .
Defaults QUERY and TYPE ar e default opt ions.
Restrictions You may er ase files t hat ar e owned by t he cur r ent account if t he files ar e
not er ase pr ot ect ed. You may er ase files owned by anot her account if t hey
ar e not er ase pr ot ect ed and t hey do not have shar ed r ead or shar ed wr it e
pr ot ect ion enabled.
A libr ar y cannot be erased if it has any member files. The member s must
be er ased fir st and t hen t he libr ar y may be er ased.
A subdir ect or y cannot be er ased if it has any member files. The member s
must be er ased fir st and t hen t he dir ect or y may be er ased.
A file t hat is cur rent ly open by anot her user may not be er ased.
See also FileManager, Rename, RmDir, UnErase
Exit 219
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Exit Command
This command exit s fr om t he Shell envir onment or , if you ar e not using Shell environment ,
t his command logs off of t he syst em.
Operation The specific oper at ion of t his command depends upon your curr ent envi-
r onment :
+ In a Shell envir onment : Exit s t he shell, r et ur ning t o t he pr ior envi-
r onment .
+ Not in Shell envir onment but connect ed via TWS, NetTerm or Telnet:
Logoff t he cur r ent account and disconnect .
+ Ot her wise: Logoff t he cur r ent account .
Notes The Shell envir onment is nor mally invoked fr om anot her envir onment
such as WindoWriter, THEO+COM, etc. When Exit is used in t his sit uat ion,
cont r ol r et ur ns t o t he envir onment in effect before t he Shell was invoked.
See also Logoff, NetTerm, Shell, Telnet
EXIT
220 Exit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Expand 221
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Expand Command
The Expand command ext r act s and expands a file fr om a compr ession libr ar y cr eat ed wit h
t he Compress command.
Operation Mode 1When no dest inat ion is specified, t he Expand command merely
displays t he cont ent s of t he compr ession libr ar y.
Mode 2Each of t he compr essed files in compress-file is ext r act ed,
expanded, and wr it t en t o dest ination. dest inat ion may be a simple dr ive
code specificat ion, in which case, t he files ar e expanded and wr it t en t o t hat
dr ive using t heir saved pat h infor mat ion.
>expand programs.cmp s
/bmenu.basic:s
/func_key.basic:s
/menu.basic:s
/model.basic:s
/paint.basic:s
If t he compr ession libr ar y uses t he default file-t ype of .CMP you may omit
specifying t he file-t ype in t he command line. For inst ance:
>expand programs s
per for ms t he same oper at ion as above.
1 EXPAND compress-file
2 EXPAND compress-file destination ( opt ions
3 EXPAND compress-file destination file... ( options
4 EXPAND compress-file destination file ( FILES options
compress-file file name wit h opt ional pat h of t he compr ession librar y file
dest ination dest inat ion file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild
car ds; may be a simple drive specificat ion
file file name of compr essed file t o be expanded, wit h opt ional
pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NEWFILE OLDER QUERY date1
NOQUERY OLDFILE REPLACE date2
NOTYPE PASSWORD TYPE
222 Expand
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3Each file specified on t he command line is ext r act ed fr om com-
press-file, expanded and st or ed on destination.
>expand programs s menu.basic paint.basic (replace
/menu.basic:s
/paint.basic:s
If t he files in compress-file wer e compr essed wit h t he SUBDIR opt ion in
effect , you must specify t he or iginal pat h for each file.
>expand vertical.programs s /vertical/progs/menu.basic
/vertical/progs/menu.basic:s
Mode 4The files list ed in file ar e ext ract ed fr om compress-file, expanded
and st or ed on dest ination. file must be an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one
file descr ipt ion per line. The SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC files cr eat ed
by FileList and t he FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by Look can be used for t his specifi-
cat ion file (see The EXEC and FILES Options on page 239 of t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence.) You may also cr eat e t he
specificat ion file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, t he FileList command is used t o cr eat e a list of files:
>filelist a (10/1/01 10/8/01 exec
A file now exist s (SELECTED.FILES:S) t hat list s all of t he files on t he A disk
t hat have been changed bet ween 10/01/2001 and 10/08/2001. The following
command will expand t hese files fr om t heir compr essed for m:
>expand old.files a selected.exec (files
Options NEWFILE A default opt ion t hat t ells Expand t o expand files if file does not
alr eady exist . Not e: If QUERY is used, you ar e not quer ied
about files if t he dest inat ion file name alr eady exist s.
To disable t his opt ion use t he OLDFILE or t he REPLACE
opt ions.
NOQUERY Tells Expand t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e expanding each
file. This is a default opt ion when Mode is used or when wild
cards ar e not used.
>expand programs s
/bmenu.basic:s
/func_key.basic:s
/menu.basic:s
/model.basic:s
/paint.basic:s
/phonenbr.basic:s
Expand 223
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NOTYPE Tells Expand t o not display t he r esult s of each file compr essed
and also t o suppr ess t he pr ogr ess bar . Only er r or messages ar e
displayed on t he stderr device. The gener al r esult message (t he
nn files expanded. message pr ior t o exit ing Expand) is also
suppr essed wit h t his opt ion.
>expand gl.compress s gl.* (not
Ok to replace "/GL.MASTER:S" (Y|N|A|G)? Y
Ok to replace "/GL.JOURNAL:S" (Y|N|A|G)? Y
Ok to replace "/GL.HISTORY:S" (Y|N|A|G)? Y
OLDER Expands t he file t o t he destination only if t he dest inat ion files
last change dat e is older t han t he compr essed files or if t he
dest inat ion file does not exist . The REPLACE opt ion is implied
by t his opt ion. Not e: If QUERY is used, you ar e not quer ied
about files if t he dest inat ion file is newer .
This opt ion would nor mally be used when a compr ession
libr ar y is cr eat ed and port ed t o anot her syst em. The OLDER
opt ion is used t o expand only t hose files t hat need t o be
updat ed on t he second syst em.
OLDFILE Indicat es t hat Expand should expand a file only if t he dest ina-
t ion file name alr eady exist s. This is t he opposit e of t he NEW-
FILE opt ion and implies a REPLACE opt ion. Not e: If QUERY is
used, you ar e not quer ied about files if t he dest inat ion file
name does not exist .
Not e t hat only t he dest inat ion file name is checked. It could be
a t ot ally differ ent file. For inst ance, an exist ing command pr o-
gr am could be r eplaced by a st r eam file or indexed file.
To disable t his opt ion use t he NEWFILE opt ion.
PASSWORD A passwor d is specified following t he PASSWORD opt ion key-
wor d. The files are expanded only if t hey wer e or iginally com-
pr essed wit h t his passwor d.
If a file is compressed wit h a passwor d and it doesnt mat ch t he
passwor d specified wit h t his Expand command or no password
is specified wit h t he Expand command, t he file is not expand.
>compress private.files *.text (notype password aardvark
>expand private.files a (replace noq
Fatal error: File: "mydata.text:a" was corrupted or incor-
rect password.
224 Expand
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Not e t he message repor t s t his as a fat al er r or. That is done
because Expand cannot t ell if t he file r eally is cor r upt ed or t hat
you mer ely t ype t he wr ong passwor d.
QUERY Tells Expand t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file
specificat ion is t o be expanded. This is a default opt ion when
wild car ds ar e used.
>expand backups i
When t he Ok t o expand quest ion is asked, you may r espond
wit h a (Y) for yes, (N) for no, (A) for all or (G) for go. Responding
wit h (A) means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e
included wit hout being quer ied. Respond wit h (C) or (Esc) t o
cancel t he expand operat ion.
REPLACE Allows a file t o be expanded even if it alr eady exist s on t he des-
t inat ion dr ive. Nor mally, when t he dest inat ion file name
alr eady exist s, Expand will not per for m t he expand. This opt ion
t ells Expand t hat it is okay if it alr eady exist s. Unless t he
NOQUERY opt ion is specified, you ar e asked if you want t o
r eplace each file t hat exist s on t he dest inat ion.
If t he dest inat ion file does not exist , t his opt ion has no effect :
The file is cr eat ed just as if t he REPLACE opt ion was not speci-
fied.
>expand data.compress f *.data (replace noquery
/customer.data:f
/history.data:f
/accounts.data:f
The REPLACE opt ion is implied by bot h t he OLDER and OLD-
FILE opt ions. However , t he OLDFILE opt ion will not copy a file
unless t he dest inat ion file name alr eady exist s.
Expand 225
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE In combinat ion wit h t he NOTYPE opt ion, t his is a t r i-st at e
opt ion t hat t ells Compress whet her t o display t he r esult s of
each file compr ession or not . When TYPE and NOTYPE ar e not
specified, Compress displays a pr ogr ess bar and any er r or mes-
sages but does not display t he names of t he files being com-
pr essed. Specifying TYPE displays t he names of t he files being
compr essed. NOTYPE displays only er r or messages. This dis-
play can be r edir ect ed.
>expand programs s (noquery
/program.source.bmenu:s
/program.source.func_key:s
/program.source.menu:s
/program.source.model:s
/program.source.paint:s
/program.source.phonenbr:s
date1 Expands a file only if t he file in compress-file has a last change
dat e t hat is gr eat er t han or equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he
compr essed file was changed on or aft er t his dat e.
This opt ion may be used wit h t he dat e2 opt ion.
>compress programs ; display compressed files
Date Time Size Rate File name
13Jan2002 11:29 774 32% bmenu.basic
01Oct2001 19:06 1,339 68% _func_key.basic
20Dec2001 14:41 2,709 43% menu.basic
11Nov2001 11:53 1,618 69% model.basic
17Jan2001 12:56 356 25% paint.basic
25Jun2001 14:17 6,726 48% phonenbr.basic
>expand programs s (1/1/02
bmenu.basic
paint.basic
phonenbr.basic
The above command will expand only t hose files t hat have
been cr eat ed or changed since J anuar y 1, 2002.
date2 Expands a file only if t he compressed files last change dat e is
less t han or equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he compr essed file
was changed on or befor e t his dat e. May only be specified by
fir st specifying t he date1 opt ion.
>expand programs s (10/15/02 10/30/02
226 Expand
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This command expands only t hose files t hat have been creat ed
or changed since Oct ober 14, 2002, but not any files t hat wer e
cr eat ed or changed aft er Oct ober 30, 2002.
To specify a date2 when you dont car e about dat e1, use a dat e
of 1/1/86 for t he date1 opt ion. This is t he ear liest dat e main-
>expand programs s (1/1/86 12/31/00
func_key.basic
menu.basic
model.basic
Her e, since t he date1 specificat ion is 1/1/86, all files cr eat ed or
changed pr ior t o J anuar y 1, 2001, ar e expanded.
See also Compress, CopyFile, FileManager, Restore, TArchive, TBackup
File 227
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
File Command
The File command analyzes a file and r epor t s on it s or ganizat ion and gener al funct ion.
Operation Mode 1Each file specified on t he command line is examined for it s or ga-
nizat ion (pr ogr am command, st r eam, indexed, et c.) and it s cont ent s (pr o-
gr am object , for mat t ed records, pr ogr am source, et c.). The r esult of t his
analysis is out put as a message on t he st andar d out put device.
>file /theos/os/*.*
"/THEOS/OS/Message:S" is a subdirectory.
"/THEOS/OS/TIMESYNC.SYS:S" is a 32-bit program file.
"/THEOS/OS/UPGRADE1:S" is a 32-bit program file.
"/THEOS/OS/TEST.O:S" is a 32-bit object file.
...
In addit ion t o using wild car d specificat ions, mor e t han one file may be
specified on t he command line.
>file *.data *.text system.*.* sample.basic
"CUSTOMER.DATA:S" is an indexed file with formatted data.
...
Mode 2The files list ed in file ar e analyzed. file must be an ASCII st r eam
file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per line. The SELECTED.FILES and
SELECTED.EXEC files cr eat ed by FileList and t he FOUND.EXEC creat ed by Look
can be used for t his specificat ion file (see The EXEC and FILES Options on
page 239). You may cr eat e t he file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be examined:
>filelist *.data:a (exec
>filelist a not *.data:a (10/1/01 exec append
changed since 10/01/2001. The following command checks t hese files for
or ganizat ion and cont ent :
>file selected.exec (file
1 FILE file...
2 FILE file ( FILES
228 File
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t he envir onment var iable FILETYPE is defined, t hen t he value of FILETYPE
is appended t o file t o for m a complet e file descr ipt ion wit h file name and
file t ype. To r epor t on a t ypeless file you should specify t he file descr ipt ion
wit h a per iod t er minat or . See FileType on page 245 .
file may be a subdir ect or y name.
The file t ypes r ecognized by t he File command include:
LISAM files ar e r eport ed as indexed files.
See also FileList, FileManager
File Type Message Displayed
Libr ar y filename is a libr ar y.
Direct or y filename is a subdir ect ory.
Program filename is a 16-bit r eal mode pr ogr am file.
filename is a 16-bit pr ogr am file.
filename is a 32-bit pr ogr am file.
Dat a filename is an indexed file wit h for mat t ed dat a.
filename is an indexed file wit h t ext dat a.
filename is a keyed file wit h for mat t ed dat a.
filename is a keyed file wit h t ext dat a.
filename is a r elat ive file wit h for mat t ed dat a.
filename is a r elat ive file wit h t ext dat a.
St r eam filename is a st r eam file.
filename is a st r eam file wit h binar y dat a.
filename is a st r eam file wit h t ext dat a.
filename is an empt y file.
filename is a Pr int er Class Definit ion file.
filename is a Ter minal Class Definit ion file.
filename is a Keyboar d Definit ion file.
filename is a MAKE sour ce file.
Program sour ce filename is a 16-bit BASIC sour ce file.
filename is a 32-bit BASIC sour ce file.
filename is a C sour ce file.
filename is an EXEC sour ce file.
filename is a TINSTALL sour ce file.
filename is a TINSTALL compiled file.
Program object filename is a 16-bit object file.
filename is a 32-bit object file.
Script filename is a SCRIPT file.
Ot her filename is a COMPRESS libr ar y file.
FileList 229
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FileList Command
The FileList command displays a list ing of a disks dir ect or y.
This command pr oduces a dir ect or y list ing of files. By default , t his dir ect or y list ing includes
t he file name descript ion (file-name, file-t ype, member-name and file-dr ive), t he last dat e
and t ime t hat t he file was changed, t he file or ganizat ion or t ype (pr ogr am, indexed, libr ar y,
etc.), t he physical size of t he file on disk and, for dat a files, t he r ecor d and key lengt h.
By using var ious opt ions, addit ional infor mat ion about t he file can be displayed including
t he checksum for t he file, number of r ecor ds in t he file, growt h fact or , pr ogr am pr ivilege
level, pr ot ect ion and at t r ibut e codes for t he file and pr ogr am ver sion number .
This dir ect or y list ing is nor mally out put t o t he console but it also can be displayed on one of
t he at t ached pr int er s, r edir ect ed t o a file or device or out put as an EXEC language pr ogr am
or a dat a file.
1 FILELIST ( options
2 FILELIST file... ( options
3 FILELIST file
1
... NOT file
2
... NOT file
3
... ( options
4 FILELIST drive... ( opt ions
drive opt ional disk dr ive at t achment let t er
file opt ional file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions ACCOUNT GROWPROTECT SORT5
APPEND HIDDENPRTnn SORT6
ASCII KEYPUBLIC SORT7
CHECKSUM MNSERIAL SORT8
COUNT NEWESTSIZE SORT sequence
EXEC NOTYPESORT1 TYPE
FD OFFSORT2 VERSION
FILES OWNER nameSORT3date1
FN PRIVLEVSORT4 date2
FT
230 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Displays a dir ect or y list ing of all flat files in t he cur r ent dir ec-
t or y of t he cur r ent account . A flat file is a file t hat is not a member of a
libr ar y.
>Filelist
If a default libr ar y is defined, t hen a dir ect or y list ing of t hat libr ar y is pr o-
duced.
>set library system.b3220lib
>filelist
FileList 231
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Displays a direct or y list ing of t he specified file descr ipt ion(s).
This is a ver y power ful mode because, by using wild car ds and mult iple file
specificat ions, it allows many different oper at ions t o be per for med. For
inst ance:
>filelist *.*.*:s
This displays a list of all libr ar ies, libr ary member s and files not r elat ed t o
any librar y (flat files) t hat ar e owned by t he curr ent dir ect or y of t he cur -
r ent account on t he S dr ive.
>filelist *.*
This displays a list ing of libr ar ies and non-librar y files for all dr ives in t he
default dr ive sear ch sequence. No libr ar y member s ar e included.
>filelist *.*.?*:s
This displays a list ing of libr ar y member files but not t he libr ary it self or
any flat files.
>filelist *.command *.cmd *.exec *.exc /theos/commands/*.*
The example above displays a list ing of all pr ogr ams, eit her flat files (file
t ype is COMMAND or CMD), EXEC language flat files (file t ype is EXEC or EXC)
and t he commands, execs and link files in t he /THEOS/COMMAND dir ect ory.
Mode 3This mode is similar t o Mode 2 wit h t he added abilit y t o specify
t hat gr oups of files ar e excluded fr om t he list ing. The dir ect or y list ing pro-
duced includes files t hat mat ch t he file specificat ion befor e t he keywor d
NOT as long as t hey dont mat ch t he file specificat ion following t he key-
wor d NOT. For inst ance:
>filelist *.*.*:s not system.*.*:s (public
This displays all ent r ies for files on t he S dr ive excluding t hose files wit h a
file-name of SYSTEM.
Each specificat ion of files t hat ar e t o be excluded fr om t he list ing must be
pr eceded by t he NOT keywor d.
This displays all files wit h a file t ype of COMMAND or EXEC excluding t hose
pr ogr ams wit h a file name st ar t ing wit h TEST.
>filelist *.command NOT test*.command *.exec NOT test*.exec
Include Exclude Exclude Include
232 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The NOT file specificat ions exclude files t hat might mat ch t he specifica-
t ions. For inst ance,
>filelist test.* example.* NOT *.data
This command only excludes t he *.DATA files fr om t he EXAMPLE.* specifi-
cat ion. All files mat ching TEST.* ar e st ill included. Also, you may not spec-
ify t wo or mor e NOT specificat ions in a r ow: Ther e must be a normal
specificat ion pr eceding each NOT specificat ion.
Mode 4This is a shor t hand met hod of specifying t hat you want all files
on t he specified dr ive(s) owned by t he cur r ent account and in t he curr ent
wor king dir ect or y. The following t wo commands produce t he same r esult s:
>filelist s
>filelist *.*:s
As wit h Mode 2 and Mode 3, you can specify mult iple dr ives:
>filelist f g
Options ACCOUNT The dir ect or y list ing will include files owned by all account s if
t hey mat ch t he file specificat ions and t he ot her opt ions. This
opt ion r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
When t he out put is t o t he console or a pr int er , a page br eak
occur s bet ween each account s files wit h t he account name and
number displayed at t he t op.
EXEC and FILES opt ion not e: The OWNER opt ion does cause all
qualifying files fr om all account s t o be included. However , t he
owning account name or number is not out put .
APPEND Used wit h opt ion EXEC or FILES t o append an addit ional dir ec-
t or y list ing t o t he exist ing SELECTED.EXEC or SELECTED.FILES file.
If neit her EXEC nor FILES is specified, t hen EXEC is assumed
when t he APPEND opt ion is specified.
ASCII Causes t he list ing t o be sor t ed accor ding t o t he ASCII collat ing
sequence. The nor mal sor t or der used by FileList is a special
alphabet ic and numeric sequence t hat or der s file descr ipt ions
using number s in a mor e nat ur al sequence. Compar e t he t wo
sor t or der s below. The list on t he left is t he nor mal or der used
by FileList; t he list on t he r ight is t he or der pr oduced when t he
ASCII opt ion is used.
FileList 233
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CUSTOMER.ROUTE1 CUSTOMER.ROUTE1
CHECKSUMComput e and display t he checksum for each file. A checksum
is a 16-bit value comput ed by adding t he values of each byt e in
a file.
The checksum value is out put in place of t he Recl and Keyl
columns.
COUNT Comput es and displays t he r ecor d count for dat a files (st r eam,
indexed, keyed and relat ive). This recor d count infor mat ion
r eplaces t he Recl and Keyl columns on t he r ight side of a
nor mal direct or y list ing. Files ot her t han dat a files ar e not
analyzed and t her e is no count infor mat ion displayed for t hem.
EXEC Indicat es t hat t he dir ect or y list ing is t o be out put as an EXEC
language pr ogr am in t he file SELECTED.EXEC.
See The EXEC and FILES Opt ions on page 239 for a descr ip-
t ion of t he SELECTED.EXEC file pr oduced wit h t his opt ion and
some of it s uses.
FD Used wit h opt ion EXEC or FILES t o indicat e t hat t he out put
includes only t he file name, file t ype, member name and file
dr ive code infor mat ion for each file. Not e: Member names ar e
only included if t he file specificat ion indicat es t hat libr ar y
member s ar e included in t he dir ect or y list ing.
FILES Indicat es t hat t he dir ect or y list ing is t o be out put t o
SELECTED.FILES.
See The EXEC and FILES Opt ions on page 239 for a descr ip-
t ion of t he SELECTED.FILES file produced wit h t his opt ion and
some of it s uses.
FN Used wit h opt ion EXEC or FILES t o indicat e t hat t he out put
includes only t he file-name infor mat ion for each file.
FT Used wit h opt ion EXEC or FILES t o indicat e t hat t he out put
includes only t he file-name and file-t ype infor mat ion for each
file.
GROW Out put t he pr ot ect ion codes and gr owt h fact or for each file.
The GROW and PUBLIC opt ions pr oduce t he same r esult s.
234 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The pr ot ect ion codes and gr owt h fact or are out put in place of
t he Recl and Keyl columns.
HIDDEN Include hidden files if t hey mat ch file specificat ion and t he
ot her opt ions. (Files ar e mar ked as hidden wit h t he CHANGE
command described on page 65.)
KEY Each pr ogr am file mat ching t he file specificat ions and any
ot her r est r ict ive opt ions is analyzed for it s secur it y plug key
value and it s ser ial number . These values and t he ver sion
number and version dat e ar e out put , r eplacing t he Org,
Size, Recl and Keyl columns. All files ot her t han pr o-
gr ams will have t hese columns blank.
MN Used wit h opt ion EXEC or FILES t o indicat e t hat t he out put
includes only t he file-name, file-t ype and member -name infor -
mat ion for each file. Not e: Member-names ar e only included if
t he file specificat ion indicat es t hat libr ary member s ar e
included in t he dir ect or y list ing.
NEWEST Sor t s t he out put by descending dat e and t ime and ascending
file-name, file-t ype, member -name and file-dr ive. Thus, t he
newest files ar e list ed first . Synonym t o t he SORT6 opt ion.
NOTYPE Do not display t he dir ect or y list ing, only t he summar y line.
This opt ion is ignor ed if t he opt ion EXEC or FILES is also speci-
fied.
OFF Used wit h opt ion EXEC t o prepend a &cont r ol off command
as t he fir st line of t he SELECTED.EXEC file cr eat ed.
OWNER The dir ect or y list ing includes t he files owned by account name.
This opt ion r equir es t hat you be logged ont o t he syst em
account and t hat you have a pr ivilege level of five.
Nor mally, t he direct or y list ing is for t he cur r ent account only.
The PUBLIC opt ion includes publicly owned files in addit ion t o
t he files owned by t he cur r ent account . The ACCOUNT and
OWNER opt ions ar e t he only met hod of pr oducing a dir ect or y
list ing of files owned by ot her pr ivat e account s.
PRIVLEV Each pr ogr am file mat ching t he file specificat ions and any
ot her r est r ict ive opt ions is analyzed for it s pr ivilege level
r equir ement s, it s ver sion and ver sion dat e, and it s pat ch level.
These values ar e out put , r eplacing t he Or g, Size, Recl and
Keyl columns. All files ot her t han pr ogr ams will have t hese
columns blank.
The PRIVLEV and VERSION opt ions pr oduce t he same result s.
FileList 235
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PROTECT Out put t he pr ot ect ion codes and gr owt h fact or for each file.
The GROW and PROTECT opt ions pr oduce t he same r esult s.
The pr ot ect ion codes and growt h fact or ar e out put in place of
t he Recl and Keyl columns.
The pr ot ect ion codes displayed use single, posit ion-dependent
let t er s:
Prot ect ion and at t r ibut es not enabled for a file ar e indicat ed
wit h a period in t hat at t r ibut es posit ion.
PRTnn Indicat es t hat FileList is t o pr int t he dir ect or y list ing on t he
at t ached pr int er number nn.
PUBLIC Includes files owned by t he syst em account , if t hey mat ch t he
file specificat ions and any ot her r est r ict ive opt ions.
SERIAL Analyzes each pr ogr am file mat ching t he file specificat ions and
any ot her rest r ict ive opt ions. The ser ial number and t he pr ivi-
lege level, ver sion number and ver sion dat e ar e out put , r eplac-
ing t he Or g, Size, Recl and Keyl columns. All files ot her
t han pr ogr ams will have t hese columns blank.
SIZE Set s t he r et ur n code t o t he t ot al size of t he files list ed, in kilo-
byt es (K).
SORT1 Sor t s t he out put by file-name, file-t ype, member -name and
dr ive-code. This is similar t o t he default sequence pr oduced by
FileList.
However , t her e is a differ ence bet ween SORT1 and t he default
sor t sequence. The default sort sequence always uses line-
gr aphics ar ound t he list and bet ween t he columns.
M W R E X W R
Owner r ead pr ot ect ed
Owner wr it e prot ect ed
Execut e pr ot ect ed
Erase pr ot ect ed
Shared access r ead pr ot ect
Shared access writ e pr ot ect
Modified
236 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SORT2 Sor t s t he out put by file-dr ive, file-name, file-t ype and member -
name.
SORT3 Sor t s t he out put by file-name, file-t ype, file-drive and member -
name.
SORT4 Sor t s t he out put by file-t ype, file-name, member-name and
file-dr ive.
SORT5 Sor t s t he out put by dat e, t ime, file-name, file-t ype, member -
name and file-dr ive. Thus, t he oldest files ar e list ed fir st .
SORT6 Sor t s t he out put by descending dat e and t ime and ascending
file-name, file-t ype, member -name and file-dr ive. Thus, t he
newest files ar e list ed first .
SORT7 Sor t s t he out put by member -name, file-name, file-t ype and
file-dr ive.
SORT8 Sor t s t he out put by organizat ion, file-name, file-t ype, member-
name and file-dr ive. The sequence used for sor t ing organiza-
t ion is: indexed, keyed, r elat ive, st r eam, 16-bit r eal mode pro-
gr ams, 16-bit pr ogr ams, 32-bit pr ogr ams, subdir ect or ies and
libr ar ies last .
SORT sequence Sor t s t he out put by a user -specified sequence. The
sequence may be any one of: FD, FN, FT, MN, DATE, SIZE and
TYPE. The TYPE sequence r efers t o t he files or ganizat ion code
(st r eam, indexed, pr ogr am, etc.) Mult iple sor t sequences ar e
specified by using mult iple SORT opt ions.
>filelist s (sort size
The above command list s t he files by incr easing file sizes.
>filelist s (sort ft sort size
This second examples sor t t he list ing by file t ype and file size.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat out put s t he dir ect or y list ing t o t he con-
sole.
VERSION Each pr ogr am file mat ching t he file specificat ions and any
ot her r est r ict ive opt ions is analyzed for it s pr ivilege level
r equir ement s, it s ver sion and ver sion dat e, and it s pat ch level.
These values ar e out put , r eplacing t he Or g, Size, Recl and
Keyl columns. All files ot her t han pr ogr ams will have t hese
columns blank.
FileList 237
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The PRIVLEV and VERSION opt ions pr oduce t he same r esult s.
date1 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is gr eat er t han
or equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he file was changed on or aft er
t his dat e.
This opt ion may be used wit h t he date2 opt ion.
>filelist *.*:s (10/15/01
The above command will include only t hose files t hat have
been cr eat ed or changed since Oct ober 14, 2001.
Not e: Dat es ar e specified accor ding t o t he cur r ent ly set dat e
for mat . Refer t o Sysgen on page 591 and Set on page 541.
date2 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is less t han or
equal t o t his dat e. That is, if t he file was changed on or befor e
t his dat e. May only be specified by fir st specifying t he dat e1
opt ion.
>filelist *.*:s(10/15/01 10/30/01
This command includes only t hose files t hat have been cr eat ed
creat ed or changed aft er Oct ober 30, 2001.
>filelist *.*:s (1/1/86 11/20/2001
or changed pr ior t o November 21, 2001, ar e included.
238 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FileList
Columns
When t he out put of FileList is r edir ect ed t o a file, t he infor mat ion can be
ext r act ed by a pr ogr am r eading t he file. Use t he following column number s
for each of t he fields.
The columns Keyl, Recl and Gr ar e not out put t o a r edir ect ed file.
Heading Meaning Col
Filename The file-name, file-t ype and member -name ar e
concat enat ed t o for m a single file name.
1-28
Date Dat e file was cr eat ed or last changed. 31-40
Time Time file was cr eat ed or last changed. 42-46
The following columns ar e not displayed when opt ion PRIVLEV or VER-
SION is used.
Org. Type of file: pr ogr am, libr ary, et c. 48-49
Protect Pr ot ect ion codes and at t r ibut es for file. 51-57
Size Size of file in byt es. This field is r ight -just ified
wit h spaces on t he left .
59-76
The following columns ar e displayed only when opt ion VERSION or
PRIVLEV is used.
P Pr ivilege level of pr ogram. 48
Vers Ver sion number of pr ogr am. 50-55
V-date Ver sion dat e of pr ogr am. 57-63
Patch
Level
The following column is displayed only when t he opt ion KEY or SERIAL
is used.
Serial Pr ogr am ser ial number . 65-69
The following column is displayed only when t he opt ion KEY is used.
Key Pr ogr am secur it y plug key. 75-81
The following column is displayed only when t he opt ion CHECKSUM is
used.
Check-
sum
Files checksum. 71-76
FileList 239
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The EXEC and
FILES Options
When t he opt ion APPEND, EXEC or FILES is used, t he dir ect ory list ing is
wr it t en t o a disk file, eit her SELECTED.EXEC or SELECTED.FILES. When t hese
files ar e creat ed wit h t he FileList command, sever al opt ions may have no
meaning and will be ignor ed while sever al ot her s can be used.
The opt ions t hat can be used ar e: FD, FN, FT, MN and OFF. These opt ions
limit t he amount of file descr ipt ion infor mat ion included in t he file.
SELECTED.EXEC
Opt ion APPEND and EXEC cr eat e a special file named SELECTED.EXEC. This
file cont ains only t he file descr ipt ion informat ion wit h command line var i-
ables added. For inst ance:
>filelist *.* (exec
>list selected.exec
&1 BACCESS.C:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 BACCESS.O:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 BJ.BASIC:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 BJ.COMMAND:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 "BJ.Data file:S" &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 BJ.HELP:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 BJ.MENU:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
...
Any infor mat ion t hat may be pr oduced by t he opt ions CHECKSUM, COUNT,
GROW, PRIVLEV, PROTECT and VERSION is suppr essed.
This file can be a r eal t imesaver because t he SELECTED.EXEC file can be used
wit h many ot her commands t hat ar e used t o modify or list your files. The
FileLists command select ion capabilit y is gener ally superior t o most ot her
commands. For inst ance, t he above file could be used by execut ing t he pr o-
gr am:
>selected.exec copyfile f
>copyfile BACCESS.C:S f
>copyfile BACCESS.O:S f
>copyfile BJ.BASIC:S f
...
When t he SELECTED.EXEC file is execut ed, each occurr ence of t he var iable &1
is r eplaced wit h copyfile, each &2 is r eplaced wit h f.
240 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The same pr ogr am could be used in anot her command:
>selected.exec change (ne
>change BACCESS.C:S (ne
>change BACCESS.O:S (ne
>change BJ.BASIC:S (ne
...
>selected.exec erase
>erase BACCESS.C:S
>erase BACCESS.O:S
>erase BJ.BASIC:S
...
Many commands have t heir own FILES opt ion t hat allows t hem t o use t his
SELECTED.EXEC or SELECTED.FILES file as a list of files. The pr evious usage of
t he SELECTED.EXEC pr ogr am t hat changes t he pr ot ect ion codes and t hen
er ases t he files could have been done wit h:
>change selected.exec (files ne
>erase selected.exec (files
The commands t hat have a FILES opt ion can use a SELECTED.EXEC file
because t hey have pr ogr amming t hat ignor es t he &1, &2, etc. var iables in
each line and uses only t he file name infor mat ion.
SELECTED.FILES
The FILES opt ion cr eat es a special file named SELECTED.FILES t hat can be
used as a dat a file for an applicat ion t hat needs dir ect or y-t ype infor ma-
t ion, or as a list of files used by ot her commands wit h t heir own FILES
opt ion.
When t he FILES opt ion is used wit h no opt ions or opt ions t hat do not
include FD, FN, FT or MN, t he SELECTED.FILES is cr eat ed cont aining all of t he
infor mat ion r equest ed in t he same for mat as a displayed or pr int ed list ing
(wit hout line gr aphics):
>filelist *.* (file
>list selected.files
Bj:S 01/06/2002 19:23 SD ....... 14336
Charset.Basic:S 10/24/1994 04:53 S .W..X.. 4062
Custmnt.O:S 04/14/2001 07:57 S .WR.... 157186
disk.image1:S 01/07/2002 16:25 S ....... 1048576
Loan.basic:S 02/07/2001 17:16 S .WR.... 21194
...
FileList 241
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
An applicat ion can use t his file by opening it and r eading each r ecor d. Use
t he column informat ion shown in FileList Columns on page 238.
When any of t he opt ions FD, FN, FT or MN is used, t he file name infor ma-
t ion is out put as a packed file descr ipt ion:
>filelist s (files fd
>list selected.files
BACCESS.C:S
BACCESS.O:S
BJ.BASIC:S
...
This file can be used by ot her commands wit h t heir FILES opt ion in t he
same way t hat t he SELECTED.EXEC file was used in it s example. For
inst ance:
>change selected.files (files ne
>erase selected.files (files
Notes Alt hough t he FileList command may be abbr eviat ed t o t he single let t er f,
it must not be abbr eviat ed t o four char act er s because File is t he full name
of a different command.
If file is a t ypeless file descr ipt ion and t her e is a default libr ar y defined,
t hen file is assumed t o be a member of t he default libr ar y:
file may be a subdirect or y name.
If t he envir onment var iable LINEGRAPH is defined and it equals N, t hen
t he dir ect or y list ing is not out lined wit h line-gr aphics char act er s.
For mult iple-page displays, t he st andar d page br owsing keys ar e r ecog-
nized. Refer t o Multiple-page Display Browsing on page 79of t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Operat ing Syst em Refer ence. When t he display is t er mi-
nat ed ear ly wit h t he Quit key ( (Break),(Q) ), t he summary line is displayed.
Defaults TYPE is t he only default opt ion.
Return Codes When opt ion SIZE is used, t he r et urn code is set t o t he t ot al size of t he files
list ed, in number of kilobyt es.
Restrictions Opt ions ACCOUNT and OWNER r equir e a pr ivilege level of five. The
ACCOUNT opt ion also r equir es t hat you be logged ont o t he SYSTEM account .
See also ChDir, Disk, File, FileManager, Logon
242 FileList
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FileManager 243
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FileManager Command
The FileManager command allows you t o explor e and br owse file dir ect or ies. It also allows
you t o launch a file by mer ely select ing t he file from t he displayed list .
Operation Mode 1Using t he cur r ent working dir ect or y as a st ar t ing point , display
t he dir ect or y list ing and begin br owsing of t hat dir ect ory.
Mode 2Set t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y t o t he r oot dir ect or y of drive,
display t he dir ect or y list ing and allow br owsing of t hat direct or y.
Mode 3Set s t he cur r ent wor king dir ect ory t o direct ory and t hen opens a
FileManager view of t hat dir ect or y.
>fm /theos/command
1 FILEMANAGER ( options
2 FILEMANAGER :drive ( options
3 FILEMANAGER directory ( opt ions
drive dr ive code of an at t ached dr ive
directory pat h t o desir ed dir ect or y
opt ions BACKUP LOWCASE NOOBJ OBJ
FT NOBACKUP NOTYPE TYPE
HIDDEN
Command synonym: FM
244 FileManager
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options BACKUP Include backup files in dir ect ory list ing.
FT Include filet ype for all files, even if file ext ension is known.
HIDDEN Include hidden files in dir ect or y list ing.
LOWCASE Fold all-uppercase file names t o mixed case.
NOBACKUP Do not include backup files in dir ect or y list ing.
NOOBJ Do not include object files in dir ect or y list ing.
NOTYPE Include only filenames and filet ypes in dir ect or y list ing.
OBJ Include object files in dir ect or y list ing.
TYPE Include t he size, dat e, t ime and t ype in t he direct or y list ing.
Defaults FileManager user s t he /THEOS/USERS dir ect ory t o save and get it s configu-
r at ion. The default act ions will depend upon t he saved set t ings for t he cur -
r ent user as defined in t he account envir onment var iable UserName.
See also Calendar, Change, ChDir, Cleanup, Compress, Config, CopyFile, Create, CRLF,
Decrypt, Disk, Encrypt, Erase, Exit, Expand, FileList, FileType, Find, FTP, Img,
List, Logoff, Logon, Look, MkDir, Move, NetTerm, Play, Rename, RmDir, Setup,
Shell, Show, ShutDown, TBackup, Touch, Tree, UnZip, Upcase, Viewer, WhereIs,
Who, WhoAmI, WinWrite, and t he THEOS Corona FileManager Users
Guide and Reference.
FileType 245
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FileType Command
The FileType command conver t s a THEOS file int o an oper at ing syst em independent for m of
t he file, or it conver t s it back t o a THEOS file.
This command conver t s THEOS-specific files int o THEOS File Save for mat files (TFS)
t hat ar e por t able bet ween oper at ing syst ems. Alt hough t he cont ent s of a TFS file may not
be usable on anot her oper at ing syst em, t hey can be copied and t r ansmit t ed wit hout any
pr oblems. Thus, a TFS file is useful when a THEOS file must be sent t o anot her THEOS
comput er via an int er mediat e syst em such as a bullet in boar d syst em (BBS), net wor k file
ser ver or non-THEOS FTP ser ver .
The THEOS File Save for mat is a file t hat cont ains t he or iginal THEOS dir ect or y ent r y for
t he file along wit h t he binar y cont ent s of t he file. This is a st r eam file for mat t hat is r ecog-
nized and support ed by all oper at ing syst ems.
Operation Mode 1Conver t s a THEOS file int o a THEOS File Save file. The SAVE
keywor d does not have t o be specified because it is t he default . The con-
vert ed file uses t he same file-name as t he or iginal file and a file-t ype of TFS.
If t he or iginal file was a member of a libr ary, t he out put file-name is t he
or iginal files member -name.
>filetype sample.file
"SAMPLE.FILE:S" copied to "SAMPLE.TFS:S".
One file copied.
>filetype data.lib.customer
"DATA.LIB.CUSTOMER:S" copied to "CUSTOMER.TFS:S".
One file copied.
The file-t ype of file may not be TFS nor may it be a simple wildcar d of *.
Mode 2Conver t s a THEOS File Save file back t o t he or iginal THEOS
file.
1 FILETYPE file... ( SAVE options
2 FILETYPE file... ( RESTORE opt ions
opt ions NOQUERY QUERY
NOTYPE TYPE
246 FileType
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOQUERY Tells FileType t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e conver t ing
each file. This is a default opt ion when wild car ds ar e not used.
>filetype *.data (noq
"INDEXED.DATA:S" copied to "INDEXED.TFS:S".
"DIRECT.DATA:S" copied to "DIRECT.TFS:S".
"KEYED.DATA:S" copied to "KEYED.TFS:S".
"DATA.DATA:S" copied to "DATA.TFS:S".
4 files copied.
NOTYPE Tells FileType t o not display t he r esult s of each file conver t ed on
t he st andar d out put device. The gener al r esult message (t he
nn files copied. message befor e exit ing FileType) is also sup-
>filetype *.data f (not
Ok to copy "INDEXED.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "DIRECT.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "KEYED.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "DATA.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
QUERY Tells FileType t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file
specificat ions is t o be conver t ed. This is a default opt ion when
>filetype *.data
Ok to copy "INDEXED.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o copy quest ion is asked you may r espond wit h
a (Y) for yes, (N) for no or (A) for all. Responding wit h (A) means
yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e t hen copied wit hout
being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he conver sion oper -
at ion. This opt ion is disabled wit h t he NOQUERY opt ion.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells FileType t o display t he r esult s of each
file copied on t he st andar d out put device. This display can be
r edir ect ed. This opt ion is disabled wit h t he NOTYPE opt ion.
Defaults Mode 1 is t he default .
Restrictions file may not specify a file-t ype of TFS nor may t he file-t ype use a wildcar d.
See also Compress, CopyFile (EXPORT opt ion), Expand, Receive, Send, THEO+COM
Find 247
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Find Command
The Find command searches a direct or y pat h and locat es files.
Operation The cur rent wor king direct or y, or t he pat h specified in file, and all dir ect o-
r ies subor dinat e t o it , are searched. All files mat ching t he file specificat ion
ar e out put t o t he st andard out put device.
Any Find command execut ed in t his example will sear ch all of t he subdir ec-
t or ies shown above for any and all files specified on t he command line. In
t he following command t hese dir ect or ies ar e sear ched for any work files:
>find *.work*
/vertical/checkreg.work0:s
/data/routeb.workfile:s
FIND file... ( opt ions
opt ions APPEND SUBDIR
EXEC dat e1
PRTnn dat e2
SORT
>tree
/
data
misc
doc
programs
package
doc
programs
vertical
doc
files
programs
programs
248 Find
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
In t he next command, t he dir ect ories ar e sear ched for all backup files, wit h
t he list of files piped t o t he Erase command.
>find *.backlib*.* *.backup | erase
"/VERTICAL/CUSTOMER.BACKLIB.LETR0004:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/CUSTOMER.BACKLIB.LETR0007:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/LISTS.BACKLIB.LETR0001:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/LISTS.BACKLIB.LETR0002:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/PROGRAMS/ABC.BACKLIB.MAKEFILE:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/PROGRAMS/ABC.BACKLIB.XFER:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/PROGRAMS/ABC.BACKLIB.STATUS:S" erased.
"/PACKAGE/PROGRAMS/PACKAGE.BACKLIB.MENU:S" erased.
"/PACKAGE/PROGRAMS/PACKAGE.BACKLIB.CHECKREG:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/LIBS.BACKUP:S" erased.
"/VERTICAL/DOC/FILES/CUSTOMER.BACKUP:S" erased.
11 files erased, 53,504 bytes recovered.
Options APPEND Similar t o t he EXEC opt ion except , if t her e is a SELECTED.EXEC:S
prior t o invoking Find, it is appended t o wit hout clear ing any
prior cont ent s.
EXEC The names of any files mat ching t he r equest ed specificat ions
ar e out put t o t he SELECTED.EXEC:S. This file is fir st erased so
t hat , if t her e ar e no files found t hat mat ch t he specificat ions,
t he file does not exist .
The for mat of each r ecor d added t o t his file is;
&1 file-description &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
PRTnn Indicat es t hat Find is t o pr int t he list of files on t he at t ached
print er number nn.
SORT Sor t s t he list befor e out put t ing it . This opt ion cannot be used
when t he SUBDIR opt ion is used. Compar e t he t wo list s pr o-
duced wit h and wit hout t he SORT opt ion.
>find *.work*
/data/routeb.sortfile:s
>find *.work* (sort
/data/routeb.sortfile:s
Find 249
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When t he SORT opt ion is used t he lines ar e sor t ed in alphabet -
ical or der , including any pat h specificat ion.
SUBDIR Includes t he names of all subdir ect or ies searched. The subdi-
r ect or y names ar e out put aft er a subdir ect or y and all subordi-
nat e direct or ies t o t his dir ect or y are sear ched. This opt ion is
par t icular ly useful when you want t o r emove a br anch of a
direct or y t r ee:
>find *.*.*:s (subdir | erase (notype
For each subdir ect or y of t he cur r ent wor king dir ect ory, t he
above command er ases all of t he member s of all libr ar ies in t he
subdir ect or y. Then t he libr ar ies t hemselves and all flat files in
t he subdir ect or y is er ased. It t hen er ases each of t he subdir ec-
t ories and any ot her flat files in t he cur r ent working dir ect or y.
SUBDIR cannot be used when SORT is specified.
date1 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is gr eat er t han
t his dat e.
>find *.*:s (10/15/01
The above command will include only t hose files t hat have
been cr eat ed or changed since Oct ober 14, 2001.
date2 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is less t han or
t his dat e. May only be specified by fir st specifying date1.
>find *.*:s (10/15/01 10/30/01
This command includes only t hose files t hat have been cr eat ed
creat ed or changed aft er Oct ober 30, 2001.
>find *.*:s (1/1/86 11/20/01
or changed pr ior t o November 21, 2001, ar e included.
250 Find
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions The SUBDIR and SORT opt ions cannot bot h be specified.
See also ChDir, FileManager, FileList, Tree, WhereIs
Finger 251
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Finger Client
The Finger client quer ies a ser ver for t he st at us of a specific account or for ot her infor mat ion
about account s on a ser ver .
The Finger client is mainly used t o det er mine if an account name is valid.
Depending upon t he Finger ser ver at t he sit e, it may also be used t o det er -
mine if a par t icular account has picked up t heir mail r ecent ly.
Operation Mode 1Request s infor mat ion about user-name on server. The specific
infor mat ion r et ur ned is det ermined by t he finger ser ver .
>finger acavallo@pacifier.com
Querying user "acavallo" at host "pacifier.com".

Login: acavallo Name: Allen Cavallo
Directory: /admin/acavallo Shell: /usr/local/bin/tcsh
Never logged in.
No Mail.
No Plan.
Mode 2Request s infor mat ion about all user s logged ont o server. Many
finger servers do not suppor t t his r equest .
>finger @theos-software.com
Querying user "" at host "theos-software.com".
Finger online user list request denied.
>finger @ccnet.com
Querying user "" at host "ccnet.com".
Login Name TTY Idle When Where
root Operator co 10 Tue 09:54
texas Verio Customer Care p0 Tue 16:01 oz.onramp.net
...
1 FINGER user-name@server
2 FINGER @server
server ser ver name or IP address
user-name user account name
252 Finger
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>finger @netcom.com
Querying user "" at host "netcom.com".
User Real Name Idle TTY Host Console Location
abenamer Allan Benamer 1:43 r9 netcom (unknown-8-127.ju)
acapela Michael H. Collier p6 netcom21 (uswgco2.uswest.c)
aci 0:59 pe netcom (aci.vip.best.com)
...
715 active login sessions.
Notes Specifying a name befor e t he @ of t he ser ver name specifies a par t icular
user on t he ser ver . This name is almost always t he same as t he per son's
e-mail addr ess. However , for t he Finger client t o wor k, t he sit e finger ed
must be r unning a finger ser ver t hat accept s t he command and r esponds
wit h t he relevant infor mat ion. Having an e-mail address does not guar an-
t ee t hat Finger will pr oduce any result s.
The infor mat ion displayed by t his Finger Client is dependent upon, and
pr ovided by, t he Finger Server specified. For inst ance, one Finger ser ver
might r espond wit h a simple not ificat ion t hat t he user has new mail.
Anot her ser ver might r espond wit h lot s of infor mat ion, some of it might
act ually be useful. As an example, compar e t he following Finger displays:
>finger president@whitehouse.gov
Querying user "president" at host "whitehouse.gov".
Finger service for arbitrary addresses on whitehouse.gov is not
supported. If you wish to send electronic mail, valid addresses are
"PRESIDENT@WHITEHOUSE.GOV", and "VICE-PRESIDENT@WHITEHOUSE.GOV".
>finger me@myisp.com
Querying user "me" at host "myisp.com".
Login: me Name: My Name
Directory: /home/c/me Shell: /bin/tcsh
Mail forwarded to: Someone Else <them@somesite.com>
New Mail received Wed Nov 26 10:15 2001 (PST)
Unread since Wed Nov 26 10:00 2001 (PST)
No Plan
You have new mail.
>finger support@theos-software.com
Querying user "support" at host "theos-software.com".
User Id: support Name: THEOS Support
The fir st r esponse fr om t he ser ver at whitehouse.gov doesnt pr ovide any
infor mat ion about t he specific account . Inst ead, it responds wit h a t ext
message. The second r esponse fr om myisp.com pr ovides almost complet e
infor mat ion while t he last r esponse fr om theos-software.com pr ovides
minimal infor mat ion sufficient t o confir m t hat t he account name exist s
and includes a mor e descript ive name for t he user at t hat account .
Finger 253
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Server Specification
Specificat ion of t he server for Mode 1 or Mode 2 may be accomplished by
specifying:
+ The dot t ed IP addr ess for t he ser ver .
>finger @207.21.75.100
+ The host name as defined in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/HOSTS.TXT:S.
This file can be maint ained by you wit h WinWrite or Setup Net Name
Services.
>finger @my-company
+ Or t he domain name as defined by t he Domain Name Ser vice spec-
ified in Setup Net Name Services.
>finger @theos-software.com
For inst ance, your company might be r egist er ed wit h Int er nic
(ht t p://www.int er nic.net /) wit h a domain name of my-company.com, wit h an
IP addr ess of 172.20.2.1. If you have specified a host name of HEAD-
QUARTERS in t he host names dat abase wit h t hat IP addr ess, you can
specify your companys sit e as:
+ 172.20.2.1
+ headquar t er s
+ my-company.com
Domain names and host names ar e case-insensit ive.
254 Finger
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Force 255
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Force Command
This command at t empt s t o for ce anot her logged-on user t o cancel t he command t hat t hey
ar e execut ing and t o opt ionally execut e anot her command or EXEC pr ogr am.
Operation Mode 1St ar t ing wit h pr ocess number one, all logged-on user s ar e exam-
ined. The fir st user found t o be logged ont o t he account username is for ced
t o per for m a (Break),(Q) oper at ion and, if t hat is successful and t her e is a
command specified, t hat user is for ced t o execut e command.
Mode 2If pr ocess number process is logged on it is for ced t o per for m a
(Break),(Q) oper at ion and, if t hat is successful and t her e is a command speci-
fied, t he user is forced t o execut e command.
Mode 3This mode is similar t o Mode 1 or Mode 2 except , if t he user
cannot be for ced on t he fir st at t empt . The NOQUERY opt ion specifies t hat
Force should not ask if it should t r y har der but exit s aft er t he fir st
at t empt .
Wit h t his mode of t he command, if command cont ains opt ions t hen t he
NOQUERY opt ion of t he Force command must be specified wit h a second
open par ent hesis.
>force 5 filelist a (print (noquery
Mode 4Ident ical t o Mode 3 but t he no quer y feat ure is specified wit h t he
UNIX st yle opt ion. This mode is useful when command cont ains it s own
opt ions.
1 FORCE username command
2 FORCE process command
3 FORCE user command ( NOQUERY
4 FORCE -nq user command
command an opt ional command line
process pr ocess id number
user process or username
username account name t hat ot her user is logged ont o
256 Force
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The following t wo commands per for m ident ical funct ions:
>force 5 basic test (print (noquery
>force -nq 5 basic test (print
Notes It is possible t hat a user may not be for ced wit h t his command. A user s
account environment can be set t o ignor e (Break),(Q) r equest s. See Account
on page 13. Addit ionally, some pr ogr ams disable (Break),(Q) dur ing some or
all phases of oper at ion (for inst ance, WindoWr it er ).
If t he user s (Break),(Q) is not being honor ed at t he t ime t hat Force at t empt s
t o make it abor t it s oper at ion, Force will not know if t he force was success-
ful unless you use specify a command wit h t he Force command. In t hat sit -
uat ion, t he following message is displayed:
Respond wit h (Y) t o have Force t r y har der by r eenabling t he ot her user s
(Break),(Q). If t his also fails, Force exit s wit h an er r or message.
Cautions It is danger ous t o for ce anot her user if you do not know what t hat user is
doing. Always use t he Who or Show USERS command t o find out which pr o-
gram t he ot her user is execut ing befor e using t he Force command. It is
always best if t he user is at t he CSI.
Restrictions The Force command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
You can only Force user s or pr ocesss t hat are logged ont o an account .
See also Show USERS, Who
FTP 257
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP Client
The FTP command is a File Tr ansfer Pr ot ocol client t hat provides file t ransfer capabilit ies
over a net wor k bet ween t his client and any FTP server available on t he net wor k.
Operation Mode 1St ar t s t he FTP client in int er act ive mode. In int er act ive mode,
t he FTP Commands descr ibed on page 264 are used t o connect t o a ser ver ,
log ont o an account , change dir ect or ies, list dir ect or ies, view, send and
r eceive files, etc.
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat a connect ion t o host is at t empt ed
before ent er ing int er act ive mode. Refer t o Server Specification on page 260
for a descr ipt ion of ser ver specificat ions.
Because a user name is not specified, anonymous is used for t he user
name. Refer t o User Account Specification on page 261 for a descr ipt ion of
anonymous user account s.
1 FTP ( options
2 FTP host ( options send-rec-options
3 FTP host user-password ( options send-rec-options
4 FTP site ( opt ions send-rec-opt ions
5 FTP filename ( FILE opt ions
filename name of file on local client syst em cont aining FTP scr ipt
host server
server:port
localhost LOCALHOST
opt ions ASCII NOPROXY VERBOSE
BINARY PROXY host
port por t number on ser ver for FTP communicat ion (default is 21)
send-rec-options RECEIVE remote-name
SEND local-name
server net wor k ser ver name or id (may also be localhost )
site sit e definit ion name from FTP configur at ion file
user-password user name and opt ional passwor d for user
258 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 2 except t hat , aft er a connect ion t o host is est ab-
lished, you ar e logged ont o user account wit h password. See User Account
Specification for infor mat ion about user account s on t he FTP ser ver .
Not e: The passwor d does not have t o be specified on t he command line. For
securit y pur poses, it is best t o not specify it on t he command line because
it will appear in plain t ext t here. Inst ead, omit t he passwor d. When it is
not specified, FTP will pr ompt you t o ent er it silent ly.
Mode 4This mode uses a sit e definit ion t o define t he host and ot her con-
nect ion paramet er s. Sit e definit ions ar e cr eat ed wit h t he Setup Net FTP
Client command. (See THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Inst al-
lat ion and Set up Guide.) All sit e definit ion names ar e simple names wit h-
out dot s or ot her punct uat ion char act er s.
When a simple name is used, as in t his mode of t he command, t he FTP
pr ogr am fir st checks t o see if it mat ches one of t he sit e definit ions. If it
does, it uses t hat sit e definit ion t o make a connect ion t o t he r emot e ser ver .
Mode 2 of t he command is assumed when it doesnt mat ch a sit e definit ion.
Mode 5In t his mode, t he cont ent s of filename ar e used as a scr ipt of
commands t o t he FTP client . This scr ipt should cont ain sever al of t he FTP
Commands descr ibed on page 264. See FTP Scr ipt File on page 280.
Options ASCII This is a default opt ion t hat specifies t hat files ar e t r ansfer r ed
as ASCII files. Compar e wit h t he BINARY opt ion.
BINARY Specifies t hat files ar e t r ansfer r ed as binar y files. In binar y
mode, no int er pr et at ion or conver sion is per for med on t he con-
t ent s of files t r ansfer red.
NOPROXY If t he FTP configur at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/FTP.CFG:S) specifies
a default pr oxy server, t his opt ion ignor es t hat specificat ion
and connect s t o t he r equest ed ser ver addr ess dir ect ly.
PROXY proxy-server Whet her or not a pr oxy server is specified in t he FTP
configur at ion file, proxy-server is used as t he pr oxy server for
t his FTP session. A default pr oxy ser ver can be specified in t he
FTP configur at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/FTP.CFG:S) t hat is main-
t ained by t he Setup Net FTP Client scr een. (See THEOS Corona
Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Installat ion and S et up Guide.)
VERBOSE Enables verbose mode. Wit h ver bose mode on, commands sent
t o and r esponses r eceived fr om t he r emot e FTP ser ver ar e dis-
played. Wit h ver bose mode off, t hese commands ar e not dis-
played.
FTP 259
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Send-Receive
Options
These t wo opt ions may only be used when t he FTP ser ver name or sit e
name is specified on t he command line (Mode 2, Mode 3 or Mode 4). The
user-password may also be specified on t he command line.
RECEIVE remote-name Tr ansfer t he file remot e-name from t he FTP server
t o t he local comput er using t he curr ent t ransfer mode (ASCII or
BINARY).
If remot e-name cont ains a pat h specificat ion, a CD command is
issued t o change t o t hat dir ect ory. remot e-name may cont ain
wild-car d specificat ions for t he file descr ipt ion. All files
r eceived fr om t he r emot e ser ver ar e received int o t he cur r ent
wor king dir ect ory of t he local syst em.
SEND local-name Tr ansfer t he file local-name fr om t he local comput er t o
t he FTP ser ver using t he cur r ent t ransfer mode (ASCII or
BINARY).
If local-name cont ains a pat h specificat ion, a CD command is
issued t o t he FTP server syst em t o change t o t hat dir ect or y. All
files sent ar e locat ed in t he curr ent wor king dir ect or y of t he
local comput er . local-name may cont ain wild-car d specifica-
t ions for t he file descr ipt ion.
Not e: FTP ser ver s normally change t he file dat e on r eceived
files t o t heir own local dat e and t ime, or possibly t o UTC t ime.
Notes This FTP client confor ms t o t he st andar ds pr oposed in RFC-959. That doc-
ument can be found on t he Int er net at t he following sit e:
ht t p://www.faqs.or g/r fcs/rfc959.ht ml
This pr ogr am accept s all user input fr om stdin and displays all out put on
stdout. These can be r edir ect ed t o disk files or ot her devices, if desir ed.
Addit ionally, if invoked by an EXEC pr ogr am, commands may be ent er ed
wit h t he &stack or &begstack commands.
As ment ioned in t he sect ion Options on page 258, t he r emot e FTP ser ver
may be connect ed via a pr oxy ser ver on anot her syst em t hat you can
access. For gener al infor mat ion about using pr oxy ser ver s, r efer t o Appen-
dix D: Using a Proxy Server, st ar t ing on page 203 of t he THEOS Corona
Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference.
260 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Specificat ion of t he host , for Mode 2 or Mode 3 or wit h t he OPEN commands,
may be accomplished by specifying:
FTP? open 207.21.75.100
+ The host name as defined in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/HOSTS.TXT:S. This
file can be maint ained by you wit h WinWrite.
FTP? open my-company
+ Or t he domain name as defined by t he Domain Name Service spec-
ified in Setup Net Name Services. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Inst allat ion and S et up Guide.)
FTP? open ftp.theos-software.com
For inst ance, your company might be r egist er ed wit h Int er nic
(ht t p://www.int er nic.net /index.ht ml) wit h a domain name of my-
company.com, wit h an IP addr ess of 172.20.2.1. If you have specified a
host name of HEADQUARTERS in t he host names dat abase wit h t hat IP
addr ess, you can specify your companys FTP sit e as
+ 172.20.2.1
+ headquar t ers
+ my-company.com
The host specificat ion may include a por t number . When not specified, t he
default por t number of 21 is used for FTP t r ansfer s and communicat ion. In
some sit uat ions, you may need t o specify a por t ot her t han 21 t o access t he
server .
For inst ance, a host machine may have t wo FTP ser ver s. In t his sit uat ion,
one of t he ser ver s will use por t number 21 and t he ot her ser ver will use a
differ ent por t number. To access t his ot her ser ver you will have t o specify
t he port number used by t hat ser ver . A similar sit uat ion exist s when a
host machine t hat has an FTP ser ver and a pr oxy ser ver .
To specify a por t number ot her t han 21, use a ser ver name or IP addr ess
followed by a colon and t he por t number for t hat ser ver .
FTP 261
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP Server Response Messages
In t he examples used in t his chapt er , t he r esponse t ext shown for var ious
commands is not necessar ily what is displayed for a specific connect ion t o
a remot e FTP ser ver . The ser ver is r esponsible for t he specific t ext dis-
played by t he FTP client .
For inst ance, one ser ver might display:
FTP? cd temp
CWD command successful
FTP? remove test.file
DELE command successful
While anot her ser ver might display:
FTP? cd temp
Directory changed to "/temp"
FTP? remove test.file
File "test.file" has been deleted.
Addit ionally, t he command names ar e shown in lower case. Command
names may be ent ered in upper case, lower case or in mixed case.
User Account Specification
Most FTP ser ver s r equir e t hat client connect ions ar e made only when a
valid user account is specified and t he passwor d for t hat account is ent er ed
successfully. When connect ing t o a remot e FTP ser ver , t he user account
det er mines your home dir ect or y, which files you own, and what dir ect o-
r ies you can view, upload and download fr om.
>ftp my-company.com "my-name" "my-private-password"
Connecting to my-company.com (172.20.2.1)
--------------------------------------------------
Welcome to My Company FTP site.
MY-NAME logged in.
--------------------------------------------------
FTP?
Not e t hat , in t he above example, t he user name and password wer e speci-
fied wit h enclosing quot es. This was done because some ser ver s use case-
sensit ive name and passwor d ver ificat ion. Wit hout t he enclosing quot es,
t he Command St r ing Int er pr et er (CSI) folds all t okens t o upper case befor e
passing t he argument t o t he pr ogr am. This might cause t he user name or
passwor d t o be invalid.
262 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>ftp
FTP? open headquarters
--------------------------------------------------
User-name: my-name
Password: (enter my-private-password )
MY-NAME user logged in.
--------------------------------------------------
FTP?
As indicat ed, when t he passwor d is r equest ed in int er act ive mode, it is not
displayed on your scr een.
Most FTP ser ver s allow a nonymous connect i ons. An anonymous connec-
t ion is made by eit her not specifying a user name, or by specifying t he spe-
cial user name of anonymous. When you specify a user name of
anonymous, you will st ill be asked for a password. The r ecommended
passwor d for anonymous connect ions is your e-mail addr ess. For inst ance,
me@my-company.com. In fact , some ser ver s may r equir e t his st yle of
passwor d.
>ftp headquarters ; connect as anonymous user
--------------------------------------------------
Anonymous user logged in.
--------------------------------------------------
FTP?
or
>ftp
FTP? open headquarters
--------------------------------------------------
User-name: anonymous
Password: me@my-company.com
--------------------------------------------------
FTP?
When connect ing as an anonymous user , t he passwor d ent er ed is dis-
played as you t ype it . When no passwor d is specified by you, t he default
anonymous passwor d is used. This default passwor d is defined in t he FTP
configur at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/FTP.CFG:S) t hat is maint ained by t he Setup
Net FTP Client scr een. (See THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem
Installation and S etup Guide.) If t he configurat ion file does not specify t he
passwor d for anonymous connect ions, a passwor d of local-name@your -
domain or , if your syst em is not par t of a domain, t hen account -
name@local-name is used for t he passwor d.
FTP 263
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Not e: Most FTP sit es do not allow full access t o anonymous user s. For
inst ance, t hey will frequent ly not allow you t o upload files. They may also
r est r ict t he direct or ies t hat you may view or download files fr om.
Directory and File Name Specification
Many FTP ser ver s ar e implement ed on syst ems which use case-sensit ive
user names, passwor ds, dir ect or y names and file names. Ot her FTP ser v-
er s ar e implement ed on syst ems t hat may or may not use case-sensit ive
names. It is always best t o specify user names and passwor ds in t he same
case as t hey wer e given t o you and t o specify dir ect or y names and file
names in t he same case as displayed by t he direct or y list ing on t he ser ver .
The file name specificat ions for files on t he ser ver must be specified in t he
synt ax used by t he ser ver s oper at ing syst em. For inst ance, you may use
t he dir ect or y-name shor t cut s of ./ and ../ only if t he ser ver s oper at ing
syst em suppor t s it . In most cases, t his synt ax will be ident ical t o t he
synt ax used by t he THEOS oper at ing syst em.
Transfers of Non-Stream Files
The FTP st andard t r ansfer s st r eam files. However, t his FTP Client can be
used t o send a non-st r eam file, such as a compiled command, indexed,
keyed or relat ive dat a file, et c. It does t his by r epackaging t he file using
t he FileType pr ot ocol befor e sending it t o t he r emot e ser ver . When t he des-
t inat ion is a THEOS-based FTP ser ver , t he r eceived st r eam dat a is con-
vert ed back t o it s or iginal for mat by t he THEOS FTP ser ver . A THEOS
FTP ser ver is included in t he Net Ser ver or t he WebSer ver Plus Paks.
If t he dest inat ion is not a THEOS-based FTP ser ver , it is saved on t he
ser ver as a st r eam file in t he FileType format . This file cannot be easily
used by syst ems ot her t han THEOS syst em, but it can be st or ed for subse-
quent ret r ieval by a THEOS FTP client . When r eceiving a file fr om t hat
non-THEOS FTP ser ver , t he THEOS FTP client r ecognizes t hat t he file is
a THEOS file in FileType for mat and conver t s t he file back t o it s or iginal
for mat before saving it on t he local syst em.
Alt hough non-st r eam files t r ansferr ed by t his client ar e not usable by any
syst em ot her t han a THEOS-based syst em, non-THEOS FTP sit es can be
used for int er mediat e st or age. For inst ance, a dat a file could be uploaded
t o a gener ic Int er net Ser vice Pr ovider (ISP) FTP ser ver and t hen subse-
quent ly downloaded t o anot her THEOS syst em.
When a non-st r eam file is uploaded wit h t his FTP client , subsequent ly
downloaded by a non-THEOS FTP client and t hen t r ansfer r ed t o a THEOS
syst em (for inst ance, wit h t he THEOS WorkStation Client), t he r esult ing file
will have t o be conver t ed wit h t he FileType command befor e it can be used
by THEOS applicat ions.
264 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP
Commands
The following commands may be used in t he int er act ive mode of t he FTP
command or t hey may be added t o a t ext file and t hen invoked wit h Mode 5
of t he FTP command. When t he FTP command is in it s int eract ive mode, it
uses a prompt t ext of FTP? For inst ance:
>ftp
FTP? verbose
Verbose mode ON
FTP?
A valid connect ion wit h a remot e server must be made befor e most of t he
commands may be used. The only commands t hat do not r equir e a connec-
t ion t o a r emot e FTP ser ver ar e: BYE, CLOSE, EXIT, HELP, LCD, LMD,
LPWD, MODE, OPEN, OS, QUIT, SHELL, TYPE and VERBOSE.
Not e: Many of t he commands descr ibed her e look like THEOS commands,
DOS commands or UNIX commands, but t hey ar e not . These ar e FTP com-
mands and only have t he synt ax and opt ions as descr ibed in t he following
pages.
FTP Command Line Editing
You may make a mist ake or want t o change some par amet er of t he com-
mand line as you t ype it . It is not necessar y t o cancel t he ent ir e command
and st ar t over . Use t he following FTP edit ing keys t o make changes t o t he
command befor e pr essing (Enter).
Edit Key
Control
Key
Function
(Home) (Ctrl)+(G) Move t o t he beginning of t he command line.
(End) (Ctrl)+(E) Move t o t he end of t he command line.
(Backspace) Delet e t he char act er t o t he left of t he cur sor .
(Del) (Ctrl)+(Z) Delet e t he char act er under t he cur sor .
(F5) (Ctrl)+(N) Delet e all char act er s t o end-of-line.
() (Ctrl)+(H) Move t he cur sor left one char act er posit ion.
() (Ctrl)+(L) Move t he cur sor r ight one char act er posit ion.
(Insert) (Ctrl)+(R) Toggle bet ween char act er inser t and replace
mode.
*
(Esc) (Ctrl)+() Er ase t he ent ir e command line.
(Enter) (Ctrl)+(M) Ter minat e edit ing and execut e t he command.
Table 5: FTP Command-Line Edit Keys
FTP 265
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
APPEND Transfer a file fr om t he local comput er t o t he r emot e FTP
ser ver , using t he cur r ent t r ansfer mode (ASCII or BINARY). If
t he file alr eady exist s on t he r emot e server, t his file is
appended t o t he end of t hat exist ing file.
Ther e ar e t wo for ms of t he command:
APPEND local-name
APPEND local-name remote-name
local-name may cont ain pat h specificat ions, which r efer t o t he
locat ion of t he file on t he local client syst em. When remote-
name is not specified, t he file is r eceived ont o t he remot e
ser ver syst em int o t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y (see CHDIR
command t o change t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y on t he
ser ver syst em) and has t he same file name as local-name.
When remote-name is specified, it r efer s t o t he dest inat ion
locat ion and name on t he ser ver syst em. remot e-name may con-
t ain pat h specificat ions, but not wild car ds.
ASCII Set s t he cur r ent file t r ansfer mode t o ASCII. This mode should
be used for t ext files only. Any char act er s t hat look like line-
ending char act er s might be t r anslat ed int o t he local syst ems
line-ending char act er .
BINARY Set s t he cur rent file t r ansfer mode t o binar y. All char act er
codes ar e t r ansfer red wit hout t r anslat ion or int er pr et at ion.
BYE Ter minat e t he cur r ent FTP session and exit t he FTP client .
This command is synonymous wit h t he EXIT and QUIT com-
mands. Use t he CLOSE command if you want t o t erminat e t he
session wit h t he FTP sit e but r emain in t he FTP client pr o-
gr am.
CD Synonym t o t he CHDIR command.
CHDIR Change t he cur r ent wor king dir ect ory on t he r emot e FTP
ser ver syst em.
FTP? pwd
"/" is current directory.
FTP? chdir one/two
Directory changed to "/one/two"
FTP? cd ..
Directory changed to "/one"
266 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CLOSE Ter minat e t he cur rent FTP session wit hout exit ing fr om t he
FTP client . Some ser ver s may display an infor mat ional mes-
sage when you t er minat e t he session.
FTP? close
Goodbye.
FTP?
DELETE Er ases a file fr om t he r emot e FTP ser ver . The file name for t he
file is specified wit h t he command:
DELETE filename
filename may cont ain pat h and wild-car d specificat ions.
FTP? delete myfile.command
DELE command successful.
FTP? remove myfile.help
FTP? delete temp/myfile.txt
DIR Display a dir ect ory list ing for files and dir ect or ies on t he
r emot e ser ver syst em. The appear ance of t he list ing depends
upon t he cur r ent set t ing of t he VERBOSE mode.
When VERBOSE mode is OFF, and t he dir ect or y infor mat ion
sent by t he r emot e FTP ser ver is in t he st andar d, UNIX for -
mat , t he infor mat ion is r efor mat t ed befor e displaying it . Spe-
cifically, dir ect or y names ar e eit her under lined or color ed, t he
file name is moved t o t he beginning of t he line, access per mis-
sion codes ar e r emoved, and t he dat e and t ime are changed t o
dd mon year, followed by t he t ime in 12-hour for m wit h an
a or p indicat or .
Wit h VERBOSE mode ON, t he dir ect ory infor mat ion is dis-
played exact ly as r eceived fr om t he remot e ser ver .
This command has t hr ee differ ent for ms:
DIR
DIR filename
DIR dirname
The fir st form (DIR) displays t he dir ect or y list ing of t he cur rent
wor king dir ect or y on t he r emot e FTP server.
FTP 267
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? dir
accounts 16 May 2001 5:58p
files 11 Aug 2001 7:29p
programs 29 Jul 2001 11:37a
FTP? v
Verbose mode ON
FTP? dir
d--------- 1 owner group 0 May 16 15:58 accounts
d--------- 1 owner group 0 Aug 11 19:29 files
d--------- 1 owner group 0 Jul 29 11:37 programs
The second form (DIR filename) displays t he dir ect or y ent r y for
filename on t he r emot e FTP ser ver . filename may cont ain pat h
and wild-card specificat ions. Only files mat ching t he filename
specificat ion are included.
FTP? dir files/Config.cmp
Config.cmp 336 26 Feb 2001 6:21p
The t hir d for m (DIR dirname) displays t he dir ect or y ent r y of
t he dirname dir ect or y on t he r emot e FTP ser ver . dirname may
cont ain a pat h specificat ion. Only t he specified dirname is dis-
played, not t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y.
FTP? dir programs
program1.command 89,020 12 Oct 2001 1:15p
program2.command 113,920 12 Oct 2001 1:20p
program3.command 77,160 2 Nov 2001 8:12a
S ee also: LS, SAVEDIR and SAVELS commands.
EXIT Ter minat e t he cur r ent FTP session and exit t he FTP envir on-
ment . This command is synonymous wit h t he BYE and QUIT
commands.
GET Synonym t o t he RECV command.
HELP Display help infor mat ion about t he FTP commands available.
Ther e ar e t wo for ms of t his command:
HELP
HELP cmd-name
The fir st form displays all command names and abbr eviat ions
available in t he FTP client envir onment .
268 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? help
Following is a complete list of commands. The command
name may be abbreviated. To display help for a specific
command, use the syntax: HELP cmd.
APPEND CLOSE LCD MODE RD SEND
ASCII DELETE LMD OPEN RECV SHELL
...
The second for m displays t he specific help t ext for cmd-name.
FTP? h lcd
Syntax: LCD <directory> (change local directory)
LCD Change t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y on t he local client sys-
t em and display t he new curr ent wor king dir ect or y. The com-
mand name must be followed by t he pat h t o t he new dir ect or y.
FTP? lpwd
Local directory: (null)
FTP? lcd fax
Local directory: /FAX:S
Not e: When t he FTP client exit s, your curr ent wor king direc-
t or y is r est or ed t o t he dir ect or y in use at t he t ime t hat FTP
was invoked.
LDIR Similar t o t he DIR command, t his command displays a dir ec-
t or y list ing for files and direct or ies, but on t he local syst em.
The appear ance of t he list ing does not depend upon t he set t ing
of t he VERBOSE mode.
This command has t wo differ ent for ms:
LDIR
LDIR filename
The first for m (DLIR) displays t he dir ect or y list ing of t he cur -
r ent wor king direct or y on t he local syst em.
FTP 269
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? lcd tips
Local directory: /TIPS:S
FTP? ldir
aol.tip 1,454 2 Sep 2000 12:06p
config.tip 2,950 12 Nov 2000 2:04p
ftp.tip 557 2 Sep 2000 11:54a
...
The second for m (LDIR filename) displays t he dir ect or y ent r y
for filename on t he local syst em. filename may cont ain pat h
and wild-card specificat ions. Only files mat ching t he filename
specificat ion are included.
FTP? ldir /data/*.*
misc 15 Sep 2001 1:29p
S ee also: LLS command.
LLS Display t he dir ect or y list ing fr om t he local syst em for t he cur -
r ent wor king dir ect or y, a specific file or gr oup of files. This is
similar t o t he LDIR command but only t he file names or dir ec-
t ory names ar e displayed, wit hout any det ail about t he files or
direct or ies.
Like t he LDIR command, t her e ar e t wo forms of t his command:
LLS
LLS filename
The fir st form displays t he files and dir ect ories in t he cur r ent
wor king dir ect ory of t he local syst em.
FTP? lls
aol.tip
config.tip
ftp.tip
...
The second for m (LLS filename) displays a list of files mat ching
filename, which may cont ain pat h specificat ions or wild car ds.
S ee also: LDIR command.
270 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LMD Cr eat es a new dir ect or y on t he local client syst em. The new
dir ect or y name is specified wit h t he command:
LMD dirname
Unless a pat h is specified wit h dirname, t he new direct or y is
cr eat ed in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y of t he local syst em
(see LPWD).
FTP? lmd example
FTP? lcd example
Local directory: /FAX/EXAMPLE:S
LPWD Display t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y of t he local client sys-
t em.
FTP? lpwd
Local directory: /FAX:S
LS Display t he dir ect or y list ing fr om t he r emot e ser ver for t he
cur r ent wor king dir ect ory, a specific file or group of files, or
dir ect or y ot her t han t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y. Unlike t he
DIR command, t he set t ing of t he VERBOSE mode does not
affect t he infor mat ion displayed, except for t he nor mal inclu-
sion of r eply codes and int er mediat e messages. Also, only t he
file names or dir ect or y names ar e displayed, wit hout any det ail
about t he files or dir ect or ies.
Similar t o t he DIR command, t her e ar e t hree for ms of t his com-
mand:
LS
LS filename
LS dirname
The first for m displays t he files and dir ect or ies in t he cur rent
wor king dir ect or y of t he r emot e server.
FTP? ls
.login
public_html
.history
mail
.pinerc
The second for m (LS filename) displays a list of files mat ching
filename, which may cont ain pat h specificat ions or wild car ds.
FTP 271
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The t hir d for m (LS dirname) displays t he files in t he specified
dirname.
S ee also: DIR, SAVEDIR and SAVELS commands.
MD Synonym t o t he MKDIR command.
MKDIR Cr eat es a new dir ect or y on t he remot e FTP ser ver . The new
direct or y name is specified wit h t he command:
MKDIR dirname
Unless a pat h is specified wit h dirname, t he new dir ect or y will
be cr eat ed in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y (see CHDIR).
FTP? ls
myip.htm
FTP? mkdir example
FTP? ls
myip.htm
example
MODE Display t he cur r ent file t r ansfer mode (ASCII or BINARY). This
command is synonymous wit h t he TYPE command.
>ftp (binary
FTP? mode
Using Binary mode to transfer files.
OPEN Est ablish a new FTP session. Any curr ent FTP session is
closed. There ar e five for ms of t he command:
OPEN
OPEN host
OPEN host user
OPEN host user password
OPEN site
Basically, t hese ar e all t he same command. You ar e pr ompt ed
for any infor mat ion omit t ed fr om t he command or t he site defi-
nit ion. For a descr ipt ion of t he host paramet er , r efer t o Server
Specification on page 260. For a descript ion of user and pass-
wor d, r efer t o User Account Specification on page 261. Sit es ar e
defined in Setup Net FTP Client. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Installat ion and S etup Guide.)
272 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The user and password cannot be enclosed wit hin quot at ion
marks. Case mode is ret ained as ent er ed and quot at ion mar ks
ar e passed t o t he ser ver as par t of t he user name or passwor d.
Wit h t he fir st for m of t he command, you ar e pr ompt ed t o ent er
t he ser ver name, user name and passwor d.
FTP? open
Host-name: ftp.theos-software.com
Connecting to ftp.theos-software.com (207.21.75.100)
-------------------------------------------------
User-name: anonymous
Password: me@my-company.com
Welcome to THEOS Software Corporation FTP site.
The second for m connect s t o host and t hen asks you for t he
user name and passwor d. The t hir d form connect s t o host and
logs on as user; you ar e prompt ed for t he passwor d. The four t h
for m supplies all of t he infor mat ion.
Not e t hat , wit h t he four t h for m, t he passwor d is supplied wit h
t he command and is visible. The ot her for ms pr ompt you for
t he passwor d, which is ent er ed silent ly.
FTP? open ftp.somesite.com
Connecting to ftp.somesite.com (128.100.1.2)
--------------------------------------------
User-name: me
Password:
information messages from ftp server
User me logged in.
As descr ibed in User Account Specification, anonymous connec-
t ions ar e made by specifying a user name of anonymous.
Some servers allow you t o use a dash at t he st art of t he pass-
wor d t o suppr ess any infor mat ion messages. This may not
wor k for all ser ver s.
To t er minat e t he connect ion, use t he QUIT or CLOSE command.
OS This command is synonymous wit h t he SHELL command.
PWD Display t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y of t he r emot e FTP
ser ver . Refer t o t he CHDIR command for example usage.
PUT Synonym t o t he SEND command.
FTP 273
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUIT Ter minat e t he cur r ent FTP session and exit t he FTP envir on-
ment . This command is synonymous wit h t he BYE and EXIT
commands.
FTP? quit
Thanks for visiting our site.
You were online for 0 minutes.
>
The act ual t ext displayed aft er t he QUIT command is depen-
dent upon t he FTP ser ver . Gener ally, t he message is just
Goodbye.
RD Synonym t o t he RMDIR command.
RECV Transfer s one or mor e files fr om t he r emot e FTP ser ver t o t he
local syst em using t he cur r ent t r ansfer mode (ASCII or
BINARY).
Ther e ar e t wo for ms of t he command:
RECV remote-name
RECV remote-name local-name
remote-name may cont ain a pat h specificat ion or wild car ds.
When no pat h specificat ion is included, only t he cur r ent wor k-
ing dir ect ory on t he FTP ser ver is sear ched for mat ching files.
Because most FTP ser ver s use case-sensit ive direct or y and file
names, t he remote-name should be specified wit h t he same
case mode as used on t he ser ver syst em.
The fir st form of t he command (RECV remote-name) saves t he
file on t he local syst em in t he curr ent wor king dir ect or y. Any
exist ing file on t he local comput er wit h t he same name as
remote-name is r eplaced wit h t he r eceived file. If t he file-name
or file-t ype of remote-name is longer t han eight char act er s, it is
t r uncat ed t o t he fir st eight char act er s of t he name or t ype.
FTP? recv *.htm
Receiving firstfile.htm (1 of 2)
5,536 bytes received in 2.2 seconds (2.48 Kbytes/sec)
Receiving secondfile.htm (2 of 2)
The above t wo files ar e r eceived as FIRSTFIL.HTM and SEC-
ONDFI.HTM, r espect ively.
274 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? cd ..
Directory change to "/"
FTP? recv WebPages/firstfile.htm
When t he second for m of t he command is used (RECV remote-
name local-name), only one file is t ransfer r ed. Wild cards ar e
not allowed in eit her file specificat ion. The file is r eceived ont o
t he local syst em using t he locat ion and name specified wit h
local-name. If local-name does not specify a pat h, t he cur r ent
wor king dir ect or y on t he local syst em is used. Any exist ing file
on t he local comput er wit h t he same name as local-name is
r eplaced wit h t he r eceived file.
FTP? recv firstfile.htm webpage.html
5,536 bytes received in 5.0 seconds (1,117.48 bytes/sec)
FTP? recv ../WebPages/firstfile.htm webpage1.html
Refer t o t he not es on Transfers of Non-Stream Files on page 263
t o informat ion about r eceiving compiled programs and
indexed, keyed or r elat ive dat a files fr om a THEOS FTP
ser ver .
REMOTE Execut es a command on t he r emot e FTP ser ver . The command
is specified wit h t his REMOTE command:
REMOTE command
For a list of commands available on t he ser ver , use t he
REMOTE HELP command. These r emot e commands ar e just
t hat , commands available on t he r emot e syst em. They ar e not
par t of t his FTP client s command set .
FTP? remote help
214-The following commands are recognized
(* => umimplemented)
ABOR DELE NLST QUIT RNTO STOU
ACCT* HELP NOOP REIN SITE* STRU
ALLO LIST PASS REST* SIZE SYST
APPE MDTM PASV RETR SMNT* TYPE
CDUP MKD PORT RDM STAT USER
CWD MODE PWD RNFR STOR XCUP
XCWD
214 Direct comments to FTP@THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM.
FTP? remote help stat
214 Syntax: STAT [<directory>] (status)
FTP? remote stat
211-THEOS FTP Server status:
Version 1.0
Connected to 209.95.32.4
Logged in as PRIVATE
TYPE: ASCII, FORM: Nonprint; STRUcture: File;
FTP 275
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
transfer MODE: Stream
No data connection
211 End of status.
Responses fr om t he REMOTE command ar e always displayed
wit h response codes included, independent of t he cur rent set -
t ing of t he VERBOSE mode.
The r emot e SITE command may have addit ional, sit e-specific
commands available.
REMOVE Synonym t o t he DELETE command.
RENAME Renames a file on t he r emot e FTP ser ver. There ar e t hr ee
for ms of t his command:
RENAME
RENAME old-filename
RENAME old-filename new-filename
These t hr ee for ms all operat e t he same. You ar e pr ompt ed for
t he old and new file names if t hey ar e not specified wit h t he
command. Pat h specificat ions ar e allowed but wild car ds ar e
not .
The old-filename specificat ion must be for a file t hat does exist
and t he new-filename specificat ion must be for a file t hat does
not exist .
FTP? rename
Old-filename: example.fil
File exists, ready for destination name
New-filename: example.txt
File "example.fil" renamed to "example.txt".
RMDIR Removes or er ases a dir ect or y on t he r emot e FTP server. The
direct or y name is specified wit h t he command:
RMDIR dirname
Only dir ect ories may be er ased wit h t his command. To er ase a
file, use t he DELETE command.
The dirname dir ect or y must be empt y.
276 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? rmdir temp
temp: File exists.
FTP? cd temp
Directory change to "/temp"
FTP? delete myfile.command
FTP? cd ..
Directory change to "/"
FTP? rd temp
Directory "temp" removed.
SAVEDIR Similar t o t he DIR command except t hat t he out put is saved in
a file. The for mat of t he command is:
SAVEDIR filename
SAVEDIR filespec filename
SAVEDIR dirname filename
The filespec and dirname have t he same meanings as t he DIR
command. They specify which files on t he remot e syst em ar e
included in t he dir ect or y list ing. When filespec is omit t ed, all
files in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y ar e included. filename
specifies t he name of t he file on your syst em t hat is used t o
save t his dir ect or y list ing.
This command is pr incipally used when FTP is invoked fr om
an FTP Script File wit h an applicat ion pr ogr am.
SAVELS Similar t o t he SAVEDIR command except t hat t he dir ect or y list -
ing for mat used t he LS command for mat . The for mat of t he
command is:
SAVELS filename
SAVELS filespec filename
SAVELS dirname filename
SEND Tr ansfer s one or mor e files fr om t he local syst em t o t he r emot e
FTP ser ver using t he cur r ent t r ansfer mode (ASCII or BINARY).
If a file alr eady exist s on t he r emot e ser ver syst em wit h t he
same dest inat ion name, it is replaced by t his t r ansfer r ed file.
Use t he APPEND command t o send a file and append it t o an
exist ing file on t he remot e server.
Ther e are t wo for ms of t he command:
SEND local-name
SEND local-name remote-name
FTP 277
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
In t he fir st for m (SEND local-name), t he local-name may con-
t ain pat h specificat ions or wild car ds, but not bot h. When
local-name does not include any pat h specificat ion, t he files ar e
locat ed on t he local client syst em in it s local cur r ent wor king
direct or y (LPWD). When local-name does include a pat h specifi-
cat ion, t he files ar e locat ed on t he local client syst em using
t hat pat h specificat ion.
The file or files ar e sent t o t he r emot e ser ver and saved in it s
cur rent wor king dir ect or y (PWD).
FTP? send path/file.name
is equivalent t o:
FTP? send path/file.name file.name
If local-name includes wild-car d specificat ions, all files mat ch-
ing t he specificat ions in t he local cur r ent wor king dir ect or y ar e
sent t o t he r emot e ser ver syst em and saved in it s curr ent
wor king dir ect ory.
In t he second for m of t he command (SEND local-name remote-
name), bot h names may include pat h specificat ions. However ,
wild car ds ar e not allowed. The remote-name specifies t he spe-
cific locat ion and name used t o save t he file on t he r emot e sys-
t em.
FTP? send *.htm
Sending "fileone.htm"
4,536 bytes sent in 0.8 seconds (5.39 Kbytes/sec)
Sending "filetwo.htm"
5,536 bytes sent in 0.8 seconds (6.71 Kbytes/sec)
FTP? send private/first.file temp/file.one
139 bytes send in 0.6 seconds (227.12 Bytes/sec)
Not e: FTP ser ver s normally change t he file dat e on r eceived
files t o t heir own local dat e and t ime, or possibly t o UTC t ime.
Refer t o t he not es on Transfers of Non-Stream Files on page 263
for infor mat ion about sending compiled pr ogr ams and indexed,
keyed or r elat ive dat a files.
278 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SHELL Use t he local syst ems CSI SHELL t o execut e commands on
t he local syst em. This command is synonymous wit h t he OS
command.
Ther e are t wo for ms of t he command:
SHELL
SHELL command
In t he fir st for m, t he CSI SHELL is ent er ed. You can t hen ent er
any command, or ser ies of commands, t hat you want execut ed
on t he local syst em. When you ar e finished and want t o r et ur n
t o t he FTP environment , use t he special EXIT command.
FTP? shell
THEOS 32 Command SHELL
Type "EXIT" to terminate.
>logon data
>exit
FTP?
When t he second for m of t he command is used, a full-scr een
window is opened on your display and t he r equest ed command
is execut ed. When t he command is finished, t he window is
closed and cont r ol r et ur ns t o t he FTP client .
FTP? shell logon data
t he data account becomes the current account
FTP?
TYPE Display t he cur r ent file t r ansfer mode (ASCII or BINARY). This
command is synonymous wit h t he MODE command.
USER Changes t he user account t hat you ar e logged int o on t he
r emot e ser ver . Ther e ar e t hr ee for ms of t he command:
USER
USER name
USER name password
All t hr ee for ms per for m t he same oper at ion. Wit h t he fir st
for m of t he command, you ar e pr ompt ed for t he new user name
and passwor d. Wit h t he second for m, t he user name is supplied
and you ar e pr ompt ed for t he passwor d. Wit h t he t hir d for m,
you supply t he user name and t he passwor d. Not e t hat fir st
t wo for ms allow you t o ent er t he passwor d silent ly.
FTP 279
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To connect as an anonymous user, specify a user name of
anonymous. For mor e infor mat ion about user account s, r efer
t o User Account Specification on page 261.
FTP? user
User-name: myname
Password:
User MYNAME logged in.
VERBOSE Toggles t he verbose mode and displays t he new, cur r ent mode.
Wit h VERBOSE mode OFF, response codes r eceived fr om t he
ser ver and int er mediat e messages ar e suppr essed. Wit h
VERBOSE mode ON, t hese codes and int er mediat e messages
ar e displayed.
FTP? verbose
Verbose mode ON
FTP? pwd
257 "/e/download/os/" is current directory.
FTP? recv ftp.cmp
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection forftp.cmp(63632 bytes).
226 Transfer complete.
FTP? v
Verbose mode OFF
FTP? recv ftp.cmp
In addit ion, t he ver bose mode affect s t he display of t he DIR
command. When VERBOSE mode is OFF, and t he dir ect or y
infor mat ion sent by t he r emot e FTP server is in t he st andar d,
UNIX for mat , t he infor mat ion is r efor mat t ed befor e displaying
it . Specifically, t he file name is moved t o t he beginning of t he
line, access per mission codes ar e r emoved, and t he dat e and
t ime ar e changed t o dd mon year , followed by t he t ime in 12-
hour for m wit h an a or p indicat or .
Wit h VERBOSE mode ON, t he dir ect or y infor mat ion is dis-
played exact ly as r eceived fr om t he r emot e ser ver . For exam-
ple:
280 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FTP? v
Verbose mode OFF
FTP? dir
Config.cmp 336 26 Feb 2001 6:21p
FAX.C 13,080 30 Jan 2001 5:05p
FTP.CMP 63,632 16 Jul 2001 12:08p
FTP? v
Verbose mode ON
FTP? dir
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for /bin/ls.
-rwxrwxrwx 1 owner group 336 Feb 26 18:21 Config.cmp
-rwxrwxrwx 1 owner group 13080 Jan 30 17:05 FAX.C
-rwxrwxrwx 1 owner group 63632 Jul 16 12:08 FTP.CMP
226 Transfer complete.
VIEW Tr ansfer an ASCII t ext file fr om t he FTP ser ver comput er and
displays t he t r ansfer r ed file wit h Viewer. The file name t o
t r ansfer is specified wit h t he command:
VIEW filename
Viewer is used because of it s windowed display and scr olling
capabilit ies. Also, Viewer can display HTML cont ent .
FTP Script File Mode 5 of t he FTP Client command allows you t o specify an FTP scr ipt file.
This scr ipt file is used t o set up for an FTP session or t o perfor m a com-
plet e, unat t ended file t r ansfer. An FTP scr ipt file cont ains a list of FTP
Commands t o be execut ed. For inst ance:
open ftp.theos-software.com anonymous me@my-company.com
binary
lcd /downloads
cd theos/theos32
recv sp*.zip
quit
The above FTP scr ipt file would connect t o t he THEOS Soft war e FTP sit e
and download t he lat est ser vice pack for t he oper at ing syst em. It is
r eceived int o t he local downloads dir ect or y. Aft er t he file is r eceived, t he
connect ion is t er minat ed and t he FTP Client is exit ed.
FTP 281
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>ftp example.ftp (file
open ftp.theos-software.com anonymous me@my-company.com
Connecting to ftp.theos-software.com (207.21.75.100)
------------------------------------------------------
Welcome to THEOS Software Corporation FTP site.
------------------------------------------------------
binary
Using Binary mode to transfer files.
lcd /downloads
Local directory: /DOWNLOADS:S
cd theos/theos32
CWD command successful.
recv sp*.zip
Receiving SP40210.ZIP (1 of 1)
quit
Goodbye
Of cour se, t he above simple example could be handled easier wit h a Mode 3
command:
>cd /downloads
>ftp ftp.theos-software.com anonymous me@my-company.com (receive
theos/theos32/sp*zip
However , t he FTP scr ipt file capabilit y does not have t o be a single file
t ransfer . For inst ance, an FTP scr ipt t hat connect s t o your companys main
office and downloads t he curr ent dat abases could be wr it t en as:
open headquarters me my-password
binary
lcd /database
cd /master.files/database
get *.*
cd /private.files/database
get *.*
cd /
lcd /
view notices.txt
This scr ipt downloads all of t he files fr om t wo differ ent dir ect or ies. It
r eset s bot h t he local syst em and t he r emot e syst em back t o t he root dir ec-
t or y and t hen ret r ieves and displays t he cont ent s of t he NOTICES.TXT file.
Not ice t hat t her e is no QUIT command at t he end. When a scr ipt is not t er -
minat ed wit h a QUIT or a CLOSE command (or t heir synonyms), t he FTP
Client is not exit ed. Inst ead, aft er t he last command in t he scr ipt is exe-
cut ed, int er act ive mode is ent er ed. At t his point you can per for m ot her
oper at ions and exit when you desir e.
282 FTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
GetFile 283
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
GetFile Command
This command accesses a DOS-for mat t ed disk or par t it ion and copies files fr om it .
This commands funct ion has been r eplaced wit h t he DOSDiskA and DOS-
DiskC at t achment capabilit y. For infor mat ion about t his capabilit y r efer
t o t he Attaching DOSDiskA Floppy Disk Drives on page 32.
Operation Mode 1Accesses t he DOS disk in drive and displays t he dir ect or y of
files.
>getfile f ( dir
MSDOS Path: *.*:F
Filename Size Date Time
INSTALL.BAT 1 10/25/01 14:36
OEMSETUP.INF 1 10/25/01 14:51
README DIR 10/25/01 14:28
README.EXE 55 10/21/01 9:38
Unless a specific pat h is indicat ed, t he list ing is of t he r oot dir ect or y. For
inst ance, t o list t he files in t he README dir ect or y you would use:
>getfile readme/:f ( dir
MSDOS Path: /README/*.*:F
Filename Size Date Time
DECNET.TXT 4 10/25/01 14:15
...
Not e t hat t he pat h and file descript ion synt ax of t he DOS disk may use
THEOS convent ions or DOS file name synt ax. For inst ance, t he following
t wo commands per form ident ical r equest s:
1 GETFILE drive ( DIR
2 GETFILE DOS -file:drive file ( dos-opt ions opt ions
drive THEOS dr ive let t er of DOS disk
DOS -file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions EXEC QUERY
OWN=nn NOQUERY
dos-opt ions BINARY
HIDDEN
284 GetFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>getfile a: (dir
>getfile f (dir
Similar ly, t he following t wo commands ar e int er pr et ed ident ically:
>getfile /dos/:f (dir
>getfile a:\dos\ (dir
Mode 2Copies one or mor e files from t he DOS disk t o t he THEOS file.
>getfile netware/client.dos/net.cfg:f s (binary
"/NETWARE/CLIENT.DOS/NET.CFG:F" copied to "NET.CFG:S".
One file copied.
As indicat ed in t he above example, specifying a dr ive code only for file t ells
GetFile t o use t he DOS file name as t he dest inat ion name. Because t he
BINARY opt ion was not used, GetFile assumes t hat t he DOS file is a t ext file
and conver t s CR,LF pair s int o CR only. Also, t he file t r ansfer is t er mi-
nat ed when t he end-of-file mar k is det ect ed.
The DOS-file and dr ive may be specified wit h THEOS file name synt ax or
wit h DOS file name synt ax. For inst ance, t he following t wo commands
copy t he same file:
>getfile /dos/ansi.sys:f =.=:s (bin
"/DOS/ANSI.SYS:F" copied to "ANSI.SYS:S".
>getfile a:\dos\ansi.sys =.=:s (bin
"/DOS/ANSI.SYS:F" copied to "ANSI.SYS:S".
See not es about Wild-Card Specifications on page 286.
Options EXEC This opt ion t ells GetFile t o not t r ansfer t he files fr om t he DOS
disk. Inst ead, t he list of file names found on t he DOS disk are
out put as an EXEC language pr ogr am in t he file
SELECTED.EXEC. This file will cont ain only t he file descr ipt ion
infor mat ion wit h command line var iables added. For inst ance:
>getfile readme/*.txt:f (exec
>list selected.exec
&1 README/DECNET.TXT:F &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 README/IBMLAN.TXT:F &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 README/LANMAN.TXT:F &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
...
This file can t hen be edit ed or used as is. For inst ance:
GetFile 285
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>selected.exec getfile s (dos binary
>getfile README/DECNET.TXT:F s (dos binary
OWNER=nn Specifies t he account number t hat cur r ent ly owns t he file on
t he t r ansmit t ing THEOS syst em.
NOQUERY Tells GetFile t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e copying each
>getfile readme/*.txt:f s (noq
"/README/LANMAN.TXT:F" copied to "LANMAN.TXT:S".
"/README/VINES.TXT:F" copied to "VINES.TXT:S".
"/README/PCTCP.TXT:F" copied to "PCTCP.TXT:S".
"/README/IBMLAN.TXT:F" copied to "IBMLAN.TXT:S".
4 files copied.
QUERY Tells GetFile t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file
specificat ions is t o be copied. This is a default opt ion when wild
car ds ar e used.
>getfile readme/*.txt:f s
Ok to copy "/README/LANMAN.TXT:F" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o copy quest ion is asked, you may respond
means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e t hen copied
wit hout being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he copy
oper at ion.
DOS Options BINARY Tells GetFile t hat t he DOS file cont ains binar y infor mat ion and
t hat it should t r ansfer t he ent ir e file wit hout any t ranslat ion.
When t he BINARY opt ion is not used, GetFile assumes t hat t he
DOS file is a t ext file and conver t s CR,LF pair s int o CR only.
Also, t he file t r ansfer is t er minat ed when t he end-of-file mar k
is det ect ed. When in doubt as t o t he t ype of DOS file it is,
always use t he BINARY opt ion. The CRLF command can always
be used on t he file aft er it has been t r ansfer r ed successfully.
HIDDEN Includes DOS hidden files fr om t he DOS disk.
286 GetFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Wild-Card Specifications
Similar t o t he CopyFile command, t he dest inat ion file specificat ion may use
t he equal sign char act er ( = ) t o indicat e t hat t he dest inat ion file descr ip-
t ion uses t he cor responding element of t he sour ce file descr ipt ion. An equal
sign used as t he complet e t er m of t he file descr ipt ion (i.e., t he file-name,
file-t ype or member -name) means t hat t he cor r esponding complet e t er m
fr om t he sour ce file descr ipt ion is used. For inst ance:
>getfile *.txt:f =.text:s (noquery
"FILE1.TXT:F" copied to "FILE1.TEXT:S".
"FILE2.TXT:F" copied to "FILE2.TEXT:S".
...
The equal sign wild car d, combined wit h r egular char act er s, can have t wo
differ ent effect s depending upon whet her or not t he cor r esponding t er m in
t he sour ce file descr ipt ion used wild car ds. When t he sour ce file descr ip-
t ion uses a wild car d t hen t he equal sign is r eplaced wit h t he por t ion repr e-
sent ed by t he sour ce files wild card.
>getfile file*.dat:f abc=x.data:s (noquery
"FILE1.DAT:S" copied to "ABC1X.DATA:S".
"FILE3.DAT:S" copied to "ABC3X.DATA:S".
...
When t he sour ce file descr ipt ion does not use a wild car d for t he cor r e-
sponding t er m, t he equal sign is r eplaced wit h t he complet e source file
t er m.
>getfile *.dat:f =.new=:s (noquery
"FILE1.DAT:S" copied to "FILE1.NEWDAT:S".
...
DOS Partitions
and Disks
The disk dr ive specified by drive may be an at t ached r emovable disk such
as a floppy or r emovable hard disk, or it may be a par t it ion on an at t ached
hard disk dr ive. This disk or par t it ion may be a DOS-for mat t ed part it ion
(16-bit FAT) or a Windows 95 disk or par t it ion (32-bit FAT).
When it is a par t it ion of an at t ached THEOS drive, t he DOS par t it ion is
r efer enced by specifying t he at t ached THEOS dr ive code, for inst ance S or
C: for drive if t he DOS par t it ion is a par t it ion of t he same physical dr ive
t hat is at t ached as t he S dr ive in THEOS.
>getfile s (dir
>getfile /windows/*.*:s
>getfile /dos/ansi.sys:s =.=:s (bin
"/DOS/ANSI.SYS:S" copied to "ANSI.SYS:S".
GetFile 287
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Windows NT disks and par t it ions cannot be accessed wit h t his command.
Return Codes When no files ar e t r ansfer r ed, t he r et ur n code is set t o one, indicat ing fail-
ure.
See also CopyFile, CRLF, PutFile, Receive, THEO+COM
288 GetFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Head 289
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Head Command Filter
The Head command displays t he beginning of a t ext file on t he st andar d out put device.
Operation Mode 1The fir st 10 lines fr om t he st andar d input device ar e out put t o
t he st andar d out put device. This for m of t he Head command would nor -
mally be used in a pipe command line:
>calendar 2001 | head
January 2001 February 2001 March 2001
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

April 2001 May 2001 June 2001
>
Mode 2The fir st lines of file ar e out put t o t he st andard out put device.
When more t han one file is specified t hen t he fir st lines of each of t he files
ar e out put .
>head /theos/help/english/_command.hlp (4
ACCOUNT Maintain the user account names file.
ARCHIVE Back up hard disks onto floppies or tapes.
ATTACH Logically connect a device for future access.
BACKUP Copy full disk to disk or tape.
Options nnn Specifies t he number of lines of each file t o out put . This specifi-
cat ion must be in t he r ange 1999. The default value is 10.
Notes When t he st andar d out put device is t he console and mult iple files ar e spec-
ified, t he screen is clear ed bet ween each file display. When mult iple files
ar e specified, t he out put for each file has a heading added t hat ident ifies
t he file.
1 HEAD ( opt ion
2 HEAD file... ( opt ion
opt ion nnn
290 Head
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The nnn opt ion may use t he DOS/UNIX st yle which is a leading minus
sign and t he opt ion is specified before t he file specificat ions. The following
t wo commands pr oduce t he same r esult s:
>head /theos/help/english/_command.hlp (4
>head -4 /theos/help/english/_command.hlp
If file is a t ypeless file descr ipt ion, t her e is no default libr ary defined and
appended t o file t o form a complet e file descr ipt ion wit h file name and file
t ype. To Head a t ypeless file you should specify t he file descr ipt ion wit h a
Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for mor e infor mat ion.
Defaults The default number of lines displayed is 10.
See also List, More, Tail
Help 291
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Help Command
The Help command displays a summar y of all THEOS commands or a det ailed descr ipt ion
about a specific command.
The Help command uses t he files in t he dir ect or y /THEOS/HELP/language:S as t he sour ce of t he
help t ext displayed. If t his dir ect or y has been r emoved for any r eason, t he Help command
cannot oper at e.
Operation Mode 1Displays t he file /THEOS/HELP/language/_COMMAND.HLP, which is a
list of all commands on t he oper at ing syst em wit h a br ief, one-line descrip-
t ion.
To get mor e informat ion about a part icular command, select t he command
name wit h t he rever se-video highlight bar and t hen pr ess (Enter). The
highlight bar is moved wit h t he () and () ar r ow keys, or by ent ering a
let t er key t o jump t o t he next command st ar t ing wit h t hat let t er . As a
shor t cut , t he (Space) advances t o t he next line also.
1 HELP
2 (F1)
3 HELP program
4 program(F1)
5 HELP *
program command name or valid abbr eviat ion
292 Help
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
You may also use t he (Home) and (End) keys t o move t o t he beginning or end
of t he list . The (PageDown) and (PageUp) keys advance t o t he next or pr evious
display page.
Mode 2This is a shor t cut met hod of invoking t he Mode 1 Help display.
Mode 3Displays det ailed infor mat ion about t he funct ion and oper at ion
of t he command program. program may be any valid name, synonym name
or abbr eviat ion of a command. It may also be a non-command as long as
t her e is a file for it in t he /THEOS/HELP/language dir ect or y.
>help message
Mode 4This is a shor t cut met hod of invoking t he Mode 3 Help display for
program.
Mode 5Displays det ailed infor mat ion for all commands or files list ed in
t he /THEOS/HELP/language:S dir ect or y.
Help 293
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Besides t he st andar d command names, t he Help command can display
infor mat ion about any subject for which t her e is a file in t he /THEOS/HELP/
language:S direct or y. Pr ovided wit h t he oper at ing syst em ar e files pr ovid-
ing infor mat ion about :
Subject Description
_B3221 Int er nal help for Mult iUser BASIC language.
*
_LEDIT Int er nal help for LineEdit command.
*
_MORE Int er nal help for More command.
*
_PATCH Int er nal help for Patch command.
*
COMPOSE Help for composing char act er s on PC-Ter m keyboar ds.
CSI Help for ent ering commands.
EXEC Help for t he EXEC language.
VDI Help for using t he Vir t ual Device Int er face.
* This infor mat ion is nor mally displayed from wit hin t he indicat ed
pr ogr am. It can be displayed at any t ime wit h t he Help command.
294 Help
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ident 295
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ident Command
This command displays t he cur r ent account number on t he st andar d out put device.
Operation The account number of t he cur rent account is out put t o t he st andard
out put device (nor mally t he console).
>ident
5
See also Show WHO, WhoAmI
IDENT
296 Ident
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Img 297
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Img Command
The Img command displays gr aphic image files on t he graphics console.
Operation If file is t he name of a single image file (no wild car ds) t hen t he image is
displayed on t he scr een and Img exit s leaving t he image displayed. If file is
omit t ed or is specified wit h wild car ds, a menu of t he mat ching files is dis-
played and you can select t he desired file. Omit t ing file is t he same as
using a file specificat ion of *.*.
Options CENTER Display t he image posit ioned at t he cent er of t he session win-
dow. This opt ion is only effect ive when a single file is specified.
CYCLE Synonym t o t he SLIDESHOW opt ion.
FRAME Display t he image wit h a fr ame ar ound it .
KEEP When exit ing t he Img command t he displayed image remains
on t he scr een. This is t he default act ion when a single file is
specified.
IMG file ( options
opt ions CENTER FRAME MAXIMIZE SLIDESHOW
CYCLE KEEP NOFRAME WAIT
298 Img
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MAXIMIZE Display t he image in a window t hat shows t he ent ir e image, or
a window as lar ge as t he cur r ent session window.
NOFRAME Display t he image wit hout a fr ame ar ound it . This is a default
opt ion.
SLIDESHOW This opt ion is effect ive only when file is omit t ed or uses wild-
cards. It causes Img t o not display a menu of file names but
inst ead t o aut omat ically display t he mat ching image files. This
opt ion t urns on t he CENTER, MAXIMIZE and NOFRAME opt ions.
If t he WAIT nn opt ion is used wit h a non-zer o nn value, t he slide
show is aut omat ic wit h each image displayed nn seconds aft er
t he last image. You can pause and manually advance t he slide
show wit h t he following keys:
WAIT nn When displaying a SLIDESHOW, wait nn seconds befor e aut o-
mat ically displaying t he next image. When nn is not specified
(meaning t hat manual pr ogr ession only is t o be used), t he last
displayed image is not closed unt il t he oper at or pr esses (Esc) or
(Enter).
Defaults For single files, NOFRAME and KEEP ar e t he default opt ions. For mult iple
files (wild car ds), t her e ar e no default opt ions.
Restrictions The for mat of t he file must be BMP, GIV, PCX or J PG. The console must be
graphics-capable and in gr aphics mode. Refer t o Setup VGA for informat ion
about configur ing t he main console display. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S yst em Installation and S etup Guide.)
See also FileManager, Viewer
Key Action
(Enter)
(PageDown)
Advance t o next image.
(PageUp) Backup t o pr ior image.
(Home) Display fir st image.
(End) Display last image.
(Space) Pause or resume slide show.
(Esc) Ter minat e slide show.
Install 299
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Install Command
The Install command inst alls soft war e fr om a r emovable disk or disc dr ive.
Operation This Install command at t empt s t o execut e t he Inst all Exec program t hat it
finds on eit her t he floppy disk dr ive or t he CD-ROM dr ive. The Inst all pr o-
gr am t hat it sear ches for can be named INSTALL.EXC or INSTALL.EXEC. When
drive is specified, only t hat dr ive is sear ched.
When drive is not specified t he Install command seaches t he r emovable
media dr ives in t he following order : floppies in at t ached dr ive-let t er
sequence, image dr ives in at t ached dr ive-let t er sequence and t hen all
ot her removable media dr ives in at t ached dr ive-let t er sequence (zip, CD-
ROM, et c.).
When an Install pr ogr am is found t he search is t er minat ed and t hat Install
pr ogr am is execut ed.
See also UnInstall
INSTALL drive
drive opt ional disk dr ive let t er
300 Install
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
IXDiag 301
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
IXDiag Command
This command checks t he int egr it y of indexed files.
Operation The file is examined for indexed file st r uct ure int egr it y. Many, non-ser ious
er r or s may be det ect ed and r epor t ed along wit h ser ious, dat a-loss er r or s.
The file is r epair ed only if specifically dir ect ed t o wit h t he REPAIR or SAVE
opt ions. Ot her wise, only war ning messages ar e displayed when er r or s ar e
det ect ed.
Options APPEND Used wit h opt ion EXEC t o indicat e t hat pr oblem file names are
appended t o t he end of any exist ing IXERR.EXEC file.
>list ixerr.exec
&1 /PRIVATE/ADDR.BOOK:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
>ixdiag *.* (exec
>list ixerr.exec
&1 /JONAS/DATA.BASE:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
Used wit h opt ion LOGFILE t o indicat e t hat t he er r or messages
ar e appended t o any exist ing logfile.
DATA BASIC Recor ds in t he file ar e for mat t ed BASIC language records.
DATA BINARY Recor ds in t he file may be in any for mat and ar e not
checked for consist ency.
DETAILS Displays infor mat ion about which files are being examined
and, if an er r or is det ect ed, a br ief descr ipt ion of t he er ror .
When used wit h t he WAIT opt ion, aft er an er r or descr ipt ion is
displayed t he pr ogr am pauses and you may r equest mor e infor -
mat ion about t he er r or condit ion.
1 IXDIAG file... ( options
file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may include wildcar ds
opt ions APPEND EXEC NOWAIT SUBDIR
DATA BASIC FILES RECLEN TYPE
DATA BINARY KEYLEN REPAIR VERIFY DATA
DETAILS LOGFILE REPLACE VOLUME
EXCEPTIONS NOTYPE SAVE WAIT
302 IXDiag
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Compar e t he following t hr ee examples t o see t he effect of t his
opt ion:
>ixdiag *.*
/DATA/CHECK.DETAIL:S needs minor repairs
/DATA/EXPENSE.JOURNAL:S could be optimized
>ixdiag *.* (detail
Examining indexed file /DATA/CHECK.DETAIL:S
Bad blocks on freelist - File should be rebuilt
Examining indexed file /DATA/CHECK.MASTER:S
Examining indexed file /DATA/EXPENSE.JOURNAL:S
Indexed file has 62.9% wasted space which could be recovered if rebuilt
...
>ixdiag *.* (details wait
Examining indexed file /DATA/CHECK.DETAIL:S
?(F1)
Examining indexed file /DATA/CHECK.MASTER:S
Examining indexed file /DATA/EXPENSE.JOURNAL:S
Indexed file has 62.9% wasted space which could be recovered if rebuilt
?(F1)
...
Not e: DETAILS, NOTYPE and TYPE ar e mut ually exclusive
opt ions. Only t he last one specified will have any effect .
EXCEPTIONS An exception-file file name is specified following t he opt ion
keywor d. Can only be used when SAVE opt ion is used and t ells
IXDiag t o save any suspect and bad r ecor ds t o t his except ion-
file.
EXEC The names of all files t hat have pr oblems or er r or s ar e wr it t en
t o t he file IXERR.EXEC. If APPEND opt ion is not specified, any
exist ing IXERR.EXEC file is fir st er ased.
>ixdiag *.* (exec
>list ixerr.exec
FILES Indicat es t hat file is an ASCII st ream file wit h each r ecor d in
t he file specifying a single file name. The file name specifica-
t ions in t his file may include t he pat h and wild car ds.
Indexed file has serious problems with its freelist, which
could cause problems if you tried to write new records. You
may be able to read from this file but corruption is likely
THEOS may have been rebooted while this file was being
updated and some space has been lost for that or similar
reasons. This is basically harmless other than being a
waste of disk space and this space can be recovered by
recopying the file by record or by using the SAVE option.
IXDiag 303
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC files cr eat ed by FileList
and t he FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by Look can be used for t his specifi-
cat ion file (see The EXEC and FILES Options on page 239). You
may also cr eat e t he file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be exam-
ined:
A SELECTED.EXEC file now exist s t hat list s all of t he dat a files
and all files t hat have been changed since 10/01/2001. The fol-
lowing command checks t hese files:
>ixdiag selected.exec (file
KEYLEN The new key-length is specified following t he opt ion keywor d.
This opt ion t ells IXDiag t hat , when it r ebuilds t he file it should
use t he new key-length specified, not t he key-lengt h of t he
exist ing file.
This opt ion is only used when REPAIR or SAVE is used.
LOGFILE A logfile is specified following t he opt ion keywor d. Indicat es
t hat er r or messages ar e t o be wr it t en t o logfile. May be used
wit h opt ion APPEND t o cause t he messages t o be added t o any
exist ing messages in t he file.
NOTYPE Tells IXDiag t o not display messages about what files it is
checking.
>ixdiag *.* f (notype
/DATA/MASTER.CONTROL:S needs minor repairs
/DATA/PAYABLES.MASTER:S needs minor repairs
To disable t his opt ion use t he TYPE or DETAILS opt ion.
NOWAIT Used wit h DETAILS opt ion t o indicat e t hat you want IXDiag t o
wait each t ime t hat it det ect s and r eport s an er r or in a file.
This opt ion has no effect when DETAILS is not specified.
RECLEN The new record-lengt h is specified following t he opt ion key-
wor d. This opt ion t ells IXDiag t hat , when it r ebuilds t he file it
should use t he new record-length specified, not t he r ecor d-
lengt h of t he exist ing file.
304 IXDiag
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This opt ion is only used when REPAIR or SAVE is used.
REPAIR Tells IXDiag t hat , if file cont ains er r or s, it should r ebuild it
wit h t he cor r ect ed ver sion.
Not e: This is pot ent ially danger ous oper at ion. The file should
be backed up fir st or copied t o anot her locat ion.
>ixdiag telephon.numbers (repair details
Examining indexed file /TELEPHONE.NUMBERS:S
Recovering /TELEPHON.NUMBERS:S on 23 Nov 2001 03:42PM :
205 records copied, 0 records skipped (205 total records).
REPLACE Used wit h t he SAVE and EXCEPTIONS opt ion t o t ell IXDiag t o
r eplace any exist ing savefile or exception-file wit h t he new
dat a. When REPLACE is not used wit h SAVE and EXCEPTIONS,
t he r ecor ds ar e added t o any exist ing savefile or exception-file.
SAVE A new savefile dest inat ion file name is specified following t he
opt ion keywor d. Tells IXDiag t hat it should r ebuild t he file and
wr it e t he r ecover ed r ecor ds t o a new file named savefile. Can
be used wit h EXCEPTIONS t o save t he suspect or bad r ecor ds
int o a new file.
>ixdiag suspect.file (save suspect.new except suspect.errors
Recovering SUSPECT.FILE on 23 Nov 2001 02:10PM :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17297 records copied, 0 records skipped (17297 total records).
SUBDIR Tells IXDiag t o check all subdir ect or ies st art ing wit h t he dir ec-
t or y for file.
>ixdiag s (subdir details
Examining indexed file /CGI/DATA/CUSTOMER.MASTER:S
Examining indexed file /CGI/DATA/ORDERS.DETAIL:S
Examining indexed file /CGI/DATA/ORDERS.MASTER:S
Examining indexed file /FAX/FAX.LOG:S
Indexed file in use -- diagnostic check skipped
Examining indexed file /SAMPLES/SAMPLE.DATA.CUSTOMER:S
Examining indexed file /SYSTEM.CALANDAR:S
...
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells IXDiag t o display summar y infor ma-
t ion only for files wit h er ror s.
>ixdiag *.*
/DATA/MASTER.CONTROL:S needs minor repairs
/DATA/PAYABLES.MASTER:S needs minor repairs
IXDiag 305
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
VERIFY DATA Tells IXDiag t o include in it s t est s a check t o confirm t hat t he
fields in each r ecor d of t he file ar e BASIC for mat t ed fields.
VOLUME Tells IXDiag t o look for file in all account s on t hat dr ive. file
must be a dr ive specifier only:
>ixdiag s (volume
PACKAGE\SYSPECT.FILE:S has serious problems
SYSTEM\TELEPHON.NUMBERS needs minor repairs
When t his opt ion is used in combinat ion wit h t he SUBDIR
opt ion, all indexed files in all dir ect or ies on all account s ar e
checked for int egrit y.
WAIT Used wit h t he DETAILS opt ion t o cause IXDiag t o wait each t ime
t hat it r epor t s an err or in a file. In t his mode you may r equest
addit ional explanat ion of t he er r or message by using t he (F1)
key.
Defaults The following opt ions ar e in effect by default : DATA BASIC, NOWAIT and
TYPE.
Notes To check all of t he files on all of t he account s on all subdir ect or ies on a
disk, log ont o t he SYSTEM account and use t he command:
>ixdiag s (volume subdir
Cautions A file should not be r epaired wit h t he REPAIR opt ion unless it is backed up
fir st . The dat a may be lost if t her e is any pr oblems encount er ed dur ing t he
r epair oper at ion.
Restrictions Only indexed files ar e checked wit h t his command. Keyed, dir ect and
st r eam files ar e excluded.
The file must not be open by any ot her user . The file is locked by IXDiag
when it checks it .
306 IXDiag
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Keyboard 307
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Keyboard Command
The Keyboard command r eplaces t he cur r ent keyboar d dr iver wit h a differ ent or modified
dr iver .
Operation The keyboar d driver file named /THEOS/DRIVER/name.BIN:S is assigned t o PC
t er m t er minals using class code 9x, 18x, 19x and 21x wher e x is number.
Notes It is not necessar y t o use t his command unless you have made a change t o
one of t he keyboar d dr iver s.
The language code number s and keyboar d driver names are:
Restrictions The keyboard dr iver name must be a simple name wit hout a pat h, file-t ype
or file-dr ive. The dr iver must r eside in t he /THEOS/DRIVER:S dir ect or y wit h a
file-t ype of BIN.
KEYBOARD number name
number Language code number (19)
name Simple file name for new keyboar d dr iver pr ogr am
Code Language Name Language
1 English (UK) KEYBBE Belgium
2 Fr ench KEYBCF Canadian Fr ench
3 German KEYBDK Denmark
4 It alian KEYBFR Fr ench
5 Spanish KEYBGR Ger man
6 Swiss KEYBIT It alian
7 Spanish (Lat in Amer ican) KEYBLA Spanish (Lat in Amer ican)
8 Fr ench (Canadian) KEYBSF Swiss (Fr ench)
9 Belgium KEYBSG Swiss (Ger man)
KEYBSP Spanish
KEYBUK English (UK)
KEYBUS English (Unit ed St at es)
308 Keyboard
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Keyword 309
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Keyword Command
The Keyword command displays or maint ains t he SYSTEM.THEOS32.KEYWORD file.
Operation Mode 1Display keywor d nnn fr om t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/KEY-
WORD.BIN:S file.
Mode 2Displays all of t he keywor ds defined in t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/
language/KEYWORD.BIN:S file. When t he display is t o t he console or print er ,
it is out put in mult iple columns.
>keyword * (nosort
Code Keyword Code Keyword Code Keyword Code Keyword
0 Yes 26 TRANs 52 NOSORT 78 HIStory
1 No 27 SPECs 53 NOMain 79 ABbrev
2 Type 28 TRuncate 54 ATTach 80 RDYmsg
3 NOTtype 29 NEWFile 55 TOUch 81 MSG
...
The keywor ds ar e shown in mixed case. The upper case let t er s in each key-
wor d indicat e t he minimum spelling or abbreviat ion allowed.
When t he out put is r edir ect ed t o a disk file, it is out put in a single column
wit h no headings.
Mode 3This is t he keywor d maint enance mode. When t his mode is
ent er ed, you are pr ompt ed t o ent er t he keywor d number :
>keyword
Enter keyword id:
At t his pr ompt ent er eit her t he number of t he keyword you want t o view or
change, or pr ess (Enter), (Esc) or (F9) wit hout a number t o exit .
1 KEYWORD nnn ( option
2 KEYWORD * ( option
3 KEYWORD
opt ion NOSORT
PRTnn
SORT
TYPE
310 Keyword
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When a number is ent er ed, t he cur r ent definit ion is displayed and you are
asked for t he new definit ion:
>keyword
Enter keyword id: 3
Old text: NOType
New text:
To leave t he keyword unchanged, pr ess (Enter) wit hout any char act er s or
spaces.
To change or define a keyword ent er t he new t ext . Keywor ds may be a
maximum of eight char act er s in lengt h.
You specify t he minimum spelling or abbr eviat ion for a keywor d wit h
upper case let t er s. Car e should be t aken when specifying t he minimum
spelling for a keywor d. Make sur e t hat t he abbr eviat ion does not conflict
wit h any ot her keywor ds abbr eviat ion t hat might be used in t he same con-
t ext .
When t he new t ext for t he keywor d is ent ered, pr ess (Enter) and you ar e
pr ompt ed for anot her keywor d t o change.
Options NOSORT Tells Keyword t o out put t he list of keywords in keywor d num-
ber order , not in alphabet ically sor t ed or der .
PRTnn Indicat es t hat Keyword is t o pr int t he keywor ds on t he at t ached
print er number nn.
SORT A default opt ion t hat causes t he keywor ds t o be out put in
alphabet ical or der .
>keyword * > sorted.keywords
>list sorted.keywords
79 ABbrev
192 ABORT
109 ACCount
253 ADD
179 Alf
193 ALign
TYPE A default opt ion t hat causes Keyword t o display t he keywor ds
on t he console.
Keyword 311
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Defaults TYPE and SORT ar e default opt ions when using Mode 2.
Cautions This keyword file is used by all of t he THEOS commands. Changing a key-
wor d may affect many commands.
Restrictions You must be logged ont o t he SYSTEM account and you must have a pr ivilege
level of five.
Keywor ds may be a maximum of eight char act er s in lengt h.
See also List, Message
312 Keyword
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Killfile 313
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Killfile Command
This command er ases one or mor e files fr om disk.
Alt hough similar t o t he Erase command t he Killfile command is quit e differ -
ent and pot ent ially ver y danger ous. Killfile er ases a files dir ect or y ent r y
wit hout deallocat ing t he files disk space. You should only use t his com-
mand in single-user mode and you should only kill a file if you know t hat
t her e ar e pr oblems wit h t he files allocat ion.
Operation Mode 1At t empt s t o er ase file and displays t he r esult of t he at t empt .
>killfile sample.data
"SAMPLE.DATA:S" erased.
One file erased, 3,840 bytes recovered.
Because Killfile oper at ion is danger ous, t he QUERY opt ion is t he default ,
even when t he file specificat ion is explicit . You ar e quer ied for per mission
t o erase each file unless t he NOQUERY opt ion is specified.
When file is a subdir ect or y name, t he Killfile command will kill t he direc-
t or y even if it cont ains files.
Mode 2file is an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per
line. Each file descr ipt ion in file is killed. As each file is killed it s file
descr ipt ion is displayed (unless t he NOTYPE opt ion is specified).
1 KILLFILE file ( options
2 KILLFILE file ( FILES opt ions
3 KILLFILE ( options
opt ions NOQUERY QUERY
NOTYPE TYPE
314 Killfile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This mode of t he Killfile command is convenient when one or mor e set s of
files ar e r epet it ively being killed.
>edit daily.kill
work.master:s
work.history:s
work.invoices:s
work.ledger.*:s
temp*.*:s
sort*.*:s
/programs/program.backlib.*:s
>killfile daily.kill (file noquery notype
Mode 3Invokes t he int er act ive mode of t he Killfile command. Because no
files ar e specified on t he command line, you ar e pr ompt ed t o ent er t he file
descr ipt ions t o er ase.
>killfile
?/SAMPLE.DATA
"/SAMPLE.DATA:S" erased.
?*.zip
...
As illust r at ed, t his int er act ive mode allows any file specificat ion t o be
ent ered, including wild car ds.
To t er minat e t his mode, ent er a blank line.
Killfile 315
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOQUERY Tells Killfile t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e killing each file.
>killfile gl.* (noquery
"GL.MASTER:S" erased.
"GL.JOURNAL:S" erased.
"GL.HISTORY:S" erased.
NOTYPE Tells Killfile t o not display t he r esult s of each file killed on t he
st andar d out put device.
QUERY Tells Killfile t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file speci-
ficat ions is t o be killed. This is a default opt ion when wild
car ds ar e used. To disable t his opt ion use t he NOQUERY
opt ion.
>killfile *.backup
Select ing Yes t o All means yes t o t his file and all r emaining
files ar e killed wit hout being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc)or (C)
t o cancel t he kill oper at ion.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells Killfile t o display t he r esult s of each
file killed on t he st andar d out put device. This display can be
r edir ect ed.
>killfile *.*:s (noquery
"/DEVELOPE.EXEC:S" erased.
"/GRAPH.SAVE1:S" erased.
"/GRAPH.DATA:S" erased.
316 Killfile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Aft er per for ming a Killfile oper at ion you should always per for m a Disk FIX
oper at ion t o cor r ect any misallocat ions t hat may be been cr eat ed wit h t he
Killfile oper at ion.
Because of it s unr est rict ed capabilit ies, Killfile should only be used in
single-user or maint enance mode.
Defaults QUERY and TYPE ar e default opt ions.
Restrictions Because t he pur pose of t his command is t o er ase or kill a file t hat may
have allocat ion pr oblems, t her e ar e no rest r ict ions on what files may be
killed. It does not mat t er if t he file r equest ed is erase-pr ot ect ed, in use by
anot her user , a dir ect or y or libr ar y wit h exist ing member files, owned by
anot her account , it can be killed wit h t his command.
This command does r equir e a pr ivilege level of 6 t o oper at e.
See also Erase, FileManager, Rename, RmDir
Line 317
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Line Command Filter
This command copies one line of t ext fr om t he st andar d input device t o t he st andar d out put
device.
Operation The next line of t ext fr om t he st andar d input device is copied t o t he st an-
dar d out put device.
In t he following commands a descr ipt ive line is wr it t en t o a file, followed
by a FileList t hat appends it s out put t o t he same file.
>line > filelist.output
The following is a listing of all backup files.
>filelist *.backlib*.* *.backup >> filelist.output
In t his example t he fir st line of t he KEYWORD.HEADER is copied t o a file, fol-
lowed by ot her infor mat ion appended t o t hat file.
>line < keyword.header > keywords.list
>keywords * >> keywords.list
Notes This command is nor mally used t o writ e a heading or descr ipt ive line of
t ext t o a file befor e wr it ing ot her t ext t o t he file.
A line of t ext is always t erminat ed wit h a CR (file) or a CR,LF (console).
When t he st andar d input device is t he console, t he input is t er minat ed by
pr essing (Enter).
Defaults The st andar d input and out put devices ar e nor mally t he console keyboar d
and display.
See also CopyFile, Echo, Head, Tail, Tee
LINE
318 Line
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LineEdit 319
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LineEdit Command
The LineEdit command is a ut ilit y pr ogr am t hat , unlike WinWrite, edit s ASCII t ext files using
line-edit mode rat her t han a full-screen edit or .
Operation This command edit s an exist ing t ext file or cr eat es a new t ext file. When
t he command is fir st ent er ed, a message displays indicat ing whet her t he
t ext file is new or an exist ing file:
>lineedit sample.text
New file "SAMPLE.TEXT".
Edit:
*
or
>ledit system.theos32.devnames
Old file: "SYSTEM.THEOS32.DEVNAMES:S".
Edit:
*
The edit pr ompt char act er is t he ast er isk ( * ) and, when displayed at t he
beginning of a line, it indicat es t hat LineEdit is wait ing for an edit ing com-
mand.
Ther e is an int er nal help display available in LineEdit t hat can be invoked
by pr essing (F1). This help display summar izes all of t he commands avail-
able while using t he LineEdit command.
LINEEDIT file ( opt ion
file file name wit h opt ional pat h; wild car ds not allowed
opt ion BACKUP
NOBACKUP
Command synonym: LEDIT
320 LineEdit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cmd Operands Meaning
? Query last command
; Comment
Again Reexecute last "string" command
Bottom Go to bottom of file
CAse [U|L|M] Set case mode Upper, Lower (inverted), Mixed
Change [/frstr/tostr[/ [#lines
[#occur [#start]]]]]
Global change
COlumn Display column ruler
COMbine Append next line to current line
CSI command Execute THEOS command, then return to LINEEDIT
DElete [#lines|/str/] Delete lines
Down [#lines] Go down
DUp [#lines] Duplicate current line
FILe [filename] Save the file, then exit
Find [text] Anchored locate
Get [filename][frct|/ frstr/
[toct|tostr/]]
Merge from another file
Help Ask for help
Input [text] Insert a line or Insert mode
LEngth Ask for size of file
LIst #lines Display lines
Locate [/str[/]] Locate string or Locate again
Modify [#lines] Modify lines
NAme [filename] Change file name
Next [#lines] Go down or locate
Page Display full page and go down
Ut [filename] [/tostr/|ct] Write lines to another file
PUTD [filename] [/tostr/|ct] Write line and delete
Quit [retcode|command] Exit and execute THEOS command
Replace [text] Replace lines
Save [filename] Save file
SPlit [?|/str/] Split current line into two lines
TAbset [list of col numbers] Set tab stops
TOp Go to top of file
Type [#lines] Display lines
Up [#lines|/str/] Go up
VErify [on|off] Verify (display) status
X,Y,Z [#lines|statement|
"filename" [line#]]
Macro
Table 6: LINEEDIT Command Summary
LineEdit 321
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options BACKUP A default opt ion t hat t ells LineEdit t o make a backup copy of t he
pr ior ver sion of t he t ext file.
When t he file is saved wit h eit her t he SAVE or t he FILE edit
commands, LineEdit checks t o see if t her e is a file on disk wit h
t he same name as t he file it is about t o wr it e t o disk. If it does
exist , LineEdit r enames t hat exist ing file t o be a backup file.
The r ules used for det er mining t he name of t his backup file
ar e:
1. Is t he exist ing file a member of a libr ar y and does a librar y
exist wit h t he same file-name but wit h a file-t ype of
BACKLIB? If so, r ename t he file int o t he BACKLIB libr ar y,
r eplacing any exist ing file wit h t he same member -name in
t hat BACKLIB libr ar y.
2. Is t her e a libr ar y wit h a file-name equal t o t he cur r ent
account name and a file-t ype of BACKLIB? If so, r ename t he
file int o t hat libr ar y, r eplacing any exist ing file wit h t he
same member -name.
3. If t here is no BACKLIB libr ar y t hat might apply, t hen
r ename t he exist ing file t o have a file-t ype of BACKUP,
r eplacing any pr ior version of t he backup file name.
Not e: Unlike WinWrite which can maint ain up t o nine levels
of backups, only one level of backup is maint ained for t he
file wit h LineEdit.
NOBACKUP Tells LineEdit t hat , when an exist ing file is saved t o disk, t he
pr ior ver sion of any file wit h t he same name is t o be over -wr it -
t en wit hout r enaming it t o be a backup of t he or iginal.
File: TEXT.FILE LIBNAME.LIBTYPE.TEXT
1st choice: account .BACKLIB.TEXT LIBNAME.BACKLIB.TEXT
2nd choice: TEXT.BACKUP account.BACKLIB.TEXT
3r d choice: TEXT.BACKUP
Table 7: LINEEDIT Backups
322 LineEdit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes The LineEdit command is pr ovided as a ut ilit y t hat can be used by EXEC
language pr ogr ams and applicat ion pr ogr ams t hat need t o edit a t ext file
wit hout oper at or assist ance. WindoWr it er, alt hough a far mor e power ful
pr ogr am, is a full-scr een edit or and, as such, r equir es all of it s commands
t o be ent er ed fr om t he keyboar d. LineEdit, being a line-or ient ed edit or , can
r eceive all of it s commands fr om a t ext file or an EXEC pr ogr ams &stack
dat a.
>list updsyn.exec
; EXEC to update standard synonym with application name
;
&begstack
find DATE
up 1
input CUSTOMER 2
file
&end
lineedit system.theos32.synonym
>updsyn
Old file "SYSTEM.THEOS32.SYNONYM:S".
Edit:
*f DATE
DATE 4
*u 1
CRT 3
*i CUSTOMER 2
*file
"SYSTEM.THEOS32.SYNONYM:S" filed.
Defaults BACKUP is t he default opt ion.
Restrictions Only st r eam files cont aining ASCII t ext may be edit ed wit h t his command.
Use Patch for making changes in ot her file or ganizat ions or cont ent s.
See also Patch, WinWrite
For a complet e discussion of t he oper at ion of LineEdit and t he commands
available for edit ing t ext files, refer t o Appendix B: LineEdit Text File
Edit or , on page 161.
List 323
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
List Command
List displays t he cont ent s of any dat a or pr ogr am file on t he st andar d out put device.
Operation Mode 1The file or files specified ar e displayed on t he st andar d out put
device (console).
Mode 2This mode can be used when st andar d input has been r edir ect ed
(as in a pipe) or when you want t o supply t he list of files fr om t he keyboar d
(be sure t o use opt ion FILES).
>filelist system.help32.l* system.help32.s* | list (file
When t he list of files comes fr om t he console keyboar d t he - must be spec-
ified on t he command line. Ter minat e t he list wit h (Ctrl)+(Q).
>list - (file
?system.help32.l*
?system.help32.s*
?(Ctrl)+(D)
The above t wo commands display all of t he help files st ar t ing wit h L or
S.
1 LIST file... ( option
2 LIST - ( option
opt ion BINARY HEAD OLDDATE TRUNC nnn
COMnn HEX PAGE nnn fromline
FILES INDENT nn PRTnn toline
FORMAT NOHEAD TITLE t tt
FROM kkk NUMBERED TO kkk
324 List
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options BINARY Displays t he file in hexadecimal. See Binar y & Hex Displays
on page 329.
COMnn The display is sent t o t he at t ached COMnn device inst ead of t he
st andard out put device.
ined:
lowing command list s t hese files:
>list selected.exec (file
The FileManager command can also creat e and add t o
SELECTED.EXEC, SELECTED.FILES and FOUND.EXEC files.
FORMAT The file cont ains fir st -char act er ANSI forms-cont r ol for mat -
t ing codes. List will use t hese codes inst ead of count ing lines
and displaying one r ecor d per line.
The ANSI for ms-cont r ol st andar d specifies t hat t he fir st char -
act er of each r ecord is t he page advancement cont r ol. This
char act er is never pr int ed. If t hese codes ar e not pr esent at t he
beginning of each line, t he first charact er of t he line t hat was
int ended t o be displayed is inst ead int er pr et ed as t he ANSI
for ms-cont r ol char act er and is not displayed.
List 325
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
These codes ar e:
FROM This opt ion can only be used when file is dir ect , indexed or
keyed. For dir ect files, kkk is a number t hat specifies t he fir st
r ecor d number displayed. For indexed and keyed files, kkk is
t he key of t he fir st r ecor d displayed. Only r ecor ds whose keys
ar e gr eat er t han or equal t o t his kkk will be included in t he dis-
play.
This opt ion can be used wit h or wit hout t he TO opt ion.
>list keyword.bin (from 20 nohead
020: 1QUERY
021: 2NOQUERY
022: 5PRIVATE
...
>list customer.master (from "Conc" trunc 47 noh
Concrete Consultants, Inc.: "1300 Southwest Eve
Continental Lumber Services: "101 West 43rd","P.
THEOS Software Corporation: "333 Oakland Blvd,
Walnut Creek Chamber of Commerce: "100 North Mai
HEADING A default opt ion t hat causes t he st andar d page heading t o dis-
play. This st andard page heading includes t he file name on t he
left size of t he page and t he dat e, t ime and page number on t he
r ight .
HEX Displays t he file in hexadecimal. See Binar y & Hex Displays
on page 329.
Code Meaning
1 Eject page.
+ Do not advanceover pr int t he pr evious line. This
can only be done if t he pr int er does not per for m an
aut omat ic line advance wit h each car riage r et ur n.
(Opt ion ALF not specified on pr int er at t achment .)
0 Advance t wo lines, skipping one blank line.
- Advance t hr ee lines, skipping t wo blank lines.
other All ot her charact ers ar e not pr int ed and cause one
line t o advance. By convent ion, t he space char act er
is used for t his purpose.
Table 8: ANSI For ms Cont r ol Codes
326 List
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
INDENT nn All lines out put are t o be indent ed nn columns.
NOHEAD Suppr esses t he st andar d page header.
NUMBERED Causes a sequent ially assigned line number t o display at t he
beginning of each line.
>list /theos/help/english/list.hlp (numbered nohead
1 <html>
2 <head>
3 <title> THEOS Help for List Command </title>
4 <BODY>
5 <a name=TOP><center><h2><font color=#FF0000>
...
>list /theos/help/english/list.hlp (nohead
<html>
<head>
<title> THEOS Help for List Command </title>
<BODY>
<a name=TOP><center><h2><font color=#FF0000>
...
OLDDATE Causes t he dat e and t ime used in t he page heading t o be t he
files last change dat e and t ime. When t his opt ion is not used
t he cur r ent syst em dat e and t ime displays.
PAGE Indicat es t hat t he fir st page displayed is page number nnn.
Not e: When t he out put is t o t he console, t he br owse keys can
st ill be used t o display pages befor e page number nnn.
PRTnn Indicat es t hat List is t o pr int file on t he at t ached pr int er num-
ber nn.
PRINTER.
TITLE The wor d or quot ed t er m following t he keywor d TITLE is used
in t he heading line inst ead of t he files file name.
>list / (title "Device Names"
Device Names 23 Mar 2002 11:55am Page 1
GUTENB1 12:136:0 SPO C241,W8;Jupiter.cpw.lan - HP LJ 4 Plus
GUTENB2 21:136:1 SPO C241,W8;Jupiter.cpw.lan - HP DeskJet 690C
GUTENB3 22:136:2 SPO C241,W8;Jupiter.cpw.lan - Phaser 860DP
...
List 327
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TO This opt ion can only be used when file is dir ect , indexed or
keyed. For dir ect files, kkk is a number t hat specifies t he last
r ecor d number displayed. For indexed and keyed files, kkk is
t he key of t he last r ecor d displayed. Only r ecor ds whose keys
ar e less t han or equal t o t his kkk will be included in t he dis-
play.
This opt ion can be used wit h or wit hout t he FROM opt ion.
TRUNCATE Each line out put is t r uncat ed at column nnn. If used in com-
binat ion wit h t he INDENT nn opt ion, t he t r uncat ion is per -
for med aft er t he indent spaces ar e added.
When TRUNCATE is not used, lines ar e not t r uncat ed and t hose
lines t hat ar e longer t han t he at t ached lengt h of t he display
device (console or pr int er ) ar e wr apped t o t he next line.
fromline The fir st numer ic t oken is assumed t o be t he st art ing line or
r ecor d number . This can only be used on st r eam and dir ect
files. Use t he FROM opt ion for keyed and indexed files.
This opt ion indicat es t hat t he fir st line or r ecor d displayed is
fromline. When t he out put is t o t he console, t he br owse keys
can st ill be used t o display pages cont aining r ecor ds befor e
fromline.
t oline The second numer ic t oken is assumed t o be t he ending line or
r ecor d number . This can only be used if fromline is specified on
a st r eam or dir ect file. Use t he TO opt ion for keyed and indexed
files.
This opt ion indicat es t hat t he last line or r ecor d displayed is
toline. The br owse keys cannot be used t o display beyond t his
toline r ecor d.
328 List
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
List Displays Most files ar e displayed as t ext . For inst ance:
>list /theos/help/english/cat.hlp
/THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/CAT.HLP:S 23 Oct 2002 8:26am Page 1
<html>
<head>
<title> THEOS Help for Cat Command </title>
<BODY>
<a name="TOP"<center><h2><font color=#FF0000>Cat Command</font>
</h2></center>
<pre>
...
This t ype of display is used by default for all files except pr ogr ams, which
use t he binar y display for mat descr ibed next .
The heading line of all displays on t he console or pr int er (not t hose r edi-
r ect ed t o a file) shows t he file name on t he left and t he dat e, t ime and page
number on t he r ight . This heading line can be suppr essed wit h t he
NOHEAD opt ion, and t he dat e can be set t o t he files last change dat e wit h
t he OLDDATE opt ion. C language sour ce pr ogr ams can set t he left side of
t his heading line wit h t he #title dir ect ive.
For mult iple-page displays, t he st andar d page br owsing keys ar e r ecog-
nized. Refer t o Multiple-page Display Browsing on page 79 of t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence. In addit ion t o t hese st an-
dar d keys, you may also use (PageUp) and (PageDown) following a number such
as: (6),(PageDown). This means t o advance six pages r at her t han t he default of
one page.
List 329
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Binary & Hex
Displays
Pr ogr am files do not cont ain ASCII t ext dat a and are always displayed
using t he BINARY display for mat .
>list sample.command
SAMPLE.COMMAND 23 Oct 2002 8:26am Page 1
000000: 8603DEC0 4E060000 6C010000 00080000 '..N...l.......'
000010: 940e0000 01000800 00006000 00000100 '..........`.....'
000020: 00000000 b00ac15f 35623e56 061b8161 '....._5b>V...a'
...
In t his display each line cont ains t hr ee pieces of infor mat ion.
+ On t he left side is t he r elat ive locat ion in hexadecimal.
+ In t he middle, 16 byt es of t he file ar e shown in hexadecimal. This
middle sect ion is gr ouped in four , four -byt e columns.
+ On t he r ight is t he ASCII r epr esent at ion of t hose 16 byt es of t he
file. Any byt es t hat do not have a cor r esponding ASCII char act er
ar e shown wit h a per iod.
This display format can be for ced for any file by using t he BINARY opt ion.
Dat a files (dir ect , indexed and keyed) can use a t hir d t ype of display
invoked wit h t he HEX opt ion:
>list customer.master (hex
CUSTOMER.MASTER 23 Oct 2001 8:26am Page 1
KEY:
0000: 41414120 56656E64 696E6720 53706563 'AAA Vending Spec'
0010: 69616C69 73747300 00000000 00000000 'ialists.........'
0020: 00000000 00000000 '........'
DATA:
0000: 041A3132 38323820 536F7574 68776573 '..12828 Southwes'
0010: 74205061 726B2050 6C616365 0400040D 't Park Place....'
0020: 43617374 726F2056 616C6C65 79040243 'Castro Valley..C'
...
or
>list system.theos32.keyword (hex
SYSTEM.THEOS32.KEYWORD 23 Oct 2001 8:26am Page 1
Direct record: 1, reclen: 10
0000: 31594553 20202020 200D '1YES .'
Direct record: 2, reclen: 10
0000: 314E4F20 20202020 200D '1NO .'
...
330 List
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This HEX display is similar t o t he BINARY display except each r ecor d is dis-
played separat ely, wit h t he fir st column showing t he r elat ive locat ion of
t he dat a wit hin t he r ecor d. For keyed and indexed files, t he key is shown
separ at ely from t he r ecor d. Dir ect files show t he r ecor d number and r ecor d
lengt h on a line dir ect ly above t he r ecor d cont ent s.
t ype. To list a t ypeless file, you should specify t he file descript ion wit h a
per iod t er minat or . Refer t o page 103 for more informat ion about t his envi-
r onment var iable.
Mult iUser BASIC language sour ce pr ogr ams ar e displayed by passing t he
file name wit h t he opt ion LIST t o t he BASIC32 command.
For inst ance:
>list sample.basic
is ident ical t o:
>basic32 sample.basic (list
Defaults HEADING is a default opt ion. BINARY is a default opt ion when pr ogr ams
ar e list ed.
Restrictions The file must have r ead access enabled. See File Access Pr ot ect ion on
page 145.
See also CopyFile, FileManager, More, TBrowse, Viewer, WinWrite
The BASIC language compiler has a built -in abilit y t o list BASIC language
sour ce pr ogr ams.
Load 331
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Load Command
The Load command loads a pr ogr am or dat a file int o memor y for subsequent usage.
Operation The program is loaded int o memor y. When program is a simple name, t he
following locat ions ar e sear ched:
/THEOS/COMMAND/program.CMD
program.CMD
If program is already loaded int o memor y a second copy is not loaded.
Notes Any compiled pr ogr am (or ganizat ion code P or Pr ogr am) may be loaded
int o memor y. In addit ion, t he /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT file may also be
loaded.
Pr ogr ams ar e nor mally loaded int o memor y when needed and t heir use
count is set t o one. If a pr ogr am is alr eady in memor y because anot her
user or t ask is using it , or t he pr ogr am was loaded by t his command or t he
syst em st ar t -up pr ocess, t hat copy of t he program is used and it s use count
is incr ement ed. When a pr ogr am is no longer needed by a user (pr ogr am
exit ), it s use count is decr ement ed and, if zer o, t he pr ogr am is unloaded.
Pr ogr ams loaded by t his command or t he syst em st art -up pr ocess never
have t heir use count decr ement ed t o zer o except by Unload which is
Disk Caching Loading pr ogr ams and cer t ain key dat a files int o memor y befor e t hey ar e
needed can incr ease t he per for mance of your syst em slight ly. However , if
sufficient memor y is set aside for disk caching, t he per for mance incr ease
will be minimal, at best , and may even degr ade.
When disk caching is enabled, it is best t o not load any pr ogr ams or files
wit h t his command or Sysgen.
LOAD program...
program name of pr ogr am or file t o load int o memor y
332 Load
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Caution Do not make changes t o pr ogr ams or files (wit h LineEdit, Patch, recompila-
t ion, etc.) t hat have been loaded int o memor y. Any changes t o t he files
affect only t he disk image of t he file and not t he loaded ver sion. Befor e
making changes you should fir st Unload t he pr ogr am and file.
Do not er ase or change t he locat ion of a file fr om disk aft er it has been
loaded. If t his is done, t he loaded copy of t he file will not be used and
cannot be unloaded except by r eboot ing t he syst em.
Restrictions The Load command r equires a pr ivilege level of five.
See also Sysgen, Unload
LogName 333
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LogName Command
Displays t he account name t hat you ar e logged ont o.
Operation The cur r ent account name is out put t o t he st andar d out put device.
>logon develop
>logname
DEVELOP
See also Ident, Show WHO, WhoAmI
LOGNAME
334 LogName
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Logoff 335
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Logoff Command
Logon Command
The Logoff command logs off of t he cur r ent account ; t he Logon command logs ont o a new
account .
Operation Mode 1You ar e logged off of t he cur r ent account . Logging off includes:
+ All files opened by t his user ar e closed and all file and r ecor d locks
ar e r emoved. (This is act ually done by t he syst em pr ior t o invoking
t he Logoff command.)
+ All scr een windows ar e closed. See wFinish command described on
page 750.
+ A message displays showing t he t ime and dat e of t he logoff and t he
elapsed t ime t hat you wer e logged ont o t he syst em, along wit h t he
amount of CPU t ime used while logged ont o t he syst em.
+ If HISTORY is ON, a r ecor d is writ t en t o t he syst em hist ory log file
r ecor ding t he fact t hat you have logged off of an account . See Sys-
t em Hist or y File on page 217 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S ystem Reference.
+ All privat ely at t ached devices (ot her t han t he console, slave pr int -
ers and VDI devices) ar e det ached.
+ All publicly at t ached devices ar e r eat t ached. This includes t he
devices at t ached via Sysgen and t hose at t ached by you or ot her
users wit h t he Attach command wit h opt ion PUBLIC.
The queues assigned t o t he public spooled pr int er s ar e r eassigned
t o t heir init ial values. Spooled pr int er s defined by Sysgen ar e
assigned t he queues defined in Sysgen, ot her pr int er s are assigned
queues in a one-t o-one basis such as queue A t o PRT1, queue B t o
PRT2, etc.
+ All user envir onment var iables ar e clear ed.
1 LOGOFF
2 LOGON account ( opt ion
account account name
opt ion NOEXEC NOTERM TERM
336 Logon
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>logoff
Logoff at 9:12am PDT on Wednesday, October 16, 2001.
Duration 1:48:36, cpu 53.780.
Aft er Logoff complet es (and t he connect ion was not t er minat ed because of
t he Exit command or t he TERM opt ion), it invokes a special mode of t he
Logon command t hat pr ompt s you for t he new account name and pass-
wor d.
Mode 2The Logon command has t wo modes of oper at ion: one invoked by
t he Logoff command and t he ot her invoked when Logon is invoked fr om a
command line.
When Logon is invoked by Logoff, it finds and displays t he cont ent s of t he
file /THEOS/MENU/language/LOGON.MNU:S. It t hen displays t he Logon for m
shown above.
When Logon is invoked fr om a command line, it per for ms a l a t er a l l ogon.
The Logoff pr ocess is not invoked but t he cur r ent elapsed t ime and CPU
t ime ar e t r ansfer r ed t o t he new logon session. In t his mode you must spec-
ify t he account name on t he command line and you cannot include t he
passwor d wit h t he account name. If t he account has a passwor d, you ar e
pr ompt ed for it wit h Logon for m shown above but wit h t he Account
Name field alr eady filled in wit h t he account name.
A lat er al logon does not clear exist ing user envir onment var iables, does
not det ach pr ivat e devices and does not r eat t ach public devices. It r eset s
only t he account name and number and t he pr ivilege level of t he account .
Ot her syst em envir onment variables ar e changed only if t he new account s
Logon 337
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
envir onment definit ion specifies new set t ings. The UserName is not
changed unless t her e is no value for t hat var iable cur r ent ly.
In bot h modes of Logon, when t he account name and passwor d ar e pr oper ly
ent er ed, t he logon pr ocess is perfor med:
+ The envir onment swit ches and var iables ar e set accor ding t o t he
account definit ion. See Account on page 13. If t he new wor k dr ive
is differ ent t han t he pr ior wor k dr ive, t he wor k files ar e copied t o
t he new wor k dr ive.
+ The syst ems t ime-of-day clock is adjust ed for any change in day-
light savings t ime, if necessar y. See Daylight Savings Time and
Aut omat ic Adjust ment on page 259 of t he THEOS Corona Version
5 Operating S ystem Reference.
+ If t he TERM opt ion is in effect , t he EXEC pr ogr am t hat invoked t he
Logon is t er minat ed. When NOTERM is in effect (a default opt ion),
t he EXEC pr ogr am t hat invoked t he Logon command is not t er mi-
nat ed.
+ If HISTORY is ON, a r ecor d is writ t en t o t he syst em hist ory log file
r ecor ding t he fact t hat you have logged ont o an account . See Sys-
t em Hist or y File on page 217. Unsuccessful at t empt s t o log ont o
an account ar e also r ecor ded t here.
+ If a /SYSTEM.LOGON:S file exist s it is displayed on t he console.
+ If account is not t he syst em account or a synonym t o it , t he
/account.LOGON file is displayed on t he console.
+ If a /SYSTEM.REMINDER file exist s and t her e is one or mor e ent r ies
for t odays dat e, t he r eminder messages are displayed.
+ If account is not t he syst em account or a synonym t o it and t he
account .REMINDER file exist s and t her e is one or mor e ent r ies for
t odays dat e, t he r eminder messages ar e displayed. See
Reminder on page 479.
+ If t he NOEXEC opt ion is not used, a sear ch is made for an EXEC
pr ogr am wit h a file-name or member -name of account. The nor mal
locat ions for pr ogr ams ar e sear ched and t he envir onment variable
PATH is used when sear ching for t hese logon files. All dr ives in t he
dr ive sear ch sequence ar e examined. If an EXEC program is found,
it is execut ed; ot her wise pr ocessing cont inues at t he CSI or wit h
t he next st at ement in t he EXEC pr ogr am t hat invoked Logon (if
NOTERM is in effect ).
338 Logon
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOEXEC Do not execut e t he account EXEC.
NOTERM Do not t er minat e execut ion of t he EXEC calling t he Logon com-
mand. This is a default opt ion.
TERM Ter minat es execut ion of an EXEC pr ogr am if it was execut ing
when Logon was invoked.
Notes When t he user is connect ed via a net wor k connect ion, use t he Exit com-
mand t o log off and disconnect t he user .
Neit her t he Logoff nor t he Logon commands clear t he console display. How-
ever , one or mor e of t he displayed files ( /SYSTEM.LOGON:S or
/account.LOGON:S ) may clear t he scr een by embedding a form-feed code
(^ L) in t he t ext file.
You may r efr esh t he display by pr essing (Enter) on a blank logon name. This
is useful if you have st ar t ed a user session on a t er minal t hat was power ed
off. When t he user t ur ns t he t er minal on t hey can pr ess (Enter) t o see t he
logon pr ompt .
Defaults NOTERM is a default opt ion.
See also Account, Exit, LogName, Show, Start, Stop, Sysgen
Look 339
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Look Command
The Look command sear ches files for specific t ext .
Operation Mod e 1Sear ch file for ever y inst ance of patt ern. When mor e t han one
patt ern is specified, each r ecord or line is sear ch for each of t he patt erns.
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat file may be a t ext file cont aining a
list of files (opt ion FILES) or t he r esult of t he sear ch may be out put t o
FOUND.EXEC r at her t han displayed on t he st andard out put device.
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat t he files sear ched ar e found in t he
cur r ent ly defined default libr ar y or, if no default libr ar y is defined, all files
using t he default FILETYPE.
For all modes, file is examined, r ecor d by r ecor d, looking for any and all
inst ances of patt ern. An exact mat ch must occur bet ween pattern and t he
t ext in t he file. This exact mat ch does not include t he case mode of t he
char act er s.
To per for m inexact mat ch compar isons, t he pattern must cont ain r egul a r
exp r essi ons (see Regular Expressions on page 341).
When Look displays it s result s on t he console, it displays ever y line of t he
file t hat cont ains pattern. The pattern in t he line is highlight ed in r ever se
video and t he line is ident ified wit h it s line number :
>look /theos/help/english/look.hlp ("THEOS"
File: /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/LOOK.HLP:S
3 <title> Help for Look Command </title>
17 Unlike other commands, the options
38 >LOOK SYSTEM. 32.DEVNAMES ("Wyse"
1 LOOK file ( patt ern ...
2 LOOK file ( opt ion patt ern ...
3 LOOK patt ern
file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may include wild cards
patt ern t ext st r ing t o look for ; may cont ain regular expressions
opt ion APPEND
EXEC
FILES
THEOS
THEOS
THEOS
340 Look
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When mor e t han one pattern is specified, it means or . For inst ance:
>look some.file ("the" "and" "of"
Will look in SOME.FILE for t he char act er s t he or and or of.
Options If any of t he following opt ions ar e used, t hey must be specified at t he
beginning of t he opt ion list befor e any patt ern is specified.
APPEND Indicat es t hat , if file cont ains pattern, t he complet e pat h and
file name of file is out put t o FOUND.EXEC, appending a line t o
any exist ing FOUND.EXEC.
EXEC Indicat es t hat , if file cont ains pattern, t he complet e pat h and
file name of file is out put t o FOUND.EXEC, similar t o t he FileList
EXEC opt ion. Any exist ing FOUND.EXEC file is er ased fir st . Thus,
if no file cont ains patt ern, t he FOUND.EXEC will be empt y.
If APPEND is used inst ead of, or in addit ion t o EXEC, any exist -
ing FOUND.EXEC is not er ased and any file cont aining patt ern
causes lines t o be appended t o t he end of t he exist ing
FOUND.EXEC.
>look /Theos/Help/English/*.* (exec FILES
>list found.exec (nohead
&1 /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/B3220.HLP:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/BASIC32.HLP:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/CHANGE.HLP:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/COPYFILE.HLP:S &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
...
t ions in t his file may include t he pat h t o t he file and wild
cards.
The SELECTED.EXEC and SELECTED.FILES files cr eat ed by t he
FileList command and t he FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by pr evious
usage of t he Look command, can be used for t his specificat ion
file or you may cr eat e t he file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr o-
gr am.
For inst ance, t he FileList is used t o creat e a list of files t o be
examined:
>filelist /Theos/Help/English/*.* (10/1/01 exec append
Look 341
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
A SELECTED.EXEC file now exist s t hat list s all help files t hat
have been changed since 10/01/2001.
The following commands cr eat e a list of t hese files t hat cont ain
PRT and t hen, using t hat list , examines t he files t hat cont ain
PRT t o find files t hat also cont ain SORT.
>look selected.exec (files exec "PRT"
>look found.exec (files "SORT"
File: /THEOS/HELP/ENGLISH/ACCOUNT.HLP:S
40 SORT When used with the TYPE or PRT
...
Notes When one or mor e opt ions ar e used, t hey must be specified befor e any pat-
t ern. If no option is used and t he patt ern looks like an opt ion, a null
opt ion should be used.
>look some.file ("" "EXEC"
If file is a t ypeless file descript ion, t her e is no default libr ar y defined and
appended t o file t o for m a complet e file descr ipt ion wit h file name and file
t ype. To examine a t ypeless file, you should specify t he file descr ipt ion
wit h a per iod t er minat or . See FILETYPE on page 103 THEOS Corona
Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for mor e infor mat ion about t his
The search pattern is case-insensit ive.
The Look command can examine non-t ext files and it can examine non-
st r eam dat a files. When Look opens file it opens it as a st r eam of byt es and
does not consider t he files organizat ion. For inst ance, when file is an
indexed dat a file it can find char act er pat t er ns in delet ed r ecor ds. When
file is not a st r eam t ext file t he locat ion t hat it r epor t s is t he offset fr om t he
beginning of t he file, in byt es.
Return Codes The r et ur n code is set t o zer o if file does not cont ain pattern; ot herwise, t he
r et ur n code is set t o one.
See also Compare, FileManager, List
Regular
Expressions
patt ern is act ually a st ring expr ession called a r egul a r exp r essi on. A r eg-
ular expr ession is a sequence of char act er s consist ing of l i t er a l cha r a c-
t er s and met a cha r a ct er s.
Li t er a l cha r a ct er s ar e char act er s t hat mat ch in a one-for-one r elat ion-
ship wit h t he t ext in t he file. For inst ance, t he sear ch pat t er n abc is com-
342 Look
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
posed solely of lit er al char act er s. This pat t er n mat ches only when t he t ext
file cont ains a sequence of t hr ee charact ers t hat exact ly equals a, b, and
c.
In addit ion t o t he nor mal ASCII char act er s, you may specify cer t ain con-
t r ol char act er s as lit eral char act er s. These cont r ol char act er s must be
specified wit h t he following codes:
A met a cha r a ct er is a char act er or gr oup of char act er s t hat r epresent s
somet hing ot her t han t hemselves. The wild car ds allowed for file specifica-
t ions by most of t he THEOS commands are examples of met achar act er s.
Specification Meaning
\a BELL or (Ctrl)+(G) code.
\b Backspace or (Ctrl)+(H) code.
\f For m-feed or (Ctrl)+(L) code.
\n New-line or (Ctrl)+(J) code.
\r Ret ur n or (Ctrl)+(M) code.
\t Tab or (Ctrl)+(I) code.
\v Ver t ical t ab or (Ctrl)+(K) code.
\0 Null or (Ctrl)+(@) code.
\' Single-quot e char act er
\" Double-quot e char act er
Table 9: Regular Expr ession Cont r ol Charact er Specificat ion
Look 343
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The following t able shows all of t he met achar act er s allowed in regular
expr essions.
Regular Expression Anchors
The first t wo met achar act er s ar e called a nchor s . These anchor ot her t ext
t o t he beginning or end of t he r ecor d sear ched. For inst ance, t he pat t er n
"\^The"
means t hat The is sear ched for but only when it occur s at t he beginning
of a r ecor d. Similar ly,
"the\$"
is a pat t er n t hat means sear ch for t he at t he end of a r ecord. Not e t hat
t his last pat t er n will not find t he if t her e is a space at t he end of t he line.
Specification Meaning
\^ Anchor t o st ar t of line.
\$ Anchor t o end of line.
\. or \? Any char act er mat ches.
\@ Any let t er mat ches (AZ and az).
\# Any digit mat ches (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0).
\\ Met achar act er escape. This is how a backslant lit er al
char act er is specified.
\[ St art char act er set .
\] End char act er set .
\{ St art gener al r epeat specificat ion.
\} End gener al r epeat specificat ion.
\* Repeat zer o or more t imes.
\+ Repeat one or mor e t imes.
Table 10: Regular Expr ession Met achar act er s
344 Look
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Regular Expression Wild Cards
Ther e ar e t hr ee wild car d met achar act er s t hat allow you t o sear ch for
mat ches on any char act er (\ .), any let t er (\ @) and any digit (\ #). For
example, t he pat t ern:
"THEOS\#86"
will mat ch any sequence of char act er s st ar t ing wit h THEOS, followed by
any single digit , followed by an 8 and a 6. Thus, it will mat ch
THEOS186, THEOS286, THEOS386, THEOS486, et c.
Regular Expression Character Sets
Sear ching for one char act er of a set of char act er s is done by specifying a
cha r a ct er set . For inst ance, t o sear ch for a hexadecimal digit you would
specify a pat t ern cont aining:
"\[0123456789ABCDEFabcdef\]"
This pat t er n specifies a mat ch on any char act er t hat is eit her a digit , an
upper case A t hr ough F or a lower case a t hr ough f.
As a convenience, when specifying char act er set s t her e ar e t wo char act er s
t hat have special meaning. The hyphen or dash char act er ( - ), when speci-
fied bet ween t wo charact er s, indicat es a cha r a ct er set r a nge. For
inst ance, t he above pat t er n could have been specified wit h:
"\[0-9A-Fa-f\]"
which means t he set of char act er s 0 t hr ough 9, A t hr ough F and a
t hr ough f. Ranges specified wit h t he hyphen char act er r efer t o r anges in
t he ASCII collat ing sequence.
The hyphen does not have a special meaning when it occur s at t he begin-
ning or end of a char act er set specificat ion. Thus, t he pat t er n:
"\[-0-9\]"
means t he set of char act ers dash and t he digit s 0 t hr ough 9.
The cir cumflex ( ^ ) is t he ot her char act er t hat has special meaning when
used in a char act er set specificat ion. When t he cir cumflex is used at t he
st ar t of t he char act er set specificat ion, it means t hat it is an excep t i on
set . That is, it is a specificat ion of char act er s t hat do not mat ch. For
inst ance, t he pat t er n:
"\[Â-Z\]"
Look 345
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
means a mat ch on any charact er except upper case let t er s. When t he cir -
cumflex is used in a posit ion ot her t han at t he st ar t , it is mer ely a char ac-
t er included in t he set .
Regular Expression Repeat Counts
A sear ch pat t er n may be r epeat ed by using t he r epeat met achar act er s \ {
and \ } t o enclose t he minimum and maximum r epeat count s. For
inst ance, t he pat t er n:
" \@\{4,6\}\[ .\]"
means t hat you want a mat ch on a space, followed by four t o six let t er s, fol-
lowed by a space or per iod.
It is not necessar y t o specify bot h t he minimum and maximum r epeat
count values. A missing minimum value uses t he default value of one for
t he minimum; a missing maximum value uses infinit y for t he maximum.
Thus, a pat t ern r epeat count of \ {5\ } means five or mor e occur r ences; a
pat t er n of \ {,5\ } means one t o five occurr ences.
As a convenience, t here ar e t wo special met achar act er s for specifying
common r epeat count s. The met acharact er \ * is a shor t hand specifica-
t ion for t he r epeat count \ {0\ } meaning zer o or mor e occur r ences. The
met achar act er \ + is a shor t hand specificat ion for t he r epeat count
\ {1\ } meaning one or mor e occur rences.
346 Look
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Lowcase 347
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Lowcase Command Filter
Lowcase copies a file t o t he st andar d out put device, conver t ing all let t er s t o lower case.
Operation Mode 1file is copied t o t he st andar d out put device wit h all upper case
let t ers conver t ed t o lower case. The or iginal file is unchanged.
>lowcase /Theos/OS/Message/English/synonym.txt
account 3
archive 2
asm32 3
attach 1
...
>lowcase /Theos/OS/Message/English/synonym.txt > synonym.list
Mode 2Copies st andar d input t o st andard out put , conver t ing all upper -
case let t er s t o lower case. This for m is nor mally used only in a pipe. How-
ever , if st andar d input is t he console, r ecor ds ar e copied unt il a (Ctrl)+(D) is
encount er ed, signaling t he end of t he input file.
>filelist *.* | lowcase > file.list
Notes The command name LC is a synonym t o t he Lowcase command. It is not a
allowed.
Restrictions file must be a st r eam file.
See also Upcase
1 LOWCASE file
2 LOWCASE
file file name wit h opt ional pat h; wild car ds ar e not allowed
Command synonym: LC
348 Lowcase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mailbox 349
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mailbox Command
The Mailbox command sends a message t o anot her user s mailbox or r et rieves your mes-
sages.
The fir st t hr ee modes of t he Mailbox command send mail t o ot her user s. The four t h mode
r et rieves or r emoves your mail.
Operation Mode 1This is t he nor mal, mult i-line mode of t he Mailbox command.
When t he command is ent er ed, you ar e pr ompt ed t o ent er one or mor e
lines of t ext . To end t he mail, pr ess (Enter) at t he beginning of a line
wit h no t ext or spaces in it .
>mail shirley
Enter message text terminated by empty line.
Shirley,(Enter)
(Enter)
The company picnic has been scheduled in August.(Enter)
(Enter)
Please call me by Friday so we can arrange a planning(Enter)
meeting as we have a lot to do in the next two weeks.(Enter)
(Enter)
>
To ent er a blank line wit hout ending t he message, r emember t o ent er at
least one space before pr essing (Enter).
Aft er a line is ent er ed you cannot edit it . You can pr epare a long message
wit h an edit ing pr ogr am and t hen send it wit h Mode 3.
1 MAILBOX user
2 MAILBOX user text
3 MAILBOX user file
4 MAILBOX ( option
text message t ext t o send
user account name t o send mail t o
opt ion PURGE
PURGE *
350 Mailbox
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2For shor t , single-line messages, t his mode allows you t o specify
t he message t ext on t he command line. If t he t ext cont ains commas, quot a-
t ion mar ks or ot her punct uat ion char act er s, you should enclose t he ent ir e
message in quot at ion mar ks.
>mail dave Please call me when you get in. It's important.
>mail eric "Your package arrived, and it's big. Call me."
Single-wor d messages cannot be sent wit h t his mode because Mailbox will
assume t hat t he single wor d is a file name and it will t r y t o use Mode 3.
Mode 3Sends a pr eviously cr eat ed t ext file t o accounts mailbox. Use
t his mode t o send lar ge messages t o a user or t o send t he same message t o
several user account s.
Cr eat e t he file wit h LineEdit, WindoWr it er or a cust omized applicat ion.
>mail accntg my.mail
Mode 4This mode r et r ieves your mail or r emoves old mail fr om your
mailbox.
>logon accntg
>mailbox
As each message is displayed you ar e asked if you want t o delet e it . If you
r espond (Y) t hen t he message is marked as delet ed (it is not physically
Mailbox 351
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
delet ed unt il t he syst em manager uses t he PURGE opt ion descr ibed below).
Respond wit h (N) if you do not want it delet ed at t his t ime.
Each t ime t hat Mode 4 is used wit hout one of t he PURGE opt ions, all mail
for your account is displayed whet her it has been r ead befor e or not . When
a message is r ead and mar ked as delet ed it is not displayed again.
Options The t wo PURGE opt ions can be used only when you ar e logged ont o t he
SYSTEM account (id zer o) and r equir e a privilege level of five.
PURGE Removes all mail t hat has been mar ked as delet ed.
PURGE * Removes all mail t hat has been mar ked as delet ed and all mail
t hat has been r ead but not delet ed.
Notes User s ar e not ified t hat t here is mail wait ing for t hem when t hey log ont o
t he account (see Logoff on page 335). They can t hen use Mode 4 of t he
Mailbox command t o r ead t heir mail.
Mail for all user s is saved in t he file SYSTEM.MAILBOX:S. This file is cr eat ed
aut omat ically t he fir st t ime t hat Mailbox is used. Mail is only r emoved fr om
t his file wit h t he PURGE opt ion.
Do not confuse t his command wit h THEO+Mail and t he mail sent and
r eceived over t he Int er net wit h t hat command. Mailbox oper at es on mail
sent by t he Mailbox or Msg commands only.
Restrictions The PURGE and PURGE * opt ions r equir e t hat you be logged ont o t he
SYSTEM account (account id=0) and t hat you have a privilege level of five.
See also Logon, Msg, Reminder
352 Mailbox
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MakeBoot 353
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MakeBoot Command EXEC
MakeBoot cr eat es an Emer gency Boot Di sket t e using t he cur r ent oper at ing syst em and
configur at ion.
Operation When MakeBoot is invoked it displays t he following menu scr een.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed funct ion.
Use existing floppies. Choose t his menu it em if t he disket t es ar e alr eady
for mat t ed. MakeBoot clear s t he exist ing dir ect ory and r esizes it t o gain
some addit ional space.
Format floppies first. Choose t his menu it em if t he disket t es are not for-
mat t ed. MakeBoot for mat s t he disket t es using t he highest capacit y avail-
able on t he dr ive. Then it copies t he necessary files.
Exit. This menu it em exit s MakeBoot wit hout modifying t he disket t e.
Notes MakeBoot r equir es t wo disket t es t o hold t he necessar y files for boot ing t he
comput er . Be sur e t hat you have t hese disket t es available befor e st ar t ing
t he pr ocess.
MakeBoot will ask you t o put t he fir st disket t e in t he dr ive and t hen it will
for mat t he disket t e (if t hat opt ion was select ed), copy t he necessar y files t o
t he disket t e and t hen ask for t he second disket t e. It t hen format s t hat dis-
ket t e (if select ed) and copies t he necessar y files t o t hat disket t e.
A boot st r ap loader is wr it t en t o t he fir st sect or s of t he fir st disket t e. Ther e
will be some space available on t he second disket t e and you may copy addi-
t ional files and pr ogr ams if t her e is sufficient room for t hem.
MAKEBOOT drive
drive opt ional disk dr ive at t achment let t er
354 MakeBoot
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MAKEBOOT
Files:
The files copied t o t his Emer gency Boot Disket t e include:
File
Oper at ing syst em /THEOS/OS/NUCLEUS.SYS
Command st r ing int er pr et er /THEOS/OS/CSI.SYS
Device dr iver s /THEOS/DRIVER/CLASS90
1
.SYS
/THEOS/DRIVER/DEV1.SYS
/THEOS/DRIVER/FORM2.SYS
SYSGEN configur at ion /THEOS/CONFIG/SYSGEN.CFG
/THEOS/CONFIG/INSTLIST.CFG
/THEOS/CONFIG/LANGCODE.CFG
Account ing st r uct ur e /THEOS/CONFIG/ACCOUNT.BIN
Syst em suppor t files /THEOS/OS/LOADER3.SYS
/THEOS/OS/LOADER4.SYS
/THEOS/OS/LOADER5.SYS
/THEOS/OS/PCMCIA.SYS
/THEOS/OS/CLOCK.SYS
/THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT
/THEOS/OS/RESMGR.SYS
/THEOS/OS/MBR.SYS
/THEOS/OS/LOAD04GB.SYS
/THEOS/OS/LOAD0LFS.SYS
/THEOS/OS/SESSMAN.SYS
/THEOS/OS/WM.SYS
/THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/ENGLISH/KEYWORD.BIN
/THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/ENGLISH/MESSAGE.BIN
/THEOS/OS/SCSI1.SYS
/THEOS/OS/SCSI2.SYS
/THEOS/OS/SCSI3.SYS
/THEOS/OS/SCSI4.SYS
/THEOS/OS/SCSI5.SYS
/THEOS/OS/I2OMSG.SYS
/THEOS/OS/USB.SYS
/THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/ENGLISH/SYNONYM.TXT
Commands /THEOS/COMMAND/ATTACH.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/COPYFILE.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/DISK.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/FILELIST.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/LOGON.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/MOUNT.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/SETUP.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/SYSTEM.CMD
/THEOS/COMMAND/TBACKUP.CMD
MakeBoot 355
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When t his Emer gency Boot Disket t e is boot ed, t her e ar e sufficient com-
mands t o format t he har d disk, at t ach differ ent devices, r est ore fr om t ape,
syst em t o t he har d disk, etc. It is not int ended as a gener al boot disk.
Ther e may be sufficient space available on t he disk t o add mor e com-
mands. If you do, r emember t o include any suppor t files needed by t he
command (such as menus). You should not copy help files t o t his disket t e.
If any significant changes ar e made t o t he syst em on t he har d disk, you
should r ecr eat e t he Emergency Boot Disket t e. Significant changes would
include an upgr ade t o t he oper at ing syst em, new or changed account envi-
r onment s, hard disk cont r oller change and a change in t he main console
configurat ion or at t achment .
Defaults The default dr ive is F, which is nor mally t he fir st floppy dr ive.
Restrictions MakeBoot can only be r un if you ar e logged ont o t he syst em account .
The disket t e must be 1.44MB. 1.2MB disket t es ar e t oo small t o hold t he
necessar y files.
Using the
Diskettes
Refer t o t he sect ion Booting with the Emergency Boot Diskettes on page 28
THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for a descr ipt ion of
how t hese disks ar e used.
See also CopyFile, Disk
Command suppor t files /THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/ATTACH.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/DISK.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/FILELIST.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/FORM2.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/RESTORE.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/SETUP.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/TBACKUP.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/TLOGON.MNU
/THEOS/MENU/ENGLISH/LOADER5.MNU
1. The specific class code currently attached to the main console.
File
356 MakeBoot
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Message 357
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Message Command
The Message command displays or maint ains t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/MESSAGE.BIN
file.
Operation Mode 1Displays all of t he messages defined in /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/lan-
guage/MESSAGE.BIN.
>message *
0: Logon please: \a
1: Password?
2: Command not found.\n
3: Insufficient memory.\n
...
Mode 2This is t he message maint enance mode. When t his mode is
ent er ed, you are pr ompt ed t o ent er t he message number :
>message
Enter message number:
At t his pr ompt ent er eit her t he number of t he message you want t o view or
change, or pr ess (Enter), (Esc) or (F9) wit hout a number t o exit .
When a number is ent er ed t he cur r ent definit ion is displayed and you ar e
asked for t he new definit ion:
>message
Enter message number: 3
Old text: Insufficient memory.\n
New text:
1 MESSAGE * ( PRTnn
2 MESSAGE
3 MESSAGE nnn operand...
nnn message number t o display
operand opt ional ar gument used by t he message
358 Message
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To leave t he message unchanged, pr ess (Enter), (Esc) or (F9) wit hout any
char act er s or spaces.
To change or define a message, ent er t he new t ext . Messages may be a
maximum of 64 char act er s in lengt h. For infor mat ion about message con-
t ent and codes used, refer t o Message File Syntax below.
When t he new t ext for t he message is ent er ed, pr ess (Enter) and you ar e
pr ompt ed for anot her message t o change.
Mode 3Displays message number nnn on t he console (not t he st andar d
out put device). If t he message uses var iables, t he operands ar e used for t he
value of t hese var iables. Any missing oper ands ar e displayed wit h an ellip-
sis.
>message 7
Invalid command syntax.
>message 19
File "..." not found.
>message 19 abc.def:g
File "ABC.DEF:G" not found.
>message 117 "Wednesday" "August" 7 2001
Date is set to Wednesday, August 7, 2001.
Options PRTnn Indicat es t hat Message is t o pr int t he messages on t he
at t ached pr int er number nn. The opt ion keywor d PRT may be
specified as PRT, PRINT or PRINTER. As a convenience,
PRINTER1 may be specified as P.
Message File
Syntax
Message t ext may cont ain plain t ext , display codes, video at t r ibut es, var i-
able ar gument s and condit ional expr essions. Plain t ext includes all of t he
ASCII displayable char act er s (let t er s, digit s, punct uat ion, et c.).
Display Codes
Ther e ar e four display codes t hat can be embedded in a message:
Code Meaning
\ a Sound t he console bell.
\ n St ar t a new display line.
\ t Out put spaces t o next t ab st op.
\ \ Out put a single backslant char act er .
Message 359
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Video Attributes
Video at t ribut es such as r ever se video, blink, etc. ar e specified by using
t heir oct al values pr eceded by a backslant , zer o. Some of t he common codes
include:
Variables
Message t ext may specify t hat var iable infor mat ion will be inser t ed at t he
t ime t he message is displayed. For inst ance, message 19 displays as File
"xxx" not found. To indicat e t hat t he file name is inser t ed bet ween t he
quot at ion marks, a var iable number is used.
In message t ext , var iables are always indicat ed by using a pair of cur ly
br ace char act er s t o sur round a var iable number . Messages cont aining
only one var iable use variable number zer o. Messages wit h mor e t han one
var iable use number s one, t wo, t hr ee, et c. For inst ance:
19: File "{0}" not found.\n
34: Device "{1}" is already attached to process {2}.\n
Conditional Expressions
Messages can use condit ional expressions t o evaluat e t he value of a var i-
able and display differ ent infor mat ion depending upon t hat value. The
gener al synt ax for a condit ional expression is:
{variable?value1=t ext 1,value1=text2,...,text }
The value of variable is t est ed t o see if it is value1, value2, etc. If it
mat ches any of t hose values, t hen t he cor responding text is out put as t he
value of t he expr ession. When a t er m does not have an equal sign it means
Code Meaning
\016 Rever se video on.
\017 Rever se video off.
\013 Under line on.
\026 Under line off.
\035 Blink on.
\036 Blink off.
\04 Half int ensit y on.
\05 Half int ensit y off.
\0202 St at us line st ar t .
\0203 St at us line end.
360 Message
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t hat t his is t he ot herwise clause and t hat text is out put when t he var iable
is not one of t he pr eviously list ed values. An ast er isk means t hat t he or igi-
nal value of variable is used. For inst ance, message 105 is defined as:
105: {0?0=No,1=One,*} file{0?1=,s} changed.\n
This message will be displayed t hr ee differ ent ways depending upon t he
value of t he var iable zero.
>message 105 0
No files changed.
>message 105 1
One file changed.
>message 105 2
2 files changed.
As you can see fr om t he second var iable expr ession {0?1=,s}, you can
specify t hat not hing is out put when t he var iable is a specific value. This
expr ession st at es t hat if var iable 0 is a 1, out put not hing; ot her wise
out put an s.
Notes Alt hough t he display pr oduced by Mode 1 is similar t o t he display pr oduced
by t he List command, t her e ar e t wo significant differ ences:
1. The message number s displayed by t he Message command are
number ed from zer o, cor r esponding t o t he number s used by pr o-
gr ams t o r equest one of t he messages.
2. Embedded cont r ol codes ar e displayed gr aphically r at her t han
int er pr et ed. For inst ance, a new-line is displayed as \n.
Cautions The /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/MESSAGE.BIN file cont ains all of t he mes-
sage t ext used by t he oper at ing syst em and it s ut ilit ies. Changing an exist -
ing message can affect many pr ograms.
You should not use any of t he cur r ent ly unused message number s for your
own pur poses. All unused number s ar e r eser ved for oper at ing syst em
usage. As updat es t o t he soft war e requir e new message t ext , t hey ar e
added t o t his file. Also, t his file is r eplaced in it s ent ir et y whenever t he
oper at ing syst em is inst alled or updat ed.
See also Keyword
Mixer 361
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mixer Command
The Mixer command allows you t o set t he volume for various sound devices and files.
Operation When invoked, t he Mixer command displays t he Mixer cont r ol scr een:
Use your mouse or t he (Tab) and (Shift)+(Tab) keys t o posit ion t o fields
t hat you want t o change and t hen ent er t he desir ed values. The t op line of
values set t he left channel volume for t he device and t he middle line set s
t he r ight channel volume. The bot t om check boxes mut e or unmut e t he
devices.
The volume values ar e set by using t he () and () keys or by using t he
mouse and clicking on t he upper or lower por t ion of t he 1 object . Volume
values r ange fr om 0 (off) t o 31 (maximum).
Master Cont r ols t he volume for all devices. The act ual volume for a
specific device is a combinat ion of t he value for t he device and
t he value specified her e.
Wave Cont r ols t he volume of WAV sounds (see Play on page 455)
Midi Cont r ols t he volume for playing midi sounds (not suppor t ed at
t his t ime).
MIXER
362 Mixer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CD Cont r ols t he volume of t he sounds played fr om an audio CD
(see CDPlayer on page 59).
Line Cont r ols t he line-in component of t he sound car d.
Mic Cont r ols t he micr ophone input volume of t he sound car d.
Notes This command only cont r ols t he volume of sounds played fr om t he main
console. Sounds played dur ing a TWS session ar e cont r olled by t he com-
put er and soft war e on t he client syst em.
Restrictions You must have a sound car d configur ed. Refer t o t he THEOS Corona Ver-
sion 5 Operating S ystem Installation and S etup Guide for a descr ipt ion of
Setup SndCard.
See also CDPlayer, Play
MkDir 363
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MkDir Command
The MkDir command cr eat es a new subdir ect or y.
Operation Cr eat es a new, empt y subdir ect or y named direct ory.
You can creat e a dir ect or y on anot her account by pr epending t he account
name t o t he pat h for directory. For example:
>mkdir account\subdir
The above command creat es t he dir ect or y SUBDIR in t he account named
ACCOUNT.
Options SIZE Specifies t he init ial size of t he new dir ect or y. The number of
init ial ent r ies is specified following t he keywor d SIZE.
>mkdir Example (size 48
When SIZE is specified, t he new dir ect or y will be cr eat ed lar ge
enough t o cont ain t he r equest ed number of dir ect or y ent r ies if
t he file names for each dir ect or y ent r y use 8.8 names. When
t his opt ion is not used, t he init ial size of t he dir ect or y is suffi-
MKDIR directory ( option
directory new subdir ect or y name; may include pat h
opt ion SIZE
Command synonym: MD
>tree
/
>mkdir subdir
>tree
/
subdir
>md subdir/sub
>tree
/
subdir
sub
364 MkDir
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
cient t o hold about 130 files wit h 8.8 char act er file names. Use
t he SIZE opt ion if you want t o cr eat e a small direct or y size or
one t hat is much larger t han t he default .
Notes Dir ect or ies in t he Cor ona oper at ing syst em ar e aut omat ically ext endable.
When a dir ect or y becomes full and a request is made t o add anot her file t o
it , t he dir ect or y is made lar ger . The SIZE opt ion should be used if you know
t hat a direct or y will need t o cont ain a cer t ain number of files. Dir ect or y
access is mor e efficient if it is not an ext ended direct or y but was cr eat ed
sufficient ly lar ge enough t o st ar t wit h.
Dir ect or y names may be long file names. Unlike ot her commands, it is
not necessar y t o enclose a long dir ect or y name wit hin quot es unless you
want t o maint ain t he casemode of t he char act er s used in t he name. All
t okens in t he dir ect or y por t ion of t he command line ar e int er pret ed as par t
of t he dir ect or y name. For inst ance:
>mkdir "THIS IS A LONG DIRECTORY NAME"
>mkdir this is a long directory name
The above t wo commands will per for m t he same oper at ion and cr eat e t he
same dir ect or y name.
The command name MD is a synonym t o t he MkDir command. It is not a
separ at e pr ogr am but only an ent r y in t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/
SYNONYM.TXT file. If st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on page
13 and STDSYN on page 110), t his synonym name may not be allowed.
Defaults If no account name is specified for directory, t he new subdir ect or y will be
owned by t he cur rent account . If no pat h is specified for direct ory, t he new
subdir ect or y is cr eat ed as a subdir ect or y t o t he cur rent wor king dir ect or y.
Restrictions direct ory must not be t he name of an exist ing file or subdir ect or y and it
may not be a member of a libr ar y.
direct ory should not be /PIPE because t his is a r eser ved name used by t he
syst em. You may, however , cr eat e a subor dinat e dir ect or y named PIPE,
such as: /PRIVATE/PIPE.
Subdir ect or ies may be 21 levels deep. This means t hat /A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J /K/
L/M/N/O/P/Q/R/S/T/U is valid, but adding anot her dir ect or y under U would be
beyond t he limit .
See also ChDir, Create, PWD, RmDir
See Dir ect or ies and Files on page 131 of t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5
Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for addit ional infor mat ion about dir ect or ies
and subdir ect or ies.
More 365
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
More Command Filter
More copies a t ext file t o t he st andar d out put device wit h page wait and browse capabilit ies.
Operation Mode 1Copies file t o t he st andar d out put device. If st andar d out put is
t he console, page-wait s ar e per for med and browsing capabilit ies ar e
pr esent .
>more /theos/config/devnames.txt
When t he console screen is full, More displays it s pr ompt on t he last line.
The MORE pr ompt consist s of t he wor d Mor e and t he amount of t he file
t hat has been displayed so far .
--More--(52%)
At t his t ime you may use any of t he br owse keys described on page 366.
Mult iple files may be specified by list ing t he file names on t he command
line, one file name aft er t he ot her . When mult iple files ar e list ed t his way,
t he (N) and (P) br owse keys ar e enabled.
>more one.file two.file three.file
Mode 2This mode applies when More is used in a pipe.
>number /theos/os/message/english/synonym.txt | more
Options nnn Specifies t he console page dept h t o use. When t his opt ion is not
specified, t he consoles at t ached scr een size is used.
The scr een size can be changed dur ing t he display wit h t he (Z)
br owse key.
1 MORE file... ( nnn
2 MORE ( nnn
nnn number of lines t o display per page
366 More
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Browse Keys When t he More pr ompt is displayed at t he bot t om of t he scr een you may
use t he special More br owse keys.
Notes When used in a pipe, More should be t he last command in t he pipe so t hat
it s out put goes t o t he console and you can br owse t hr ough t he file using
t he keyboar d.
If file is a t ypeless file descr ipt ion, t her e is no default libr ary defined and
t ype. To list a t ypeless file, you should specify t he file descript ion wit h a
Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference for mor e infor mat ion about t his
Defaults The default scr een dept h is t he consoles at t ached page size.
Restrictions file must be an ASCII st r eam file.
See also CopyFile, List, Tee
Key Action
(Enter) Display next line of file.
(Space) Display next scr eenful of file.
(D) Display next half-scr eenful of file.
nnn(F) Skip next nnn scr eens.
(N) Skip t o next file.
(P) Skip back t o pr evious file.
(Q) Quit .
nnn(S) Skip nnn lines.
nnn(Z) Set screen dept h t o nnn and display next screenful of file.
(/)expression Sear ch for t ext mat ching expression. Expression is a r egu-
lar expr ession as descr ibed on page 341.
(!)command Execut e CSI command and r et urn.
(?) Display br owse help scr een.
Table 11: More Command Br owse Keys
Mount 367
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mount Command
Mount t ells t he oper at ing syst em t o r er ead t he label infor mat ion fr om a dr ive because t he
disk might have been changed.
Operation This program assumes t hat t he disk in t he dr ive might have been changed.
Any cur r ent infor mat ion about drive is disr egar ded and t he disk dr ive is
inst r uct ed t o r ecalibr at e it s heads. This is a process t hat moves t he r ead/
wr it e head t o it s home posit ion. If suppor t ed by t he dr ive mechanism and
cont r oller , t he heads ar e moved slowly.
Once t he heads ar e in a known posit ion, t he first sect or s of t he disk ar e
r ead and t he infor mat ion is saved.
Notes If a disk is changed and t he Mount command is not used, you will r eceive a
message Disk drive changed, need XXXX - t he next t ime t hat drive is
accessed.
Cautions Us e the MOUNT command eve ry ti me that a di s k i s changed, even if
t he new disk has t he same for mat as t he pr ior disk. If t he new disk has t he
same label as t he pr ior disk, THEOS will not know t hat t he disk has
changed and may use infor mat ion saved fr om t he pr ior disk t o do wr it es!
Return Codes This command r eads t he fir st sect or s of t he disk and, depending upon
what it finds, set s t he r et ur n code as follows:
Restrictions You cannot Mount t he S drive. Use t he System command inst ead.
See also Attach, Disk, Reboot, System
MOUNT drive
drive disk dr ive let t er
Return Code Meaning/Message
0 THEOS disk, mount ed successfully
201 Disk not ready
203 Disk not init ialized
204 Dat a t ransfer er r or
205 Sect or not found
206 Tr ack not found
207 Sect or addr ess er r or
563 Disk does not have a THEOS file syst em on it
368 Mount
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Move 369
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Move Command
Move a file or gr oup of files fr om one locat ion t o anot her .
Operation Mode 1Each file mat ching from-file is copied t o to-file, similar t o t he
CopyFile command. Bot h t he from-file and t he t o-file may use wild car d
specificat ions.
>MOVE /programs/some.command:s /private/programs/newname.command:d
Mode 2Each file mat ching from-file is copied t o to-drive using t he same
file name as t he sour ce. A
>Move some.files f (notype
>move *.basic =.basiccpy:d (keep noquery
Mode 3file must be a t ext file cont aining one or mor e recor ds. Each
r ecor d in t his file specifies a from-file and eit her a t o-file or a to-drive spec-
ificat ion. For each line in file, a Move is per for med. Wild car ds may be
used.
>Move listof.files (files
1 MOVE from-file t o-file ( opt ions
2 MOVE from-file t o-drive ( opt ions
3 MOVE file ( FILES opt ions
4 MOVE ( options
file file name of specificat ions file, wit h opt ional pat h
from-file file name of sour ce file, wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild
car ds
to-file file name of dest inat ion file, wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain
wild car ds
to-drive disk dr ive let t er for dest inat ion files
opt ions KEEP REPLACE
NOQUERY SUBDIR
NOTYPE TYPE
QUERY
370 Move
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This mode of t he Move command is convenient when one or mor e set s of
files ar e r epet it ively moved. Mer ely edit a file cont aining file descr ipt ion
pair s, such as:
>edit daily.files
customer.master:s /prior/customer.master:s
customer.history:s /prior/customer.history:s
general.ledger.*:s /prior/=.=.=:s
check.*:s /prior/=.=
>move daily.files (file noquery notype keep replace
Mode 4This is t he int er act ive for m of t he Move command wher e you ar e
pr ompt ed t o ent er a from-file and a to-file or to-drive. This can be r epeat ed
unt il all of t he desir ed files are specified and moved. The oper at ion is t er -
minat ed by ent er ing a blank line.
Options KEEP Tells Move t o not er ase t he sour ce file aft er it is successfully
moved t o t he dest inat ion. Wit h t his opt ion specified, t he Move
command operat es similar t o a CopyFile command.
NOQUERY Tells Move t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e moving each file.
This is a default opt ion when wild car ds ar e not used.
>move gl.* f (noq
"GL.MASTER:S" moved to "GL.MASTER:F".
"GL.JOURNAL:S" moved to "GL.JOURNAL:F".
"GL.HISTORY:S" moved to "GL.HISTORY:F".
NOTYPE Do not display t he r esult s of each file moved on t he st andar d
out put device. The general r esult message (t he nn files cop-
ied. message displayed pr ior t o exit ing Move) is also sup-
>move gl.* f (not
Ok to move "GL.MASTER:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to move "GL.JOURNAL:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to move "GL.HISTORY:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Move 371
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUERY Tells Move t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he sour ce file
specificat ions is t o be moved. This is a default opt ion when
>move *.data i
Ok to move "CUSTOMER.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o move quest ion is asked you may r espond
means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e moved wit h-
out being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he copy oper a-
t ion.
REPLACE Allows a file t o be moved even if it alr eady exist s at t he dest i-
nat ion locat ion. Nor mally, when t he dest inat ion file name
already exist s, Move will not per for m t he copy. This opt ion t ells
Move t hat if it alr eady exist s it should er ase t he exist ing file
and r eplace it wit h a copy of t he from-file.
If t he dest inat ion file does not exist , t his opt ion has no effect .
>move *.data:s f (replace noquery keep
"NEW.DATA:S" moved to "NEW.DATA:F".
3 files moved.
SUBDIR When from-file is a subdir ect or y specificat ion, t his opt ion spec-
ifies t hat all of t he subdir ect or ies of from-file, and t he cont ent s
of t hose subdir ect or ies, are moved t o to-file or t o-drive. If t he
subdir ect or ies do not exist at t he dest inat ion locat ion t hey ar e
creat ed.
>move *.* /Copy:i (subdir replace noquery keep
SYSTEM\samples/tws/images/animals/bear.jpg:S moved to
/COPY/tws/images/animals/bear.jpg:I
SYSTEM\samples/tws/images/animals/bird.jpg:S moved to
/COPY/tws/images/animals/bird.jpg:I
SYSTEM\samples/tws/images/animals/buttfly.jpg:S moved to
/COPY/tws/images/animals/buttfly.jpg:I
SYSTEM\samples/tws/images/animals/wolf2.jpg:S moved to
/COPY/tws/images/animals/wolf2.jpg:I
SYSTEM\samples/tws/images/animals/cows.jpg:S moved to
/COPY/tws/images/animals/cows.jpg:I
TYPE A default opt ion t hat displays t he st at us message ... moved t o
... aft er each file is successfully moved.
372 Move
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes The sour ce or from-file is er ased unless t he KEEP opt ion is specified.
Defaults The QUERY opt ion is a default if from-file cont ains wild car ds. TYPE is a
default opt ion.
See also CopyFile, Erase, Rename
Msg 373
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Msg Command
Similar t o t he Mailbox command, Msg sends a message t o anot her user . However , if t he user
is logged on, t he message is displayed on t heir console immediat ely.
Operation Mode 1This is t he mult i-line mode of t he Msg command. When t he com-
mand is invoked, you ar e pr ompt ed t o ent er one or mor e lines of t ext . To
end t he message pr ess (Enter) at t he beginning of a line wit h no t ext or
spaces in it .
>msg Ted
Enter message text terminated by empty line.
Call me as soon as you get back from lunch. Something(Enter)
important has come up that changes EVERYTHING!(Enter)
(Enter)
On Teds console, t he message appears in a pop-up window as:
The r eceiving person must acknowledge t he message by pr essing (Esc)
before it is er ased.
To ent er a blank line wit hout ending t he message, r emember t o ent er at
least one space before pr essing (Enter).
1 MSG user ( option
2 MSG user message ( option
3 MSG * ( option
4 MSG * message ( option
user account name or pr ocess number
message opt ional message t ext t o t r ansmit
opt ion TITLE
374 Msg
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2For shor t , single-line messages, t his mode allows you t o specify
t he message t ext on t he command line. If t he t ext cont ains lower case t ext ,
commas, quot at ion mar ks or ot her punct uat ion char act er s t hat you want
in t he message, you should enclose t he ent ir e message in quot at ion mar ks.
>mail dave Please call me when you get in. It's important.
>mail eric "Your package arrived, and it's big. Call me."
These single-line messages ar e displayed on t he receiving user s scr een in
a pop-up window just like t he Mode 1 messages.
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat t he message is t r ansmit t ed t o all
user s logged ont o t he syst em. This mode r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
The message is only sent t o t he act ive session of a console wit h mult iple
sessions defined.
Mode 4Similar t o Mode 2 except t hat t he message is t r ansmit t ed t o all
user s logged ont o t he syst em. This mode r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
The message is only sent t o t he act ive session of a console wit h mult iple
sessions defined.
Options TITLE t ext Specifies an alt er nat e t it le for t he r eceiving user s message
window. The t it le is displayed in t he t op fr ame, cent er ed.
When t his opt ion is not used t he default t it le of MSG From
your-account (Pid=your-pid) is used.
Notes When user is specified wit h an account name, and mor e t han one user is
logged ont o t hat account , all user s logged ont o t hat account r eceive t he
message. When t her e ar e no user s logged ont o t he account name, you ar e
asked if you want t o put t he message in t he user s mailbox. When t his hap-
pens, t he oper at ion is ident ical t o t he Mailbox command.
>msg accounts "Where is my pay check?"
The Receive messages field in t he account environment pr event s mes-
sages fr om being sent dir ect ly t o a user s scr een. Msg checks t his swit ch on
t he user s envir onment and if is is disabled, infor ms you and allows you t o
put t he message in t he user s mailbox.
Msg 375
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Receive messages field st at us is ignor ed in Mode 3 and Mode 4: The
message is sent t o all user s t hat ar e cur r ent ly logged on.
When t he message is dir ect ed t o a user of a mult iple-session console, t he
message is displayed on t hat session only. If t he session is not act ive it will
not appear unt il t he user swit ches t o t he session. Messages dir ect ed t o all
user s (* specificat ion) ar e displayed only on t he act ive session of a mult i-
ple-session console.
When a message is sent t o a user t hat alr eady has an unacknowledged
message on it s scr een, t he new message is queued and is not displayed
unt il t he pr ior message is acknowledged and cleared fr om t he display.
When a message is sent t o an account name and t her e is mor e t han one
user logged ont o t hat account name, all of t hose user s will r eceive t he mes-
sage.
Restrictions Mode 3 and Mode 4 r equir e a pr ivilege level of five.
You cannot send a message t o your self.
See also Mailbox
376 Msg
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net 377
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Command
The Net command cont r ols Cor ona net wor king and pr ovides a common int er face for many of
t he funct ions and simple client s available Cor ona.
Operation Mode 1NET: Invoke t he Net command in int er act ive mode. In t his mode
you ar e pr esent ed wit h choices allowing you t o Ping, Lookup, Tr ace, IP
Cfg, DNS, WhoIs, Finger and Scan. See Net Int er act ive on page 379.
Mode 2NET ARP: Display t he Addr ess Resolut ion Pr ot ocol t able. See
Net ARP on page 388.
1 NET
2 NET ARP -a [ -N if-addr ]
3 NET ARP -s ip-addr hw-addr [ if-addr ]
4 NET ARP -d ip-addr [ if-addr ]
5 NET BROWSE
6 NET EXEC program ( program-opt ions exec-opt ions
7 NET RECEIVE file dest ination-file ( send-rec-options
8 NET SEND file destination-file ( send-rec-opt ions
9 NET SHARE share-name path password access-mode comment
10 NET USE unc-name password
11 NET SERVER
12 NET START server-name
13 NET STOP server-name
14 NET IPCFG
15 NET function paramet ers
16 NET service host parameters
378 Net
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3NET ARP: Assign an IP addr ess t o a net wor k int er face car d.See
Net ARP on page 388.
Mode 4NET ARP: Delet e an IP addr ess fr om a net wor k int er face
car d.See Net ARP on page 388.
Mode 5NET BROWSE: Br owse t he local net wor k looking for Net wor k
File Syst em ser ver s. See Net Br owse on page 390.
Mode 6NET EXEC: When execut ed fr om a client wor kst at ion connect ion,
execut e a pr ogr am on t he client syst em. See Net Exec on page 391.
Mode 7NET RECEIVE: When execut ed fr om a client wor kst at ion connec-
t ion, r eceive a file from t he ser ver syst em. See Net Receive on page 393.
Mode 8NET SEND: When execut ed fr om a client wor kst at ion connect ion,
send a file t o t he ser ver syst em. See Net Send on page 393.
Mode 9NET SHARE: Display or maint ain shar e names t o ot her Net wor k
File Syst em dir ect or ies. See Net Shar e on page 399.
Mode 10NET USE: Display or maint ain dr ives names for at t achable
shar ed dr ives. See Net Use on page 399.
Mode 11NET SERVER: Show t he st at us of all of t he net wor k ser ver s.
This for m also allows you t o st ar t and st op t he ser ver s. See Net Ser ver on
page 401.
Mode 12NET START: St ar t t he net wor k or a specific net wor k ser ver . See
Net St art on page 402.
Mode 13NET STOP: St op t he net wor k, a specific net work ser ver or all
net wor k ser ver s. See Net St op on page 402.
Mode 14NET IPCFG: Displays t he basic configur at ion infor mat ion for
t his net wor k. See Net IPCFG on page 408.
Mode 15NET function: Per for m one of t he net wor k funct ions available
wit h Cor ona net wor king. See Net on page 409.
Mode 16NET service: Use one of t he TCP/IP simple ser vices. See Net
service on page 411.
Restrictions The Net command r equir es at least a pr ivilege level of one. Higher pr ivi-
lege levels may be r equir ed of specific funct ions of t he command.
See also DialNet, FTP, NetTerm, Ping, Quote, Setup, Telnet, THEOS WorkStation Client
Net Interact ive 379
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Interactive Command
The int er act ive for m of t he Net command pr esent s t he following for m
allowing you t o use any of funct ions shown. These funct ions, for t he most
par t , ar e useful in diagnosing pr oblems t hat you may have wit h your local
net wor k or wit h accessing a remot e ser ver .
The Ping but t on pr ovides a means of t est ing if a host can be accessed over
t he net wor k or whet her or not it is r esponding.
Host Ent er t he domain name or dot t ed IP addr ess of t he host t hat
you want t o t est .
Go Select t his but t on t o per for m t he quer y. This but t on is also t he
default for t his for m. This means t hat if you use t he (Enter) key
for t he Host fields, t his Go but t on is select ed aut omat ically.
For a descr ipt ion of t he t r ace display r efer t o t he Ping command on page
453.
See also Net Ping funct ion, Ping command
380 Net Interactive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Lookup but t on is used t o resolve a domain name int o an IP addr ess or
t o per for m a r everse lookup of an IP addr ess int o a domain name.
Host Ent er t he domain name or dot t ed IP addr ess of t he host t hat
you ar e int er est ed in.
default for t his form. This means t hat if you use t he (Enter) key
For a descr ipt ion of t he t r ace display r efer t o t he NsLookup command on
page 425.
See also NsLookup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Trace but t on t r aces t he rout e t hat a packet t akes t o get from t his
machine t o a t ar get host .
Host Ent er t he domain name t hat you want t o inquir e about . You
may also ent er t he dot t ed IP addr ess.
For a descr ipt ion of t he t r ace display r efer t o t he TraceRT command on
page 675.
See also TraceRT
382 Net Interactive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The IP Cfg but t on displays t he basic configur at ion informat ion for t his sys-
t em.
The IPCFG display shows t he informat ion for t his comput er syst ems net -
wor k configur at ion.
See also Net IPCFG
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The DNS but t on allows you t o see what is ret ur ned by t he Domain Name
Syst em when your syst em r equest s var ious t ypes of r ecor ds fr om t he
ser ver .
Domain Ent er t he domain name t hat you want t o inquir e about . You
may also ent er t he dot t ed IP addr ess.
Record Select one of t he offer ed r ecor ds (Addr ess, MX, NS, SOA). The
DNS ser ver ident ified in t he next field (Server) will be quer ied
for t his specific r ecor d.
Server Ent er t he domain name or dot t ed IP addr ess of t he DNS ser ver
t hat you want quer ied. It is possible t hat , if t hat ser ver does
not know t he answer , it might pass t he query ont o anot her
DNS ser ver .
This field is init ially filled in wit h t he DNS ser ver addr ess t hat
has been configur ed for t his syst ems net wor k access.
Go Select t his but t on t o per for m t he quer y. Not e, t his but t on is t he
for any of t he ot her fields, t his Go but t on is select ed aut omat i-
cally.
384 Net Interactive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The infor mat ion displayed by t his funct ion is always in t he gener al for m:
Id................ nnnn
Length............ lengt h of response
Code.............. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
QdCount........... number-of-questions
AnCount........... number-of-answer-records
NsCount........... number-of-nameserver-records
ArCount........... number-of-address-records
Question 1: domain-name
Type: n=record
Class: 1=IN
Following t his port ion of t he r eply is t he informat ion specific t o t he query.
That is, infor mat ion about t he domains addr ess, mail exchanges, name
server s or st art of aut hor it y dat a.
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The WhoIs but t on allows you t o issue a r equest t o t he Int er net domain
dat abase t o get t he r egist r at ion infor mat ion about a second-level domain
name.
Host Ent er t he second-level domain name t hat you want t o inquir e
about . A second-level domain name is a name wit h only t wo
par t s, a .com, .us, .org, etc. (fir st -level) and t he domain name for
t he desired ent it y such as theos, microsoft, ibm, etc. It does not
have any ot her part s of a URL such as www, ftp, etc.
Alt ernat ely, you may ent er t he administ r at ive cont act name or
t he #handle for t he administ r at ive cont act of t he domain in
quest ion. However , not all r egist r ar s suppor t querying by
name or handle.
The for mat and cont ent of t he r egist rat ion dat abase may var y depending
upon t he administ rat or for t he fir st -level domain of t he r equest ed domain.
See also WhoIs
386 Net Interactive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Finger but t on allows you t o issue a finger request t o a mail ser ver .
Host Ent er one of t he t wo for ms of r equest ing finger informat ion
username@server This synt ax r equest s informat ion about a
specific user account of t he mail ser ver .
@server This synt ax r equest s informat ion about t he list of
user account s on t he mail ser ver .
default for t his form. This means t hat if you use t he (Enter) key
Many mail ser ver s do not suppor t a Finger ser ver or do not have it enabled
for secur it y r easons. Mail ser ver s t hat do suppor t it might not have
enabled t he capabilit y t o per for m a gener al r equest wit h t he @ser ver
r equest .
See also Finger
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The Scan but t on allows you t o per form a scan of a net wor k comput er look-
ing for act ive ser ver s.
Host Ent er t he second-level domain name t hat you want t o inquir e
about . A second-level domain name is a name wit h only t wo
par t s, a .com, .us, .org, etc. (fir st -level) and t he domain name for
t he desired ent it y such as theos, microsoft, ibm, etc. It does not
have any ot her part s of a URL such as www, ftp, etc.
From Ent er t he lowest por t number t hat you want scanned.
To Ent er t he highest por t number t hat you want scanned.
Known ports only Check t his field if you want t o limit t he scan t o t he com-
mon, known por t numbers. These known por t number s ar e
list ed in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/SERVICES.TXT:S.
When t he Go but t on act ion is select ed, t he Host is quer ied for ever y por t
number bet ween From and To or , if Known ports only is checked, t he com-
mon, known por t number s bet ween From and To.
Each por t t hat r esponds is repor t ed wit h t he server name associat ed wit h
t hat por t number .
388 Net ARP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net ARP Command
The Net ARP command displays t he Addr ess Resolut ion Pr ot ocol t able and allows you t o
assign an IP addr ess t o a net work int er face car d.
Operation Mode 1Display t he Addr ess Resolut ion Pr ot ocol t able.
>net arp -a
Interface: 192.168.100
Internet Address Physical Address
192.168.1.105 00-03-47-D5-24-E1
192.168.1.104 00-E0-7D-9D-87-BB
Except for t he ent r ies t hat ar e manually added wit h Mode 2, t he ent r ies in
t he ARP ar e t r ansit or y. They ar e added each t ime t hat a local IP is
r esolved int o a specific net wor k int er face car ds MAC addr ess and t hen
r emoved a shor t t ime lat er .
Mode 2Assign an IP addr ess t o a net work int er face car d.
>net arp -s 192.168.1.157 00-e0-7d-9d-87-bb
This is t he pr imar y funct ion of t he ARP command. In some sit uat ions a
par t icular net wor k int er face car d might not be assigned an IP addr ess
t hr ough t he normal means (Setup Net Interface and DHCP). Wit h t his mode
of t he ARP command a specific int er face car d is assigned t he IP addr ess
t hat you want .
In t he above example, t he int er face car d wit h t he MAC addr ess of
00-E0-7D-9D-87-BB is assigned t he IP addr ess of 192.168.1.157. If t hat
car d alr eady has an IP addr ess assigned, t hen t his addr ess is added t o it s
list of addresses.
1 NET ARP -a [ -N if-addr ]
2 NET ARP -s ip-addr hw-addr [ if-addr ]
3 NET ARP -d ip-addr [ if-addr ]
ip-addr Dot t ed, int er net address
hw-addr Har dwar e or MAC addr ess
if-addr Int er face addr ess
Net ARP 389
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unlike t he aut omat ic ent r ies in t he ARP t able, t hese manual ent ries ar e
not t r ansit or y and r emain unt il t he ent r y is manually delet ed (Mode 3) or
t he syst em is rest ar t ed.
Mode 3Delet e an IP addr ess fr om a net work int er face car d.
>net arp -d 192.168.1.101
>net arp -d 192.168.1.103 00-1a-c9-9d-45-df
In t he fir st example above, t he ARP t able is sear ched for any ent r y of t he
addr ess 192.168.1.101. If an ent r y is found it is delet ed fr om t he t able.
The associat ed net wor k int er face car d is inst r uct ed t o r emove t hat IP fr om
it s int er nal list of addr esses t hat it r esponds t o.
The second example is similar t o t he first except t hat t he ARP t able is
sear ched for an ent ry t hat has t he IP addr ess of 192.168.1.103 and has
t he specific MAC addr ess of 00-1A-C9-9D-45-DF. If an ent ry is found wit h
t hat combinat ion t hen it is r emoved from t he t able and t he int erface car d
is r epr ogr ammed.
Options The only opt ion available wit h t his command is t he -N opt ion t hat might be
used wit h Mode 1. When it is used t he ARP t able display is limit ed t o t he
ent r ies mat ching t he specified MAC addr ess and int erface car d.
390 Net Browse
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Browse Command
The Net Browse command scans t he local net wor k comput er s and r epor t s on t he syst ems cur -
rent ly available for net work file syst em access.
Operation The TNFS client on t his syst em is quer ied for comput er s on t he net work
wit h net wor k file syst ems available. The list of comput er s available is dis-
played.
All syst ems t hat have a net wor k file syst em inst alled and oper at ing ar e
r eport ed. There is some lat ency inher ent in t he r eport ing syst em and it is
possible t hat a syst em will be list ed t hat has been power ed off for as long
as 45 minut es.
You may get t he list of shar e names available on a syst em by posit ioning
t he highlight bar t o t he syst ems name and pr essing (Enter) or (+). If t her e
ar e any shar es defined on t hat syst em t hey will be list ed. Similar ly, you
can r emove t he display of t he shar e names for a syst em by pr essing t he (-)
key when t he syst em name is hight light ed.
Restrictions Ther e must be a TNFS client running on t his comput er syst em.
See also Ping, Setup TNFS
NET BROWSE
Net Exec 391
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Exec Command
The Net Exec command is used fr om a client wor kst at ion connect ion t o a THEOS host and
causes t he client syst em t o execut e a pr ogr am.
Operation For ces t he client syst em t o execut e program. You must already be con-
nect ed as a client t o a THEOS ser ver t o use t his mode. NetTerm, Telnet and
THEOS WorkStation Client (TWS) connect ions can use t his command.
When specifying program, be sur e t o specify t he command in t he for mat
r equir ed by t he client s oper at ing syst em. For inst ance, assuming t hat t he
client connect ion is fr om TWS:
>net exec "edit c:\autoexec.bat"
>net exec "edit /autoexec.bat:c"
Only t he fir st command is pr oper because t hat is t he format used for spec-
ifying dir ect or y pat hs and dr ive codes on Windows and DOS syst ems. The
second command will not edit t he desired file.
The exec-opt ions can be specified t o cont r ol t he display of t he command on
t he client syst em. These opt ions ar e specified at t he end of t he command
line. To avoid confusion it is best t o enclose t he pr ogr am specificat ion
wit hin quot at ion mar ks:
>net exec "list some.file (printer" (nowait
The above command might be used wit h a Telnet or NetTerm connect ion
fr om a THEOS syst em and it execut es t he command line
list some.file (printer
on t he client syst em as a backgr ound t ask. The Net command r et ur ns con-
t rol t o you as soon as t he t ask is st ar t ed.
NET EXEC program ( program-options exec-opt ions
program pr ogr am t o execut e on client , wit h par amet er s
exec-options MAXIMIZE NORMAL WAIT
MINIMIZE NOWAIT
392 Net Exec
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options The following opt ions may be used t he NET EXEC command. The Maximum,
Minimum and Normal opt ions are effect ive only when t he client is a THEOS
WorkStation Client.
Maximum Indicat es t hat t he pr ogr am is execut ed in it s maximized mode.
When neit her t his opt ion nor t he Minimum opt ion is used, t he
program is execut ed wit h it s default size of window.
Minimum Indicat es t hat t he pr ogr am is execut ed as a minimized icon.
Normal The pr ogr am is execut ed in it s default or nor mal-sized window.
NoWait Tells t he THEOS Ser ver t o not wait for complet ion of t he pr o-
gr am on t he client syst em. When execut ed fr om t he command
line, cont r ol r et ur ns t o t he CSI and you may ent er anot her
THEOS command. When execut ed fr om an applicat ion pr o-
gr am or an EXEC, cont r ol r et ur ns t o t he calling pr ogr am.
Not e: When t he client syst em is a THEOS syst em, t he program
is execut ed as a backgr ound t ask. This means t hat it does not
have a console keyboar d available t o it . If t he program needs a
keyboar d it will exit .
Wait A default opt ion t hat t ells t he THEOS Ser ver t o wait for com-
plet ion of t he program on t he client syst em befor e r et urning
cont r ol t o you or t he calling program.
Restrictions When t he client syst em is a THEOS 4.x or THEOS Corona syst em, do not
use t he Maximum, Minimum or Normal opt ions.
Net Receive 393
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Receive Command
Net Send Command
The Net Receive and Net Send commands allow you t o r eceive and send files when a NetTerm
or TWS client connect ion is made wit h a THEOS host syst em or dir ect ly fr om a syst em con-
nect ed t o a net wor k.
Operation All t r ansfer s ar e r elat ive t o t he client syst em issuing t he r equest . For
inst ance, a Net Receive means a file is r eceived on t he client syst em; a Net
Send means a file is sent fr om t he client syst em.
Mode 1Tr ansfers file fr om t he ser ver t o t his client . You must alr eady be
connect ed as a client t o a THEOS ser ver and you must be logged ont o an
account t o use t his mode. Client connect ions ar e made wit h t he NetTerm or
t he THEOS Workstation Client pr ogr ams. (Because t he Telnet pr ot ocol does
not suppor t file t r ansfer s, connect ions made wit h a Telnet client cannot
use t he file t r ansfer capabilit ies of t he Net command.)
>net receive data.file /private/data.fil:a
The file and destination-file can be specified wit h wild car ds. The synt ax
and oper at ion of t he wild car ds is similar t o t he synt ax and oper at ion of
wild car ds used wit h t he CopyFile command.
>net receive *.data:s
>net receive *.data:s =.=
1 NET RECEIVE file dest inat ion-file ( send-rec-options
2 NET RECEIVE url ( send-rec-options
3 NET SEND file destination-file ( send-rec-opt ions
4 NET SEND url ( send-rec-opt ions
file file name t o send t o or r eceive fr om THEOS ser ver , wit h
opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
dest ination-file name t o assign t o file on r eceiving syst em, wit h opt ional pat h
send-rec-options ABORT NEWFILE OLDER SKIP
FILES NOTYPE REPLACE TRANSLATE
url Unifor m Resour ce Locat or of file t o r eceive or send
394 Net S end
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The above t wo command r eceive all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA on t he S
dr ive of t he host syst em. The files ar e r eceived wit h t he file names
unchanged int o t he cur rent account , root dir ect or y.
>net receive *.data:s =.newdata
In t he above command, all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA on t he S dr ive of t he
host syst em ar e received on t he client syst em. They ar e r eceived on t he
wit h t he same file-name but t he file-t ype changed t o NEWDATA for each file.
>net receive my.library.* your.library.=
In t his command, each of t he member files of MY.LIBRARY on t he host syst em
ar e r eceived on t he client syst em int o t he librar y YOUR.LIBRARY. The mem-
ber -names ar e not changed. Obviously, t his command could only be used
when t he client is NetTerm on a THEOS syst em as ot her oper at ing syst ems
do not have libr ar ies.
>net receive file*.data abc=x.files
The above command sends all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA and wit h a
file-name t hat st ar t s wit h FILE on t he host syst em. The files ar e r eceived on
t he client syst em wit h t he file-name changed t o ABC=X wher e t he equal sign
is r eplaced wit h t he por t ion r epresent ed by t he * in t he source file-name.
For inst ance, FILEONE.DATA is r eceived as ABCONEX.DATA, FILE486.DATA is
r eceived as ABC486X.DATA, et c.
>net send *.data* =.new=
The specificat ion of file and destination-file must use t he file naming con-
vent ions of it s oper at ing syst em. If t he dest inat ion is a THEOS syst em
t hen use THEOS naming convent ions; if t he dest inat ion is a Windows
syst em t hen use Windows naming convent ions.
When t he dest ination-file is specified wit h a dr ive code t he file is r eceived
wit h a file name equal t o t he sour ce file name but on t he designat ed dr ive.
When destination-file is omit t ed, t he file is r eceived wit h t he source file
name on it s default dr ive.
Mode 2Receives a file from some syst em on t he net wor k t hat is accessi-
ble t o t his client . The r emot e syst em and t he file t o be t r ansmit t ed is iden-
t ified by t he url. The name of t he file r eceived is t aken fr om t he file name
por t ion of t he url. The file will be r eceived int o t he cur r ent account , cur -
r ent working dir ect or y on t he syst em dr ive.
>net receive ftp://fileserver/sample.txt
Not e t hat , in t he above example, t he url specifies t he net wor k prot ocol
(ftp://). This is necessar y for t wo r easons. First , it t ells t he Net command
Net S end 395
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t hat t his is a url and not a simple file name. Second, it specifies t he file
t ransfer pr ot ocol and default por t t o use for t he file t r ansfer .
Files may only be r eceived fr om an FTP or HTTP ser ver and t he appr opr i-
at e pr ot ocol must be specified in t he url. The url must also specify t he host
and pat h of t he file t o r eceive. It may specify t he account and account pass-
wor d of t he owning account on t he r emot e ser ver . When t he account is not
specified t he anonymous account is used.
For a complet e descript ion of t he url synt ax and usage, r efer t o Appendix
D: File Refer ences, on page 247 in t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat -
ing S ystem Reference.
Mode 3Tr ansfer s file fr om t his client t o t he THEOS ser ver (RECEIVE) or
t ransfer s file fr om t he THEOS ser ver t o t his client (SEND). You must
alr eady be connect ed as a client t o a THEOS ser ver and you must be
logged ont o an account t o use t his mode. Client connect ions ar e made wit h
t he NetTerm or t he THEOS Workstation Client pr ogr ams. (Because t he Telnet
pr ot ocol does not suppor t file t r ansfer s, connect ions made wit h a Telnet
client cannot use t he file t r ansfer capabilit ies of t he Net command.)
>net send c:\windows\readme.txt
>net receive data.file /private/data.fil:a
The send or r eceive dir ect ion is r elat ive t o t he client syst em. Therefor e, Net
Receive receives a file fr om t he host on t he client ; Net Send sends a file
fr om t he client t o t he host .
Bot h SEND and RECEIVE allow t he file and destination-file t o be specified
wit h wild car ds. The synt ax and oper at ion of t he wild car ds is similar t o
t he synt ax and oper at ion of wild car ds used wit h t he CopyFile command.
>net send *.data:s
The above command sends all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA on t he S dr ive.
The files ar e r eceived wit h t he file names unchanged.
>net send *.data:s =.=
This command per for ms t he same funct ion as t he fir st command: All files
wit h a file-t ype of DATA on t he S dr ive ar e sent and r eceived wit h t he same
file names.
>net send *.data:s =.newdata
In t he above command, all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA on t he S dr ive ar e
sent t o t he host syst em. They ar e r eceived on t he host syst em wit h t he
same file-name but t he file-t ype is changed t o NEWDATA for each file.
396 Net S end
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>net send my.library.* your.library.=
In t his command, each of t he member files of MY.LIBRARY ar e sent t o t he
host syst em and r eceived int o t he host syst ems libr ar y YOUR.LIBRARY. The
member -names are not changed.
>net send file*.data abc=x.files
The above command sends all files wit h a file-t ype of dat a and wit h a
file-name t hat st ar t s wit h file. The files ar e r eceived on t he host syst em
wit h t he file-name changed t o ABC=X wher e t he equal sign is r eplaced wit h
t he port ion r epr esent ed by t he * in t he sour ce file name. For inst ance,
FILEONE.DATA is r eceived as ABCONEX.DATA, FILE486.DATA is r eceived as
ABC486X.DATA, etc.
>net send *.data* =.new=
In t his example, all files wit h a file-t ype of dat a ar e sent t o t he host sys-
t em. The host syst em r eceives t hese files wit h t he same file-name but t he
file-t ype is changed t o NEW= wher e t he equal sign is r eplaced wit h t he
sour ce files file-t ype wild car d component . For inst ance, FILE1.DATA111 is
r eceived as FILE1.NEW111, FILE486.DATA2002 is r eceived as FILE486.NEW2002.
The specificat ion of file and destination-file must use t he file naming con-
vent ions of it s oper at ing syst em. If t he sour ce is a THEOS syst em t hen use
THEOS naming convent ions; if t he sour ce is a Windows syst em t hen use
Windows naming convent ions.
When t he dest ination-file is specified wit h a dr ive code t he file is r eceived
wit h a file name equal t o t he sour ce file name but on t he designat ed dr ive.
When destination-file is omit t ed, t he file is r eceived wit h t he source file
name on it s default dr ive.
Mode 4Sends a file fr om t his syst em t o a r emot e syst em on t he net work.
The r emot e syst em is ident ified by t he url.
The name of t he file sent is t aken fr om t he file name por t ion of t he url. The
file must be in t he cur r ent account , cur r ent wor king dir ect or y on t he
syst em dr ive.
>net send http://fileserver/myfile.txt
Files may only be sent t o an FTP or HTTP ser ver and t he appr opr iat e pr o-
t ocol must be specified in t he url. The url must also specify t he host and
pat h of t he file t o send. It may specify t he account and account passwor d.
When t he account is not specified t he anonymous account is used.
Net S end 397
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For a complet e descript ion of t he url synt ax and usage, r efer t o Appendix
D: File Refer ences, on page 247 in t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat -
ing S ystem Reference.
Options Wit h t he except ion of Files and Translate, t hey cont rol t he act ions t o be
t aken when t he r eceiving syst em alr eady has a file wit h t he same file
name.
Abort Specifies t hat , if t he r eceiving syst em has an exist ing file wit h
t he same name as file, t he t ransfer is t o t er minat e wit hout
r eplacing t his file or at t empt ing t o t ransfer any ot her files.
Files The files list ed in file ar e sent t o or r eceived fr om t he ser ver .
file must be an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one or t wo file
descr ipt ions per line. The SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC
files cr eat ed by t he FILELIST command and t he FOUND.EXEC cr e-
at ed by t he LOOK command can be used for t his specificat ion
file. You may also creat e t he specificat ion file wit h an edit or or
applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, t he FILELIST command is used t o creat e a list of
files t o be compr essed:
>filelist a (10/1/01 10/8/01 exec
A file now exist s t hat list s all of t he files on t he A disk t hat
have been changed bet ween 10/01/2001 and 10/08/2001. The
following command will t r ansfer t hese files fr om t he ser ver t o
t he client syst em:
>net receive selected.exec (files
When a r ecor d in file cont ains t wo file descr ipt ions, t he fir st
file name specifies t he file t o t r ansfer and t he second file name
specifies t he name t hat it will be saved as on t he r eceiving sys-
t em.
NewFile Specifies t hat , if t he r eceiving syst em has an exist ing file wit h
t he same name as file, you ar e t o be asked if it should be
r eplaced wit h t he new file. The met hod of asking and t he
opt ions available at t hat t ime ar e dependent upon t he r eceiv-
ing syst em.
NoType Suppr esses t he display of t he t r ansfer pr ogr ess window.
Older This opt ion specifies t hat t he file is only t r ansfer r ed if t he file
does not exist on t he dest inat ion or if t he t ime-st amp of t he file
398 Net S end
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
on t he dest inat ion syst em is older t han t he t ime-st amp of t he
file on t he sour ce syst em.
Replace This is t he default opt ion specifying t hat , if t he r eceiving sys-
t em has an exist ing file wit h t he same name as file, t hat file is
r eplaced wit h t he file fr om t he sending syst em.
Skip Specifies t hat , if t he r eceiving syst em has an exist ing file wit h
t he same name as file, t he t r ansfer is t o skip t his file and con-
t inue wit h t he next file in t he list .
Translate When t he file being t r ansfer r ed is an ASCII st ream file, t he
r ecor d t er minat ors ar e t o be t r anslat ed t o t he r eceiving sys-
t ems synt ax (CR for THEOS, CRLF for DOS/Windows).
Restrictions This command may only be used when you ar e connect ed t o t he host com-
put er using NetTerm, Telnet or THEOS Wor kSt at ion client soft war e.
Net S hare 399
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Share Command
Net Use Command
The Net Share and Net Use commands define and maint ain t he names used by ot her s t o
access t he TNFS r esour ces on t his comput er (SHARE) and for t his comput er t o have client
access t o t he TNFS r esour ces on ot her comput er s (USE).
Operation Mode 1Defines a shar e name for a dir ect or y on one of t he local disks.
This shar e name is what ot her comput er s on t he net wor k will see when
t hey r equest access t o t his syst ems files. The ot her syst ems do not r efer t o
a disk dr ive but t o a shar e name on t his syst em.
Mode 2Removes a shar e name definit ion on t his syst em. Aft er r emoval
and aft er r est ar t ing t he TNFS ser ver on t his syst em, ot her comput er s on
t he net wor k will no longer have access t o t he dir ect or y t hat t his shar e
name r efer red t o.
Mode 3Displays t he cur r ent ly defined share names on t his syst em.
1 NET SHARE share-name path password access-mode comment
2 NET SHARE share-name
3 NET SHARE
4 NET USE unc-name
5 NET USE unc-name password
6 NET USE unc-name ( DELETE
7 NET USE
share-name One t o eight char act er name for dir ect or y
path Pat h t o direct or y on a local disk
password Passwor d r equir ed for r emot e access t o shar e-name
access-mode Access mode permit t ed: RO for r ead-only, RW for r ead & writ e
access
comment Text describing shar e
unc-name Unifor m Naming Convent ion name for r emot e shar e
400 Net Use
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4Adds unc-name t o t he list of use names defined on t his syst em.
This synt ax is only valid if t he unc-name does not r equir e a passwor d t o
access it . When passwor d is r equir ed, use t he Mode 5 synt ax.
Mode 5Similar t o Mode 4 except t he use name is added wit h a password.
If t he shar e name is defined on t he ser ver syst em wit h a passwor d, you
must specify t hat same password on t he use name defined her e. This pass-
word is supplied t o t he r emot e syst em when a connect ion is est ablished
fr om t his client syst em t o t he file ser ver syst em.
The password should be enclosed wit hin quot at ion mar ks t o preserve t he
casemode and spacing.
Mode 6This synt ax will delet e t he use name fr om t he list of use names
defined on t his client syst em.
Mode 7Displays t he cur r ent ly defined use names t o dir ect or ies on ot her
syst ems.
Restrictions The Net command r equir es a pr ivilege level of one.
Net S erver 401
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Server Command
The Net Server command examines t he ser ver s inst alled on t his syst em and r epor t s about
t heir st at us in a form t hat also allows you t o change t he st at us.
Operation The syst em is examined for each of t he possible ser ver s. If a ser ver exist s
on t he syst em (it s pr imar y pr ogr am file is found) t hen t he st at us of t hat
ser ver is shown. The configur at ion of t he ser ver is examined t o det er mine
how it is nor mally st ar t ed and t hat st ar t up mode is also shown.
Server list box Each ser ver inst alled on t he syst em is list ed along wit h it s
cur rent st at us and st ar t up mode. Use t his ar ea t o select a
ser ver t hat you want t o change.
Stop/Start Depending upon t he cur r ent st at us of a select ed ser ver , t he
but t on her e will display eit her St op or St ar t , what ever is
t he opposit e of t he ser ver s cur r ent st at e. Pr ess t his but t on if
you want t o change t he st at us of t he select ed ser ver .
Mode Press t his but t on if you want t o change t he st ar t up mode of t he
select ed ser ver . If t he ser ver is curr ent ly st ar t ed manually,
pr essing t his but t on will change it t o st ar t aut omat ically t he
next t ime t hat t he syst em is boot ed. If t he ser ver is st ar t ed
aut omat ically, pr essing t his but t on will change it t o only st ar t
manually.
Restrictions This mode of t he Net command r equir es a pr ivilege level of 3 or bet t er .
See also Net Start, Net Stop
NET SERVER
402 Net S tart
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net Start Command
Net Stop Command
The Net Start and Net Stop commands st ar t or st op net wor k ser ver s on t his syst em.
Operation Mode 1St art s t he net wor k or st art s one of t he net wor k ser ver s inst alled
on t his syst em.
>net start network
The net wor k can be aut omat ically st ar t ed at syst em boot up if t he configu-
r at ion r equest s it (r efer t o t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem
Installation and S etup Guide). If it is not st ar t ed at boot up it can be
st ar t ed manually wit h t he above command. When t he net wor k is st ar t ed,
eit her aut omat ically or manually, ot her net work ser ver s ar e also st ar t ed if
t hey have been enabled t o st art aut omat ically.
Mode 2The net work must be st ar t ed befor e any of t he net wor k ser ver s.
If you at t empt t o st ar t a ser ver wit hout fir st st ar t ing t he net wor k t he mes-
sage Net wor k not oper at ional is displayed and t he r et ur n code is set t o
one.
Once t he net wor k is st ar t ed, you may st art any of t he ot her net wor k ser v-
er s inst alled on t his syst em. See Servers on page 403 for a list and
descr ipt ion of t hese ser ver s.
1 NET START NETWORK
2 NET START server-name
3 NET START SERVERS
4 NET STOP server-name
5 NET STOP SERVERS
6 NET STOP NETWORK
server-name DHCP LPD NETTAPE THEOPOST
DNS PPP TCP TNFS
FTP NETALIVE TDBS TWINDOWS
HTTP NETEXEC TELNET WEBMAINT
LOGIN NETPRT TFTP
Net S t op 403
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3If t he net work is st ar t ed, t his command st ar t s all of t he net wor k
ser ver s t hat have been defined as aut omat ic st ar t but ar e not cur rent ly
r unning.
Mode 4St ops a net wor k ser ver t hat is cur r ent ly r unning on t his syst em.
See Ser ver s on page 403 for a list of t he ser ver s t hat might be st ar t ed.
You can per form a Show Servers t o see a list of t he cur rent ly act ive net wor k
ser ver s.
Mode 5St ops all of t he ser ver s t hat ar e cur r ent ly r unning on t his sys-
t em. You can perform a Show Servers t o see a list of t he curr ent ly act ive
net wor k servers.
Mode 6St ops all net wor king oper at ions on t his syst em by st opping all of
t he server s and t hen st opping t he net wor k ser ver it self.
Servers DHCP The Dynamic Host Configur at ion Pr ot ocol ser ver is used by
ot her comput er s on t he local net wor k for net wor k IP number
assignment and ot her configur at ion infor mat ion.
The DHCP Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
Host ingSer ver Plus Pak or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
DNS The Domain Name Syst em ser ver is used by t his syst em and
ot her syst ems on t he local or wide ar ea net wor k for domain
name t o IP number r esolut ion of t he var ious ser ver s on t his
local net wor k. Gener ally, t her e is only one DNS server enabled
on a local net wor k.
The DNS Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
Host ingSer ver Plus Pak or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
ExecNet The ExecNet ser ver allows r emot e client s t o execut e com-
mands and programs on t his syst em.
The ExecNet Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
FileSer ver , Host ingSer ver , WebSer ver or t he Net Ser ver Plus
Paks.
FTP The File Tr ansfer Pr ot ocol ser ver is used by t his syst em and
ot her syst em on t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey
want t o t r ansfer files fr om t his comput er using an FTP client
pr ogr am. Synonyms accept ed for FTP include FTPSERVER.
>net start ftp
>net stop ftp
404 Net S top
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The THEOS FTP Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h
t he WebSer ver Plus Pak or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
HTTP The HyperText Tr ansfer Pr ot ocol ser ver is used by t his syst em
and ot her syst ems on t he local or wide ar ea net work when t hey
want t o use t his syst em as a web ser ver . Synonyms accept ed
for HTTP include HTTPSERVER, WEB and WEBSERVER.
>net start web
>net stop web
The THEOS WebSer ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h
t he WebSer ver Plus Pak or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
Login The login ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems on
t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey want t o connect t o
t his syst em using a NetTerm client or a THEOS Wor kSt at ion
client . Synonyms accept ed for LOGIN include NETLOGIN.
>net start login
>net stop login
The Login Ser ver may be st ar t ed aut omat ically when t he net -
wor k is st art ed. Refer t o t he Setup Net Login Server command.
(See THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Inst allat ion
and Set up Guide.) This ser ver must be st ar t ed on t his syst em
t o allow ot her client s on t he net wor k t o use t his syst em as a
host when connect ing as a user wit h t he THEOS WorkStation Cli-
ent (Windows-based client s) or t he NetTerm (THEOS-based cli-
ent s).
LPD The Line Pr int er Daemon ser ver is used by t his syst em and
ot her syst ems on t he local or wide area net wor k when t hey
want t o access t he print er s cont r olled by t his comput er .
The LPD Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
FileServer, Host ingSer ver , WebSer ver or t he Net Ser ver Plus
Paks.
Mail The Mail ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems on
t he local or wide ar ea net wor k t o send or r eceive mail using
t his syst em as t he mail ser ver . PostOffice is a synonym name
for t his ser ver .
>net start mail
>net stop mail
Net S t op 405
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The THEOS MailSer ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h
t he Host ingSer ver or t he Net Ser ver Plus Pak. Bot h t he
MAILSERVER and MAIL names may be used t o r efer t o t he Mail
Ser ver .
The Mail Ser ver must be st ar t ed on t his syst em t o allow ot her
client s on t he net wor k t o use t his syst em as a POP3 host for
t heir mail client s.
NetAlive The Net Alive ser ver is used by t his syst em t o monit or access t o
local or wide ar ea net wor k ser ver s and per for m act ions when
t hey st ar t or st op being available t o t his comput er .
The Net Alive Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
Paks.
NetWork The Net wor k ser ver r efer s t o t he TCP/IP and Et her net server .
It is t he soft war e used by all ot her ser ver s for communicat ion
capabilit ies and it must be st ar t ed befor e any ot her ser ver .
PPP The Point -t o-Point Pr ot ocol ser ver is used by t his syst em t o
est ablish a connect ion t o an Int er net Ser vice Pr ovider (ISP)
using a PPP client such as DialNet. Synonyms accept ed for PPP
include DIALNET, DIALUP and PPPSERVER.
>net start dialup
>net stop dialup
The DIALUP ser vice is used by t he PPP client DialNet and is
necessar y if you use a dial-up or modem t o connect t o anot her
net work such as t he Int ernet .
PrtNet The Pr t Net ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems on
t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey want t o access t he
pr int er s cont rolled by t his comput er .
The Pr t Net Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
Paks.
TapeNet The TapeNet ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems
on t he local or wide area net wor k when t hey want t o use t he
t ape dr ives cont r olled by t his comput er .
The TapeNet Server is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
Paks.
406 Net S top
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TCP The TCP ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems on
t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey want t o use t he sim-
ple TCP ser vices on t his comput er . See Ser vices on page 412
for a list of t hese ser vices.
>net start tcp
>net stop tcp
The TCPSERVE, TCPSERVER and TCP names may be used t o
r efer t o t he TCP Simple Ser vices Ser ver . A br ief descr ipt ion of
t he TCP Simple Ser vices can be found on page 411.
The TCP Simple Ser vices may be st ar t ed aut omat ically when
t he net wor k is st ar t ed. Refer t o t he Setup Net Simple TCP Ser-
vices in t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em
Inst allat ion and Set up Guide. These ser vices must be st ar t ed
on t his syst em t o allow ot her client s on t he net wor k t o use t his
syst em as t he host for t he TCP simple ser vices descr ibed on
page 411.
TDB The THEOS Dat aBase ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her
syst ems on t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey want t o
use t he THEOS dat abase managed by t his comput er .
Telnet The Telnet server is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems on
t he local or wide ar ea net wor k when t hey want t o connect t o
t his syst em using a Telnet client applicat ion.
TFTP The Tr ivial File Tr ansfer Prot ocol ser ver is used by t his syst em
and ot her syst ems on t he local or wide ar ea net work when t hey
want t o t r ansfer files from t his comput er using an TFTP client
program.
The TFTP Server is an opt ional product available wit h t he
FileServer, Host ingSer ver , WebSer ver or t he Net Ser ver Plus
Paks.
TNFS The THEOS Net wor k File Syst em ser ver is used by t his sys-
t em and ot her syst ems on t he local or wide ar ea net wor k
The TNFS Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
FileServer or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
TWindows The TWindows ser ver is used by t his syst em and ot her syst ems
on t he local or wide ar ea net work when t hey want t o connect t o
t his syst em using a THEOS Wor kSt at ion client .
Net S t op 407
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WebIndex The Web Index ser ver is a companion ser ver t o t he HTTP
ser ver . It pr ovides wor d indexing and sear ching capabilit ies of
t he web pages st or ed on t he HTTP ser ver .
The WebIndex Ser ver is an opt ional pr oduct available wit h t he
WebSer ver or t he Net Ser ver Plus Paks.
WebMaint The Web Maint enance ser ver is used by ot her syst ems on t he
local or wide ar ea net wor k t o access t his comput er and perfor m
syst em and net work ser ver maint enance.
The WebMaint Server is an opt ional product available wit h t he
Paks.
Mode 7St ops a net wor k ser ver .
Mode 8St ops all net wor k ser ver s.
Restrictions The Net command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
To use t he START or STOP funct ions, you must be logged ont o t he SYSTEM
account (id = zer o) and have a pr ivilege level of five.
408 Net IPCFG
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net IPCFG Command
The Net IPCFG command display var ious configur at ion infor mat ion about t he net wor k.
Operation Repor t s t he cur r ent net wor k configur at ion infor mat ion:
>net ipcfg
Host Name: Saturn
Domain: my.lan
NIC-1: Realtek 8139 10/100 Fast Ethernet
MAC = 00-00-21-C3-1E-44
IP = 192.168.1.100 / 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.1.1
DNS: 24.0.53.55
24.0.53.56
See also WhoAmI
NET IPCFG
Net 409
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net function Command
The Net function commands display var ious configur at ion infor mat ion about t he net wor k and
who is cur rent ly connect ed t o t he net wor k.
Operation Invokes t he r equest ed function, displaying t he r esult s on stdout.
Functions Disconnect This funct ion can only be used while you ar e connect ed t o t he
Login Ser ver via a NetTerm or a THEOS WorkStation Client.
This funct ion disconnect s you fr om t he host Login Ser ver .
Alt hough t his is equivalent t o t he Exit command, t his Discon-
nect funct ion cannot be used on a Telnet connect while t he Exit
command can be used wit h all connect ions.
Ping Br oadcast s a ping on t he net wor k request ing t hat all nodes
r espond. The r esponding nodes ar e displayed. This display is
ident ical t o t he Ping * command.
>net ping
Network Broadcast Ping
Name Address
Accounting 192.168.87.12
Executive 192.168.87.15
Administration 192.168.87.63
3 Network nodes responded.
PingAll Similar t o t he Ping funct ion, a ping is br oadcast t o all nodes
r equest ing t hat t hey respond. However , it does t his r epeat edly
ever y few seconds unt il t he program is exit ed wit h (Esc) or (F9).
This is ident ical t o t he Ping * * command.
NET funct ion
function DISCONNECT PINGALL
PING WHO
410 Net
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Who All THEOS login ser ver s t hat t his syst em can access ar e dis-
played along wit h t he client nodes t hat ar e act ively connect ed
t o t hose ser ver s.
>net who
Restrictions A pr ivilege level of five is r equired t o use t he Who funct ion.
See also DialNet, Exit, NetTerm, Ping, Setup, Telnet, THEOS WorkStation Client
Server/Client Connect Date&Time Pid Account
Administration
Executive
Accounting
Plant
Development
Documentation
1 Sep 2001 8:15am
1 Sep 2001 7:48am
1 Sep 2001 5:00am
1 Sep 2001 10:15am
6
7
8
9
Brad
Payroll
Products
Develop
Net service 411
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Net service Command
The Net service commands est ablish a client -ser ver r elat ionship bet ween t his syst em (client )
and a TCP/IP Simple Ser vices ser ver .
Operation Invokes t he TCP/IP Simple Services server-funct ion.
The ser ver -funct ions r efer t o t he TCP Simple Ser vices t hat ar e available
wit h net wor k operat ions. These ser vices ar e st andar d ser vices available
fr om most TCP/IP ser ver s.
TCP Simple Services ar e not necessar ily enabled at all t imes. They may be
enabled aut omat ically if Enable TCP Simple Ser vices is checked in t he
Setup Net Simple TCP Services (see THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing
S ystem Installation and S etup Guide). They may also be st ar t ed manually
wit h t he Net Start TCPSERVE funct ion described on page 402.
A host name may be specified following t he service name. When host is not
specified t he implied host is LOCALHOST, which is t he default name of
t his comput er s net wor k addr ess. When a host is specified, t hat host is
used for t he TCP Simple Ser vice inst ead of your syst ems TCP ser ver . This
capabilit y is par t icular ly useful for t he Time ser vice. By specifying a host
whose t ime is known t o be accur at e, you can find out and opt ionally set
your syst em t o t he cur r ent t ime.
service CHARGEN ECHO TIME DAYTIME
host TCP/IP addr ess or name fr om t he host names dat abase.
LOCALHOST may be used t o access t his syst em.
parameters Opt ional par amet er s t hat may be used wit h t he service
412 Net service
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Services Chargen Gener at es a cont inuous sequence of char act er s unt il t er mi-
nat ed by ent r y of (Esc). Alt hough t r ivial, t his ser vice is valuable
when t est ing and debugging net wor k applicat ions t hat use
dat a fr om a ser ver .
The t ext st r ing gener at ed by t he CHARGEN ser vice is a
72-char act er line of ASCII char act er s in normal collat ing
sequence. Each successive line incr ement s t he st ar t ing char ac-
t er by one.
>net chargen
!"#$&()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ...
!"#$&()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR...
>net chargen 192.168.1.102
CHARGEN connect() Connection was refused
>net chargen 192.168.1.104
!"#$&()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ...
!"#$&()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR...
In t he second example above, a host was specified in an
at t empt t o have t hat host use it s CHARGEN ser vice t o gener -
at e t he t ext st r ings. That host was a valid host but it s TCP
CHARGEN ser ver was not st ar t ed.
The t hir d example above also specified a host. In t his case, t hat
host s CHARGEN ser ver was available and it st ar t ed gener at -
ing and sending t ext st r ings t o t his client .
DayTime Displays t he cur r ent dat e and t ime fr om t he ser ver . Alt hough
t her e is no specific st andar d for t he for mat of t he st r ing
r et ur ned, t he THEOS DAYTIME ser vice r et ur ns it for mat t ed as
day-name, month-name day-number, year time UTC-offset .
>net daytime
Tuesday, November 26, 2001 12:08:15 -0800
Not e: The UTC-offset is only displayed if t he syst em has been
configur ed for t ime zones and t he UTC offset has been defined.
Use t he SYSGEN command t o set t hese at t r ibut es.
Like t he ot her TCP services, t his ser vice can get t he infor ma-
t ion fr om anot her ser ver by specifying a host.
>net daytime time-nw.nist.gov
52219 01-11-06 17:54:13 00 0 0 224.7 UTC(NIST) *
Net service 413
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
As illust r at ed in t he above example, ot her syst ems DAYTIME
ser ver s might not r et ur n t he dat e and t ime in t he same for mat
as used by t he THEOS DAYTIME ser ver .
Echo All dat a sent t o t he ser ver is echoed back t o t his client .
>net echo
>This is a test of the TCP/IP echo command.
<This is a test of the TCP/IP echo command.
This ser vice may also be r equest ed fr om anot her host syst em.
Time Displays t he t ime on a net wor k ser ver or get s t hat t ime and
set s t he t ime on your syst em.
Invoking t he TIME funct ion wit h no host displays t he cur r ent
syst em t ime on your syst em.
>net time
Tue Nov 06 15:22:20 2001
When a host is specified wit h t he TIME ser vice, t he cur r ent
t ime fr om t hat host is r et r ieved and displayed.
>net time time-a.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
Tue Nov 06 15:24:45 2001
Not e: The above host name is for t he Nat ional Inst it ut e of
St andar ds and Technology (NIST), locat ed in Boulder , Colo-
r ado. It r epor t s a t ime t hat is accur at e t o t he near est second,
depending upon t he t ime lag of t he Int ernet . Ther e ar e ot her
t ime ser ver s maint ained by NIST and t hey can be found by vis-
it ing t he NIST web page at HTTP://WWW.BOULDER.NIST.GOV/TIME-
FREQ/SERVICE/TIME-SERVERS.HTML.
It does not mat t er wher e t he server is physically locat ed
because t he t ime infor mat ion pr ovided by any t ime ser ver will
include it s UTC offset . If your syst em is configur ed pr oper ly for
UTC offset t he t ime is aut omat ically adjust ed by NET TIME.
When a host is specified you may also request t hat t his sys-
t ems dat e and t ime be set t o t he dat e and t ime r et r ieved fr om
t he r emot e t ime ser ver . Wit h t his form, t he r emot e ser ver is
cont act ed and t hat syst ems cur r ent t ime is r et r ieved. That
t ime is t hen used t o set t he syst em t ime of t his client machine.
414 Net service
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>show time
15:11:32 Monday, November 05, 2001.
>net time time-nw.nist.gov (set
>show time
15:26:23 Tuesday, November 06, 2001.
See also DialNet, FTP, NetTerm, Ping, Setup, Telnet, THEOS WorkStation Client
NetTerm 415
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NetTerm Client
The NetTerm command est ablishes a client /ser ver connect ion bet ween t he THEOS syst em
t hat you ar e cur r ent ly using (client ) t o anot her THEOS syst em t hat is a ser ver on your net -
wor k.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he NetTerm command wit hout connect ing t o any server.
NetTerm quer ies t he net wor k t o find all of t he THEOS ser ver s t hat ar e con-
nect ed t o t he net wor k.
When no ot her THEOS ser ver s ar e pr esent on t he net wor k, an err or mes-
sage displays and t he pr ogr am exit s.
The names of t he available ser ver s ar e displayed in a menu.
1 NETTERM ( options
2 NETTERM server ( opt ions
3 NETTERM server account ( options
server net wor k ser ver name, IP name or IP addr ess (may also be
localhost )
account account name t o log t o aft er connect ion
localhost LOCALHOST
opt ions ACCOUNT account
CTL
NOPRT
PRTnn
Command synonym: NT
416 NetTerm
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The list of ser ver s is updat ed approximat ely once per second t o r eflect
server s t hat ar e joining or leaving t he net wor k and ser ver s whose per mis-
sion list is changed.
Choose one of t he ser ver s offered and a client connect ion is est ablished
wit h t hat ser ver . If no default connect ion is defined (see Default Connec-
tions on page 417) and t he ACCOUNT opt ion is not used, you ar e st ar t ed at
t hat ser ver s logon pr ompt .
Mode 2Invokes NetTerm and connect s t o server. If server is not a THEOS
Net wor k Login Ser ver , or if t hat THEOS server does not give you per mis-
sion t o connect t o it , an er r or message displays. If no default connect ion is
defined (see Default Connections) and t he ACCOUNT opt ion is not used
(Mode 3), you ar e st ar t ed at t hat ser ver s logon prompt .
Mode 3Same as Mode 2 except t hat you ar e aut omat ically logged ont o
account . If t hat account has a passwor d, you must ent er t he passwor d
when t he connect ion is est ablished.
Options ACCOUNT account Aft er a connect ion is est ablished, log ont o account on
t he server syst em. If account has a passwor d, you ar e pr ompt ed
t o ent er t he passwor d befor e you ar e allowed t o log ont o t he
account .
CTL Set cont r ol mode for t his console on t he server. Cont r ol mode
causes all cont r ol char act er s r eceived t o be displayed visually.
For inst ance, r eceipt of a CR is displayed as ^M.
NOPRT Do not connect any of your pr int ers as a slave pr int er t o t he
ser ver .
NetTerm 417
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PRTnn Your pr int er number PRTnn becomes a slave pr int er for your
session on t he r emot e server. When t his opt ion is not used (and
t he NOPRT opt ion is not specified), your lowest number ed,
at t ached pr int er becomes t he slave pr int er .
Default
Connections
When an account name is not defined on t he command line (Mode 1 or
Mode 2), t he account name specified in your syst ems NetTerm configur at ion
file is used. If no NetTerm configur at ion file is found, a nor mal user st ar t is
per for med on t he ser ver and you are pr ompt ed t o Logon please.
NetTerm sear ches your syst em for t he NetTerm configurat ion file using t he
following file specificat ions:
environ/account .NTCFG
environ/SYSTEM.NTCFG
account.NTCFG
SYSTEM.NTCFG
where environ is t he cur rent value of t he envir onment var iable NetTerm
and account is t he name of t he account t hat you ar e using on your syst em
when you invoked NetTerm.
NetTerm
Configuration
File
NetTerm configur at ion files ar e ASCII t ext files cont aining t he following
infor mat ion:
[name1 Server]
Account=account
[name2 Server]
Account=account
etc.
name1, name2 ar e t he names of r emot e ser ver s t hat you connect t o.
account is t he name of t he account t hat you want t o aut omat ically log ont o
when you connect wit h t hat ser ver . For inst ance:
[Administration Server]
Account=Reports
[Executive Server]
Account=Remote
[Production Server]
Account=Guest
[Development Server]
Account=Programs
When t his file is used t o connect t o t he Development server, you ar e
aut omat ically logged ont o t he account Pr ogr ams.
418 NetTerm
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NetTerm Menu Once you are connect ed t o t he ser ver , your syst em is a client t o t he remot e
server . This means t hat any keys pr essed ar e t r ansmit t ed t o t he ser ver as
if you had a t er minal dir ect ly connect ed t o t hat syst em. Text r eceived from
t he ser ver is displayed on your console.
Except ions t o t his t r ansmission t o t he r emot e ser ver ar e (Break) key
sequences. Only (Break),(C) and (Break),(Q) ar e passed dir ect ly t o t he r emot e
server . All ot her (Break) key sequences ar e act ed upon by t his NetTerm client .
To t r ansmit a (Break) key sequence ot her t han (Break),(C) or (Break),(Q), you
must pr ess (Break),(B) followed by t he key you want t r ansmit t ed. For
inst ance, t o t r ansmit a (Break),(X) t o t he ser ver , you must pr ess (Break),(B),(X).
Pr essing (Break),(M) displays t he NetTerm menu:
Disconnect. Select ing t his it em per for ms a disconnect fr om t his ser ver . If
you ar e in t he middle of execut ing a pr ogr am, a (Break),(Q) is t r ansmit t ed.
You are logged off t he ser ver , if necessar y.
When t he disconnect is finished, you are present ed wit h t he menu of avail-
able ser ver s t hat was descr ibed on page 415.
This disconnect and r econnect can be per for med dir ect ly, wit hout using
t he menu, by pressing (Break),(R).
Send File. Sends a file fr om t his client t o t he ser ver syst em. You ar e
pr ompt ed for t he file name you want t ransfer r ed. You may specify any file
on your syst em t hat you have access t o. Specify t he complet e pat h, if neces-
sar y.
NetTerm 419
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unless a different pat h is specified, t he file is r eceived on t he ser ver
syst em int o t he curr ent account , curr ent wor king dir ect or y. An infor ma-
t ion window and st at us bar displays dur ing t he t r ansfer.
You may also send files t o t he ser ver by execut ing t he Net Send command
on t he ser ver syst em. This abilit y is par t icularly useful for t r ansferr ing
files under pr ogr am cont r ol.
Receive File. Similar t o t he Send File funct ion descr ibed above except
t hat it t ransfer s a file from t he ser ver t o t his client syst em.
You may also r eceive files fr om t he server by execut ing t he Net Receive
command on t he server syst em.
Help. Displays help infor mat ion about NetTerm. Not e t hat you may pr ess
(F1) wit h any of t he menu it ems select ed t o r eceive addit ion infor mat ion
about t hat specific menu it em.
About NetTerm. Displays copyr ight and ver sion infor mat ion about t he Net-
Term command and displays infor mat ion about your cur r ent connect ion on
t he net wor k:
Shell to OS. Invokes t he CSI shell wit hout exit ing t he NetTerm command.
This is t he only way t o maint ain t he connect ion wit h t he ser ver while exe-
cut ing anot her command on your syst em fr om t his t er minal and session.
To r et ur n t o t he NetTerm command envir onment , execut e t he command
name EXIT.
Exit. Disconnect s fr om t he ser ver and exit s NetTerm. This act ion can also be
per for med wit hout t he menu by pr essing (Break),(X).
Notes When connect ed t o a r emot e THEOS server, you may execut e any pr o-
gr ams on t hat ser ver t hat you have access t o. While connect ed, t he pr o-
gr ams t hat you execut e have t he full r esources of t he ser ver available t o
t hem. Addit ionally, t hey may have access t o one of t he pr int ers on your
client syst em if a pr int er was at t ached when you est ablished t he connec-
t ion and you did not use t he NOPRT opt ion.
420 NetTerm
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Cautions You may execut e t he NetTerm command on t he ser ver . This will at t empt t o
est ablish a link t o anot her THEOS server. When t his is done you will be
communicat ing t o t he second ser ver via t he fir st ser ver .
Alt hough t his is allowed and is useful at t imes, it can be quit e confusing.
To t r ansmit a (Break),(C) t o t he second ser ver , you must use t he (Break),(B),(C)
keys t o t ell t he first server t o t r ansmit a (Break),(C) t o t he second syst em.
Similar ly, t o t er minat e t he connect ion wit h t he second ser ver , you must
use t he (Break),(B),(B),(X) keys t o t ell t he fir st server t o t r ansmit a (Break),(X) t o
t he second syst em.
If you use t he NetTerm command on t he second syst em t o connect t o a t hird
THEOS ser ver , it is even mor e confusing.
Restrictions You may only connect t o a THEOS ser ver t hat gives your syst em per mis-
sion t o connect t o it . Refer t o Chapt er 5 Network Security, st ar t ing on page
63 of t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence for addi-
t ional infor mat ion about access permissions and secur it y issues.
See also Net, Setup, Telnet, THEOS WorkStation Client
Not es 421
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Command
The Notes command displays and maint ains a user s dat abase of not es and messages t o
t hemselves.
Operation Mode 1Using t he NOTES dir ect or y for t he cur r ent ly set USERNAME, t he
not es form is displayed allowing you t o view and maint ain your not es:
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 except t he dir ect or y used will be
/THEOS/USERS/username/folder:S.
Notes form Notes list box The lar ge ar ea in t he form is a list of t he cur r ent ly defined
not es for t he Category select ed. You can and must select one of
t hese not es if you want t o Open, Print, Send, Remove or Change
it .
Category A dr op-down list box t hat allows you t o select a not e cat egor y.
The available pr edefined cat egor ies include: All, Business, Ideas,
1 NOTES
2 NOTES folder
folder Dir ect or y name for not es files
422 Not es
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Miscellaneous, Personal, To Do and Unfiled. You may also define
your own cat egor ies.
The cat egor y select ed her e det er mines which not es are dis-
played in t he Notes list box. It also det er mines t he cat egor y t o
be assigned t o a New not e t hat you cr eat e.
New To cr eat e a new not e select t he New but t on and t he following
for m is displayed allowing you t o ent er t he t it le and t ext of t he
not e. The not e is cat egor ized wit h t he cur r ent ly select ed Cate-
gory unless t hat cat egor y is All, in which case t he new not e is
saved as an Unfiled cat egor y. The cat egor y of a not e can be
changed aft er it is cr eat ed by using t he Change funct ion.
When ent er ing t he t ext of t he not e r emember t hat t he fir st line
of t ext will also be used as t he t it le for t he not e and it is what
appear s in t he Notes list box ar ea of t he main Notes for m.
You can advance fr om line-t o-line by pr essing t he (Enter) key. To
t er minat e ent r y of t he new not e pr ess t he (Esc) or (F10) keys.
Open This but t on allows you t o change or review an exist ing not e.
Print Pr int s t he select ed not e on one of t he at t ached print er s.
Not es 423
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Send This but t on displays anot her form allowing you t o send t his
not e as an e-mail message t o someone:
You must fill in a valid From and To e-mail addr ess. You may
modify t he message body by adding addit ional lines of t ext or
changing t he not e t ext t hat is pr e-loaded int o t he body of t he
message.
Remove Select ing t his but t on delet es t he not e t hat is cur r ent ly select ed
in t he Notes list box.
Change You can change an exist ing not es cat egor y wit h t his but t on. It
displays t he following for m allowing you t o select t he new cat e-
gor y for t he not e.
424 Not es
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Creating New
Categories
You can cr eat e your own cat egor ies by using t he Edit cat egor ies select ion
of t he Category select ion it em. When t his is select ed you ar e pr esent ed
wit h:
J ust ent er your new cat egor y name in t he New cat egor y field and pr ess
t he Add but t on. You can also delet e any of t he cat egor ies, including t he
pr eset cat egor y names.
The Reset but t on allows you t o r est or e t he cat egor y list t o t he st andar d
names. When t his is done you ar e asked t o confirm your choice:
When a cat egor y name is delet ed, any not es t hat wer e assigned t o t hat cat -
egor y ar e r eclassified as Unfiled.
Notes Pr ess t he (Esc) key t o exit fr om t his command.
Defaults Unless Mode 2 is used, t he dir ect or y used t o st or e t he not es is
/THEOS/USERS/username/NOTES:S.
See also Reminder
NsLookup 425
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NsLookup Client
The NsLookup client looks up domain names and r et ur ns t heir associat ed IP addr ess, or
looks up an IP addr ess and r et urns it s domain name.
Operation Mode 1Looks up and r epor t s on domain. The infor mat ion displayed is
Ser ver name, alias (if any), and t he dot t ed IP addr esses associat ed wit h
domain.
>nslookup teleport.com
Server: teleport.com
Address: 192.108.254.10
192.108.254.12
>nslookup www.microsoft.com
Server: www.microsoft.com
Address: 207.68.137.62
207.68.156.53
207.68.156.54
207.68.156.61
207.68.156.16
207.68.156.58
...
Mult iple addr esses list ed for a domain indicat e t hat all of t hose addr esses
ar e associat ed wit h t he domain. They r efer t o differ ent machines at t hat
sit es locat ion. One may be for t heir FTP ser ver , anot her for incoming mail,
et c. Their exact funct ion cannot be det er mined by t his display.
If t he DNS ser ver t hat is being used suppor t s t he feat ure, it is possible
t hat NsLookup will display mult iple lines ident ifying t he Alias domain
names. This is done only if t her e is a single IP addr ess associat ed wit h t he
name r equest ed and t he DNS ser ver supplied t he alias names or t he
names have alr eady been cached by t he DNS r esolver on t his syst em.
1 NSLOOKUP domain
2 NSLOOKUP
domain domain name or IP addr ess or host name
426 NsLookup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Ent er s an int er act ive mode wher e you can specify mor e t han one
domain before exit ing.
>nslookup
Enter name to lookup: ftp.theos-software.com
Server: ftp.theos-software.com
Address: 207.21.75.100
Enter name to lookup: ibm.com
"ibm.com" not found.
Enter name to lookup: www.ibm.com
Server: www.ibm.com
Address: 204.146.17.33
Enter name to lookup: laptop
Server: Laptop
Alias: Laptop.Documentation-system
Address: 192.48.200.3
Enter name to lookup:
Pr essing (Enter) only, t er minat es t he NsLookup command.
Domain
Specification
When domain is ent er ed, t he name r esolver sear ches t he following loca-
t ions unt il a mat ch is found or unt il all locat ions have been sear ched wit h-
out success:
1. Cached names and IP addr esses.
2. The file /THEOS/CONFIG/HOSTS.TXT:S.
3. The DNS ser ver s. The DNS ser ver locat ions ar e maint ained by t he
Setup Net Name Services command. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Inst allat ion and S et up Guide.)
domain may be specified in sever al ways.
+ As a dot t ed IP addr ess. When an IP addr ess is specified, a r everse
lookup is per for med. That is, t he domain name associat ed wit h
t he IP addr ess is det er mined and displayed.
>nslookup 207.21.75.100
Server: theos-software.com
Address: 207.21.75.100
+ The host name as defined in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/HOSTS.TXT:S.
This file can be maint ained by you wit h Setup Net Name Services.
>nslookup my-company
Server: my-company
Alias: my-company.theos-system
Address: 192.12826.30
NsLookup 427
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When domain is found in t he host names dat abase, t he alias ent r y
is displayed wit h t he host name, dot , your -comput er -name. Your -
comput er -name is defined in t he Setup Net Identification. (See
THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Inst allation and
S etup Guide.)
ified in Setup Net Name Services.
>nslookup www.theos-software.com
Server: www.theos-software.com
Address: 207.21.75.100
428 NsLookup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Number 429
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Number Command Filter
Number copies a file t o t he st andar d out put device, number ing each line as it is copied.
Operation Mode 1Each file is copied t o t he st andard out put device and number ed
as it is copied. Specifying mult iple files causes t he second and r emaining
files t o be appended t o t he first file copied t o t he st andar d out put device
and t he number ing cont inues wit hout being r eset at t he beginning of each
file.
>number one.file
1 Line one
2 Line two
3 Line three
>number one.file one.file
1 Line one
2 Line two
3 Line three
4 Line one
5 Line two
6 Line three
This command is frequent ly used in a pipe:
>number some.text | tee numbered.text | more
Mode 2Copies t he file fr om t he st andar d input device t o t he st andar d
out put device, numbering each line as it is copied. When t he console is t he
st andard input device you t er minat e t he input by ent er ing (Ctrl),(D) on a
line by it self.
1 NUMBER file... ( options
2 NUMBER
opt ions start
increment
430 Number
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options start The st ar t ing number t o use for t he fir st file copied t o st andard
out put . The default st ar t ing number is one.
increment This opt ion may only be used in combinat ion wit h start . Speci-
fies t he increment value for each line number used. The
default increment is one.
>number one.file (100 100
100 Line one
200 Line two
300 Line three
Defaults start and increment have default values of one and one.
Restrictions file must be an ASCII st r eam file.
See also Unnumber
Password 431
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Password Command
The Password command allows you t o change t he passwor d t o your account .
Operation The cur r ent account must have a passwor d. If it does, you ar e pr ompt ed t o
ent er t he exist ing passwor d t o t he account .
Aft er ent er ing t he cur rent passwor d you are asked t o ent er t he new pass-
wor d t wice t o make sur e t hat you did not mist ype it .
For infor mat ion about t he usage and limit at ions of passwor ds, r efer t o
Passwords on page 98 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em
Reference.
Notes You cannot remove a passwor d wit h t his command. Only t he Account com-
mand can r emove t he password for an account .
Cautions Remember t o make a not e of t his new passwor d. You will not be able t o log
ont o t his account wit hout t his passwor d and t he password is not r ecor ded
anywher e in t he syst em in plain t ext .
Restrictions The account must have a passwor d. If it doesnt , ask t he syst em adminis-
t rat or t o add t he passwor d t o t he account wit h t he Account command.
The new passwor d must mat ch t he cur r ent passwor d policies. Passwor d
policies ar e rules gover ning passwords such as must cont ain upper and
lower case char act er s, must not mat ch any single wor d in t he dict ionar y,
et c. The policies also define t he expir at ion t ime for a passwor d. These
polices ar e maint ained by t he Account command.
See also Account, Logon
PASSWORD
432 Password
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Patch 433
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Patch Command
The Patch command is a gener al pur pose file and disk maint enance program. Wit h it you
can examine and change any file on t he syst em or any sect or of any at t ached disk.
Operation Mode 1Wit h t his mode you can view and make changes t o file. The file
may be any dat a or pr ogr am disk file. file may not be a subdir ect ory or a
libr ar y name.
Refer t o Patching Files on page 449 for a descript ion of how Patch operat es
depending upon t he file t ype (or ganizat ion).
Mode 2This mode allows you t o view and make changes t o t he dat a in a
specific disk sect or .
Refer t o Patching Sectors on page 450 for a descr ipt ion of t his mode.
Options BINARY Tells Patch t hat file is t o be t r eat ed as a st r eam of byt es r at her
t han r ecor ds or a program.
Caut ion: You should only use t his mode t o view files. Essen-
t ially, t his opt ion t ells Patch t o ignor e t he st r uct ur e of t he file.
If you make changes while t his opt ion is in effect , you may
change a key (indexed or keyed file) t o be unr eachable or you
may make r ecor ds unr eadable or pr ogr ams unloadable.
NOVIDEO Tells Patch t o st ar t in t he command mode r at her t han t he full-
scr een display mode. This opt ion is useful when Patch is being
invoked fr om an EXEC pr ogr am t hat has &STACK dat a t hat
aut omat ically updat ed a file.
1 PATCH file ( options
2 PATCH drive ( options
drive disk dr ive let t er
opt ions BINARY
NOVIDEO
434 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Video Display
Mode
Patch has t wo basic display modes: full-scr een video mode and command
mode. In full-scr een video mode t he scr een is used t o display as much as
one sect or (256 byt es) of t he disk or file at a t ime.
>patch /theos/config/browscap.txt
As you can see, t his display is ver y similar t o t he display used by t he List
command when opt ion HEX is specified. The fir st column shows t he r ela-
t ive locat ion of t he dat a in t he file. The middle port ion of t he screen shows
t he hexadecimal values for each byt e of t he file. And on t he r ight is t he
ASCII display of t hose same dat a byt es.
In full-screen video mode you can make changes t o t he dat a on t he scr een
or move t o display ot her sect or s of t he file. The keys t hat can be used in
t his mode ar e:
Patch 435
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Key Meaning
(Quit) Exit s Patch wit hout saving changes t o t he file.
(File) Saves all changes made t o t he file and exit s Patch. Not e t hat
saving changes when t he file is dir ect , indexed or keyed
must be done for each r ecor d wit h t he (Save) key, befor e
select ing anot her r ecor d in t he file.
(Save) Saves all changes made t o t he record or sect or wit hout exit -
ing Patch.
(Home) Posit ion t o t he fir st byt e of dat a on t his scr een. If you are
alr eady posit ioned on t he fir st byt e, t hen (Home) displays t he
fir st sect or of t he file or r ecor d and posit ions t o t he fir st byt e
of t hat sect or .
(End) Posit ion t o t he last byt e of dat a on t his screen. If you ar e
alr eady posit ioned on t he last byt e, t hen (End) displays t he
last sect or of t he file and posit ions t o t he last byt e of t hat
sect or .
(Esc) Exit s full-scr een video mode and swit ches t o command
mode. Pr essing (Esc) while in command mode ret ur ns t o t he
full-scr een video mode.
(PageDown) Displays t he next sect or of t he file. The cur sor does not
move. That is, if you wer e posit ioned t o t he t hir d line, sec-
ond byt e of t he cur rent sect or , you will st ill be posit ioned t o
t he t hir d line, second byt e of t he new sect or .
(PageUp) Displays t he pr evious sect or of t he file. The cur sor does not
move.
(Transpose)
or
(Ctrl)(O)
Moves t he cur sor fr om t he ASCII column t o t he hexadecimal
column, or vice ver sa.
()
()
()
()
Move t he cur sor in t he dir ect ion of t he ar r ow. The left and
r ight ar row keys move one byt e; t he up and down keys move
by one line or 16 byt es. If t he ar r ow key moves you off of t his
sect or , t he next or pr evious sect or of t he file or r ecor d is dis-
played. If t her e is no mor e file or r ecor d available in t he
dir ect ion desir ed, t he cur sor moves t o t he last or fir st byt e of
t he file, as appr opr iat e.
Table 12: Patch Video Mode Commands
436 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Changing Data on the Screen
Init ially, when a sect or of t he file or r ecor d is displayed in full-scr een video
mode, t he cur sor is posit ioned t o t he fir st byt e of t he sect or , in t he ASCII
display ar ea of t he scr een. If t he infor mat ion t hat you want t o change t o is
ASCII dat a, mer ely move t he cur sor t o t he posit ion t hat you want changed
and t hen t ype t he replacement char act er s. (Patch only has r eplace mode. It
is not possible t o inser t char act er s or byt es wit h Patch.)
If you need t o change one or mor e locat ions t o some binar y or hexadecimal
values, make sur e t he cur sor is posit ioned in t he middle, hexadecimal col-
umns. Use t he (Transpose) or (Ctrl)+(O) t o swit ch back and for t h. Posit ion t he
cur sor t o t he locat ion t hat you want changed and t ype t he r eplacement val-
ues. Not e, when moving left or r ight wit h t he ar r ow keys you move by
byt es, not nibbles (four-bit hexadecimal char act er s).
(Find) Allows you t o jump t o a new locat ion in t he file or disk. The
oper at ion of t his key depends upon t he t ype of Patch oper a-
t ion being per for med.
Dir ect , indexed and keyed files: You ar e asked for t he r ecor d
key t hat you want t o find.
Ot her files: You are asked for t he r elat ive locat ion t o jump
t o (in hexadecimal).
Mode 2 of Patch: You ar e asked for t he sect or number t o
pat ch.
(SchFwd)
(SchBck)
Allows you t o posit ion t o t he next or prior occur rence of a
sequence of byt es in t he file or record. The oper at ion of t hese
keys depends upon t he locat ion of t he cur sor when t he key is
pr essed.
ASCII column: Ent er t he ASCII t ext t o search for .
Hexadecimal columns: Ent er t he sequence of hexadecimal
values t o sear ch for .
(Again) Repeat s t he last (SchFwd) or (SchBck) per for med.
Key Meaning
Table 12: Patch Video Mode Commands
Patch 437
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Command
Mode
The Patch command or NOVIDEO mode pr ovides all of t he funct ionalit y of
t he full-scr een mode plus some ot her impor t ant capabilit ies t hat ar e not
easily implement ed in a full-scr een video mode. In command mode, Patch
displays t he PATCH p r omp t ( / ) indicat ing t hat it is r eady t o accept a
command.
Expressions
Most of t he Patch commands r equir e an addr ess or dat a values t o be speci-
fied. Alt hough t hese addr esses and dat a values ar e nor mally specified wit h
a numer ic const ant , t hey can be specified wit h an expr ession. In Patch, an
expr ession cont ains one or mor e of t he following element s:
+ Numer ic Const ant
+ ASCII St r ing Const ant
+ Oper at or
+ Var iable
+ Anot her expr ession enclosed wit hin par ent heses
Numeric Constants
Numer ic const ant s ar e number s specified in hexadecimal or decimal. By
default , a number is a hexadecimal value unless it is t er minat ed wit h t he
let t er t or T.
1234 This is the number for 4,660
10
or 1234
16
1234t This is the number for 1,234
10
or 04D2
16
ASCII String Constants
A value may be specified in ASCII by enclosing t he ASCII char act er s
wit hin a pair of single quot at ion mar ks. Numer ic values are always lim-
it ed t o 32 bit s which is four byt es or four char act er s. When mor e t han four
char act er s are specified only t he last four ar e used.
'abcd' This is the value 1,633,837,924
10
or 61626364
16
'AbCdEfGh' This is the value 1,164,330,856
10
or 45664768
16
'EfGh' This is the value 1,164,330,856
10
or 45664768
16
438 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operators
Ther e ar e many oper at ors t hat may be used in an expr ession t o modify an
element or t o join t wo or mor e element s t oget her . In t he following t able
address, value
1
and value
2
may be any value including anot her expr ession.
Variables
As many as 26 var iables may be assigned values and used in expr essions.
Var iable names ar e single let t er s, case insensit ive (an upper case A is t he
same as a lowercase a).
A var iable is assigned a value by using an assignment st at ement :
variable = expression
A var iable is used in an expr ession by using it s name followed by t he dollar
sign char act er ( $ ).
Operator Meaning
@address Indir ect ion: Use value of locat ion point ed t o by
address
* Value of cur r ent addr ess point er
~value Unar y 1s complement of value (NOT)
-value Unar y 2s complement of value (NEG)
(expression) Par ent hesized subexpr ession
value
1
| value
2
value
1
is ORd wit h value
2
value
1
^ value
2
value
1
is XORd wit h value
2
value
1
& value
2
value
1
is ANDd wit h value
2
value
1
<< value
2
Shift value
1
left value
2
bit posit ions
value
1
>> value
2
Shift value
1
r ight value
2
bit posit ions
value
1
+ value
2
Add value
1
t o value
2
value
1
- value
2
Subt r act value
2
fr om value
1
value
1
* value
2
Mult iply value
1
by value
2
value
1
/ value
2
Divide value
1
by value
2
value
1
%value
2
Comput e t he r emainder of value
1
divided by value
2
Table 13: Patch Expr ession Oper at or s
Patch 439
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For inst ance:
/a=2000
0x00002000 (hex), 8192 (dec)
/b=a$+1000
0x00003000 (hex), 12288 (dec)
/
Patch
Commands
When t he Patch pr ompt is displayed t he following commands may be used.
Not e t hat some of t he commands have no meaning in cer t ain sit uat ions.
For inst ance, when pat ching a st r eam file t he KEY command is invalid.
Assemble Command
Patch cont ains a built -in assembly language compiler t hat allows you t o
use Int el mnemonics when specifying changes t o a pr ogr am file.
A address
A
The A command accept s assembly language commands and st or es t he
assembled code st ar t ing at locat ion address. If address is omit t ed, t he next
locat ion following t he last assembled code st or ed is used.
/a 339d2
000339D2: 7470 jz 33a44
000339D4: 8D8551FFFFFF lea eax,(ebp-af)
000339DA: 50 push eax
000339DB: 90 nop
000339DC: 90 nop
000339DD: end
/
In t he above example only t he boldface t ext is ent er ed. Patch supplied all of
t he ot her infor mat ion and assembled t he inst r uct ions as indicat ed. To t er -
minat e t he ent r y of assembly language inst r uct ions, use t he end pseudo-op
or mer ely ent er a blank line.
Use one or more spaces t o separ at e t he assembly language opcodes fr om
t he oper and fields. Any valid Patch expr ession may be used in t he oper and.
440 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Calculator
An expr ession calculat or is available whenever Patch is wait ing for a com-
mand. To use t he calculat or mer ely ent er an expr ession. To insur e t hat t he
expr ession is not int er pr et ed as a command, make sur e t hat it st ar t s wit h
a digit , unar y oper at or or a quest ion mar k.
/?abcd
0x0000ABCD (hex), 43981 (dec)
/?2000-23
0x00001FDD (hex), 8157 (dec)
/?'abcd'
0x61626364 (hex), 1633837924 (dec)
/
The calculat or always displays t he result in bot h hexadecimal and deci-
mal.
Checksum Command
The CHECK command comput es t he checksum for t he ent ir e file or for a
r egion specified.
check
check checksum
check address-range
check address-range checksum
It eit her displays t his checksum or compar es it t o t he checksum specified.
/check
Checksum is F602
/check 1000 2000
Checksum is B75E
/check 1000 2000 abcd
Mismatch.
/
Code Command
Most pr ogr ams have a code segment and a dat a segment . Init ially, when
Patch st ar t s, it assumes t hat addresses r equest ed and displayed ar e in t he
pr ogr ams code segment . This assumpt ion can be changed wit h t he Data
Command. The CODE command r et urns t o t he code segment .
Code
Patch 441
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Compare Command
The C command compares what is in t he file at a specified locat ion wit h
what you specify should be in t he file at t hat locat ion.
C address value-list
For inst ance:
/d 1000 100f
001000: E8C70B07 006A0368 FB0F0000 E8BCC707 '...j.h......'
/c 1000 e8 c7 b
Match.
/c 1000 e8 c7 c
Mismatch.
/
Data Command
Most programs have a code segment and a dat a segment . Init ially, when
Patch st ar t s, it assumes t hat addr esses r equest ed and displayed ar e in t he
pr ogr ams code segment . This assumpt ion can be changed wit h t he DATA
command. The Code Command r et ur ns t o t he code segment .
Data
To view or make any changes t o t he dat a por t ion of a pr ogr am, you must
use t he video display mode.
Delete Command
This command is valid only when t he file is a direct , indexed or keyed dat a
file. It delet es t he cur r ent r ecor d from t he file.
De
Only t he cur r ent record is delet ed fr om t he file. To get t he cur r ent r ecor d
use t he Key Command.
442 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Display Command
This command displays dat a fr om t he file, r ecor d or sect or .
D address
D address-range
D
This command displays one or mor e lines of 16 byt es each, st ar t ing wit h
address. If address or address-range is not specified, t he next line follow-
ing t he last line is displayed.
When address-range is not specified, 16 lines of dat a ar e displayed.
/d 2000 200f
002000: 055B3BD8 7E0C8B45 F4488945 F8E95700 '.[;~..E.H.E.W.'
/d 2000
002000: 055B3BD8 7E0C8B45 F4488945 F8E95700 '.[;~..E.H.E.W.'
002010: 0000FF35 3C51FFFF 8B45F448 8D048500 '...5<Q...E.H....'
002020: 0000005B 8B04180F B6400450 8B45080F '...[....@.P.E..'
002030: B640055B 3BD87D09 8B45F440 8945FCEB '@.[;}..E.@.E.'
002040: 288B4508 4050FF35 3C51FFFF 8B45F448 '(.E.@P.5<Q...E.H'
002050: 8D048500 0000005B 8B04188B 40055B89 '.......[....@.[.'
002060: 038B45F4 E91F0000 00EB1683 7DF0007E '..E.......}..~'
002070: 098B45F4 488945F8 EB078B45 F4408945 '..E.H.E...E.@.E'
002080: FCE9CCFE FFFF33C0 8BE55DC2 0400B804 '....3.]..=.'
002090: 000000E8 34FB0600 8B450C8B 00FF308B '...4....E....0.'
0020A0: 45088B00 FF308B45 0C8B000F B6400450 'E....0.E....@.P'
0020B0: 8B45088B 000FB640 045B3BD8 7D0B8B45 '.E....@.[;}..E'
0020C0: 0C8B000F B64004EB 098B4508 8B000FB6 '....@...E....'
0020D0: 400450E8 538A0700 8945FC85 C074088B '@.PS....E..t..'
0020E0: 45FCE93A 0000008B 450C8B00 0FB64004 'E.:....E....@.'
0020F0: 508B4508 8B000FB6 40045B93 2BC38945 'P.E....@.[.+.E'
/
End Command
The E command saves t he changes t hat have been made and exit s Patch.
E
Not e t hat when dir ect , indexed and keyed dat a files ar e being pat ched, t he
Put Command must be used t o save t he changes made t o a recor d.
Patch 443
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Fill Command
This command fills a block of t he file wit h a single value.
F address-range value
Unlike t he Set Command which can set a ser ies of locat ions wit h a st r ing of
dat a, t he F command set s t he series of locat ions t o a single value.
/d 2000 200f
002000: 055B3BD8 7E0C8B45 F4488945 F8E95700 '.[;~..E.H.E.W.'
/f 2000 2008 0
/d 2000 200f
002000: 00000000 00000000 F4488945 F8E95700 '.........H.E.W.'
/
Get Command
The G command r eads and displays one sect or of t he disk. This command
is only valid in Mode 2 of Patch (pat ching disk sect or s).
G sect or
G
If sect or is omit t ed, t he next sect or of t he disk is r ead and displayed.
Help Command
The H command displays a br ief summar y of all of t he commands and t he
expr ession operat ors and element s.
H
(F1)
Key Command
The K command r eads a r ecor d of a dir ect , indexed or keyed file. This com-
mand is valid only when pat ching t hose t ypes of files.
K key
K
The key must mat ch in t ype wit h t he t ype of file. That is, for dir ect files t he
key must be a r ecor d number , but for indexed and keyed files t he key must
be an alphanumer ic st r ing. Indexed and keyed file keys may not cont ain
t he space char act er .
For dir ect files t he r ecor d number specified is assumed t o be a decimal
number, even wit hout t he t r ailing t specifier .
444 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Length Command
The LEN command displays t he lengt h of t he file (st ream files), t he lengt h
of t he file and allocat ed r ecor d size (direct , indexed and keyed files), or t he
lengt h and t ype of pr ogr am (pr ogr am files). For pr ogr am files it also allows
you t o change t he size of t he heap and st ack space used by t he pr ogr am.
Len
Len HEAP size
Len STACK size
For inst ance:
>patch sample.stream (novideo
/len
Length = 2,031
/
>patch sample.direct (novideo
/len
Length = 280 Reclen = 28
/
>patch sample.indexed (novideo
/len
Length = 3,593,330 Keylen = 10 Reclen = 36
/
>patch sample.command
/len
Length = 92,824
Code = 0x00012834
Data = 0x00004098
Stack = 0x00002000
Heap = 0x0000C350
Entry = 0x00000140
Type = 32 bit Program
/len stack 3000
/len heap d000
A change t o t he heap or st ack space is only saved when t he End Command
is used.
Patch 445
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Move Command
The M command copies dat a from one locat ion in t he file, r ecor d or sect or
t o anot her locat ion.
M from-address to-address length
The from-address, t o-address, from-address+length and t he t o-address+
lengt h must be wit hin t he bounds of t he cur r ent file or record. This r est r ic-
t ion does not apply when pat ching disk sect or s.
This move oper at ion is done as a byt e-by-byt e copy, not a copy and past e.
Ther efor e, when t he sour ce and dest inat ion addr ess r anges over lap, t he
r esult may be undesir able.
The following example want s t o copy t he fir st 32 char act er s of t he file t o
locat ion 0x10. The fir st at t empt fails because t he addr ess r anges over lap.
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000010: 65737420 66696C65 20746F20 62652075 'est file to be u'
000020: 73656420 62792074 68652050 41544348 'sed by the PATCH'
000030: 20636F6D 6D616E64 2E0D0D54 68697320 ' command...This '
/m 0 10 20
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000010: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000020: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
/
To perform t his t ype of oper at ion proper ly t he move must be done in t wo
st ages. Fir st t he over lapped r egion must be copied and t hen t he r emaining
r egion is copied. If a lar ger r egion wer e copied, t here might be sever al
st ages t o avoid specifying an over lapped r egion.
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000010: 65737420 66696C65 20746F20 62652075 'est file to be u'
000020: 73656420 62792074 68652050 41544348 'sed by the PATCH'
/m 10 20 10
/m 0 10 10
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000010: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000020: 65737420 66696C65 20746F20 62652075 'est file to be u'
/
446 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This oper at ion of t he M command is not ent ir ely undesirable because it can
be advant ageous t o r epet it ively duplicat e a r egion of t he file or sect or .
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
000010: 65737420 66696C65 20746F20 62652075 'est file to be u'
000020: 73656420 62792074 68652050 41544348 'sed by the PATCH'
/m 0 5 45t
/d 0 30
000000: 54686973 20546869 73205468 69732054 'This This This T'
000010: 68697320 54686973 20546869 73205468 'his This This Th'
000020: 69732054 68697320 54686973 20546869 'is This This Thi'
000030: 73206F6D 6D616E64 2E0D0D54 68697320 's ommand...This '
Patch Level Command
The PL command displays and set s t he cur r ent pat ch level for a pr ogr am
file.
PL patch-level
PL
Pat ch levels may only be assigned t o program files. The PL command
always displays t he cur r ent pat ch level for t he pr ogr am.
/pl
Old patch level:
New patch level: 40001
/pl 40002
Old patch level: 40001
/
The patch-level must be a field using a for mat of @####### or #######.
That is, a single let t er followed by seven or fewer digit s, or seven or fewer
digit s wit hout t he leading let t er .
A pr ograms pat ch level can also be set or changed wit h t he Change com-
mand descr ibed on page 65 and it can be viewed wit h t he FileList command
Patch 447
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Put Command
The P command is t he complement of t he Get Command and Key Command.
P wr it es a r ecor d or sect or back t o disk.
P key
P sect or
P
Use t he P key when you ar e pat ching a direct , indexed or keyed file and
you want t o wr it e t he cur r ent r ecor d t o t he file wit h a differ ent key. The
key must mat ch t he file or ganizat ion. That is, key must be numer ic for
dir ect files and alphanumer ic for indexed and keyed files.
Use t he P sector when you ar e pat ching disk sect or s and you want t o wr it e
t he cur r ent sect or t o a differ ent locat ion on t he disk.
To mer ely wr it e t he cur r ent record or sect or back t o t he file or disk in t he
same place t hat it was r ead, use t he P command wit h no ar gument .
Quit Command
The Q command exit s t he Patch command wit hout updat ing t he file or
disk. Any unsaved changes are lost .
Q
Use t he End Command or Put Command t o save changes befor e quit t ing.
Replace Command
The R command changes t he cont ent s of consecut ive locat ions t o values
specified.
R address value-list
The values in value-list ar e assigned t o t he locat ions address, address+1,
address+2, etc. unt il t he list is exhaust ed. The range of locat ions fr om
address t o address plus t he number of it ems in value-list must be wit hin
t he bounds of t he file, r ecor d or sect or .
/d 2000 200f
002000: 54686973 20697320 6A757374 20612074 'This is just a t'
/r 2000 15 23 0f 2d
/d 2000 200f
002000: 15230F2D 20697320 6A757374 20612074 '.#.- is just a t'
/r 2000 'Now is the time '
/d 2000 200f
002000: 4E6F7720 69732074 68652074 696D6520 'Now is the time '
448 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Search Command
The S command locat es an occur r ence of a specified ser ies of values.
S address value-list
The file, r ecor d or sect or is sear ched, st ar t ing at locat ion address, for t he
next occur rence of t he sequence of values indicat ed by value-list. The
r ange of locat ions fr om address t o address plus t he number of it ems in
value-list must be wit hin t he bounds of t he file, r ecor d or sect or .
If a mat ch is found, it s locat ion is displayed and you ar e asked if you want
t o sear ch for t he next occur r ence. Any response ot her t han (Y) is t reat ed as
(N).
/s 0 'This'
Match at 0x00000000, again? y
Match at 0x0000003B, again? y
/
Set Command
The S command allows you t o set a ser ies of locat ions, one locat ion at a
t ime.
S address
When S st ar t s, it displays addr ess and it s cont ent s in bot h hexadecimal
and ASCII and t hen it allows you t o change t he value at t hat locat ion.
/s 2000
0x00002000: 0F (.)
At t his t ime you may ent er a new value, t er minat e t he S command or
advance t o t he next or pr ior locat ions. Ent r y of (Space), () or () is int er -
pr et ed as a r equest t o advance t o t he next addr ess. Ent r y of () backs up t o
t he pr ior address.
The locat ion may be set t o any expr ession value as described in Expres-
sions on page 437. You may set it t o a st ring of ASCII char act er s by enclos-
ing t he char act er s wit hin a pair of single quot at ion mar ks. Ter minat e t he
ent r y of a value wit h (Space), (), () or () and t he locat ions ar e set t o t he
values r equest ed and t he locat ion point er is advanced or backed up. Ter mi-
nat e ent r y wit h (Enter) and t he values ar e set and t he S command t er mi-
nat es.
Patch 449
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
/s 2000(Enter)
0x00002000: 0F (.) 0(Space)
0x00002001: 8B (.) 23(Space)
0x00002002: 5D (]) 14(Space)
0x00002003: 14 (.) 253t-48t(Space)
0x00002004: 81 (.) 0(Space)
0x00002005: FB (.) 'This is a test'(Space)
0x00002013: 95 (.) 0(Enter)
/d 2000 2013
002000: 002314CD 00546869 73206973 20612074 '.#..This is a t'
002010: 65737400 C083E001 741EA180 C0FFFFF6 'est...t.....'
/
Use Command
The USE command t ells Patch t o use eit her 16-bit or 32-bit inst r uct ions
when using t he Assemble Command.
Use 16
Use 32
This command will only be necessar y when you ar e pat ching disk sect or s
(Mode 2). When pat ching a pr ogr am file, Patch will know whet her t he pr o-
gr am is a 16-bit pr ogr am or a 32-bit program.
Full-Screen Video Mode Command
Ent r y of (Esc) swit ches Patch from t he command mode t o t he full-scr een
video mode or vice ver sa.
Patching Files How Patch oper at es depends upon t he t ype of file being pat ched.
Stream Files or BINARY Option
Pat ching a st r eam file or using t he BINARY opt ion causes Patch t o st art in
it s video display mode. The ent ir e file may be viewed or modified because
all addresses ar e valid fr om zer o t hr ough t he lengt h of t he file.
You must use t he End Command (in command mode) or t he (File) or (Save)
commands (in video display mode) t o save any changes made t o a st r eam
file.
Direct, Indexed and Keyed Files
Pat ching a direct , indexed or keyed file st art s Patch in t he video display
mode. You may only view and change one r ecor d at a t ime. The key t o a
r ecor d cannot be changed except by using t he Put Command t o wr it e t he
r ecor d wit h a differ ent key and t he Delete Command t o delet e t he old r ecor d
(per for m a DE fir st and t hen a P wit h t he new key).
450 Patch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Changes made t o a r ecor d must be saved wit h t he Put Command (in com-
mand mode) or t he (Save) command (in video display mode).
Program Files
Pat ching a pr ogr am file causes Patch t o st ar t in command mode wit h t he
CODE segment select ed.
commands (in video display mode) t o save any changes made t o a pr ogr am
file.
Patching
Sectors
When Mode 2 of Patch is used you can view and change one sect or at a t ime.
Patch st ar t s out in video display mode. Aft er specifying t he fir st sect or
number you may get t he next sect or of t he disk wit h eit her t he Get Com-
mand (in command mode) or t he (PageDown) commands (in video display
mode). In video display mode you may get t he pr ior sect or wit h t he (PageUp)
command.
commands (in video display mode) t o save any changes made t o a sect or
befor e get t ing a differ ent sect or .
Restrictions file must not be r ead or wr it e prot ect ed.
The Patch command r equir es a pr ivilege level of t hr ee.
Peek 451
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Peek Command
The Peek command allows you t o see what is displayed on anot her user s console.
Operation Mode 1The fir st user t hat is logged ont o name (ot her t han your self) is
peeked at .
Mode 2The user on pr ocess number process is peeked at .
Notes When you fir st peek at anot her user s console, t he cur r ent t ext displayed
on t hat console is displayed on your console. Aft er t his init ial display, all
char act er s t hat ar e displayed on t hat user s console ar e also displayed on
your console.
User s may not ice a slight degr adat ion in per formance because ever y char -
act er displayed on t heir console has t o be displayed t wice. Ther e may be a
significant degr adat ion if your console is slower t han t he ot her user s, for
inst ance, when you ar e connect ed via a slow-speed modem.
You should always infor m t he user befor e peeking at t heir console. In some
count r ies it may be illegal t o peek at a users console wit hout t heir per mis-
sion.
Peek is a good t ool t o use when t r aining a user on how t o use some piece of
soft war e or for t echnical suppor t when t he suppor t per son is not near t he
user needing assist ance. Mult iple users can peek at t he same console
which is oft en used in a t r aining class.
Restrictions The Peek command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four .
See also Show USER, VNC Client
1 PEEK name
2 PEEK process
name account name
process pr ocess number
452 Peek
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ping 453
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ping Client
The Ping client allows you t o br oadcast a Ar e you t her e? or a Whos t here? quer y t o a spe-
cific node or t o all nodes on t he local int r anet .
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he int er act ive or windowed display mode of t his com-
mand. This pr ovides t he most infor mat ion about t he queried node.
Ent r y is allowed for t he Host field only. Ent er t he dot t ed IP addr ess for a
node or it s name as defined in t he host names dat abase. Host names ar e
defined in t he /THEOS/CONFIG/HOSTS.TXT:S file. The Host Name and Host
Id fields display t he name and mat ching IP addr ess for t he specified host .
In t his mode, queries are r epeat edly sent t o t he specified node unt il t he
oper at or t er minat es t he oper at ion wit h ent r y of any key, by using t he
mouse and select ing t he St op but t on, or when t he node fails t o r espond.
(The St ar t but t on changes t o St op aft er a host is specified.)
As each quer y is sent , t he infor mat ion on t he scr een is updat ed t o r eflect
t he success r at e and t he r esponse t ime for t he node.
1 PING
2 PING address... ( options
3 PING *
4 PING * *
address node IP addr ess or name (may also be localhost)
localhost LOCALHOST
opt ions NOTYPE
454 Ping
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Wit h t his for m, Ping quer ies t he net wor k one t ime for a r esponse
fr om t he specified host . The host is a dot t ed IP addr ess or it s name as
defined in t he host names dat abase.
>ping accounting
Host: Accounting, address: 192.168.87.12
round-trip time = 2 milliseconds.
>ping 192.168.87.15
Host: Executive, address: 192.168.87.15
round-trip time = 1 milliseconds.
If t he NOTYPE opt ion is used, t he display is suppr essed. However , t he
r et ur n code is set t o a success/fail code of zer o or one.
Mode 3The net work is quer ied for r esponses fr om all nodes connect ed t o
t he local int r anet . This is t he same oper at ion per for med by t he Ping com-
mand.
>ping *
Network Broadcast Ping
Name Address
Accounting 192.168.87.12
Executive 192.168.87.15
Admin 192.168.87.63
3 Network nodes responded.
Some net wor k oper at ing syst ems, such as Windows 95/98/Me, may not
r espond t o t his t ype of br oadcast ping.
Mode 4Similar t o Mode 3, t he net wor k is quer ied for r esponses fr om all
nodes connect ed t o t he local int r anet . This mode differ s in t hat t he net -
wor k is cont inuously quer ied unt il t he oper at or t er minat es t he program by
pr essing (Esc) or (F9). This is t he same oper at ion per for med by t he Net
PingAll command.
Return Code A r et ur n code (RC) of zer o indicat es a successful ping response. An RC of 1
indicat es no ping r esponse. An RC of 2 indicat es t hat t he address could not
be r esolved.
See also Net
Play 455
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Play Command
The Play command plays WAV files t hr ough t he syst ems sound car d.
Operation Mode 1Play t he sound file t hr ough t he syst ems sound car d.
Mode 2If t her e ar e any files mat ching t he wildcar d-file specificat ion, a
menu of t hose mat ching files is displayed. (When no files mat ch t he speci-
ficat ion t he Play command mer ely exit s.)
>play c*
It is not necessar y t o specify t he file-t ype unless you want t o play wav-
for mat sound files wit h a file-t ype ot her t han WAV.
1 PLAY file
2 PLAY wildcard-file
3 PLAY
4 PLAY STOP
wildcard-file file name using wildcar d specificat ions wit h opt ional pat h
456 Play
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Using t he menu, posit ion t o t he desir ed sound file and pr ess (Enter) t o
play t he sound. Once Play has init iat ed playing t he sound file it r et ur ns t o
t he menu wit h t he next it em highlight ed. Only one sound file can play at a
t ime, t herefor e r equest ing a new sound file when a sound is alr eady play-
ing causes t he cur r ent ly playing sound t o be st opped and t he new sound
st ar t ed.
Mode 3Oper at es t he same as t he Mode 2 command:
>play *.wav
Mode 4Any cur r ent ly playing sound is st opped.
Notes Sound files wit h a file-t ype of WAV can also be played by mer ely ent er ing
t he file name at t he command pr ompt :
>play mysound.wav
>play mysound
>mysound.wav
Each of t he above commands play t he file MYSOUND.WAV t hr ough t he sys-
t ems configur ed sound car d. It does t his because t he /THEOS/CONFIG/
TYPES.CFG:S file defines t he open act ion for a WAV file t o use t he Play com-
mand t o open t he file.
Defaults Unless file or wildcard-file explicit ly specify a file-t ype, t he file-t ype used
is always WAV.
Restrictions This command can only play sounds when execut ed fr om t he main console
or fr om a TWS connect ion. When execut ed fr om t he main console you must
have a sound car d configur ed on t he THEOS syst em. Refer t o t he Setup
SndCard command. (See THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem
Installation and S etup Guide.)
When execut ed fr om a TWS connect ion you must be using a connect ion t o
t he TWindows ser ver and t he TWS must be configur ed t o suppor t Dist r ib-
ut ed Window Manager feat ur es for Dist r ibut ed Sound and Video. The
sound is played t hr ough t he Windows machines speaker s.
See also CDPlayer, Mixer
POP3Test 457
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
POP3Test Command
The POP3Test command t est s an e-mail account on t he email ser ver (POP3 ser ver ).
Operation Mode 1The POP3 ser ver at host is cont act ed and quer ied about account
mail st at us. The password is given t o t he ser ver for validat ion. The st at us
r et ur ned fr om t he ser ver is displayed on t he console.
This mode also updat es t he POP3Test configur at ion file wit h t his account,
host and password infor mat ion. This configur at ion informat ion is needed
t o use Mode 2 or Mode 3.
Mode 2The POP3Test configur at ion file is sear ched and t he ent ry for
account and host is used t o cont act t he POP3 ser ver for t his account wit h
t he passwor d r ead from t he configur at ion file ent r y.
Mode 3The POP3Test configur at ion file is sear ched and t he first ent r y
mat ching account is used t o cont act t he POP3 ser ver for t his account wit h
t he passwor d r ead fr om t he configur at ion file ent r y. This mode should only
be used if account is unique in t he configur at ion file.
Notes Account names ar e case-sensit ive on some ser ver s. Passwor ds ar e case-
sensit ive on most ser ver s. To ensur e t hat t he account and passwor d t hat
you pr ovide is t he same as t he ones given t o t he host , enclose each of t he
ar gument s in quot at ion mar ks.
>POP3TEST "MyName@somehost.com" "MyPaSsWoRD"
The POP3Test configurat ion file is named /THEOS/CONFIG/POP3TEST.CFG:S.
It is only maint ained by Mode 1 of t his command. Ther e is no Setup pr o-
gr am t o cr eat e and maint ain t his configur at ion file as t her e is wit h most
ot her configur at ion files.
1 POP3TEST account@host password
2 POP3TEST account@host
3 POP3TEST account
account E-mail account name
host Domain or host of account
password Passwor d for account
458 POP3Test
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
No t ext is displayed on t he console when t his command is execut ed from
an EXEC pr ogr am or a Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am using t he
SYSTEM or CSI st at ement or a C language pr ogr am using t he system()
funct ion.
Return Codes Because t his pr ogr am is fr equent ly invoked fr om wit hin a pr ogr am t he
r et ur n code is set t o t he number of messages r ead or an er ror code. A zer o
or posit ive r et ur n code indicat es t he number of messages wait ing for
account on t he specified host . A negat ive ret ur n code indicat es an er r or
condit ion. The er r or s t hat might be det ect ed and r eport ed by t his com-
mand ar e:
Restrictions You must have t he net wor k st ar t ed and a Dial-up Net wor king profile
defined or you an always-on connect ion t o your net wor k.
See also TheoMail
Example >POP3test "MyAccount@MyHost.com" "PasSwORd99"
242 messages
RC = 242, 11:46:44, ET = 0.01, CPU = 0.032
RC Error
-1 Invalid command-line ar gument s
-2 Missing host name
-3 Missing password
-4 Cannot cr eat e POP3Test configurat ion file
-5 Connect failure
-6 Account or passwor d r eject ed by host
-7 Remot e host disconnect ed wit h no r eply
-8 Cannot r esolve host name
-9 Socket er ror
Print er 459
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Printer Command
The Printer command is a complement t o t he CRT command. It t est s t he pr int er s display
capabilit ies wit h t he at t ached class code for t he pr int er .
Operation When Printer is invoked t he Pr int er Test Menu is displayed.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed t est s. These keys
ar e descr ibed in Using Menus on page 77.
Options PRTnn Indicat es t hat Printer is t o t est t he at t ached pr int er number nn.
When t his opt ion is not used t he fir st at t ached pr int er is
t est ed.
1 PRINTER
2 PRINTER PRTnn
PRTnn At t ached pr int er
460 Printer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Tests: Test Attributes
Test s t he pr int er at t r ibut es suppor t ed by THEOS including: boldface,
under line, it alics, second color or shading, compr essed t ext , double-wide
t ext and double-high t ext .
The display on your pr int er will, of course, be dependent upon your
pr int er s capabilit ies.
Class code: 135
Printer name: HP LaserJet II & III
Normal text (no attributes)
0x0E: Boldfaced text 0x0F
0x0B: Underline text 0x16
0x1D: Italics or alternate character set 0x1E
0x04: Second color or shading 0x05
0x02: Compressed text 0x03
0x17: Double-wide text 0x18
0x15: Double-high text 0x19
Print er 461
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ripple Pattern
Displays a ripple pat t er n using t he ent ir e ASCII char act er set . This t est
can be used t o check for dr opped char act er s or impr oper column align-
ment .
Column Registration
Displays a columnar pat t er n.
Line Registration
Displays lines of r epet it ive char act er s. This pat t er n can be used t o det er-
mine if lines of t ext ar e pr int ed st r aight on t he pr int er .
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcde
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdef
"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefg
#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_àbcdefgh
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
#####################################################################
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
462 Printer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Line Graphics
Displays all of t he line-dr awing gr aphics char act er s suppor t ed in t he
THEOS char act er set . See THEOS Charact er Set s on page 265. Also, a
sample illust r at ion of line gr aphics is pr int ed.
Most pr int ers do not suppor t t he r ounded cor ner char act er s. If your
pr int er does not t hen define t hem wit h t he nor mal squar e cor ner char ac-
t er s.
National Characters
Displays all of t he int er nat ional char act er s suppor t ed by t he THEOS char -
act er set . See THEOS Char act er Set s on page 265.
Notes The exact appear ance of t hese t est s depends upon t he capabilit ies of your
pr int er and t he class code definit ion.
See also Attach, ClassGen, CRT, Sysgen
= ULC = URC = LRC = LLC
= LI = UI = RI = DI
= FWI = HORIZ = VERT
= RULC = RURC = RLRC = RLLC
= DULC = DURC = DLRC = DLLC
= DLI = DUI = DRI = DDI
= DFWI = DHORIZ = DVERT
PutFile 463
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PutFile Command
The PutFile command copies a file from t his syst em t o a DOS-for mat t ed har d disk par t it ion
or disket t e.
This commands funct ion has been r eplaced wit h t he DOSDiskA and DOS-
DiskC at t achment capabilit y. For infor mat ion about t his capabilit y r efer
t o t he Attaching DOSDiskA Floppy Disk Drives on page 32.
Operation Mode 1Copies t he file fr om t his syst em t o a DOS for mat t ed disk.
>put sample.testfile sample.txt:f
"SAMPLE.TEXTFILE:S" copied to "SAMPLE.TXT:F".
The DOS -file must be a valid DOS file descr ipt ion.
>putfile *.txt:s =.=:f
Ok to copy "LETTER1.TXT:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
"LETTER1.TXT:S" copied to "LETTER1.TXT:F".
Ok to copy "LETTER3.TXT:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to copy "LETTER2.TXT:S" (Yes,No,All) A
The DOS -file specificat ion may be just t he dr ive code for t he DOS disk.
This is equivalent t o specifying =.=:drive. The dest inat ion name is t he
same as t he sour ce file name. Do not use t his synt ax when t he THEOS file
name is not a valid DOS file descript ion. That is, do not copy libr ar y mem-
ber s or files whose file t ype is longer t han t hr ee char act er s.
1 PUTFILE file DOS -file ( options
2 PUTFILE drive ( CLEAR
drive at t ached dr ive let t er
DOS -file DOS file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions BINARY QUERY
EOF RDONLY
HIDDEN SUBDIR
NOQUERY SYSTEM
464 PutFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Clears t he dir ect ory on t he DOS for mat t ed disket t e.
>putfile f (clear
Enter disk label: DosXfer
Use t his mode only when dr ive is a disket t e dr ive. It is not designed t o
clear hard disks or r emovable har d disks.
Options BINARY Tells PutFile t hat file may cont ain binar y infor mat ion and it is
not t o t r anslat e CR t o CRLF. Whenever in doubt as t o t he con-
t ent of t he file, use t his opt ion.
EOF Appends a ^ Z t o t he end of t he file. This is t he st andar d DOS
end-of-file mar k char act er .
HIDDEN Set s t he hidden file at t r ibut e on t he DOS disk for t he files
t r ansfer r ed.
NOQUERY Tells PutFile t o not ask for confir mat ion befor e copying each
>putfile readme/*.txt:s f (noq
"/README/LANMAN.TXT:S" copied to "LANMAN.TXT:F".
"/README/VINES.TXT:S" copied to "VINES.TXT:F".
"/README/PCTCP.TXT:S" copied to "PCTCP.TXT:F".
"/README/IBMLAN.TXT:S" copied to "IBMLAN.TXT:F".
4 files copied.
QUERY Tells PutFile t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file spec-
ificat ions is t o be copied. This is a default opt ion when wild
cards ar e used.
>putfile readme/*.txt:s f
Ok to copy "/README/LANMAN.TXT:S" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o copy quest ion is asked, you may r espond
means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e copied wit h-
out being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he copy oper a-
t ion.
RDONLY Set s t he r ead only file at t ribut e on t he DOS disk for t he files
t r ansfer r ed.
PutFile 465
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SUBDIR If t he pat h specified in DOS -file does not exist on t he DOS
disk, t his opt ion t ells PutFile t o cr eat e t he subdir ect or ies t hat
ar e missing.
SYSTEM Set s t he syst em file at t r ibut e on t he DOS disk for t he files
t r ansfer r ed.
Notes Unless t he BINARY opt ion is used, t he THEOS end-of-r ecor d mar k (CR) is
t ranslat ed t o t he DOS end-of-r ecor d mar k (CRLF).
DOS Partitions
and Disks
The disk drive specified by DOS -file or drive may be an at t ached r emov-
able disk such as a floppy or r emovable har d disk, or it may be a par t it ion
on an at t ached har d disk dr ive. This disk or par t it ion may be a DOS-for-
mat t ed par t it ion (16-bit FAT) or a Windows 95 disk or par t it ion (32-bit
FAT).
When it is a part it ion of an at t ached THEOS dr ive, t he DOS part it ion is
r efer enced by specifying t he at t ached THEOS dr ive code, for inst ance S or
C: for drive if t he DOS par t it ion is a part it ion of t he same physical dr ive
t hat is at t ached as t he S dr ive in THEOS.
>putfile special.txt /windows/*.*:s
>putfile /dos/ansi.sys:s =.=:s (bin
"SPECIAL.TXT:S" copied to "C:\SPECIAL.TXT".
Windows NTFS (NT File Syst em) disks and par t it ions cannot be accessed
wit h t his command. Disks using Windows NT FAT can be used wit h t his
command.
Cautions THEOS dir ect , indexed and keyed files should not be t r ansfer r ed wit h t his
command. These file or ganizat ions ar e not usable by t he DOS oper at ing
syst em. To t r ansfer one of t hese t ypes of files, fir st t ranslat e it int o a
nor mal st r eam file wit h t he FileType and t hen copy t he r esult ing file.
Restrictions The dest inat ion disk must be a DOS-for mat t ed disk.
The DOS -file must be a valid DOS file descr ipt ion. DOS files have eight
char act er file names and zero t o t hree char act er file ext ensions.
When a pat h is specified for t he DOS -file, t he pat h must alr eady exist on
t he DOS disk. The pat h will only be cr eat ed if t he SUBDIR opt ion is used.
See also GetFile, FileType, Send, THEO+COM
466 PutFile
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PWD 467
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PWD Command
This command displays t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y.
Operation The cur r ent wor king dir ect or y is displayed on t he st andar d out put device.
>pwd
/LETTERS/PERSONAL:S
>show subdir
SUBDIR = /LETTERS/PERSONAL:S
Notes PWD st ands for pr int wor king dir ect or y.
See also Account, ChDir, FileManager, Logon, Show
PWD
468 PWD
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Quot e 469
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Quote Client
The Quote client quer ies a quot e ser ver for t he next random quot at ion.
Operation Mode 1Displays a r andom quot at ion fr om t he /THEOS/CONFIG/NET-
QUOTE.TXT:S dat abase.
>quote
The difference between the right word and the almost
right word is the difference between lightning and
a lightning bug.
--Mark Twain
The quot e ser ver on t his syst em must be st ar t ed. The quot e ser ver is par t
of t he TCP Simple Ser vices.
Mode 2Accesses server and uses it s quot e ser ver t o display a r andom
quot at ion fr om servers dat abase. server may be specified wit h:
+ The dot t ed IP addr ess for t he TCP ser ver .
>quote 207.21.75.100
file can be maint ained by you wit h WinWrite.
>quote my-company
+ By t he special name LOCALHOST, meaning t hat t his machines
ser ver is quer ied. This is t he equivalent of a Mode 1 command.
ified in Setup Net Name Services. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S ystem Installation and S etup Guide.)
>quote theos-software.com
Restrictions The TCP Simple Ser vices on t his syst em must be enabled and st ar t ed on
t his syst em t o use Mode 1. The Quot e ser ver on t he r emot e host must be
enabled and st ar t ed t o use Mode 2.
1 QUOTE
2 QUOTE server
localhost LOCALHOST
470 Quote
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Examples >quote
Life is so unlike theory.
--Anthony Trollope
>quote
Time is that quality of nature which keeps events
from happening all at once. Lately it doesnt seem to
be working.
--Anonymous
Reboot 471
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Reboot Command
The Reboot command shut s down and t hen r eboot s t he comput er .
Operation Mode 1In t his mode, you ar e present ed wit h t he r eboot menu and
allowed t o select how you want t he syst em r eboot ed:
Shut down. This select ion shut s t he comput er down by st opping all ser v-
er s and users and, if possible, t ur ns t he power off. The Shutdown Status is
displayed dur ing t his pr ocess. This is t he same as using t he SHUTDOWN
opt ion wit h Mode 2.
Restart in single user. Reboot s t he comput er in single-user mode. Nor mal
shut down occur s and a flag in t he har d disks MBR (Mast er Boot Recor d) is
set causing t he THEOS Mult iboot er t o boot aut omat ically wit h THEOS
Cor ona in single-user mode. This is t he same as using t he SINGLE opt ion
wit h Mode 2.
1 REBOOT
2 REBOOT ( option
opt ion DOS NOTYPE SHUTDOWN UPDATE
FAST QUERY SINGLE WINDOWS
LINUX REBOOT THEOS
NOQUERY RESET TYPE
472 Reboot
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restart in THEOS Corona. The default select ion. The syst em is shut down
by st opping all ser ver s and user s and t hen reboot ing t he syst em. A nor mal
syst em r est ar t is per for med just as if you had pr essed t he syst ems r eset
but t on. This is t he same as using t he REBOOT, RESET or THEOS opt ion
wit h Mode 2.
If a Mode 1 reboot is r equest ed fr om an EXEC or applicat ion pr ogr am, t he
Reboot Menu is not offer ed.
The comput er is r est ar t ed just as if a (Ctrl)+(Alt)+(Del) wer e ent er ed fr om t he
main console.
When used wit h a NetTerm connect ion t o a r emot e syst em, you ar e war ned
wit h t he message You are about t o r eboot a r emot e syst em.
Mode 2Inst ead of aut omat ically displaying t he Reboot Menu, t he opt ions
specified cont r ol what is displayed and what r eboot or shut down pr ocess is
per for med.
Options DOS This and t he WINDOWS opt ion will boot t he DOS or Windows
primar y disk part it ion wit hout displaying t he Reboot Menu.
This opt ion is only valid if t her e is a DOS/Windows pr imar y
par t it ion on t he disk dr ive. If t he TYPE opt ion is also specified,
t he Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he Rest ar t in Windows 98/
ME/2000 it em pr eselect ed.
FAST Per for ms a REBOOT wit hout saving t he console sessions loca-
t ions and sizes. It is fast because t he var ious ser ver s and user s
ar e not st opped fir st , t he syst em is mer ely r eboot ed.
LINUX Boot s t he Linux pr imar y disk par t it ion wit hout displaying t he
Reboot Menu. This opt ion is only valid if t her e is a Linux pr i-
mary par t it ion on t he disk dr ive. If t he TYPE opt ion is also
specified, t he Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he Rest ar t in
Linux it em pr eselect ed.
NOQUERY Do not display t he Reboot Menu. This is a default opt ion when
t he Reboot command is invoked fr om wit hin an EXEC pr o-
gr am.
NOTYPE Do not show t he Shutdown Status display. This is a default
opt ion when t he Reboot command is invoked fr om wit hin an
EXEC pr ogr am.
QUERY Display t he Reboot Menu. This is a default opt ion unless t he
Reboot command is invoked fr om wit hin an EXEC pr ogr am.
Reboot 473
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REBOOT This opt ion, t he RESET and t he THEOS opt ion r eboot t he
THEOS Corona primar y disk par t it ion wit hout displaying t he
Reboot Menu. This is t he default opt ion unless DOS, LINUX,
SHUTDOWN, SINGLE or WINDOWS opt ion is used. If t he TYPE
opt ion is also specified, t he Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he
Restart in THEOS Corona it em pr eselect ed.
RESET Synonym t o t he REBOOT opt ion.
SHUTDOWN Shut s down t he syst em wit hout displaying t he Reboot Menu.
Aft er shut t ing down t he syst em, t his opt ion specifies t hat t he
syst em is not aut omat ically rest ar t ed. If APM (Advanced
Power Manager ) is available, t he syst em is power ed off. If
APM is not available, a message displays infor ming you t hat it
is okay t o t ur n off t he syst em. If t he TYPE opt ion is also speci-
fied, t he Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he Shut down it em
pr eselect ed.
SINGLE Reboot t he THEOS Cor ona pr imary disk par t it ion wit hout dis-
playing t he Reboot Menu. Nor mal shut down occur s and a flag
in t he har d disks MBR (Mast er Boot Recor d) is set causing t he
THEOS Mult iboot er t o aut omat ically boot THEOS Cor ona in
single-user mode. If t he TYPE opt ion is also specified, t he
Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he Restart in single user it em
pr eselect ed.
THEOS This opt ion, t he REBOOT and t he RESET opt ion r eboot t he
THEOS Corona primar y disk par t it ion wit hout displaying t he
Reboot Menu. This is t he default opt ion unless DOS, LINUX,
SHUTDOWN, SINGLE or WINDOWS opt ion is used. If t he TYPE
opt ion is also specified, t he Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he
Restart in THEOS Corona it em pr eselect ed.
TYPE Show t he Shutdown Status display. This is a default opt ion
unless t he Reboot command is invoked fr om wit hin an EXEC
pr ogr am.
UPDATE Reboot t he THEOS Cor ona pr imary disk par t it ion wit hout dis-
playing t he Reboot Menu. Nor mal shut down occur s and a flag
in t he har d disks MBR (Mast er Boot Recor d) is set causing t he
THEOS Mult iboot er t o aut omat ically boot THEOS Cor ona
using t he special, pseudo-account SYSUPDAT. Similar t o t he
SINGLE opt ion, t he syst em is boot ed in single-user mode.
WINDOWS This and t he DOS opt ion will boot t he DOS or Windows pri-
mar y disk par t it ion wit hout displaying t he Reboot Menu. This
opt ion is only valid if t her e is a DOS/Windows primar y par t i-
t ion on t he disk dr ive. If t he TYPE opt ion is also specified, t he
474 Reboot
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Reboot Menu is displayed wit h t he Rest ar t in Windows 98/ME/
2000 it em pr eselect ed.
Note A CACHE SYNC oper at ion is per for med befor e r eboot ing t o maint ain dat a
int egr it y.
If hist or y logging is enabled an ent r y is added r eflect ing t hat t he syst em
was r eboot ed.
When t his command is execut ed fr om an EXEC or anot her pr ogr am, t he
opt ions NOQUERY and NOTYPE ar e enabled unless specifically request ed
wit h t he QUERY or TYPE opt ions.
When any of t he opt ions DOS, LINUX, SINGLE, UPDATE or WINDOWS is
used, t he THEOS Mult iboot er does not ask which par t it ion t o boot and t he
syst em will r eboot in t he r equest ed mode. When t hat mode is r eboot ed, t he
THEOS Mut iboot will allow nor mal select ion of boot par t it ions.
Cautions This is an ext remely danger ous command because ot her user s ar e t er mi-
nat ed wit hout not ice. If anot her user is in t he pr ocess of updat ing one or
more files, t hose files will be inaccur at e because t he updat e was not com-
plet ed.
Always do a Show USERS or a Who command befor e using t his command
and ver ify t hat all ot her user s ar e at a Logon, CSI or st opped.
Reboot 475
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Reboot Menu If t he comput er has mult iple oper at ing syst ems inst alled on it , t he reboot
menu t hat is displayed will have addit ional opt ions t han t hose displayed
on page 471. For inst ance, a syst em wit h bot h THEOS Cor ona inst alled
and Micr osoft Windows inst alled will display t he following r eboot menu:
A syst em wit h THEOS Cor ona, THEOS 4.2 and Micr osoft Windows
inst alled on it will display t he following r eboot menu:
476 Reboot
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Shutdown
Status
For all r eboot opt ions including SHUTDOWN, t he Reboot command must
fir st shut down t he oper at ing syst em. It also saves t he main console session
sizes and posit ions. It can display t his shut down process.
User s ar e st opped by issuing a Br eak,Q request t o t he user and for cing an
Exit. It is possible t hat a ser ver or user is busy or hung and cannot be
st opped wit h t his pr ocess. If t his should occur, t he End Task but t on can
be pr essed t o t er minat e t he server or user . The Rest ar t but t on can be
used t o shut t he syst em down wit hout going t hr ough t he pr ocess of st op-
ping each ser ver and t ask.
Restrictions The Reboot command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
See also Exit, Show, ShutDown, Who
Receive 477
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Receive Command EXEC
The Receive command is an EXEC language pr ogr am giving you convenient , command-line
access t o t he THEO+COM commands file r eceive capabilit y.
Operation Invokes t he THEO+COM command in RECEIVE mode. The first at t ached
COM device is used unless t he COMnn opt ion is specified. If no pr ot ocol
opt ion is specified, THEOS pr ot ocol is used.
If t he connect ion t o t he ot her comput er is via a modem, it is assumed t hat
t he t elephone connect ion has alr eady been est ablished wit h t he Dial com-
mand or by using THEO+COM dir ect ly.
>dial 1 800 123-4567
Dialing 1 800 123-4567
>receive updated.stocklst
RECEIVE file ( opt ions
options ASCII TRACE XMODEM XMODEM-1K
COMnn TRACEFILE fn XMODEM-CRC YMODEM
THEOS
Protocol..... THEOS
File name.... UPDATED.STOCKLST:S
File size.... 1,235
Blocks....... 5
Transmitted.. 0%
Byte count... 0
Block count.. 0
File count... 1
Elapsed time. 0:02
Errors....... 0
Message...... Waiting for sender
Progress.....
File transfer in process. Press ESC to cancel.
Receive
478 Receive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options ASCII Use t he ASCII file t r ansfer pr ot ocol. Essent ially, t his is no pr o-
t ocol and should be used only for short t ext files.
COMnn Use t he cur r ent ly at t ached COMnn for t he communicat ions
por t . When t his opt ion is not specified t he fir st at t ached COM
device is used.
THEOS Use t he THEOS SEND/RECEIVE pr ot ocol. This is t he default
prot ocol.
TRACE Enables file t r ansfer t racing. A window is opened in t he upper -
r ight cor ner of t he display, showing t he prot ocol act ivit y dur ing
a t ransfer .
TRACEFILE fn Similar t o t he TRACE opt ion except t hat t he pr ot ocol act iv-
it y is out put t o t he file fn.
XMODEM Use XMODEM checksum, 256-byt e pr ot ocol.
XMODEM-CRC Use XMODEM CRC-16, 256-byt e pr ot ocol.
XMODEM-1K Use XMODEM-1K, CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol for single file
t r ansfer s.
YMODEM Use YMODEM CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol. This pr ot ocol
might be called YMODEM-BATCH in t he ot her comput er s
communicat ion pr ogr am because it can r eceive mult iple files.
Notes Refer t o t he THEO+COM Installation and Users Guide manual for a full
descr ipt ion of t he oper at ion of file t ransfer s and t he pr ot ocols used.
Defaults The fir st at t ached COM device is used by default and t he THEOS pr ot ocol
is t he default .
Restrictions A COM device must be at t ached.
See also Dial, GetFile, Send, THEO+COM
Reminder 479
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Reminder Command
This command maint ains r eminder messages t hat can be displayed when a user logs on t o
an account .
The /SYSTEM.REMINDER and t he account.REMINDER files ar e files accessed when you log ont o
an account . These ar e keyed access files wit h a calendar dat e for t he key. When you log ont o
an account , t hese files ar e sear ched for a r ecor d wit h t odays dat e. If t hey ar e found, t he
message t ext for t he dat e is displayed. Those message records ar e maint ained by t his com-
mand.
Operation A search is made for account.REMINDER file wher e account is t he name of
t he account t hat you ar e curr ent ly logged ont o. If t he file is not found, t hen
it is cr eat ed.
The pr ogr am pr ompt s you for a r eminder dat e:
>reminder
Enter date (MMDDYY):
You may ent er a specific dat e such as 07/04/02, or a gener ic dat e such as
07/04 wit hout t he year . A specific dat e means t hat t he message appear s on
t hat dat e only; a gener ic dat e means t hat t he message appear s every year
on t hat mont h and day. See Not es on t he next page for addit ional infor -
mat ion about ent er ing dat es.
When a message alr eady exist s for t he dat e ent er ed, t he message t ext is
displayed and you can change it . Ot herwise, you can ent er t he new mes-
sage for t he dat e.
>reminder
Enter date (MMDDYY): 07/19/02
Enter message text:
This message displays every time that I log onto this account.
Enter date (MMDDYY):
The message t ext may be as long as 256 char act er s, but it cannot cont ain
any new-line char act er s or car r iage r et ur ns. Ent r y of (Enter) t er minat es
t he message t ext .
REMINDER
480 Reminder
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To delet e an exist ing message, r eplace or add t he wor d DELETE t o t he
beginning of t he message t ext . When t he fir st six charact ers of a message
ar e delet e (upper case or lower case), t he message is delet ed fr om t he file.
To exit fr om t he Reminder command, r espond wit h (Enter), (Esc) or (F9) for
t he dat e.
Notes If you are logged ont o an account wit h account number of 0 t he
/SYSTEM.REMINDER file is always t he file maint ained. Ot her wise, t he file
maint ained is account.REMINDER wit h account being t he cur r ent ly logged
on account name.
The dat e for mat request ed by t he Reminder command is dependent upon
t he cur rent DATEFORM (see Set on page 541 and Sysgen on page 591).
The delimit er s bet ween t he dat e element s ar e opt ional and can be any
non-numer ic char act er .
When you log ont o a pr ivat e account a maximum of four r eminder mes-
sages may be displayed.
1. The fir st message searched for is t odays complet e dat e in t he
/SYSTEM.REMINDER file.
2. The next messaged t hat might be displayed is t he gener ic dat e for
t oday in t he /SYSTEM.REMINDER file.
3. Then t odays complet e dat a is searched for in t he account .REMINDER
file.
4. The last message t hat might be displayed will be t he gener ic dat e
for t oday in t he account.REMINDER file.
For inst ance:
>logon myaccount
This message is for July 4, 2002
This message is for any July 4th
This message is the myaccount message for July 4, 2002
DATEFORM 1 DATEFORM 2 DATEFORM 3
For mat : MMDDYY DDMMYY YYMMDD
Examples: 10/15/96
101596
10/15
1015
15-10-96
151096
15-10
1510
96.10.15
961015
15.10
1510
Reminder 481
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This message is the myaccount message for any July 4th.
>
See also Logon
482 Reminder
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Remot e 483
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Remote Command
The REMOTE command execut es a command over a net wor k connect ion.
Operation Mode 1The ExecNet ser ver oper at ing on t he machine ident ified by
server is inst r uct ed t o execut e command.
>remote rep://saturn eject r
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 but , aft er connect ing t o t he ser ver ident ified
by server, it logs on t o acct an execut es command.
>remote rep://private:password23@saturn "erase *.backup (not noq"
Mode 3, Mode 4, Mode 5 and Mode 6 ar e only valid when invoked fr om a
TWS console.
Mode 3When execut ed, it inst r uct s t he Cor ona syst em t o t r ansfer
Corona-file-desc t o t he windows client syst em. It is saved on t he Windows
syst em as a t empor y file and t hen t he pr ogr am windows-command is
invoked wit h t he t empor ar y file name as a paramet er for t hat pr ogr am t o
oper at e on.
1 REMOTE REP://server command ( opt ions
2 REMOTE REP://acct@server command ( option
3 REMOTE windows-command Corona-file-desc ( opt ions
4 REMOTE windows-command windows-file-desc ( options
5 REMOTE Corona-file-desc ( options
6 REMOTE windows-file-desc ( options
server Name or addr ess of ExecNet ser ver
command THEOS command name and ar gument s, opt ions
acct
windows-command Pr ogr am name wit h pat h if needed
Corona-file-desc File name including dr ive code
windows-file-desc File name on Windows syst em
484 Remot e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If t he t empor ar y file is changed, upon exit ing t he windows-command, t he
t emporar y file is t r ansfer r ed back t o t he Corona syst em and r eplaces t he
or iginal ver sion of t he Corona-file-desc.
Mode 4Similar t o Mode 3 except no file is t r ansfer r ed fr om t he Cor ona
syst em. Inst ead, t he file is alr eady on t he Windows syst em and t he win-
dows-command is invoked wit h windows-file-desc as it s ar gument .
Mode 5When execut ed, it inst ruct s t he Cor ona syst em t o t r ansfer
Corona-file-desc t o t he windows client syst em. This file name is saved wit h
a t empor ar y file name on t he windows syst em but t he file ext ension is
r et ained. The t empor ar y file is t hen invoked as a command, r elying upon
t he cur rent file-t ype associat ions of t he Windows syst em t o choose t he
pr oper pr ogr am t o use wit h t his dat a file.
If t he t empor ar y file is changed, upon exit ing t he pr ogr am t he t empor ar y
file is t r ansfer r ed back t o t he Cor ona syst em and r eplaces t he or iginal ver-
sion of t he Corona-file-desc.
Mode 6Similar t o Mode 5 except t her e is no file t r ansfer bet ween t he
syst ems. Inst ead, t he windows-file-desc is used wit h t he file already r esid-
ing on t he Windows syst em.
Options MAXIMIZE When used wit h Mode 3, Mode 4, Mode 5 or Mode 6, t his opt ion
inst r uct s t he windows applicat ion t o open in a maximized win-
dow.
MINIMIZE When used wit h Mode 3, Mode 4, Mode 5 or Mode 6, t his opt ion
inst r uct s t he windows applicat ion t o open in a minimized win-
dow.
NOTYPE Suppr esses any er ror message t ext display by t he REMOTE
command. Only t he r et ur n code will indicat e t he result of t he
r equest .
NOWAIT This opt ion t ells t he REMOTE command t o not wait for t he
complet ion of t he execut ion of t he r emot e command. Also,
when used wit h Mode 3 or Mode 5, t he file is not t r ansferr ed
back t o t he Cor ona syst em even when t he file is changed on t he
r emot e syst em.
Remot e 485
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes When Corona-file-desc is used (Mode 3 and Mode 5) you must specify t he
dr ive code for t he file. It is t he colon and dr ive code at t he end of t he file
descr ipt ion t hat ident ifies it as Cor ona file descr ipt ion inst ead of a Win-
dows file descr ipt ion.
The options on t his REMOTE command line ar e not passed as opt ions t o t he
command or Windows-command. The command may have opt ions speci-
fied but t o do so you must enclose t he desir ed command name and it s
opt ions wit hin quot es. For inst ance:
>remote rep://admin "tbackup s tape1 (backup verify full"
Restrictions For Mode 1 and Mode 2, t he ser ver machine specified by server must , of
cour se, be accessible fr om t his machine and it must have an ExecNet
ser ver oper at ing on it .
Also for Mode 1 and Mode 2, t he command execut ed must not r equir e a con-
sole keyboard or display. You may, however , invoke commands t hat use
t he pr int er or ot her public device:
>remote rep://private@saturn "list some.txt (prt2"
Mode 3, Mode 4, Mode 5 and Mode 6 ar e only valid when invoked fr om a
TWS console.
See also NetTerm, TWS
486 Remot e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Rename 487
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Rename Command
Rename changes t he name of an exist ing file, libr ar y or dir ect or y.
Operation Mode 1Changes t he name of from-file t o to-file.
>rename this.file that.file
"THIS.FILE:S" renamed "THAT.FILE:S".
1 file renamed.
The from-file and t o-file may cont ain wild-car d specificat ions. See Wild
Car d Specificat ions on page 138. They may also cont ain complet e or par -
t ial pat h specificat ions as long as t he r efer enced file or dir ect or y is one
t hat you have access t o t hat locat ion.
Mode 2file is an ASCII st r eam file cont aining t wo file descr ipt ions per
line. The fir st file descr ipt ion in t he line is t r eat ed as a from-file and t he
second file descr ipt ion is t he t o-file. For each line in file, a Mode 1 Rename
is per for med.
This mode of t he Rename command is convenient when one or more set s of
files ar e r epet it ively r enamed. Mer ely edit a file cont aining file descr ipt ion
pair s, such as:
>edit daily.files
customer.master:s /prior/customer.master:s
customer.history:s /prior/customer.history:s
general.ledger.*:s /prior/=.=.=:s
check.*:s /prior/=.=
>rename daily.files (file noquery notype
1 RENAME from-file t o-file ( options
2 RENAME file ( FILES options
3 RENAME ( opt ions
from-file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
to-file file name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NOQUERY
NOTYPE
QUERY
TYPE
488 Rename
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3This is t he int eract ive mode of t he Rename command. Since no
files ar e specified on t he command line you are pr ompt ed t o ent er t he file
descr ipt ions t o r ename.
>rename (noquery
?MENU.BASIC
Destination file name missing.
?MENU.BASIC PROGRAM.BASIC.=
"MENU.BASIC:S" renamed "PROGRAM.BASIC.MENU:S".
?SAMPLE.FILE* /COPIED/SAMPLES/=.=
"SAMPLE.FILE1:S" renamed "/COPIES/SAMPLES/SAMPLE.FILE1:S".
"SAMPLE.FILE2:S" renamed "/COPIES/SAMPLES/SAMPLE.FILE2:S".
?
Options NOQUERY Indicat es t hat you do not want t o be asked for confir mat ion
befor e r enaming each file. This is a default opt ion when wild
cards ar e not used.
>rename gl.* general.ledger.= (noq
"GL.MASTER:S" renamed "GENERAL.LEDGER.MASTER:S".
"GL.JOURNAL:S" renamed "GENERAL.LEDGER.JOURNAL:S".
"GL.HISTORY:S" renamed "GENERAL.LEDGER.HISTORY:S".
3 files renamed.
NOTYPE Tells Rename t o not display t he r esult s of each file renamed on
t he st andar d out put device. The gener al r esult message (t he
nn files r enamed. message displayed befor e exit ing Rename)
is also suppr essed wit h t his opt ion.
>rename gl.* gltest.= (not
Ok to rename "GL.MASTER:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to rename "GL.JOURNAL:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
Ok to rename "GL.HISTORY:S" (Yes,No,All) Y
QUERY Tells Rename t o quer y or ask if each file mat ching t he file
specificat ions is t o be r enamed. This is a default opt ion when
>rename *.data =.testdata
Ok to rename "CUSTOMER.DATA:S" (Yes,No,All)
When t he Ok t o r ename quest ion is asked, you may r espond
means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e r enamed
wit hout being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he Rename
oper at ion.
Rename 489
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells Rename t o display t he r esult s of each
file er ased on t he st andar d out put device. This display can be
r edir ect ed.
>rename program.source.* =.basic (noquery
"PROGRAM.SOURCE.CUST:S" renamed "CUST.BASIC:S".
"PROGRAM.SOURCE.LEDGER:S" renamed "LEDGER.BASIC:S".
"PROGRAM.SOURCE.MENU:S" renamed "MENU.BASIC:S".
"PROGRAM.SOURCE.REPORTS:S" renamed "REPORTS.BASIC:S".
4 files renamed.
Defaults TYPE and QUERY ar e default opt ions.
Restrictions You cannot rename a file t hat is er ase, r ead or writ e pr ot ect ed.
You cannot rename a file t o anot her dr ive. Use CopyFile or move Move for
t hat .
You cannot rename a file t o a file descr ipt ion of an exist ing file.
By default , only files owned by t he cur r ent account ar e r enamed. To
r ename a file owned by anot her account , you must specify t he owning
account name as part of t he pat h:
>rename private\his.file my.file
This command r enames t he file HIS.FILE owned by t he account named PRI-
VATE t o your account , cur r ent wor king direct or y, wit h t he name MY.FILE.
By default , t he to-file is in your account in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y
but you may specify a pat h t o t he account and dir ect or y t hat you want t o
r ename it t o.
>rename my.file account\textfile/samples/new.file
"/MY.FILE:S" renamed to "ACCOUNT\TEXTFILE/SAMPLES/
NEW.FILE:S".
When t he dest inat ion file specificat ion includes a pat h, t hat pat h must
exist . Rename does not cr eat e subdir ect or ies.
See also Change, FileManager, CopyFile, Move
490 Rename
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Repeat 491
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Repeat Command EXEC
The Repeat EXEC execut es a command sever al t imes.
Operation This EXEC program merely r epeat s t he execut ion of some command one or
mor e t imes.
>repeat 3 copyfile one.file to.another (append
Repeat # 1 of 3
>COPYFILE ONE.FILE TO.ANOTHER (APPEND
"ONE.FILE:S" appended to "TO.ANOTHER:S".
One file copied.
Repeat # 2 of 3
One file copied.
Repeat # 3 of 3
One file copied.
>
REPEAT count command-line
command-line any valid THEOS command
count number of t imes t o execut e command-line
492 Repeat
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Replace 493
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Replace Command Filter
The Replace command modifies t ext files by changing (r eplacing) exist ing t ext st r ings wit h a
new t ext st r ings.
Operation Mode 1The t ext file is opened and r ead. Ever y occur r ence of t he char ac-
t er sequence from-text is r eplaced wit h t he char act er sequence t o-text. If
t her e ar e mult iple from-text to-text pair s, t hen each occur r ence of each of
t he from-t ext st r ings in t he file is r eplaced wit h t he cor responding to-t ext .
The r esult is saved using t he or iginal file name. No backup copy of t he
or iginal file is kept .
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1 except t he sour ce and dest inat ion files ar e
stdin and stdout r espect ively.
Options Because it is possible t hat an opt ion keywor d might be a desir ed from-text ,
t o use one of t he opt ions you must specify a null or empt y field fir st , fol-
lowed by t he opt ion keywor d. For example:
>replace my.txt ("" nocase "existing text" "new text"
The above command uses t he NOCASE opt ion. If you had ent er ed t he com-
mand:
>replace my.txt (nocase "existing text" "new text"
it will r eport a synt ax er ror because t he nocase t oken and t he new t ext
t oken ar e int er pr et ed as from-text ar gument s but t her e is no mat ching to-
t ext ar gument for t he new t ext t oken.
NOCASE Indicat es t hat t he case mode of t he fr om-t ext it em and t he t ext
in t he file should be ignor ed when looking for mat ches. The
case of t he t o-t ext it em is used when t ext is r eplaced.
1 REPLACE file ( option ... from-text t o-text ...
2 REPLACE ( option ... from-text to-text ...
from-text t ext st r ing specifying exist ing t ext in file
to-text t ext st r ing specifying t he change t o t ext
opt ion NOCASE NODATA
494 Replace
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NODATA Indicat es t hat , when a from-t ext it em is r eplaced in t he file, if
t he r esult is a blank line t hen t he line should be delet ed fr om
t he file.
Notes The t o-text ar gument may be a null or empt y st r ing. To specify an empt y
st r ing use a pair of quot at ion mar ks wit h no char act er s bet ween t hem.
The r et ur n code is set t o t he t ot al number of inst ances t hat from-t ext was
found and r eplaced wit h to-t ext .
Cautions No backup copy of t he original file is made.
Restrictions Because t he from-t ext and to-text ar e specified wit h ASCII t ext st r ings, t he
file should be an ASCII t ext file. For inst ance, a Mult iUser BASIC sour ce
pr ogr am file can be used if it was saved wit h t he SAVEA or SAVEU com-
mands.
See also LineEdit, WinWrite
Restore 495
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restore Command
The Restore command r et rieves t he ar chive copy of a file, set of files or an ent ir e disk vol-
ume. This command is t he complement of t he TArchive command.
The Restore command only r est or es files fr om an a r chi ve vol ume cr eat ed wit h t he TArchive
command or t he Archive command fr om a THEOS 4.x syst em. The archive volume cont ains
special, compr essed copies of files. See TAr chive on page 601.
The TArchive and Restore commands have been r eplaced wit h t he TBackup command.
1 RESTORE from-drive to-drive ( options
2 RESTORE file to-drive ( options
3 RESTORE from-drive ( SHOW options
4 RESTORE from-drive ( VERIFY
aaa account name
d dr ive code or disk volume name
lll disk volume name of fir st disk in ar chive
from-drive dr ive let t er of ar chive sour ce or logical t ape name
name ar chived file name
nnn new dir ect or y size
to-drive dr ive let t er of dest inat ion disk
opt ions ACCOUNT MULTIUSE NOTYPE REWIND
ALL NAME name OLDER SHOW
ASK NEWFILE OLDFILE SIZE nnn
CLEAR NOASK PRTnn SUBDIR
DRIVE d NOQUERY QUERY TYPE
FROM aaa NOSYSFILE REPLACE VOLUME
LABEL lll
496 Restore
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Rest or es all of t he files fr om t he ar chive volume in from-drive t o
t he disk in to-drive.
>restore tape s
Mode 2Rest or es file fr om t he archive volume t o t he to-drive in t he cur -
r ent account . Unless one or mor e opt ions ar e used t o indicat e ot her wise,
t he file in t he ar chive volume must be owned by t he cur r ent account name.
>logon private
>restore some.file:f s (noask
Searching for account "PRIVATE".
Searching for file "SOME.FILE".
Restoring "SOME.FILE:S".
>logon develop
>restore those.files.*:f s (from private
Source is Disk F
Destination is Disk S
Mount volumes now:
Source is labeled "ArchiveD".
Archive from disk "THEOS" on 10/15/96, at 08:36.
Destination is labeled "THEOS".
OK to start restore (Y/N) Y
Searching for account "PRIVATE".
Searching for file "THOSE.FILES".
Restoring "THOSE.FILES:S".
Restoring "THOSE.FILES.FILE1:S".
In t his mode files ar e always r est or ed t o t he cur r ent account .
Mode 3Displays a file list ing of t he files in t he ar chive volume in from-
drive.
>restore f (show
Account: 10\PRIVATE 28 Aug 2001 9:01am Page 1
Filename Filetype Member Dr Date Time Org Protect Size Recl Keyl
SOME FILE 01/26/01 12:46 S ..WR.... 1335
THOSE FILES 01/20/01 13:34 L ........ 1280 20
FILE1 03/19/00 17:09 S ..W..... 1284
FILE2 09/00/00 11:28 S ..W..... 2257
FILE3 10/22/01 11:34 S ..W..... 31
FILE4 12/01/87 05:00 S ..W..... 9895
The SHOW opt ion does not have t o be specified.
Restore 497
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>restore f
Account: 10\PRIVATE 28 Aug 2001 9:01am Page 1
Filename Filetype Member Dr Date Time Org Protect Size Recl Keyl
SOME FILE 01/26/01 12:46 S ..WR.... 1335
THOSE FILES 01/20/01 13:34 L ........ 1280 20
FILE1 03/19/00 17:09 S ..W..... 1284
FILE2 09/00/00 11:28 S ..W..... 2257
FILE3 10/22/00 11:34 S ..W..... 31
FILE4 12/01/87 05:00 S ..W..... 9895
Mode 4Ver ifies t he int egr it y and r eadabilit y of t he ar chive volume in
from-drive. It also displays a list ing of t he files in t he ar chive volume simi-
lar t o t he display out put by t he TArchive.
This mode does not compar e t he archive volume t o it s or iginal sour ce disk.
Options ACCOUNT Tells Restore t o only r est ore t hose files fr om t he ar chive volume
t hat ar e owned by one account . This is a default opt ion when
Mode 2 is used.
If t he FROM account opt ion is not specified, an implied FROM
current -account is used. That is, only t hose files owned by t he
account t hat you ar e cur rent ly logged ont o ar e r est or ed.
>restore tape s (account noask
Searching for account "SYSTEM".
Restoring "SYSTEM.B3220LIB:S".
Restoring "SYSTEM.B3220LIB.ACCESS:S".
...
The ACCOUNT opt ion is t he opposit e of t he VOLUME opt ion.
ACCOUNT is t he default opt ion when Mode 2 is used; VOLUME
is t he default opt ion when Mode 1 is used.
ALL Rest ores files from t he ar chive volume even if t he file alr eady
exist s on t he to-drive and even if t he file has er ase pr ot ect ion
set . Also see t he opt ions NEWFILE, OLDFILE and REPLACE.
498 Restore
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ASK This is a default opt ion t hat inst r uct s Restore t o ask t he oper a-
t or t o mount t he sour ce and dest inat ion volumes and wait s for
confir mat ion t hat t he proper volumes ar e mount ed.
>restore tape s
Source is TAPE1
Destination is Disk S
Mount volumes now:
Source is labeled "Archived".
Archive from disk "THEOS" on 10/15/96, at 08:36.
Destination is labeled "THEOS".
OK to start restore (Y/N)
The first quest ion, Mount volumes now, must be answer ed
wit h an (Enter). All r esponses ot her t han (Enter) or (F9) ar e
ignor ed.
The second quest ion, OK t o st ar t r est or e (Y/N), may be
answer ed wit h any r esponse. All r esponses ot her t han (N) ar e
t r eat ed as a (Y) response.
CLEAR Tells Restore t hat , befor e r est or ing t he fir st file, t he dir ect or y of
t o-drive is t o be clear ed. A cur r ent dir ect or y size is used unless
t he SIZE opt ion is also specified.
This opt ion may only be used when opt ion VOLUME is in effect
wit h a Mode 1 Restore.
When r est or ing t o t he S dr ive wit h t his opt ion you must be in
single-user mode...t he MULTIUSER opt ion is ignor ed. Also, t he
NOASK opt ion is ignor ed. Aft er t he r est or e you ar e pr ompt ed t o
r eboot t he syst em.
DRIVE d Used wit h a mult iple disk ar chive volume t o specify t hat you
want t o rest or e only t hose files t hat were ar chived fr om dr ive
d. d may be specified as a dr ive code or a volume name.
>archive s a b tape (noask notype
>restore tape c (drive a
This Restore command r est or es t he files t o t he C dr ive t hat
wer e ar chived fr om t he A dr ive.
Restore 499
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FROM account Tells Restore t o only select t hose files on t he ar chive vol-
ume t hat wer e owned by account name account at t he t ime t he
ar chive was cr eat ed.
See t he second Mode 2 example.
LABEL label Tells Restore t hat t he mult iple disk/t ape archive volume uses
disk/t ape labels of label, wit h each disk/t ape of t he set incr e-
ment ing t he last char act er of label. For inst ance, disk one is
labeled Mon-1, disk t wo is labeled Mon-2 and so on.
This label is used in t he pr ompt messages only and is not
r elat ed t o t he disk label wr it t en when a disk is for mat t ed.
MULTIUSER Allows Restore t o r est ore t o a public dr ive even t hough ot her
user s may be logged on and act ive. Nor mally, when Restore is
inst r uct ed t o per for m a full volume rest or e (opt ion VOLUME) on
a public disk, it r equir es single-user mode. If ot her user s are
logged ont o t he syst em, it displays t he message: Must be sin-
gle-user or pr ivat e volume.
Using t his opt ion t ells Restore t o not r est r ict t he r est or e t o sin-
gle-user oper at ion (t he message is st ill displayed). THIS CAN
BE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS! If anot her user changes
some files while t he r est ore is being done, t he int egr it y of t he
files r est or ed may be lost . Use t his opt ion only if you ar e sur e
t hat all ot her user s ar e inact ive.
NAME name Specifies t he name of t he ar chive volume set . When t he file-
t ype is not specified in name t he default file-t ype of ARCHIVE is
used.
When t his opt ion is not used t he name of t he ar chive volume
must be ARCHIVE.VOLUME01.
NEWFILE Specifies t hat Restore will only at t empt t o rest or e a file if it
does not alr eady exist on t o-drive.
t ion at t he beginning of t he r est or e and when subsequent disks
or t apes ar e needed.
NOQUERY An opt ion t hat t ells Restore t o not ask for confirmat ion on each
file being r est or ed. In addit ion, t his opt ion suppr esses t he
quer y when a file exist s and t he REPLACE opt ion is not speci-
fied, as well as t he quer y when a file exist s, is pr ot ect ed and
t he ALL opt ion is not specified.
500 Restore
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Wit h NOQUERY in effect t he following quest ions ar e never
asked:
Ok to restore "XXX" (Yes/No/All)
File "XXX" exists, ok to restore (Yes,No,All)
File "XXX" protected, ok to restore (Yes,No,All)
NOSYSFILES Do not r est or e oper at ing syst em files. See NOSYSFILES
on page 503.
NOTYPE Tells Restore t o not display account names, subdir ect or y
names, libr ar y names or file names on t he st andard out put
device as t hey ar e being r est or ed.
OLDER Only r est or e files if t he file does not exist on t he dest inat ion or
if t he exist ing file on t he dest inat ion is older t han t he ar chived
file.
OLDFILE Specifies t hat Restore will only at t empt t o r est or e a file if it
does exist on t o-drive. This opt ion implies t he REPLACE opt ion.
PRTnn Indicat es t hat Restore is t o pr int t he display of account names,
subdir ect or y names, libr ar y names and file names on t he
at t ached pr int er number nn.
PRINTER. PRINTER1 may be specified as P.
QUERY Tells Restore t hat t he oper at or is t o be quer ied or asked if
each file mat ching t he select ion cr it er ia is t o be r est or ed.
>restore f s (noask query notype
Ok to restore "SAMPLE.FILE:S" (Yes/No/All) N
Ok to restore "SELECTED.EXEC:S" (Yes/No/All) N
When t he Ok t o r est or e quest ion is asked, you may respond
wit h a (Y) for yes, (N) or (Enter) for no or (A) for all. Responding
wit h (A) means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e
included wit hout being quer ied.
Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t he r est ore (files alr eady r est or ed
r emain r est ored).
Restore 501
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REPLACE This opt ion t ells Restore t hat it is okay t o at t empt t o r est or e a
file even if it alr eady exist s on t he t o-drive. When t his opt ion is
not used (and t he NOQUERY opt ion is not used), an at t empt t o
r est or e an exist ing file causes you t o be quer ied:
File "XXX" exists, ok to restore (Yes,No,All)
Valid r esponses ar e ident ical t o t he QUERY opt ion r esponses.
REWIND When sour ce is t ape, r ewind t o st art of t ape befor e beginning
t he r est or e oper at ion. This is a default opt ion.
SHOW Display t he cont ent s of t he ar chive volume wit hout r est or ing
any files.
SIZE nnnn Used in conjunct ion wit h t he CLEAR opt ion. This opt ion t ells
Restore what size t o make t he newly clear ed dir ect or y on t he
to-drive.
SUBDIR Tells Restore t o r est or e t he files int o t he cur r ent wor king dir ec-
t ory. When t his opt ion is not used, files ar e r est or ed t o t he to-
drives r oot dir ect or y.
This opt ion is normally only used when r est or ing files t hat
wer e ar chived fr om a r oot direct or y. When r est oring a file t hat
was in a subdirect or y, it is r est or ed t o t hat same dir ect or y but
subor dinat e t o t he curr ent wor king direct or y.
For inst ance: /SUBDIR/SOME.FILE:S is ar chived and t hen you
CHDIR t o t he SUBDIR dir ect or y and per for m a r est or e wit h t he
SUBDIR opt ion.
The file is r est or ed t o /SUBDIR/SUBDIR/SOME.FILE:S.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells Restore t o display each account
name, subdir ect or y name, libr ary name and file name on t he
st andar d out put device (nor mally t he console) as it is being
r est or ed. This display can be r edir ect ed.
The display wit h t his opt ion differs bet ween an ACCOUNT
r est or e and a VOLUME r est or e. A VOLUME r est or e displays like
t he TArchive display, showing t he account names, subdir ect or y
names, libr ary names and file names wit h indent at ion t o indi-
cat e t he hier ar chy of t he account and dir ect or y st ruct ur e.
502 Restore
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For inst ance, t he following is a t ypical display during a full vol-
ume rest or e:
ACCOUNT: 2=SAMPLES
File: READ.ME
File: SAMPLES.EXEC
Subdirectory: C32
Library: C32.CMD32
Member: C32.CMD32.FINS
Member: C32.CMD32.PRTF
...
An ACCOUNT rest or e displays a simple message for each file
r est or ed:
Searching for account "SAMPLES".
Restoring "READ.ME:S".
Restoring "SAMPLES.EXEC:S".
Restoring "/C32/C32.CMD32:S".
Restoring "/C32/C32.CMD32.FINS:S".
Restoring "/C32/C32.CMD32.PRTF:S".
...
When a qualifying file cannot be rest or ed for some r eason, t he
TYPE opt ion displays an appr opr iat e message:
File "XXX" not restored because file exists.
File "XXX" not restored because disk full.
File "XXX" not restored because directory full.
VOLUME Rest or es t he ent ir e ar chive volume t o t he to-drive. This is t he
default opt ion wit h Mode 1 and can only be used wit h Mode 1.
Defaults ASK and TYPE ar e default opt ions. VOLUME is a default opt ion wit h Mode
1, ACCOUNT is a default opt ion wit h Mode 2.
Restrictions The Restore command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four .
Individual files on a mult ivolume ar chive can only be r est or ed wit h t he
Mode 2 for m of t his command if t he files ar e on t he fir st volume of t he
ar chive set . When t he files ar e on secondar y volumes of t he set , use t he
Mode 1 for m of t he command wit h t he QUERY opt ion.
Restore 503
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NOSYSFILES When t he NOSYSFILES opt ion is specified, t he following set s of files ar e
skipped if found on t he archive volume.
+ Syst em command files
+ Syst em help files
+ Syst em menu files
+ Device dr iver s
+ Class code definit ions
+ etc.
See also TArchive, Backup, CopyFile, Disk, Tape, TBackup
504 Restore
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
RMCP 505
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
RMCP Command
Similar t o t he POP3Test command, t he RMCP command checks a mail ser ver t o see if t her e
is any mail available for a specified email account .
Operation Using t he Remot e Mail Checking Pr ot ocall (RMCP) t he host is cont act ed
wit h user as t he account name. The r esponse code received from t he mail
ser ver is int er pr et ed and displayed on t he console and t he r et ur n code is
set t o r eflect t his r esponse.
The possible messages displayed by t his command ar e:
You have new mail.
You have some old mail.
You have no mail.
Ther e may also be er r or messages displayed.
Notes Account names ar e case-sensit ive on some ser ver s. To ensur e t hat t he
account t hat you pr ovide is t he same as t he ones given t o t he host , enclose
t he ar gument in quot at ion mar ks.
>RMCP "MyName@somehost.com"
No t ext is displayed on t he console when t his command is execut ed fr om
an EXEC pr ogr am or a Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am using t he
SYSTEM or CSI st at ement or a C language pr ogr am using t he system()
funct ion.
RMCP user@host
user E-mail account name
host Domain or host of account
506 RMCP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Return Codes Because t his pr ogr am is fr equent ly invoked fr om wit hin a pr ogr am t he
r et ur n code is set t o specific code r eflect ing t he st at us of mail for t he
user@host.
See also POP3Test, TheoMail
RC Meaning
0 Ther e is no mail on t he ser ver for t his account .
1 Some connect ion er r or occur r ed or t he ser ver does
did not r espond.
2 Ther e is no new mail for t he user on t he ser ver but
t her e is some old mail t her e.
3 Ther e is some new mail for t he user on t he ser ver .
RmDir 507
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
RmDir Command
The RmDir or Remove Dir ect or y command er ases a subdir ect or y and all of it s files.
Operation Not e: This command does not normally r emove dir ect or ies fr om disk.
Inst ead, it moves t he r equest ed direct or y and it s files t o t he r ecycle bin.
You must use t he NOSAVE opt ion t o r emove t he dir ect ory fr om t he disk
wit h t his command. Refer t o Recycle Bin in t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S ystem Reference manual.
The directory or directories specified ar e er ased.
>rmdir subdir1 subdir2
"/SUBDIR1:S" erased.
If a direct or y cont ains files or subor dinat e dir ect or ies, you ar e asked t o
confir m t hat you want t o r emove t he dir ect ory and all of it s subor dinat e
files and dir ect ories.
>rd sample (notype
RMDIR direct ory ( options
directory subdir ect or y name; may cont ain pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NOQUERY
NOSAVE
NOTYPE
QUERY
TYPE
Command synonym: RD
508 RmDir
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOQUERY Indicat es t hat you do not want t o be asked for confir mat ion
befor e er asing a subdir ect or y cont aining files.
>rd subdir1 (noquery
"/SUBDIR1/TEST1.FILE:S" erased.
"/SUBDIR1/SUBDIR11/TEST1.FILE:S" erased.
"/SUBDIR1/SUBDIR11:S" erased.
"/SUBDIR1/SUBDIR12:S" erased.
Subdir ect or ies t hat do not cont ain files ar e not quer ied, even
wit hout t his opt ion.
NOSAVE Causes t he dir ect or ies t o be er ased fr om t he disk at t his t ime.
When t his opt ion is not specified and t he dr ive is an image
drive or hard disk dr ive, t he direct or ies ar e simply moved t o
t he r ecycle bin.
NOTYPE Tells RmDir t o not display t he r esult s of each file or dir ect or y
er ased on t he st andar d out put device.
QUERY Tells RmDir t o quer y or ask if each dir ect or y mat ching t he file
specificat ions is t o be r emoved. This is a default opt ion when
>tree
/
subdir1
subdir11
subdir12
subdir2
>rd subdir1 (noq
>tree
/
subdir2
RmDir 509
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When t he Ok t o r emove quest ion is asked, you may r espond
means yes t o t his dir ect or y and all r emaining dir ect ories are
r emoved wit hout being queried. Respond wit h (C) or (Esc) t o
cancel t he r emove oper at ion.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells RmDir t o display t he r esult s of each
file and dir ect or y er ased on t he st andar d out put device. This
display can be redir ect ed.
>rmdir *
Notes The command name RD is a synonym t o t he RmDir command. It is not a
allowed.
This command does not normally r emove t he dir ect or y or it s files fr om
disk. Inst ead, it moves t he r equest ed dir ect or y and files t o t he r ecycle bin.
You must use t he NOSAVE opt ion t o r emove t he file fr om t he disk wit h t his
command.
Recycle Bin When t he NOSAVE opt ion is not used, all of t he files er ased by t his com-
mand ar e not act ually er ased. Inst ead, t he file is moved t o t he r ecycle bin
which is a special, r eser ved dir ect or y on t he SYSTEM account . Should t he
need ar ise, an er ased dir ect or y and it s files can be r ecover ed fr om t his
r ecycle bin by using t he UnErase command. However , due t o space limit a-
t ions, files in t he r ecycle bin ar e not r et ained for ever .
Defaults TYPE is a default opt ion.
See also FileManager, Erase, UnErase
510 RmDir
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Route 511
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Route Command
The Route command displays and maint ains t he r out ing t ables used t o est ablish net wor k
pat hs t o var ious IP addr esses.
The r out ing t able maint ained by t his command is t he int ernal, memor y-r esident t able. This
t able is cr eat ed dynamically each t ime t hat t he net wor k is st ar t ed. It is a combinat ion of
default ent r ies, ent r ies pr ovided by a gat eway (if any) and by dynamic net wor k pr ocesses
such as DialUp Net wor king. It is augment ed by t he r out es defined wit h t his command and
by r out es defined in t he /THEOS/CONFIG/NETROUTE.CFG:S file.
Operation Mode 1Displays t he cur r ent int er nal r out ing t able on st dout.
>route
Net Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Host Address
127.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.100.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.100.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1
192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1
Mode 2Displays t he cur r ent int er nal r out ing t able on t he designat ed
pr int er .
Mode 3Adds anot her r out e definit ion t o t he int er nal r out ing t able.
>route (add 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.2 192.168.100.1
The above command adds anot her ent r y t o t he r out ing t able.
1 ROUTE
2 ROUTE ( PRTnn
3 ROUTE ( ADD net-addr net -mask gat eway-addr host -addr
4 ROUTE ( DELETE net-addr net-mask
gat eway-addr dot t ed IP address of gat eway machine
host-addr dot t ed IP address of NIC in local machine used t o access gate-
way-addr
net -addr dot t ed IP address of dest inat ion net wor k
net -mask dot t ed subnet mask for t he dest inat ion net wor k
512 Route
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4Delet es a r out e definit ion fr om t he int er nal r out ing t able.
>route (delete 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0
Notes For mos t networks , i t i s not necess ary to modi fy thi s tabl e.
All IP addr esses st ar t ing wit h 127 ar e loopback addr esses. By conven-
t ion, only t he 127.0.0.1 addr ess is used. Net wor k packet s addr essed t o t his
addr ess ar e not sent t o t he net work har dwar e. Inst ead, t hey ar e capt ur ed
by t he net wor k soft war e and handled int er nally on t his machine.
When t he net wor k on t his machine want s t o send a net wor k packet t o
anot her node on t he net wor k t he int er nal rout ing t able is used t o det er -
mine and cont r ol what pat h is used t o find t hat machine.
For inst ance, t he following diagr am shows a t ypical, small LAN wit h
access t o t he Int er net t hr ough an r out er . The r out er could be r eplaced wit h
a DSL modem or a net wor k modem-shar ing device. It could even be a com-
put er wit h a pr oxy ser ver and modem connect ion t o an ISP.
Each of t he THEOS-machine nodes on t he LAN can use t he default r out ing
t ables generat ed when t he net wor k soft war e is st ar t ed. These default
r out es ar e ident ical wit h t he except ion t hat each machines r out ing t able
point s t o it s own NIC addr ess.
Assuming t hat t he LAN is a Class C net wor k addr essed wit h
192.168.100.*, t he r out ing t able for t he .1 node is:
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.1
127.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.100.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.100.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1
192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1
.1 .3 .5 .7 .9
.8 .6 .4 .2
.100
router
The .1, .2 et c. r eferences ar e t o t he last port ion of t he IP address of t he node.
Rout e 513
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This t able specifies:
Line 1: All packet s not r out ed by t he ot her ent r ies ar e sent t o t he r out er at
192.168.100.100 via t he NIC addr essed at 192.168.100.1.
Line 2: All packet s addr essed t o localhost are sent t o t he loopback addr ess.
Line 3 and 4: All packet s broadcast t o t he localhost ar e sent t o t he loop-
back addr ess.
Line 5: All packet s addr essed t o t his machine (fr om t his machine) ar e sent
t o t he loopback addr ess.
Line 6: All packet s br oadcast t o t he local net wor k ar e sent t o t his net wor k
via t he NIC addressed at 192.168.100.1.
Line 7: All packet s br oadcast t o ot her machines on t he subnet ar e sent t o
t his net wor k via t he NIC addr essed at 192.168.100.1.
A mor e complex net wor k might be:
This net wor k is compr ised of t hr ee net wor ks: t he 192.168.100.* LAN, t he
192.168.50.* LAN and t he Int er net . One of machines has t wo NICs
inst alled in it and act s as a br idge bet ween t he t wo LANs.
Each of t he machines on t he 192.168.100.* LAN must be configur ed t o
r out e packet s addr essed t o t he ot her LAN t hr ough t he .4 node. You could
do t his by using t he Route command t o add an addit ional r out e definit ion.
On t he .1 machine you would:
>route (add 192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.4 192.168.100.1
.1 .3 .5 .7 .9
.8 .6 .4 .2
.100
router
.2 .1
192.168.100.*
192.168.50.*
.9
514 Route
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
On t he .2 machine you would:
>route (add 192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.4 192.168.100.2
Similar commands ar e done for each of t he ot her machines except t he .4
machine it self. On t hat machine t he default r out ing is alr eady differ ent
because t he t wo NICs wer e configur ed in Setup NET. (See THEOS Corona
Version 5 Operating S yst em Inst allation and S et up Guide.)
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.4
127.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.50.9 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.50.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.50.9 192.168.50.9
192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.50.9 192.168.50.9
192.168.100.4 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
192.168.100.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.4 192.168.100.4
192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.4 192.168.100.4
These addit ional ent r ies t ell t he net wor k soft war e t o for war d all packet s
r eceived for t he 192.168.50.* net work t o t hat net wor k by t r ansmit t ing
t hem via t he NIC at 192.168.50.9. No addit ional r out ing ent ries need t o be
added on t his machine.
Similar r out ing ent r ies must be added t o t he machines on t he 192.168.50.*
LAN.
Rout e 515
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Initial Routing
Table
When t he net wor k is fir st st art ed at boot t ime or wit h t he NET START
NETWORK command, t he int er nal r out ing t ables ar e init ialized t o include:
+ A pat h t o t he default gat eway, if defined
+ Thr ee ent r ies for loopback addresses
+ Thr ee ent r ies for each NIC IP addr ess defined
+ Ent r ies copied fr om t he /THEOS/CONFIG/NETROUTE.CFG:S file, if any
Dur ing t he cour se of oper at ion, addit ional ent r ies ar e added and delet ed
fr om t he r out ing t able due t o t r ansient PPP connect ions.
Restrictions Rout es added or delet ed by t his command ar e only defined unt il t he net -
wor k is r est ar t ed by a syst em r eboot .
If you want t he changes made wit h t his command t o be used t he next t ime
t hat your net wor k is rest ar t ed, you must manually add t hem t o t he
/THEOS/CONFIG/NETROUTE.CFG:S file.
516 Route
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S cript 517
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Script Command
Pr ocess and format t he t ext in a file including page headings, par agr aph just ificat ion, chap-
t er s, cont ent s, etc.
Operation Mode 1Pr ocess t he t ext and commands in t he file filename and out put
t he r esult accor ding t o t he options specified.
Mode 2Pr ocess t he t ext and commands in t he file filename and out put
t he r esult t o out file accor ding t o t he options specified.
Mode 3Pr ocess t he t ext and commands in t he file filename and out put
t he r esult accor ding t o t he options specified. If t her e ar e any READ com-
mands in filename, t hey r ead t heir values fr om readfile.
Options Cnn Use pr int er class code nn for for mat t ing t he out put .
FILE Out put t he for mat t ed r esult t o outfile. outfile must be specified
as t he fir st par amet er aft er filename.
INDEX Only cr eat e and out put t he index infor mat ion.
PRTnn Out put t he r esult t o pr int er nn.
REPEAT nn Producs nn copies of t he out put .
TYPE Out put t he r esult t o t he console.
WAIT Pause at t he end of each page for oper at or confir mat ion/
r elease.
1 SCRIPT filename ( opt ions
2 SCRIPT filename outfile ( FILE options
3 SCRIPT filename readfile ( opt ions
filename Scr ipt t ext file wit h commands
out file Name of out put file when FILE opt ion used
readfile File name for sour ce of READ command var iables
opt ions Cnn INDEX REPEAT nn WAIT
FILE PRTnn TYPE nn mm
518 S cript
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
nn mm Only out put fr om page nn t hr ough page mm.
Defaults The default out put is t o t he console.
The init ial definit ion of t he special char act er s is: . (per iod) for st ar t of com-
mand, @for escape, _ for under line, & for boldface.
Script
Commands
ALIGN Align following t ext lines t o t he left or t o t he r ight .
APPENDIX St ar t a new appendix.
BIBLIOGRAPHY St ar t t he bibliogr aphy.
BREAK Line break.
BOX Dr aw a box.
CENTER Cent er some t ext .
CHAPTER St ar t a new chapt er .
CONTENTS Inser t t able of cont ent s her e.
COPY Copy and pr ocess a file.
CPI Set t he char act er size.
EJECT St ar t a new page.
END End of t his file.
FAX Invoke THEO+Fax.
FILL Set fill mode.
FOOTING Set left and r ight foot ing t ext .
FORMAT For mat t ext .
FOREWARD Begin for war d.
GLOSSARY Begin glossar y.
GUTTER Set inside and out side gut t er char act er .
HEADING Set left and r ight heading t ext .
HYPHENATE Enable wor d hyphenat ion or define hyphenat ion for a wor d.
S cript 519
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
IGUTTER Set inside gut t er char act er .
INDENT Set par agr aph indent .
INDEX Inser t index here.
INPVAR Read value of var iable.
INTRODUCTION Begin int r oduct ion.
JUSTIFY Set just ify mode.
LFOOTING Set left foot ing t ext .
LHEADING Set left heading t ext .
LINE Cr eat e line of r epeat ed char act er s.
LINK Link t o a new t ext file.
LPI Set lines per inch.
LSIZE Set left page size.
LMARGIN Set left mar gin.
NOFILL Tur n off fill mode and just ificat ion.
NOHYPHENATE Disable hyphenat ion mode.
NOJUST Disable just ificat ion mode.
OGUTTER Set out side gut t er char act er .
PAGE Condit ional eject .
PARASKIP Set par agr aph spacing.
PART St ar t a new par t .
PAUSE Wait for oper at or t o r espond.
PITCH Define font sizes t o use.
POSITION Move t o line posit ion.
PREFACE Begin pr eface.
READ Read values for a variable fr om an ext er nal file.
520 S cript
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REMARK Comment line.
RFOOTING Set r ight foot ing t ext .
RHEADING Set r ight heading t ext .
RMARGIN Set r ight mar gin.
RSIZE Set r ight page size.
SECTION St ar t a new sect ion.
SETAPPENDIX Define next appendix let t er .
SETBOLD Define boldface char act er . (&)
SETCHAPTER Define next chapt er number .
SETCOL Define t ab char act er .
SETCOMM Define command char act er . (.)
SETESCAPE Define escape char act er . (@)
SETHYPH Define hyphenat ion char act er (-).
SETITALIC Define it alics charact er.
SETPAGE Define next page number .
SETPART Define next par t number .
SETSPACE Define har d space char act er
SETTAB Define t ab char act er .
SETUNDERLINE Define underline char act er . (_)
SETVAR Define variable value.
SIZE Set page size.
SKIP Out put blank lines.
SPACE Set line spacing.
TABSET Define t ab st op columns.
TITLE Define out put as book and set book t it le.
S cript 521
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE Display t ext on console.
Variables and
codes
. This char act er is used at t he beginning of a line t hat is a com-
mand. The char act er can be changed wit h t he SETCOMM com-
mand.
& This char act er surr ounds t ext t hat is t o be boldfaced. Char ac-
t er can be changed wit h t he SETBOLD command.
_ This char act er sur r ounds t ext t hat is t o be under lined. Char ac-
t er can be changed wit h t he SETUNDERLINE command.
@ The following char act er is t o be int erpr et ed differ ent ly t han
nor mal. This escape charact er can be changed wit h t he SET-
ESCAPE command.
@1 - @99 Var iables.
@D Dat e in mm/dd/yy format .
@d Dat e in Monthname, dd, yyyy for mat .
@T Time in hh:mm (24 hour) for mat .
@t Time in hh:mm am/pm format .
@P Cur r ent page number .
@S Cur r ent chapt er or appendix name.
@, Tab t o cent er or r ight zone (only in heading/foot ing/format
t ext ).
@; Begin new line (only in heading/foot ing/for mat t ext )
522 S cript
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S ee 523
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
See Command Filter
The See command copies a file t o t he st andar d out put device, making all nonpr int able char -
act er s visible.
Operation Mode 1Each file in t he list of files is copied t o t he st andar d out put
device. Each nonpr int able char act er in file is displayed wit h t wo or t hr ee
displayable char act er s:
Nonpr int able char act er values less t han t he space char act er (32) display
wit h a leading up-car et ( ^ ) followed by t he cont r ol char act er . For
inst ance, a t ab char act er displays as Î.
Nonpr int able char act er values gr eat er t han 127 display wit h a leading
t ilde ( ~ ) followed by t he display for t he charact er value minus 128. For
inst ance, t he char act er value 137 displays as ~Î and t he value 159 dis-
plays as ~^_.
The DEL char act er (value 127) displays as ^?. The end-of-line char act er
(car r iage ret ur n) and NULL charact ers (0) display as a dollar sign ( $ )
unless t he file specificat ion is pr eceded wit h a minus sign char act er .
>see system.cmd32.repeat
system.cmd32.repeat:s:
; get type of first argument$
&t = &typ &1$
$
; validate count and command$
&if (&index < 2) | (&t <> N)$
Î&control off$
Îhelp repeat$
...
Mult iple files can be specified on t he command line:
>see file1 file2 file3
1 SEE file...
2 SEE
524 S ee
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Each file is displayed on t he st andar d out put device. The minus sign speci-
ficat ion (Mode 2) can be used t o indicat e t hat t he end-of-line char act er is
not displayed as a dollar sign:
>see - system.cmd32.repeat
system.cmd32.repeat:s:
; get type of first argument
&t = &typ &1
; validate count and command
&if (&index < 2) | (&t <> N)
Î&control off
Îhelp repeat
...
Mult iple files can be specified, some wit hout t he minus sign specificat ion
and some wit h:
>see file1 file2 file3 - file4 file5
In t he above command, t he fir st t hr ee files ar e out put wit h t he dollar sign
char act er displayed and t he last t wo files are displayed wit hout t his char -
act er .
Mode 2Copies t he file fr om st andar d input t o st andar d out put , display-
ing t he nonprint able char act er s as descr ibed above. This mode is nor mally
used when t he See command is par t of a pipe.
>upcase system.cmd32.repeat | see
; GET TYPE OF FIRST ARGUMENT$
&T = &TYP &1$
$
; VALIDATE COUNT AND COMMAND$
&IF (&INDEX < 2) | (&T <> N)$
Î&CONTROL OFF$
...
The minus sign specificat ion can be used wit h t his mode:
>upcase system.cmd32.repeat | see -
; GET TYPE OF FIRST ARGUMENT
&T = &TYP &1
; VALIDATE COUNT AND COMMAND
&IF (&INDEX < 2) | (&T <> N)
See also List, More
S end 525
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Send Command EXEC
The Send command is an EXEC language pr ogr am t hat gives you convenient , command-line
access t o t he THEO+COM commands file send capabilit y.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he THEO+COM command in SEND mode. The fir st
at t ached COM device is used unless t he COMnn opt ion is specified. If no
pr ot ocol opt ion is specified, t he THEOS pr ot ocol is used.
If t he connect ion t o t he ot her comput er is via a modem, it is assumed t hat
t he t elephone connect ion has alr eady been est ablished wit h t he Dial com-
mand or by using THEO+COM dir ect ly.
>dial 1 800 123-4567
Dialing 1 800 123-4567
>send updated.stocklst
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1, except file is an ASCII st r eam file t hat con-
t ains one file descr ipt ion per line. The SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC
files cr eat ed by FileList and t he FOUND.EXEC creat ed by Look can be used for
t his specificat ion file (see The EXEC and FILES Options on page 239). You
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be sent :
changed since 10/01/2000. The following command sends t hese files t o
anot her comput er connect ed via a COM at t achment :
>send selected.exec (file
1 SEND file ( opt ions
2 SEND file ( FILES options
opt ions ASCII NOEOT TRACEFILE fn XMODEM-1K
COMnn THEOS XMODEM YMODEM
EOT TRACE XMODEM-CRC
526 S end
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The THEOS pr ot ocol must be used in t his mode. The files ar e sent wit h
NOEOT in effect for all files except t he last file, which uses EOT.
Options ASCII Use t he ASCII file t r ansfer pr ot ocol. Essent ially, t his is no pr o-
t ocol and should be used only for short t ext files.
COMnn Use t he cur r ent ly at t ached COMnn for t he communicat ions
por t . When t his opt ion is not specified, t he fir st at t ached COM
device is used.
EOT A default opt ion t hat t ells THEO+COM t o send t he end-of-t r ans-
mission codes aft er t he file is sent . To disable t his opt ion use
t he NOEOT opt ion.
NOEOT Tells THEO+COM t o not send t he end-of-t r ansmission codes
aft er t he file is sent . This opt ion is used when sever al files will
be sent .
>send this.file (theos noeot
>send that.file (theos eot
The above t wo commands send t he t wo files t o anot her com-
put er. The ot her comput er used t he Receive command only
once because t he fir st file used NOEOT and t he t r ansmission
was not t er minat ed.
Protocol..... THEOS
File name.... MY.DATA:S
File size.... 1,235
Blocks....... 5
Transmitted.. 0%
Byte count... 0
Block count.. 0
File count... 1
Elapsed time. 0:02
Errors....... 0
Message...... Waiting for receiver
Progress.....
File transfer in process. Press ESC to cancel.
Send
S end 527
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
THEOS Use t he THEOS SEND/RECEIVE prot ocol. This is t he default
pr ot ocol.
TRACE Enables file t r ansfer t r acing. A window is opened in t he upper -
r ight cor ner of t he display, showing t he pr ot ocol act ivit y during
a t r ansfer .
TRACEFILE fn Similar t o t he TRACE opt ion except t hat t he pr ot ocol act iv-
it y is out put t o t he file fn.
XMODEM Use XMODEM checksum, 256-byt e pr ot ocol.
XMODEM-CRC Use XMODEM CRC-16, 256-byt e pr ot ocol.
XMODEM-1K Use XMODEM-1K, CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol for single file
t r ansfer s.
YMODEM Use YMODEM CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol. This pr ot ocol
might be called YMODEM-BATCH in t he ot her comput ers
communicat ion pr ogr am because it can r eceive mult iple files.
Notes Refer t o t he THEO+COM Inst allation and Users Guide manual for a full
descr ipt ion of t he oper at ion of file t r ansfer s and t he pr ot ocols used.
Defaults The fir st at t ached COM device is used by default and t he THEOS pr ot ocol
is t he default .
Restrictions A COM device must be at t ached.
See also Dial, PutFile, Receive, THEO+COM
528 S end
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S endMail 529
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SendMail Client
The SendMail client is a ut ilit y pr ogr am t hat sends a t ext file as a mail message t o a mail
ser ver on t he net wor k. This pr ogr am is designed wit h a simple, command-line int er face
suit able for usage as a t ool in applicat ion pr ogr ams. For a mail client wit h a mor e user -
fr iendly int er face, use t he TheoMail descr ibed on page 653.
Operation filename is sent t o t he SMTP Server specified in t he THEOS E-mail configu-
r at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/EMAIL). At a minimum, t he TO and FROM opt ion
must be specified wit h valid e-mail addr esses.
Options ATTACH Specifies t hat a file is at t ached t o t he message when it is sent .
The file may be a t ext file or a non-t ext file such as a pr ogr am
or binar y st r eam dat a file. The file must be accessible fr om t he
cur rent account .
Mult iple files may be at t ached t o a message by using t he
ATTACH opt ion mult iple t imes.
>sendmail my.message (to you@your-company.com from
me@mycompany.com subject "example message w/attach-
ments"
attach sample.attach1 attach sample.attach2
The at t ached files may be of any t ype. As a THEOS command,
it aut omat ically convert s for mat t ed dat a files and compiled
pr ogr ams t o a por t able for mat .
BCC Indicat es t hat a blind car bon-copy of t he message is sent t o
t he addr ess specified. Recipient addresses specified wit h t he
BCC opt ion r eceive a copy of t he message. However , t heir
addr ess does not appear in any of t he header s in any of t he cop-
ies of t he message sent .
me@mycompany.com bcc yourboss@your-company.com sub-
ject
"You're history"
1 SENDMAIL filename ( options
filename name of file on local syst em
opt ions ATTACH FILES RAW SUBJECT
BCC FROM REPLYTO TO
CC HTML SMTP
530 S endMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The above command sends t he my.message file t o bot h
you@your-company.com and yourboss@your-company.com.
However , bot h copies ar e received wit h you@your-company.com
in t he To field and not hing in t he CC field. Received mes-
sages never have a BCC field. Compar e wit h t he CC opt ion
descr ibed next .
Mult iple BCC addr esses may be specified by eit her using one
BCC opt ion wit h an ar gument cont aining mult iple addr esses
separ at ed by comma, space, or by using mult iple BCC opt ion
specificat ions. For inst ance, t he following t wo commands pro-
duce t he same r esult :
me@mycompany.com bcc yourboss@your-company.com bcc
myboss@my-company.com subject "Your termination"
me@mycompany.com bcc "yourboss@your-company.com,
myboss@my-company.com" subject "Your termination"
CC Indicat es t hat a car bon-copy of t he message is sent t o t he
addr ess specified.
me@mycompany.com cc yourboss@your-company.com subject
"You're history"
The above command sends t he my.message file t o bot h
you@your-company.com and yourboss@your-company.com.
Bot h copies ar e r eceived wit h you@your-company.com in t he
To field and yourboss@your-company.com in t he CC field.
In ot her wor ds, all r ecipient s of t he message see t hat t he mes-
sage was sent t o t he addr esses specified wit h t he TO opt ion
and t he CC opt ion. Compare wit h t he BCC opt ion descr ibed
above.
Mult iple CC addr esses may be specified by eit her using one CC
opt ion wit h an ar gument cont aining mult iple addr esses sepa-
r at ed by comma, space, or by using mult iple CC opt ion specifi-
cat ions.
FILES Indicat es t hat filename is not t he name of t he file t o be mailed,
but is a file t hat cont ains a list of files t o be mailed. The files
SELECTED.EXEC, SELECTED.FILES and FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by t he
FileList, Look and FileManager commands can be used for t his
pur pose.
S endMail 531
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For inst ance, t he FileList command is used t o creat e a list of
messages t o be sent :
>filelist *.message:a (01/20/01 exec
This creat es a SELECTED.EXEC file cont aining a list of all of t he
message files on t he A dr ive t hat wer e cr eat ed or modified aft er
J anuar y 19, 2001. This file might look like:
&1 ABC.MESSAGE:A &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 GENERAL.MESSAGE:A &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
&1 GEORGE.MESSAGE:A &2 &3 &4 &5 &6 &7 &8 &9 &10
Only t he file names in each line ar e used. Ot her char act er s ar e
ignor ed.
Assuming t hat t hese message files each st ar t wit h t he message
header s necessar y t o send t he message, t hey can be sent wit h
t his command:
>sendmail selected.exec (files
Not e t hat t he SELECTED.FILES file cr eat ed wit h t he FileList com-
mand is only usable when t he FD opt ion is used also. For
inst ance:
>filelist *.message:a (01/20/01 files fd
FROM Specifies t he e-mail addr ess of t he aut hor or cr eat or of t he mes-
sage. This should be your e-mail addr ess but , in fact , may be
any valid-appear ing addr ess. The domain-name of t his addr ess
must be valid because most mail ser ver s will per for m a DNS
lookup on t he domain-name specified.
All e-mail messages must have a Fr om field specified. It may
be specified eit her wit h t his command-line opt ion or, if embed-
ded mail header s ar e used, wit h one of t hose.
head-guru@theos-software.com replyto me@my-company.com
subject "Example message"
HTML The t ext por t ion of t he mail message is alr eady for mat t ed wit h
HTML t ags and SendMail should use t he appr opriat e MIME
header s t o indicat e t his when it sends t he message.
RAW This opt ion specifies t hat t he filename alr eady cont ains all of
t he necessar y MIME header s and SendMail should send t he
message wit hout examinat ion or modificat ion.
532 S endMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REPLYTO Specifies t he e-mail addr ess you want r eplies sent t o. This
should be your e-mail addr ess and should refer t o an act ual
e-mail account . Use t his opt ion when you want r eplies t o a
message t o be sent t o a different addr ess t han t he one specified
in t he Fr om field.
me@my-company.com replyto sales@my-company.com subject
"New product release"
Most e-mail client s (TheoMail, for example) pr ovide an easy
met hod of addr essing a r esponse t o a received message. The
addr ess used by t hose r eply-t o capabilit ies of e-mail client s is
t he addr ess specified wit h t his REPLYTO opt ion. When a
REPLYTO addr ess is not specified, t he FROM e-mail addr ess is
used by e-mail client s.
SMTP server This opt ion causes server t o be used as t he SMTP ser ver
inst ead of any value t hat might have been defined in t he
SETUP SMTP configur at ion file.
SUBJECT Specifies t he gener al subject of t he message. Alt hough not
r equir ed, ever y message should have a subject line. The sub-
ject t ext may appear on t he r ecipient s e-mail client s mailbox
summar y scr eens.
TO Per haps t he most impor t ant piece of infor mat ion in a message
header , t his opt ion specifies t he r ecipient addr ess for t he mes-
sage. The addr ess specified must be a valid e-mail addr ess.
me@mycompany.com subject "New product release"
Mult iple dest inat ion addr esses may be specified wit h t he CC or
BCC opt ions (along wit h t his TO opt ion) or by specifying a TO
ar gument cont aining mult iple addr esses separ at ed by comma,
space, or by specifying t he opt ion mult iple t imes.
For inst ance, t he following t hr ee commands will each send t he
message t o you@your-company.com and yourboss@your-
company.com:
me@mycompany.com cc your-boss@your-company.com subject
"Staff meeting at 1:00"
>sendmail my.message (to "you@your-company.com,
your-boss@your-company.com" from me@mycompany.com
subject "Staff meeting at 1:00"
S endMail 533
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>sendmail my.message (to you@your-company.com to
your-boss@your-company.com from me@mycompany.com
subject "Staff meeting at 1:00"
The differ ence bet ween t hese messages will only be in t he
int er pr et at ion by t he r ecipient . The fir st for m sends t he mes-
sage t o you wit h an infor mat ional copy t o yourboss. The sec-
ond and t hir d for ms send t he message wit h equal impor t ance
t o bot h r ecipient s.
Embedded
Mail Headers
The addr essing header s for a message may be specified on t he command
line or wit h embedded header s at t he beginning of t he message file. For
inst ance, a message file cont aining
A staff meeting is scheduled at 1:00pm today in the 4th
floor conference room.
Your attendance is required.
The Boss.
This file could be sent wit h t he following command:
>sendmail my.message (to "Alice <you@mycompany.com>" from
"J.C. <TheBoss@mycompany.com>" subject "Staff meeting at 1:00"
If t he message uses embedded header s, such as:
To: Alice <you@my.company.com>
From: J.C. <TheBoss@my.company.com>
Subject: Staff meeting at 1:00
A staff meeting is scheduled at 1:00pm today in the 4th
floor conference room.
Your attendance is required.
The Boss.
It can be sent wit h t he following command:
>sendmail my.message
534 S endMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The following header s may be embedded at t he st ar t of a message file:
To:
Cc:
Bcc:
From:
Subject:
Reply-to:
Attach:
When used, t he mail header s must be t he fir st lines in t he file, t hey must
st ar t on t he fir st column of t he line and t her e must be one or mor e spaces
following t he colon char act er . A blank line separ at es t he mail header s
fr om t he body of t he message. Do not include any blank lines bet ween
embedded mail header lines.
The Attach embedded header is followed wit h t he pat h t o t he desir ed
at t achment file. You may use more t han one Attach header when you want
t o at t ach mult iple files. Wild car ds ar e not permit t ed.
When a file uses embedded mail header s, do not use any of t he following
command-line opt ions: BCC, CC, FROM, REPLYTO, SUBJECT or TO. You
can use t he command-line opt ions ATTACH and FILES.
E-mail
addresses
The gener al for m for an e-mail addr ess specificat ion is:
accountname@domainname
For inst ance:
sales@theos-software.com
support@quadralay.com
The domain name por t ion of an e-mail addr ess must always be a valid
domain name. Most mail ser ver s validat e t he domain name for ever y
addr ess specified, prior t o at t empt ing t o send t he message.
The account name por t ion of t he e-mail addr ess must also be valid if t he
addr ess is used as a dest inat ion addr ess. For inst ance, addresses specified
wit h t he TO, CC and BCC opt ions ar e dest inat ion addr esses. Addr esses
specified wit h t he opt ions FROM and REPLYTO should cont ain valid
account names because t hey may be used by t he r ecipient as dest inat ion
addr esses for r eplies t o t he message.
Since many account names ar e cr ypt ic, an e-mail addr ess may include
comment t ext t hat specifies a r eal per sons name or depar t ment . When
comment t ext is included as par t of t he e-mail addr ess, t he act ual addr ess
is enclosed wit hin a pair of angle br acket s. For inst ance:
S endMail 535
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
"John Doe <jdoe@someisp.com>"
Comment t ext may appear befor e or aft er , or befor e and aft er t he act ual
e-mail addr ess.
"John Doe <jdoe@someisp.com> FYI only"
Including Text
Files
The message file may use an embedded command t hat causes anot her t ext
file t o be included in t he message. For inst ance,
MESSAGE.TEXT file:
%include /sendmail/staff.distrib%
From: The Boss <TheBoss@internet.com>
Subject: Weekly Staff Meeting
%include weekly.meeting%
%include 010311.agenda%
We will also be discussing plans for the company picnic and vacation
schedules.
%include signature.files.theboss%
STAFF.DISTRIB file:
To: Tom <tom@internet.com>
Cc: Shirley <shirley@internet.com>
Cc: Richard <dick@internet.com>
Cc: Rebecca <becky@internet.com>
WEEKLY.MEETING file:
The weekly staff meeting is scheduled for Wednesday in the
4th floor conference room.
010311.AGENDA file:
Agenda for March 11, 2001 meeting:
Widget sales status
Sales incentives
Increased CEO bonus
SIGNATURE.FILES.THEBOSS file:
John Curtis (J.C.)
President
Widgets, Inc.
As illust r at ed in t he above example, t he %include command feat ur e is ver y
useful for cr eat ing boiler plat e messages, for specifying e-mail dist r ibu-
t ion list s, et c. The r eferenced file is included only when t he file is t ransmit -
536 S endMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t ed by SendMail. The above example t r ansmit s as if it cont ained t he
following t ext :
To: Tom <tom@internet.com>
Cc: Shirley <shirley@internet.com>
Cc: Richard <dick@internet.com>
Cc: Rebecca <becky@internet.com>
From: The Boss <TheBoss@internet.com>
Subject: Weekly Staff Meeting
The weekly staff meeting is scheduled for Wednesday in the
4th floor conference room.
Agenda for March 11, 2001 meeting:
Widget sales status
Sales incentives
Increased CEO bonus
We will also be discussing plans for the company picnic and vacation
schedules.
John Curtis (J.C.)
President
Widgets, Inc.
When t he %include command is used, it appear s on a line by it self, st art s
on t he fir st column of t hat line, and st ar t s and ends wit h t he per cent
symbol ( % ). It may be used at any locat ion in t he file, including t he mail
header s sect ion. An included file may cont ain %include commands, wit h a
maximum of 32 levels of nest ing, including t he or iginal message file.
The file name r efer enced in t he %include command may include absolut e
or r elat ive pat h specificat ions as long as t he file is st ill accessible fr om t he
account used t o act ually send t he message.
Notes The E-Mail configur at ion file is cr eat ed and maint ained wit h t he Setup
Email command which is described in t he THEOS Cor ona Ver sion 5 Oper -
at ing Syst em Inst allat ion and Set up Guide.
Enclose t he opt ion ar gument s wit hin quot at ion mar ks. Alt hough not
r equired, wit hout quot at ion mar ks t he ar gument s will be folded t o upper -
case and embedded commas or spaces will t er minat e t he ar gument .
When t her e are mor e t han 50 addr esses in t he To, Cc and Bcc fields (com-
mand-line opt ions or in t he embedded addressing fields), mult iple copies of
t he message ar e sent , 50 addr esses per message.
S endMail 537
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SendMail
Command
Restrictions
The E-Mail Configur at ion file must have a SMTP Server defined (see Set up
SMTP in t he THEOS Cor ona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Inst allat ion and
Set up Guide).
The file name specified for t he message t ext file, and any %include files,
must r efer t o ASCII t ext files. These files, and t he opt ional at t achment
files, must be accessible fr om t he cur r ent account . The file name specifica-
t ion may include t he pat h specificat ion.
Ever y message must have a To field specified wit h t he TO opt ion and a
Fr om field specified wit h t he FROM opt ion or embedded mail header s.
See also EmailChk, EmailDel, EmailGet, EmailPut, TheoMail
Examples The following is a simple Mult iUser BASIC language pr ogr am. It accept s
t he var ious fields of infor mat ion for a message and t hen sends t he mes-
sage.
OPTION BASE 1, CASE "M", PROMPT ""
DIM MSG$(100)
START:
! First, paint the screen
WINDOW OPEN ADDROF(MAIN%),1,1,80,24; SELECT UPDATE ON
PRINT AT(20,1);"Send Mail to Remote Recipient";
PRINT AT(1,4);"To:";
PRINT AT(1,5);"From:";
PRINT AT(1,6);"Subject:";
PRINT AT(1,8);"CC:";
PRINT AT(1,9);"BCC:";
PRINT AT(1,10);"Reply To:";
WINDOW OPEN ADDROF(MSG%),2,13,78,9;FRAME SINGLE;
SELECT UPDATE TOP; TITLE " Message Text " TOP, CENTER
ENTER.MESSAGE:
WINDOW SELECT MAIN%, UPDATE ON
ENTER.TO: ! Accept message header information
PRINT AT(12,4);
LINPUT USING RPAD(TO$,60), TO$
TO$ = TRIM(TO$)
IF UCASE(TO$)="END" THEN GOTO END.JOB
IF TO$="" THEN GOTO ENTER.TO
ENTER.FROM:
PRINT AT(12,5);
LINPUT USING RPAD(FROM$,60), FROM$
FROM$ = TRIM(FROM$)
IF FROM$="" THEN GOTO ENTER.FROM
PRINT AT(12,6);
LINPUT USING RPAD(SUBJ$,60), SUBJ$
SUBJ$ = TRIM(SUBJ$)
PRINT AT(12,8);
LINPUT USING RPAD(CC$,60), CC$
CC$ = TRIM(CC$)
538 S endMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PRINT AT(12,9);
LINPUT USING RPAD(BCC$,60), BCC$
BCC$ = TRIM(BCC$)
PRINT AT(12,10);
LINPUT USING RPAD(REPLYTO$,60), REPLYTO$
REPLYTO$ = TRIM(REPLYTO$)
WINDOW EDIT MSG%, 100, MSG$ ! Get message body
PRINT AT(1,23);"Okay to send? ";
LINPUT USING "!", REPLY$
IF UCASE(REPLY$)="N" THEN GOTO ENTER.MESSAGE
MSG.COUNT% = 0
FOR I% = 100 TO 1 STEP -1 ! Find out how many message lines
IF TRIM(MSG$(I%))<>""
MSG.COUNT% = I%
I% = 0
IFEND
NEXT
! Make sure that there is a message
IF MSG.COUNT%
PRINT AT(1,23);"Creating message file...";CRT("EOL");
MSG.FILE$ = SYS.ENV$(20,"SENDMAIL.XXXXXX") ! Work name
OPEN #1:MSG.FILE$, OUTPUT SEQUENTIAL ! Save msg in file
PRINT #1:"To: ";tO$
PRINT #1:"From: ";FROM$
IF SUBJ$ THEN PRINT #1:"Subject: ";SUBJ$
IF CC$ THEN PRINT #1:"Cc: ";CC$
IF BCC$ THEN PRINT #1:"Bcc: ";BCC$
IF REPLYTO$ THEN PRINT #1:"ReplyTo: ";REPLYTO$
PRINT #1: ! Blank line separates headers from body
FOR I% = 1 TO MSG.COUNT%
PRINT #1:MSG$(I%)
NEXT
CLOSE #1
PRINT AT(1,23);"Sending message...";CRT("EOL");
SYSTEM "SENDMAIL "&MSG.FILE$ ! Send the message
ELSE
PRINT AT(1,23);"No message text...ignoring!";CRT("BELL");
SLEEP 2
IFEND
! Clear input areas on screen
MAT MSG$ =("") \ WINDOW CLEAR MSG%
REPLYTO$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,10);CRT("EOL");
BCC$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,9);CRT("EOL");
CC$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,8);CRT("EOL");
SUBJ$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,6);CRT("EOL");
FROM$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,5);CRT("EOL");
TO$ = "" \ PRINT AT(12,4);CRT("EOL");
PRINT AT(1,23);CRT("EOL");
GOTO ENTER.MESSAGE
END.JOB:
QUIT
S ession 539
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Session Command
The Session command allows you t o cont rol t he at t r ibut es, posit ion and size of t he session
window.
Operation Set t he session at t r ibut e or posit ion as specified.
Options CHANGE OFF Disable session-swit ching. Applies t o t he console and all
sessions of t his console.
CHANGE ON Enable session-swit ching ( (Break),n and (Break),Fn and
(Break),(Tab) and applicat ion pr ogr am swit ching).
CHANGE ? Display t he cur r ent session-swit ching st at us.
DISABLE attr Disable mouse changes of session at t r ibut e. att r may be one
of:
MAXIMIZE
MINIMIZE
MOVE
SIZE
The session at t r ibut es can st ill be changed wit h t he Session
command or wit h applicat ion pr ogr ams using t he appr opr iat e
API.
ENABLE at tr Enable mouse changes of session at t r ibut e. att r may be any
of t he ones list ed above. The at tr ar e nor mally enabled by
default ar e only disabled by a specific call t o t he Session com-
mand or wit h an applicat ion API call.
FOCUS Make t his session t he act ive session. Normally, t his would only
be invoked fr om an EXEC pr ogr am or by a Force command.
MAXIMIZE Maximize t he session t o t he full console scr een size. A maxi-
mized session has no fr ame and no t it le displayed.
MINIMIZE Minimize t he session t o an icon.
SESSION funct ion
function CHANGE FOCUS MOVE SIZE
DISABLE MAXIMIZE RESTORE TITLE
ENABLE MINIMIZE
540 S ession
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MOVE col row Move t he upper -left cor ner of t he session window t o col, row
posit ion on t he screen.
RESTORE Rest or e t he session window t o it s nor mal size and posit ion (not
MINIMIZE or MAXIMIZE).
SIZE width height Set t he session widt h t o width columns and t he session
height t o height lines. Similar t o using t he Attach command t o
change t he console size.
>session size 80 24
TITLE t ext Set t he session t it le t o text. t ext should be enclosed wit hin quo-
t at ion mar ks. When t ext is not specified (TITLE is t he last
opt ion specified on t he command line), t he t it le is set t o t he
default t it le which is t he curr ent ly logged on account name.
Defaults The session at t r ibut es ar e enabled when a session is fir st st ar t ed. The
posit ion, size and maximize/minimize st at e ar e t he last values saved when
t he syst em was last shut down or r eboot ed.
See also Attach, Reboot, ShutDown, TWS
S et 541
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Set Command
The Set command set s and changes syst em and user -defined envir onment par amet er s.
Operation Mode 1Changes a syst em-defined envir onment par amet er . These
par amet er s ar e nor mally set in t he Account envir onment for each user .
>set rdymsg on
RC = 0, 16:58:36, ET = 0:00, CPU = 0.088
>
A descr ipt ion for each of t he syst em-defined envir onment names can be
found in Chapt er 7 User Account Environments of t he THEOS Corona Ver-
sion 5 Operating S yst em Reference.
Because set t ing t he dat e and t ime is differ ent t han set t ing ot her envir on-
ment var iables, it is descr ibed separ at ely, on page 542.
1 SET system-env-name value
2 SET user-variable=value
3 SET
system-env-name ABBREV on-off HISTORY on-off QUIT on-off
BREAK c LIBRARY lib RDYMSG on-off
COPYLIB lib LINKLIB lib SEARCH drive-seq
CWD dir MSG on-off SUBDIR dir
DATE dat e OBJLIB lib SYNONYM file
DATEFORM n PATH path TIME time
DATEIN n PRIORITY n WORKVOL drive
DATEOUT n PROMPT string
user-variable user-defined envir onment var iable
value value t o assign t o envir onment var iable
542 S et
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Changes a user -defined environment par amet er . User -defined
envir onment paramet er s may be any name t hat uses alphanumer ic char -
act er s, does not cont ain a space char act er , and is not t he same as a syst em-
defined envir onment par amet er .
>set MyName="Ralph Kramden"
>set showname="The Honeymooners"
The value of a user -defined envir onment par amet er may be any st r ing of
char act er s. If t he value cont ains char act er s t hat might be misint er pr et ed
by t he CSI, you should enclose t he value in a pair of double quot at ion
mar ks.
To clear a user -defined environment par amet er , specify not hing aft er t he
equal sign.
>set username=(Enter)
Mode 3This mode displays all of t he cur r ent ly defined environment
var iables, syst em- and user -defined, along wit h t heir values.
>set
RDYMSG = OFF
MSG = ON
WORK = M
SEARCH = S
DESCRIPTION = System maintenance account
USERNAME = Boss
PROMPT = !14\a!15\ s !4!!\!!5>
CLIST = YES
HOME = /:S
LANGNAME = English
OSVER = 5.0
OSPL = 50099
PROFILE = Office
Date and Time All of t he syst em- and user -defined envir onment names ar e assigned
values wit hout any special input for m or confirmat ion r esponse. Ther e ar e
t wo except ions: DATE and TIME.
DATE. Changing t his variable changes t he syst ems dat e which is used by
t he syst em and applicat ion pr ogr ams. The dat e may be changed by ent er -
ing t he new dat e on t he command line:
>Set date 3/5/02
Date is set to Tuesday, March 5, 2002.
>Set date 3.7
Date is set to Thursday, March 7, 2002.
S et 543
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The dat e is int er pret ed by t he Set command using t he cur r ent ly set DATE-
FORM for mat .
The dat e may also be changed by using t he Dat e Select ion for m:
>Set date(Enter)
Unlike most ot her par amet er s, changing t he DATE or TIME r equir es a pr iv-
ilege level of five and it affect s all user s on t he syst em.
TIME. Changing t his var iable changes t he cur r ent syst em t ime. When set -
t ing t he t ime you must specify t he hours and minut es. You may also spec-
ify t he seconds. Since t ime can be set t o t he near est second you are
pr ompt ed t o pr ess a key when you want t he syst em t ime set t o t he speci-
fied time.
>Set time 12:15(Enter)
544 S et
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes Envir onment var iables have values t hat ar e st r ings, numeric values or
Boolean values (t rue/false). Single-wor d st r ings ar e assigned nor mally:
>Set UserName Fred
Mult iple wor d st r ings ar e assigned by enclosing t he st r ing wit hin quot a-
t ion mar ks:
>Set FullName "John Q. Adams"
For var iables t hat ar e Boolean in nat ur e, some have YES/NO values and
ot hers have ON/OFF values, depending upon t heir usage. Refer t o t heir
descr ipt ion in t he Chapt er 7 User Account Environments of t he THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference.
The synt ax for assigning values may include t he equal sign or you may
omit it . The following commands ar e bot h accept able for t he same assign-
ment :
>Set FileType Basic
>Set FileType=Basic
The Logoff command clear s all user -defined and syst em-defined envir on-
ment s. The Logon command reset s only t hose par amet er s t hat ar e defined
in t he Account envir onment .
The par amet ers DATE, DATEFORM, DATEIN, DATEOUT, HISTORY and TIME
affect all user s on t he syst em. These par amet er s (except for DATE and
TIME) ar e nor mally only set in t he syst em configur at ion file (Sysgen com-
mand).
Defaults The default or init ial values for most of t he envir onment var iables ar e set
dur ing syst em boot using informat ion fr om t he Sysgen command or when
you log ont o an account .
Restrictions User -defined envir onment par amet er values may not cont ain a double
quot at ion mar k. That char act er is ignor ed when assigning t he value t o t he
name.
Changing t he DATE, DATEFORM, DATEIN, DATEOUT, HISTORY or TIME
par amet er s r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
Changing t he PRIORITY for your pr ocess r equir es a privilege level of t hr ee.
See also Account, ChDir, Logon, Mailbox, Msg, Show, Sysgen
S etup 545
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Setup Command
The Setup command pr ovides a single command t o configure and init ialize t he major compo-
nent s of THEOS Cor ona and var ious t ypes of devices.
Operation Mode 1Invokes Setup in it s menu mode. See Setup Menu below.
Mode 2Bypassing t he Setup Menu, t he function scr een is displayed.
Refer t o Functions on page 546.
Mode 3Invoking Setup wit h a function and a subfunction is only applica-
ble when t he funct ion is NET. The Setup NET invoked wit h Mode 2 displays
a menu of t he subfunct ions available when configur ing your net wor k. If
you know you only want t o configur e one por t ion of t he net wor k and you
know t he subfunction name t hat you want t o configur e, t hen specify t hat
subfunct ion on t he command-line. For inst ance,
>setup net dhcp
The above command invokes t he configurat ion pr ogr am for t he DHCP
ser ver .
Setup Menu When Setup is invoked wit h Mode 1, t he Set up Menu is displayed. This
menu is dynamic because only t hose component s inst alled on your syst em
ar e pr esent ed in t he menu. For inst ance, if you t o not have t he DigiBoard
CX soft war e inst alled on t he syst em, t he CX menu it em is not offer ed.
1 SETUP
2 SETUP funct ion
3 SETUP NET subfunction
function ACCOUNT FAX PRINTER SYSGEN
CACHE FD950 PROFILE TIME
CENTLP FLOPPY RECYCLED TYPES
COLOR FONT RESTORE UNINSTALL
CRT INSTALL SIO UPDATE
CX MAKEBOOT SMTP UPS
DIGIXE MAXSPEED SNDCARD USERCOUNT
DISK MIXER SOUND VGA
EMAIL NET SPOOLER
546 S et up
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Ther e may be addit ional it ems displayed on t he menu, depending upon
any add-on pr oduct s t hat you may have inst alled on your syst em.
Use t he nor mal menu select ion keys t o select t he desir ed funct ion. These
keys ar e descr ibed in Using Menus on page 77 of t he THEOS Corona Ver -
sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence.
Functions The various funct ions t hat can be configur ed wit h t he Set up command ar e
descr ibed in t he THEOS Cor ona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Inst allat ion
and Set up Guide.
Setup
Command
Restrictions
The Setup command can only be used when you ar e logged ont o t he SYSTEM
account (account id zer o).
Alt hough t he Setup command requir es only a pr ivilege level of one, some of
t he funct ions may r equir e higher pr ivilege levels.
Alt hough Setup may be invoked from any console, because it pr imar ily con-
figures t he syst em it is int ended t o be used fr om t he main console. Many
changes in configur at ion will not be effect ive unt il t he syst em is r eboot ed.
See also Account, ClassGen, Disk, FileManager, Sysgen, Tape
S hell 547
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Shell Command
The Shell command is designed t o be called fr om anot her pr ogr am. It pr ovides access t o t he
CSI shell so user s may t empor ar ily leave a pr ogr am, ent er commands and, upon comple-
t ion, r et urn t o t hat program.
Operation The cur rent pr ogr ams envir onment is saved and t he CSI Shell is ent ered.
Upon ent r y, t he CSI clear s t he cur r ent ly act ive window and displays t he
r eminder message:
THEOS Command SHELL
If t he cur r ent pr ompt st r ing cont ains t he default CSI pr ompt char act er
( > ), it is displayed wit h t he blink at t r ibut e as a r eminder t o t he operat or
t hat t he user is in t he CSI Shell and should r et ur n back t o t he calling pr o-
gr am.
An example usage fr om a Mult iUser BASIC Ver sion 2.1 pr ogr am might be:
001000 WINDOW OPEN 1,2,10,76,10; COLOR 7,4
001010 WINDOW FRAME 1, RAISED, RIGHT, COLOR 7,4
001020 WINDOW TITLE 1," CSI Shell ", CENTER TOP, COLOR 6,4
001030 WINDOW SELECT 1
001040
001050 SYSTEM "shell"
001060 PRINT "I'm back...";
...
SHELL
CSI Shell
THEOS Command SHELL
>
548 S hell
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes As illust r at ed in t he example, t he Shell command uses t he cur r ent window
for it s display and input . That window is clear ed befor e Shell displays it s
r eminder message.
Files are not closed by t his command. However , t he st at ement or funct ion
t hat you use t o invoke t he command in your pr ogr am may. For inst ance, in
a Mult iUser Basic language pr ogr am, if you use t he SYSTEM st at ement t o
invoke t he Shell command, no files ar e closed. If you use t he CSI st at ement
t o invoke t he Shell command, your files will be closed befor e invoking t he
Shell command.
Use t he Exit t o exit t he shell envir onment and r et ur n t o t he calling envi-
r onment .
The abilit y t o use t his command can be disabled by r enaming or delet ing
t he file /THEOS/COMMAND/SHELL.CMD:S. WindoWriter has a command-line
opt ion t hat can disable usage of t he command during it s edit ing session.
S how 549
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Show Command
The Show command displays t he cur r ent value of syst em-paramet ers, user-variables and
ot her infor mat ion about t he syst em.
1 SHOW
2 SHOW env-name
3 SHOW funct ion
4 SHOW *
env-name ABBREV DATEIN LIBRARY PROMPT
BREAK DATEOUT LINKLIB QUIT
CALPHA DECIMAL MSG RDYMSG
CASE DESCRIPTION NOTLIBCOMPATIBLE SEARCH
CLIST FILETYPE OBJLIB STDSYN
CMDLIB FULLNAME OSPL SUBDIR
COPYLIB HISTORY OSVER SYNONYM
CREATE HOME PATH USERNAME
CWD LANG PRIVLEV WORK
DATEFORM LANGNAME PROFILE name
function CLOCK IRQ PCMCIA USER
DEVICE MEMORY SCSI USER n mm-nn
DISK MEMORY * TAPE VERSION
IDE PCI USB WHO
550 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he display showing all envir onment var iables, IRQs,
PCI devices, all disks, t apes and ot her devices. When t his mode is used a
for m is displayed wit h a dr op-down list of t he var ious devices t hat it can
show:
Settings. Shows t he cur r ent ly defined envir onment var iables.
S how 551
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Interrupt Request Table (IRQ). Shows t he 16 IRQ number s and t he devices
t hat use t hese IRQ number s and t he addresses associat ed wit h t hem.
When adding a new device t o t he comput er , t his infor mat ion is useful in
det er mining which IRQs ar e available for use by t he new device.
A t ext -only, non-object display of t his informat ion can be obt ained by using
t he command SHOW IRQ.
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). Shows t he PCI devices cur -
r ent ly configur ed on t his syst em.
552 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
A t ext -only, non-object display of t his infor mat ion can be obt ained by using
t he command SHOW PCI.
PCMCIA / PC-Card. This display will nor mally only be useful on lapt op
comput ers. It shows all of t he curr ent ly inst alled PC-car ds on t he syst em.
A t ext -only, non-object display of t his infor mat ion can be obt ained by using
t he command SHOW PCMCIA.
Universal Serial Bus (USB). If t he syst em suppor t s USB por t s, t he hub,
adapt er and inst alled devices ar e displayed:
S how 553
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t he command SHOW USB.
Disk/CD-ROM devices. This it em displays all of t he har d disk and CD-
ROM disc devices t hat ar e cur r ent ly connect ed t o t he syst em. These
devices ar e list ed whet her t hey use IDE, SCSI, USB, PCMCIA, I
2
O or
ATAPI t echnology.
t he command SHOW DISK.
554 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SCSI Devices. Shows t he SCSI devices (Small Comput er Syst em Int er -
face) cur r ent ly configur ed on t his syst em.
The Rem column indicat es whet her or not t he device uses removable
media. A t ext -only, non-object display of t his infor mat ion can be obt ained
by using t he command SHOW SCSI.
Tape Devices. Displays infor mat ion about all, cur r ent ly at t ached TAPE
devices.
S how 555
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t he command SHOW TAPE.
Device Properties. Displays infor mat ion about all, cur r ent ly at t ached
devices.
The above display r epor t s on t he same devices t hat t he Attach command
list s but t his display pr ovides differ ent infor mat ion about t hose at t ached
devices. A t ext -only, non-object display of t his infor mat ion can be obt ained
by using t he command SHOW DEVICE.
Mode 2This mode displays a specific syst em-par amet er or user -defined
var iable.
>show search
SEARCH = S
>show fullname
FULLNAME = John Doe
For a list and descr ipt ion of t he syst em-defined envir onment names r efer
t o Chapt er 7 User Account Environments in t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S ystem Reference.
Mode 3Display t he r equest ed funct ion display. Each of t he funct ions is
descr ibed below in t he Functions sect ion.
556 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 4Displays t he following infor mat ion:
>show *
ACCOUNT = SYSTEM
USERNUM = 0
PORT = 16
PRIVLEV = 9
LOGON = 15:29:09 09/04/01
ABBREV = ON
MSG = ON
RDYMSG = OFF
SEARCH = S
WORKVOL = M
SERIAL = 102-12345
IDENT = "TheosServer"
SYNONYM = USER.SYNONYM
SUBDIR = /
LIBRARY =
PATH =
OBJLIB =
COPYLIB =
LINKLIB =
S how 557
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Functions CLOCK Displays t he cur r ent t ime and dat e cont inuously. The t ime is
updat ed once per second. Use t he (Esc) or (F9) t o quit .
>show clock
16:12:24 PST Thursday, January 17, 2002.
Use t he Clock command t o display a gr aphic clock.
DATE Displays t he cur r ent t ime and dat e, once.
>show date
16:12:24 PDT Monday, April 20, 2002.
MEMORY Displays a summar y of t he cur r ent memor y usage.
MEMORY * Displays a map of all of memor y, followed by t he summary dis-
play above.
558 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TIME Displays t he cur r ent t ime and dat e, once. This is synonymous
t o t he DATE funct ion.
>show time
16:12:24 PDT Monday, April 20, 2002.
You can use t he CLOCK funct ion t o display t he t ime cont inu-
ously or t he Clock command t o display it gr aphically.
USER Displays a cont inuous st at us r epor t of all defined pr ocesses
which is r efr eshed ever y second. The number of pr ocesses or
t asks is defined in t he syst em configurat ion wit h t he Sysgen
command. Unused pr ocesses ar e omit t ed.
The but t ons End Task, St op, Peek and Exit ar e only
available if you have sufficient pr ivilege. The pr ivilege level
r equir ed for t hese feat ur es is defined in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/
SHOWUSER.CFG:S file, in t he ent r y But t onPriv=. If t his file or
ent r y does not exist t hen t he pr ivilege level r equir ed is 5.
These but t ons may also be suppr essed by using t he opt ion
NOASK.
S how 559
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The St at us & Info column uses codes for t he st at us condit ion
of t he pr ocess:
This funct ion can be used wit h t he opt ion PRIORITY.
>show user (priority
When t his opt ion is used, t he pr ior it y for t he user (1-7) is dis-
played immediat ely following t he st at us codes.
USER n Displays a st at us r epor t for pr ocess n. Mult iple pr ocesses can
be specified by list ing t he pr ocess number s:
>show user 1 2 5 6 7 10
The above command displays t he st at us for t he six processes
list ed. Any unused pr ocess is omit t ed fr om t he display.
Ranges of pr ocesses can be specified by using t he synt ax n-m
wher e n is t he fr om pr ocess number and m is t he t o pr ocess
number . For inst ance:
>show user 1-4 10 16-20
This command displays t he st at us for pr ocesses 1, 2, 3, 4, 10,
16, 17, 18, 19 and 20. Any unused pr ocess is omit t ed fr om t he
display.
Code Meaning
* Indicat es t hat t his is t he pr ocess per forming t he
Show USERS.
E=nn Pr ocess is wait ing for semaphor e nn t o be set .
I Wait ing for int er r upt . Usually, t he pr ogr am is
wait ing for anot her char act er fr om t he console.
L Wait ing for a locked r esour ce.
N (Break),(Q) is disabled for t he pr ocess.
O (Break),(O) is in effect for t he process.
P St opped by (Break),(S) or scr een pause command.
R The process is r unning a pr ogr am.
Z Pr ocess is sleeping.
560 S how
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
VERSION Displays t he ver sion and dat e for t he oper at ing syst em and all
major component s inst alled on your syst em.
The list of programs displayed by t he VERSION funct ion comes
fr om t he file /THEOS/MENU/language/SHOW_VER.MNU.
Not e t he display of t he THEOS Cor ona Oper at ing Syst em,
Net wor k Login Ser ver and Twindows Ser ver it ems. In t he
Ver sion column for t hese it ems, in addit ion t o t he ver sion
number t he number of licensed user s is also r epor t ed. For t he
TWindows Ser ver t his is repor t ed as t wo numbers, t he fir st
number ident ifies t he number of net wor k TWS users and t he
second number t he number of serial TWS user s.
WHO Displays infor mat ion ident ifying you and your process.
>show who
ACCOUNT = SYSTEM
USERNUM = 0
PORT = 16
PRIVLEV = 5
LOGON = 15:29:09 01/04/02
Notes When t he environment var iable LINEGRAPH is set t o N, t he line gr aphics
used in t he display for MEMORY and VERSION ar e suppressed.
Restrictions The display for Show USER and t he Show MEMORY * funct ions r equires a
pr ivilege level of five.
See also Account, Set, Sysgen, Who, WhoAmI
S hutDown 561
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ShutDown Command
The ShutDown command allows you t o shut down or r eboot your comput er .
Operation The ShutDown command oper at es ident ically t o t he Reboot command
except for t he default opt ions enabled.
Mode 1This mode is ident ical t o t he following command:
>Reboot (shutdown query
Mode 2This mode is ident ical t o t he Reboot command.
Options Refer t o t he opt ion descr ipt ion for t he Reboot command.
Cautions This is an ext r emely dangerous command because ot her user s ar e t er mi-
nat ed wit hout not ice. If anot her user is in t he pr ocess of updat ing one or
mor e files, t hose files will be inaccur at e because t he updat e was not com-
plet ed.
Always do a Show USERS or a Who command befor e using t his command
and ver ify t hat all ot her user s ar e at a Logon, CSI or st opped.
Restrictions The ShutDown command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
See also Reboot
1 SHUTDOWN
2 SHUTDOWN ( option
opt ion DOS NOTYPE SHUTDOWN UPDATE
FAST QUERY SINGLE WINDOWS
LINUX REBOOT THEOS
NOQUERY RESET TYPE
562 S hutDown
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S leep 563
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Sleep Command
The Sleep command causes your pr ocess t o suspend execut ion for an int er val of t ime or unt il
a specified t ime-of-day.
Operation Mode 1Sleeps for seconds number of seconds.
>sleep 30
This command put s your pr ocess t o sleep for 30 seconds.
Mode 2Sleeps unt il t he syst em clock is equal t o time-of-day.
>sleep 23:30
This command put s your pr ocess t o sleep unt il 11:30 pm.
Notes Once sleeping has st art ed wit h t his command it may only be awakened
ear ly by ent ry of t he (Break),(Q) or by a Force fr om anot her user .
The EXEC language has it s own &sleep st at ement , BASIC has it s own
SLEEP st at ement and C has it s own sleep funct ion. If you need t o put t he
pr ocess t o sleep while execut ing a pr ogr am, it is mor e efficient t o use one of
t hese st at ement s or funct ions.
Restrictions seconds must be an int eger number .
1 SLEEP seconds
2 SLEEP t ime-of-day
seconds number of seconds t o sleep
time-of-day t ime t o wake up
564 S leep
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S ort 565
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Sort Command Filter
This command sor t s a st r eam file using t he ent ir e r ecor d as a sor t key or designat ed por -
t ions of each r ecor d as t he sor t key.
Sort is a filt er pr ogr am and, as such, default s t o using t he st andar d input
device for it s input file and t he st andar d out put device for it s out put file. It
is suit able for use in pipes.
>list vendor.names | sort -d | more
The above command sor t s t he out put of t he LIST command using dict io-
nar y or der and t hen displays t he sor t ed out put wit h t he MORE command.
Operation Mode 1Sor t s t he infiles int o one output file using t he ent ir e r ecor d as
t he sort key.
>sort -o sorted.data unsorted.data
>sort -briu -o sorted.data unsorted.data
The above t wo commands sor t t he file UNSORTED.DATA. The r esult of t he sor t
is out put as SORTED.DATA. The fir st command sor t s t he file using t he sor t
or der of t he ASCII collat ing sequence. The second command also sor t s t he
file but it ignor es leading blanks in t he records and it ignor es any char ac-
t er s out side t he r ange of ASCII charact er s. It also ignor es duplicat e
r ecor ds and out put s t he file in r ever se sequence.
1 SORT -opt ions -o output infile
2 SORT -opt ions +posit ion1 -position2 -field-options -o out put infile
+position1 sor t key st ar t posit ion
-position2 sor t key end posit ion
out put opt ional out put file name wit h opt ional pat h
infile file name wit h opt ional pat h
field-options b f n
d i r
opt ions b f n u
c i r
d m tn
566 S ort
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Sor t s t he infiles int o one file using t he designat ed sor t keys for
det er mining t he sor t or der of t he r ecor ds.
Input Files Sort can sor t mult iple input files int o a single out put file. Mer ely list t he
input files on t he command line, one aft er t he ot her .
>sort -o sort.output sort.input1 sort.input2 sort.input3
The sequence of t he list ed input files does not mat t er unless t he -m opt ion
is used.
If no input file is specified, t he st andar d input device is used for t he input
file.
Sort can sor t as lar ge an input file or files as will fit in available memor y.
Sort Keys Unless ot her wise specified, t he ent ir e r ecor d is used as a sor t key. By using
t he +position and -position fields, por t ions of t he r ecor d can be specified as
t he sor t key(s).
The for mat for +position and -posit ion is f.c wher e f is t he number of fields
t o skip from t he beginning of t he recor d and c is t he number of char act er s
t o skip fr om t he beginning of t he field. Fields ar e separ at ed in r ecor ds wit h
a t ab char act er . If a differ ent char act er is used t o separ at e fields, t he -t
opt ion must be used t o ident ify t he separ at ing char act er .
For inst ance, a specificat ion of +3.2 indicat es t hat t he sor t key st ar t s wit h
t he t hir d char act er of t he four t h field in t he r ecor d.
Mult iple sort keys can be specified. For example:
>sort +3.2 -3.10 +1.0 -1.20 sort.input -o sort.output
This command line st at es t hat t he file SORT.INPUT is t o be sor t ed using t wo
keys, one st ar t ing wit h t he t hir d char act er of t he fourt h field t hr ough t he
elevent h char act er of t he fourt h field and t he ot her using t he fir st 21 char -
act er s of t he second field.
Each sor t key may have it s own field-opt ions specified immediat ely follow-
ing t he sor t key specificat ions. For example:
>sort +3.2 -3.10 -ri +1.0 -1.20 -n sort.input -o sort.output
Sor t keys t hat do not have t heir own field-opt ions use t he opt ions specified
for t he ent ir e sort . These opt ions ar e specified befor e t he sor t key specifica-
t ions.
S ort 567
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options b Ignor es leading blanks and ot her whit e space char act er s in t he
sor t key for comparison pur poses.
c Checks if input files ar e alr eady sor t ed.
d Uses dict ionar y order when compar ing sor t keys. In dict ionar y
or der t he sor t or der is changed so t hat digit s come last , pr e-
ceded by let t er s. All ot her char act er s (punct uat ion and ot her
nonalphanumer ic char act er s) ar e ignor ed when compar ing t wo
sor t keys.
f For sor t pur poses, folds upper case sor t key charact ers t o lower -
case. Thus, AARDVARK sor t s t o t he same locat ion as aar d-
vark.
i Ignor es char act er s out side of t he ASCII set of 7-bit char act er s
for sort pur poses only. This ASCII set of char act er s includes all
of t he char act er s fr om char act er value 32 (space) t hr ough 127
(t ilde).
m Indicat es t hat no sor t ing is t o be done; t he infiles ar e mer ged
int o t he out file in t he sequence t hat t he infiles ar e specified.
n The key is a number and should be sor t ed accor ding t o t he
value of t he number .
r The key is sort ed in descending or der , not t he nor mal ascend-
ing sequence.
tc Specifies t hat t he t ab, or field delimit ing char act er , is t he char -
act er c. This opt ion is used wit h t he +position and -posit ion
Input Keys Comparison Keys
J ohn F. Kennedy J ohn F. Kennedy
Sort Keys w/o -n option with -n option
423 2 2
32 20 20
2 200 32
20 32 200
200 423 423
568 S ort
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
opt ions t o specify t hat a char act er ot her t han (Tab) separ at es
t he fields in t he r ecor d.
>sort "-t," +2.0 +0.0 names.data
This command sor t s a file of names and specifies t hat t he
comma char act er separ at es t he fields in t he r ecor ds. It is
placed in quot at ion mar ks t o pr event t he CSI fr om int er pret -
ing t he comma as one of it s char act er s.
u Specifies t hat only recor ds wit h unique keys ar e out put . When
t his opt ion is not used, r ecor ds wit h duplicat e sor t keys ar e
out put in t he sequence t hat t hey wer e found in t he input
file(s).
Defaults The default infile is t he st andar d input device and t he default out file is t he
st andar d out put device.
The default sor t sequence is ascending by char act er value. Refer t o Appen-
dix G: THEOS Character Sets of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing
Syst em Refer ence for a list of t he char act er s and t heir values.
Restrictions Only st r eam files ar e sor t ed wit h t his command.
The file is sor t ed using t he cur rent ly available memor y.
Maximum line lengt h of each r ecor d is 2,048 char act er s.
Input Keys Sorted Keys
Ken, E., Lar vik J oseph, William, Cone
Rober t , G., Holbr ook Duncan, S., Holbr ook
Michael, K., Malley Rober t , G., Holbr ook
Rober t , L., Lewison Ken, E., Larvik
Shir ley, L., McCar t ney Rober t , T., Lewis
Duncan, S., Holbrook Rober t , L., Lewison
Rober t , T., Lewis Michael, K., Malley
J oseph, William, Cone Shir ley, L., McCar t ney
S plit 569
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Split Command Filter
The Split command split s a st r eam file int o mult iple files, each one cont aining a por t ion of
t he or iginal file.
Operation Bot h Modes 1 and 2 oper at e t he same. The only differ ence is t hat Mode 2 is
UNIX-like in synt ax.
The infile is r ead and out put in nnn line chunks t o t he outfile. outfile name
is modified wit h a t wo-let t er suffix added. The fir st out put file is outfileAA,
t he second is outfileAB, and so on.
>split system.history system.hist (1000
This command divides t he SYSTEM.HISTORY file int o 1,000 line chunks. The
fir st 1,000 lines ar e wr it t en t o SYSTEM.HISTAA, t he second 1,000 lines are
wr it t en t o SYSTEM.HISTAB, etc.
Option nnn Specifies t he number of lines each out put file will cont ain.
When not specified t he default value of 100 is used.
Defaults The default number of lines for each of t he out put files is 100.
When outfile is not specified t he out put file name is XAA.
When infile is not specified t he input comes fr om t he st andar d input
device.
Restrictions The infile must be a st ream file.
The nnn opt ion must be a nonzero posit ive value.
See also Cat
1 SPLIT infile outfile ( option
2 SPLIT -nnn infile out file
infile opt ional input file name wit h opt ional pat h
out file opt ional out put file name wit h opt ional pat h
opt ion nnn
570 S plit
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S pooler 571
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Spooler Command
The Spooler command cont r ols t he pr int spooler .
1 SPOOLER printer
2 SPOOLER printer manager-function
3 SPOOLER printer function
4 SPOOLER
print er opt ional spooled pr int er number
manager-funct ion ATTACH opt ions INIT STOP
BUILD count drive QUIT VERIFY
FORM queue START
function ABORT KILL reports
ALIGN report page LIST
BACKUP pages PRINT report page
CHANGE report queue copies hold STATUS
report nnn
page page number
queue let t er
copies number of copies t o pr int
hold HOLD
NOHOLD
reports report report s
report-report report s
*
572 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Displays t he st at us of a spooled pr int er or on all of t he spooled
pr int er s.
>spooler 1
Printer #1 "CENTLP1" L80,P58,HPLASER,W8
-- is waiting for work
-- and has form "A" mounted
>spool *
Printer #2 "SIO3" L80,P58,CANON2
-- is printing report # 9 "CHECKREG"
-- created by account ACCTNG - on page 7 of 9
-- and has form "B" mounted
Mode 2Changes t he st at us of a spooled pr int er or enables or disables
t he pr int spooler .
>spooler 3 stop
>spooler 3
Printer #3 "SIO4" L80,P58,EPSON
-- is stopped
-- and has form "C" mounted
Mode 3Changes t he at t ribut es of a spooled r epor t or perfor ms pr int
management of a spooled r epor t .
>spooler change 11 2 d hold
>s list
File Acc-name Rpt-name Date Time Q Pages C Status
11 SYSTEM DEVNAMES 09/05/96 16:25 D 9 2 Closed, Hold
Mode 4Display for m allowing int eract ive display of all spooled pr int er s
or spooled r epor t s. Refer t o Spooler Status on page 573 for a descr ipt ion of
t his mode.
S pooler 573
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Spooler Status When Mode 4 is used and t he console is configured for gr aphics display, t he
following for m is displayed:
Printer list box This ar ea displays each of t he pr int ers t hat ar e cur r ent ly
configur ed as spooled pr int er s. The informat ion displayed for
each pr int er includes t he pr int er number , pr int er name (see
Setup Printer on page 173 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Installat ion and S etup Guide), st at us, page
and pages, r epor t , r eport number , account , for m device and
at t achment par amet er s.
The values for page, pages, r epor t , repor t number and account
ar e only displayed when t hat pr int er is pr int ing a r epor t . The
pages value r efer s t o t he t ot al number of pages in t he r epor t .
Report Pressing t his but t on changes t he display t o t he r epor t list ing
for m descr ibed on page 574.
Start This but t on can be pr essed t o st ar t t he pr int er select ed in t he
Printer list box. If t he pr int er is alr eady st ar t ed, t his but t ons
label is St op and, when pressed, st ops t he select ed pr int er .
Abort If t he pr int er select ed in t he Printer list box is print ing a r eport
t his but t on is enabled. When pr essed, r epor t pr int ing is
abor t ed.
Form Pressing t his but t on allows you t o change t he form for t he
pr int er select ed in t he Printer list box. You ar e pr esent ed wit h a
maint enance for m allowing you t o ent er up t o eight for m let -
t ers for t he select ed pr int er .
574 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Report Listing When t he Report but t on is used t he display changes t o:
Report list box This ar ea displays each of t he repor t s t hat are cur r ent ly
queued. Use t his ar ea t o select t he r epor t t hat you want t o per -
for m some act ion on wit h t he but t ons displayed on t he r ight .
Each r epor t line shows t he r epor t number , account name t hat
cr eat ed t he repor t , t he r eport name, creat ion dat e, queue let -
t er , pr int er t o be used, pages in r epor t , number of copies
r emaining t o pr int and t he cur r ent st at us of t he r epor t . You
may have t o scr oll t he list left or right t o see all of t hese col-
umns of infor mat ion.
Status Pr essing t his but t on changes t he display t o t he spooler st at us
for m descr ibed on page 573.
Order Pr essing t his but t on changes t he display or der of t he r epor t s in
t he Report list box. Ther e ar e four or der s and each t ime t he but -
t on is pr essed t he next or der is used:
S pooler 575
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
rRepor t number
rQueue let t er t hen r epor t number
rCr eat ion dat e t hen r epor t number
rAccount name t hen r epor t number
Print This but t on can be pr essed t o st ar t pr int ing t he r epor t select ed
in t he Report list box. If t he r epor t is alr eady pr int ing or has
been pr int ed, t his but t on is disabled.
Remove/Abort This but t on is labeled Remove or Abor t , depending
upon t he st at us of t he r epor t select ed in t he Report list box. If
t he r epor t is curr ent ly being pr int ed t he but t on is labeled
Abor t and pr essing it abor t s pr int ing of t hat r epor t . Ot her -
wise, t he but t on is labeled Remove and pr essing it delet es
t he select ed r epor t fr om t he queue.
Spooler
Manager
Functions
A Spooler Manager is a user who has sufficient pr ivilege and is r esponsible
for t he pr int er s cont r olled by t he pr int spooler . The following funct ions ar e
r eser ved for users logged ont o t he SYSTEM account wit h a pr ivilege level of
five.
ATTACH opt ions Changes t he at t achment par amet er s of t he spooler s
pr int er . Not e t hat t his at t achment r efer s t o t he spooler s
pr int er and not t he at t achment of a logical pr int er t o t he
spooler .
You may change any of t he at t achment par amet er s except t he
act ual device. For inst ance, if t he pr int er is cur r ent ly con-
nect ed and at t ached t o CENTLP1, you cannot change it t o SIO4
wit h t his funct ion. To add or change t he physical device used
for a spooled pr int er, you must use t he Sysgen command and
t hen r eboot t he syst em.
You may change any of t he ot her par amet er s, such as baud
r at e, line and page lengt h, class code, etc.
>spooler 3 attach l132 p60 b38400 w8 e2 c135
>spooler 3
Printer #3 "SIO4" L132,P60,HPLASER,B38400,W8,XON/XOFF
The printer must be eit her st opped or idle (wait ing for work).
You cannot change t he at t achment of a pr int er t hat is cur -
r ent ly pr int ing a r eport .
BUILD nnn drv This funct ion cr eat es a new /THEOS/SPOOLER/SYS-
TEM.SPOOLER libr ar y. The only t ime t hat you might need t o use
576 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t his funct ion is when you are fir st inst alling t he syst em and
want t o cr eat e a spooler queue libr ar y t hat is lar ger t han t he
400 member default size used when t he spooler is fir st
inst alled by t he Sysgen command.
>spooler build 2000 s
The nnn par amet er specifies t he size of t he new /THEOS/
SPOOLER/SYSTEM.SPOOLER librar y and t he drv specifies t he dr ive
used. If nnn is not specified, a libr ar y size of 400 is used. If drv
is not specified, dr ive S is used. Make sur e t hat t he drv used
her e is t he same drive specified in t he INIT funct ion or in t he
syst em configur at ion for t he spooler . See Sysgen on page 591.
Not e: If you want t o change t he size of an exist ing /THEOS/
SPOOLER/SYSTEM.SPOOLER librar y, you must st op t he pr int
spooler , er ase t he exist ing libr ar y, and t hen use t he BUILD
opt ion t o cr eat e a new librar y.
FORM queues Specifies which queues ar e pr int ed on printer.
>spooler 4 form r
This command t ells t he spooler t hat spooled pr int er 4 has for m
R mount ed on it and t hat it can pr int any r epor t s in t he R
queue. Refer t o t he descr ipt ion of Forms and Queues on page
581 for mor e infor mat ion about for m specificat ions.
printer must be specified if t her e is mor e t han one spooled
print er . A pr int er may be pr int ing fr om as many as eight
queues.
>spooler 3 form abcdefgh
This command t ells t he spooler t hat spooled print er 3 can pr int
r epor t s in queue A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H.
>spooler 3 form "AX$g"
This command t ells t he spooler t hat spooled print er 3 can pr int
r epor t s in queue A, X, g or $.
If a repor t is cur r ent ly pr int ing on printer, it will finish pr int -
ing even if t he r epor t s queue no longer mat ches t he pr int er s
for m. The queue of a r epor t is only mat ched t o t he form of a
print er when it fir st st ar t s t o pr int .
S pooler 577
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
INIT drive This funct ion init ializes and st ar t s t he pr int spooler . This ini-
t ializat ion can also be done aut omat ically at boot t ime if t he
Enable Pr int Spooler is set in t he syst em configur at ion (see
Sysgen on page 591).
drive is t he disk dr ive code for t he dr ive cont aining t he /THEOS/
SPOOLER/SYSTEM.SPOOLER libr ar y. If drive is not specified, S is
used.
At least one pr int er must be at t ached when t his INIT funct ion
is per formed. All pr int ers t hat ar e cur r ent ly at t ached ar e
t r ansfer r ed t o t he pr int spooler . (Slave pr int er s ar e not t r ans-
fer r ed and cannot be spooled.)
For each physical print er t hat is t r ansfer r ed t o t he pr int
spooler , a logical print er is at t ached t o t he spooler . These logi-
cal pr int er s are available t o you and t o any ot her user when
t hey logon t o t he syst em. (If t hey ar e alr eady logged on t hey
will have t o Logon again t o get t hese at t achment s.)
Assuming t hat t hr ee print er s ar e at t ached:
>spooler init
>spooler
-- is stopped
-- is stopped
-- is stopped
QUIT This funct ion st ops t he pr int spooler . It is t he opposit e of t he
INIT funct ion. You may only st op t he spooler if t he spooler is
idle (not pr int ing any r epor t s) and t he syst em is in single-user
mode. In t his case, single-user mode means t hat no ot her pr o-
cesss ar e st ar t ed.
>spooler quit
START This funct ion act ivat es a specific spooled pr int er or all spooled
pr int er s. This is t he opposit e of t he STOP funct ion.
>spooler 2 start
STOP St ops a specific spooled pr int er . print er must be specified if
t here is mor e t han one spooled pr int er . If a r epor t is cur r ent ly
578 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
print ing on print er, it is finished befor e t hat pr int er is act ually
st opped.
>spooler 3 stop
>spooler
-- is stopped
It is best t o STOP a pr int er befor e changing t he paper in t he
print er . This insur es t hat no r epor t will pr int on t he new paper
unt il you t ell t he spooler t hat it is r eady. Use t he START func-
t ion t o r est ar t t he print er .
VERIFY Verifies t hat t he spooler s queue file mat ches t he spooled
r epor t s t hat ar e in t he spooler queue libr ar y and t hat t he
spooler queue librar y mat ches t he spooler queue.
This funct ion can also be per for med when t he syst em is boot ed
by enabling t he Check at system start field in t he syst em con-
figur at ion (see Chapt er 25 Setup SysGen of t he THEOS
Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Inst allat ion and Set up
Guide).
If er r ors ar e det ect ed and it advises you t o r ebuild t he spooler
queue you must :
1. Use t he QUIT funct ion t o st op t he spooler (or boot t he sys-
t em in maint enance mode).
2. Er ase t he file /THEOS/SPOOLER/SYSTEM.SPOOLER:S and all of
it s member files.
3. Rebuild t he file by using t he BUILD nnn drv funct ion. Or, if
t he spooler is configur ed and enabled in t he syst em config-
ur at ion file, r eboot t he syst em. The boot pr ocess will cr eat e
a missing spooler librar y and queue when it st ar t s t he
spooler (see Setup SysGen in t he THEOS Corona Version
5 Operating S yst em Installation and S etup Guide).
S pooler 579
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Functions ABORT St ops pr int ing t he cur r ent r eport on t he specified pr int er .
print er must be specified if t her e is more t han one spooled
pr int er .
When a r epor t is abor t ed, t he spooler pr int s t he message ****
A B O R T **** and per for ms a for m-feed. The r epor t is
mar ked as pr int ed and t he r epor t copies is set t o zer o. If t he
r epor t does not have HOLD st at us, it is delet ed.
To successfully abor t a r epor t may depend upon t he pr int ers
st at us and t he t r ansmission prot ocol. If t he pr int er is off-line
or power ed off and t he t r ansmission pr ot ocol r equir es a
r esponse fr om t he print er , t hen t he repor t will not abor t unt il
t he print er is power ed on and made r eady t o pr int .
ALIGN report page Specifies t hat an alignment pat t ern is pr int ed for
spooled r epor t number report st ar t ing wit h page number page.
If t he page number is not specified, page one is assumed.
pr int er .
The alignment pat t er n pr int ed is a copy of t he r epor t s page
page wit h all let t er s on t hat page replaced wit h Xs and all dig-
it s on t he page r eplaced wit h 9s.
Aft er an alignment pat t er n is pr int ed you ar e asked Do you
wish anot her alignment page (Y/N). Respond wit h (N) t o cause
t he r epor t t o pr int . Befor e r esponding wit h (Y) make any align-
ment adjust ment s on t he pr int er . When t he alignment pat t er n
is accept ed t he r epor t is pr int ed st ar t ing wit h t he same page
number .
A r epor t is never pr int ed nor is an alignment pat t er n creat ed
unless t he r epor t s queue is t he same as t he r equest ed pr int er s
form. If no printer is specified, t he single spooled pr int er must
have t he pr oper form mount ed.
BACKUP pages Aft er t he cur r ent page of t he cur r ent r epor t being pr int ed
on printer is pr int ed, t he repor t is backed up pages number of
pages and pr int ing r esumes.
Omit t ing pages causes t he repor t pr int out t o back up one page.
pr int er .
CHANGE report queue copies hold Changes t he at t ribut es of spooled
r epor t number report . You must be logged ont o t he same
account , or a synonym account , as t he account used t o cr eat e
580 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t he r epor t . The queue, copies and hold at t r ibut es can be speci-
fied in any order and one or mor e may be omit t ed, indicat ing
t hat t hat at t r ibut e is not changed.
The queue is a single char act er ident ifying one of t he 64 possi-
ble queues. Refer t o t he descr ipt ion of Forms and Queues on
page 581.
copies is specified as one or t wo digit s in t he r ange 099. For
descr ipt ive purposes, you may specify t he copies wit h t he syn-
t ax COPIES=copies or COPY=copies.
hold is specified wit h eit her HOLD or NOHOLD.
If t he r eport is cur r ent ly pr int ing and you change t he queue t o
a let t er t hat t he print er is not set for, t he r epor t will cont inue
t o pr int on t hat pr int er . The queue of a r epor t is only mat ched
t o t he form of a pr int er when it fir st st ar t s t o print .
KILL report Removes and delet es spooled r eport number report. If t he
r epor t is curr ent ly pr int ing, it must be abort ed fir st wit h t he
ABORT funct ion. The ABORT funct ion will kill t he r epor t unless
it is mar ked as HOLD, in which case you must use t he KILL
funct ion t o r emove it .
report may be specified wit h * or it may specify a single repor t
number , a r ange of r epor t number s, a list of r epor t s number s,
or any combinat ion of t hese.
>spooler kill *
Removes all r epor t s in t he spooler queue.
>spooler kill 8-11
Removes repor t s number ed 8, 9, 10, and 11.
>spooler kill 2 6 7 33
Removes repor t s number ed 2, 6, 7 and 33.
>spooler kill 1, 3, 30-33, 45, 50-55
Removes repor t s number ed 1, 3, 30, 31, 32, 33, 45, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54 and 55.
S pooler 581
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
LIST Displays a list of t he spooled r epor t s on t he st andard out put
device. The informat ion displayed includes:
The r et ur n code is set t o 1 if one or mor e r epor t s list ed. Ot her -
wise it is set t o zer o.
PRINT report page Specifies t hat spooled r epor t number report is t o be
pr int ed on printer st ar t ing wit h page number page. If t he page
number is not specified, page one is assumed. printer must be
specified if t her e is mor e t han one spooled pr int er . The report
is pr int ed even if print er is cur r ent ly st opped.
A r epor t is never print ed unless t he r epor t s queue is t he same
as t he r equest ed pr int er s form. If no printer is specified, t he
single spooled pr int er must have t he pr oper form mount ed.
STATUS Repor t s on t he st at us of t he spooled print er or on all of t he
spooled print er s. This is equivalent t o a Mode 1 Spooler com-
mand.
Forms and
Queues
For ms and queues ar e ident ified wit h single-char act er s. Ther e are 64 pos-
sible for ms and queues:
Pr evious ver sions of t he spooler only suppor t ed t he fir st 26 for ms and
queues. To pr ovide compat ibilit y wit h pr ogr ams and pr ocedur es designed
for pr evious ver sions of t he oper at ing syst em, for m and queue specifica-
t ions default t o t he upper case for m and queue let t er s.
Column Content
File The r epor t number.
Acc-name Owning account name.
Rpt -name Repor t name
Dat e Time Dat e and t ime repor t creat ed.
Q Queue of r epor t .
Pages Number of pages in r epor t . This is only an
est imat ed number based upon t he number of
for m-feeds in t he repor t .
C Number of copies st ill t o pr int .
St at us Curr ent st at us of t he repor t . St at us messages
include Open, Closed, Pr int ing, Pr int ed, Hold.
A Z 26 forms/queues
a z 26 forms/queues
# $ % & * + - < = > ^ ~ 12 forms/queues
582 S pooler
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
To specify one of t he lowercase for m let t ers you must enclose t he for m
wit hin quot at ion marks. The 12 special char act er forms may be specified
wit hout quot at ion mar ks. For inst ance:
>spooler 1 form a ; Refers to form A
>spooler 1 form "a" ; Refers to form a
>spooler 1 form x ; Refers to form X
>spooler 1 form % ; Refers to form %
>spooler 1 form abc$ ; Refers to forms A, B C and $
>spooler 1 form "Aix$%" ; Refers to forms A, i, x, $ and %
To specify one of t he lowercase queue let t er s you must enclose t he let t er in
quot at ion mar ks or use t he special synt ax QUEUE=$queue.
>spooler change 2 a ; Refers to queue A
>spooler change 2 "a" ; Refers to queue a
>spooler change 2 $ ; Refers to queue $
>spooler change 2 queue=a ; Refers to queue A
>spooler change 2 queue=$a ; Refers to queue a
>spooler change 2 queue=$$ ; Refers to queue $
When in doubt about how a for m or queue specificat ion will be int erpr et ed
by t he Spooler command, always use quot es and t hen specify t he desir ed
char act er wit h t he desir ed case.
Restrictions The funct ions ABORT, BACKUP, PRINT, ATTACH, FORM, START and STOP
all r equir e a pr ivilege level of one.
For all funct ions ot her t han BUILD and INIT, t he pr int spooler must be ini-
t ialized before t he funct ion can be used.
See also Attach, Sysgen
S tart 583
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Start Command
Stop Command
The Start command st ar t s a user , session or backgr ound t ask. The Stop command st ops a
user , session or backgr ound t ask.
Operation Mode 1St ar t s a pr ocess as a user wit h console. process must be t he
number of an unused memor y pr ocess. The number of memor y pr ocesss is
defined in t he field Maximum Number of Tasks by t he Sysgen.
console must be a physical device name list ed in /THEOS/CONFIG/
DEVNAMES.TXT. The attach-options ar e any valid console at t achment par am-
et er s as defined by t he Attach command (see Attach on page 21).
>start 20 multi5 ( c190 b38400 w8 e5
When a user is st ar t ed wit h t his command, it has all publicly at t ached
devices available and t he pr ivat ely at t ached console as specified in t his
command. Once t he user envir onment is defined, it execut es t he Logon
command and await s t he oper at or s r esponse t o t he Logon please:
pr ompt .
See Session Management on page 62 for a descript ion of st art ing a new
session on your console.
1 START process console ( att ach-opt ions
2 START process console ( att ach-opt ions ACCOUNT name PASSWORD password
3 START process console ( att ach-opt ions MODEM
4 START command
5 STOP process
attach-options console at t achment par amet er s
command any THEOS or user -supplied command name wit h par amet er s
console physical device name for console at t achment
name account name for aut omat ic logon
process an unused pr ocess id number
password account passwor d
584 S t op
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Ident ical in operat ion t o Mode 1 except t he new user is aut omat -
ically logged ont o account . The PASSWORD par amet er is opt ional and is
used when t he account has a passwor d. If t he account has no password,
t he PASSWORD par amet er is ignor ed.
>start 20 multi5 ( c190 b38400 w8 e5 acc develop password "supreme"
If t he PASSWORD par amet er is not used and account has a passwor d, t he
new user is st ar t ed and Logon displays it s Passwor d prompt .
Mode 3This mode st ar t s a user similar t o Mode 1 and Mode 2. However ,
when t he MODEM keywor d is used it t ells Start t hat t he user is connect ed
via a r emot e modem connect ion.
A user st ar t ed wit h t his mode differ s fr om bot h Mode 1 and Mode 2 in t hat
t he user s console device is at t ached wit h t his mode but no init ializat ion
st r ings ar e sent for t he console class code. A special indicat or is set t hat
Logon uses.
Inst ead of st ar t ing t he user wit h t he Logon please prompt , t he Logon
command pr ogr ams t he modem t o aut o-answer t he t elephone line. It t hen
wait s for an incoming call and connect ion. Aft er t he connect ion is est ab-
lished bet ween t he t wo modems Logon t hen sends t he classcode init ializa-
t ion st r ing and r equest s t hat t he user logs on.
When t he remot e user per for ms a Logoff (not lat er al Logon), t he connect ion
is t er minat ed and t he modem is r einit ialized t o wait for t he next incoming
call.
Mode 4This mode st ar t s a backgr ound t ask. A ba ck gr ound t a sk is a
user pr ocess st ar t ed wit hout a console. command must be specified and
may be any valid command line.
>start archive s tape (multiuse noask noquery volume
Task started as process #29
The pr ocess number used for t he new backgr ound t ask is t he highest num-
ber ed pr ocess cur r ent ly available. It has all of t he publicly at t ached
devices available t o it but does not have a console display or keyboar d.
Inst ead of execut ing t he Logon command, command is execut ed. command
must be a command t hat does not r equir e any console input . command
may be an EXEC language pr ogram t hat execut es a series of commands
befor e exit ing.
Whenever a backgr ound t ask command r equest s console input or exit s t o
t he CSI, it is st opped. Backgr ound t asks do have access t o t he st andard
input and st andar d out put devices and can use i/o r edir ect ion t o simulat e
console input . Backgr ound t asks ar e descr ibed on page 60.
S t op 585
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 5St ops user pr ocess number process. The pr ocess must be in t he
pr ogr am Logon. If necessar y, use t he Force t o force t he user t o Logoff first
before st opping t he pr ocess.
>stop 20
Process is still active.
>force 20 logoff
>stop 20
Befor e using t he Force, you should fir st check t o make sur e t hat t he user is
not in t he pr ocess of updat ing any files.
If t he user pr ocess was st ar t ed wit h a Mode 3 st ar t (modem ser ver ), t he
modem connect ion is fir st t er minat ed befor e st opping t he user .
Notes In Mode 1, Mode 2 and Mode 3, when a pr ocess is st ar t ed wit h a console on a
ser ial por t , a modem init ializat ion st r ing is sent t o t he pr ocesss console
por t . The specific st r ing of char act er s t r ansmit t ed is defined by a file in t he
/THEOS/CONFIG/SSYSTEM.MODEM librar y or by t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/
MODEM.CFG. These files can be edit ed t o cust omize t he modem init ializat ion
st r ing t o t hat r equir ed by your modems. Refer t o Starting Users on page 58
for a descr ipt ion of t his user st ar t up pr ocess. See also SYSTEM.MODEM
Library on page 220.
For compat ibilit y, t he Start command accept s t he command synt ax used in
pr ior ver sions:
>Start process ( console attach-options start-opt ions
Defaults New user s st ar t ed wit h t his command always have t he devices t hat are
defined in t he syst em configur at ion file (see Sysgen on page 591) and any
ot her devices t hat ar e publicly at t ached.
Spooled pr int er s defined by t he syst em configurat ion file ar e assigned t he
queues defined in t hat file, ot her pr int ers ar e assigned queues in a one-t o-
one basis such as queue A t o PRT1, queue B t o PRT2, etc.
Return Codes The Start command set s t he r et urn code t o a non-zer o value less t han 1,000
when an er r or occur s and t o a value gr eat er t han 1,000 when t he pr ocess is
successfully st art ed.
Ret ur n values gr eat er t han 1,000 specify t hat t he pr ocess was st ar t ed suc-
cessfully and give t he specific pr ocess number used for t he new t ask. Sub-
t ract 1,000 fr om t he r et urn code t o pr oduce t he pr ocess number .
Restrictions The Stop command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five. Mode 1 and Mode 2 of
t he Start command r equir e a privilege level of five.
586 S t op
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When at t empt ing t o Start a new user or t ask, t he message All available
t asks are in use indicat es t hat all pr ocesss ar e alr eady in use. You must
eit her wait for a pr ocess t o become availble (anot her t asks st ops) or
increase t he number of pr ocesss available by set t ing a lar ger Maximum
Number of Tasks in your syst em configur at ion (see Sysgen on page 591)
and t hen r eboot .
When st ar t ing a new user , if t he device specified as console is alr eady in
use by anot her user or t ask, t he message Device is at t ached t o user ... or
Device ... is alr eady at t ached t o pr ocess ... is displayed. Eit her choose a
differ ent device for t his user or fr ee up t he device by st opping t he ot her
user s.
See also Attach, Net Start, Sysgen
S UMode 587
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SUMode Command
Test t he syst em for single-user oper at ion.
Operation The syst em is examined t o see if it has only one logged on user (t his user ).
It per for ms t his t est by count ing t he number of logged on user s, back-
gr ound t asks and ser ver s r unning. It t hen subt r act s t he number of t hese
t asks t hat are dedicat ed t o pr int spooler oper at ion and disk cache. If t he
r emainder is not one t hen it r epor t s t hat t he syst em is not in single user
mode by displaying t he message:
If t he syst em is in single user mode t hen no message is displayed.
Return Code Because t his pr ogr am would nor mally be called fr om an EXEC pr ogr am or
ot her pr ogr am, t he r et ur n code is set t o indicat e t he r esult s of t he t est .
A r et urn code of 0 indicat es t hat t he syst em is in single user mode.
A r et urn code of 1 indicat es t hat one or more pr ocesses ar e st ill oper at ing.
SUMODE
588 S UMode
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S ysEd 589
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SysEd EXEC
This command allows you t o view and opt ionally modify some common syst em configur at ion
dat a files.
Operation Mode 1SysEd uses WindoWriter t o open t he following files in READONLY
mode:
/THEOS/CONFIG/SYSGEN.CFG:S
/THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT:S
/THEOS/CONFIG/START.CFG:S
/THEOS/CONFIG/MODEM.CFG:S
/THEOS/CONFIG/NET.CFG:S
Mode 2When MODIFY is specified, SysEd opens t he above files wit hout
specifying READONLY and allows you t o make changes and save t he files.
1 SYSED
2 SYSED MODIFY
590 S ysEd
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S ysgen 591
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Sysgen Command
Sysgen maint ains t he syst em configur at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/SYSGEN.CFG:S).
Operation Maint ains t he syst em configur at ion file on drive. If dr ive is not specified, S
is assumed. Refer t o t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em
Inst allat ion and Set up Guide for a complet e descr ipt ion of t he oper at ion of
t his configur at ion program.
The dr ive par amet er is used t o change t he syst em configur at ion file for a
boot disk ot her t han t he cur r ent syst em disk. For inst ance, t he Emer gency
Boot Floppy.
Notes The syst em configur at ion file cont ains informat ion used when THEOS is
boot ed. Changes made t o t he configurat ion ar e not effect ive unt il t he
syst em is r eset or r eboot ed.
Restrictions The Sysgen command may only be used when you ar e logged ont o t he
SYSTEM account (user number 0) wit h a pr ivilege level of five.
See also Attach, Load, Setup, Spooler, Start
SYSGEN drive
drive opt ional disk dr ive let t er for /THEOS/CONFIG/SYSGEN.CFG file
592 S ysgen
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
S yst em 593
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
System Command
The System command changes t he syst em disk dr ive.
Operation Mode 1This mode is used when t he syst em disk is a r emovable disk
dr ive and you want t o change t he disk volume in t he dr ive. When t he com-
mand is execut ed, you ar e pr ompt ed wit h:
Mount new system disk on drive S[1:1:0]
Change t he disk volume t o anot her valid THEOS syst em disk and pr ess
(Enter).
Mode 2This mode is used when you want t o change t he syst em disk t o a
differ ent dr ive. For inst ance, aft er boot ing fr om an Emer gency Boot Dis-
ket t e, t he System command is used t o swit ch t o t he har d disk.
>system m
Caution You may change t o a non-syst em disk. That is, you may change t o a disk
t hat does not cont ain an oper at ing syst em or it s suppor t files. Alt hough
t his may be desir able, in t his sit uat ion t her e will be some limit at ions t o
t he commands t hat you may execut e. Any command t hat r equir es a file in
t he /THEOS/MENU/language, /THEOS/CONFIG or /THEOS/OS dir ect or ies will not
execut e proper ly because t hese librar ies ar e always assumed t o be r esident
on t he cur r ent syst em disk. Since command use files in t hose dir ect or ies,
t her e will not be much t hat you can do.
Notes You must use t his command t o change t he at t achment of t he syst em disk.
The Attach cannot change t he S disk assignment .
The System command does not load any pr ogr ams or files fr om t he new
syst em disk. Unless t hey ar e loaded int o memor y, it does check for t he
pr esence of t he following files: /THEOS/OS.CSI, /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/lan-
guage/KEYWORD.BIN and /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/language/MESSAGE.BIN.
If WORK is S, all of t he syst em wor k files are copied t o t he new syst em
disk.
1 SYSTEM
2 SYSTEM drive
drive opt ional dr ive let t er code
594 S ystem
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions The System command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
You must be in t r ue single-user mode. That is, no user s or backgr ound
t asks st art ed, including t he pr int spooler or Net wor k Login Server. The
disk cache may be enabled.
See also Reboot, Sysgen
Tail 595
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Tail Command Filter
The Tail command displays t he ending of a t ext file on t he st andard out put device.
Operation Mode 1The last lines or char act ers of file ar e out put t o t he st andar d
out put device. When mor e t han one file is specified, t he last lines or char -
act ers of each of t he files ar e out put .
>tail /theos/config/sysgen.cfg
USER1 5:3:7:1 L80,P24,C90,ACCOUNT=SYSTEM
USER2 5:3:7:2 L80,P24,C90
USER3 5:3:7:3 L80,P24,C90
USER4 5:3:7:4 L80,P24,C90
USER5 5:3:7:5 L80,P24,C90
USER6 5:3:7:8 L80,P24,C90
DATEFORM A
NAME "Saturn"
MAXPCB 40
LOWCASE
This mode out put s t he t ail of a file and t hen monit or s t he file for any
gr owt h in t he file. When addit ional dat a is wr it t en t o t he file by anot her
user or t ask, it is displayed and monit oring cont inues. You must use (Esc)
or (F9) or (Break),(Q) t o t er minat e t his command.
>tail system.history (-2 follow
09/08/96 15:55:06.579 1 End Program RC: 0 CPU: 0.380
09/08/
96 15:56:16.078 16 Start Program Command: TAIL SYSTEM.HISTORY
( -2 FOLLOW
When anot her user causes addit ional r ecor ds t o be wr it t en t o t he hist or y
file, t hey ar e displayed her e.
1 TAIL file... ( options
2 TAIL file ( options FOLLOW
opt ions +nnn
-nnn
CHARS
FOLLOW
LINE
596 Tail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options CHARS Count char act er s inst ead of lines.
FOLLOW Use Mode 2 of t he Tail command. If mult iple files ar e specified,
only t he fir st file is out put and followed.
LINES Count lines inst ead of char act er s. This is a default opt ion.
+nnnn Begin out put nnnn lines or char act er s fr om t he st ar t of t he file.
-nnnn Begin out put nnnn lines or charact ers fr om t he end of t he file.
The default is -10.
Notes When mult iple files ar e displayed, each files out put is ident ified wit h a
line displaying t he complet e pat h t o t he file.
A file specificat ion can omit t he file t ype if t he envir onment var iable
FILETYPE is defined.
erence.
Defaults LINES is a default opt ion and -10 is t he default count .
See also Head, List, More
Tape 597
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Tape Command
The Tape command init ializes and manipulat es a t ape volume.
Operation Mode 1Using t he TAP1 device, t his mode r ewinds t o t he beginning of t he
t ape volume and r eads t he header infor mat ion. The t ape label, t he fir st file
name and it s cr eat ion dat e ar e displayed.
>tape
Tape TAPE1 label "TBACKUP".
Tbackup from system "Production" on Wednesday, January 16, 2002, at 5:22pm.
Data set name: "January 16, 2002 17:22:14"
>
Mode 2The r equest ed function is per for med on tape. If tape is not speci-
fied, TAP1 is assumed.
>tape show
Tape TAPE1 label "FRIDAY".
Archived from disk "PRODUCTN" on 12/06/96, at 17:35.
>
1 TAPE
2 TAPE tape functions
tape t ape device name, such as TAP2 or TAP4
functions EJECT LABEL SHOW VERIFY
FORMAT REWIND TENSION WTM
INIT label RUN UNLOAD
598 Tape
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Function EJECT If t he t ape device support s a programmable eject feat ur e, t he
t ape car t r idge is eject ed fr om t he t ape dr ive.
FORMAT A TENSION funct ion is per for med on t he t ape and t hen new
header labels ar e wr it t en. If t he t ape suppor t s physical format -
t ing, t he t ape is for mat t ed inst ead of just being t ensioned.
>tape format
Enter tape label: Tuesday
>
INIT label A REWIND oper at ion is per for med and t hen it wr it es a new vol-
ume label wit hout t ensioning or for mat t ing t he t ape.
>tape init "Monday"
Tape labels ar e one t o eight char act er s in lengt h.
LABEL A REWIND oper at ion is per for med and t hen all file labels ar e
displayed and dat a blocks ar e count ed.
>tape label
VOL1TSC002
HDR1ARCHIVE.DISKTAPE 0001000100000098316 000000
HDR2F0409600128
** Tape Mark **
Number of data blocks = 28917
** Tape Mark **
EOF1ARCHIVE.DISKTAPE 0001000100000098316 028917
EOF2F0409600128
** Tape Mark **
** Tape Mark **
REWIND Rewinds t o t he st ar t of t he t ape.
RUN This funct ion is synonymous wit h t he EJECT funct ion. If t he
t ape device suppor t s a pr ogr ammable eject feat ur e, t he t ape
cart r idge is eject ed fr om t he t ape dr ive.
SHOW Reads t he next t ape header . The header and t he file name and
cr eat ion dat e are displayed. If t he t ape is posit ioned t o t he end
of t he t ape, t hen Tape mark is displayed.
>tape show
Tape TAPE1 label "TBACKUP".
Tbackup from system "Production" on Wednesday, January 16, 2002, at 5:22pm.
Data set name: "January 16, 2002 17:22:14"
>
Tape 599
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TENSION A fast forwar d and a fast r ewind ar e per for med on t he t ape
t o ensur e unifor m t ension t hr oughout t he t ape volume.
UNLOAD This funct ion is synonymous wit h t he EJECT funct ion. If t he
t ape device suppor t s a pr ogr ammable eject feat ur e, t he t ape
car t r idge is eject ed from t he t ape dr ive.
VERIFY Ver ifies t he r eadabilit y of t he ent ir e t ape by r ewinding t o t he
st ar t and t hen r eading ever y block on t he t ape.
>tape verify
Block: 40, length: 0
>
WTM Wr it es a t ape mar k on t he volume. Ever y file on t he t ape is
aut omat ically t er minat ed wit h a t ape mar k. The end of a t ape
is indicat ed by t wo consecut ive t ape mar ks.
Notes Befor e a t ape can be used by THEOS, it must be init ialized wit h a t ape
label.
Restrictions The Tape command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four.
See also TArchive, Attach, Backup, CopyFile, Eject, Restore, TBackup
600 Tape
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TArchive 601
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TArchive Command
The TArchive command makes an ar chive copy of a file, a set of files, an ent ir e disk volume
or a set of disk volumes. This is a legacy command. The cur r ent ver sion of soft war e t hat
should be used for ar chiving and backing up syst ems is TBackup.
The TArchive command cr eat es an a r chi ve vol ume t hat can be used by t he Restore com-
mand.
The TArchive and Restore commands have been r eplaced wit h t he TBackup command as it is
mor e capable and suppor t s t he lat est st or age devices.
Operation The file or files specified wit h file or from-drive ar e copied in a compressed
for m t o an a r chi ve vol ume on t he dest inat ion to-drive. The archive
volume cr eat ed can only be int er pr et ed wit h t he complement ary Restore
command descr ibed on page 495.
Mode 1Unless one or mor e opt ions r est r ict t he file select ion, all of t he
files on t he from-drive ar e ar chived t o t he t o-drive. Wit h t his mode
VOLUME is a default opt ion.
For inst ance, t he following command ar chives all files in all account s in all
subdirect or ies on t he S dr ive t o t he dr ive at t ached as TAPE1.
>TARCHIVE S TAPE
1 TARCHIVE from-drive to-drive ( options
2 TARCHIVE file to-drive ( options
3 TARCHIVE file from-drive to-drive ( FILES opt ions
4 TARCHIVE from-drive
1
from-drive
2
... to-drive ( options
from-drive dr ive let t er of source dr ive t o ar chive
to-drive dr ive let t er of dest inat ion dr ive or logical t ape name
opt ions ACCOUNT FILES NOASK SIZE file
ASK INCREMENTAL NOQUERY SUBDIR
dat e1 LABEL name NOTYPE TYPE
dat e2 MULTIUSER QUERY VOLUME
DIFFERENTIAL NAME file SHARE
602 TArchive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2The file(s) specified by file ar e ar chived t o t he to-drive. Wit h t his
mode ACCOUNT is a default opt ion.
For inst ance, t he following command ar chives a single file t o t he floppy
disket t e in dr ive F.
>TARCHIVE CUSTOMER.MASTER F
The following command ar chives all of t he mast er files in t he cur r ent
account t o t he t ape drive.
>TARCHIVE *.MASTER TAPE
Mode 3The files list ed in file ar e ar chived t o t he t o-dr ive. file must be an
ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file descr ipt ion per line. The
SELECTED.FILES and SELECTED.EXEC files cr eat ed by t he FileList command
and t he FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by t he Look command can be used for t his spec-
ificat ion file (see The EXEC and FILES Options on page 239). You may also
cr eat e t he specificat ion file wit h an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be ar chived:
>FILELIST *.DATA:A (EXEC
>FILELIST A NOT *.DATA:A (10/1/01 EXEC APPEND
changed since 10/01/2001. The following command will ar chive t hese files
t o t ape:
>TARCHIVE SELECTED.EXEC A TAPE (FILE
Mode 4Similar t o Mode 1 except t hat mult iple volumes ar e ar chived
ont o t o-drive. Wit h t his mode, VOLUME is a default opt ion.
For inst ance, t he following command ar chives all files in all account s in all
subdir ect or ies on t he S dr ive, t he A dr ive and t he B dr ive t o t he F dr ive.
>TARCHIVE S A B F
TArchive 603
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options The following opt ions ar e available wit h t he TArchive command. They can
be used wit h any of t he modes descr ibed above, eit her singly, or in combi-
nat ions.
ACCOUNT Specifies t hat only t he files owned by t he cur r ent account ar e
candidat es for ar chiving. This is a default opt ion when Mode 2
is used.
Use t he VOLUME opt ion t o over r ide t his default .
ASK A default opt ion t hat inst r uct s TArchive t o ask t he oper at or t o
mount t he sour ce and dest inat ion volumes, and wait s for con-
fir mat ion t hat t he pr oper volumes ar e mount ed.
For inst ance:
>tarchive s f
Source is Disk S
Destination is Disk F
Mount volumes now:
Source is labeled "SYSTEM".
Destination is labeled "ARCHIVE1".
OK to start archive (Y/N)
Respond wit h a (Enter) for t he Mount volumes now: r equest
and a (Y) or (N) for t he OK t o st art ar chive quest ion.
Use t he NOASK opt ion t o over r ide t his default .
date1 The fir st t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int erpr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files wit h a dat e st amp gr eat er t han or equal t o
t his dat e (new files) ar e candidat es for ar chiving. For inst ance:
>tarchive s f (10/1/01
Wit h t his command only t hose files on t he S dr ive t hat have
been changed on or since 10/01/2001 will be ar chived.
See also t he INCREMENTAL and DIFFERENTIAL opt ions.
date2 A second t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int er pr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files wit h a dat e st amp less t han or equal t o
t his dat e (old files) ar e candidat es for ar chiving.
>tarchive s f (1/1/86 9/30/01
604 TArchive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This command ar chives only t hose files on t he S dr ive t hat
have not been changed since 9/30/2001. The dat e 1/1/86 is t he
ear liest dat e maint ained by t he THEOS file syst em and is
int er pr et ed as fr om t he ear liest dat e.
DIFFERENTIAL Tells TArchive t o include only t hose files t hat have t heir
modified bit set . This is t he only opt ion t hat pr event s TArchive
fr om r eset t ing t he modified bit for files t hat it ar chives. See
Differ ent ial Ar chives on page 608.
FILES Indicat es t hat Mode 3 of t he TArchive command is t o be used.
The file specifies an ASCII st r eam file wit h each r ecor d in t he
file specifying a single file name. The file name specificat ions
in t his file may include t he account name and pat h t o t he file.
For inst ance, a line in t he specificat ion file might cont ain:
develop\custom/programs/program.source.sample:s
If t his file is used in an ar chive, t he display will be:
>tarchive selected.exec s f (file noask
Account: 4=DEVELOP
Subdirectory: CUSTOM
Subdirectory: PROGRAMS
Library: PROGRAM.SOURCE
Member: PROGRAM.SOURCE.SAMPLE
INCREMENTAL Tells TArchive t o include only t hose files t hat have t heir
modified bit set . The modified bit is r eset for each file ar chived.
See Increment al Ar chives on page 609.
LABEL label Specifies t hat t he to-drives volume label is set t o label. For
inst ance:
>tarchive s f (label "Monday1" notype
set s t he label of t he disket t e in dr ive F t o Monday1.
If addit ional disks ar e r equired, t he last char act er of t he label
is incr ement ed. When t his might happen, t r y t o use a st ar t ing
label name t hat ends wit h a sequence ident ifier , such as 1 or
-A et c.
TArchive 605
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MULTIUSER Allows TArchive t o ar chive a public dr ive even t hough ot her
user s may be logged on and act ive. Nor mally, when TArchive is
inst r uct ed t o per for m a full volume ar chive (opt ion VOLUME)
on a public disk, it r equir es single-user mode. If ot her user s ar e
logged ont o t he syst em, it displays t he message: Must be sin-
gle user or pr ivat e volume.
Using t his opt ion t ells TArchive t o not r est r ict t he ar chive t o
single-user oper at ion (t he message is st ill displayed). THIS
CAN BE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS! If anot her user
changes some files while t he ar chive is being cr eat ed, t he
int egrit y of t he ar chive is lost .
Use t his opt ion only if you ar e sur e t hat all ot her users ar e
inact ive.
NAME Specifies t hat t he ar chive volume file name is t o be set t o t he
t oken following t his opt ion. Addit ionally, t he ar chive volume
file will only use as much space as needed. None of t he exist ing
files on t he t o-drive ar e erased (an implied SHARE opt ion).
For inst ance:
>tarchive s f ( account name "programs.archive"
This creat es an ar chive volume file on dr ive F wit h a file name
of PROGRAMS.ARCHIVE.
If t he ar chive cannot fit in t he space remaining on t he dest ina-
t in dr ive, it will r epor t t hat t he disk is full and not cr eat e t he
ar chive volume.
Use of t his opt ion set s t he NOASK opt ion. To r eenable t his
opt ion, you must specify ASK aft er t he NAME opt ion and it s file
name.
One of t he pr incipal advant ages of t his opt ion is t hat t he
r esult ing ar chive file uses only as much disk space as is needed
for t he act ual archive volume. When t his opt ion is not used t he
ar chive volume name is ARCHIVE.VOLUME01, t he ar chive volume
uses t he ent ir e disk space of t he to-drive and it may use mult i-
ple volumes for t he out put file.
t ion at t he beginning of t he archive and when subsequent
disks or t apes ar e needed.
606 TArchive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NOQUERY A default opt ion t hat t ells TArchive t o not ask for confir mat ion
on each file being archived.
NOTYPE Tells TArchive t o not display account names, subdir ect or y
names, libr ar y names or file names on t he st andard out put
device as t hey ar e being ar chived.
QUERY Tells TArchive t hat t he oper at or is t o be queried or asked if
each file mat ching t he select ion cr it er ia is t o be included in t he
ar chive volume.
>tarchive s f (query
Source is Disk S
Destination is Disk F
Mount volumes now:
Source is labeled "THEOS".
Destination is labeled "ARCHIVE".
OK to start archive (Y/N)? Y
Ok to archive "SAMPLE.FILE:S" (Yes/No/All) N
Ok to archive "SELECTED.EXEC:S" (Yes/No/All) N
...
94.3 MB, 8,834 files selected.
...
When t he Ok t o ar chive quest ion is asked you may r espond
means yes t o t his file and all r emaining files ar e included wit h-
out being quer ied. Respond wit h (Esc) t o cancel t o ar chive.
SHARE Tells TArchive t hat t he ar chive volume is t o shar e t he space on
t he fir st disk wit h any exist ing files. This is a default opt ion
when t o-drive is a r emovable har d disk.
When t his opt ion is not used, TArchive clear s t he dir ect or y of
t he fir st disk and cr eat es an ar chive volume file t hat uses t he
ent ir e disk space.
If mult iple disks are r equir ed t hey will use t he ent ir e disk
space for t he ar chive file.
SIZE file The t ot al size of all of t he files select ed for ar chiving is com-
put ed and appended t o file. This is done befor e t he ar chive is
cr eat ed.
SUBDIR Tells TArchive t hat only files in t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y
and all of it s subor dinat e dir ect or ies are included.
TArchive 607
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TYPE A default opt ion t hat t ells TArchive t o display each account
name, subdir ect or y name, libr ary name and file name on t he
st andar d out put device (nor mally t he console) as it is being
ar chived. This display can be r edir ect ed.
For inst ance, t he following is a t ypical display dur ing an
ar chive:
ACCOUNT: 2=SAMPLES
File: CHARSET.H
File: LIBS.EXEC
File: MAKE.FILE
File: READ.ME
File: SAMPLES.EXEC
Subdirectory: C32
Library: C32.CMD32
Member: C32.CMD32.FINS
Member: C32.CMD32.PRTF
...
The indent at ion of t he display indicat es t he hier ar chy of t he
direct or y st r uct ur e.
VOLUME Specifies t hat all account s, all subdirect or ies and all files on
t he from-drive ar e t o be ar chived. This opt ion r equir es t hat t he
from-drive be a privat e disk volume, t hat all ot her user s be
logged off or t hat t he MULTIUSER opt ion be used.
Full Volume
Archives
Full volume ar chives (opt ion VOLUME in effect ) ar e copies of t he ent ire con-
t ent s of disks. They should be cr eat ed on a fr equent and per iodic basis t o
assure your self of having adequat e prot ect ion in t he case of disk or com-
put er failur e. Since a full volume ar chive cont ains a copy of every file, sub-
dir ect or y and account on a disk, it is t he only ar chive volume t hat needs t o
be accessed if you must r est ore a syst em.
Because full volume ar chives do include all of t he files on a disk, it
includes files t hat r ar ely change, such as t he oper at ing syst em pr ogr ams
and dat a files, applicat ion pr ogr ams and ot her st at ic dat a files.
608 TArchive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Multivolume
Archives
Mode 4 of t his command ar chives mult iple disk volumes ont o a single
ar chive volume. This allows you t o ar chive your ent ir e syst em in one oper -
at ion. For inst ance, a syst em wit h four har d dr ives can be ar chived wit h
t he command:
>tarchive s a b c tape
Should t he need ever ar ise wher e you want t o r est or e a volume or a file
fr om t his ar chive volume, use t he DRIVE opt ion of t he Restore command.
>restore tape b (drive b
Differential
Archives
A different ial ar chive is an ar chive volume t hat includes only t hose files
t hat have changed since t he last full volume ar chive. For inst ance, if a disk
cont ains t hr ee files:
PROGRAM.COMMAND
DATA1.FILE
DATA2.FILE
A full volume ar chive will creat e an ar chive volume t hat cont ains all of
t hese files. If DATA1.FILE is changed and a differ ent ial ar chive is per for med,
it will cr eat e an archive volume t hat cont ains only t hat file. The ot her files
ar e not included in t his differ ent ial ar chive volume because t hey have not
changed and t her e is a cur r ent copy of t hose files in t he last full volume
ar chive.
If DATA2.FILE is t hen changed and anot her differ ent ial archive is per for med,
it will cr eat e an ar chive volume t hat cont ains bot h t he DATA1.FILE and t he
DATA2.FILE because bot h of t hose files have been changed since t he last full
volume ar chive was per for med.
Should a disk failure occur , t he syst em could be r est ored by fir st r est or ing
t he full volume ar chive and t hen t he last differ ent ial archive volume.
Full Volume Differential 1 Differential 2
PROGRAM.COMMAND
DATA1.FILE DATA1.FILE DATA1.FILE
DATA2.FILE DATA2.FILE
Different ial Archives
TArchive 609
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Incremental
Archives
An incr ement al ar chive is an ar chive volume t hat includes only t hose files
t hat have changed since t he last full volume or incr ement al ar chive was
cr eat ed. For inst ance, in t he example used for t he differ ent ial ar chive, a
full volume ar chive is per for med and t hen DATA1.FILE is changed. When t he
incr ement al ar chive is per for med, it cr eat es an ar chive volume t hat con-
t ains only t he DATA1.FILE. When DATA2.FILE is changed and anot her incr e-
ment al ar chive is per for med, it creat es an ar chive volume t hat cont ains
only t he DATA2.FILE. The DATA1.FILE is not included in t his ar chive volume
because it has not changed since t he last incr ement al ar chive was cr eat ed.
Should a disk failur e occur , t he syst em could be r est or ed by first r est or ing
t he full volume archive followed by t he fir st incr ement al ar chive volume
and t hen t he second incr ement al ar chive volume.
Notes The out put of t he TArchive command is an a r chi ve vol ume. This is a spe-
cial st r eam file t hat cont ains t he compr essed for ms of t he ar chived files
along wit h t heir direct or y ent r ies. This ar chive volume can be manipulat ed
like any ot her file, and it can even be opened and r ead like any ot her file.
However , since it is a compr essed for m of t he original files and it cont ains
t he dir ect or y ent r ies for t he files, it is not usable except by pr ogr ams t hat
know how t o int er pr et t his infor mat ion. The Restore command is a pr o-
gr am t hat knows how t o int er pr et t he infor mat ion and copy it back t o it s
or iginal, usable form.
The files in an ar chive volume ar e sor t ed in ascending file name sequence
wit hin account number sequence.
An ar chive volume is a single file named ARCHIVE.VOLUME01 (unless t he
NAME opt ion is used). This single file cont ains all of t he files included in
t his ar chive.
Fr equent ly a file or set of files being ar chived fr om har d disk t o floppy,
r emovable har d disk or t ape will be lar ger t han t he disk or t ape. In t hat
sit uat ion t he TArchive command will ask you t o mount anot her disk or t ape
so t hat it can cont inue t he archive of t he file or files. In t his sit uat ion each
of t he disks or t apes used will cont ain a single file named ARCHIVE.VOLU-
MEnn (see SHARE opt ion for an except ion t o t his sit uat ion).
Unless t he DIFFERENTIAL opt ion is used, t he modified bit for each file
ar chived is r eset by t he ar chive pr ocess.
Full Volume Incremental 1 Incremental 2
PROGRAM.COMMAND
Increment al Ar chives
610 TArchive
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Defaults ACCOUNT (Mode 2), ASK, NOQUERY, TYPE, VOLUME (Mode 1 and Mode 4).
Cautions The MULTIUSER opt ion t ells t he TArchive command t o not check whet her or
not ot her user s ar e logged on or act ive. It does not pr event t hose ot her
user s fr om per for ming oper at ions t hat change t he dat abase being
ar chived. If anot her user does change t he dat abase dur ing t he ar chive
oper at ion, t he int egr it y of t he ar chive volume is compromised.
For inst ance, a disk volume being ar chived includes a cust omer mast er file
wit h cur r ent balance fields and an invoice dat abase. While t he ar chive
volume is being cr eat ed, anot her user post s a t r ansact ion t o t he invoice
dat abase before it is included in t he ar chive but aft er t he cust omer mast er
file is ar chived. If t he ar chive volume is ever r est or ed, t he invoice dat abase
will not mat ch t he cur r ent balance fields in t he cust omer mast er file.
Restrictions Unless t he NAME opt ion is used, t he dest inat ion dr ive must be an image
dr ive or some t ype of a r emovable mass-st or age device such as a floppy dis-
ket t e, r emovable har d disk or t ape.
The dest inat ion media must be prefor mat t ed. If t he ar chive r equir es mor e
disks or t apes t han ant icipat ed, you can use anot her session or t er minal t o
for mat t he disk while TArchive wait s for you t o confir m t hat t he pr oper disk
is mount ed. To do t his t he ASK opt ion must be in effect and t he t o-drive
must be publicly at t ached.
When opt ion VOLUME is in effect and t he from-drive is publicly at t ached,
all ot her user s must be logged off or t he MULTIUSER opt ion must be speci-
fied. See Caut ion not es above r egar ding t he MULTIUSER opt ion.
The TArchive command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four .
See also Backup, CopyFile, Disk, Restore, Tape, TBackup
TBackup 611
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TBackup Command
The TBackup command backs up files t o anot her dr ive, or r est or es t hose files. It can also be
used t o ver ify or compar e t he backup files t o t heir or iginal sour ce files.
1 TBACKUP file-spec... backup ( BACKUP backup-options
2 TBACKUP backup ( COMPARE compare-options
3 TBACKUP backup file-spec... ( RESTORE rest ore-opt ions
4 TBACKUP backup ( VERIFY verify-options
5 TBACKUP ( PASSFILE filename
backup dr ive let t er of disk or t ape volume cont aining backup or t he
file name specificat ion for t he backup dat a set
file-spec dr ive let t er of source dr ive for backup or specificat ion of files
for backup
backup-opt ions ACCOUNT FULL PASSWORD WAIT
ASK INCREMENTAL PASSFILE date1
COMPARE LABEL PRTnn date2
DIFFERENTIAL LIST SETNAME
EJECT MULTIUSER SUBDIR
ERROR NOASK VERIFY
FILES NOEJECT VOLUME
compare-options ASK LIST PASSFILE WAIT
DISKMAP NOASK PASSWORD
EJECT NOEJECT PRTnn
ERROR NOWAIT SETNAME
restore-opt ions ACCOUNT LIST OLDER REPLACE
ASK NEWFILE OLDFILE SETNAME
DISKMAP NOASK PASSFILE VOLUME
EJECT NOEJECT PASSWORD WAIT
ERROR NOQUERY PRTnn date1
FILES NOSYSFILES QUERY date2
FROM NOWAIT
verify-options ASK LIST NOWAIT PRTnn
ERROR NOASK PASSFILE SETNAME
EJECT NOEJECT PASSWORD WAIT
612 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Operation Mode 1Creat es a backup dat a set on backup of t he files specified by file-
spec. Alt hough no opt ions are r equir ed, you should specify t he SETNAME
for t he dat a set .
The backup dest inat ion may be specified in one of t wo ways:
1. Wit h a dr ive code. When t his is used, t he backup dat a set is wr it -
t en t o a file named TBACKUP.VOL00001:backup. The dest inat ion vol-
ume is clear ed of all exist ing files befor e t his dat a set is creat ed.
>tbackup s tape (backup setname "Weekly backup"
If t he dat a set does not fit on a single volume, subsequent volumes
will be request ed and t he file names used on t hose volumes will be
TBACKUP.VOLnnnnn:backup, wit h nnnnn being a sequent ial number
incr ement ed for each volume.
2. Wit h a file name specificat ion. When t his is used, t he dest inat ion
volume is not clear ed and t he backup dat a set is wr it t en t o t he file
name specified.
>tbackup s weekly.backup:d (backup differential
The dat a set must fit in t he available space on t he dest inat ion
dr ive. If t he dat a set does not fit in t he space r emaining on t hat
volume, an er r or message will display.
The file-spec may be a list of sever al file specificat ions. For inst ance:
>tbackup *.data *.program *.notes tape (backup
Wit h t he above command, all files on all dr ives in t he default sear ch
sequence wit h a file-t ype of data, program or notes ar e backed up t o
t ape.
file-spec may be omit t ed, in which case it means t hat all files on all dr ives
in t he dr ive sear ch sequence ar e candidat es for t he backup. The dr ive
sear ch sequence is defined in t he account envir onment (see Account on
page 13) or by t he SEARCH envir onment var iable (see Set on page 541).
Unless specifically ident ified in file-spec t he following set s of files ar e not
backed up wit h t his command:
/SYSTEM.CSI*
/SYSTEM.CSISV*
/SYSTEM.EXEC*
/SYSTEM.PIPE*
/SYSTEM.WORK*
/THEOS/TEMP/SYSTEM.CHIST*
TBackup 613
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Compar es t he cont ent s of a backup dat a set specified by backup
wit h t he files t hat it was or iginally backed up from.
For inst ance:
>tbackup s tape (backup setname "Weekly Backup"
>tbackup tape (compare setname "Weekly Backup"
If t he sour ce files have been changed since t he backup dat a set was cr e-
at ed, t his compar e oper at ion will fail. Remember , in a mult iuser envir on-
ment , ot her user s may be changing t he dat abase dur ing t he backup or
bet ween t he st ar t of t he backup and t he compar ison operat ion.
Mode 3Rest ores t he files fr om t he backup dat a set t o t he or iginal loca-
t ion of t he files.
>tbackup tape s (restore
>tbackup tape *.data:s *.data:a program.source.*:s (restore
The DISKMAP opt ion may be used t o inst r uct TBackup t o r est or e t he con-
t ent s of t he dat a set t o a dr ive ot her t han t he original sour ce of t he backup.
>tbackup s.file:s a.file:a tape (backup setname "Test"
>tbackup tape (restore diskmap s-a diskmap a-s setname "Test"
Aft er t he r est or e oper at ion is complet e, t he A drive will have t he file named
S.FILE and t he S drive will have t he file named A.FILE.
Mode 4Ver ifies t he r eadabilit y and int egr it y of t he backup dat a set
specified by backup. Ver ifying a dat a set does not t est t o see if t he dat a set
is an exact copy of t he or iginal file as t he Mode 2 compar e oper at ion does.
Inst ead, it does r ead ever y byt e of t he dat a set , ver ifies t hat all of t he
checksums ar e corr ect , and t hat ever y file and r ecor d in t he dat a set
st ar t s and ends where it should.
Mode 5This mode cr eat es a file cont aining an encr ypt ed passwor d. This
file can t hen be used for any of t he ot her modes of t he TBackup command.
When envoked, a for m is displayed allowing you t o ent er a passwor d and
t o confir m t hat you ent er ed t he desir ed passwor d by r equir ing you t o r een-
t er it . The r esult ing passwor d is encr ypt ed and st ored in t he file named
filename.
614 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Backup
Options
ACCOUNT Only t he files owned by t he cur r ent account ar e candidat es for
t he backup. This opt ion set s SUBDIR opt ion.
Use t he VOLUME opt ion t o over r ide t his default .
ASK When TBackup is r eady t o begin wr it ing t he backup dat a, t his
opt ion inst r uct s TBackup t o ask t he oper at or t o mount t he des-
t inat ion volume and wait s for confir mat ion t hat t he pr oper vol-
ume is mount ed.
Aft er you load t he pr oper volume in t he disk or t ape dr ive and
acknowledge t his message, TBackup looks for an exist ing file
named TBACKUP.VOLnnnnn. If t her e is an exist ing file, TBackup
displays t he following infor mat ion about it :
Select Overwr it e volume t o use t his disk or t ape as t he
backup volume. Mount new volume r et ur ns t o t he pr ior ques-
t ion, allowing you t o inser t a differ ent disk or t ape int o t he
drive.
ASK is a default opt ion unless backup is a file name specifica-
t ion, in which case t his opt ion is ignor ed. Use t he NOASK
opt ion t o over ride t his default .
COMPARE Indicat es t hat , aft er t he backup dat a set is cr eat ed, TBackup
should compare t he dat a set against t he original files. The
NOASK opt ion is in effect when t he compar ison st ar t s.
TBackup 615
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
DIFFERENTIAL Only t hose files t hat have t heir modified bit set ar e
included in t he backup. This is t he only opt ion t hat pr event s
TBackup fr om r eset t ing t he modified bit for files t hat it copies.
See Differ ent ial Backups on page 629.
EJECT This opt ion applies when t he t o-drive is a t ape dr ive or a
r emovable har d dr ive. It specifies t hat t he final volume is
eject ed fr om t he drive aft er t he backup is complet e.
ERROR Specifies t hat all er r or s det ect ed dur ing t he backup ar e wr it t en
t o t he indicat ed file. For inst ance:
>tbackup *.data:s tape (backup error backup.log:s
This command backs up all files wit h a file-t ype of DATA t o t he
TAPE dr ive. Er r or s det ect ed ar e logged t o t he file BACKUP.LOG:S.
FILES Indicat es t hat file-spec is t he name of an ASCII st r eam file
wit h each r ecor d in t he file specifying a single file name or a
wild-car d file specificat ion. The file name specificat ions in t his
file may include t he account name and pat h t o t he file.
For inst ance, lines in t he specificat ion file might cont ain:
*.data:s
develop\custom/programs/program.source.sample:s
For inst ance, FileList is used t o cr eat e a list of files t o be backed
up:
lowing command backs up t hese files:
>tbackup selected.exec tape (backup file
FULL The modified bit of a file does not affect whet her or not it is
included in t he dat a set . This is a default opt ion t hat can be
over r idden by using t he DIFFERENTIAL or INCREMENTAL
opt ion.
616 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The modified bit is always r eset when t his opt ion is in effect
and t he file is backed up.
INCREMENTAL Tells TBackup t o include only t hose files t hat have t heir
modified bit set . The modified bit is r eset for each file copied.
See Increment al Backups on page 630.
LABEL Specifies t hat t he to-drives volume label is set t o label. For
inst ance:
>tbackup s f (backup label "Monday1"
set s t he label of t he disket t e in dr ive F t o Monday1.
If addit ional disk volumes ar e r equir ed, t he last char act er of
t he label is incr ement ed. When t his might happen, t r y t o use a
st ar t ing label name t hat ends wit h a sequence ident ifier , such
as 1. Or use a label name wit h seven or less char act er s.
MULTIUSER Allows TBackup t o back up files fr om a public dr ive even
t hough ot her user s may be logged on and act ive. Nor mally,
when TBackup is inst r uct ed t o perform a full-volume backup
(VOLUME opt ion) on a public disk, it r equires single-user mode.
If ot her user s ar e logged ont o t he syst em, it displays t he mes-
sage: Must be single user or pr ivat e volume.
Using t his opt ion t ells TBackup t o not rest r ict t he backup t o
single-user operat ion (t he message is st ill displayed). THIS
CAN BE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS! If anot her user
changes some files while t he backup is being cr eat ed, t he
int egr it y of t he backup is lost .
Use t his opt ion only if you ar e sure t hat all ot her user s ar e
inact ive and will r emain so while t he backup is cr eat ed.
NOASK Disables t he dest inat ion volume oper at or confir mat ion at t he
beginning of t he backup. This opt ion is useful for unat t ended
backups.
NOEJECT A default opt ion t hat specifies t hat t he last volume in backup
is not eject ed when t he backup is complet e.
NOWAIT Disables t he WAIT opt ion and allows TBackup t o t er minat e
wit hout wait ing for t he oper at or t o acknowledge t he st at us
message upon complet ion of t he backup oper at ion.
PASSFILE Specifies t he file name cont aining t he encr ypt ed password.
This passwor d is used t o encr ypt t he dat a set . When used, t he
TBackup 617
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
dat a set cannot be used for COMPARE, RESTORE or VERIFY
pur poses wit hout specifying t he exact same passwor d.
PASSWORD Specifies t he passwor d t o use for encr ypt ing t he dat a set .
When used, t he dat a set cannot be used for COMPARE,
RESTORE or VERIFY pur poses wit hout specifying t he exact
same passwor d. Passwor ds may be up t o 32 char act er s in
lengt h, are case sensit ive, and may cont ain spaces and ot her
special char act er s.
If PASSWORD is t he last opt ion specified on t he command line
and t her e is no password specified aft er t he keywor d, TBackup
will prompt t he oper at or for t he password.
SETNAME Specifies t he backup dat a set name. This name may be up t o
64 charact ers in lengt h and it may include let t er s, digit s,
spaces and ot her punct uat ion char act er s. Enclose t he dat a set
name in quot at ion mar ks.
>tbackup s tape1 (backup volume setname "Full system backup"
The name for a backup dat a set can be used t o ensur e t hat t he
pr oper backup is being used lat er when it is r est or ed When t he
dat a set is used at a lat er t ime, t his dat a set name is displayed
(unless NOASK is in effect ). You can specify t hat t he backup
must have t he same dat a set name as specified when you cr e-
at ed it by using t he SETNAME opt ion wit h t he Mode 3 com-
mand.
SUBDIR Tells TBackup t hat files in t he cur r ent wor king direct or y and
all of it s subdir ect or ies ar e included in t he backup.
When not specified, only t he files in t he cur r ent wor king dir ec-
t ory ar e included. None of t he files in subor dinat e dir ect or ies
ar e included in t he backup.
VERIFY Indicat es t hat , aft er t he backup dat a set is creat ed, TBackup
should ver ify t he r eadabilit y of t he dat a set . The NOASK opt ion
is in effect when t he verify oper at ion st ar t s.
Ver ifying a dat a set does not t est t o see if t he dat a set is an
exact copy of t he or iginal file as t he COMPARE opt ion does.
Inst ead, it does r ead ever y byt e of t he dat a set , ver ifies t hat all
of t he checksums ar e cor r ect , and t hat ever y file and r ecor d
in t he dat a set st ar t s and ends wher e it should.
VOLUME Specifies t hat file-spec r efer s t o files in all account s, not just
t he cur r ent account . The default ACCOUNT opt ion limit s file-
spec t o files on t he cur r ent account .
618 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This opt ion r equir es a pr ivilege level of five, t hat you be cur -
r ent ly logged ont o t he syst em account , and t hat t he sour ce disk
be a pr ivat e disk volume or , if it is a publicly at t ached disk,
t hat all ot her user s be logged off or t hat t he MULTIUSER opt ion
be used.
WAIT A default opt ion t hat specifies t hat TBackup should wait for an
oper at or response befor e clear ing t he st at us message and exit -
ing.
dat e1 The first t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int er pr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files wit h a dat e st amp gr eat er t han or equal t o
t his dat e ar e candidat es for t he backup. For inst ance:
>tbackup s tape2 (backup 1/1/02
Wit h t his command only t hose files on t he S dr ive t hat have
been changed on or since J anuar y 1, 2002 will be backed up.
See also t he INCREMENTAL and DIFFERENTIAL opt ions.
dat e2 A second t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int er pr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files wit h a dat e st amp less t han or equal t o
t his dat e ar e candidat es for t he backup.
>tbackup s tape2 (backup 2/1/02 2/28/02
This command backs up only t hose files on t he S dr ive t hat
wer e changed bet ween and including t he beginning and ending
of Febr uar y, 2002. Files changed befor e Febr uar y or since Feb-
r uar y ar e excluded.
TBackup 619
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Compare
Options
ASK This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he ASK opt ion on page 614.
DISKMAP Changes t he dr ive codes used during t he compar ison. For
inst ance:
>tbackup f (compare diskmap s-d
The specificat ion s-d in t he above command specifies t hat
files or iginally backed up fr om t he S dr ive ar e t o be compar ed
wit h t he files on t he cur r ent D dr ive.
Mult iple DISKMAP opt ions may be used t o map files on mult i-
ple dr ives:
>tbackup s a b tape (backup
>tbackup tape (compare diskmap s-d diskmap a-e diskmap b-f
Her e, t he files backed up from S ar e compar ed t o files on t he
cur rent D dr ive, files backed up fr om A ar e compared t o files on
t he cur r ent E dr ive, and files backed up fr om B ar e compar ed t o
files on t he cur r ent F dr ive.
EJECT This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he EJECT opt ion on page
615.
ERROR This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he ERROR opt ion on page
615.
LIST List s t he files in t he backup t o t he specified file or device. For
inst ance, t o list t he files in t he backup t o a disk file, use:
>tbackup tape1 (compare list backup.listing:s
To list t he files t o a pr int er you would use:
>tbackup tape1 (compare list prt5
NOASK This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he NOASK opt ion on page
616.
NOEJECT This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he NOEJECT opt ion on page
616.
wit hout wait ing for t he operat or t o acknowledge t he st at us
620 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PASSFILE Specifies t he file name cont aining an encr ypt ed passwor d. This
passwor d is used t o decr ypt t he dat a set so t hat it can be com-
par ed against t he or iginal dat a on disk.
The dat a set must have been creat ed wit h t he exact same pass-
wor d t hat is specified her e.
PASSWORD Specifies t he passwor d t o use for decr ypt ing t he dat a set .
will pr ompt t he oper at or for t he passwor d.
PRTnn This opt ion is a synonym t o t he LIST PRTnn opt ion.
SETNAME This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he SETNAME opt ion on page
617.
WAIT Indicat es t hat , aft er t he backup dat a set is compar ed and t he
st at us message is displayed, TBackup should wait for an oper a-
t or r esponse befor e clear ing t he st at us message and exit ing.
TBackup 621
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restore
Options
ACCOUNT Rest ores files mat ching t he file-spec t hat wer e backed up fr om
t he cur r ent account . Compar e wit h t he VOLUME opt ion.
>logon data
>tbackup tape (restore account
In t he above example, only files t hat wer e or iginally backed up
fr om t he DATA account ar e r est ored.
ASK This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he ASK opt ion on page 614.
DISKMAP This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he DISKMAP opt ion on page
619.
615.
615.
FROM Tells TBackup t o only select t hose files on t he backup dat a set
t hat wer e owned by account name account at t he t ime t he
backup was cr eat ed. The or iginat ing account name is specified
immediat ely aft er t he FROM keywor d.
>logon develop
>tbackup tape (restore from project4
The above command r est or es all of t he files t hat wer e backed
up fr om t he account PROJ ECT4 int o t he curr ent account
DEVELOP.
LIST This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he LIST opt ion on page 619.
NEWFILE Specifies t hat TBackup will only at t empt t o r est or e a file if it
does not alr eady exist on t he dest inat ion dr ive. This opt ion is
mut ually exclusive wit h t he OLDFILE opt ion (you may use one
or t he ot her , but not bot h).
616.
616.
NOQUERY A default opt ion t hat t ells TBackup t o not ask for confir mat ion
on each new or exist ing file being r est or ed.
622 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
NOSYSFILES The st andar d, syst em-supplied files ar e omit t ed when files
ar e r est or ed. See NOSYSFILES on page 503 for a list ing of
t he files skipped wit h t his opt ion.
wit hout wait ing for t he oper at or t o acknowledge t he st at us
OLDER Qualifying files ar e r est or ed only if t he backed-up file is older
t han t he same file on t he dest inat ion. In ot her wor ds, files ar e
r est or ed only if t hey have been changed since t he backup was
made.
OLDFILE Specifies t hat TBackup will only at t empt t o r est or e a file if it
does exist on t he dest inat ion dr ive. This opt ion implies t he
REPLACE opt ion and is mut ually exclusive wit h t he NEWFILE
opt ion (you may use one or t he ot her , but not bot h).
PASSFILE Specifies t he file name cont aining an encr ypt ed passwor d. This
passwor d is used t o decr ypt t he dat a set befor e r est or ing it t o
disk.
PASSWORD Specifies t he passwor d t o use for decr ypt ing t he dat a set .
will pr ompt t he oper at or for t he passwor d.
TBackup 623
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
QUERY Tells TBackup t hat t he oper at or is t o be quer ied or asked if
each file mat ching t he select ion crit er ia is t o be rest or ed.
REPLACE This opt ion t ells TBackup t hat it is okay t o at t empt t o r est or e a
file even if it alr eady exist s on t he dest inat ion dr ive. When t his
opt ion is not used (and t he NOQUERY opt ion is not used), an
at t empt t o rest or e an exist ing file causes you t o be quer ied.
617.
VOLUME Specifies t hat all of t he files on t he dat a set may be r est or ed if
t hey mat ch t he file-spec and ot her opt ions specified do not
r est r ict t hem. Compar e wit h t he ACCOUNT opt ion.
WAIT Indicat es t hat , aft er t he backup dat a set is r est or ed and t he
st at us message is displayed, TBackup should wait for an oper a-
t or r esponse befor e clear ing t he st at us message and exit ing.
date1 The fir st t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int erpr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files in t he backup dat a set wit h a dat e st amp
gr eat er t han or equal t o t his dat e (new files) ar e candidat es for
r est or ing. For inst ance:
>tbackup tape a (restore 10/1/01
Wit h t his command only t hose files in t he backup dat a set wit h
a file change dat a of Oct ober 1, 2001 or lat er ar e r est or ed t o t he
A dr ive.
date2 A second t oken t hat looks like a dat e is int er pr et ed as a selec-
t ion dat e. Only files in t he backup dat a set wit h a dat e st amp
less t han or equal t o t his dat e (old files) ar e candidat es for t he
r est or e oper at ion.
>tbackup tape a (restore 1/1/86 9/30/01
624 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This command r est or es only t hose files fr om t he dat a set wit h
a file change dat e less t han or equal t o Sept ember 30, 2001, ar e
r est or ed t o t he A dr ive. The dat e 1/1/86 is t he earliest dat e
maint ained by t he THEOS file syst em and is int er pr et ed as
fr om t he earliest dat e.
TBackup 625
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Verify Options ASK This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he ASK opt ion on page 614.
615.
615.
LIST This opt ion oper at es t he same as t he LIST opt ion on page 619.
616.
616.
wit hout wait ing for t he operat or t o acknowledge t he st at us
PASSFILE Specifies t he file name cont aining an encr ypt ed password. This
passwor d is used t o decr ypt t he dat a set so t hat it can be com-
par ed against t he or iginal dat a on disk.
The dat a set must have been cr eat ed wit h t he exact same pass-
wor d t hat is specified here.
PASSWORD Specifies t he passwor d t o use for decrypt ing t he dat a set .
will prompt t he oper at or for t he password.
The dat a set must have been cr eat ed wit h t he exact same pass-
wor d t hat is specified here.
617.
WAIT Indicat es t hat , aft er t he backup dat a set is ver ified and t he st a-
t us message is displayed, TBackup should wait for an oper at or
r esponse befor e clear ing t he st at us message and exit ing.
626 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Defaults Mode 1 (BACKUP) default s are: ASK, FULL, NOEJECT. ACCOUNT is a default
when file-spec specifies a dr ive code only. NOASK is t he default and cannot
be overr idden when backup is a file name specificat ion.
Mode 2 (COMPARE) default s ar e: ASK and NOEJECT.
Mode 3 (RESTORE) default s are: ASK, NOEJECT, NOQUERY, VOLUME.
Mode 4 (VERIFY) default s ar e: ASK and NOEJECT.
Notes Because of t he compr ession algor it hm used, some files may be lar ger t han
t he or iginal sour ce file. For inst ance, a backup of a zipped file or a file t hat
has alr eady been compr essed wit h t he Compress command will be larger
t han t he or iginal file.
The compr ession per cent age displayed r efer s t o t he differ ence in size
bet ween t he or iginal files and t he r esult ing dat a set , including t he dat a set
cat alog infor mat ion and ot her dat a set over head. When t he or iginal size is
small, t his compr ession percent age may be gr eat er t han 100%.
Backup Data
Set
The out put of t he TBackup command is a ba ck up d a t a set . This is a spe-
cial st r eam file t hat cont ains t he compr essed for ms of t he files along wit h a
cat alog of t he files on t he dat a set . This dat a set can be manipulat ed like
any ot her file, and it can even be opened and r ead like any ot her file. How-
ever , since it is a compr essed for m of t he or iginal files and it cont ains t he
dir ect or y ent r ies for t he files, it is not usable except by pr ogr ams t hat
know how t o int er pr et t his infor mat ion. TBackup is t he only supplied pr o-
gram t hat knows how t o int er pret t he infor mat ion and copy it back t o it s
or iginal, usable for m.
A backup dat a set is a single file nor mally named TBACKUP.VOL00001. This
single file cont ains all of t he files included in t his backup.
Fr equent ly a file or set of files being backed up fr om har d disk t o floppy or
t ape will be larger t han a single disket t e or t ape. In t hat sit uat ion t he
TBackup command will ask you t o mount anot her disket t e or t ape so t hat it
can cont inue t he backup of t he file or files. In t his sit uat ion each of t he dis-
ket t es or t apes used will cont ain a single file named TBACKUP.VOLnnnnn.
Unless t he DIFFERENTIAL opt ion is used, t he modified bit for each backed-
up file is r eset by t he TBackup pr ocess.
TBackup 627
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TBackup
Screens
TBackup, invoked wit h Mode 1 (BACKUP) displays t he following st at us
scr een while it is collect ing infor mat ion about t he files:
The file count s do not include libr ar ies or dir ect ories, only files.
Aft er TBackup has collect ed all of t he file names t hat it is going t o copy, it is
r eady t o st ar t t he fir st volume of t he dat a set :
Aft er mount ing t he t ape it is r ead and you ar e asked t o confir m t hat it is
t he pr oper t ape t o use:
628 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TBackup, invoked wit h Mode 2 (COMPARE), Mode 3 (RESTORE) or Mode 4
(VERIFY), displays scr eens similar t o t he following st at us scr een while it is
collect ing infor mat ion and comparing, ver ifying or r est or ing files:
The ECC count s r efer t o t he number of er r or s det ect ed using t he er r or -cor -
r ect ing checksum fields in t he dat a set .
Full Volume
Backups
A full volume backup of a dr ive can be made easily wit h t he TBackup com-
mand by using t he VOLUME opt ion and using a file-spec t hat specifies a
dr ive-code only.
>tbackup s tape (backup volume
Full volume backups should be cr eat ed on a fr equent and per iodic basis t o
assur e your self of having adequat e pr ot ect ion in t he case of disk or com-
put er failur e. Since a full volume backup cont ains a copy of ever y file, sub-
dir ect or y and account on a disk, it is t he only backup volume t hat needs t o
be accessed if you must r est or e a syst em.
Multivolume
Backups
You can backup your ent ire syst em in one oper at ion by per for ming a full
volume backup for all dr ives on t he syst em. For inst ance, a syst em wit h
four har d dr ives can be ar chived wit h t he command:
>tbackup s a b c tape (backup volume
An even mor e convenient met hod is t o allow TBackup t o backup all of t he
dr ives defined in t he default sear ch sequence. For inst ance:
>show search
SEARCH = SAB
>tbackup tape (backup volume
TBackup 629
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When t he file-spec is omit t ed, TBackup uses t he default sear ch sequence as
t he file-spec specificat ion. The above command is ident ical t o:
>tbackup s a b tape (backup volume
Should t he need every ar ise wher e you want t o r est or e t he files on t his
backup volume, use t he r est or e mode of t he TBackup command (Mode 3).
>tbackup tape (restore
When file-spec is omit t ed wit h t he r est or e mode, TBackup r est or es all of t he
files in t he backup volume t o t heir or iginal locat ions.
Differential
Backups
A differ ent ial backup is a backup t hat includes only t hose files t hat have
changed since t he last full-volume backup. For inst ance, if a disk cont ains
t hr ee files:
PROGRAM.COMMAND
DATA1.FILE
DATA2.FILE
A full-volume backup will cr eat e a backup dat a set t hat cont ains all of
t hese files. If DATA1.FILE is changed and a differ ent ial backup is per for med,
it will cr eat e a backup dat a set t hat cont ains only t hat file. The ot her files
ar e not included in t his differ ent ial backup because t hey have not changed
and t her e is a cur r ent copy of t hose files in t he last full-volume backup.
If DATA2.FILE is t hen changed and anot her differ ent ial backup is perfor med,
it will cr eat e a backup dadt a set t hat cont ains bot h t he DATA1.FILE and t he
DATA2.FILE because bot h of t hose files have been changed since t he last full-
volume backup was perfor med.
Should a disk failur e occur , t he syst em could be r est or ed by first r est or ing
t he full-volume backup and t hen t he last differ ent ial backup.
Full-volume Differential 1 Differential 2
PROGRAM.COMMAND
DATA1.FILE DATA1.FILE DATA1.FILE
630 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Incremental
Backups
An incr ement al backup is a backup t hat includes only t hose files t hat have
changed since t he last full-volume or incr ement al backup was cr eat ed. For
inst ance, in t he example used for t he different ial backup, a full-volume
backup is per for med and t hen DATA1.FILE is changed. When t he incr emen-
t al backup is per for med, it cr eat es a backup dat a set t hat cont ains only t he
DATA1.FILE. When DATA2.FILE is changed and anot her incr ement al backup is
per for med, it cr eat es a backup dat a set t hat cont ains only t he DATA2.FILE.
The DATA1.FILE is not included in t his backup because it has not changed
since t he last incr ement al backup was cr eat ed.
Should a disk failure occur , t he syst em could be r est ored by fir st r est or ing
t he full-volume backup followed by t he fir st incr ement al backup and t hen
t he second incr ement al backup.
Cautions The MULTIUSER opt ion t ells t he TBackup command t o not check whet her or
not ot her user s ar e logged on or are act ive. It does not pr event t hose ot her
user s fr om per for ming oper at ions t hat change t he dat abase being backed
up. If anot her user does change t he dat abase dur ing t he backup oper at ion,
t he int egrit y of t he backup dat a set is compr omised.
For inst ance, a disk volume being backed up includes a cust omer mast er
file wit h cur r ent balance fields and an invoice dat abase. While t he backup
dat a set is being cr eat ed, anot her user post s a t r ansact ion t o t he invoice
dat abase befor e it is included in t he backup but aft er t he cust omer mast er
file is copied. If t he backup dat a set is ever r est or ed (Mode 3) or compar ed
(Mode 2), t he invoice dat abase will not mat ch t he cur r ent balance fields in
t he cust omer mast er file.
Automated
Backups
To use t he TBackup command for aut omat ed backups, be sure t hat you
have mount ed t he pr oper backup volume befor e t he backup is init iat ed
and use t he following opt ions:
+ COMPARE, t o validat e t hat t he backup was accur at e.
+ ERROR, t o out put t he er r or messages t o a file t hat can be checked
aft er t he backup is complet e.
+ NOASK, t o pr event t he int er rupt ion of t he backup pr ocess.
+ SETNAME, t o put an ident ifying label in t he backup dat a set .
Use t he ACCOUNT, DIFFERENTIAL, FULL, INCREMENTAL, SUBDIR and
VOLUME as appr opr iat e.
Full-volume Incremental 1 Incremental 2
PROGRAM.COMMAND
TBackup 631
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Restrictions When cr eat ing a backup dat a set (Mode 1), t he dest inat ion media must be
pr efor mat t ed. If t he backup r equires mor e disks or t apes t han ant icipat ed,
you can use anot her session or t er minal t o for mat t he disk or t ape while
TBackup wait s for you t o confirm t hat t he pr oper volume is mount ed. To do
t his, t he ASK opt ion must be in effect and t he dest inat ion dr ive must be
publicly at t ached.
When cr eat ing a backup (Mode 1) wit h opt ion VOLUME in effect and t he
dr ives specified in file-spec ar e publicly at t ached, all ot her user s must be
logged off or t he MULTIUSER opt ion must be specified. See Caut ion not es
above r egar ding t he MULTIUSER opt ion.
The TBackup command r equir es a pr ivilege level of four . To use t he
VOLUME opt ion of t he Mode 1 (BACKUP) r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
See also TArchive, Backup, Compress, CopyFile, Eject, Expand, Restore
632 TBackup
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TBrowse 633
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TBrowse Command
The TBrowse command displays and allows you t o browse t he cont ent s of HTML-encoded
files.
Operation Mode 1Open t he HTML page defined by url and display t he hyper t ext
cont ent .
>tbrowse www.theos-software.com
>tbrowse www.mydomain.com/private/page44.htm
Mode 2Open t he local file and display t he hypert ext cont ent .
>tbrowse /html_home/webpages/default.htm
HTM Files 1. It does suppor t most HTML t ags including:
r !DOCTYPE
r HTML
r HEAD
r TITLE
r BODY (wit h BGCOLOR LINK VLINK and TEXT at t r ibut es)
r H1 - H6
r P, BR and HR
r FONT but only t he COLOR at t r ibut e is used
r B, I, EM and STRONG
r OL, UL and LI
r BLOCKQUOTE
r PRE and CODE
r TABLE wit h BORDER, COLSPAN and WIDTH at t r ibut es
r TH, TR and TD
r DL, DT and DD
r CENTER
r A HREF
r Comment s
2. If your for mat t ed document uses t ables or t he PRE t ag, t hen t he
widt h of t he page may be lar ger t han t he widt h of t he viewing win-
1 TBROWSE url
2 TBROWSE file
url Unifor m Resour ce Locat or (URL) for HTML-encoded file
634 TBrowse
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
dow. In t his case, a hor izont al scr oll bar will appear at t he bot t om
of t he window. Use your mouse t o scr oll left and r ight .
Restrictions 1. The file or URL being viewed must fit in memor y.
2. Ther e is no J avaScr ipt suppor t . You should r emember t o hide
SCRIPT infor mat ion wit h HTML comment s.
3. Ther e is no FORM suppor t (t his means t hat you cannot use INPUT,
SUBMIT, TEXTAREA, METHOD, MODE, SELECT, etc.)
4. Ther e is no Cascading St yle Sheet suppor t . This means t hat you
should include t he HTML comment s t o hide t he STYLE infor ma-
t ion.
5. Ther e is no aut hor izat ion suppor t . This means t hat you cannot
access document s t hat r equir e a logon and passwor d.
6. It does not r ecognize r et ur n st at us code 302 -- "Document has been
moved/r enamed". This is fr equent ly used t o deliver t he cor r ect
URL back t o t he br owser when t he URL you r equest ed is a dir ec-
t or y name. For example, if you code an anchor hr ef as "ht t p://
www.t heos-soft war e.com", t he THEOS ser ver would r et ur n a 302
URL as "ht t p://www.t heos-soft war e.com/default .ht m".
7. Fr ames ar e not suppor t ed and will cause a t r ap.
8. Since it is t ext only, gr aphic images cannot be displayed. You
should code ALT wit h images t hat ar e also hyper link anchor s.
9. The only way t o execut e your CGI applicat ions is t o code t hem in
SSI or in a hyperlink (A HREF). For example:
<A HREF="/cgi/myprog?">Click to show report</A>
See also Help, Viewer
Tee 635
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Tee Command Filter
The Tee command copies st andar d input t o st andar d out put and makes addit ional copies t o
a file.
Operation The file fr om t he st andar d input device is copied t o bot h t he st andar d
out put device and t o file. If mult iple files ar e specified, t hen mult iple
copies ar e made, one t o each file.
>filelist s | tee file.list:s | more
The above command line cr eat es a dir ect or y list ing of t he S drive. The list -
ing is piped t o t he Tee command, which makes a copy of it in t he file
FILE.LIST:S and also pipes it t o t he More command, which displays t he dir ec-
t or y list ing on t he console.
Options APPEND The out put is appended t o t he end of file. Wit hout t his opt ion,
t he out put replaces file.
Notes The file specified wit h t his command may have a complet e pat h specifica-
t ion, including t he account name. However , when file is on anot her
account , it is cr eat ed using default at t r ibut es which include shar ed r ead
and shar ed wr it e pr ot ect ion. Ther efore, t he file is cr eat ed but dat a cannot
be writ t en t o it fr om non-owning account s. Use t he CREATE environment
var iable t o set default at t r ibut es allowing shar ed file wr it e access. See
CREATE on page 102.
See also CopyFile
TEE file... ( option
opt ion APPEND
stdin st dout
file
tee
636 Tee
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Telnet 637
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Telnet Client
The Telnet command est ablishes a client /ser ver connect ion bet ween t his THEOS syst em and
a r emot e Telnet server syst em. The remot e syst em need not be THEOS-based.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he Telnet client and connect s t o server using it s st an-
dar d Telnet por t number (23). Refer t o Server Specification on page 642 for
infor mat ion about t he server par amet er specificat ion.
Mode 2Invokes t he Telnet client and connect s t o server using it s por t
number port. Do not use t his mode unless you know t hat t he remot e ser ver
uses a nonst andar d por t for Telnet access.
The por t value may be specified wit h a numer ic, such as 23, or a name.
The name must be t he name of a well-known ser vice, such as FTP, HTTP,
et c. Ser vice names are defined in t he file /THEOS/CONFIG/SERVICES.TXT:S.
Options ANSI Request s ANSI t er minal emulat ion by t he Telnet ser ver .
CLASSnn Emulat e a PcTer m wit h t he r equest ed class file. The class code
number is in t he r ange 180189 or 210219. The 180 ser ies
does not suppor t int ense backgr ound color s; t he 210 ser ies does
suppor t int ense backgr ound color s.
CTL Set s cont r ol mode for display of cont r ol char act er s r eceived
fr om t he ser ver . Cont r ol mode causes all cont r ol char act er s
r eceived t o be displayed visually. For inst ance, r eceipt of a CR
is displayed as ^M.
ECHO Displays char act er s t yped on your keyboar d. This is t he
default when Mode 2 is used wit h a port value ot her t han 23.
1 TELNET server ( options
2 TELNET server port ( options
localhost LOCALHOST
port numer ic por t number t o use for t his session
opt ions ANSI ECHO PCTERM TRACE
CLASSnnn FLOW PCTERM-aa VT100
CTL NOPROXY PROXY VT220
638 Telnet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
This opt ion t ells t he Telnet client t o echo all out bound charac-
t er s. This char act er-echo might be in addit ion t o t he remot e
ser ver or t he applicat ion r unning on t he ser ver . If char act er s
ar e displayed t wice, t hen t er minat e t his session and r econnect
wit hout t he ECHO opt ion.
FLOW Displays t he commands int erchanged bet ween t his Telnet client
and t he Telnet server. When used in conjunct ion wit h t he
TRACE opt ion, t he command int er change is also wr it t en t o t he
TELNET.TRACE file.
The flow-cont r ol commands may be useful for diagnost ic pur -
poses when t her e is some t ype of pr oblem negot iat ing a pr oper
connect ion wit h t he r emot e ser ver . These flow-cont r ol com-
mands will gener ally only occur dur ing t he st ar t -up phase of
t he connect ion:
>telnet some.host (flow
Connecting to 192.168.100.4 port 23
..recv: DO TermType
send: WILL TermType
recv: SB TermType SEND
send: SB TermType IS VT220
recv: SB TermType SEND
send: SB TermType IS VT220
recv: WILL Echo
send: DO Echo
recv: DO Window-Size
send: WILL Window-Size
send: SB NAWS 80 24
session text begins here...
For a descr ipt ion of t he meanings of any flow-cont r ol com-
mands displayed, r efer t o RFC 854.
NOPROXY If t he Telnet configur at ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/TELNET.CFG:S)
specifies a default pr oxy ser ver , t his opt ion ignor es t hat speci-
ficat ion and connect s t o t he r equest ed Telnet ser ver addr ess
dir ect ly.
Telnet 639
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PCTERM
PCTERM-aa Emulat e PcTer m t er minal display and specified language
keyboar d. When -aa is not specified, t he cur r ent default key-
boar d definit ion is used.
PROXY Indicat es t hat , whet her or not a proxy ser ver is specified in t he
Telnet configur at ion file, t he pr oxy ser ver specified her e is
used as t he pr oxy ser ver for t his Telnet session. The r equest ed
pr oxy server name or IP addr ess is specified immediat ely fol-
lowing t he PROXY opt ion keywor d:
>telnet myip.com (proxy 128.24.100.0
A default pr oxy server can be specified in t he Telnet configur a-
t ion file (/THEOS/CONFIG/TELNET.CFG:S) which is maint ained by
t he Setup Telnet Client scr een. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operat ing S ystem Installat ion and S etup Guide.) When speci-
fied t her e you do not need t o use t his PROXY opt ion...t he proxy
is always used unless t he NOPROXY opt ion is specified.
TRACE All char act er s displayed by t he Telnet client ar e also copied t o
t he file TELNET.TRACE. If FLOW is also specified, t hose char ac-
t ers ar e also copied t o t his file.
The TELNET.TRACE file is wr it t en t o t he syst em disk, r oot dir ec-
t ory, of t he curr ent account . This file will r eplace any file wit h
t he same name.
All char act er s copied t o t he t r ace file ar e copied in CTL mode,
even when t he display uses int er pr et ed cont rol codes.
VT100 Request s VT-100 t er minal emulat ion by t he r emot e ser ver .
(Class code 100 on THEOS Telnet Ser ver .)
-aa Language
-UK English (Unit ed Kingdom)
-FR Fr ench
-GR Gr eek
-IT It alian
-SP Spanish
-SG Spanish, Cat alan
-LA Spanish, Lat in Amer ican
-CF Canadian/Fr ench
-BE Belgium/Dut ch
640 Telnet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
VT220 Request s VT-220 t er minal emulat ion by t he remot e ser ver .
(Class code 220 on THEOS Telnet Ser ver .)
Notes Telnet is one of t hree client s used t o connect as a user t o anot her comput er
syst em on t he net wor k.
+ THEOS WorkStation Client - Used fr om a Windows syst em t o est ab-
lish a user t er minal session on a THEOS Login Ser ver syst em.
+ NetTerm - Used fr om one THEOS syst em t o est ablish a user t er mi-
nal session on anot her THEOS syst ems Login Ser ver .
+ Telnet - Used fr om a THEOS syst em t o est ablish a user t er minal
session on anot her syst ems Telnet Ser ver . The ot her syst em may
be a THEOS syst em (a Telnet Ser ver is included as part of t he
Login Server) or any ot her syst em wit h a Telnet ser ver , such as
pr ovided by most Int er net Ser vice Pr oviders (ISP). The ot her sys-
t em may be on t he local int ranet or on t he Int er net .
RFC 854. This Telnet client confor ms t o t he st andar ds pr oposed in RFC
854. That document can be found at many sit es on t he Int er net , including:
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/
When connect ed t o t he r emot e ser ver , you may execut e any pr ogr ams on
t hat ser ver t hat you have access t o.
The THEOS Telnet ser ver suppor t s addit ional t er minal emulat ions not
used by t his Telnet client . When connect ing t o a THEOS ser ver fr om
anot her oper at ing syst ems Telnet client , you may be able t o use: ANSIC,
ANSICOLOR, SCOANSI, SCO-ANSI, VT320, DEC-VT220, VT220AM,
DEC-VT100, WYSE-50, WYSE50, WYSE-60, WYSE60, PCTERM,
PCTERM-US, PCTERM-UK and PCTERM-SP. Whet her or not any of
t hese are act ually used will depend upon t he Telnet client .
Connecting to a THEOS Telnet Server
Telnet can connect t o a THEOS Login Ser ver only if t he THEOS syst em has
it s Login Ser ver st ar t ed. When connect ed t o a THEOS Telnet Ser ver , you
ar e emulat ing a dumb t erminal connect ed t o t he THEOS syst em. You
will not be able t o use your local pr int er as a slave pr int er and you cannot
t r ansfer files back and for t h wit h t he Net command.
Localhost: For t est ing pur poses, you can connect t o your own syst ems
Telnet ser ver by using t he server name of localhost. This is a r eser ved host
name t hat always r efer s t o t he client syst em.
Telnet 641
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Console Attachment: When you fir st connect t o t he THEOS Telnet Server
your console at t achment will have a line and page size t hat is equal t o your
local syst ems line and page size. Aft er you logon you may change t he con-
sole at t achment t o anot her size suppor t ed by your local syst em. If you
change your console scr een size dur ing t he Telnet session, when you t er mi-
nat e t he session your console will be r eset t o it s or iginal widt h and dept h.
Break Signal: When using VT220 emulat ion, t o t r ansmit a br eak signal t o
t he THEOS Telnet Ser ver , use t he (`) key (single back quot e). For inst ance,
t o t ell t he THEOS Telnet Ser ver t o abort t he pr ogr am t hat it is r unning,
pr ess (`),(Q). To t ype a back quot e t hat is not int er pr et ed as a br eak signal,
pr ess (`),(`).
Non-VT220 emulat ions can use t he (Break) key it self t o t ransmit a br eak sig-
nal.
Terminating Session: Execut ing t he LOGOFF command on t he THEOS
Telnet Ser ver will log off of t he account but it will not t er minat e t he Telnet
session. Use t he EXIT command t o logoff and disconnect fr om t he server.
Terminating Telnet Sessions
A Telnet session is t er minat ed and t he Telnet program is exit ed when you
eit her fail t o make a connect ion t o t he Telnet Ser ver or , aft er making t he
connect ion, you use t he ser ver s log off command. The name of t his com-
mand is dependent upon t he server but will gener ally be LOGOUT, BYE,
QUIT or somet hing similar . Of cour se, when t he ser ver is a THEOS Telnet
Ser ver , use t he EXIT command.
Dur ing t he Telnet session, char act er s ar e t r ansmit t ed immediat ely.
642 Telnet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The specificat ion of t he server, for Mode 1 or Mode 2, may be accomplished
by specifying:
>telnet 207.21.75.100
file can be maint ained by you wit h Setup Net Name Services.
>telnet my-company
+ Or t he domain name as defined by t he DNS ser ver s specified in
Setup Net Name Services.
>telnet myisp.com
For inst ance, your company might be r egist er ed wit h Int er nic (ht t p://
www.int er nic.net /index.ht ml) wit h a domain name of my-company.com,
wit h an IP addr ess of 128.100.2.1. If you have specified a host name of
HEADQUARTERS in t he host names dat abase wit h t hat IP addr ess, you
can specify your companys Telnet sit e wit h any of t he following server
specificat ions:
+ 128.100.2.1
+ headquar t ers
+ my-company.com
Restrictions When t he r emot e server is THEOS-based, and t he Allow/Deny capabilit y
is enabled, your IP addr ess must pass t hose t est s. Ot her ser ver s may have
similar access r est r ict ions implement ed.
Also, when t he remot e ser ver is a THEOS Login Ser ver , it may have
enabled it s Remot e User Secur it y, in which case you will be requir ed t o
ent er your net wor k user name and passwor d as defined in t he ser ver s
Setup Net Network User Security dat abase. (See THEOS Corona Version 5
Operating S yst em Installation and S etup Guide.)
See also Net, NetTerm, Setup, THEOS WorkStation Client
Telnet 643
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Example This fir st example shows a successful connect ion t o an ISP.
>telnet ispname.com
Telnet Open >ISPNAME.COM
Connecting...
Possible introductory information messages from the remote Telnet server
login: cpw
Password:
Other information messages from the remote Telnet server, such as:
For a menu driven interface type menu from the prompt
TERM was vt100
Setting default terminal size to 80x24.
pacifier:~% dir -l
total 4
drwx------ 2 cpw user 512 Aug 13 12:11 mail
drwxr-xr-x 2 cpw user 512 Aug 22 08:07 public_htm
pacifier:~%exit
logout
In t his second example, an at t empt is made t o connect t o t he THEOS
Int er net sit e. The ser ver name t heos is defined in t he local host -names
dat abase so t he ser ver name is t r anslat ed t o t he IP address defined t her e.
However , t his sit e does not suppor t Telnet connect ions and t he connect ion
r equest is r efused.
>telnet theos
Telnet Open >207.21.75.100
Connecting...
425 Unable to connect with remote host
644 Telnet
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
In t his final example, a connect ion is made t o t he home office syst em over
t he Int er net . The name is defined in your host names dat abase. This
syst em is THEOS-based and has remot e securit y enabled. (The scr een is
clear ed befor e t he Net wor k login window is displayed and aft er you have
successfully ent er ed your user name and passwor d.)
>telnet home-office
Telnet Open >128.100.2.0
Connecting...
HOMEOFFICE>show who
ACCOUNT = REMOTE
USERNUM = 25
PORT = 36
PRIVLEV = 3
LOGON = 11:10:20 11/14/97
HOMEOFFICE>
User name: [myname ]
Password: [******** ]
Terminal 645
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Terminal Command EXEC
The Terminal command is an EXEC language pr ogr am t hat pr ovides convenient , command-
line access t o t he THEO_COM commands t er minal emulat ion capabilit y.
Operation This EXEC pr ogr am mer ely invokes t he THEO_COM command descr ibed
descr ibed on page 649. It is pr ovided for user s upgr ading t o THEOS
Cor ona fr om a pr ior ver sion of THEOS t hat might have not included
THEO+COM.
For oper at ion and usage of t his TERMINAL EXEC, refer t o t he THEO_COM
command or t o t he THEO+COM Inst allation and Users Guide.
TERMINAL ( options
opt ions ALF HALF SEND file WYSE50
ANSI HANGUP THEOS WYSE60
ASCII MASTER TRACE XMODEM
COMnn NOEOT TRACEFILE file XMODEM-CRC
CTL NOLOGO TVI XMODEM-1K
DIAL number PCTERM TYPE YMODEM
EOF= RECEIVE file VT100
EOT REDIAL VT220
FILES SCRIPT file VT220-8
646 Terminal
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TFTP 647
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TFTP Command
The TFTP command is a Tr ivial File Tr ansfer Prot ocol client t hat pr ovides file t ransfer capa-
bilit ies over a net wor k bet ween t his client and any TFTP ser ver available on t he net wor k.
Operation Mode 1Receive a file fr om a TFTP ser ver . This client connect s t o t he
TFTP ser ver locat ed at host and r eceives t he file named remote-filename
fr om t hat ser ver and saves it on t his syst em wit h t he name filename. If
remote-filename is not specified t hen filename is used for r equest ing t he
r emot e file fr om t he host .
Mode 2Send a file t o a TFTP ser ver . This client connect s t o t he TFTP
ser ver locat ed at host and sends t he file named filename fr om t his syst em
t o t he remot e host . The ser ver is request ed t o r eceive t he file and save it
wit h t he name remote-filename. If remot e-filename is not specified t hen
filename is used by t he server when it saves t he file.
Notes TFTP is a simple pr ot ocol t o t r ansfer files using t he Int er net User Dat a-
gr am pr ot ocol (UDP). Dat a is sent in fixed-lengt h blocks of 512 byt es. Each
dat a packet must be acknowledged by t he r ecipient before t he next packet
is sent . Most er r ors will cause t er minat ion of t he t r ansfer.
Defaults The default por t number used by t his client is 69. This is a well-known
por t for TFTP client s and ser ver s. You should only specify a differ ent por t
if you know t hat t he ser ver t hat you ar e at t empt ing t o connect t o uses a
differ ent por t number .
Restrictions Only sequent ial files may be sent or r eceived wit h t his client .
See also FTP, NetTerm, Receive, Send
Examples >tftp send laptop my.file "recipient-filename.txt"
>tftp receive 201.228.56.13:70 newtext.fil remote.name
1 TFTP RECEIVE host filename remote-filename
2 TFTP SEND host filename remot e-filename
host server
server:port
filename name of file on local client syst em cont aining FTP scr ipt
remote-filename name of file on local client syst em cont aining FTP scr ipt
server name or id of TFTP net wor k server (may also be localhost )
port por t number on ser ver for TFTP communicat ion (default is 69)
648 TFTP
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
THEO+COM 649
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
THEO+COM Command
THEO+COM is a communicat ions pr ogr am t hat allows your comput er t o communicat e wit h
anot her comput er by sending and r eceiving files and emulat ing a t erminal t o pr ovide access
t o t he ot her syst em as a console.
Operation Invokes THEO+COM in t er minal emulat ion mode. The r emot e syst em must
be connect ed t o t he fir st communicat ions por t on your syst em.
Use command-line opt ions or t he built -in menu t o per for m any of t he func-
t ions suppor t ed by THEO+COM or t o change t he configur at ion. The built -in
menu is invoked by pr essing (Break),(M).
Refer t o t he THEO+COM Inst allation and Users Guide for a complet e
descr ipt ion of t he oper at ion and usage of t his command.
Options ALF Tells THEO+COM t o add a line-feed at t he end of ever y line
t r ansmit t ed. When t his opt ion is omit t ed, CR is used as t he
default End-of-Line char act er .
ANSI Emulat es an ANSI compat ible t er minal.
ASCII Uses t he ASCII pr ot ocol t o send and r eceive files fr om t he
r emot e comput er syst em.
C7 Synonym t o t he TVI opt ion.
C55 Synonym t o t he WYSE50 opt ion.
C58 Synonym t o t he WYSE60 opt ion.
THEO+COM ( opt ions
opt ions ALF HALF SEND file WYSE50
ANSI HANGUP THEOS WYSE60
ASCII MASTER TRACE XMODEM
COMnn NOEOT TRACEFILE file XMODEM-CRC
CTL NOLOGO TVI XMODEM-1K
DIAL number PCTERM TYPE YMODEM
EOF= RECEIVE file VT100
EOT REDIAL VT220
FILES SCRIPT file VT220-8
Command synonyms: COM, TERMINAL
650 THEO+COM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
C90-C99 Synonym t o t he PCTERM opt ion.
C100 Synonym t o t he VT100 opt ion.
C220 Synonym t o t he VT220 opt ion.
COMnn The cur r ent ly at t ached COMnn is used for t he communicat ions
por t . When t his opt ion is not specified, t he fir st at t ached COM
device is used. Refer t o t he Attach and t he Sysgen for infor ma-
t ion about at t aching COM devices.
CTL Set s cont r ol mode on. Wit h cont r ol mode on ever y cont r ol char -
act er r eceived in t er minal emulat ion mode is displayed as t wo
char act er s. For inst ance, Cont r ol-I is displayed as Î.
DIAL number Using t he modem connect ed t o t he communicat ions por t ,
dials number and wait s for a connect ion. Aft er t he connect ion
is est ablished, THEO+COM is exit ed, leaving t he t elephone con-
nect ion open.
DIAL must be t he last opt ion specified because char act er s fol-
lowing t he wor d DIAL ar e t reat ed as par t of t he number t o dial.
Refer t o Dial on page 163 for infor mat ion about number.
EOF= Set s t he char act er used t o mark t he end of a file t ransmit t ed
wit h t he ASCII pr ot ocol.
EOT Used wit h t he SEND file opt ion t o indicat e t hat t he end-of-
t r ansmission char act er is sent aft er all of t he files ar e t r ans-
mit t ed. This is a default opt ion.
FILES Can be used wit h t he THEOS pr ot ocol and t he SEND file opt ion.
It indicat es t hat t he file cont ains a list of files t o be sent . This
file is t ypically cr eat ed by t he FileList wit h it s opt ion FILES.
HALF Uses half-duplex communicat ions. Half-duplex is also called
Echoplex because it causes every char act er t r ansmit t ed t o
t he r emot e syst em t o be aut omat ically echoed on your syst em.
When t his opt ion is omit t ed, full-duplex communicat ions is
uses.
HANGUP Using t he modem connect ed t o t he communicat ions por t , issue
t he hang-up command.
THEO+COM 651
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
MASTER Use mast er -mode duplex communicat ions in t erminal emula-
t ion. Each charact er t yped is displayed on your scr een. Each
char act er r eceived fr om t he r emot e syst em is echoed back t o
t hat syst em.
NOEOT Can be used wit h t he THEOS pr ot ocol and t he SEND file opt ion.
It indicat es t hat no end-of-t r ansmission char act er is sent aft er
t he last file is t r ansmit t ed.
NOLOGO Suppr ess t he THEO+COM logo and copyright scr een.
NOTYPE Suppr ess t he display of dialing messages and r esponses.
PCTERM Emulat e a PC Ter m or scan-code t ype keyboar d and monit or .
C90-C99 and C180-C189 may be used as synonyms t o t his
opt ion. C90-C99 select s a monochr ome PC Ter m t er minal emu-
lat ion; C180-C189 select s a color PC Ter m t erminal emulat ion.
RECEIVE file Receive file fr om t he communicat ions por t . The t r ansmis-
sion pr ot ocol is specified wit h ot her opt ions or it uses t he
default THEOS prot ocol.
REDIAL Using t he modem connect ed t o t he communicat ions por t , t he
last number dialed is r edialed. Aft er a connect ion is est ab-
lished, THEO+COM exit s.
SCRIPT file Execut e t he Modem Scr ipt Language file file. Refer t o t he
THEO+COM Installat ion and Users Guide for a descr ipt ion of
t he Modem Scr ipt Language.
SEND file Send file on t he communicat ions por t . The t r ansmission pr ot o-
col is specified wit h ot her opt ions or it uses t he default THEOS
pr ot ocol. file may cont ain wild car ds.
THEOS Use t he THEOS pr ot ocol t o send and r eceive files fr om t he
r emot e comput er syst em.
TRACE Enables file t r ansfer t r acing. A window is opened in t he upper
r ight cor ner of t he display, showing t he pr ot ocol act ivit y during
a t r ansfer .
TRACEFILE file Similar t o t he TRACE opt ion, except t he pr ot ocol act ivit y
is out put t o file.
TVI Emulat e a TeleVideo model 910 or model 925+ compat ible t er -
minal. C7 may be used as a synonym t o t his opt ion.
TYPE Display dialing and r edialing messages and r esponses. This is
a default opt ion.
652 THEO+COM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
VT100 Emulat e a DEC VT100 compat ible t erminal. C100 may be used
as a synonym t o t his opt ion.
VT220 Emulat e a DEC VT220 compat ible t er minal in 7-bit mode.
C220 may be used as a synonym t o t his opt ion.
VT220-8 Emulat e a DEC VT220 compat ible t er minal in 8-bit mode.
WYSE50 Emulat e a Wyse model 50 compat ible t er minal. C55 may be
used as a synonym t o t his opt ion.
WYSE60 Emulat e a Wyse model 60 compat ible t er minal. C58 may be
used as a synonym t o t his opt ion.
XMODEM Use t he XMODEM checksum, 256-byt e pr ot ocol t o send and
r eceive files fr om t he r emot e comput er syst em.
XMODEM-CRC Use t he XMODEM CRC-16, 256-byt e prot ocol t o send and
XMODEM-1K Use t he XMODEM-1K CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol t o send
and r eceive files fr om t he r emot e comput er syst em.
YMODEM Use t he YMODEM, CRC-16, 1024-byt e pr ot ocol t o send and
Notes The command name COM is a synonym t o t he THEO+COM command. It is
not a separ at e pr ogr am but only an ent r y in t he SYSTEM.THEOS32.SYNONYM
file. If st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on page 13 and
STDSYN on page 110), t his synonym name may not be allowed.
Defaults EOT, THEOS, TYPE
Restrictions A communicat ions por t must be at t ached.
TheoMail 653
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TheoMail Client
The TheoMail command is t he pr incipal component of THEO+Mail. It is a client applicat ion
pr ogr am t hat allows you t o cr eat e and send e-mail messages t o ot her people and t o r eceive,
r ead and manage messages sent t o you.
.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he TheoMail client pr ogr am using t he default mailbox
for t he account t hat you ar e cur rent ly logged on t o. For infor mat ion about
mailboxes and default mailboxes, r efer t o t he THEO+Mail Users Guide
and Reference manual.
Mode 2Invokes t he TheoMail client pr ogr am using t he specified mailbox.
Options CHECK This opt ion invokes TheoMail in non-int er act ive mode. It st ar t s
TheoMail wit h t he mailbox select ed accor ding t o t he command
line ent er ed but it ignor es t he set t ings for Send on Check and
Check for New Mail frequency. Inst ead, it checks each of t he
POP3 ser ver s specified in t he configurat ion and r et r ieves any
mail wait ing on t hose ser ver s. Aft er r eceiving t he mail and
possibly filt er ing it , TheoMail exit s.
COMPACT This opt ion invokes TheoMail in non-int er act ive mode and per -
for ms a compact or r eor ganizat ion of t he mailbox dat abase.
The dat abase is not checked for int egr it y fir st .
This opt ion should be used if t he dat abase is corr upt ed and you
cannot st ar t TheoMail nor mally because of t he cor rupt ion. By
compact ing and r eor ganizing t he dat abase you should be able
t o invoke TheoMail normally aft er war d.
NOPROXY This opt ion invokes TheoMail and t ells it t o not use any Proxy
Server set t ing fr om t he SETUP SMTP configur at ion, even if one
is specified t her e. You should not use t his opt ion unless you
1 THEOMAIL ( option
2 THEOMAIL mailbox ( option
mailbox name of t he mailbox t o check
option CHECK
COMPACT
NOPROXY
SEND
Command synonym: EMAIL
654 TheoMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
have an alt ernat e connect ion t o your SMTP and POP3 ser ver s
available.
SEND Similar t o t he CHECK opt ion, t his invokes TheoMail in non-
int er act ive mode. However , inst ead of checking for new mail it
sends any mail t hat has been queued and t hen exit s.
Notes If t he mailbox has a passwor d defined, you must ent er t he password for
t he mailbox befor e it can be opened.
Unless t he COMPACT opt ion is used, when you st ar t TheoMail t he mailbox
dat abase is checked for int egr it y. If t he dat abase is lar ge (t ens or hundr eds
of megabyt es), t his may t ake some t ime. Dur ing t his t ime t he copyright
message is displayed which let s you know t hat has st ar t ed.
If t he dat abase appear s cor r upt or has a lot of unused space in it , you ar e
war ned about t he sit uat ion and, aft er acknowledging t he war ning, t he
dat abase is r ebuilt using t he same funct ion as t he Tools Menu, Compact
menu it em. If t his happens oft en it is an indicat ion t hat somet hing ser ious
is wr ong and you should cont act your syst em administ r at or .
Aft er TheoMail checks t he int egrit y of t he dat abase it checks t he Sent and
Deleted folder s t o see if t her e ar e any messages t hat should be r emoved.
This is done dur ing TheoMail exit and at st art up t ime just in case TheoMail
was exit ed abnor mally t he last t ime it was used.
TheoMail fir st checks t he Sent Expiration set t ing. If it is non-zer o t he mes-
sages in t he Sent folder ar e examined t o see if t hey qualify for delet ion.
Any messages in t hat folder t hat ar e older t han t he Sent Expiration value
ar e moved t o t he Deleted folder .
Next , t he Empty Deleted set t ing is checked. If it is enabled any messages in
t he Deleted folder ar e r emoved by er asing t hem. If t he Empty Deleted it em is
not enabled, but t he Deleted Expiration specifies a non-zer o age, messages in
t he Deleted folder are r emoved if t hey ar e older t han t he number of days
specified in t hat field.
Unless t he CHECK or SEND opt ions ar e specified, if t he Check for New Mail
it em in t he Tools Menu, Options scr een (see t he THEO+Mail Users Guide
and Reference manual) specifies a t ime fr equency for aut omat ic mail
checking, mail is checked as soon as TheoMail st ar t s.
Invoking TheoMail with an EXEC
When t he TheoMail client is invoked fr om an EXEC pr ogr am you may use
t he &Stack or &BegStack st at ement s t o init iat e act ions by t he client pr o-
gram wit hout oper at or input . When TheoMail is invoked wit h an EXEC it
TheoMail 655
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
may oper at e differ ent ly depending upon whet her t her e is dat a on t he
EXEC st ack and what t hat dat a is.
If t he fir st char act er on t he EXEC st ack is a Cont r ol-Q char act er , TheoMail
will per for m it s aut omat ic check for incoming mail and t hen exit . This is
ident ical t o t he CHECK command-line opt ion. This feat ur e is useful if all
you want t o do is t o get any mail and not st ay in t he TheoMail environment .
For inst ance:
&Stack Q\
TheoMail mymail
EmailChk mymail
&If &RetCode > 0
EmailGet mymail
&IfEnd
In t he above example, t he Q in t he fir st line is a Cont r ol-Q. This can be
ent er ed wit h WindoWriter by using t he Tools menu, Control Characters font.
Ent er t he let t er Q and t hen use Tools menu, Normal Font t o r et ur n t o
nor mal t ext input . The above EXEC invokes TheoMail using t he mymail
mailbox and get s any incoming mail. It t hen used EmailChk t o see if t her e is
any new mail and, if so, uses t he EmailGet t o ext r act t hat mail t o a st an-
dar d t ext file.
If t here is dat a on t he EXEC st ack but t he fir st char act er is not a Cont r ol-
Q, TheoMail will not t r y t o per for m any aut omat ic check for incoming mail
but will inst ead accept t hose st acked char act ers as nor mal input . For
inst ance:
&BegStack
[CNTheos Support <support@theos-software.com>
Problem Report
&End
TheoMail mymail
In t his example, t he [ char act er in t he fir st line is a Cont r ol-[ or t he Esc
char act er . This EXEC invokes TheoMail and st art s t he composit ion of a
new message t o THEOS Technical Suppor t . The cur sor will be posit ioned
t o t he body of t he new message, r eady for t he oper at or t o ent er t he t ext .
Defaults The default mailbox used when TheoMail is invoked wit hout specifying a
mailbox is det ermined by t he cur rent account name t hat you ar e logged on
t o. This r elat ionship bet ween account names and default mailboxes is
defined in Set up Email, which is descr ibed in THEOS Cor ona Version 5
Operating S ystem Inst allation and S et up Guide.
Restrictions Only one user may use a mailbox at any one t ime.
See also EmailChk, EmailDel, EmailGet, EmailPut, SendMail
656 TheoMail
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TIM 657
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TIM Command
The TIM command invokes t he THEOS Inst ant Messenger and allows you t o communicat e
wit h ot her user s t hat ar e in your cont act list .
Operation Invokes t he THEOS Inst ant Messenger using eit her t he default passport
account (Mode 1) or t he r equest ed account .
Mode 1This mode st ar t s in one of t wo ways, depending upon whet her or
not t he TIM_PROTO and TIM_AUTOLOGIN environment variables ar e
defined. If t hese var iables ar e defined t hen TIM signs ont o t he default
account . Ot her wise, it displays t he Sign-In Form allowing you t o specify t he
pr ot ocol, account and opt ions desir ed for t his session.
Mode 2Invoke TIM and display t he sign-in for m wit h passpor t and pass-
wor d filled in:
>tim "MyName@MyHost.com" "paSsWoRd"
1 TIM
2 TIM passport password
3 TIM passport
passport Passpor t E-mail account and domain
password Passwor d t o t he passpor t account
658 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Click on Ok t o sign in. Refer t o User Interface for descr ipt ions of t he var i-
ous fields.
Mode 3Similar t o Mode 2 except t he passwor d is not t yped in t he com-
mand line and t her efor e is never displayed in clear t ext .
Notes The TIM command uses a cent ral configur at ion file t o maint ain t he infor -
mat ion about t he passpor t account t o use and t he opt ions desir ed for t hat
account . You may have mult iple account s defined and t here may be mult i-
ple inst ances of TIM in use on one syst em at any one t ime.
During t he normal oper at ion of TIM, it may need t o open sever al windows.
Since t he soft war e does not know how you want your scr een arr anged,
each of t hese windows is init ially posit ioned in t he cent er of your scr een.
You should drag t he windows t o ot her posit ions so t hat you can see each of
t he windows on your deskt op. The posit ion t hat you dr ag t hem t o will be
r emember ed by TIM dur ing t his session.
When t he TIM command is exit ed you are signed off of t he passpor t
account .
Defaults Ther e ar e t wo envir onment var iables t hat can be used by TIM. If t hese
var iables ar e defined and have values t hen t hose values ar e used as t he
default s. The var iables ar e:
TIM_AUTOLOGIN Specifies t he default passpor t account name. Nor mally,
t his name is a complet e E-mail addr ess such as
MyName@MyDomain.com.
TIM_PROTO Specifies t he default prot ocol t o be used by TIM. Set t his var i-
able t o MSN, TIMP or YAHOO.
For ease of use, t hese var iables can be defined in t he Account pr ofile
Befor e defining t hese var iables r efer t o First-time Usage on t he next page.
Restrictions This pr ogr am r equir es an int er net connect ion. You must also have an
account on one of t he suppor t ed pr ot ocol server s.
See also FileManager, FTP, Mailbox, Msg, Receive, Send, TFTP, TheoMail
TIM 659
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
First-time
Usage
Befor e using THEOS Inst ant Messenger for t he fir st t ime you must have a
passpor t account . Specifically, in order t o use t he MSN ver sion 7 pr ot ocol
you must have a passpor t account wit h t he .NET ser vice provided by
Micr osoft . If you do not have a passpor t account or if you want t o have an
addit ional account , use your web br owser and connect t o
http://www.passport.com and click on t he Sign up for your fr ee .NET
Passpor t t oday link.
When signing up for t he new passpor t account you ar e asked for an E-mail
addr ess and a password. The passwor d it is asking for is t he passwor d t hat
you want t o use for t he passpor t account and it should not be t he same as
your E-mail account passwor d. The E-mail addr ess will be used as your
account name and, alt hough you ar e not nor mally sending or receiving E-
mail wit h TIM, t he addr ess must be a valid addr ess at t he t ime t hat you
sign up for t he passpor t account . Aft er signing up for t he account t he pass-
por t syst em will send an E-mail message t o t he account asking t he owner
of t he account t o confir m t hat t hey (you) want ed t his passpor t account .
Aft er you have acquir ed a passpor t account you can define t he environ-
ment var iables TIM_PROTO and TIM_AUTOLOGIN.
>set tim_proto=MSN
>set tim_autologin=me@mydomain.com
Once t his has been done and you invoke TIM it asks you t o supply t he pass-
wor d. Aft er t hat init ial sign-in TIM will r emember t he password for t hat
account and you can invoke TIM and it will sign int o t hat account aut omat -
ically.
660 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
User Interface When TIM is invoked wit hout t he envir onment var iables TIM_PROTO and
TIM_AUTOLOGIN defined or when t his default account is bypassed, t he TIM
sign-in for m is displayed allowing you t o specify t he pr ot ocol, account and
passwor d for t hat account .
Sign-In Form
Protocol Select t he pr ot ocol fr om t he pr ot ocols suppor t ed by TIM:
TIMP This is t he nat ive TIM pr ot ocol which is used by t he
TIM ser ver .
MSN V7 The Micr osoft messenger pr ot ocol, ver sion 7.
Yahoo The Yahoo inst ant messenger pr ot ocol.
The pr ot ocol select ed t ells TIM wher e t o find t he ser ver for
passport names and, at t he ser ver , it can find your list of con-
t act names, etc.
Options Select t his but t on t o set or change t he opt ions associat ed wit h
t his passpor t name. This opt ion scr een is descr ibed on page
661. You cannot change t he opt ions unt il t her e is a Passport
and a Password defined.
Passport Ent er t he passpor t account name. For t he MSN V7 prot ocol,
t his is an E-mail account name and domain name. For
inst ance, mghandi@leaders.com.
TIM 661
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Password Ent er t he passwor d for t he passpor t account . This is a case-
sensit ive field and t he passwor d is not displayed as you t ype it .
Be car eful t o ent er it cor rect ly.
When you select t he Ok but t on or t he Options but t on for an account t hat
has not been saved befor e, you will be asked if you want t o add it t o t he
dat abase. If you have ent er ed t he name and passwor d cor r ect ly r espond
wit h a Yes. Ot herwise, r espond wit h a No and you can make t he neces-
sar y changes.
The above for m is nor mally only displayed when you ar e signing in t o a
passpor t name t hat you have not used befor e. However , you may display
t his scr een (t o get t o t he Options but t on) by signing on t o a passpor t and
t hen changing your Status t o Offline. This will cause t he above for m t o
display and you can eit her sign on t o anot her passpor t , cr eat e a new sign
on or change t he opt ions of an exist ing passport .
TIM Options
The opt ions for m is used t o configur e t he var ious opt ions t hat can be spe-
cific t o an account .
Password This field is used when you need t o change t he passwor d t hat
you have saved for t his account . Making a change in t his field
does not change t he passwor d t hat has been recor ded at t he
inst ant messenging pr ot ocol ser ver for your account . It only
changes t he pr ofile t hat is saved and used by TIM.
662 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Font Select ing t his but t on invokes t he Fonts for m descr ibed below.
Use EmotIcons When enabled you can send and receive emot icons dur ing
chat conver sat ions.
Change to TIM session automatically This feat ur e cont r ols whet her or not
t he TIM session will wake up and make it self t he act ive ses-
sion when a message is r eceived.
Enable sound Enables t he sounds capabilit y of TIM.
Show a message when someone logs in If enabled, when one of your regis-
t er ed cont act s signs on a message will be displayed on t he
act ive session of t his console.
Download path The pat h specified in t his field is used when you r eceive a
file. You can eit her t ype in t he pat h t hat you want t o use or use
t he Browse but t on t o sear ch for t he desir ed locat ion.
Show away after xx minutes When your console is idle for a period of t ime,
TIM will change your st at us t o Appear away. The lengt h of
t hat t ime is specified her e.
Fonts
The font select ion for m is used t o defined t he font used t o display t he mes-
sage t ext in t he Message history and Message text boxes when chat t ing wit h
a cont act .
Font This ar ea list s t he font s t hat ar e available on t his syst em and
highlight s t he font t hat is cur r ent ly defined as t he display font .
You can move t his highlight bar t o any of t he available font s.
Changing t he font is immediat ely r eflect ed in t he Sample ar ea.
TIM 663
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Style The st yle list box shows t he var ious font st yles t hat ar e avail-
able wit h t he Font t hat is cur r ent ly select ed and it highlight s
t he st yle t hat is cur r ent ly select ed.
Changing t he st yle is immediat ely r eflect ed in t he Sample ar ea.
Size This list box shows t he font sizes t hat ar e suppor t ed by TIM
and highlight s t he size t hat is cur r ent ly select ed. The sizes
r ange fr om 8 pt s t o 72 pt s. A point is 1/72 of an inch and is a
st andar d unit of measur ement in t ypogr aphy.
Effects Strikeout Checking t his box will display t he t ext wit h a line
t hr ough t he char act er s:
The quick brown fox jumped...
Underline Checking t his box under lines t he t ext :
The quick brown fox jumped...
Color This list box shows t he color s t hat ar e suppor t ed by
TIM and shows t he cur rent ly select ed color .
Changing t he effect s is immediat ely r eflect ed in t he Sample
ar ea.
Sample This ar ea displays a sample using t he select ed Font, Style, Size
and Effects.
Downloads
The Download pat h in t he TIM Options form allows you t o specify t he loca-
t ion wher e all r eceived files ar e t o be saved. You may eit her t ype in t he
pat h or use t he Browse but t on t o sear ch for an exist ing dir ect or y t o use.
The pat h specified her e is used when you receive a file fr om a cont act
dur ing a chat session (see XFile on page 668).
664 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The default locat ion for downloads is /PROGRAMS/TIM/DOWNLOAD:S.
Connection Options
The connect ion opt ions r efer s cont r ols whet her or not a pr oxy ser ver is
used t o est ablish t he connect ion bet ween t his syst em and t he inst ant mes-
saging ser ver .
Use proxy This field must be checked t o enable t he ot her fields on t his
for m and t o enable t he usage of a pr oxy ser ver .
Type Use t he drop-down list t o select t he t ype of pr oxy ser ver .
Server Ent er t he IP addr ess of t he pr oxy ser ver t hat you ar e using.
TIM 665
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Port The default por t number is set when t he Type of pr oxy is
select ed. You may over r ide t hat default and set t he por t t o
anot her value if you wish.
Username This field is r equir ed when using a Type of SOCKS Ver sion 5.
Password This field is r equir ed when using a Type of SOCKS Ver sion 5.
666 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Using TIM
Aft er you have signed on t o your passpor t account TIM displays t he cont act
list for m:
Contact list The cont act list is t he large box in t his for m. It list s each of t he
user s t hat have been defined as your cont act s and it shows
each of t he nick names or scr een names t hat t he cont act s
have defined, along wit h t heir cur rent st at us. When any of
t hese cont act s change t heir st at us, you will see t his list
updat ed wit hin seconds.
Cont act s ar e added t o an account in one of t wo ways. You
eit her add t hem using t he Add but t on on t his for m or a r emot e
user r equest s t hat you be added t o t heir cont act list and you
agr ee. The act ual list of cont act s is maint ained by and on t he
prot ocol ser ver .
Nick name This is your scr een name or nick name. It is t he name t hat
ot her user s on your Contact list will see you as.
For inst ance, in t he above display, Susan is t he nick name
t hat she has chosen. Her act ual account name might be
santon362435@aol.com. In t he above display, ot her user s see
t he cur r ent user as Chr is @home.
TIM 667
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Status This field defines your st at us as ot her s see you.
The st at us field is only an indicat or t o ot her s of what you want
t hem t o see. Except for Offline, all of t he st at us labels ar e
just comment s. Changing your st at us from Online t o Away
or Busy does not pr event ot her s fr om t r ying t o imit at e a con-
ver sat ion wit h you.
Sort by You can r efr esh or change t he or der of t he displayed cont act s
by select ing t his field.
Chat Select ing t his but t on init iat es a chat session wit h t he curr ent ly
highlight ed cont act in t he Contact list. When t he but t on is
pr essed t he chat for m is displayed (shown on page 668).
Refer t o Chatting with a contact on page 668 for addit ional infor -
mat ion about inst ant messenger chat s.
Add This but t on allows you t o add anot her cont act t o your list .
Refer t o Adding New Contacts on page 670 for addit ional infor -
mat ion about adding people t o your cont act list .
Delete Select ing t his but t on delet es t he cur r ent ly highlight ed cont act
fr om your Contact list.
Block Use t his but t on if you want t o block messages fr om t he cur -
r ent ly highlight ed cont act in t he Contact list.
668 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Chatting with a contact
When you select t he Chat but t on or when a user on your Contact list ini-
t iat es a chat session wit h you, t he following for m is displayed allowing you
t o ent er messages t o be sent t o t he ot her user and allowing you t o see t he
conver sion as it pr ogr esses.
Message history The t op t ext box is an ar ea t hat shows t he message his-
t or y. Every message fr om t he cont act t o you and every mes-
sage fr om you t o t he cont act is displayed her e. When t he list of
messages is longer t han t he display ar ea a ver t ical scroll bar
appear s. You can you t his scroll bar t o look back in t he conver -
sat ion.
Message text The bot t om t ext box is t he ar ea t hat you use t o t ype your
message t o t he cont act . When ent er ing t he t ext , do not press
(Enter) unt il you are r eady t o send. Alt hough t he t ext might
appear as a long line of char act er s, when it is sent and when it
is displayed in t he Message history field, it is for mat t ed t o fit t he
ar ea available.
XFile Select ing t his but t on allows you t o send a file t o t he cont act
t hat you ar e chat t ing wit h. Refer t o Sending and Receiving
Files on page 671 for infor mat ion about sending and r eceiving
files wit h cont act s.
Font Select ing t his but t on invokes t he Fonts for m descr ibed on page
662.
TIM 669
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
EmotIcons
Invite This but t on allows you t o ask anot her member of your cont act
list t o join in t he chat conver sat ion. When select ed you ar e pr e-
sent ed wit h a for m t hat allows you t o select t he cont act name
t hat you want t o invit e int o t he conver sat ion. Only t he cont act s
t hat ar e cur r ent ly signed on ar e offer ed.
Send The Send but t on causes any and all of t he t ext t hat you have
t yped in t he Message text field t o be sent t o t he cont act . It is
also r efor mat t ed and displayed in t he Message history field.
Exit This but t on exit s t he chat session and offer s you a chance t o
save t he t ext of t he session in a file:
670 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
If you choose Yes you will be offer ed t he st andar d file save
dialog box and you can specify t he locat ion and name of t he file
t o save t his chat session t ext .
Adding New Contacts
You can add a new cont act t o your cont act list at any t ime. Mer ely select
t he Add but t on when t he Cont act List for m has t he focus.
Email address Ent er t he email addr ess of t he per son t hat you want t o add
t o your cont act list .
Group Select t he gr oup t hat you want t his cont act list ed as.
TIM 671
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Sending and Receiving Files
Dur ing a chat conver sat ion you can send a file fr om your syst em t o t he
cont act s syst em by select ing t he XFile but t on of t he chat for m. When t his is
done you ar e pr esent ed wit h a st andard file select ion for m allowing you t o
select t he file t hat you want t o send t o t he ot her par t y.
Aft er t he file is select ed and t he Open but t on is pr essed, a r equest is sent t o
t he cont act t hat you ar e chat t ing wit h asking t hem t o eit her accept t he file
t ransmission or t o decline it . At t he same t ime your chat for m displays a
message st at ing t hat you ar e wait ing for t he ot her par t y. When t hey
accept , t he file is sent t o t hem and messages ar e displayed on bot h chat
for ms r epor t ing t he pr ogr ess and st at us of t he t r ansfer .
672 TIM
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
A similar but r ever se pr ocess occur s if t he cont act want s t o send you a file.
Aft er t hey select t he file t hat t hey want t o send t o you a message pops up
asking if you want t o accept t he file.
Touch 673
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Touch Command
Set s t he dat e and t ime-st amp on a file.
Operation Mode 1The dat e and t ime-st amp on file is changed and t he modified
at t r ibut e is set .
If no opt ions ar e used, t he dat e is set t o t he cur r ent dat e and t ime.
>touch example.file
File "EXAMPLE.FILE:S" touched: 10/22/01 10:22:54
One file changed.
Mode 2The dat e-st amp for file is changed t o dat e. The t ime is set t o
08:00.
>touch 01/02/03 example.file
One file changed.
Mode 3The t ime-st amp for file is changed t o date and t ime.
>touch 01/02/03 04:05:06 *.txt
File "EXAMPLE.TXT:S" touched: 01/02/03 04:05:06
File "EXAMPLE1.TXT:S" touched: 01/02/03 04:05:06
File "EXAMPLE2.TXT:S" touched: 01/02/03 04:05:06
3 files changed.
1 TOUCH file ( options
2 TOUCH dat e file
3 TOUCH dat e time file
opt ions DATE reffile dat e
NOTYPE time
TYPE
date dat e in curr ent DATEFORM for mat
time t ime specificat ion using colon delimit er s
674 Touch
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options DATE reffileSet t he dat e and t ime of file t o t he dat e and t ime of reffile.
NOTYPE Suppr ess t he display of r esult messages and t he summar y line.
>touch example.* (notype
TYPE A default opt ion t hat displays t he r esult s of each file changed
and a summar y line of t he t ot al number of files changed.
>touch example.*
File "EXAMPLE.BASIC:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
File "EXAMPLE.INDEXED:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
File "EXAMPLE.DIRECT:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
File "EXAMPLE.MAIL:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
File "EXAMPLE.DIRECT1:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
File "EXAMPLE.COMMAND:S" touched: 10/12/01 11:02:22
7 files changed.
dat e Set t he dat e of file t o dat e. If time is not specified, t he t ime is
set t o 08:00:00.
>touch test.file (10/15/97
File "TEST.FILE:S" touched: 10/15/01 08:00:00
One file changed.
The ear liest dat e t hat you can use in t he THEOS file syst em is
01/01/86.
time Set t he t ime of file t o time. If date is not specified, dat e is set t o
t he cur r ent dat e.
>touch test.file (15:32
File "TEST.FILE:S" touched: 10/12/01 15:32:00
One file changed.
Notes A file specificat ion can omit t he file-t ype if t he envir onment var iable
erence manual.
The modified at t r ibut e for file is set wit h t his command.
The display of t he Touch command (out put when opt ion TYPE is in effect ),
is out put t o stderr, not stdout. To r edir ect t his out put use t he >& operat or .
Defaults The cur r ent dat e and t ime ar e used unless ot her wise specified.
See also Change, FileManager
TraceRT 675
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TraceRT Client
The TraceRT client r epor t s t he pat h and t he t ime t aken for a message t o be sent t o and
r eceived fr om a r emot e host . TRACERT st ands for TRACE ROUTE.
Operation Mode 1Tr aces t he rout e bet ween you and server, using default opt ions
of RESOLVE, and HOPS 30.
>tracert www.theos-software.com
Tracing route to WWW.THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM (65.45.113.228)
over a maximum of 30 hops.

1 20 ms 10.88.74.1
2 20 ms bb1-ge2-1.potlnd1.or.home.net (65.4.47.1)
3 14 ms c1-pos5-2.ptldor1.home.net (24.7.75.229)
4 23 ms c1-pos1-0.snfcca1.home.net (24.7.64.22)
5 23 ms c2-pos1-0.snjsca1.home.net (24.7.65.161)
6 24 ms above-athome.sjc2.above.net (208.185.175.133)
7 106 ms core4-core3-oc48.sjc2.above.net (208.184.102.198)
8 24 ms pao1-sjc2-oc48-2.pao1.above.net (208.185.175.162)
9 26 ms allegainace-abovenet.allegiancetelecom.com (216.200.249.90)
10 28 ms POS3-0.SNFECAEJ15W.core.algx.net (66.2.95.101)
11 28 ms SNFECAEJ05W.gw.SFO.algx.net (216.99.234.11)
12 33 ms 65-45-94-218.customer.algx.net (65.45.94.218)
13 48 ms WWW.THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM (65.45.113.228)

Trace complete.
Mode 2Tr aces t he rout e bet ween you and server, using t he specified
opt ions.
>tracert 199.2.117.161 (noresolve hops 10
Tracing route to 199.2.117.161
over a maximum of 10 hops.

1 11 ms 10.88.74.1
2 10 ms 65.4.47.1
3 11 ms 24.7.79.17
4 23 ms 24.7.64.22
5 25 ms 24.7.65.157
6 25 ms 129.250.9.85
7 24 ms 129.250.3.121
8 25 ms 129.250.3.162
9 28 ms 129.250.3.34
10 27 ms 129.250.3.18

Trace complete.
1 TRACERT server
2 TRACERT server ( opt ions
localhost LOCALHOST
opt ions HOPS NORESOLVE RESOLVE
676 TraceRT
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options HOPS count Specifies t he maximum number of segment s or hops t o
r epor t . If ser ver is not reached wit hin t his number of hops, t he
t r ace is abandoned. The default number of HOPS is 30.
NORESOLVE Suppr ess t he t ranslat ion of IP addr esses t o domain names.
RESOLVE Tr anslat e each IP addr ess t o it s domain name. This is a
default opt ion.
Notes TraceRT is used t o det er mine how many r out er s ar e involved in a par t icu-
lar connect ion t o a remot e sit e. Oft en t his will explain why access t o some
sit es appear s slow while ot hers ar e quick t o r espond. Each r out er in t he
pat h r equir es addit ional t ime t o t r ansmit each packet of dat a. This is par -
t icular ly not iceable when viewing web pages. Many HTML pages r equir e
hundr eds of packet s of dat a t o be communicat ed back and for t h befor e t he
page is complet ely displayed on t he screen.
TraceRT at t empt s t o t race t he r out e t hat an IP packet t r avels bet ween you
and server. It does t his by sending a shor t packet t o an unused por t on
server. The message is sent as many t imes as specified wit h t he HOPS
opt ion, or a default value of 30. A field in t he header of t he packet is used
t o cause t he packet t o fail at each of t he r out er s in t he pat h of t he message.
The t ime displayed by TraceRT for each of t he host s is t he r ound t r ip t ime
t hat it t ook for t he message t o get t o t hat r out er and r et ur n t o you.
The t imes r epor t ed by TraceRT will be differ ent , almost ever y t ime t hat it
is r un. The amount of t r affic on t he Int er net is const ant ly changing, fr om
millisecond t o millisecond. Heavy t r affic causes slow deliver y because of
message collisions and ret r ansmissions over each of t he various mediums
bet ween you and t he dest inat ion.
See also Ping
Tree 677
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Tree Command
Displays t he subdirect or y t r ee.
Operation Mode 1St ar t ing at t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y, t he direct or y t r ee
st r uct ure is displayed on t he st andar d out put device.
Mode 2St ar t ing wit h path, t he dir ect or y t r ee st r uct ur e is displayed on
t he st andar d out put device.
1 TREE ( options
2 TREE path ( options
path st ar t ing dir ect or y name; may not include account name
opt ions NOSORT
PRTnn
SIZE
SORT
>pwd
/VERTICAL:S
>tree
/vertical
doc
programs
files
programs
>pwd
/VERTICAL:S
>tree /package
/package
doc
programs
678 Tree
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options NOSORT Causes t he dir ect or y t r ee t o be displayed in t he sequence it is
found on disk. No sor t ing of t he dir ect or y names is at t empt ed.
PRTnn Indicat es t hat Tree is t o pr int t he cur r ent dir ect or y t r ee st r uc-
t ure on t he at t ached pr int er number nn.
SIZE Includes a count of t he files in t he subdir ect or y and t he t ot al
disk space used by t hose files.
>tree (nosort
/
data
vertical
doc
programs
files
programs
package
doc
programs
misc
programs
doc
>tree (size
/ ............................... (1186, 29012K)
data ......................... (219, 17205K)
misc ......................... (27, 77K)
doc ....................... (2, 16K)
programs .................. (23, 54K)
package ...................... (248, 3162K)
doc ....................... (5, 4K)
programs .................. (240, 3150K)
vertical ..................... (648, 8401K)
doc ....................... (33, 62K)
files .................. (19, 27L)
programs ............... (11, 27K)
programs .................. (413, 4062K)
Tree 679
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
SORT A default opt ion t hat sor t s t he dir ect ory t r ee st ruct ur e in
alphabet ical sequence.
Notes The line-gr aphics char act er s used t o show t he dir ect or y hier ar chy ar e sup-
pr essed if t he envir onment var iable LINEGRAPH is set t o N.
Defaults SORT is a default opt ion.
Restrictions You may only access dir ect ories in t he cur r ent account .
>tree (size
/
data
misc
doc
programs
package
doc
programs
vertical
doc
files
programs
programs
680 Tree
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
TWS 681
T
W
S
TWS Command
The TWS command allows users of t he THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client on a Micr osoft Windows
syst em t o cont r ol t he behavior of t he client session window or cont r ol t he Gut enberg slave
pr int er t o t he TWS client .
Operation Mode 1Per for ms funct ion on t he THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client session win-
dow.
>tws disconnect off
>tws change off
>tws ontop on
The above commands pr event t he oper at or fr om disconnect ing fr om t he
THEOS Login Server and fr om changing t he focus or size of t he window
used by t he THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client . Addit ionally, t he window will
r emain displayed on t op of all ot her windows, even if t he Net or Remote com-
mand is used t o execut e anot her program.
1 TWS function
2 TWS Gut enberg-funct ion
function ACCOUNT FULL SEND
ALLOW MAXIMIZE SHELL
CHANGE MINIMIZE TITLE
DISCONNECT ONTOP TOP
EXEC RECEIVE
FOCUS RESTORE
Gutenberg-function ALIGN FONT PRINT_WINDOW
BARCODES HAS_FONTS REC_PAGE
CHANGE_AREAIMAGE ROTATE
CHECK_PRINTERLIST_FILE SELECT_AREA
CLOSE MODE SETPOS
COLOR NEW_FILE SIZE
DEFAULT_UNITSPICTURE STYLE
ERASE_FILE PRINT_NEXT_PAGE TEXT_FILE
FIELD PRINT_RECORD
FILE_RECORDSPRINT_TXT
682 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2
Functions These funct ions ar e used t o cont r ol t he TWS session and it s display win-
dow:
ACCOUNT
ALLOW Synonym t o t he DISCONNECT opt ion.
CHANGE This opt ion allows you t o cont rol whet her or not t he TWS ses-
sion can lose t he focus:
CHANGE OFF Disables t he abilit y of t he user t o select anot her
window, eit her manually wit h t he mouse or key-
boar d or wit h t he EXEC mode of t he Net. This func-
t ion also disables t he abilit y t o minimize t he client
session window wit h t he mouse. The session may
be minimized wit h t he TWS MINIMIZE funct ion.
CHANGE ON Enables t he abilit y t o select anot her window on
t he client and t o minimize and maximize t he
THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client window.
CLOSE Closes an image t hat was displayed by t he PICTURE funct ion
and r emoves it fr om t he display.
DISCONNECT This opt ion eit her per for ms a disconnect ion oper at ion or it
cont r ols whet her or not t he user is allowed t o manually discon-
nect t he TWS session fr om t he THEOS server:
DISCONNECT OFF Pr event s t he user fr om disconnect ing t his
THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client session using t he dis-
connect icon. The user may only disconnect under
pr ogr am cont r ol.
DISCONNECT ON The user may disconnect t his session by
clicking on t he disconnect icon.
EXEC Execut e a command on t he Windows syst em.
>TWS EXEC WINIPCFG
FOCUS Causes t he TWS pr ogr am t o become t he act ive window on t he
client syst em. If t he session window was minimized, it is
r est or ed t o it s pr ior size as it is act ivat ed.
FULL The window used by t he TWS session is set t o full scr een. Sim-
ilar t o MAXIMIZE except t her e is no fr ame, scr oll bar s, menu
TWS 683
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
bar , t it le, et c. The ent ir e scr een of t he Windows syst em is used
for t he display of t he THEOS ser ver session.
MAXIMIZE The window used by t he TWS session is set t o it s lar gest size.
MINIMIZE The window used by t he TWS session is minimized t o an icon
and t he pr ior window is select ed as t he focus.
ONTOP This opt ion cont r ols whet her or not t he display of t he TWS ses-
sion is on t op of all ot her windows displayed on t he Windows
console, or not :
ONTOP OFF Disables t he on-t op feat ur e for t he THEOS
Wor kSt at ion Client session window. That is, when
t he window is not t he act ive window, ot her win-
dows may over lay it .
ONTOP ON Enables t he on-t op feat ur e for t he THEOS Wor k-
St at ion Client session window. That is, when t he
client session window is not t he act ive window, it
st ill is t he t opmost window displayed on t he scr een
and might over lay t he window t hat has t he focus.
If t he client session window is cur r ent ly mini-
mized, t he on-t op feat ur e is not evident unt il t he
window is r est or ed. That is, t he minimized icon is
not displayed on t op of ot her windows.
The opt ion TOP may be used as a synonym t o ONTOP.
RECEIVE
RESTORE The TWS session window is r est or ed t o it s size befor e being set
t o maximized, minimized or full-scr een.
SEND
SHELL Synonym t o t he EXEC opt ion.
TITLE title Change t he t it le used in t he THEOS WorkSt at ion Client ses-
sion window.
TOP This is a synonym t o t he ONTOP opt ion.
684 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Gutenberg
Functions
The following funct ions ar e used, gener ally in an EXEC pr ogr am, t o
for mat and pr int r epor t s on t he TWS slave pr int er or t o an at t ached
Gut enber g pr int er .
These funct ions ar e gener ally used as a set in a pr ogr ammed sequence.
TWS New_File ; start a new report
TWS Font "Times New Roman" ; set the font
TWS Style 2 ; boldface
TWS Size 240 ; 24 point
TWS Align 1 ; center
TWS Print_Txt "This is the Title"
TWS Align 3 ; left and right justified
TWS Style 0 ; normal
TWS Size 120 ; 12 point
TWS Print_Txt "Now is the time for all good men to come to"
TWS Print_Txt "the aid of their party."
TWS List_File prt3 ; print the report
TWS 685
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
ALIGN
Define t he t ext alignment and t ext backgr ound for subsequent t ext wr it t en
t o t he repor t .
The for mat t ing specified by t his funct ion is only applied t o subsequent t ext
wr it t en t o t he r eport .
If pr int windows ar e being used and t he mode set t ing of ext ended is speci-
fied, t hen t he alignment specified her e only applies t o t he cur r ent ly
select ed pr int window (see SELECT_AREA on page 702). If ext ended is not
specified, which is t he default , t hen t he alignment specified her e applies t o
all windows.
Align codes
The alignment at t r ibut e is specified using a bit -mapped code. This code is
one or mor e of t he following values:
The alignment codes list ed above can be combined t oget her by adding t he
desir ed values.
tws align 3 ; left and right alignment
tws align 2+8+32+64 ; right, no wrap, frame and light gray bg
tws align 106 ; right, no wrap, frame and light gray bg
Code Meaning
0x0000 0 Left
0x0001 1 Cent er
0x0002 2 Right
0x0003 3 J ust ified
0x0008 8 No wr ap
0x0020 32 Fr ame
0x0040 64 Light gr ay backgr ound
0x0080 128 Whit e backgr ound
0x00C0 192 Background color
TWS ALIGN align-code
align-code Bit -mapped value indicat ing t ext alignment
686 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Each t ime t hat t he align funct ion is used it complet ely r eplaces any pr evi-
ous alignment specificat ions but it only applies t o t ext t hat is subsequent ly
wr it t en t o t he r epor t .
TWS 687
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
BARCODES
Pr int t ext int er pr et ed as bar code using t he 3 of 9 bar code algor it hm.
The text is pr int ed using t he default font for bar codes and size or using t he
par amet er s specified. The default width is 240 decipoint s, t he height is
pr opor t ional t o t he widt h, units is decipoint s and t he fontname is 3 of 9
Bar code.
You may r equest t he default width, height or units by specifying a value of
zer o for t he par amet er . When a fontname is specified, it should be t he
name of a font t hat confor ms t o t he 3 of 9 bar code char act er set .
The barcode int er pr et at ion of t ext is wr it t en t o t he r epor t at t he cur r ent
posit ion using t he cur r ent ly defined st yle (see STYLE on page 703). No
line br eaks or spacing is out put befor e or aft er t he bar code is pr int ed. If
you desire any line br eaks or spacing you must specify it by using t he
PRINT_TXT funct ion. Aft er war d pr int ing t he bar code, t he pr ior font and
size is r est or ed.
Unit codes
The unit -of-measur ement at t r ibut e is specified using a bit -mapped code.
This code is one or mor e of t he following values:
Table 1: Unit of Measur ement Codes
Code Meaning
0x0001 1 Pixels
0x0002 2 Columns and r ows
0x0004 4 Millimet er s
0x0008 8 Inches
0x0010 16 Decipoint s
TWS BARCODES text width height units fontname
text Text t o pr int
widt h Opt ional widt h of bar code in unit s
height Opt ional height of bar code in unit s
unit s Opt ional unit of measur ement code
fontname Opt ional name of font t o use for
688 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mult iple bar codes can be pr int ed wit h one command by enclosing t he
st r ing in quot at ion mar ks.
tws barcodes 12345-67890
tws barcodes "09876 54321" 10 0 4
TWS 689
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CHANGE_AREA
Change some of t he at t r ibut es of an exist ing window ar ea.
To change a defined window, t he window must exist on t he page t hat is
cur r ent ly being built in t he r epor t .
A last -page value of zero means t hat t he window exist s in all r emaining
pages of t he r eport .
Flag codes
tws print_window 4 3 2 20 10 4+32+64+256 ; repeat odd pages
...
tws change_area 4 384 ; repeat on all pages
Code Meaning
0x0020 16 Link t o next window
0x0040 64 Accept links fr om ot her windows
0x0080 128 Repeat on all following even number ed pages
0x0100 256 Repeat on all following odd number ed pages
0x0180 384 Repeat on all following pages
0x0200 512 Rows in t able ar e separat ed
0x0400 1024 Ar ea is a column of a t able
TWS CHANGE_AREA window last -page flags
window Number of exist ing window
last-page Opt ional last page number t o use window
flags Opt ional flags t o change
690 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
CHECK_PRINTER
Test an at t ached print er t o see if it is a Gut enber g-capable print er .
Test print er prt t o det er mine if it is a Gut enber g pr int er . If prt is not spec-
ified t hen t he default PRT1 is t est ed. Set s t he r et ur n code t o a non-zer o
value if t he result is t r ue; ot herwise, when t he specified prt is not at t ached
or not a Gut enber g pr int er t he r et ur n code is set t o zer o.
tws check_printer prt3
RC = 1, 09:10:23, ET = 0:01, CPU = 0.080
CLOSE
Close t he image displayed in a window in t he r epor t .
?????? Why, what does closing it do? It is har dcopy aft er all.
tws align 0xC8
TWS CHECK_PRINTER prt
TWS HAS_FONTS prt
prt At t ached pr int er name t o t est
TWS CLOSE window
window Number of window cont aining image/pict ur e
TWS 691
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
COLOR
Set t he font color for subsequent t ext out put t o t he r epor t .
Set s t he color of t ext t hat is subsequent ly out put t o t he r epor t . The for e-
gr ound (fg) and backgr ound (bg) color s ar e specified wit h RGB values (r ed.
gr een, blue), which ar e nor mally specified in hexadecimal.
If pr int windows ar e being used and t he mode set t ing of ext ended is speci-
fied, t hen t he color s specified here only applies t o t he curr ent ly select ed
pr int window (see SELECT_AREA on page 702). If ext ended is not speci-
fied, which is t he default , t hen t he color s specified her e apply t o all win-
dows.
tws color 0xFFFFFF 0xFF0000 ; white on red
Some common color definit ions:
Code Color
0x000000 Black
0x000080 Blue
0x008080 Cyan (gr een+blue)
0x008000 Gr een
0x404040 Gr ey
0x0000FF Int ense blue
0x00FFFF Int ense cyan
0x00FF00 Int ense gr een
0xFF00FF Int ense magent a
0xFF0000 Int ense red
0xFFFF00 Int ense yellow
0x800080 Magent a (r ed+blue)
0x800000 Red
0x808080 Whit e or light gr ey
0x808000 Yellow (r ed+gr een)
TWS COLOR fg bg
fg Foreground color code
bg Backgr ound color code
692 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
DEFAULT_UNITS
Set t he default unit -of-measur ement t o be used by funct ions t hat do not
specify a U/M explicit ly.
When t his funct ion is not used t he default U/M is decipoint s which is of
a point or of an inch.
For unit -code descr ipt ion, r efer t o Table 1: Unit of Measurement Codes on
page 687.
When t he U/M select ed is columns and r ows, t his funct ion may specify t he
desir ed column and/or r ow values.
tws default_units 8 ; set to inches
...
tws default_units 2 100 ; set to 100 characters per line
...
tws default_units 2 0 60 ; set to 60 lines per page
TWS DEFAULT_UNITS unit-codes columns rows
unit -code Unit of measur ement code
columns Opt ional number of columns
rows Opt ional number of r ows
1
10
----- -
1
720
---------
TWS 693
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FIELD
Out put a field cont aining t he cur r ent value of a var iable.
xxxx
Variable field names
Mask codes
Name Meaning
PAGE Cur r ent page number
DATE Cur r ent dat e
TIME Cur r ent t ime
ENV Envir onment var iable
Field Code Meaning
PAGE %u Cur r ent page number
DATE
d Day number , one or t wo digit s
dd Day number , t wo digit
ddd Day of week name (Mon, Tue, et c.)
dddd Full weekday name (Monday, Tuesday, etc.)
M Mont h number , one or t wo digit s
MM Mont h number , t wo digit
MMM Mont h name (J an, Feb, etc.)
MMMM Full mont h name (J anuar y, Febr uar y, etc.)
y Year number in cent ury, one or t wo digit s
yy Year number in cent ury, t wo digit s
yyyy Four -digit year number
TWS FIELD field mask
field Field name
mask St r ing specifying for mat t ing infor mat ion
694 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
TIME
hh Two-digit hour number , 12-hour for mat
H Hour number , 24-hour for mat , one or t wo digit s
HH Hour number , 24-hour for mat , t wo digit s
m Minut e number , one or t wo digit s
mm Minut e number , t wo digit s
s Second number , one or t wo digit s
ss Second number , t wo digit s
t a or p for am or pm
tt AM or PM for am or pm
ENV text Environment name
Field Code Meaning
TWS 695
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
FILE_RECORDS
xxxx
Flag codes
>tws align 0xC8
FONT
Select t he font t o use for subsequent t ext out put .
The default font is Ar ial.
>tws font "Times Roman"
IMAGE
Out put t he gr aphic image file t o t he r epor t at t he cur r ent posit ion.
Code Meaning
0x0400 1024
0x0800 2048
TWS FILE_RECORDS xxxx flags divider first lines
xxxx
flags
divider
first
lines
TWS FONT font -name
font-name Complet e name of font on client syst em
696 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
xxxx
Flag codes
>tws align 0xC8
LIST_FILE
Close t he curr ent r epor t and pr int it on an at t ached pr int er .
xxxx
>tws align 0xC8
MODE
Define t he page or ient at ion for t he r epor t .
Code Meaning
0x0000 0 Image t ype is defined by it s file ext ension (BMP,
GIF, J PG, PCX, TIF)
0x0001 1 Image t ype is BMP
0x0002 2 Image t ype is J PG
0x0100 256 Scale hor izont al widt h t o window widt h
0x0200 512 Scale ver t ical height t o window widt h
0x0400 1024 Cent er t he image hor izont ally in t he window
0x0800 2048 Cent er t he image vert ically in t he window
0x1000 4096 Scale t he window t o fit t he image size
0x8000 32768 File is a local file on t he client machine
TWS IMAGE filename flags
filename Name of image file
flags Code indicat ing image-t ype and scaling
TWS LIST_FILE prt
prt Name of at t ached print er
TWS 697
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
xxxx
Mode codes
>tws align 0xC8
NEW_FILE
Begin a new r epor t .
Any exist ing r epor t t hat has not been out put t o t he pr int er (see
LIST_FILE on page 696) is clear ed and not pr int ed.
Code Meaning
0x0000 0 Por t rait or ient at ion
0x0100 256 Landscape or ient at ion
0x0400 1024 Ext ended windows
0x1000 4096 Duplex hor izont al
0x2000 8192 Duplex ver t ical
TWS MODE mode-code
mode-code Or ient at ion code
TWS NEW_FILE
TWS ERASE_FILE
698 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PICTURE
xxxx
Flag codes
>tws align 0xC8
PRINT_NEXT_PAGE
Add a page br eak t o t he r epor t .
xxxx
Code Meaning
0x0000
TWS PICTURE window x y widt h height filename flags
window
x
y
widt h
height
filename
flags
TWS PRINT_NEXT_PAGE
TWS 699
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
PRINT_RECORD
Out put t he fields of a t able record t o t he pr int er .
xxxx
>tws align 0xC8
PRINT_TXT
Out put some t ext t o t he r epor t .
When t ext is not blank, no CR is added t o t he r eport . If text is a blank or
empt y st r ing a CR is out put t o t he repor t .
tws print_txt "This is some text in a paragraph."
tws print_txt " This is another sentence in the same paragraph."
tws print_txt
tws print_txt "Second paragraph with a break but no blank line "
tws print_txt "between the paragraphs when printed."
TWS PRINT_RECORD record divider
record
divider
TWS PRINT_TXT t ext
text Text st r ing
700 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
PRINT_WINDOW
Define a pr int area on t he r epor t .
xxxx
Flag codes
>tws align 0xC8
Code Meaning
0x0001 1 Pixels
0x0002 2 Columns and r ows
0x0004 4 Millimet er s
0x0008 8 Inches
0x0010 16 Decipoint s
0x0020 32 Link t o next window
0x0040 64 Accept links from ot her windows
0x0080 128 Repeat on all following even number ed pages
0x0100 256 Repeat on all following odd number ed pages
0x0180 384 Repeat on all following pages
0x0200 512 Rows in t able ar e separ at ed
0x0400 1024 Ar ea is a column of a t able
TWS PRINT_WINDOW window x y widt h height flags
window Window number t o define
x Top left corner of window, x posit ion
y Top left corner of window, y posit ion
widt h Widt h of window in U/M specified in flags
height Height of window in U/M specified in flags
flags Codes specifying U/M and ot her at t r ibut es
TWS 701
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
REC_PAGE
xxxx
Align codes
>tws align 0xC8
ROTATE
Set t he rot at ion angle for t ext t hat is subsequent ly out put t o t he r epor t .
A posit ive angle value indicat es a clockwise rot at ion direct ion; negat ive
values ar e a count er -clockwise r ot at ion dir ect ion.
Code Meaning
0x0000
TWS REC_PAGE action first last type
action
first
last
type
TWS ROTATE angle
angle Angle in degr ees
702 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
SELECT_AREA
Select a pr eviously defined window for subsequent t ext out put .
xxxx
>tws align 0xC8
SETPOS
Posit ion t he pr int -head cur sor for subsequent t ext wr it t en t o t he r epor t .
xxxx
Align codes
Code Meaning
TWS SELECT_AREA window
window
TWS SETPOS x y unit s window
x
y
unit s
window
TWS 703
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
SIZE
Set t he font size for subsequent t ext out put t o t he r eport .
xxxx
Unit codes
For unit code descr ipt ion, r efer t o Table 1: Unit of Measurement Codes on
page 687.
>tws align 0xC8
>tws size 100 ; 10pt
STYLE
Set t he font st yle for subsequent t ext out put t o t he r epor t .
xxxx
Style codes
Code Meaning
0x0000 0 Nor mal
Code Meaning
TWS SIZE widt h height unit s
widt h Opt ional font widt h
height Opt ional font height
unit s Opt ional code for unit of measur ement
TWS STYLE style-code
st yle-code Bit -mapped code for font st yle
704 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
>tws style 0x101 ;
TEXT_FILE
Include a t ext file in t he pr int er out put .
xxxx
Flags
0x0001 1 It alic
0x0002 2 Boldface
0x0004 4 Under line
0x0008 8 Compr essed
0x0010 16 Double-wide
0x0020 32 Double-high
0x0040 64 Use alt er nat e color
0x0080 128 Cr ossout
0x0100 256 Tr ansparent backgr ound
Code Meaning
0x0001 1 Suppr ess any CR in t he file.
0x0002 2 Suppr ess any FF in t he file.
0x0400 1024 Translat e char act ers in t he file int o ???
0x0800 2048 Int er pr et char act er s as ANSI char act er s
0x2000 8192 Print t he file using client machine applicat ion associ-
at ed wit h t he files ext ension.
0x4000 16384 The file is pr int ed by t he client machine.
Code Meaning
TWS TEXT_FILE filename flags start-line lines
filename Name of file t o pr int
flags Codes cont rolling pr int act ions
st art-line Fir st line in file t o pr int
lines Number of lines t o pr int
TWS 705
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>tws align 0xC8
Notes Alt hough t his pr ogr am can be execut ed fr om t he command line, it is nor -
mally used in an EXEC language pr ogr am or by an applicat ion pr ogr am.
The oper at or of t he THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client has on-scr een cont r ols
t hat can cont r ol most of t hese funct ions and oper at ions.
The CHANGE, DISCONNECT and ONTOP funct ions of t he THEOS WorkSt a-
t ion Client session can only be enabled/disabled wit h t his pr ogr am. Ther e
ar e no compar able screen-but t ons or menu it ems t hat t he oper at or can use
t o access t hese funct ions.
Restrictions This pr ogr am is only effect ive when it is execut ed in a par t it ion t hat has a
THEOS Wor kSt at ion Client for a console.
See Also Net
0x8000 32768 File r esides on client machine. The filename must
confor m t o t he synt ax r ules of t he client machine.
Code Meaning
706 TWS
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
UnErase 707
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
UnErase Command
This command allows you t o r est or e a file t hat has been pr eviously er ased and placed in t he
r ecycle bin.
Operation Mode 1Invokes t he User Interface of t he Unerase command. The dr ive for
t his mode is t he fir st dr ive in t he cur r ent ly defined sear ch sequence.
Mode 2Similar t o Mode 1, invokes t he User Interface of t he Unerase com-
mand but t he dr ive for t his mode is specified by drive.
Mode 3Clear t he r ecycle bin fr om drive.
Mode 4Undelet es t he request ed file. The r esult of t he uner ase oper at ion
is displayed or not displayed accor ding t o t he option in effect .
Options NOTYPE Suppr ess t he display of t he uner ase at t empt for each of t he
files specified. The summar y line is also suppr essed wit h t his
opt ion.
TYPE A default opt ion t hat displays t he r esult of each uner ase
at t empt and displays a summar y line pr ior t o exit ing Unerase.
Defaults For Mode 4, TYPE is t he default opt ion.
The drive used for Mode 1 is t he first dr ive in t he cur rent sear ch sequence.
Nor mally, t his will be t he S dr ive.
Restrictions To view or uner ase an er ased file you must be logged ont o t he same
account t hat owned t he file pr ior t o t he file being er ased.
1 UNERASE
2 UNERASE drive
3 UNERASE drive ( CLEAR
4 UNERASE file ( options
drive Dr ive code or label of at t ached har d disk or image dr ive
file File name wit h opt ional pat h; may cont ain wild car ds
opt ions NOTYPE
TYPE
708 UnErase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
For Mode 3, you must be logged on t o t he SYSTEM account and have a pr ivi-
lege level of 5.
User Interface When Mode 2 or Mode 4 is used, t he UnEr ase command displays t he user
int er face for m. This for m allows you t o view t he files t hat ar e in t he r ecycle
bin for a dr ive and select ively r est or e t hem, delet e t hem or clear t he ent ir e
r ecycle bin.
At t he bot t om of t he for m is t he infor mat ion about t he file t hat is cur r ent ly
highlight ed in t he list box above. The Pat h r efer s t o t he or iginal locat ion
of t he file which is also t he locat ion t hat t he file would be rest or ed t o.
Restore Select ing t his but t on rest or es or uner ases t he file highlight ed
in t he list box t o t he left .
Delete This but t on will delet e t he hight light ed file fr om t he r ecycle
bin. Once a file is delet ed t his way it cannot be r est or ed or
uner ased.
Before t he highlight ed file is act ually r emoved, you ar e asked
t o confir m your request :
UnErase 709
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Sequence You can cont r ol t he sequence of t he r ecycle bin files displayed
in t he list box. The choices ar e:
Name sequence Or der s t he delet ed file names by t heir file
name.
Path sequence Or der s t he delet ed files by t heir or iginal pat h
locat ion. Wit hin pat h, t he names are or der ed by
t heir file name.
Date ascending Or der s t he delet ed files by t he dat e and t ime
t hat t hey were er ased, in ascending sequence.
Date descending Or der s t he delet ed files by t he dat e and t ime
t hat t hey were er ased, in descending sequence.
Size Ascending Or der s t he delet ed files by t he file size, in
ascending sequence.
Size Descending Or der s t he delet ed files by t he file size, in
descending sequence.
Clear This but t on allows you t o clear or delet e all of t he files in t he
r ecycle bin. Because t his operat ion cannot be r ever sed, you ar e
asked t o confirm your r equest befor e t he files ar e permanent ly
r emoved fr om t he r ecycle bin.
See also Erase, FileManager, RmDir
710 UnErase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
UnInst all 711
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
UnInstall Command
The UnInstall command r emoves all of t he files associat ed wit h an inst alled pr oduct .
Operation If t here ar e any pr oduct s r egist er ed wit h an uninst all cont r ol file a menu
displays allowing you t o select t he pr oduct t hat you want t o uninst all:
Select t he pr oduct by moving t he highlight bar t o t he desir ed it em and
t hen eit her click on t he Remove but t on or use t he (Tab) key t o move t o
t he Remove but t on and pr ess (Enter). All of t he files list ed in t he unin-
st all cont r ol file for t he select ed it em ar e r emoved fr om t he syst em, t he
uninst all cont r ol file for t hat it em is r emoved and t he it em is r emoved fr om
t he menu. Cont r ol r et ur ns t o t he menu and you may select anot her pr od-
uct t o uninst all or use t he Exit but t on t o exit t he Uninstall command.
Notes The uninst all cont rol files r eside in t he dir ect or y /THEOS/UNINSTALL:S.
Only files list ed in t he uninst all cont rol file for t he select ed pr oduct ar e
er ased. Somet imes t he cont r ol file does not list all of t he files. For inst ance,
it is common for a pr oduct s cont r ol file t o not include t he configur at ion file
for t he pr oduct . In t his sit uat ion t he configur at ion file is not er ased. This is
UNINSTALL
712 UnInstall
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
convenient if you need t o r einst all t he pr oduct at a lat er t ime. Aft er r ein-
st allat ion, t he pr ior configur at ion file is st ill t her e and will be used again.
Some pr oduct s r equir e ot her pr oduct s t o oper at e. For inst ance, a net wor k-
ing pr oduct like THEO+Mail r equir es TCPIP net wor king t o be inst alled on
t he syst em. If you uninst all a pr oduct t hat has ot her pr oduct s dependent
upon it , t hose ot her product s ar e r emoved at t he same t ime. For inst ance,
uninst alling THEOS TCP/IP Net wor king causes all of t he ot her pr oduct s
t hat depend upon net wor king t o also be uninst alled.
Cautions All of t he files r egist ered in t he uninst all cont r ol file for a pr oduct ar e
er ased fr om t he syst em. Ther e is no backup copy of t hese files made.
Restrictions The Uninstall command can only r emove files for a pr oduct t hat cr eat ed an
uninst all cont r ol file for t he pr oduct when it was inst alled on t he syst em.
See also Install
Unique 713
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unique Command Filter
Unique copies st andar d input t o st andard out put , or copies one file t o anot her, omit t ing any
duplicat ed lines.
The examples used in t he descr ipt ions t hat follow use an input file con-
t aining:
>list sample.file
The 1st line.
The 2nd line.
The 2nd line.
The 2nd line.
And the third line.
The last line.
The last line.
Operation Mode 1Each line in infile is examined and compar ed t o t he pr evious
line. If it is different t han t he pr ior line, it is wr it t en t o out file.
>unique sample.file
The 1st line.
The 2nd line.
And the third line.
The last line.
Mode 2This mode is ident ical t o Mode 1 except t hat t he out put is writ -
t en t o t he st andar d out put device.
>unique sample.file > unique.lines
1 UNIQUE infile out file ( opt ions
2 UNIQUE infile ( options
3 UNIQUE ( opt ions
infile file name wit h opt ional pat h
out file file name wit h opt ional pat h
opt ions COUNT
DUP
UNIQUE
+nnn
nnn
714 Unique
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3This mode is nor mally used in a pipe command-line because t he
input file comes fr om t he st andar d input device and t he out put is wr it t en
t o t he st andar d out put device.
Options COUNT Each line in t he file is out put pr eceded by a count of t he num-
ber of consecut ive inst ances of t he line. The duplicat ed
inst ances of a line ar e not out put .
>unique sample.file (count
1 The 1st line.
3 The 2nd line.
1 And the third line.
2 The last line.
Opt ion COUNT cannot be used in combinat ion wit h t he DUP or
UNIQUE opt ions.
DUP The UNIQUE command out put s only one copy of each dupli-
cat ed line in t he file. All unique lines in t he input file ar e not
copied t o t he out put file.
>unique sample.file (dup
The 2nd line.
The last line.
UNIQUE This opt ion causes t he Unique command t o out put only t he
unique lines in t he file. That is, only t he lines t hat have no
duplicat e lines.
>unique sample.file
The 1st line.
The 2nd line.
And the third line.
The last line.
>unique sample.file (unique
The 1st line.
And the third line.
+nnn Wit h t his opt ion t he fir st nnn char act er s of each line ar e not
used when t est ing for duplicat e lines.
>unique sample.file (+7
The 1st line.
And the third line.
The last line.
Unique 715
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
nnn Specifies t hat t he fir st nnn fields of each line ar e not used
when t est ing for duplicat e lines. A field is ident ified by a t ab
char act er or a space char act er .
>unique sample.file (2 count
4 The 1st line.
1 And the third line.
2 The last line.
Notes An infile or outfile specificat ion can omit t he file t ype if t he envir onment
var iable FILETYPE is defined.
For mor e infor mat ion about t he FILETYPE var iable, see Environment Vari-
ables on page 111.
Restrictions infile must be a st r eam file.
See also List, Sort
716 Unique
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unload 717
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unload Command
The Unload command unloads a pr ogr am or dat a file from memor y.
Operation The program or dat a file is unloaded fr om memor y.
Notes If program is not cur r ent ly loaded int o memor y, no message displays.
If program is in memor y but was not loaded dur ing syst em st art up or by
Load, it is not unloaded by t his command and no message displays.
Restrictions The Unload command r equir es a pr ivilege level of five.
You may only Unload a pr ogr am or dat a file fr om memor y if it was loaded
wit h Load or dur ing syst em st ar t up.
If program is in use by anot her user , it is not unloaded at t his t ime. How-
ever , it s use count is decr ement ed so when t he ot her user finishes using
t he program it will be unloaded at t hat t ime.
See also Load, Sysgen
UNLOAD program
program name of pr ogr am or file t o load int o memor y
718 Unload
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unnumber 719
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Unnumber Command Filter
Unnumber copies a file t o t he st andar d out put device, removing any line number fr om each
line as it is copied.
Operation Mode 1Each file is copied t o t he st andard out put device and unnum-
ber ed as it is copied. Specifying mult iple files causes t he second and
r emaining files t o be appended t o t he first file copied t o t he st andar d
out put device.
>unnumber program1.basic
! Program: JULIAN Compute Julian date
! Programmer: Jane Doe
OPTION VERSION 1.1,"Copyright 2001 by ABC Software."
IF CMDARG$(1)=""
GOSUB COMPUTE.JULIAN
ELSE GOSUB COMPUTE.DATE
IFEND
...
>unnumber program1.basic program2.basic
! Program: JULIAN Compute Julian date
! Programmer: Jane Doe
OPTION VERSION 1.1,"Copyright 2001 by ABC Software."
IF CMDARG$(1)=""
...
! Program2: Compute late charge.
INPUT "beginning balance",AMOUNT
INPUT "month number",M%
CUR.MONTH% = VAL(LEFT$(DATE$(0),2))
TOT.TOT.INT = TOT.TOT.INT+TOT.INT
This command is frequent ly used in a pipe:
>unnumber numbered.text | tee some.text | more
Mode 2Copies t he file fr om t he st andar d input device t o t he st andar d
out put device, unnumber ing each line as it is copied.
Notes A line is consider ed number ed if t he fir st non-space char act er is a digit . A
line is unnumber ed by removing all leading spaces and digit s. If t he r esult -
ing line is blank, it is not out put .
1 UNNUMBER file...
2 UNNUMBER
720 Unnumber
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
When a line cont ains mult iple line number s, only t he fir st line number is
r emoved. For inst ance:
10 10 This is line number 10.
The above line is unnumber ed t o:
10 This is line number 10.
Compr essed or encoded files, such as t hose used by Mult iUser BASIC,
cannot be unnumber ed wit h t his command.
See also Number
UnZip 721
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
UnZip Command
This command list s, t est s or ext r act s compr essed files fr om a ZIP ar chive.
Operation Mode 1The files in t he zipfile ar e rest or ed int o t he cur r ent wor king
dir ect or y.
>unzip cdrom
Archive: CDROM.zip
inflating: diskette.img
inflating: theos.img
inflating: pluspak.exc
inflating: pluspak.instcmp
Because no opt ions ar e used wit h t his mode, t he files ar e at t empt ed t o be
r est ored whet her t hey exist or not . If a file alr eady exist s in t he dest ina-
t ion dir ect ory you ar e asked:
replace filename? [y]es, [n]o, [All], [N]one, [r]ename:
When t his occur s you must respond wit h a (Y), (N), (Shift)+(A), (Shift)+(N) or (R).
If an ar chived file name has a pat h specified, it is r est or ed t o t hat pat h of
t he dest inat ion disk. If t he pat h is relat ive (does not st ar t wit h a /) t hen it
is r est or ed t o t hat pat h r elat ive t o t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y. If t he
pat h does not exist , it is cr eat ed. These act ions can be cont r olled by speci-
fying opt ions.
Mode 2The files in t he zipfile ar chive ar e r est or ed accor ding t o t he
opt ions specified.
Mode 3The files specified in filelist ar e ext ract ed fr om t he zipfile
ar chive accor ding t o t he options specified.
1 UNZIP zipfile
2 UNZIP -options zipfile
3 UNZIP -options zipfile filelist
zipfile Sour ce of ar chived files
opt ions Opt ions applied dur ing ext r act ion or list
filelist List of file names t o ext r act
722 UnZip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options The following opt ions may be combined int o a single specificat ion. For
inst ance, t o request quiet mode (-q) and r eplace mode (-o) you would spec-
ify -qo.
-f Similiar t o t he NEWER opt ion of t he CopyFile command, t his
opt ion causes UnZip t o only at t empt t o r est or e a file if t he file
does not exist in t he dest inat ion dir ect or y of if t he ar chived
ver sion of t he file is newer t han t he exist ing ver sion of t he file
in t he dest inat ion dir ect or y.
-h Display help t ext .
-j Ignore t he pat hs specified in t he zipfile and r est or e t he file int o
t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y.
-l List t he files in t he ar chive. Compar e wit h t he -v opt ion.
>unzip -l cdrom
Archive: CDROM.zip
Length Date Time Name
-------- ---- ---- ----
1474560 02-16-02 10:50 diskette.img
26214400 02-16-02 10:51 theos.img
748 01-30-02 15:29 pluspak.exc
3876 02-16-02 10:48 pluspak.instcmp
-------- -------
27693584 4 files
-n Similar t o t he NEWFILE opt ion of t he CopyFile command, files
in t he ar chive ar e only r est or ed if t he file does not exist in t he
dest inat ion dir ect or y.
-o Equivalent t o t he REPLACE and NOQUERY opt ion used by
ot her THEOS commands, Any exist ing files are r eplaced if
t hey have t he same name as a file t hat is being exploded. You
ar e not asked if you want t o explode t he ar chive file.
-p This opt ion causes UnZip t o expand t he cont ent s of t he
ar chived files t o st dout . Nor mally, t his is a pipe t o anot her
command and is nor mally only useful when t he ar chived files
ar e plain t ext files.
>unzip -p myfiles | list
In t he above example, t he cont ent s of MYFILES.ZIP is displayed
on t he console by t he List command.
UnZip 723
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
-q Quiet mode. This is t he equivalent of t he NOTYPE opt ion used
by ot her THEOS commands.
>unzip -tq cdrom.zip
No errors detected in compressed data of CDROM.ZIP.
-t Test t he zipfile by verifying t he r eadabilit y of t he ar chive and
by checking t he int egr it y of each file in t he ar chive.
>unzip -t cdrom.zip
Archive: CDROM.ZIP
testing: diskette.img OK
testing: theos.img OK
testing: pluspak.exc OK
testing: pluspak.instcmp OK
No errors detected in compressed data of CDROM.ZIP.
-u Similiar t o t he NEWER opt ion of t he CopyFile command, t his
opt ion causes UnZip t o only at t empt t o r est or e a file if t he file
does not exist in t he dest inat ion direct or y of if t he ar chived
ver sion of t he file is newer t han t he exist ing ver sion of t he file
in t he dest inat ion direct or y. Compare wit h t he -f opt ion, which
only r est or es if t he file exist s and is older .
-v Display t he zipfile direct or y in ver bose mode. Compar e t o t he
-Z opt ion display.
>unzip -v cdrom
Archive: CDROM.zip
Length Method Size Ratio Date Time CRC-32 Name
-------- ------ ------- ----- ---- ---- ------- ----
1474560 Defl:N 1277225 13% 02-16-02 10:50 76c9056f diskette.img
26214400 Defl:N 21782773 17% 02-16-02 10:51 b480088c theos.img
748 Defl:N 396 47% 01-30-02 15:29 ad55cfc6 pluspak.exc
3876 Defl:N 1435 63% 02-16-02 10:48 a8b548b9 pluspak.instcmp
-------- ------- --- -------
27693584 23061829 17% 4 files
-z Display t he ar chive file name.
>unzip -z foo
Archive: FOO.zip
724 UnZip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
-Z Display t he zip file dir ect or y. Compare t o t he -v opt ion.
>unzip "-Z" cdrom
Archive: CDROM.zip 23062393 bytes 4 files
S.M...... 2.3 ths 1474560 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:50 diskette.img
S.M...... 2.3 ths 26214400 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:51 theos.img
S........ 2.3 ths 748 tx defN 30-Jan-02 15:29 pluspak.exc
S.MW..... 2.3 ths 3876 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:48 pluspak.instcmp
4 files, 27693584 bytes uncompressed, 23061829 bytes compressed: 16.7%
This opt ion allows you t o use addit ional opt ions t hat ar e spe-
cific t o t his list ing:
-1 Display t he file names only.
>unzip -Z -1 cdrom
diskette.img
theos.img
pluspak.exc
pluspak.instcmp
-2 Display t he file names only but allow and display ot her
infor mat ion if t he -h, -t or -z sub-opt ion is specified.
>unzip -Z -2h cdrom
diskette.img
theos.img
pluspak.exc
pluspak.instcmp
>unzip -Z -2ht cdrom
diskette.img
theos.img
pluspak.exc
pluspak.instcmp
4 files, 27693584 bytes uncompressed, 23061829
bytes compressed: 16.7%
-h Display heading line.
>unzip -Z -h cdrom
-l Display t he zip file direct or y in Unix ls -l long for mat .
This display is ident ical t o t he plain -Z display. Compar e
wit h t he -m and -s sub-opt ion displays.
UnZip 725
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
-m Display t he zip file dir ect or y in Unix ls -l medium format .
>unzip -Z -m cdrom
S.M...... 2.3 ths 1474560 bx 13% defN 16-Feb-02 10:50 diskette.img
S.M...... 2.3 ths 26214400 bx 17% defN 16-Feb-02 10:51 theos.img
S........ 2.3 ths 748 tx 47% defN 30-Jan-02 15:29 pluspak.exc
S.MW..... 2.3 ths 3876 bx 63% defN 16-Feb-02 10:48 pluspak.instcmp
-s Display t he zip file dir ect or y in Unix ls -l shor t for mat .
>unzip -Z -s cdrom
S.M...... 2.3 ths 1474560 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:50 diskette.img
S.M...... 2.3 ths 26214400 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:51 theos.img
S........ 2.3 ths 748 tx defN 30-Jan-02 15:29 pluspak.exc
S.MW..... 2.3 ths 3876 bx defN 16-Feb-02 10:48 pluspak.instcmp
-t Display t he t ot als line.
>unzip -Z -t cdrom
-T Display t he dat e/t ime infor mat ion of each list ing line in a
sor t able for mat . That is, t he dat e/t ime is for mat t ed as:
yyyymmdd.hhmmss.
-v Display t he dir ect or y in ver bose, mult i-page mode.
>unzip -Z -v cdrom
pluspak.instcmp

offset of local header from start of archive: 23060570 (015FE05Ah)
bytes
file system or operating system of origin: Theos
version of encoding software: 2.3
minimum file system compatibility required: MS-DOS, OS/2 or NT FAT
minimum software version required to extract: 2.0
compression method: deflated
compression sub-type (deflation): normal
file security status: not encrypted
extended local header: no
file last modified on (DOS date/time): 2002 Feb 16 10:48:24
32-bit CRC value (hex): a8b548b9
compressed size: 1435 bytes
uncompressed size: 3876 bytes
length of filename: 15 characters
length of extra field: 18 bytes
length of file comment: 0 characters
disk number on which file begins: disk 1
apparent file type: binary
Theos file attributes (87FD hex): Sequential .MW.....
MS-DOS file attributes (00 hex): none

The central-directory extra field contains:
- A subfield with ID 0x6854 (Theos) and 14 data bytes:
00 24 0f 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 e0 00 00.

There is no file comment.
-z Display t he zipfile comment , if any.
726 UnZip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Notes This pr ogr am, and t he Zip pr ogr am, ar e implement at ions of t he UnZip and
Zip pr ogr ams fr om Info-ZIP. Info-ZIP pr ovides fr ee, port able, high-qualit y
ver sions of t he Zip and UnZip compr essor -ar chiver ut ilit ies t hat ar e com-
pat ible wit h t he DOS-based PKZIP by PKWARE, Inc. This ver sion is avail-
able for most ot her oper at ing syst em plat for ms. Infor mat ion about
Info-ZIP may be found on t he Int er net at ht t p://www.info-zip.or g/.
See also Zip
Upcase 727
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Upcase Command Filter
Upcase copies a file t o t he st andar d out put device, conver t ing all let t er s t o upper case.
Upcase can also change t he names of files or libr ar y member s t o upper case-only char act er s.
Operation Mode 1file is copied t o t he st andard out put device wit h all lower case let -
t er s conver t ed t o upper case. The or iginal file is unchanged.
>upcase /theos/config/crt.cfg
SCREENSAVER=0
YESSCANCODE=0X15
NOSCANCODE=0X31
RESETLITERAL=OK TO REBOOT? (Y/N)
MOUSE=0
INTELLIMOUSE=FALSE
KEYPADMODE=TRUE
REPEATRATE=30
...
>upcase /theos/config/crt.cfg > crt.config
Mode 2Copies st andar d input t o st andard out put , conver t ing all lower -
case let t er s t o upper case. This for m is normally used only in a pipe. How-
ever , if st andar d input is t he console, r ecor ds ar e copied unt il a (Ctrl)+(D) is
encount er ed, signaling t he end of t he input file.
>filelist *.* | upcase > file.list
1 UPCASE file
2 UPCASE
3 UPCASE direct ory
4 UPCASE library
directory pat h t o file names
library libr ar y name of member files
Command synonym: UC
728 Upcase
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 3All of t he file names in directory ar e conver t ed t o use upper case-
only char act er s. Files in subdirect or ies of direct ory and member s of libr ar -
ies in direct ory ar e not r enamed. This mode of Upcase is not a filt er.
>upcase myfiles
/MYFILES/address.basic:S
/MYFILES/browscap.basic:S
/MYFILES/ctr.basic:S
/MYFILES/cust1.basic:S
/MYFILES/custbrws.basic:S
/MYFILES/custjs.basic:S
/MYFILES/customer.basic:S
/MYFILES/mainmenu.basic:S
/MYFILES/testit.basic:S
Only file names t hat ar e conver t ed ar e displayed.
Mode 4All of t he members of library ar e r enamed t o use upper case-only
char act er s. This mode of Upcase is not a filt er .
>upcase example.library
/EXAMPLE.LIBRARY.customer:T
/EXAMPLE.LIBRARY.cust1:T
/EXAMPLE.LIBRARY.custjs:T
Only member names t hat are conver t ed are displayed.
Notes The command name UC is a synonym t o t he Upcase command. It is not a
SYNONYM.TXT file. If st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on page
13 and STDSYN on page 110), t his synonym name may not be allowed.
Mode 3 and Mode 4 of t he Upcase command ar e useful when you need t o
ensur e t hat t he file names ar e usable when accessed by an oper at ing
syst em t hat does not r ecognize lower case file names.
See also Lowcase
Viewer 729
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Viewer Command
The Viewer command displays and allows you t o br owse t he cont ent s of t ext files.
Operation The r equest ed file is opened and displayed in a Viewer for m:
>view colors.basic
While viewing t he file you can br owse t he cont ent s wit h t he nor mal navi-
gat ion keys of (), (), (), (), (Home), (End), (PageUp) and (PageDown).
To t er minat e viewing of a file pr ess t he (Esc) or (F9) key. If mult iple files
wer e specified on t he command line t hen t he cur r ent file is closed and t he
next file is viewed. Use (Break),(Q) t o t er minat e viewing of t he cur r ent file
and t o exit t he Viewer command.
VIEWER file... ( options
opt ions FILES NUMBER WINDOW
MAXIMIZE TITLE
730 Viewer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options FILES Indicat es t hat file is an ASCII st ream file wit h each r ecor d in
and FileManager and t he FOUND.EXEC cr eat ed by Look and FileM-
anager can be used for t his specificat ion file (see The EXEC and
FILES Options on page 239). You may also cr eat e t he file wit h
an edit or or applicat ion pr ogr am.
ined:
lowing command list s t hese files:
>viewer selected.exec (file
MAXIMIZE The Viewer for m is displayed in it s maximum size.
NUMBER Each line of t he t ext file is number ed.
TITLE Allows you t o specify t he t it le for t he Viewer for m. If t his opt ion
is not used t he t it le is set t o t he name of t he file being viewed.
When t he TITLE opt ion is used, t he t it le t ext is specified imme-
diat ely following t he TITLE keywor d. The t it le t ext should be
enclosed wit hin quot at ion mar k char act er s.
Viewer 731
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>view selected.files (title "List of files to view"
WINDOW This opt ion allows you t o specify t he init ial Viewer form posi-
t ion and size. When t he opt ion is not used t he Viewer for ms ini-
t ial posit ion and size comes fr om t he VIEWER.CFG file in Users
and Configuration Files dir ect or y.
To use t he WINDOW opt ion, follow t he WINDOW keywor d wit h
t he col, r ow, widt h and height values desir ed, in t hat sequence.
>viewer somefile.txt (window 3 5 70 10
The above command specifies t hat t he Viewer for m is posi-
t ioned wit h it s upper -left cor ner at column 3, line 5 and it has a
widt h of 70 char act er s and a height of 10 lines.
Notes This command uses a st andar d for m and object s. Refer t o Chapt er 11 Ses-
sions, Forms and Objects in t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing
Syst em Refer ence manual for informat ion about manipulat ing t he for ms
size and posit ion.
The Viewer for ms init ial posit ion and size is comes from t he VIEWER.CFG file
in Users and Configuration Files dir ect or y. Any change in t his posit ion and
size made dur ing it s oper at ion is saved in t hat file for subsequent usage of
t he Viewer command wit h your UserName.
The t ext file(s) ar e viewed in r ead-only mode. Alt hough you can t ype char -
act ers int o t he viewer display, no change is made t o t he act ual t ext file.
732 Viewer
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Printing Files You may pr int t he file t hat you ar e viewing by pr essing t he (F8) key while it
is displayed. When t his is done you are pr esent ed wit h a for m allowing you
t o select t he pr int er t hat you want t o use for t he pr int ing.
HTM Files The viewer command can display and navigat e files encoded wit h HTML
t ags and hyperlinks. However , t he TBrowse is bet t er suit ed t o t his t ask.
Defaults The default TITLE is t he name of t he file being viewed. The default
WINDOW size and posit ion is t he saved values in t he /THEOS/USERS/user-
name/VIEWER.CFG:S file.
Restrictions Only st r eam files can be viewed wit h t his command. Only ASCII t ext files
will display t he cont ent s meaningfully.
See also Img, List, More, TBrowse, WinWrite
VNC Client 733
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
VNC Client Command
The VNC command is t he client por t ion of a VNC client /ser ver pr ot ocol. It allows you t o be a
Vir t ual Net wor k Console t o anot her syst em on t he net wor k t hat is running a VNC ser ver .
Operation When VNC is execut ed you may provide t he VNC ser ver host IP address or
name on t he command-line. If you do not t hen you ar e asked t o supply it :
Aft er connect ing t o a ser ver , t hat ser ver s IP name or addr ess is r emem-
ber ed and will be used by default t he next t ime t hat VNC is invoked.
When you do supply t he host name or addr ess on t he command line you
ar e not asked t o supply it wit h t he above form nor ar e you allowed t o
change t he opt ions which ar e only accessible by select ing t he Options
but t on in t hat for m. (See Opt ions on page 735.)
Most VNC ser ver s r equir e a passwor d t o connect t o t he ser ver . If a pass-
wor d is r equir ed you will be asked:
Remember t hat passwor ds ar e case-sensit ive.
1 VNC host
host IP addr ess or name of machine r unning VNC ser ver
734 VNC Client
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Aft er a valid passwor d is ent er ed and accept ed by t he ser ver t he connec-
t ion is complet ed and t he deskt op of t he ser ver is displayed on t his console.
The above display is a VNC connect ion t o a Windows VNC ser ver . The res-
olut ion of t he act ual display is much bet t er t han shown her e because of
scaling and pr int ing limit at ions.
If you have not checked t he View (inputs ignored) opt ion t hen mouse and
keyboar d act ions per for med in t his session of THEOS will be communi-
cat ed t o and will cont rol t he r emot e deskt op. To exit fr om VNC use t he
(Break),(Q) sequence.
VNC Client 735
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options Opt ions for t he VNC client may be set by invoking VNC wit hout specifying
a host on t he command line and t hen select ing t he Options but t on in t he
connect ion for m.
Preferred encoding. This set of opt ions det er mine how t his client handles
t he graphical dat a t r ansmit t ed. Check one of t he following encodings and
t his client will r equest t hat t ype of encoding from t he ser ver . The default
Hextile is pot ent ially t he most efficient in t r ansmission bandwidt h.
Hextile Hext ile is a var iat ion on t he CoRRE encoding. Rect angles ar e
split up int o 16x16 tiles, allowing t he dimensions of t he sub-
r ect angles t o be specified in 4 bit s each, 16 bit s in t ot al.
CoRRE CoRRE is a var iant of RRE, wher e it is guar ant eed t hat t he
largest rect angle sent is no more t han 255x255 pixels. A ser ver
which want s t o send a r ect angle lar ger t han t his simply split s
it up and sends sever al smaller RFB r ect angles. Wit hin each of
t hese smaller r ect angles, a single byt e can t hen be used t o r ep-
r esent t he dimensions of t he subr ect angles. For a t ypical desk-
t op, t his result s in bet t er compr ession t han RRE.
RRE RRE st ands for rise-and-run-length encoding and is essent ially
a t wo-dimensional analogue of r un-lengt h encoding.
Raw This is t he simplest encoding of pixel dat a. Wit h it , dat a con-
sist s of n pixel values wher e n is t he widt h t imes t he height of
t he r ect angle.
Allow CopyRect encoding The copy rectangle encoding is a ver y simple and
efficient encoding which can be used when t he client alr eady
has t he same pixel dat a elsewhere in it s fr amebuffer . You
should always enable t his opt ion t o opt imize dat a t r ansfer if
and when possible.
736 VNC Client
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Misc. Miscellaneous opt ions.
Request shared session Nor mally, when you est ablish a VNC connect ion
t o a r emot e ser ver , any exist ing VNC connect ions t o t hat
ser ver ar e t er minat ed allowing you t o be t he only VNC on t hat
ser ver . By enabling t his opt ion, exist ing connect ions on t he
ser ver ar e not t er minat ed.
Deiconify on Bell
Disable clipboard transfer Clipboar d changes caused by cut t ing or copying
at eit her t he viewer or ser ver end ar e nor mally t r ansmit t ed t o
t he ot her end. This opt ion disables clipboar d t r ansfer s.
Mouse. The following opt ions cont r ol how t he mouse on t he local console is
int er pr et ed and used by t he r emot e host deskt op.
Emulate 3 Buttons This opt ion allows a t wo-but t on mouse t o emulat e a
middle but t on by pr essing bot h but t ons at once.
Swap mouse buttons 2 and 3 Nor mally t he mouse but t ons left -middle-r ight
ar e mapped on t o but t ons 1,2,3. This opt ion causes t hem t o be
mapped ont o but t ons 1,3,2, which may be mor e useful for t wo-
but t on user s who only have left and r ight mouse but t ons
because t hey will t hen get but t ons 1 & 2 inst ead of 1 & 3.
If combined wit h 3-but t on emulat ion, t his also causes t he mid-
dle but t on t o emulat e but t on 3 inst ead of but t on 2.
Display. These opt ions cont r ol how t he VNC viewer displays t he deskt op of
t he r emot e host syst em.
Restrict pixels to 8-bit The VNC client nor mally accept s what ever pixel for -
mat t he ser ver offer s. This opt ion r equest s 8-bit t r ue-color pix-
els fr om t he server, which r educes net wor k t r affic.
View (inputs ignored) Checking t his it em pr event s you fr om act ually con-
t r olling t he r emot e host . Inst ead, you ar e allowed view-only
access.
Full-screen mode This opt ion is useful if t he local scr een is smaller t han
t he r emot e host deskt op. When not enabled, t he lar ger deskt op
is displayed on t he local scr een wit h scr oll bar s on t he r ight
and bot t om edges of t he display. To view t he por t ions t hat ar e
not displayed you must use t he mouse t o dr ag t he scroll bar
but t ons in t he dir ect ion desir ed.
Wit h t he Full-screen mode opt ion enabled, t he scr oll bar s ar e
not displayed. Inst ead, moving t he mouse t o t he edge of t he
VNC Client 737
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
scr een causes t he display t o shift it s viewing window of t he
deskt op in t hat dir ect ion.
Notes This VNC client is based upon pr ogr am code t hat is copyr ight ed by AT&T
Labor at or ies Cambridge and is used under t he condit ions of t he GNU Gen-
er al Public License.
The VNC logo is a t r ademar k of AT&T Labs-Cambridge Lt d.
Cautions The normal caut ions apply when accessing a comput er t hat is r emot e t o
your self. Since you cannot physically see t he comput er and you may not
have physical access t o t he comput er , do not per for m oper t ions such as
clear ing disket t es, t apes, et c. or pr int ing on any of t he pr int er s unless you
ar e sur e of t he media loaded in t he dr ive or pr int er .
Restrictions The VNC client may only be used on a VGA display configur ed for gr aphics
mode.
See also NetTerm
738 VNC Client
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WhereIs 739
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WhereIs Command
This command sear ches t he direct or y t r ee of t he cur r ent account looking for all inst ances of
a file name.
Operation St ar t ing wit h t he r oot dir ect or y of t he cur r ent account , a sear ch is made
for all files t hat mat ch file. If file specifies a pat h, t he sear ch st ar t s at t hat
pat h. All subdir ect or ies subor dinat e t o t he st ar t ing sear ch dir ect ory ar e
examined.
As shown above, when a file is found t hat mat ches file, t he complet e pat h
t o t he file is displayed and you ar e asked: Cont inue sear ching? You may
select t he Yes, No or Go but t ons.
WHEREIS file... ( options
opt ions dat e1
dat e2
>tree /
/
data
abc
doc
programs
files
programs
Programs
Backups
doc
Special
>whereis backups.c
740 WhereIs
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Select ing t he Yes but t on means t hat you want t o cont inue t he sear ch; t he
No but t on means t hat you do not want t o cont inue sear ching and you want
t o exit WhereIs wit hout changing anyt hing.
Select ing t he Go but t on means t hat you want t o discont inue t he search
and t hat you want t o set your cur r ent wor king dir ect or y t o t he pat h of t he
file found.
Options dat e1 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is gr eat er t han
t his dat e.
>whereis *.*:s f (10/15/01
The above command will include in t he sear ch only t hose files
t hat have been creat ed or changed since Oct ober 14, 2001.
dat e2 Includes a file only if t he files last change dat e is less t han or
t his dat e. May only be specified by fir st specifying t he dat e1
opt ion.
>whereis *.*:s f (10/15/01 10/30/01
This command includes only t hose files t hat have been creat ed
cr eat ed or changed aft er Oct ober 30, 2001.
To specify a date2 when you dont car e about dat e1, use a dat e
>whereis *.*:s f (1/1/86 11/20/01
or changed pr ior t o November 21, 2001, are included.
Defaults Unless a pat h is specified wit h file, t he sear ch st ar t s wit h t he r oot dir ec-
t or y of t he cur r ent account .
Restrictions You may only sear ch for files in t he cur rent account .
See also ChDir, FileManager
Which 741
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Which Command
The Which command displays t he complet e pat h t o a pr ogr am. It sear ches in t he cur r ent
dir ect or y and in t he st andar d locat ions for pr ogr ams.
Operation Search for each of t he files specified in t he st andar d program locat ions
including any defined PATH and user command libr ar ies. This is t he same
sear ch locat ions and sear ch sequence used when file is execut ed as speci-
fied. As soon as a pr ogr am file is found mat ching file it s complet e pat h is
displayed.
>which fileman
SYSTEM\Programs/FileManager/FileMan.cmd:s
>which fm makeimg
SYSTEM\Programs/FileManager/FileMan.cmd:s
/Theos/Command/MAKEIMG.EXC:S
Notes The pr imar y pur pose of t he Which command is t o find t he locat ion of a pr o-
gr am when t here ar e mult iple files wit h t he same name. For inst ance,
t her e may be files in t he cur r ent account and dir ect or y named
MYPROG.COMMAND, MYPROG.CMD, MYPROG.EXEC and t her e may be a file in t he
SYSTEM account named /THEOS/COMMANDS/MYPROG.CMD. When you ent er t he
command name MYPROG on t he command line you may wonder why it
keeps execut ing a pr ogr am t hat you did not expect or execut es a differ ent
pr ogr am depending upon what t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y is. The Which
command will r epor t t he locat ion and name of t he pr ogr am t hat is exe-
cut ed when t he pat h and/or file ext ension is not specified.
See also FileList, FileManager, Find, WhereIs
WHICH file ...
file pr ogr am name wit h opt ional file-t ype
742 Which
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Who 743
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Who Command
WhoAmI Command EXEC
The Who command displays all st ar t ed user pr ocesss and who is logged ont o t hem. The
WhoAmI command displays which account you ar e logged ont o and ot her infor mat ion about
your self.
Operation Mode 1The Who command shows all processs t hat have been st art ed
wit h consoles at t ached. For inst ance, t he processs used by t he pr int
spooler , disk cache and net wor k ser ver pr ogr ams ar e not displayed.
>who
Mode 2The Who Am I command displays t he following infor mat ion about
your self:
Account Name: SYSTEM
Account Number: 0
User Name: Myname
Logon Date: 10 April 2002, 09:52 AM
Pid: 10
Console: NET1 C210,L80,P24,REMOTE=JUPITER
Description: Primary Corona system
Workgroup: ACCOUNTING
Server Name: Saturn
Server Address: 192.168.1.100
Client Name: JUPITER
1 WHO
2 WHO AM I
3 WHOAMI
744 WhoAmI
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Client Address: 192.168.1.104
The above infor mat ion was pr oduced when t he user was using a net wor k
client as a user t o t he THEOS syst em.
Mode 3This mode is synonymous wit h Mode 2. It is act ually an EXEC
language pr ogr am t hat invokes t he Who Am I command. You could modify
t his EXEC pr ogr am t o supply ot her infor mat ion if you choose.
Notes On non-gr aphic consoles, if t he envir onment var iable LINEGRAPH is
defined t o be N, t he line gr aphics ar e suppr essed. For inst ance:
>who
1 SYSTEM HELP CRT1:1 C90,L80,P29
2 SYSTEM CSI CRT1:2 C90,L80,P29
3 SAMPLES CSI CRT1:3 C90,L80,P33
6 LOGON CRT1:8 C90,L80,P24
16 PRIVATE WHO NET1 C210,L80,P28,REMOTE=DocSystem
>
See also Show
WhoIs 745
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WhoIs Command
Quer ies t he Int er net domain dat abase r egar ding r egist er ed domain name and users.
Operation Mode 1Issues a r equest t o t he Int er net domain dat abase t o get t he reg-
ist ered infor mat ion about a second-level domain name.
>whois theos-software.com
Registrant:
Theos Software (THEOS-SOFTWARE-DOM)
1801 Oakland Blvd, Suite 315
Walnut Creek, CA 94596
US

Domain Name: THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM

Administrative Contact, Technical Contact:
THEOS Host Master (YGTAWDHKBO) hostmaster@THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM
1801 Oakland Blvd; Suite 315
USA
925 935-1118

Record expires on 13-Oct-2002.
Record created on 12-Oct-1995.
Database last updated on 10-Jul-2002 18:57:57 EDT.

Domain servers in listed order:

DNS1.THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM 65.45.113.228
DNS2.THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM 65.45.113.229
NS1.ALGX.NET 216.99.225.30
NS2.ALGX.NET 216.99.225.31
1 WHOIS domain
2 WHOIS "user"
3 WHOIS #handle
domain second-level domain name
user user name in for m of last -name, fir st -name
handle user handle
746 WhoIs
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mode 2Issues a r equest t o t he Int er net domain dat abase t o get t he r eg-
ist er ed infor mat ion about a user cont act .
Not e t hat , in t he Mode 1 example, t he administ r at ive cont act is THEOS
Host mast er:
>whois "THEOS Hostmaster"
No match for "THEOS HOSTMASTER"
Not all r egist r ar s suppor t a quer y by cont act name.
Mode 3Issues a r equest t o t he Int er net domain dat abase t o get t he r eg-
ist er ed infor mat ion about a user handle.
Not e t hat , in t he Mode 1 example, t he administ r at ive cont act has a handle
of YGTAWDHKBO:
>whois #ygtawdhkbo
THEOS Host Master (YGTAWDHKBO) hostmaster@THEOS-SOFTWARE.COM
1801 Oakland Blvd; Suite 315
USA
925 935-1118

Database last updated on 10-Jul-2002 20:00:57 EDT.
Not all r egist r ar s wit h a WhoIs ser ver support t he quer ying of cont act han-
dles.
Notes Alt hough all second-level domains are r egist er ed, only t he r esponsible par -
t ies t o t hose domains ar e r egist ered by name and handle.
The for mat and cont ent of t he r egist r at ion dat abase may var y depending
upon t he administ r at or for t he fir st -level domain of t he r equest ed domain.
See also NsLookup
747
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Window Management Commands
These 18 commands ar e pr imarily used by EXEC language pr ogr ams t o pr ovide window and
session management cont r ol.
1 wBypass mode
2 wClear window char
3 wClip window clip
4 wClose window
5 wClose ALL
6 wColor window Fg Bg Rfg Rbg
7 wFinish
8 wFrame window frame shadow at tribute
9 wInvert window invert
10 wMenu Count Col Row Tit le Invert Invert Color Fg Bg Rfg Rbg
KEEP window HOT
11 wMove window col row
12 wMsgBox t itle message t ype ( WAIT seconds
13 wMsgBox icon title message type ( WAIT seconds
14 wOpen window col row columns rows
15 wRefresh window
16 wRemove window
17 wRestore window file
18 wSave window file
19 wSelect window update display
20 wStat
21 wStat window
22 wStat ?
23 wStat ? window field
24 wSwitch switch
25 wSwitch session
26 wTitle window title top-bottom align at tribute
748
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
align LEFT
CENTER
RIGHT
attribut e bit -mapped color and at t r ibut es
fg bg
bg backgr ound color code or name (black, blue, gr een, cyan, r ed,
magent a, yellow and whit e)
char char act er or charact er value
clip OFF
ON
col left most column number
columns widt h of window (1255)
count number of it ems in menu list
display TOP
HIDDEN
fg for egr ound color code or name (black, blue, gr een, cyan, r ed,
magent a, yellow and whit e)
frame NONE
SINGLE
DOUBLE
RAISED
SUNKEN
invert OFF
ON
mode OFF
ON
row t opmost r ow number
rows height of window (1255)
session session number (18)
shadow NONE
LEFT
RIGHT
switch OFF
ON
tit le t ext for window t it le
top-bot tom BOTTOM
TOP
updat e OFF
ON
window window number
749
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wBypass The wBypass command enables or disables t he window manager s bypass
mode.
>wbypass off
Nor mally, window manager bypass mode is off, meaning t hat all char ac-
t er s sent t o t he console are int er cept ed and processed by t he window man-
ager . Window manager saves t he char act er and it s at t r ibut es in t he
appr opr iat e window in memor y and t r ansmit s t he charact er t o t he console
if t he window is select ed and it s updat e st at us is enabled.
>wbypass on
When window manager bypass mode is enabled, char act er s sent t o t he
console ar e not int er cept ed by window manager . The char act er is dis-
played immediat ely on t he console and it is not saved in any window in
memor y.
Invoking wBypass wit h no par amet er displays t he cur r ent window man-
ager bypass mode.
>wbypass
Bypass mode is not set
wClear The wClear command clear s t he int er ior of an open window t o a specified
char act er or t o spaces.
>wclear 5
>wclear 8 176
The fir st command clear s window five t o spaces. The second clears window
eight , filling it wit h t he st ipple pat t er n char act er . Refer t o Appendix G:
THEOS Character Sets, st art ing on page 265 of t he THEOS Corona Ver -
sion 5 Operat ing Syst em Refer ence manual for a list of char act er s sup-
por t ed by THEOS.
The window must be select ed or refreshed t o see t he effect s of t his com-
mand.
wClip The wClip command changes t he t ext clip at t r ibut e of a window. The clip
at t r ibut e of a window cont r ols whet her t ext is t r uncat ed (clipped) or
wr apped when it flows beyond t he r ight edge of t he window.
The init ial or default clip at t r ibut e is ON, meaning t hat t ext is t r uncat ed.
750
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wClose The wClose command closes and r emoves t he specified window. If t hat
window is t he act ive window, t hen t he next lower window is select ed as t he
act ive window.
>wclose 4
The wClose ALL command select s window zer o and t hen closes and r emoves
all ot her open windows.
>wclose all
wColor Change t he int er ior color s of an open window. The window does not have
t o be t he act ive window. The display of t he window might not be updat ed
immediat ely, unless it is select ed wit h updat e on.
The colors may be specified wit h color number s or wit h t he t he color name.
Color names must be complet ely spelled out .
wFinish The wFinish command is synonymous wit h a wClose ALL command. It
select s window zero and closes and r emoves all ot her windows.
wFrame The wFrame command changes an exist ing windows fr ame and shadow
st yle. The windows frame and shadow ar e set t o t he indicat ed st yles wit h
t he r equest ed color s and at t r ibut es.
>wframe 3 single right
>wframe 4 double none white red
>wframe 30 single right 0x70
Bot h frame and shadow must be specified but t he at tribute or color of t he
fr ame can be omit t ed, in which case it is left unchanged. For a descr ipt ion
of t he at t r ibut e specificat ion, r efer t o Frame & Title Attributes on page 151 of
t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference manual.
The changed fr ame and shadow st yles and at t r ibut es ar e not displayed
unt il t he window is select ed or r efr eshed, unless it is t he cur r ent window.
Code Name Code Name
0 Black 4 Red
1 Blue 5 Magent a
2 Gr een 6 Yellow
3 Cyan 7 Whit e
751
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wInvert The wInvert command changes t he nor mal video/r ever se video st at us of t he
indicat ed window. Alt hough t his command can be used on color or mono-
chr ome displays, it is only effect ive on monochr ome displays. Windows
should be defined wit h color at t r ibut es and inver t at t r ibut es. The color
at t r ibut es ar e ignor ed on monochr ome displays and t he inver t at t r ibut es
ar e ignor ed on t he color displays.
>winvert 14 on
>winvert 23 off
The init ial or default inver t mode for a window depends upon it s window
number. Odd number ed windows default t o inver t ON, even number ed
windows default t o inver t OFF.
wMenu The wMenu command can only be used in an EXEC pr ogr am because it
r equir es t he menu it em t ext t o be placed in t he EXEC pr ogr ams st ack
(&BEGSTACK or &STACK st at ement s) befor e execut ing t he command.
This command displays a menu or choice list on t he screen and let s t he
oper at or select one of t he it ems. The count, col and row par amet ers must
be supplied but t he ot her fields ar e opt ional.
&begstack
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
&end
wmenu 3 5 10
Blank it ems in t he list of menu choices display as a hor izont al line. For
inst ance:
&begstack
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
Last Item
&end
wmenu 5 5 10
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
Item 1
752
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The window used by wMenu is always double-line fr amed and has a dr op
shadow on t he r ight , space per mit t ing.
col and row specify t he upper -left cor ner of t he int er ior of t he window.
The widt h and height of t he menu depend upon t he it ems displayed. The
widt h of t he window is t he lar ger of t he longest it em in t he list and t he
lengt h of t he menu tit le. The height of t he window is t he smaller of t he
r emaining scr een dept h minus 4 and count. When t he window height is
less t han count , a scr oll bar is displayed on t he r ight side of t he menu
fr ame.
INVERT Parameter. Use t his par amet er if t he EXEC pr ogr am may be used
on a monochr ome display. It has t he same effect on t he menu window as
t he wInvert command has on user -defined windows.
wmenu 10 3 3 invert on color white blue white red
COLOR Parameters. This par amet er defines t he color s used for t he fr ame,
t it le, menu it em t ext and t he select ion highlight bar . It should be used if
t he EXEC pr ogr am may be used on a color display.
wmenu 10 3 3 invert on color white blue white red
The fg and bg color s ar e used for t he menu it em t ext , t he fr ame and t he
t it le t ext . rvfg and rvbg color s ar e used for t he select ion highlight bar .
When t he COLOR phr ase is not used and t he display is capable of color s,
t he default colors ar e used for t he menu window. Refer t o Window Colors
and Invert Status on page 150 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating
S yst em Reference manual.
KEEP Parameter. This par amet er per for ms t wo funct ions: It specifies t he
window number used for t he menu and it t ells wMenu t o not close or
r emove t he window when a select ion is made.
When t his par amet er is not used t he menu window is aut omat ically closed
and removed when t he oper at or select s a menu it em.
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
Last Item
Item 1
753
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Not e: The menu window is always opened or reopened when wMenu st ar t s,
even if it is t he same window number and menu it em list used t he last
t ime t hat wMenu execut ed.
HOT Parameter. The HOT par amet er t ells wMenu t hat menu it ems can be
select ed using hot -keys. When t his paramet er is used, each it em in t he
menu list must specify t he posit ion of t he char act er used for hot -key selec-
t ion of t he it em. For inst ance:
&begstack
6 Item 1
6 Item 2
6 Item 3
&end
wmenu 3 5 10 HOT
In t his list , t he sixt h char act er of each it em is t he hot -key char act er . Char -
act er posit ions ar e count ed st ar t ing wit h t he fir st non-space char act er fol-
lowing t he hot -key char act er number . In t he above example, t he hot keys
ar e t he char act er s 1, 2 and 3, r espect ively.
Item Selection. When t he menu displays, t he select ion highlight bar is
posit ioned on t he fir st it em in t he menu. You may use t he () and () keys
t o move t he highlight bar up and down. The (Home) and (End) keys move t he
highlight bar t o t he first and last it ems in t he list .
The (Space) key advances t he highlight bar t o t he next it em. Unlike t he
() key, t he (Space) key wr aps fr om t he last it em t o t he first .
Pr essing (Enter) select s t he highlight ed it em.
You may also posit ion t o and/or select an it em using a hot -key or soft hot -
key. Hot -keys ar e enabled wit h t he HOT par amet er and ar e indicat ed wit h
underlined charact ers in t he it em list . Soft hot -keys ar e enabled when t he
HOT par amet er is not used.
When hot -keys ar e enabled, you may pr ess an under lined char act er . This
causes t he highlight bar t o move t o t he fir st it em cont aining t he under -
lined charact er. If t her e is only one it em wit h t hat hot -key, t he it em is
aut omat ically select ed just as if you had pr essed (Enter).
When soft hot -keys ar e enabled, pressing a char act er posit ions t he high-
light bar t o t he next it em t hat st ar t s wit h t hat char act er . If t her e ar e no
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
Item 1
754
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
more it ems st ar t ing wit h t hat char act er , t hen t he highlight bar moves t o
t he first it em st ar t ing wit h t he char act er .
Hot -key and soft hot -key select ion is case-insensit ive.
Select ing an it em set s t he ret ur n code (EXEC &RETCODE var iable) t o t he
select ed it ems number . Pr essing (Esc) select s no it em but exit s wMenu, set -
t ing t he r et ur n code t o zer o.
wMove The wMove command moves a window t o a new locat ion on t he screen. col
and row are t he column and r ow number s of t he new locat ion for t he
upper -left cor ner of t he int er ior of t he window.
Not e t hat windows can be moved by t he oper at or using a mouse or a vir -
t ual mouse.
wMsgBox Display a message box for m. A message box for m is a for m wit h a t it le,
message t ext and opt ional operat or r esponse but t ons. For inst ance:
>wmsgbox question "Title text" "Example message text" YNC
Icon. This is an opt ional par amet er t hat can be used t o specify t hat t he
message for m has a gr aphical icon displayed on it . Ther e ar e four icons
available and t hey ar e specified wit h t heir icon names:
Title. The t ext specified in t his posit ion is displayed in t he t it le bar of t he
for m. Alt hough you can specify an empt y st ring, t her e will always be a
t it le bar for t he for m. You should enclose t he t it le t ext in quot at ion mar ks
Icon name Displays
Exclamation
Information
Question
Stop
755
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
t o ensur e t hat it uses t he t ext t hat you specify r at her t han just t he fir st
wor d.
Message. This is t he t ext t hat is displayed in t he body of t he for m. You
should enclose t his t ext in quot at ion mar ks.
Type. This par amet er specifies t he oper at or r esponse but t ons t hat ar e dis-
played in t he message box form. It can be specified wit h a numer ic code or
a mneumonic code.
WAIT seconds. This opt ion allows you t o display t he message form and, if
t her e is no r esponse fr om t he oper at or for seconds amount of t ime, t he
message for m clears it self and exit s.
Code Mneumonic Buttons
0 O OK
1 OC OK, Cancel
2 ARI Abort, Retry and Cancel
3 YNC Yes, No and Cancel
4 YN Yes and No
5 RC Retry and Cancel
6 C Cancel
7 YNAN Yes, No, Yes to All and No to All
8 NONE No but t ons
756
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Return code. The r et ur n code is set accor ding t o t he way t hat t he message
for m is exit ed.
wOpen The wOpen command defines a new window or r edefines an exist ing win-
dow. window r efer s t o t he window number of t he new or exist ing window.
col and row ar e t he column number and r ow number of t he upper -left
corner of t he int er ior of t he window (excluding t he fr ame and shadow). col-
umns and rows refer t o t he widt h and dept h of t he int erior of t he window.
>wopen 1 10 5 58 10
>wframe 1 sunken right
>wtitle 1 " Window 1 " top center
>wselect 1
Return Code Exited by
0 The (Esc) key, mouse clicking on t he (X) symbol or t he
WAIT seconds t imed out .
1 The OK but t on.
2 The Cancel but t on.
3 The Abor t but t on.
4 The Ret r y but t on.
5 The Ignor e but t on.
6 The Yes but t on.
7 The No but t on.
8 The Yes t o All but t on.
9 The No t o All but t on.
757
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The window may be specified wit h a quest ion mar k. When t his is done, t he
next available window number is used for t he new window. The window
number is r et ur ned as t he r et ur n code of t he wOpen command.
This command does not select t he new window, it only cr eat es it in mem-
or y.
The init ial at t r ibut es of a new or r eopened window ar e: double-line fr ame
wit h no shadow or t it le; clip on and updat e on. It has neit her t he hidden
nor t op at t r ibut e set (see wSelect command on page 759). If t her e is insuffi-
cient space ar ound t he int er ior of t he window for a fr ame, t hen t he window
has no fr ame. The int erior of a new or r eopened window is empt y wit h t he
cur sor locat ion at t he upper -left cor ner .
The color and inver t st at us of t he window and it s fr ame ar e dependent
upon it s window number, t he capabilit ies of t he console and t he set up for
session color s for t his console. Refer t o Window Colors and Invert Status on
page 150 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operat ing S ystem Reference
manual for more infor mat ion about default color s and inver t st at us.
wRefresh The wRefresh command updat es t he display of a window on t he console
wit hout making it t he act ive window.
This command updat es t he display of t he window int er ior , fr ame, t it le and
shadow. It does not change t he or der of t he window. That is, if t he window
is cover ed by anot her window, t hen t he por t ion t hat is cover ed is not dis-
played. The wSelect command changes t he or der of display for a window.
>wopen 1 10 5 58 10
>wframe 1 sunken right
>wtitle 1 " Window 1 " top center
>wselect 1
Window 1
>
758
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wRemove The wRemove command erases t he display of a window fr om t he scr een.
Any and all windows previously cover ed by window become visible.
This command does not close t he window.
wRestore The wRestore command r et r ieves a window definit ion and cont ent s t hat
wer e previously saved t o disk wit h t he wSave command.
wrestore 30 sample.copyrite
The above command r est or es t he window saved in t he file SAMPLE.COPYRITE
(see wSave command example).
A r est or ed window has all of t he at t r ibut es of t he saved window including:
+ Window locat ion
+ Window size
+ Cur sor locat ion
+ Fr ame st yle, at t r ibut es and color
+ Shadow posit ion
+ Tit le posit ion, alignment , at t r ibut es and color
+ Clip st at us
+ Inver t st at us
+ Display t ype (hidden, t op or neit her )
+ Int erior cont ent s including t ext , at t r ibut es and color
The window is r est ored wit h t his command but not displayed. You must
use t he wRefresh command or t he wSelect command t o display t he new
window on t he scr een.
759
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wSave The wSave command saves a window descr ipt ion and cont ent s t o a disk
file.
wopen 1 46 4 30 3
wframe 1 double right 0x17
wclip 1 on
wselect 1 top
color white blue
&crt pon
&crt 7 1
&type SAMPLE Version 1.0 \
&crt 2 2
&type by ABC Software Corporation \
&crt 7 3
&type All rights reserved \
&crt poff
wselect 1 on top
wsave 1 sample.copyrite
The pr eceding EXEC st at ement s and commands cr eat e a window and fills
it wit h a copyr ight not ice for t he pr ogr am SAMPLE. This window definit ion
is saved in t he disk file SAMPLE.COPYRITE.
A window definit ion saved wit h t he wSave command can be used by t he
wRestore command, t he BASIC language WINDOW RESTORE st at ement or
t he C language wRestore funct ion.
wSelect The wSelect command select s a window as t he act ive window for t ext dis-
play and oper at or input , and it defines t he display or der of t he window.
For inst ance:
wselect 3 on
This command specifies t hat window number t hr ee is t he act ive window,
t hat it is r efr eshed and t hat all t ext wr it t en t o t he window will appear on
t he scr een if t he window is not over laid by windows wit h t he TOP
at t r ibut e.
Select ing a window always makes it t he act ive window. It also r est or es t he
display at t r ibut es in effect t he last t ime t hat t he window was select ed.
Specifically, t he following at t r ibut es ar e r est or ed: t he cur sor locat ion,
cur sor on/off mode, video at t ribut es (blink, under line, et c.) and nor mal and
r ever se video color s.
The fir st t ime t hat a window is select ed, it s cur sor locat ion is 1,1.
Select ing a window places it on t op of all ot her windows except t hose t hat
wer e last select ed wit h t he TOP display mode.
760
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Window zer o is always open and can be select ed wit h t his command but it
cannot be specified as TOP or HIDDEN.
Update ON. Select ing a window wit h updat e mode ON means t hat t he
window is r efr eshed on scr een and subsequent t ext wr it t en t o t his act ive
window is displayed on t he scr een. This is t he default mode when select ing
a window.
Update OFF. Select ing a window wit h updat e mode OFF means t hat t he
window is not r efreshed on scr een. Text wr it t en t o t he window is not dis-
played on t he scr een but it is saved in memor y and will appear t he next
t ime t hat t he window is r efr eshed or select ed wit h updat e ON st at us.
Display TOP. Select ing a window wit h t he TOP display at t r ibut e causes
t he window t o be displayed on t he screen on t op of all ot her windows,
including ot her windows mar ked as TOP. TOP implies an updat e ON st a-
t us.
>wselect 3 top
>wselect 3 off top
The above t wo commands have ident ical effect s: window t hree is select ed
as t he act ive window, it s display or der is on t op of all ot her windows, it is
r efr eshed on scr een and subsequent t ext writ t en t o t he window appear s on
t he scr een.
Display HIDDEN. Select ing a window wit h t he HIDDEN display at t r ibut e
causes t he window t o be r emoved from t he scr een. HIDDEN implies updat e
OFF st at us. Alt hough it is t he act ive window, it does not appear on t he
scr een unt il it is r efr eshed or reselect ed wit h updat e ON st at us.
A hidden window has all t he pr opert ies of non-hidden windows except it is
not visible on t he scr een unt il it is refreshed or select ed wit hout t he
HIDDEN at t r ibut e.
761
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wStat The wStat command displays t he gener al st at us for all windows, t he com-
plet e st at us for a specific window or it r et ur ns t he cur r ent ly act ive window
number.
General Window Status. Using wStat wit h no par amet er s displays a br ief
summar y of all open windows.
>wopen 1 2 2 70 20
>wopen 2 4 4 68 18
>wopen 3 6 6 66 16
>wstat
0* 80x24 beg=0,0 cur=0,11 order=0 update=1
1 70x20 beg=1,1 cur=0,0 order=-1 update=0
Each open window is list ed wit h t he following infor mat ion:
+ Window number . The act ive window is denot ed wit h an ast er isk.
+ Window int er ior size using number base one.
+ Window int er ior or igin (upper -left cor ner) using number base zer o.
+ Cur rent cur sor locat ion wit hin t he window using number base
zer o.
+ Display or der . An or der number of -1 indicat es t hat t he window is
not curr ent ly displayed on t he scr een. Eit her it has never been
select ed or r efr eshed, or it is HIDDEN.
+ Window updat e st at us. A code of one means t hat t ext wr it t en t o
t he window is displayed on t he scr een.
762
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Display Current Window Number. When wStat is invoked wit h a quest ion
mar k, it set s t he r et ur n code t o t he cur rent window number . This r et ur n
code is easily used in an EXEC pr ogr am by r efer encing t he &RETCODE
var iable.
wstat ?
&type The current window number is &retcode
&curr_window = &retcode
Specific Window Status. When wStat is given a window number , t he com-
plet e st at us of t hat window is displayed.
>wselect 2

>wstat 2
status: 1
begin col,row: 3,3
width: 68
height: 18
curr col,row: 0,6
cursor: 0
frame-type: 2
shadow-type: 1
title-type: 2
title-align: 2
title-attr: 0x1C5F
frame-attr: 0x1C5F
clip: 1
update: 0
curr-attr: 0x1C5F
order: 0
color: 7,5,7,0
invert: 0
763
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Status Element Meaning Codes Used
status Window st at us 0 = Not open
1 = Open, not act ive
2 = Open, act ive
begin col,row Window int er ior or igin, base zer o
width Window int er ior widt h, base one
height Window int er ior height , base one
curr col,row Cur sor locat ion, base zer o
cursor Cur sor display t ype 0 = Not displayed
1 = Blinking under line
2 = Blinking block
3 = St eady under line
4 = St eady block
frame-type Fr ame st yle 0 = None
1 = Single line
2 = Double line
3 = Raised
4 = Sunken
shadow-type Shadow st yle 0 = None
1 = Right
2 = Left
title-type Tit le posit ion 0 = None
1 = Top
2 = Bot t om
title-align Tit le alignment 0 = Cent er
1 = Left
2 = Right
title-attr Bit -mapped value indicat ing t he for egr ound and
backgr ound t it le color s and t he at t r ibut es.
frame-attr Bit -mapped value indicat ing t he for egr ound and
backgr ound fr ame color s and t he at t r ibut es.
clip Int erior t ext clipping 0 = Off
1 = On
update Updat e and display
st at us
0 = Updat e OFF
1 = Updat e ON
2 = Updat e ON, TOP
4 = Updat e OFF, HIDDEN
764
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Specific Window Field Status. You may get a specific paramet er of a spe-
cific windows st at us. When wStat is given a quest ion mar k followed by a
window number and a st at us field number, t he st at us of t hat windows
field is displayed.
>wstat ? 3 4
RC = 30, 08:53:45, et = 0:00, cpu = 0.072
>
In t he above example, a r equest is made for t he widt h of window 3. The
r et ur n code is set t o 30 indicat ing t hat t hat is t he widt h of t he window.
The field codes for window st at us are:
curr-attr Bit -mapped value indicat ing t he cur r ent window
int erior for egr ound and backgr ound color s and t he
at t r ibut es.
order Window display
sequence
Lowest or bot t om-most win-
dow is 0. A -1 means win-
dow is not displayed
(hidden or has never been
displayed).
color Window int erior color codes for fg, bg, rvfg, r vbg.
invert Monochr ome inver t
st at us
0 = Off
1 = On
The bit -mapped values used for t he t it le, fr ame and cur r ent at t r ibut e fields ar e not useful
in an EXEC pr ogr am. This same infor mat ion is available by using t he appr opr iat e func-
t ions in a pr ogr am. Refer t o t he languages r efer ence manual for a descr ipt ion of t hese
codes.
Code Field
0 St at us
1 Top left column
2 Top left r ow
3 Widt h
4 Height
5 Cur r ent cur sor column
6 Cur r ent cur sor r ow
Status Element Meaning Codes Used
765
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
wSwitch The wSwitch command can enable or disable session-swit ching, or it can
swit ch t o anot her session on your console.
Session-swit ching is nor mally enabled. The wSwitch command can disable
it if, for some r eason, you do not want t he oper at or swit ching t o a differ ent
session while your EXEC program cont inues t o execut e.
wswitch OFF
The above command disables session-swit ching.
wswitch ON
The above command enables session-swit ching. Session swit ching may
also be cont r olled wit h t he Session command.
The wSwitch command can also swit ch t o a differ ent session r unning on
your console. Mer ely ent er t he session number desir ed.
wswitch 4
7 Cur sor shape
8 Window fr ame t ype
9 Window shadow t ype
10 Tit le t ype
11 Tit le alignment
12 Tit le at t r ibut es
13 Fr ame at t ribut es
14 Text clip
15 Window updat e mode
16 Cur r ent t ext at t ribut e
17 Window display or der
18 Text for egr ound color
19 Text backgr ound color
20 Text r ever se video for egr ound color
21 Text r ever se video backgr ound color
22 Inver t
Code Field
766
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Not e t hat if you use wSwitch t o swit ch t o a session ot her t han t he one t hat
t his EXEC pr ogr am is r unning on, you will not be able t o see any display
fr om t his EXEC. It will cont inue t o execut e on it s own session.
To det er mine which session you ar e using, use t he wSwitch command wit h
a quest ion mar k ar gument . This causes wSwitch t o set t he r et urn code t o
t he session number in use by t his pr ogr am.
wswitch ?
&type My session is &retcode
wTitle The wTitle command defines t he t it le for a window. Wit h t his command you
may eit her specify t hat a window has no t it le, or specify t he t it le and it s
posit ion and at t r ibut es. A window must have a fr ame in or der t o have a
t it le.
>wtitle 3
The above command r emoves any t it le t hat window t hr ee might have.
>wtitle 2 " Window Two " bottom right
When a t it le is defined wit hout t he t op-bot tom specified, t he default of TOP
is used. When defined wit hout t he align par amet er specified, t he default of
CENTER is used. The att ribut e for t he t it le can be omit t ed, in which case it
uses t he default at t r ibut es of t he fr ame for t he t it le t ext . For a descript ion
of t he at t r ibut e specificat ion, r efer t o Frame & Title Attributes on page 151 of
t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference manual.
The changed t it le and at t r ibut es are not displayed unt il t he window is
select ed or refreshed, unless it is t he cur r ent window.
Restrictions wOpen and wRestore ar e t he only window management commands t hat can
cr eat e or define a new window. All ot her commands except wStat oper at e
on exist ing, open windows.
See also Session and Chapt er 10 Windows, st ar t ing on page 147 of t he THEOS
Corona Version 5 Operating S yst em Reference manual
WinWrit e 767
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WinWrite Command
The WinWrite command invokes t he WindoWriter pr ogr am, which is a gener al purpose, full-
screen t ext edit or .
For a complet e descr ipt ion of t he oper at ion and usage of t his pr ogr am, r efer t o t he
WindoWriter Users Guide.
Operation WindoWriter is loaded and t he fir st file is opened as t he cur r ent t ext file t o
edit .
The file specificat ion may cont ain wild car ds and t her e may be more t han
one file specified on t he command-line. In eit her case, t he fir st file is
opened and, when you close t hat file, t he next file is opened, and so on.
Options FILES Indicat es t hat file is an ASCII st r eam file wit h each r ecor d in
cat ion file. See The EXEC and FILES Opt ions on page 239 of
t he THEOS Corona Ver sion 5 Oper at ing Syst em Refer ence
manual. You may also cr eat e t he file wit h an edit or or applica-
t ion pr ogr am.
ined:
>filelist *.txt:a (exec
>filelist a not *.txt:a (10/1/01 exec append
A SELECTED.EXEC file now exist s t hat list s all of t he t ext files
lowing command edit s t hese files:
WINWRITE file... ( options
options FILES NOSHELL READONLY
NOBACKUP PASSWORD
Command synonym: WW
768 WinWrite
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>ww selected.exec (file
The FileManager command can also creat e and add t o
SELECTED.EXEC, SELECTED.FILES and FOUND.EXEC files.
NOBACKUP This opt ion specifies t hat any and all files saved dur ing t his
session will not have a backup ver sion cr eat ed. This
NOBACKUP opt ion also applies t o aut omat ic file-saves per -
for med by WindoWrit er .
The NOBACKUP opt ion, alt hough it t akes away a safeguar d, is
invaluable when disk space is at a pr emium. Edit ing a large
file or a file t hat r esides on a floppy disket t e can use up large
amount s of disk space, par t icular ly when mor e t han one level
of backup is maint ained.
NOSHELL This opt ion disables t he CSI Shell... it em of t he File menu of
WindoWrit er . This opt ion would normally be used when Win-
doWriter is invoked fr om an applicat ion pr ogr am. By specifying
NOSHELL, t he user is pr event ed from using WindoWriter t o gain
easy access t o syst em commands t hat might cause pr oblems
for t he applicat ion.
PASSWORD pw Use pw t o access t he file using DES pr ivat e key encr yp-
t ion. If t he file is cur r ent ly encr ypt ed, t he pw is used t o decrypt
t he file and open it . When t he file is saved, pw is used t o
encr ypt t he file.
pw should be enclosed wit hin quot at ion mar ks t o ensur e t hat it
is passed t o WinWrite unmodified.
Refer t o t he Decrypt and Encrypt commands for more infor ma-
t ion about DES encr yt ion.
READONLY Do not allow changes t o t he file. This causes WindoWr it er t o
oper at e just as if t he file wer e r ead pr ot ect ed.
Notes The command name WW is a synonym t o t he WinWrite command. It is not a
SYNONYM file. If st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on page 13
and STDSYN on page 110), t his synonym name may not be allowed.
A file specificat ion can omit t he file t ype if t he envir onment var iable FILE-
TYPE is defined.
erence manual.
WinWrit e 769
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
The keys used while in WindoWriter may differ fr om t he keys used in ot her
pr ogr ams. See Funct ion Key Remapping in t he WindoWrit er Users
Guide.
Defaults The default configur at ion of WindoWriter is det er mined by t he configur at ion
file for WindoWriter. Each account may have t heir own configurat ion file.
Refer t o t he WindoWrit er Users Guide for mor e infor mat ion about t his
configurat ion file.
Restrictions file must be a st r eam t ext file.
See also Decrypt, Encrypt, LineEdit, WindoWrit er Users Guide
770 WinWrite
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WordCount 771
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
WordCount Command
This command count s lines, wor ds and charact ers in a st r eam file.
Operation Mode 1The file is analyzed and t he t ot al number of char act er s or byt es,
wor ds and lines is count ed. The t ot als of t hese count s ar e displayed on t he
st andard out put device.
>wordcount /theos/config/devnames.txt
Lines Words Chars File-name
554 14,537 31,694 /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT
Omit t ing file means t hat t he st andar d input device supplies t he t ext of t he
file. This would nor mally be used in a pipe command-line. When t he t ext
comes fr om t he console keyboar d, it is t erminat ed wit h a (Ctrl)+(D).
>wc
The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy gray dog.
Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid
of their party.
(Ctrl)+(D)
3 26 119
1 WORDCOUNT file... ( options
2 WORDCOUNT file... ( FILES opt ions
opt ions BYTES
CHARS
FILES
LINES
WORDS
Command synonym: WCOUNT
772 WordCount
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Mult iple files may be specified on t he command-line. Each one of t he files
is analyzed separ at ely and t he t ot als ar e displayed. The t ot al for all of t he
files is t hen displayed at t he end.
>wordcount first.file second.file third.file
55 1,127 5,635 first.file
120 2,500 10,389 second.file
32 600 1,357 third.file
207 4,227 17,381 Totals 3
Mode 2In t his mode file is an ASCII st r eam file cont aining one file
descr ipt ion per line. Each file descr ipt ion in file is count ed. The file
descr ipt ions may cont ain wild-card specificat ions.
This mode of t he WordCount command is convenient when one or mor e set s
of files ar e r epet it ively being count ed. Merely edit a file cont aining t he file
descr ipt ion, such as:
>list daily.counts
system.history:s
*.log:s
>wc daily.counts (file
13,398 200,690 862,356 system.history
250 2,435 10,389 private.log
3,029 4,398 25,942 user.log
16,677 207,523 898,687 Totals 3
WordCount 773
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Options BYTES Count and display t he t ot al number of byt es in t he file. This is
synonymous wit h t he CHARS opt ion.
CHARS Count and display t he t ot al number of charact ers in t he file.
This is synonymous wit h t he BYTES opt ion.
>wordcount /theos/config/devnames.txt (chars
Chars File-name
31,694 /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT
LINES Count and display t he t ot al number of lines or r ecor ds in t he
file.
>wordcount /theos/config/devnames.txt (lines
Lines File-name
554 /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT
WORDS Count and display t he t ot al number of wor ds in t he file.
>wordcount /theos/config/devnames.txt (words
Words File-name
14,537 /THEOS/CONFIG/DEVNAMES.TXT
Notes The command name WCount is a synonym t o t he WordCount command. It is
not a separ at e pr ogr am but only an ent r y in t he /THEOS/OS/MESSAGE/lan-
guage/SYNONYM file. If st andar d synonyms ar e disabled (see Account on
page 13 and STDSYN on page 110), t his synonym name may not be
allowed.
A file specificat ion can omit t he file t ype if t he envir onment variable
For mor e infor mat ion about t he FILETYPE var iable, see Environment Vari-
ables on page 111 of t he THEOS Corona Version 5 Operating S ystem Ref-
erence manual.
Defaults Unless a specific opt ion is specified, CHARS, LINES and WORDS ar e dis-
played by default .
774 WordCount
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Zip 775
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Zip Command
This command list s, t est s or cr eat es compr essed files in a ZIP ar chive.
Operation Mode 1Add t he list of files t o t he ar chive file zipfile.
Mode 2Per for m t he act ions specified by options. The zipfile and t he list
of filenames may be necessar y, depending upon t he specific opt ions
r equest ed.
Options The following opt ions may be combined int o a single specificat ion. For
inst ance, t o r equest comment s (-c) and move mode (-m) you would specify
-cm.
-c Allows you t o add a one-line comment for each file t hat is
added t o t he ar chive.
>zip -c htms *.htm
adding: beta2.htm (deflated 65%)
Enter comment for beta2.htm:
Comment for file one
Comment for the second file

This is my comment for the beta5.htm file
My last comment, for the beta6.htm file
1 ZIP zipfile filename...
2 ZIP -options zipfile filename...
zipfile Archive file
filename Name of file t o add t o ar chive file
opt ions Opt ions for ar chiving
776 Zip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
>unzip -l htms
Archive: HTMS.zip
-------- ---- ---- ----
34262 08-24-00 15:45 beta2.htm
Comment for file one
23593 10-03-00 00:42 beta3.htm
Comment for the second file
34194 03-07-01 11:27 beta4.htm
21651 08-30-01 11:03 beta5.htm
This is my comment for the beta5.htm file
22811 12-12-01 13:58 beta6.htm
My last comment, for the beta6.htm file
-------- -------
136511 5 files
-d filelist The list of file names in filelist is delet ed fr om t he zipfile.
>zip htms -d beta3.htm beta6.htm
deleting: beta3.htm
deleting: beta6.htm
>unzip -l htms
Archive: HTMS.zip
-------- ---- ---- ----
34262 08-24-00 15:45 beta2.htm
34194 03-07-01 11:27 beta4.htm
21651 08-30-01 11:03 beta5.htm
-------- -------
90107 3 files
-D When t he zipfile is cr eat ed wit h t he -r opt ion (include subdir ec-
t or ies) t his opt ion suppr esses t he addit ion of t he subdir ect or y
names t hemselves. Each file will st ill have it s pat h specified
unless t he -j opt ion is used.
-f Using t he file names t hat ar e alr eady compr essed in zipfile,
t he original sour ce locat ions ar e checked for newer ver sions of
t hose files. Any file t hat is newer is updat ed by r eplacing t he
ver sion t hat is ar chived.
>zip -q example *.txt
>ww some.txt ; update this file
...
>zip -f example
freshening: some.txt (deflated 71%)
Zip 777
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
-F Examine t he ar chive file and cor r ect any er r or s found.
>zip -F example
zip: reading examplemenu.command
zip: reading examplescreen.command
zip: reading testgutenberg.command
zip: reading testit.command
zip: reading testprt.command
-h Display help t ext .
-j Do not include t he pat h when ar chiving a file. Compar e t he fol-
lowing t wo zips:
>zip example /corona-cd/*.htm
adding: corona-cd/beta2.htm (deflated 65%)

>zip -j example2 /corona-cd/*.htm
-l Conver t CR t o CR,LF while ar chiving each file. This opt ion is
useful if you ar e archiving a THEOS t ext file and you know
t hat it will be used on a DOS/Windows syst em.
-ll Conver t CR,LF t o CR while ar chiving each file. This opt ion is
useful if you ar e ar chiving a file t hat or iginat ed on a DOS/WIn-
dows syst em and you know t hat it will be r est or ed ont o
THEOS syst ems.
-m Each file t hat is added t o t he zip ar chive is delet ed fr om t he
sour ce locat ion.
-o Set t he dat e for t he zipfile t o t he dat e of t he newest file added
t o t he zipfile.
-q Quiet mode. This is t he equivalent of t he NOTYPE opt ion used
by ot her THEOS commands.
-r Similar t o t he SUBDIR opt ion of t he CopyFile command, t he
subdir ect or ies of t he cur r ent wor king dir ect or y ar e included
when Zip searches for t he files t o include in t he ar chive.
778 Zip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
-t mmddyyyy Of t he files list ed in filelist , only t hose files wit h a last
change dat e on or aft er t he dat e specified her e are added or
updat ed in t he zipfile.
-T Test int egr it y of t he zip file.
>zip -T mailwavs
test of MAILWAVS.zip OK
-u Updat e t he files alr eady compr essed in t he zipfile. When no
filename list is pr ovided, all of t he cur r ent files in t he zipfile
ar e t est ed t o see if t hey ar e older t han t he files in t he or iginal
dir ect or y.
>zip -q example *.*
>touch some.file
File "/MYDIRECTORY/SOME.FILE:S" touched: 02/20/2002 10:58:49
One file changed
>zip -u example
updating: some.file (deflated 53%)
-v Enables verbose oper at ion. Compar e t he following t wo com-
mands:
>zip example1 test.*
adding: test.direct (deflated 99%)
adding: test.indexed (deflated 100%)
adding: test.keyed (deflated 99%)
adding: test.lisam (deflated 87%)
>zip -v example2 test.*
adding: test.direct (in=1280) (out=12) (deflated 99%)
adding: test.indexed (in=15996) (out=45) (deflated 100%)
adding: test.keyed (in=4069) (out=21) (deflated 99%)
adding: test.lisam.... (in=176560) (out=23125) (deflated 87%)
total bytes=197905, compressed=23203 -> 88% savings
-z Add a mult iple-line comment t o t he zipfile. Aft er t he request ed
files ar e compr essed and added t o zipfile you ar e asked t o ent er
your comment . Alt hough it accept s and saves mult iple lines of
t ext , gener ally, only t he last line will be displayed by t he UnZip
command when you list t he cont ent s.
To t er minat e t he comment , ent er a line wit h a per iod char act er
only.
>zip -z example1 test.*
adding: test.direct (deflated 99%)
adding: test.indexed (deflated 100%)
adding: test.keyed (deflated 99%)
adding: test.lisam (deflated 87%)
enter new zip file comment (end with .):
This is just a test of the comment capability.
Zip 779
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
.
A zip file may have only one comment . That is, when you ar e
adding files t o an exist ing zipfile and you specify a comment ,
t he new comment r eplaces any comment t hat t he zipfile may
have had in it . However , t he comment s t hat may be added on a
file-by-file basis (see t he opt ion -c) ar e not r eplaced unless t he
specific file is r eplaced.
-0 Do not compr ess t he files, just st or e t hem in t he zipfile.
-1 Compr ess t he files int o zipfile fast er at t he expense of t he com-
pr ession fact or. That is, it doesnt make it quit e as small as it
would if t he -1 opt ion were not used.
Notes This pr ogr am, and t he UnZip pr ogr am, ar e implement at ions of t he UnZip
and Zip pr ogr ams fr om Info-ZIP. Info-ZIP provides fr ee, por t able, high-
qualit y ver sions of t he Zip and UnZip compr essor -ar chiver ut ilit ies t hat
ar e compat ible wit h t he DOS-based PKZIP by PKWARE, Inc. This ver sion
is available for most ot her oper at ing syst em plat for ms. Infor mat ion about
Info-ZIP may be found on t he Int er net at ht t p://www.info-zip.org/.
See also UnZip
780 Zip
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
781
A: Contacting THEOS
Suppor t for THEOS Cor ona and ot her THEOS pr oduct s is provided t o
aut hor ized dealers and r eseller s of THEOS pr oduct s. End user s should con-
t act t heir THEOS dealer r egar ding quest ions or pr oblems r elat ing t o inst al-
lat ion or oper at ion of t he THEOS oper at ing syst em and ot her THEOS
pr oduct s.
THEOS Support Ser vices for Reseller s and Dist r ibut or s ar e designed t o pr o-
vide t he t ype of assist ance best suit ed t o your needs. Suppor t opt ions r ange
fr om no-cost / low-cost infor mat ion ser vices on t he Wor ld Wide Web t o
THEOS on-sit e t r aining classes, fee-based dir ect suppor t or an annual sup-
por t cont r act . Depending upon your needs and budget , you may choose any
one of t hese opt ions or combine sever al int o a cust om pr ogr am suit able t o
your r equir ement s.
When cont act ing Technical Suppor t , include or be pr epared t o pr ovide t he
following infor mat ion:
+ Pr oduct name and ver sion number .
+ Pr oduct pat ch level (use t he SHOW VERSION command).
+ Oper at ing syst em ser ial number (displayed on boot up or use t he
SHOW SERIAL command).
+ Oper at ing syst em ver sion number (displayed on boot up or use t he
SHOW VERSION command).
+ Type of har dware being used.
+ What happened and what you wer e doing when t he problem
occur r ed.
+ The exact wor ding of any messages t hat appear ed on t he scr een(s).
+ How you t r ied t o solve t he pr oblem.
+ If you ar e cont act ing suppor t via t he Internet help desk or email,
at t ach t he file creat ed by t he Config command.
Dealer s and THEOS r eseller s may cont act THEOS Technical Suppor t by
mail, fax, t elephone or t he Int ernet . The following is a list of t he help
r esour ces available t o THEOS dealers and developers.
782
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
On-line system helps. Vir t ually all THEOS soft war e has some for m of on-
line help available. Because it is t he easiest , t his should be checked fir st t o
see if it has informat ion or advice about t he sit uat ion or feat ur e t hat you
ar e t r ying t o use.
Manuals. Pr int ed or on-line manuals should be checked befor e cont act ing
THEOS. The cur rent ver sion of a manual may be downloaded fr om t he
int er net in PDF for m by accessing t he THEOS web sit e at :
ht t p://www.t heos-soft war e.com/manual/
If t he informat ion in t he manual does not answer your quest ion t hen
please infor m t echnical suppor t about t hat when you cont act t hem.
Internet help desk. For SDK dealer s and developer s, a knowledge base of
pr eviously r eport ed problems is available on t he Int er net .
ht t p://helpdesk.t heos-soft war e.com
ht t p://www.t heos-soft war e.com/suppor t /
If you cannot find t he answer in t he on-line help syst em or in t he pr oduct
manual t hen check t his help desk t o see if t he pr oblem or quest ion has
been asked by anot her dealer . If you cannot find a pr evious r epor t t hat
addr esses t he pr oblem t hen post your quer y her e. It will be answer ed
pr ompt ly and t he dialog about your pr oblem will become available in t he
fut ur e t o help ot her dealer s and developers should t hey encount er a simi-
lar sit uat ion.
At t achment s can and should be included wit h your post ings when appr o-
pr iat e. Typical at t achment s would be sample code, syst em configur at ion
dumps, etc.
Internet e-mail technical support representative. All THEOS dealer s ar e
assigned t o a specific suppor t r epr esent at ive. Quest ions post ed on t he Inter-
net help desk ar e aut omat ically for war ded t o your assigned r epr esent at ive.
Dir ect e-mail t o your r epresent at ive should only be done when t he pr oblem
involves bet a or pr e-r elease soft war e or when r esponding t o a quer y fr om
your r epr esent at ive.
If you do not know your suppor t r epr esent at ives email address, you can
send your r equest t o:
suppor t @t heos-soft war e.com
783
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s
Internet Dealer Forum and Corona Forum. For SDK dealer s and
developers a gener al dealer -t o-dealer forum and a Cor ona-specific dealer -
t o-dealer for um ar e available on t he THEOS web sit e. These for ums
should be monit or ed by all dealer s and can be used by SDK dealer s t o
infor m ot her dealer s about a sit uat ion t hat you have encount er ed or t o
r epor t and ask ot her dealer s about mar ket ing opport unit ies, applicat ion
design quest ions, har dwar e availabilit y, etc.
ht t p://www.t heos-soft war e.com/for ums/
This is a dealer-t o-dealer for um and THEOS st aff do not gener ally r eply t o
quest ions post ed in t he for um.
Internet Ask THEOS Forum. For SDK dealer s and developer s a for um is
available on t he THEOS web sit e t hat allows you t o post quest ions t o
THEOS engineer ing st aff. This for um should be used when you have ques-
t ions t hat THEOS engineer ing st aff or THEOS management might be able
t o answer about mar ket ing, fut ur e dir ect ions of THEOS soft war e, etc.
ht t p://www.t heos-soft war e.com/for ums/
Telephone technical support representative. Telephone suppor t is avail-
able t o all dealer s but should be used only when t he pr oblem you ar e
encount er ing is of a ver y urgent or sit e-down sit uat ion.
1-925-935-1118 ext 211
Hour s: Monday-Friday,
8:30am - 4:30pm, Pacific Time
Fax technical support representative. Mat er ial may be faxed t o THEOS
support . This should be done when you have paper wor k t o communicat e
about a pr oblem and t he papers ar e not gener at ed by comput er or cannot
be scanned in for t r ansmission as e-mail/helpdesk at t achment s.
1-925-935-1177
Postal service mail, Package delivery services. Alt hough dealer s may
mail quest ions and mat er ials t o THEOS suppor t r epr esent at ives, because
of t he t ime r equir ed for deliver y you should only do so when t her e is a lot
of paper wor k involved in t he quest ion or t her e is product t hat needs t o be
r et ur ned t o THEOS Soft war e Cor por at ion. When sending quest ions or
pr oduct you should also send e-mail t o your suppor t r epr esent at ive inform-
ing t hem t hat t he package is being sent .
THEOS Technical Support
THEOS Soft ware Cor por at ion
1801 Oakland Boulevard, Suit e 315
Walnut Cr eek, CA 94596-7000
784
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

Manual de Theos Corona

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Manual de Theos Corona

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

THEOS Corona

First Edition: September, 2002

are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi